I' 


A  :•,)' 


"'t   ^•- •-;  ;f. -.i  f--:    1^  I 


f    ?:■;■: 


IN  MEMOEIAM 
J.  Henry     Senger 


1beatb*0  flDot)ern  Xanguaoe  Seriee 


A  GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


FOR  SCHOOLS  AND   COLLEGES 


W.  Hf'FRASER  and  W.  H.  VAN  DER  SMISSEN 
// 

PROFESSORS   IN  THE   UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 


o>Ko 


BOSTON,  U.S.A. 

D.    C.   HEATH   &   CO.,  PUBLISHERS 
1910 


IN  MEMORIAM 


"^KOA.    X     W^VN^-A     Si*^Y 


Copyright,  1909, 
By  D.  C.  Heath  &  Co. 


PREFACE 

This  book  is  intended  to  serve  as  a  guide  to  the  use  of  the 
spoken  and  written  German  of  the  present  day,  and  makes 
no  claim  to  be  a  compendium  of  all  forms  and  usages  in 
either  speech  or  literature. 

The  grammatical  material  has  been  arranged  with  a  view 
to  its  convenient  use  in  the  exercises,  and  with  the  object  of 
facilitating  the  rapid  acquisition  of  a  reading  knowledge  of 
the  language.  The  elementary  statements  of  grammatical 
theory  in  the  earlier  part  of  the  book  have  been  supplemented 
and  summarized  in  the  more  advanced  lessons,  thus  enabling 
•  the  learner  to  review  and  amplify  the  knowledge  previously 
acquired  in  detail.  Thus,  for  instance,  in  the  treatment  of 
the  verb,  each  mood  and  tense  of  both  weak  and  strong  verbs 
is  taken  up  successively,  and  afterwards  the  whole  theory  of 
conjugation  is  stated  in  methodical  form. 

The  exercises  have  been  made  continuous,  wherever  it  was 
found  practicable  to  do  so,  and  are  constructed  on  the  same 
general  plan  as  those  in  the  elementary  part  of  Fraser  and 
Squair's  French  Grammar.  It  is  hoped  that  this  form  of 
exercise  will  not  only  render  the  learner's  task  less  dreary 
than  exercises  made  up  of  detached  sentences,  but  will  also 
encourage  him  to  acquire  phrases  rather  than  words,  which 
so  often  change  their  signification  with  the  context. 

In  the  use  of  the  exercises  teachers  will  naturally  be  guided 
by  their  own  judgment  and  the  character  of  their  classes,  but, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  authors,  it  will  be  found  advantageous 
first  of  all  to  practise  very  thoroughly  the  German  and  oral 
portions,  and  afterwards  pass  on  to  the  translation  of  the 
English  and  to  elementary  composition.     The  oral  exercises 

— 92B697 


iv  PREFACE 

are  not  intended  to  be  exhaustive,  but  rather  suggestive  for 
further  drill  along  the  same  line,  as  the  authors  attach  the 
very  greatest  importance  to  this  method  of  teaching. 

The  reading  extracts  are  not  intended  to  replace  a  Reader, 
but  to  add  variety,  with  perhaps  a  spice  of  entertainment,  to 
the  acquisition  and  practice  of  grammar.  The  extracts  in 
verse  are  designed  primarily  for  memorizing ;  the  prose  ex- 
tracts may  be  used  as  exercises  in  translation,  and  may  serve 
also  for  practice  in  conversation  and  composition. 

The  Appendix  contains  reference  lists  and  paradigms, 
which  it  is  hoped  will  prove  useful,  particularly  B,  4  and  5, 
which  are  intended  as  a  guide  to  the  correct  use  of  preposi- 
tions. 

The  principal  authorities  consulted  in  the  preparation  of 
the  work  were ;  on  orthography,  the  decisions  of  the  Ortho- 
graphic Conference  of  Berlin,  1901,  and  Duden's  Ortho- 
graphisches  Worterverzeichnis ;  on  grammatical  points,  Blatz' 
Grammar  and  Muret-Sanders^  larger  dictionary ;  on  pronun- 
ciation, the  various  manuals  of  Professor  Victor  of  Marburg, 
whose  German  Pronunciation  (3d  ed.,  Reisland :  Leipzig, 
1903)  and  Deutsches  Lesebuch  in  Lautschrift  (I.  und  II.  Teil, 
Teubner :  Leipzig ;  or  David  Nutt :  London)  are  especially 
commended  to  the  attention  of  teachers. 

In  conclusion,  the  authors  desire  to  acknowledge  their 
indebtedness  to  Mr.  W.  C.  Ferguson,  Riverdale  Collegiate 
Institute,  Toronto,  for  valuable  advice  regarding  the  plan 
of  the  work  and  on  many  points  of  detail ;  to  Miss  Julia  S. 
Hillock,  Parkdale  Collegiate  Institute,  Toronto,  for  testing  a 
considerable  proportion  of  the  lessons  and  exercises  in  the 
classroom  ;  and  to  Mr.  Heinrich  von  Nettelbladt,  of  the 
teaching  staff  of  the  High  Schools,  Buffalo,  for  valuable  ser- 
vices in  revising  the  manuscript  and  thus  affording  the  au- 
thors the  benefit  of  the  judgment  of  a  native  German  scholar 
and  teacher. 

August,  1909. 


CONTENTS 

PAGB 

Introduction  : 

Alphabet          .         .         •         • ix 

Syllabication .  x 

Stress •         •  xi 

Quantity xi 

Pronunciation. xii 

Use  of  Capitals ;   Punctuation .  xxii 

German  Script          . xxiii 

Map  of  Germany      .........  xxvi 

LESSON 

I.    Gender  and  Agreement.  —  Nominative  of  Personal  Pronouns  i 

II.     Nominative  of  tin,  fcitt,  possessives,  tt)el(i^er         ...  3 

III.  Present  Indicative  of  f Cttt.  —  Pronouns  of  Address.  —  Use  of 

h(l§*  —  Place  of  Predicate  Adjective 6 

IV.  Present  Indicative  of  l^aliett.  —  Accusative  Forms.  —  Repeti- 

tion. —  Comparative  Degree 9 

V.     Present  Indicative  and  Imperative  of  maii^eit.  —  Adjective 

as  Adverb 12 

VI.     Review 14 

VII.     Definite  Article.  —  Use  of  Cases.  —  Contraction.  —  Case  Forms  16 
VIII.     Present  Indicative  of  tUtt.  —  Infinitive  after  Verbs.  —  Accu- 
sative and  Dative  Pronouns .20 

IX.     ^eitt  Model.  —  Possessive  Adjectives   .         .         .         .         -23 
X.     Imperfect   Indicative.  —  Adverbial  Accusative.  —  Place   of 

Time  Phrase  and  of  Verb 26 

XI.     ^tcf  Ct  Model.  —  Some  Possessive  Pronouns ....  30 

XII.     Review 33 

XIII.  Strong  Declension  of  Nouns :   ^ttttb^   BotjUf  $attb  Models. 

—  Essential  Parts.  —  Compound  Nouns.  —  Rule  of  Gender  35 

XIV.  Perfect  and  Pluperfect.  —  Word  Order  in  Principal  Sentences. 

—  Cardinal  Numerals.  —  Multiplicative  Adverbs        .         .  39 
XV.     Strong    Declension     (continued) :     ^orf^     9Jlalcr,    S^atCt 

Models.—  !antt,  mn^f  etc 43 

XVI.     Future  and  Future  Perfect.  —  Word  Order.  —  Prefixes  .        .  4? 

V 


VI 


CONTENTS 


LESSON  PAGE 

XVII.     Weak  and  Mixed  Declensions.  —  Rules  of  Gender        .  5 1 

XVIII.     Declension  of  Adjectives 55 

XIX.     Declension  of  Nouns ;  Summary 61 

XX.     (Scitt :    Compound   Tenses  ;    Use  as  Auxiliary.  —  tlliU, 

tUOUtC.  —  Infinitive  of  Purpose 64 

XXI.     Declension  of  Adjectives  (concluded):   Special  Cases; 

Adjectives  as  Nouns 69 

XXII.     Word  Order :   Objects,  etc. ;  Dependent  Sentences.  — 

tticnit,  a(i^,  mautt 73 

XXIII.  The  Relatives  bcr  and  tticldjcr.  —  Relative  Clauses        .  77 

XXIV.  Passive  :  Simple  Tenses. —  Prepositions  with  Accusative  81 
XXV.     Time  of  Day.  —  Genitive  of  Time 85 

XXVI.     The  Subjunctive.  —  Indirect  Statements  and  Questions  89 

XXVII.     Prepositions  with  Dative 95 

XXVIII.     The  Conditional.  —  Conditional  Sentences     .         .         .  100 

XXIX.     Use  of  Articles 104 

XXX.     Quantity.  —  Distributive  Article.  —  ettt,  betbe        .         .  108 

XXXI.     The  Imperative,  Infinitive,  and  Participles.  —  foil .         .112 

XXXII.     Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative  .         .         .         •  117 

XXXIII.  Verb    Stems.  —  Principal    Parts.  —  Special    Forms   in 

Weak  Verbs.  —  Irregular  Weak  Verbs         .         .         .123 

XXXIV.  Personal  Pronouns.  —  Address.  —  Impersonal  Verbs.  — 

Uses  of  C)^ 128 

XXXV.    The  Strong  Conjugation.  —  Classes  of  Strong  Verbs       .  133 
XXXVI.     Reflexive  Pronouns  and  Verbs.  —  Reciprocal  and  Em- 
phatic Pronouns 142 

XXXVII.     Mixed  Conjugation.  —  Modal  Auxiliaries.  —  *  shall '  and 

*will' 146 

XXXVIII.     Possessive  Pronouns.  —  Possessive  Dative      .         .         •  151 
XXXIX.     Comparison  of  Adjectives  and  Adverbs  .         .         .         '155 
XL.     Modal  Auxiliaries   (concluded) :    Word  Order ;    Idio- 
matic Uses          .         .         .         .         .         .         .         .  160 

XLI.     Place  Names.  —  Nouns  and  Adjectives  of  Nationality    .  167 

XLII.     Ordinal  Numerals. — Dates.  —  House  Number,  etc.        .  170 

XLIII.     Person  Names.  —  Ordinals  with  Person  Names      .         •  1 74 

XLIV.     Demonstratives 177 

XLV.     Interrogatives        .         . 182 

XLVI.     Fractions.  —  Mixed  Numbers 186 

XLVII.     Relative  Pronouns 189 

XLVIII.     Indefinite  Pronouns i93 

XLIX.     The  Passive  Voice I97 


CONTENTS  vii 

LESSON  PAGE 

L.     Indefinite  Pronominal  Adjectives 202 

LI.     Idiomatic  Uses  of  Certain  Adverbs       .....  206 

LII.     Verb  Prefixes 210 

LIII.     Coordinative  and  Adverbial  Conjunctions    .         .         .         .216 

LIV.     Subordinative  and  Correlative  Conjunctions         .         .         .  219 

LV.     Agreement  and  Apposition 224 

LVI.     Use  of  Nominative  and  Accusative 227 

LVII.     Use  of  Genitive  and  Dative 230 

LVIII.     Use  of  Indicative  Tenses.  —  Use  of  Subjunctive  and  Im- 
perative        234 

LIX.     The  Infinitive 238 

LX.    The  Infinitive  (concluded) 241 

LXI.    The  Participles 245 

APPENDIX 

A.  Noun  Declension :  Reference  Lists,  1-9      .        .        •        .        •  249 

B.  Prepositions: 

1.  Prepositions  with  Genitive  .         .         .         .         .         .        .251 

2.  "  "    Dative  (additional  list)    .  •       .         .         .252 

3.  "                "    Varying  Case 252 

4.  Equivalents  of  English  Prepositions 252 

5.  Prepositions  after  Verbs,  etc 255 

C.  Verb  Paradigms : 

1.  Auxiliaries  of  Tense     .         ,        .         .         .        •        •        .  257 

2.  "           "  Mood 261 

3.  "Weak  Conjugation       ........  262 

4.  Strong          "                263 

5.  Conjugation  v^ith  fctit .  264 

6.  Passive  Voice 265 

D.  Alphabetical  List  of  Strong  and  Irregular  Verbs          .         .         .  266 

Vocabulary:  German- English 273 

"              English-German 3" 

Index 339 


INTRODUCTION 


The  German  Alphabet. 


German 

Roman 

German 

German 

Roman 

German 

form. 

form. 

name. 

form. 

form. 

name. 

%a 

A,  a 

ak 

«,tt 

N,  n 

emt 

a?,  6 

B.b 

bay 

D,o 

0,0 

oh 

%t 

C,  c 

tsay 

%,^ 

P.P 

pay 

%t, 

D,d 

day 

a,  q 

Q.q 

koo 

e,  e 

E,e 

eh 

9i,r 

R.r 

err 

3f,f 

F,f 

eff 

®,f,« 

S,  s 

ess 

®rfl 

G,g 

gay 

Z,i 

T,t 

tay 

^rD 

H,  h 

hah 

U,tt 

U,u 

00 

%i 

I,i 

ee 

»,  tt 

V,v 

fow 

%L 

J.J 

yot 

SB,  to 

W,  w 

vay 

S,l- 

K,  k 

kah 

X,J 

X,  X 

iks 

2,1 

L,l 

ell 

%^ 

Y,y 

ipsilon 

m,m 

M,  m 

emm 

3f5 

Z,  z 

tset 

Remarks  on  the  Alphabet. 

1.  The  approximate  pronunciation  of  the  German  names 
of  the  letters  is  given  above  in  English  characters ;  these  names 
should  be  learned,  and  used  in  spelling  words. 

2.  Three  of  the  vowels  may  be  modified  by  the  sign  "  (called 
'umlaut')  :  21  a,  D  0,  U  ii  ;  as  capitals,  in  the  older  spelling, 
these  are  :  2le,  Oe,  Ue* 

3.  Diphthongs  are  :  9lt  at,  2lu  au,  (St  ei,  (Su  eu,  tu  M,  and 
the  rarer  forms  a^,  el),  ui 

ix 


X  INTRODUCTION 

4.  The  following  change  their  form  slightly  when  printed  as 
one  character :  cij  =  (i);  cf=(f  ;  ff,  1^  =  ^;  t5=^. 

5.  The  character  ^  always  replaces  ff  when  final :  }^U%  ^^% 
gluft;  within  a  word,  it  stands  after  long  vowels,  after  diph- 
thongs, and  before  another  consonant  (elsewhere  ff)  :  ^Ufte, 
l^et^en,  ^aftltc^,  muftte;  duf  ^Wffe,  miiffen,  2c,;  hence  all 
vowels  are  to  be  pronounced  short  before  ff^ 

6.  The  form  ^  occurs  only  as  final  in  words  or  stems ;  else- 
where f :  §au^,  ba^,  ^clu^tic^  ;  §dufer,  lefen,  t)aft, 

7.  Since  the  sounds  of  German  depend  to  a  considerable 
extent  upon  syllabication,  stress,  and  quantity,  these  subjects 
will  be  treated  in  the  following  paragraphs,  before  rules  are 
given  for  the  pronunciation  of  the  alphabet. 

Syllabication. 

1.  In  German  the  syllable  ends  in  a  vowel  wherever  possi- 
ble, which  is  frequently  not  the  case  in  English :  Sftt*It*tdr, 
^  mil-i-ta-ry ' ;  the  neglect  of  this  principle  is  a  serious  defect  in 
pronunciation. 

2.  Hence  single  consonants  within  a  word,  and  also  such 
consonant  groups  as  can  be  pronounced  undivided,  belong  to 
the  following  syllable,  both  in  speaking  and  writing :  !^a'6e, 
ge-firau^rfien,  ge-fc^enft  ;  other  consonant  groups  are  divided  : 

3.  In  writing,  however,  doubled  consonants  are  divided  at 
the  end  of  a  line  :  mitf=fen  ;  so  also  bt,  )jf,  ttg,  rf,  the  latter 
becoming  M :  ©tab^te,  Sm^j^fang,  fin-gen,  ©tUMe  (for 
@titcfe) ;  compounds  are  divided  according  to  their  parts : 
§uf*eifen,  ^in==ab,  ©onner^^tag. 

4.  '  Open '  syllables  are  those  ending  in  a  vowel  or  f) :  ba, 
Io==t)en,  bran^d^e,  be-fte^-en. 

5.  'Closed'  syllables  are  those  ending  in  a  consonant,  or 
coming  before  a  doubled  consonant :  tDar-ten,  Stn-te,  fait, 
ia^,  ^at'ten. 

Note.  — This  distinction  is  important  for  the  rules  of  quantity. 


INTRODUCTION  xi 

Stress. 
The  relative  force  with  which  a  syllable  in  a  group  is  uttered 
As  called  '  stress  '  (less  properly  *  accent ')  :  i^reu'nbf C^aft, 
*  frie'ndship  ' ;  meitl  3Sa'ter  i[t  f(f)On  a'lt.  Several  degrees  of 
force  may  be  distinguished  in  longer  words  and  in  phrases,  but 
for  practical  purposes  it  is  sufficient  to  consider  only  the  sylla- 
ble of  strongest  or  chief  stress.  In  words  of  two  or  more 
syllables  the  chief  stress  is  as  follows  :  — 

1.  In  simple  German  words,  on  the  stem  :  greu'ttbfd^aft, 
t5reu'nbli(^fett,  te'fen,  gele'fen,  ret'nlic^. 

2.  In  compounds,  usually  on  the  part  most  distinctive  for 
the  meaning :  3lu'genblt(f ,  Tne'rfrt)iirbig,  u'nangene^tn. 

3.  But  in  compounded  particles,  usually  on  the  second  com- 
ponent :  ba^e'r,  ^erbet',  obglei'c^, 

4.  In  loan-words,  usually  on  the  syllable  stressed  in  the 
language  from  which  the  word  has  been  taken :  ©tube 'tit, 
^f)i)fi%  ^I)t(ofo'p^,  elega'nt,  matxo%  ®oIba't. 

5.  Always  on  the  suffixes  -ei,  -ieren,  -ur  (of  foreign  origin)  : 
Slrjenet',  ftubie'ren,  Olafu'r. 

6.  Never  on  the  prefixes  be-,  tmp-,  tut-,  er-,  gc-,  t)er-,  jer-^ 

7.  No  special  rules  are  required  for  German  sentence-stress 
(emphasis),  as  it  corresponds  closely  to  that  of  English. 

Quantity. 

1.  Vowels  in  German  may  be  distinguished  as  Mong,*  'half 
long,'  and  'short':  tobetl  (long),  2KiIitar  (half  long),  fait 
(short). 

2.  Long  vowels  become  half  long,  or  even  short,  when  un- 
stressed, usually  without  change  in  the  quality  of  the  sound  : 
bic'fer  (long),  bicfer  SJKa'ttn  (half  long). 

Note.  —  In  practice  it  is  sufficient  to  distinguish  long  and  short  (the 
latter  including  half  long  and  short). 

3.  Vowels  are  regularly  long  :  — 

Co)  In  open  stressed  syllables ;  and  a  long  stem  vowel 
usually  retains  its  length  in  inflection  :  ba,  tobeu ;  lobtc* 


xii  INTRODUCTION 

{b)  When  doubled,  or  followed  by  silent  1^  or  e  (the  latter 
only  after  i) :  ©taat,  8ct|rer,  @o^n,  ^Mi),  bicfer. 

{c)  As  diphthongs :  glauben,  I)ei§en,  Scute, 

(d)  In  final  stressed  syllable  ending  in  a  single  consonant* 
(including  monosyllables  capable  of  inflection,  or  ending  in  r)  : 
®ebot,  genug,  bcm,  9tat,  hi^i,  gut,  voax,  iDtr ;  so  also  vowel 
before  ^  persisting  in  inflection :  [a^  (fa^etl),  gu^  (Su^e), 

4.  Vowels  are  regularly  short :  — 

{a)  In  unstressed  syllables  :  l^abCTl,  ge^abt,  u'narttg, 
{p)  In  closed  syllables  (including  monosyllables  ending  in 
more  than  one  consonant)  :   (Sommer,  SBtnter,  alt,  feft ;  so 
also  before  -^  not  persisting  in  inflection  :  glu^  (gliiffe), 

(c)  In  uninflected  monosyllables  ending  in  a  single  con- 
sonant (not  -r) :  mit,  ob,  in,  tm,  tion,  tjom ;  but  fur,  ^cr  (long). 

5.  Before  ^,  some  are  long,  some  short :  @|)ra^e  (long), 
la^en  (short). 

General  Remarks  on  Pronunciation. 

Every  language  has  certain  characteristics  peculiar  to  the 
utterance  of  its  sounds,  which  taken  together  may  be  called  its 
'basis  of  articulation/  The  principal  distinctions  between 
German  and  English,  in  this  respect,  are  the  following  :  — 

1.  The  action  of  the  organs  of  speech,  in  general,  is  more 
energetic  and  precise  in  German  than  in  English.  The  pro- 
nunciation of  English  strikes  the  German  ear  as  slovenly.  The 
energy  and  precision  referred  to  are  especially  obvious  in 
vowels  requiring  lip  rounding  (as  observed,  for  example,  in 
'  who,' '  no,' '  saw,'  etc.).  Moreover,  great  care  should  be  taken 
not  to  obscure  German  vowels  in  unstressed  syllables,  which  is 
the  rule  in  Enghsh. 

2.  The  tongue,  both  for  vowels  and  consonants,  is  generally 
either  further  advanced  or  retracted  than  in  the  articulation  of 
corresponding  English  sounds. 


INTRODUCTION  xiii 

3.  English  long  vowels  (as  a  in  ^  fate/  00  in  '  poor ')  are  usu- 
ally diphthongal,  particularly  before  liquids,  whereas  German 
long  vowels  are  uniform  in  quality  throughout. 

4.  The  utterance  of  every  German  initial  vowel,  unless 
wholly  unstressed,  begins  with  the  *  glottal  stop,'  which  consists 
in  suddenly  closing  the  glottis  and  forcing  it  open  by  an  explo- 
sion of  breath,  as  in  sHght  coughing :  au^,  ^tuau^,  cff^tl,  oijUt, 
itber,  UberaQ. 

Note.  —  Corresponding  English  vowels  begin  with  gradual  closure  of 
the  glottis,  and  strike  the  German  ear  as  indistinct,  since  the  German 
sound  is  fully  resonant  throughout.  The  learner  may  be  enabled  to  realize 
the  nature  of  this  sound  by'  the  experiment  of  placing  the  hands  to  the 
sides  and  exerting  a  sudden,  forcible  pressure,  the  mouth  being  open  as  if 
to  form  a  vowel.  When  this  is  done,  the  glottis  (i.e.  the  space  between 
the  vocal  chords)  closes  automatically,  and  is  at  once  forced  open. 

5.  It  must  never  be  forgotten  that  the  sounds  of  any  two 
languages  hardly  ever  correspond  exactly,  and  hence  that  com- 
parisons between  German  and  English  are  only  approximate. 
In  describing  the  sounds  below,  brief  cautions  have  been  added 
in  parenthesis,  in  order  to  obviate  this  difficulty  in  part. 

Pronunciation  of  the  Alphabet. 

Vowels. 

1.  Vowels  are  either  'front'  or  'back,'  according  to  their 
place  of  articulation  in  the  mouth,  and  are  so  grouped 
below. 

2.  They  are  pronounced  long  or  short  according  to  the  rules 
given  above  (pp.  xi-xii),  the  commonest  exceptions  only  being 
noted. 

3.  All  vowels  must  be  distinctly  uttered. 

4.  Do  not  drawl  or  diphthongize  the  long  vowels. 

5.  Doubled  vowels  and  those  followed  by  c  or  fj^  as  a  sign 
of  length,  are  omitted  from  the  conspectus,  but  included  in 
the  examples. 


xiv  INTRODUCTION 

I.  Front  Vowels. 

X  I.  When  long,  like  i  in  'marine'  (slightly  closer;  avoid 
diphthong,  especially  before  \  and  r ;  avoid  i  as  in  '  bit,' 
when  unstressed) :  Wvdt,  TUtr,  iDtr ;  biefer,  8ieb, 
ftubieren,  il^n,  fttel^Ift- 

Exception. —  (Short,  see    2    below):    3l|)rt'I,    bieEei'c^t,    iBiertel, 
t)ierge^n,  tJtcrgig. 

2.  When  short,  like  i  in  '  bit '  (avoid  i  as  in '  mirth '  before  r)  : 

Sinb,  fingen,  iDtrb,  btft,  gebtffen,  getitten;  mit,  im, 

3.  Like  y  in  'yes,'  when  unstressed  before  c  in  loan-words : 

gami'He,  ^atie'nt. 

tt    I.  When  long,  has  no  English  counterpart;   same  tongue 

position  as  for  t,  i,  with  tense  lip  rounding:  ^liite, 
miibe,  griin,  fit^,  git^e  ;  SJittlie,  fritter. 

2.  When  short  has  no  English  counterpart;  same  tongue 

position  as  for  i,  2,  with  sHght  lip  rounding :  l^ubfd^, 
©litcf,  fiinf,  fiiti^ten,  Sitfte,  3WuHer,  muffen* 

\)        Like  i  or  it  (see  above)  :  3l[^t  (long),  3)i^rte  (short). 

e  I.  When  long,  like  a  in  'stated'  (avoid  diphthong,  espe- 
cially before  I  and  X)  :  Icfeti,  tcben,  rcben,  fd^tDcr, 
bcm,  ben  (but  see  4  below);  4Bcet,  @(^nee,  ftel^en, 
fclilen,  Iciiren. 

Exception.  —  (Short,  see  2  below)  :  bC8,  C§,  tt)Cg. 

2.  When  short,  like  e  in  'let'  (avoid  e  as  in  'her,'  before r): 

f(^en!en,  fcnben,  geftern,  beffer,  Setten,  §crr,  gerti^ 
Exception. — (Long,  see  i,  above):  S)rcgben,  Srbe,  crft,  ^fcrb, 

3.  In   unstressed   final  syllables  and  in  be-,  ge-,  like  a  in 

'soda'  (tongue  slightly  advanced):  l^abe,  @abe,  lobetl, 
lobet,  ^ruber,  biefer,  btefem,  SSogel ;  befteCen,  gelobt. 

4.  The  e  of  ber,  bem,  ben,  be^,  e^,  when  unstressed,  varies 

between  3  and   2,  above,  according  as  the  stress  is 
more  or  less  completely  removed :  ber  faltc  SBi'nter* 


INTRODUCTION  XV 

a  1.  When  long,  like  a  in  'care'  (avoid  diphthong,  especially 
before  I  and  r) :  fSett,  iDarett,  @rf)Iac;e  ;  §f|re,  ma^eti. 

2.  When  short,  identical  with  c  short  (c,  2,  above)  :  §anbe, 
mdtx,  Spfel,  ptte,  tangft. 

Exception.  —  (Long)  :  nod^ft,  ®tabte. 

9  I.  When  long,  has  no  English  counterpart;  same  tongue 
position  as  for  e,  i,  with  tense  lip  rounding  and  pro- 
trusion :  pren,  Mfe,.  SiJte,  f^8n,  grB^er ;  <S^ne. 

2.  When  short,  has  no  English  counterpart ;  same  tongue 
position  as  for  c,  2,  with  slight  lip  rounding:  S3:pfe, 
©ISdlein,  fantien,  ©iJtter, 

Exception.  —  (Long) :  oftlirf),  Dfterretd^. 

2.   Back  Vowels. 

a  Like  a  in  '  ah  !  *  '  father '  (tongue  flat  and  mouth  well  open ; 
lips  neither  rounded  nor  retracted ;  avoid  a  as  in  '  all ' 
and  a  as  in  '  at '). 

1.  Long:  fagen,  ba,  9lnna,  ^a|3a',  bat,  tr)ar,  fa^;  ©taat, 

naf|,  ^cii)U ;  ©prad^e,  ftad). 
Exception.— (Short) :  bag,  tt)ag. 

2.  Short:  tDattett,  l^acfen,  la^en,  nietnanb,  4Batt,  l^atte ; 

at^,  ab,  am. 

Exception.—  (Long) :  Strjt,  33art,  9}lagb,  ^a^jft. 

0  I.  When  long,  like  0  in  '  omen '  (tense  lip  rounding  and  pro- 
trusion ;  avoid  diphthong,  especially  before  I  and  t): 
loben,  9iofe,  gro^,  rot,  l^oc^ ;  :93oot,  ^oI|I,  DI|r. 
2.  When  short,  like  0  in  '  not '  (always  definitely  rounded ; 
never  lengthened,  even  before  r)  :  flopfett,  ®Ott,  XOf>h 
len,  Sonne,  morgen,  SBort ;  ob,  Don- 

Exception.— (Long) :  ?otfe,  Dbft,  Often,  Dftcrti. 

Note.  —  The  Eng.  short  0  has  often  very  feeble  rounding,  especially 
in  American  Eng.,  approaching  the  sound  of  a  in  *  hat.' 


xvi  INTRODUCTION 

U  I.  When  long,  like  oo  in  '  too '  (tense  lip  rounding  and  pro- 
trusion ;  avoid  diphthong,  especially  before  I  and  r) : 
bu,  rufen,  -©lutne,  gug,  guten,  nut ;  ^u^,  ®tu^I. 
2.  When  short,  like  u  in  *  put '  (definitely  rounded ;  never 
lengthened,  even  before  r) :  uub,  tt)Urbe,  TlutttX, 
gtu^  ;  urn,  sum,  gur. 

Diphthongs. 
at    1    Like  i  in  '  mile  *  (first  element  more  deliberately  uttered ; 
at)   )       equals  German  a,  2  +  t/2)  :  ^aifer,  SSatfZXU, 

an     Like  ou  in  '  house  '  (first  element  more  deliberately  uttered ; 
equals  German  a,  2  +  u,  2) :  grau,  SSauvx,  ^auer. 

Su     Like  oi  in  '  boil '  (first  element  more  deliberately  uttered ; 
equals  German  0,  2  +t,  2)  :  9?auber,  Wdn^t,  SSaumt. 

Note. — The  second  element  is  sometimes  slightly  rounded. 

Ct    1    The  same  sound  as  at,  above ;  mettt,  SJicile,  fcttter,  flct== 
e^  J      net,  einft,  SKc^er, 

eu     The  same  sound  as  an,  above :  tteu,  ^CUte,  gcuer,  CUet, 

feufjen. 

nx     Equals  German  u,  2  + 1,  2  :  l^ui !  :pfut ! 

Consonants. 

1.  It  is  very  important  to  remember  that  all  final  consonants 
are  short  in  German,  although  not  always  so  in  English ;  com- 
pare matt  and  *man,'  fang  and  'sang.' 

2.  Double  consonants  have  only  a  single  sound,  as  also  in 
English:  gefattett,  *  fallen';  but  when  two  consonants  come 
together  through  compounding  the  sound  is  lengthened  in 
careful  diction,  but  not  fully  doubled:  mittetteti;  similarly 
also  contiguous  final  and  initial  consonant,  when  necessary  for 
distinctness  :  ttot  tutl* 

3.  When  alternative  pronunciations  are  given  below  the 
preferable  one  is  put  first. 


INTRODUCTION  xvii 

Alphabetical  List  of  Consonants, 
(    T.  When  initial  in  word  or  syllable,  or  doubled,  like  b  in 
'ball' :  balb,  (iefien,  t)er6(eiben,  ©bbe. 
2.  When  final,  in  word  or  syllable,  likep  in 'tap' :  ab,  SBetb, 
lieb,  abgef)en,  ®(^reibtifc^,  Xxt^^it,  lieblit^,  tiebfter. 
C     I.  Before  front  vowel,  like  ts  in  'sets' :  6tcero,  Gcifar, 
2.  Before  back  vowel,  like  c  in  'call' :  ©attto,  Sa[fet. 
Note.  —  C  alone  is  now  found  only  in  loan-words  and  proper  nouns. 

(i^  I.  After  back  vowel,  has  no  English  counterpart;  compare 
Scotch  ch  in  'loch'  (formed  by  slight  contact  of  the 
back  of  the  tongue  with  the  soft  palate ;  voiceless) : 
S3ad^,  marfien,  nod^,  fuc^en,  raudjeti. 

Note.  —  *  Voiceless '  means  without  vibration  of  the  vocal  chords;  com- 
pare *fine'  (voiceless)  with  *vine*  (voiced). 

2.  After  front  vowel,  after  consonant,  and  in  -d^etl,  Hke  h 
^  in  'hue'  very  forcibly  pronounced  (avoid  k  as  in  'kill' 

and  sh  as  in  '  ship ' ;  it  is  best  obtained  by  unvoicing  the 
y  in  yes) :  trf|,  fc^(e(J|t,  iDetrff,  ^Urfjer,  folc^e^,  2}?abc^en; 
so  also  in  ©^ettlie',  before  a  front  vowel. 

3.  Before  i^  in  a  stem  syllable,  like  f  (which  see) :   8a^^, 

D(^fen,  iDa^fen;  also  some  loan-words,  g^rift,  6^or,  2C» 

d         Like  I  (which  see)  :  birf,  f^idett. 

b  I.  When  initial  in  a  word  or  syllable,  or  doubled,  like  d  in 
'day'  (tongue  advanced  to  the  gums)  :  bu,  bret,  §eber, 
§dnbe,  tDlirbe,  abbieren. 
2.  When  final  in  a  word  or  syllable,  like  t  in  'take'  (tongue 
advanced  to  the  gums)  :  8teb,  @anb,  Uttb,  §dnbc^en, 
enbltc^,  ©efunb^eit. 

f         Like  f  in  'fall' :  faufeti,  grau,  fiittf,  ^offen, 

g  I.  When  initial  in  a  word  or  stressed  syllable,  or  doubled, 
like  g  in  'began,'  'gain,'  'begin':  gab,  Slufflabe, 
ge^en,  gegeben,  ©ttter,  grUn,  (Sgge. 


xviii  INTRODUCTION 

Note.  —  The  place  of  contact  between  tongue  and  palate  varies  along 
with  the  vowel  or  consonant  of  the  syllable,  as  in  English;  similarly  also 
for  the  sounds  of  f,  ng,  ttf* 

2.  After  a  back  vowel  within  a  word  (when  followed  by  a 

vowel),  either  like  g,  i,  or  voiced  d^,  i  :    2^age,  [agen, 
gogen,  ^uge. 

Note.  —  This  second  sound  is  foreign  to  English;  it  may  be  formed  by 
making  the  sound  usually  heard  in  gargling,  without,  however,  drawing 
the  tongue  far  enough  back  to  cause  the  uvula  to  trill. 

3.  After  a  back  vowel  when  final  or  before  a  consonant, 

like  (t),  I :  Sag,  lag,  gog,  3ug,  fagte,  mogte. 

4.  After  a  front  vowel  or  a  consonant  within  a  word  (and 

followed  by  a  vowel),  either  like  g,  i,  or  j  (which  see)  : 
legen,  ©erge,  burger,  ©d^Iiige,  SBiege,  ^dnige. 

Note.  —  Like  j  almost  universally  in  the  combination  ig. 

5.  After  a  front  vowel,  (a)  when  final,  (^)  final  after  a  conso- 

nant, (c)  before  a  consonant,  like  ^^  2  :  2^etg,  ®teg, 
®ontg;  ©erg,  3:alg;  legte,  Itegt. 

6.  Like  z  in  *  azure'  (tongue  advanced,  lips  protruded)  in 

many  French  loan-words  :  (S'ta'-ge,  Sou-ra'-ge. 

1^    I.  Like  h  in  'have'  (strongly  and  briefly  uttered)  :  l^abetl, 
ge^abt,  l^ei^en,  geliolfen,  21'i^orn- 
2.  It  is  silent  before  the  vowel  of  an  ending  and  as  a  sign 
of  length :  ge^ett,  ge[e](|eri  ;  ^ul^,  dttif,  tvcff ;  see  also 

J     I.  Regularly,  like  y  in  'yes'  (tongue  closer  to  the  palate; 
strongly  buzzed):  ja,  jeber,  SuTit,  ^orf),  jud^jen. 
2.  In    French    loan-words,   like   g,    6,   above :     ^OUrtia'!, 
galoufie'. 

I  Like  c  in  '  can '  or  k  in  *  ken,'  '  keen '  (comp.  note  to 

g,  i) :  lam,  fennen,  Sinb,  Ketn,  fant 

I  Like  1  in  '  lip '  (tongue  advanced    to   gums)  :    lobett, 

Kebcn,  aU,  QlMlii),  tDoffen,  t)oC.  . 


INTRODUCTION  xix 

ttt        Like  m  in  'make* :  tnit,  SSaum,  fomtttett,  8amm, 

n  Like  n  in  *  name  '  (tongue  advanced  to  gums)  :  netUtett^ 

unb,  §dnbe,  an,  SJiann,  Wdnntx. 

ng  Like  ng  in  'sang/  'length'  'sing'  (abruptly  uttered; 
comp.  note  to  g,  i;  never  as  in  English  'finger'): 
fangen,  lang,  tanflft,  fing,  ginger. 

nf  Like  nk  in  '  thank,'  '  think '  (abruptly  uttered ;  comp. 
note  to  g,  i) :  S)anf,  banfen,  tenfen,  finfen. 

)f  Like  p  in  'pit'  (pronounce   fully  before  f )  ;    5|Su^3)Je, 

©iro^j,  )jflangen,  $ferb. 

p^       Like  f  (which  see) :  5P^tIofo')J^,  $^^iro[o^J^ie^ 

qu       Like  f  4-  tr>  (which  see) :  duetle,  quer. 

r  Has  no  English  counterpart;  it  is  formed  either  (i)  by 

trilling  the  point  of  the  tongue  against  the  upper  gums 
('lingual'  r),  or  (2)  by  drawing  the  root  of  the  tongue 
backward  so  as  to  cause  the  uvula  to  vibrate  ('  uvular  '  r)  : 
SRat,  rot,  runb,  rein,  toax,  tt)tr,  §erj,  tt)erben. 

Note.  —  Either  sound  is  correct  in  conversation.     The  lingual*  r,  how- 
ever, is  more  readily  acquired  by  English-speaking  students. 

f  I.  When  initial  in  a  word  or  syllable  before  a  vowel,  like  z  in 
'  zeal '  (tongue  advanced  towards  gums)  :  fel^etl,  f 0,  ftc^, 
fit^,  9Iofe,  3i^f^^^  gelefen. 

2.  When  final  in  a  word  or  syllable,  and  before  most  con- 

sonants, Hke  s  in  '  seal '  (tongue  advanced,  as  above)  ; 
so  also  ^,  ff,  always  :  (3va^,  tot^alb,  faft,  3KafIe, 
effen,  gufe,  gufee,  gluffe. 

3.  When  initial  before  p  or  t,  like  sh  in  '  ship  '  (tongue  ad- 

vanced ;  lips  protruded) :  ftetjett,  geftattben,  fpieten, 
gefpielt,  ^inberfpiel, 

jjd)        Like  sh  in  '  ship  '  (see  f ,  3)  :  S^iff,  fc^reibetl,  Zi\^. 


XX  INTRODUCTION 

t     I.   Like  t  in  'tame'  (tongue  advanced  to  gums)  :   XaQ, 
teilen,  SStfd),  Sinte,  abutter,  xxtt 
2.    In  loan-words  before  i  =  t-^  :  5>latio'n,  ^atie'tlt. 

11^         Same  as  t,  i  :  !J^eater. 

^  Same  as  3  (which  see)  :  ®a^,  fi^ett. 

t)    I.   Same  as  f  (which  see)  :  SJater,  t)ieI/tJon,  hxat). 

2.    In  most  Latin  or  Romance  loan-words  =  to  (which see): 
SBafe,  "iprodia'nt,  9tet3o'(tier,  JBera'nba. 

to         Like  V  in  '  vine  '  (less  strongly  buzzed)  :  toat,  too,  toir, 
toe^{)aI6,  ©(^toefter,  gtoeu 

g         Same  as  f^  :  Sljt,  9?ije» 

5         Same  as  t§ :  ju,  §er5,  ®!isse. 

Pronunciation  of  Loan-words. 

The  German  pronunciation  of  loan-words  is  usually  an  ap- 
proximation to  the  original  sound,  the  original  stress  of  the 
foreign  word  being  in  most  cases  retained.  A  full  treatment  of 
the  subject  is  beyond  the  limits  of  this  work,  but  the  pronuncia- 
tion of  the  more  common  consonants  of  foreign  origin  has  been 
indicated  above. 

Exercises  on  Pronunciation. 

Note.  —  The  words  in  A^  B,  C,  Z>,  have  been  taken,  with  few  excep- 
tions, from  the  first  five  exercises  of  the  Grammar.  The  numerals  after  the 
letters  correspond  to  those  used  in  explaining  the  pronunciation  (pp.  xiv- 
xx). 

A.  Simple  vowels. — a  (i) :  SSater,  3Jiarte',  2:afel,  aber,  bq ; 
a  (2) :  alt,  mam,  «aH,  ©artett,  Xantt ;  c  (i) :  geber,  erft, 
8ef)rer,  fe^r ;  c  (2) :  ®elb,  §err,  ajjeffer,  getifter ;  c  (3) :  $Rofe, 
t)tefe,  (oben,  aber;  i  (i):  tDtr,  bie,  t)tele ;  i  (2):  2:tnte,  ift, 
tmnter,  artig  ;  i  (3) :  8t'(te  ;  0  (i) :  tDo,  rot,  ober,  gro^,  tvoijl ; 
0  (2) :  Onfet,  ©tocf ,  oft,  ©ontmer ;  u  (i) :  ©u^,  Sruber, 
Slume,  ®tu^I ;  u  (2) :  @unb,  jung,  abutter,  ^uppe» 


INTRODUCTION  XXi 

B.  Vowels  with  umlaut.  — a  (i) :  SKcibc^en,  erja^ktt,  2Kdr^ 
d)en;  8(2):  ©defer;  B  (i):  b5fe,  f(^ott;  8(2):  ©otter,  fott== 
nen,  §brner;  it  (i);  gritn,  giitig,  ®d)uter,  2:ur;  it  (2): 
l)ubfc^,  funfstg. 

C  Diphthongs.  —  ai :  ^atfer ;  au :  au^,  grau,  auftnerffatn, 
2lufgabe ;  ci :  ftein,  Sleiftift,  gleif c^,  rein ;  cu :  neu,  J)eutf^. 

D,  Consonants.  —  6  (i) :  aber,  :8al(,  33ruber,  Srtef ;  6  (2) : 
pbfc^,  ©c^reibttf^ ;  c :  Sdfar,  Sicero  ;  ct|  (i) :  53u(f),  au^, 
Tnaci)en ;  ^  (2) :  id^,  ntc^t,  5Kdb(^en,  tr)et(^ ;  ^  (3)  •  tra^fen, 
g^or  ;  tf :  :93dcfer,  ©tod ;  b  (i) :  ba,  geber,  ober,  bret,  abbieren ; 
b  (2) :  tub,  unb,  griinblid) ;  g  (i) :  gut,  gem,  ©arten,  grog  ; 
8(2):  Jage,fage;  9(3):  ^ag,  f tug ;  g  (4):  Serge,  S5nige; 
g  (5) :  artig,  guttg,  regnen  ;  g  (6) :  (Stage,  gourage ;  HO  • 
^art,  §ut,  §err,  ^ier  ;  I|  (2) :  fal),  fe^en,  n^e^  ;  j :  (i)  {a,  {ung  ; 
J  (2) :  ^fournal ;  I :  fait,  flein  ;  \ :  alt,  !(ug,  ©all ;  tn : 
DJJann,  immer ;  n:  nein,  JTante,  SJiann ;  ng:  fung,  ©pajier^^ 
gang,  SRtng,  fingen  ;  nl :  Dn!el ;  ^j :  ^uppe  ;  )J^  :  'ip^ilofo'^)^  ; 
^\x :  Ouelle,  quer ;  r :  rot,  9tofe,  runb,  tt)er,  ©arten,  §err ; 
f  (i) :  9Jofe,  bofe,  fe^r ;  f  (2) :  al^,  §au^,  grog,  3)?effer, 
tt)ef[en  ;  f  (3)  ©tu^t,  Sletftift,  ©tod,  fptelen  ;  fc^ :  f^tDarj, 
f^dn,  ®dE)tt)e[ter,  T)eutf^  ;  t  (i) :  rot,  STtnte,  3JJutter  ;  t  (2) : 
5«atio'n,  ^atie'nt;  t^:  2:f)ea'ter ;  ^:  ^lafe ;  ti  (i):  3Sater, 
t)tele ;  tj  (2) :  SSafe,  SSerbunt ;  tti :  tt)o,  luer,  @d^tt)efter,  fd^tDarj ; 
g :  §eje,  2lf t ;  s :  flanj,  3imnter,  funfjig,  ergd^Ien. 

E,  To  be  repeated  several  times  in  succession :  i .  'J)rei 
breite  ©at^bldtter,  brei  brette,  :c.  2.  gift^er^  '^x\%  fifc^t 
frifc^e  gif^e,  gifc^er^  grife,  2C.  3.  ®er  tottbuffer  ^oft^ 
futf(^er  pufet  ben  ^ottbuffer  ^oftfutfi^faften,  ber  ^ottbuffer,  :c. 

i?:  5cl^nfud?t. 

3l(^ !  au^  btefe^  STafe^  ©riinben^ 
©ie  ber  falte  9?ebel  briicft, 

S5nnf  td^  bo(^  ben  3lu^gang  finben, 
5ld^!  iDie  fit^tf  ic^  mi^  begtucft! 


xxii  INTRODUCTION 

Sort  txUid'  id)  f(^5ne  ©ugel, 
gtDtg  iung  unb  emig  griin  ; 

§atf  id)  ©(^tDingen,  ijMV  id)  glitget, 
5Ka(^  ben  ©iigeln  jog'  i(^  ^in. 

Use  of  Capitals. 

Capital  letters  are  required  in  German,  contrary  to  English 
usage,  in  the  following  cases  :  — 

1.  As  initial  of  all  nouns  and  all  words  used  as  nouns  :  bie 
geber,  *  the  pen ' ;  ba^  9^iifeUd)e,  '  the  useful ' ;  etlt)a^  9Jeue^, 

*  something  new  ' ;  ba^  9teif  en,  '  travelling  ' ;  nouns  used  with 
other  functions  take  a  small  initial :  Slbeub,  *  evening/  but 
abenb^,  '  in  the  evening ' ;  geib,  '  sorrow/  but  e^  tUt  TUir  leib, 

*  I  am  sorry. ' 

2.  As  initial  of  the  pronoun  ®te  =  '  you  '  (in  all  forms  except 
fi(^),  and  of  the  corresponding  possessives  :  §aben  ©ie  Qi}Xt 
geber  ?    *  Have  you  your  pen?  ' 

3.  Similarly,  but  in  correspondence  only,  bu,  t^r  =  '  you/  and 
their  possessives :  SSJir  ertDarten  ©ic^  unb  3)etne  (S(^n)efter, 

*  We  expect  you  and  your  sister.' 

4.  Proper  adjectives  are  not  written  with  a  capital  unless 
formed  from  names  of  persons  or  forming  part  of  a  proper 
name  :  ba^  beutf  d)e  SSud)^  '  the  German  book ' ;  but,  bie 
©oetl^eft^en  @cf)rtften,  *  Goethe's  writings';  ba^  ^Ceutfd^e 
9tet(^,  *  the  German  Empire.' 

Punctuation. 

The  rules  of  punctuation  correspond  in  general  to  those  of 
English,  but  the  following  points  should  be  noted  :  — 

1.  A  dependent  sentence  (relative,  adverbial,  etc.)  is  intro- 
duced by  a  comma. 

2.  Infinitive  clauses  with  ju  are  regularly  preceded  by  a 
comma. 

3.  An  exclamatory  point  is  used  in  beginning  letters  :  ®el)r 
gee^rter  @err ! 


INTRODUCTION 


German  Script. 

yc^     ^£-  ^     ^  ^^-    /I/  ^ 


@  c  Sf  f  ®        g  4^  ^ 


^^^ 


//- 


3f  i  ^  i 


»  8  I 


^^ 


<^^     ^J 


9Wm  5Wn  Co  ^ti 


C        I?  9f         r 


S         t 


^^    ^^    ^^   ^^ 


^        vi  «ii  s»to  ^e? 


-«^i?i'        o^    ^ 


icxiv 

INTRODUCTION 

a 

ci 

C         0 

it        a 

71 

d/ 

C^  ^ 

liy  x^ 

e^  C^  If  ©t  ft  ff      ^ 


(Transcription  of  the  German  letter  on  page  172.) 


'  ynr2^t>-f^^' 


INTRODUCTION 

^-^>^//^2^^^<^Z>^.-^^i/^«^  /C^.:^Z^(7^^/</%^^f^^i</X^    ^^S^^^^^^P^^^^/-^^^- 

.^^A^/Z^-U^X-A^  t?l^/X^^^iCAAi^  ^^Z>-^^^*-Ai^ACk^  C^CAiCh     ^p^.^^^OAAA^ 


MAP  OF  GERMANY.  (See  lesson  XLI.) 


LESSON  I 

1.  Gender  and  Agreement*. 

J)Cr  aWatin  ift  aft.  The  man  is  old. 

^ie  grau  ift  !fug.  The  woman  is  clever, 

^a^  SU(^  ift  neu.  The  book  is  new. 

^a^  aJJdb^en  ift  f)Ubf(^.  The  girl  is  pretty. 

^er  §unb  ift  gro^.  The  dog  is  large. 

2)er  SBinter  ift  fait.  The  winter  is  cold. 

^ie  2:inte  ift  fc^icarj.  The  ink  is  black. 

Observe:  i.  The  subject  of  a  sentence  is  always  in  the 
nominative. 

2.  Predicate  adjectives  remain  undeclined  in  German. 

3.  The  definite  article  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender,  num- 
ber, and  case,  and  has  the  following  forms  in  the  nominative 
singular : 

Masc,   bcr  Fem,   bte  Neut   ba^ 

4.  There  are  three  genders  in  German  :  masculine,  feminine, 
and  neuter. 

5.  Names  of  males  are  almost  always  masculine,  and  names 
of  females  feminine,  but  all  nouns  in  -d^ett  and  -teitt  (diminu- 
tives) are  neuter,  regardless  of  sex. 

6.  Names  of  animals  and  things  may  be  of  any  gender —  to 
be  learned  from  the  vocabulary  or  dictionary. 

2.  Nominative  Pronouns. 

3ft  ber  2J?ann  ffug?     ^a,  et  Is  the  man  clever?     Yes,  he  is 

ift  f(ug.  clever. 

3ft  ber  aSinter  tDarm?    Slein,  Is  the  winter  warm  ?    No,  it  is 

et  ift  fait.  cold. 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§2 


©te  grau  ift  ntd)t  alt ;  fie  ift  The  woman  is  not  old ;  she  is. 

Jung,  young. 

S)ie  Stnte  ift  nt(^t  rot ;  fie  ift  The  ink  is  not  red ;  it  is  black. 

T)a^  ^nd)  ift  alt ;  e^  ift  nt^t  The  book  is  old ;  it  is  not  new. 

neu. .  \    <  ■  ^ 

Sae  aScbrfjenn'ft  nic^t  fleiti;  The  girl  is  not  small;  she  is 

c^  ift  gro^,  large. 

Observe  :  The  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  singular  agrees 
in  gender  with  the  noun  to  which  it  refers,  and  has  the  follow- 
ing forms  in  the  nominative  : 

Masc,   er  jFem,   fie  Neut,   t§ 

EXERCISE   I 

J\/'.B.   The  definite  article  before  nouns  shows  their  gender. 


aber,  but. 

alt,  old. 

ba^  SSViii),  the  book. 

ba,  there. 

bte  geber,  the  pen. 

gro^,  large,  tall,  big,^great. 

I^ier,  here. 

ber  §unb,  the  dog. 

ift,  is. 

ja,  yes. 

fait,  cold. 

!(etn,  small,  little. 

ilug,  clever,  intelHgent. 

)er  Sel^rer,  the  teacher  (m.). 


ba^  ajJabcf)en,  the  girl. 

ber  9}iann,  the  man. 

netn,  no  (adv.). 

neu,  new. 

nti^t,  not. 

ober,  or. 

rot,  red. 

frfltDarj,  black. 

ber  ®ommer,  the  summer. 

bte  2^inte,  the  ink. 

toarm,  warm. 

lt)er?  who? 

ber  Sinter,  the  winter. 

lt)0?  where? 


bte  8el)rerin,  the  teacher  (/.). 

A,  I.  35a^  SSnd)  ift  neu.  2.  ©ie  Slittte  ift  f^tt)arj. 
3.  S)er  SBinter  ift  fait.  4-  3)er  ®ommer  ift  iDarm.  5.  3)a^ 
Wd\)d}tn  ift  ftein.  6.  iSa^  SSnd)  ift  ntc^t  alt;  e^  ift  neu. 
7.  ©ie  Jinte  ift  nic^t  rot ;  fie  ift  fditDarj.    8.  ©a^  Wdbd)tn 


§  3l  LESSON  I  3 

ift  ni^t  flein ;  e§  tft  grog.  9.  3ft  bte  geber  ^ter  ?  10.  ^a,  fie 
ift  {)ier.  n.  2Ber  tft  ba?  12.  T)a^  3Kabrf)en  ift  ba.  13.  ©0 
ift  ber  ge^rer?  14.  @r  tft  nic{)t  ^ier;  er  ift  ba.  15.  !Der 
?e()rer  ift  ^ier,  aber  bie  Secretin  ift  ttic^t  ^ier.  16.  ^fft  ber 
(Sottttiter  fatt?  17.  9?ein,  er  ift  iDarttt;  er  ift  ttic^t  fait. 
18.  3ftber§UTtbf(ug?    19.  ^a,  er  ift  flug. 

(B)  Answer  the  following  questions  in  German :  i.  Q^t  ba^ 
SUM)  grog?  2.  3<ft  ba^  2Kdb ^ett  Heitt?  3.  -3ft  bie  Jittte 
fc^marj?  4-  -3ft  ber  Sommer  !a{t?  5.  3: ft  ber  2Bittter  fatt 
ober  tDarm  ?  6.  SBo  ift  bie  geber?  7-  SBer  ift  ^ier?  8.  SKer 
ift  nxijt  t)ier?  9.  Q\t  ber  ?e^rer  niijt  ba?  10.  2Bo  ift  ba^ 
Smdbc^en?  n.  3ft  ber  C>unb  tti(J)t  Hug?  12.  3ft  ba^  Surf) 
alt  ober  neu? 

C  I.  The  book  is  large.  2.  The  ink  is  red.  3.  Is  the 
man  clever?  4.  He  is  clever.  5.  Where  is  the  pen?  6.  It 
is  not  here.  7.  The  summer  is  warm ;  it  is  not  cold.  8.  Is 
the  winter  warm?  9.  No,  it  is  cold.  10.  Where  is  the  dog? 
II.  It  is  here.  12.  Is  the  ink  black?  13.  No,  it  is  red. 
14.  Is  the  teacher  here?  15.  Yes,  she  is  here.  16.  Is  the 
girl  large?  17.  No,  she  is  small.  18.  Is  the  book  old  or  is 
it  new?  19.  It  is  old;  it  is  not  new.  20.  Where  is  the 
teacher  ? 

Z>.   SefeftiicE  (extract  for  reading)  : 

&n^,  jtt)ei,  brei,  SBarm  ift  niijt  tali, 

mt  ift  nic^t  neu,  talt  ift  ni^t  marm, 

9Jeu  ift  nic^t  alt,  $Reic^  ift  nic^t  arm,. 

Note.  —  For  vocabulary  of  these  extracts,  see  end  of  the  volume. 

LESSON  II 

3.  Nominative  of  ein  and  feitt^ 

@ttt  ©teitt  ift  ^art.  A  stone  is  hard, 

©ine  9Jofe  ift  rot.  A  rose  is  red. 


4  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§4 

(gin  ©i  ift  runb.  An  egg  is  round. 

Slcitt  (Sommer  ift  fait.  No  summer  is  cold. 

Seine  9tofe  ift  griin.  No  rose  is  green. 

^ein  Sinb  ift  att.  No  child  is  old^^e: 

Observe  :  The  indefinite  article  eitt  and  its  negative  !eitt 
agree  with  their  nouns,  and  have  the  following  forms  in  the 
nominative  singular : 

Masc,  and  Neut,   ein  Fem.   eittC 

Masc.  ^and  Neut,   fein  Fern,   feittC 

4.  Nominative  of  Some  Possessives. 

2Wein  23ater  ift  gro^.  My  father  is  tall. 

^tXXit  aJiutter  ift  gut.  Your  (thy)  mother  is  good. 

®ein  Sinb  ift  flein.  His  child  is  small. 

3=ft  ba^  i^r  Su^  ?  Is  that  her  (their)  book? 

Unferc  2)iutter  ift  alt.  Our  mother  is  old. 

Observe  :  Possessive  adjectives  have  the  same  endings  as 
the  indefinite  article  in  the  nominative  singular,  and  agree. 

5.  Nominative  of  ttjcl^et? 

Seller  3Kann  ift  att  ?  Which  man  is  old  ? 

SBet(^e  Stume  ift  rot  ?  Which  flower  is  red  ? 

Selc^e^  tinb  ift  p6f^ ?  Which  child  is  pretty? 

Observe:  The  interrogative  tDeI(^er?  'which?'  has  the  fol- 
lowing forms  in  the  nominative  singular,  and  agrees  : 
Masc.   tDelc^cr  Fem,   tDeli^C  Neut   tpel^e^^ 

EXERCISE   II 

ber  SSdder,  the  baker.  ^art,  hard, 

ber  Salt,  the  ball.  pbfd),  pretty, 

ber  iBruber,  the  brother.  ber  ©ut,  the  hat. 

griin,  green.  immer,  always, 

gut,  good.  jung,  young. 


§5] 


LESSON   II 


ba^  Sinb,  the  child.  bie  ©(^tDefter,  the  sister. 

bie  abutter,  the  mother  fel)r,  very. 

nie,  never.  ber  @tu^t,  the  chair. 

ber  9tmg,  the  ring.  ber  35ater,  the  father. 

bie  SRofe,  the  rose.  Xoa^?  what? 

runb,  round.  h)ei(f),  soff.< 

fdjled^t,  bad.  totx^,  white. 

^.  I.  (gitt  $Rtng  ift  runb.  2.  2)?ein  SSater  ift  nii^t  Jung. 
3.  3ft  meitt  :33aII  runb  ?  4-  3^a,  er  ift  runb.  5.  Unfer  23ater 
ift  alt.  6.  SBo  ift  ber  JRing  ?  7-  ©r  ift  ^ier.  8.  3ft  ein 
Wd't)d)tn  immer  jung?      9.  Qa,  ein  aRdbi^en  ift  nie  att. 

10.  (Seine  geber  ift  ^ier.  n.  Unfer  ©dder  ift  gro^,  aber 
fein  ^ruber  ift  !(ein.  12.  a^eine  3Jiutter  ift  ^Itbfc^.  13.  f  ein 
^inb  ift  att.  14.  Der  ^SSader  ift  alt.  15.  @ein  §ut  ift  meig. 
16.  ajjeine  geber  ift  gut,  aber  i^re  geber  ift  f(^(ec^t.  17.  Q\t 
iljv  ®tul)l  meic^  ?  18.  aiein,  er  ift  ni(^t  meic^,  er  ift  fe^r  ^art. 
19.  (Sine  9tofe  ift  rot.  20.  gine  9tofe  ift  nic^t  griin.  21.  ^ein 
©ommer  ift  fait.  22.  3)fein  Sruber  ift  grog,  aber  i^re 
(gc^trefter  ift  flein. 

B,  Answer  in  German  :  i.  3ft  ^itie  $Rofe  fd^tDarj?  2.  SBeld^e 
$Rofe  ift  mi^?  3.  SBo  ift  mein  ©all?  4.  SBelc^e  geber  ift 
gut?  5.  SBett^er  ®tuf|I  ift  tvdij?  6.  ©eldie^  SSnd)  ift  grog? 
7.  9Ber  ift  nie  alt  ?  8.  SBer  ift  immer  iung  ?  9-  3Ba^  ift 
immer  runb?      10.   3ft  i^re  @cf)n)efter  grog  ober  ftein? 

11.  3ft  unfer  ^Mtx  jung  ober  att  ?  12.  3ft  fein  ^ut  fditDar;^ 
ober  njeig?  13.  3ft  i^t-e  ?feber  ^art?  14-  3Bo  ift  unfere 
Sel)rerin?    15.  3ft  f^tn  Sommer  talt? 

C.  I.  The  summer  is  warm.  2.  No  winter  is  warm.  3.  Is 
her  pen  hard  or  soft?  4.  My  ink  is  red;  it  is  not  black. 
5.  Her  father  is  old.  6.  No  child  is  old.  7.  Our  sister  is  not 
tall,  but  she  is  pretty.  8.  His  brother  is  tall,  but  her  brother 
is  small.  9.  Which  chair  is  hard?  10.  Which  ink  is  black? 
II.  Is  her  chair  hard  or  soft?     12.  His  chair  is  hard,  but  my 


6  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  6 

chair  is  soft.  13.  Which  child  is  pretty?  14.  His  pen  is  not 
good;  it  is  very  soft.  15.  Is  our  dog  not  here ?  16.  No  rose 
is  green.     1 7.  A  rose  is  red  or  white. 

D,  gefeftUd: 

@tn^,  jtDci,  bret,  §art  tft  nit^t  meid),  \ 

2llt  ift  nidit  neu,  grtfd)  tft  ttid^t  faul,     ^^Oc^d- 

3lrtn  tft  ni^t  rei^,  Ocf)f  ift  fettt  ®aut. 

LESSON  III 

6.  Present  Indicative  of  fcin,  to  be. 

Singular.  Plural 

\i)  bin,  I  am.  tDtr  finb,  we  are. 

bu  bift,  thou  art,  you  are.  i^r    feib,  ye  (you)  are. 

er  (fie,  e^)  tft,  he  (she,  it)  is.  fie     fittb,  they  are. 

Formal :  ©ie  fittb,  you  are  {sing,  or  plur,^. 
Interrogatively  :   bin  icf)  ?  bift  bu  ?  ZC» 

7.  Pronouns  of  Address. 

S3ift  \SM  !alt,  ntein  Sinb  ?  Are  you  cold,  my  child  ? 

(geib  i^r  fait,  SHnber?  Are  you  cold,  children? 

®inb  ®ie  tparm,  §err  31.  ?  Are  you  warm,  Mr.  A.  ? 

®inb  Sie  f)ier,  tneine  §erren?  Are  you  here,  gentlemen 

3ft  ba^  3^r  «UC^,  §err  «.  ?  Is  that  your  book,  Mr.  B.  ? 

Observe  :  i.  '^u,  'thou,'  'you,'  is  familiar,  and  its  plural  is 
tl|r,  '  ye,'  '  you ' ;  the  corresponding  possessives  are  bein,  eucr, 
respectively,  declined  like  ntein. 

2.  (Sie,  'you,'  is  formal,  is  always  written  with  a  capital,  and 
requires  the  verb  in  the  third  plural,  whether  one  person  is 
addressed  or  more  than  one. 

3.  'Your '  in  formal  address  =  ^^r,  declined  like  tl)r  =  'her,' 
and  always  written  with,  a  capital. 


§9]  LESSON   III  J 

8.  The  Demonstrative  ia^^ 

^a^  ift  ber  33ater.  That  is  the  father. 

^a^  ift  bie  Ttnttex.  That  is  the  mother. 

2)a^  finb  meine  ©(fitter.  Those  are  my  pupils,  -^iwp 

Observe  :  ^a^  remains  unchanged  here ;  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  real  subject,  which  follows. 

9.  Word  Order.  The  predicate  adjective  comes  at  the  end 
of  a  principal  sentence  in  simple  tenses  : 

S)a^  Setter  ift  ^eute  fd^iitt.  The  weather  is  fine  to-day. 

EXERCISE   III 

artig,  well-behaved,  good^^  ber  Onfel,  the  uncle. 

aud),  also,  too.  .  f(J)arf,  sharp. 

b5fe,  bad,  cross,  angry.  fdjdtt,     beautiful,     handsome, 

bie  3^rau,  the  woman,  wife,  Mrs.  fine. 

ganj,  quite.  bie  ©iJ)Ute,  the  school.     . 

ber  ©arten,  the  garden.  ber  @c^it(er^  the  pupil,  scholar. 

gittig,  kind.-^  bie  ©djiiler,  the  pupils,  schol- 

ber  §err,  the  gentleman,  Mr.  ars. 

'  in,  in.  bie  Jante,  the  aunt. 

bie  Sinber,  the  children.  *  u'ttartig,  naughty,  bad. 

franf,  ill,  sick.  unb,  and. 

bie  8e^rer,  the  teachers.  •  ireffen  ?  whose  ? 

.  ba^  aKeffer,  the  knife.  tro^I,  well. 

bie  SKeffer,  the  knives.  .  :c.,  etc. 

Idiom  :  ^ctr  Scljrcr,  teacher  (voc.) ;  bet  ^crr  Sc^rcr,  the  teacher 
(forms  of  respect). 

A.  Continue  the  following  throughout  the  tense:  i.  Qi) 
bin  !ran!,  bu  bift,  2c.  2.  :93in  id)  artig  ?  bift  bu?  20.  3.  Qd) 
bin  nic^t  Hein,  bu,  2c.    4-  ^in  id)  nidjt  gro§?  bift  bu?  2c. 

B.  I.  5)ie  ®(^iiter  finb  nid)t  ^ier ;  fie  finb  nidjt  lt)o^t. 
2.  £)ie  8et)rer  finb  I)ier  unb  bie  (Sc^uler  finb  auc^    l^ier. 


8:  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  9 

3.  Unfere  ®(J)ule  ift  gro^  unb  fc^on.  4.  Qdj  bin  tkin,  aber 
(2ie  finb  gro^*  5.  ©inb  ®te  frant,  grau  SSxann?  6.  9^ein, 
i(J)  bin  gqnj  ido^L     7-  ®ie  finb  fe^r  gutig,  §err  ©chafer, 

8.  3ft  ba^  3^re  geber?  9.  T)Vi  bift  unartig,  mein  tinb. 
10.  (Seib  i^r  artig,  Sinber?  n.  ^a,  §err  8ef)rer,  n)ir  finb 
artig,  12.  Unfer  ©arten  ift  f(f)dn  nnb  er  ift  auc^  gro^. 
13-  S)er  §nnb  ift  gro^,  aber  er  ift  ni(^t  bdfe,  14.  J)ie 
5Keffer  finb  md)t  fcf)arf,  15.  SBer  ift  ba^?  16.  ©a^  ift 
meine  (Sc^n)efter,  17-  J)a^  finb  bie  ©cottier.  18.  J)ae 
ift  nnfere  ge^rerin,  19.  Unfer  £)n!el  ift  in  S^ett)  gorL 
20.  3=^re  2::ante  ift  in  ©erlin* 

C.  Answer  in  German  :  i.  ^^ft  ba^  ®inb  artig?  2.  ©inb 
bie   ^inber   ni^t    artig?     3.  -©ift   bn  n)o^I,  mein  Sinb? 

4.  ®inb  ®ie  ni(^t  wo^I,  §err  (Si^afer?  5.  SBeffen  geber 
iftba^?  6.  aSeffen^allift  ba^?  7.  SBer  ift  ba?  8.  SBa^ 
ift  ba^?  9-  -3ft  S^r  §nnb  ni(^t  bdfe  ?  10.  ^ft  mein  ©arten 
nid)t  f(^5n?  n.  SBo  ift  ^^re  Jante?  12.  ^ft  ^tjr  Onfel 
nii^t  and)  in  ©eriin  ? 

Z>.  I.  My  aunt  is  in  New  York.  2.  Where  is  your  uncle? 
3.  He  is  also  in  New  York.  4.  Are  you  quite  well,  Mr. 
Schafer?  5.  No,  I  am  not  very  well.  6.  Are  you  cold,  my 
child?     7.  No,  I  am  quite  warm.     8.  Are  you  there,  father? 

9.  Yes,  I  am  here.  10.  Is  that  your  school?  11.  Yes,  that  is 
my  school.  12.  It  is  not  large,  but  it  is  handsome.  13.  Chil- 
dren, you  are  naughty.  14.  No,  we  are  quite  good.  15.  My 
brother  and  my  sister  are  in  Berhn.  16.  Whose  knives  are 
those?  17.  What  is  that?  18.  Who  is  that?  19.  That  is  my 
mother.     20.  Who  are  you?     21.  I  am  Mrs.  Braun. 

£.  gefeftncf : 

!Der  5Binter  ift  Mt,  ber  ©ommer  ift  marm  ; 
T)k  SItern  finb  reitf),  bie  Sinber  finb  arm  ; 
S)ie  geber  ift  Ieid)t,  ba^  gijen  ift  f(f)tDer ; 
©ie  (2cf)uffel  ift  t)otI,  ber  teller  ift  leer. 

;.   *  ♦  4  » 


§  13]  LESSON   IV 

LESSON  IV 
10.  Present  Indicative  of  l^afictt,  to  have. 


I  have,  etc. 

Have  I  ?  etc. 

id)  f)abe         tt)ir  ^abett 

I^abe  t^?        f)aben  iDtr? 

bu  i)a\t          i^r   ^abt 

t)aft   bu?        ^abt     if)r? 

er   Ijat           fie    ^aben 

i)at    er?         ^aben  fie? 

Formal :  @ie  ^beti. 

Formal :  ^abett  @ie  ? 

11.  Accusative  Forms,  i.  The  direct  object  is  put  in  the 
accusative,  which  has  the  same  form  as  the  nominative,  except 
in  the  masculine  singular. 

2.  Observe  the  following  forms  of  the  masculine  singular 
accusative,  and  of  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural  of  all 
genders  : 

Sing,    ben        einctt        !etncn        meincn,  2c.        tvtiijtn 
Plur,    bie        feiue  meiue,  :c.         luelc^e 

12.  Repetition. 

!Der  SffJanu  unb  bic  grau.  The  man  and  woman. 

©ie  geber  uub  bic  Siute.  The  pen  and  ink. 

aSeiu  aSater  uub  meitie  STOutter.    My  father  and  mother. 

Observe  :  The  article,  possessive  adjective,  etc.,  must  be  re- 
peated before  each  noun  in  the  singular. 

13.  The  Comparative  Degree. 

!J)U  bift  ffetner  al^  ic^.  You  are  smaller  than  I. 

(5r  get)t  fo  fc^uett  U)ie  t(^. '  He  walks  as  quickly  as  I.  -^^ 

(gr  ift  alter  a(^  feiu  greuub.        He  iToTder  than  his  friend. 

Observe:  i.  Most  adjectives  and  adverbs  form  the  com- 
parative by  adding  -cr  to  the  stem  of  the  positive. 

2.  ' Than '  after  comparatives  =  a(i^ ;  *as'  .  .  .  'as*  or 'so* 
.  .  .  'as'  =  fo  ♦  ♦  >  tt)tc. 

3.  Many  monosyllabic  adjectives  and  adverbs  with  stem  vowel 
a,  0,  tt,  have  umlaut  (a,  d,  ii,  respectively)  in  the  comparative. 


lO 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§13 


4.  The  noun  after  at^  has  the  same  case  as  that  which  pre- 
cedes. 

Note.  — Adjectives  with  umlaut  in  comparative  are  marked  by  (")  in 
the  vocabularies;  see  also  vocabularies  and  Lesson  XXXIX  for  irregular 
comparison. 


EXERCISE   IV 


►  aH^  than. 

I  au'fmerffam,  attentive.-^ 

ber  ^leiftift,  the  pencil. 

bte  ^lume,  the  flower. 

bie  SSMjtv^  the  books. 

brei,  three. 

ba^  genfter,  the  window. 

bie  genfter,  the  windows. 

ba^  S^^if^r  the  meat. 

^  fUnfsig,  fifty. 

ba^  ®elb^  the  money, 
ber  -Sunge,  the  boy. 
bte  Sretbe,  the  chalk. 
3)?arte',  Mary, 
nur,  only, 
bie  ^uppe,  the  doll. 


.( 


bie  *ipuppen,  the  dolls. 

rein,  clean. 

ber  @(J)retbtif(^,  the  writing- 
desk,  writing-table. 

ba^    ®(l)U{{)au^,    the    school- 
house. 

bie    (2(^u(ftube,  the    school-  / 
room. 

ber  ®tO(J,  the  cane,  stick. 

bie  2^afel,  the  blackboard. 

bte  XnXj  the  door. 

Dtele,  many. 

tDte?  how? 

ba^  3to^^^^  the  room. 

bie  3t^^^^r  the  rooms. 


A,   Continue  the  following  (see  Exercise  III)  :   i.   2Bet(^en 
SSalt  ijaht  t(^?  n)el(^en  ^atl  ^aft  bu?  2c,    2.  Qd^  l^abe  fetnen 


4.  ©abe  xii)  tti^t  tl)re 
6.  Qd)  ^be  bett  @tO(J. 


S3(etftift.    3.  SBelc^e  md)tv  f)abe  ii)? 
®it(f)er?    5.  Qi}  i)aht  feme  3)Je[fer. 

B.  Supply  the  proper  form  of  ber,  eitt,  feiTt,  or  of  a  pos- 
sessive adjective  in  the  following :  i.  §at  3J?arte  .  .  ♦  Slume? 
2.  ^tx  ijaOMUmt]^tx  (smg.)?  3.  §abe  ic^  .  .  .  md)? 
4.  §aft  bu  .  .  .  geber?  5.  ^aben  tt)ir  .  .  .  ©arten?  6.  §abt 
t^r  .  .  .  ®elb?  7.  §aben  ®ie  .  .  .  STttite?  8.  .  _  |)uttb 
^at  gletfc^.  9.  .  .  .  ^uttge  f)at  .  .  .  Salt.  10.  .  .  .  931db- 
djen^at  .  .  .  ^u^e..  n.  §at  e^  .  .  .  ^u^e? 


§  13]  LESSON   IV  II 

C.  I.  Unfer  ©c^ul^au^  ift  gro^  unb  fc^on,  2.  g^  f)at 
t)iele  3immer  unb  genfter,  3.  ©te  3immer  finb  gro^. 
4*  ©ie  tjaben  genfter.  5.  Un[er  dimmer  ^at  nur  etn  genfter. 
6.  J)a^  genfter  ift  gro^,  aber  e^  ift  nit^t  immer  rein,  7.  §ier 
ift  unfer  ge^rer,  8.  SBa^  ^at  er  ?  9.  gr  ^at  einen  ®c^reib^ 
tif(^,  10.  gr  ^at  aud)  eine  geber  unb  Jinte,  n.  (Seine 
©(filler  ^aben  and)  geber  unb  Xinte.  12.  Unfere  ©c^utftube 
l^at  eine  3:afe(,  13.  ©ie  Slafel  ift  f(^tt)ar3,  14.  3Bie  t)iete 
©chiller  ^t  3^f)re  ©c^ute?  15.  ©ie  ^at  fUnfjig  ©t^uler. 
16.  @inb  bie  (Scf)ii(er  aufmerffam  ?  17.  ®ie  finb  nit^t  immer 
aufmerffam,  18.  Unfere  8e^rer  ^aben  Sreibe.  19.  T)a^ 
genfter  ift  fleiner  a(§  bie  %ViX.  20.  J)er  8e^rer  ift  iilter  al^ 
feine  @(f)iiler.  21.  ©ie  ®d)iKer  finb  ni(f)t  fo  flug  iDie  i^r 
8e^rer, 

D.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

E.  I.  Our  teacher  has  a  chair  and  writing-desk.  2.  Has 
he  also  a  cane?  3.  No,  he  has  no  cane.  4.  The  pupils  have 
their  books.  5.  Have  you  your  books?  6.  Yes,  but  I  have 
no  pencil.  7.  Mary  has  my  pencil  and  pen.  8.  Which  doll 
have  the  girls?  9.  They  have  no  doll.  10.  How  many 
teachers  has  your  school?  11.  It  has  three  teachers. 
12.  Have  they  many  pupils?  13.  Yes,  they  have  fifty  pupils. 
14.  Are  their  pupils  attentive?  15.  No,  not  always.  16.  Has 
your  teacher  her  pen  or  pencil?  17.  No,  but  she  has  her 
chalk.  18.  Has  your  sister  a  doll  ?  19.  No,  she  has  no  doll ; 
she  is  too  big.     20.  She  is  taller  than  her  brother. 

F.  gefeftud: 

'  Gin  ^inbe^^erj  foH  fein:  SBie  ber  (Spiegel  fo  n)a^r, 

aSie  bie  ?iUe  fo  rein,  9Bie  ber  Quell  fo  frif^, 

SBie  ber  2^au  fo  !tar,  gro^  \m  bie  33dglein  im  ®e^ 

biifc^. 

G.  (S)3ric^n)brter  (proverbs)  :  i.  Seffer  fpcit  af^nie.  2.  @t* 
n)a^  ift  beffer  at^  gar  nic^t^.  3.  '^txi  ift  ®etb.  4-  ©nbe  gut, 
afle^  gut. 


12  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  14 

LESSON  V 

14.  Present  Indicative  of  mac^en,  to  make. 

I  make,  am  making,  do  make,  etc.   Am  I  making  ?  do  I  make  ?  etc. 

id)  mad)  c  iDtr  mad)  en  tnac^e  ic^  ?        tnacf)en  h)ir  ? 

buTnacf)ft  t^r  mac^t  mac^ftbu?       mac^t    i^r? 

er  tnad|t  fie  mac^cn  mai^t  er?        maijtn  fie? 

Formal :  ®ie  ma(^en.  Formal :  maiden  ®ie  ? 

Examples. 

Qi}  mad)t  eine  "iPup^e.  I  am  making  a  doll, 

©pielen  fie  «alt?  Do  they  play  ball? 

SBir  lieben  unferen  3Sater.  We  love  our  father. 

!J)U  arbeiteft  You  are  working,  f    >^  [ 

SJegnet  e^?  Is  it  raining? 

Observe  :  i .  There  are  no  auxiliary  forms  in  German  cor- 
responding to  the  EngHsh  'I  am  making,*  'Does  he  play?'  etc. 

2.  Most  verbs  form  the  present  indicative  like  ma(J)en,  but 
when  the  infinitive  stem  ends  in  -t  or  -b,  or  consonants  after 
which  t  cannot  be  pronounced,  the  second  singular  ends  in  -eft, 
and  the  third  singular  and  the  second  plural  in  -ct. 

15.  Imperative  of  madden. 

Singular,  Plural, 

ma(i)e  (bu),  make  (thou).  tuad^t  (i^r),  make  (ye). 

Formal:  mac^ett  @ie,  make. 

16.  Adjective  as  Adverb,  Most  adjectives  may  be  used  as 
adverbs  without  change  : 

pt,  good,  well.  fc^on,  beautiful(-ly). 

ftei^ig,  diligent(-ly). .  angette^tn,  agreeable(-ly).^ 


§  i6]  LESSON   V  13 


EXERCISE   V 

arbeiten,  to  work.  macf)en,  to  make,  do. 

bie  2lufgabe,  the  exercise.  ba^    9)?ar(^en,  the    fairy-tale, 

bttte,  please.  story. 

ber  Srief,  the  letter.  bie    Wdxdjcn,  the  fairy-tales, 

bie  ©riiber,  the  brothers.  stories. 

®eutfc^,  German.  oft,  often. 

erja^Ien,  to  tell  (narrate).  regtteti,  to  rain. 

flei^tg,  diligent,  industrious.  f(^ne((,  quick,  fast. 

gem,  willingly,  gladly.:!^  |cf)reiben,  to  write. 

^arl,  Charles.  fitigen,  to  sing.  ^ 

ba^  ^(atJte'r,  the  piano.  ber  (Spajte'rgang,  the  walk.  \^ 

le^ren,  to  teach.  fpielen,  to  play. 

lernen,  to  learn,  study.  iDen?  whom? 

ba^  8ieb,  the  song.  tDettig,  little  (not  much). 

loben,  to  praise. 

Idioms:   i.    ^d)  f^ielc  gem,  I  am  fond  of  playing,  like  to  play. 

2.  (Sinctt  S^a^icrgang  ntati^ctt,  to  take  (go  for)  a  walk. 

3.  ^iat)kv  fpiclcn,  to  play  the  piano. 

A.  Continue  the  following,  giving  also  the  imperative  :  i.  :^d) 
f(i)retbe  etnen  Srtef,  bu,  zc.  2.  Qii)  mac^e  gem  etnett  ®pa* 
gtergang.    3.  ^i)  finge  eitt  8teb.    4-  3^  fptele  nii^t  ^aiL 

5.  3lrbeite  tc^  ft^nelt?    6.  Qd)  leme  f^neHer  aU  ^art. 

B.  I.  Utifere  8e{)rer  lobeti  t^re  (gd^itler.  2.  !Die  ge^rerin 
le^rt  t^re  ®c^UIer.  3.  !Dte  ©(fitter  lemen  gem.  4-  Sinber, 
lemt  tf)r  gem  ©eutfd)?    5.  Qa,  n)ir  Itxmn  fe^r  gem  S)eutf(^. 

6.  ^inber  lemen  nidjt  tmmer  gem.  7.  2Btr  f(^retben  eitte 
9lufgabe.  8.  ^arl  f^reibt  etnen  ®rief.  9.  3Karte,  fc^retbe 
eine  3Iufgabe.  10.  2lrbeitet  flei^iger,  Stnber.  n.  3J?arie 
arbettetfet)r  flei^tg.  12.  Sinber  fpielenintnier  gem.  13.  <^ar(, 
fptelft  bu  gem  SSaU?  14.  -3a,  §err  Se^rer,  id)  f|)iele  fe^r 
gem  Satt.  15.  33itte,  erjci^Ien  @ie  ein  SJJar^en,  §err 
Secret.    16.  Unfere  SJiutter  erjci^tt  oft  SKdr^en.    17.  SKeine 


14  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  i6 

©c^mefter  fingt  fe^r  fc^on;  fie  fingt  ein  8ieb.  i8.  ©pielen 
@te  ^latjier,  grau  ©i^cifer?  19.  Qii)  fpiete  ein  iDenig,  aber 
ni(f)t  [e{)r  gut.  20,  3Keine  ^©rUber  mac^eti  oft  einen  ©^jagier:^ 
gang.  21.  3rta(i)en  @ie  gem  einen  ©pa^iergang?  22.  Qa, 
ic^  mad)e  fe^r  gem  einen  ©^ajiergang. 

C.  Answer  in  German:  I.  SBer  lobt  bie  ®cf)UIer?  2.  gemft 
bu  gem,  <^ar(?  3.  Slrbeitet  if)r  flei^ig,  Sinber?  4.  SBer 
f^reibt?  5.  SBa^  fc^reibt  er?  6.  3Ber  fpielt?  7.  2Ba^ 
fpielen  fie?  8.  ©pieten  @ie  ^{at)ier?  9.  8emen  ®ie  gem 
©entfd^?    10.  aSa^  er5df)It  bie  eel)rerin?    n.  SBer  fingt? 

12.  2Ba^  fingt  fie?    13.  9tegnet  e^,  ober  regnet  e^  nid^t? 

D.  I.  We  are  learning  German.  2.  I  like  to  learn  German. 
3.  Do  you  like  to  learn  German?  4.  Charles  likes  to  learn 
German.  5.  Mary  works  diligently.  6.  Her  brother  learns 
very  quickly.  7.  He  learns  more  quickly  than  I.  8.  Our 
teacher  is  teUing  a  story.  9.  The  teacher  teaches  and  the 
pupils  learn.  10.  Do  pupils  always  like  to  learn  ?  11.  Charles 
is  not  so  clever  as  Mary.     12.  What  are  you  writing,  Mary? 

13.  I  am  writing  a  letter.  14.  Please  sing  a  song,,  Mrs.  Schafer. 
15.  Do  not  play,  my  child;  write  an  exercise.  16.  My  father 
and  mother  are  taking  a  walk.  1 7.  Do  they  often  take  a  walk? 
18.  Our  house  is  larger  than  their  house.  19.  Our  garden  is 
smaller,  than  their  garden. 

LESSON  VI 

Review  Lessons  I-V. 

EXERCISE   VI 

angenet)m,  pleasant,  agreeable.  ^ei^,  hot. 

brani^en,  to  use,  want,  need.<;^  l^elt,  bright. 

bunfel,  dark.  *  ber  gintmef,  heaven,  sky. 

ba^  gener,  fire.  ^i)ren,  to  hear.  * 

ba^  @ra^,  grass.  je^t,  now. 

l^eftig,  violent.  !nrj,  ""er,  short. 


§  1 6]  LESSON  VI  15 

lang,  "er,  long.  ber  9iegen,  rain, 

(egen,  to  lay.  fd)einen,  shine, 

bie  8uft,  air.  ber  ©cfjttee^  snow. 

Tnattd)ma(,  frequently.  bie  ©onne,  sun. 

me^r,  more.  ber  @taub,  dust, 

bie  5Jac^t,  night.  ber  Sag,  day. 

na^,  ""er,  wet.  trocfen,  dry. 

ntc^t  me^r,  no  longer.  n)ieber,  again, 
ber  Dfen,  stove. 

A,  I.  SBtr  ^aben  \t%i  (gotntner.  2.  S)er  %a^  tft  tanger 
utib  bie  yiaiji  ift  fiirjer.  3.  ®ie  8uft  ift  oft  fel)r  ^ei^. 
4-  SBir  ^aben  tnan^mal  9?egen.  5.  ®er  9?egen  ift  fe^r 
angene^m.  6.  @r  tnad^t  ba^  ®ra^  na§  unb  tegt  ben  Staub. 
7.  @^  regnet  je^t  ^eftig ;  i^  pre  e^.  8.  S)ie  (Sonne  fd^eint 
ni(^t  mep.  9.  3)er  §imntel  ift  bnnfef.  10.  ®ie  Sonne 
fc^eint  je^t  mieber  pll  nnb  mai^t  ba^  ®ra^  trocfen.  n.  2Bir 
^aben  \t%i  !einen  ®rf)nee.  12.  9Ka(^en  ®ie  fein  gener. 
13.  aSir  branifien  je^t  fein  gener.  14.  2Btr  branrfien  nnferen 
Dfen  nic^t  me^r. 

B,  Oral:  i.  ^ft  e^  \t%i  SBinter?  2.  ^\{  ber  Sag  furser 
aU  bie  yia&ii?  3.  3^ft  bie  9?ac^t  fo  lang  lt)ie  ber  Sag? 
4.  9tegnet  e^?  5.  ^5rt  tf)r  nit^t  ben  9tegen,  tinber? 
6.  ^{egnet  e^  ^ier  oft?  7.  ^^f'^^  ^tr  Srf)nee?  8.  3ft  ba^ 
®ra^  na^?  9.  §aben  @ie  einen  Dfen?  10.  <33ranc^en  xoxx 
je^t  gener? 

C,  Continue:  i.  ^ij  pbe  feinen  Ofen,  bn,  it.  2.  Q6) 
pre  nic^t  ben  SRegen.  3.  -^c^  bin  ni(^t  fait.  4-  -SSrani^e  ic^ 
fein  gener  ? 

Z>.  I.  It  is  now  winter.  2.  The  day  is  shorter  than  the 
night.  3.  The  air  is  colder.  4.  We  need  a  stove.  5.  We 
need  also  a  fire.  6.  We  have  no  fire.  7.  Our  room  is  quite 
cold.  8.  We  have  snow.  9.  The  snow  is  white  and  clean. 
10.  The  air  is  often  very  cold,  but  it  is  pleasant  and  bright. 


1 6  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  17 

II.  My  room  has  a  stove.  12.  I  use  the  stove  very  often. 
13.  Charles  and  Mary  need  a  stove.  14.  Their  room  is  not 
very  warm.     15.  Please  make  a  fire. 

E.  Cefeftud: 

^i)  Itebe  bte  Slumen,  id)  Itebe  ba^  ©ptel, 
^i)  Itebe  bte  SSdgel,  id)  Itebe  gar  t)tel, 
S)te  ©rbe,  ben  §immel,  bte  ®onne,  ben  ®tern, 
^&^  liebe  ba^  atle^,  ob  na^'  ober  fern. 

LESSON  VII 
17.  Declension  of  Definite  Article. 

Singular.  Plural. 


Masc,            Fem, 

Neut 

All  Genders, 

Norn,    ber              bie 

ba^ 

bte,  the 

Gen,     be^              ber 

be^ 

ber,  of  the 

Dat     bem            ber 

bem 

ben,  (to,  for)  the 

Aee.      ben              bte 

ba^ 

bie,  the 

18.                              Use  of  the  Cases. 

SBeriftba?  ^er  9Kann  tft  ba. 

Who  is  1 
there. 

there?     The  man  is 

SBeffen^ut^Iiater? 

Whose  book  has  he? 

(Sr  ^at  ba^  «ucf)  be^  ©(^itler^. 

He  has  the  pupil's  book. 

aSem  fd)t(ft  er  ba^  SJui^  ? 

To  whom  does   he   send   the 

book? 
@r  [(^tdt  bem  8ef)rer  ba^  -Sm^.    He  sends  the|eacher  the  book. 
SBen  lobt  fie?     @ie  lobt  ben   Whom  does  she  praise?     She 

©(^itler.  praises  the  pupil. 

SBa^  ^aben  ®ie?     ^i)  ^abe   What  have  you?    I  have  the 

bie  geber.  pen. 

Observe  :  i.  The  nominative  is  the  subject,  and  answers  the 
question  *  who  ? '  (tt)er  ?)  or. '  what  ? '  (tua^  ?). 


§  20]  LESSON  VII  17 

2.  The  genitive  corresponds  to  the  English  possessive  or 
objective  with  of^  and  answers  the  question  'whose?'  *of 
whom?'  'of  what?'  (tDeffetl?). 

3.  The  dative  is  the  indirect  object,  and  answers  the  ques- 
tion 'to  whom?'  (tDCm?). 

4.  The  accusative  is  the  direct  object,  and  answers  the 
question  '  whom?  '  (tt)en  ?)  or  '  what?  '  (ma^  ?). 

Notes.  —  i.  Any  of  these  cases,  except  the  nominative,  may  be  gov- 
erned by  a  preposition. 

2.  It  is  important  to  remember  that  some  verbs  which  are  transitive  in 
English  govern  a  dative  only  in  German,  as  indicated  in  the  vocabularies. 

19.  Contraction.  The  prepositions  an,  *  on,'  'at,'  in,  'in,'  tiott, 
*  of,'  '  from,'  5«^  '  to,'  are  contracted  with  the  unemphasized 
definite  article  as  follows  : 

an  bem  =  am  in  bent  =  tm  Don  bem  =  tiom 

p  bent  =  sum  gn  ber  =  jur 

20.  Case  Forms  of  Nouns,  i.  Most  masculine  and  neuter 
nouns  have  the  genitive  singular  in  -^  or  -t^ )  the  dative  singu- 
lar is  often,  and  the  accusative  usually,  the  same  as  the  nomi- 
native ;  but  masculine  and  neuter  monosyllables  usually  add  -e 
in  the  dative  singular. 

2.  Feminines  remain  unchanged  in  the  singular,  and  most 
of  them  have  -n  or  -cit  throughout  the  plural. 

3.  The  nominative,  genitive,  and  accusative  plural  are  always 
alike,  and  the  dative  ends  in  -tt. 

EXERCISE  VII 

anf  {dat'),  on,  upon.  fiit  {acc^,  for. 

ber  Sanm,  tree.  •  ber  ©cirtner,  gardener. 

befomnten,  to  get,  receive.  bg|^  ©emiife     {sing,     only), 

bte  S3Iumen,  flowers.  vegetables. 

ber  :93{nnienfo^I,  cauliflower.  >    gem  ^aben,  to  be  fond  of,  like. 

bringen,  to  bring.  in  {dat>),  in. 

banfen  (dat:),  to  thank.  ber  So^I,  cabbage. 


1 8  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  20 

bie  ^U(^e,  kitchen.  bcr  Zi^d),  table. 

tnit  (daf.)y  with.  unter  (^^/.),  under. 

ber  9Jac^bar,  neighbor.  uftt).  (unb  |o  meiter),  etc.,  and 

nac^  §aufe,  home.  so  forth. 

pflanjen,  to  plant.  ba^  9Sei(d)ett,  the  violet. 

pfluden,  to  pick,  pluck.  bie  3Set((^en,  the  violets. 

bie  9?o[en,  roses.  t)erfaufen,  to  sell. 

fc^enten,  to  give  (as  a  present)/  t)ie(,  much. 

fc^idett,  to  send.  n)em?  (to,  for)  whom? 

bie  ©tabt,  town,  city.  tDO^tten,  to  dwell,  live. 

fte^en,  to  stand.  p  (dat.),  to. 

A,  Continue  the  following  :  i.  Qii)  f(^en!e  bem  Secret  ba^ 
SSnd),  bu,  :c.  2.  Qd)  ijaht  htn  ©letftift  ber  ge^reritt.  3.  Qd) 
bin  ber  ©i^iiler  be^  Sel)rer^.  4-  -3^)  erjctfjle  ben  Sinbern  ba^ 
aKcirc^en.    5.  Qd}  arbette  tm  ©arten. 

B,  I.  ^a^  ift  ber  ©artett  be^  yiadjhax^.  2.  SBir  fpteten 
oft  im  ®arten  be^  9^a(^bar^.  3.  SBir  ^ben  and)  einen  ©arten. 
4.  SKeitt  SSater  arbeitet  mtt  bem  ©cirtner  im  ©arten.  5.  SD^etn 
aSater  ^ftanjt  je^t  :33(umen.  6.  ®er  ©artner  ^ftanjt  ba^ 
©emllfe.    7.  ®te  pflanjen  and)  ben  So^I  unb  ben  SIumenfo^L 

8.  ajjein  93ater  pffanjt  t)iele  ^lumen:  9tofen,  25eil(^en,  ufii). 

9.  ®a^  Stnb  be^  ©drtner^  ift  and)  tm  ©arten.  10.  @^  fpielt 
unter  bem  Saume.  n.  SBir  :pfIitcEen  oft  Slumen  fUr  meine 
Wlntttv.  12.  ®te  ^at  tinmen  fe^r  gem.  13.  @te  brauc^t 
bie  SSIumen  fitr  ben  Xx^d)  unb  ba^  ©emltfe  fiir  bie  ^nd)t, 
14.  3)Jeine  Xantt  mo^nt  in  ber  ©tabt.  15.  @te  l^at  f einen 
©arten.  16.  5Kutter  fc^idt  meiner  {daf.)  S:ante  oft  ©lumen. 
17-  aSater  bringt  ba^  ©emiife  jur  ©tabt.  18.  @r  t)er!auft 
t3iel  ©emiife  in  ber  ®tabt  unb  bringt  ba^  ©elb  nai^  §aufe. 
19.  @r  befommt  biel  ©elb  fur  fein  ©emiife.  20.  SBir  fi^enfen 
bem  Se^rer  unb  ber  ge^rerin  oft  ©lumen.  21.  ©ie  ©lumen 
fte^en  auf  bem  ©(^reibttfrf)  ber  ge^rerin.  22.  S)ie  8ef)rerin 
banft  itn  Sd^itlern. 


§  2o]  LESSON   VII  19 

C  Answer  in  German  :  i.  SBeffett  ©arteu  tft  ba^?  2.  SBer 
ift  tm  ©arten?  3.  aJZit  trem  arbeitet  er?  4.  SBeldjc^ 
©emitfe  pflanjt  ber  ©artner?  5.  SBer  :pflan5t  bie  ©(utneti? 
6.  SBet^e  Slumen  ^)flanjt  er  ?  7.  ffieffen  Sinb  ift  itn  ©arten  ? 
8.  aSo  fpielt  e^?  9.  SSer  p\iMt  S(umen?  10.  pr  tDen 
finb  fie?  n.  SSvaudjt  fie  :S(umen  fiir  bie  ^Urf)e?  12.  SBo 
iDo^nt  3:^re  STatite?  13.  SBem  fc^idt  3<t)re  abutter  bie 
Stutnen?  14.  SBo  t)erfauft  3{)r  aSater  ba^  ©emufe? 
15.  aBo  ftef)en  bie  Stumen? 

Z^.  Supply  an  article  in  the  blank  spaces:  i.  ,  ♦  .  ^ali 
•  ♦  ♦  @^lt(er^  ift  pbf(^,  2.  §aben  ®ie  .  .  .  SSnd)  .  . 
grau?  3.  Qii)  ijaht  ttii^t  .  .  ,  ^uppe  ,  .  .  Wd\)d)tn^ 
4.  ®c^enfen  ®ie  *  .  ,  Cnfel  .  .  .  S3ud^.  5.  @tel)t  .  . 
3:ifcf)  in  ,  ,  .  dimmer?  6.  »  ,  .  geber  liegt  auf  ♦  ♦ 
(2^reibtif(^  ,  .  ,  ge^rer^,  7.  2Bo  ift  .  ,  ;  ^(eiftift  .  . 
ge^rerin? 

£.  I.  That  is  our  garden.  2.  We  work  often  in  the  garden. 
3.  The  children  like  to  play  in  the  garden.  4.  They  play  with 
the  neighbor's  children.  5.  The  gardener  is  working  in  the 
garden.  6.  He  is  planting  the  flowers.  7.  Father  is  planting 
the  vegetables.  8.  Which  vegetables  is  he  planting?  9.  He 
is  planting  the  cabbage  and  cauliflower.  10.  Are  you  fond  of 
flowers?  II.  Yes,  I  am  very  fond  of  flowers.  12.  To  whom 
does  your  mother  send  flowers?  13.  She  sends  flowers  to  my 
(meitier)  aunt.  14.  My  aunt  lives  in  the  city,  but  she  has  no 
garden.  15.  We  need  the  flowers  for  the  table  and  the  vege- 
tables for  the  kitchen.  16.  The  flowers  on  the  teacher's  table 
are  very  pretty.  17.  My  mother  sends  the  teacher  (/.)  violets. 
18.  Send  the  teacher  the  violets. 

i^.  ?efeftit(f: 

6^  regnet.    @ott  fegnet 

S)en  f)oI)en  :Saum,  ben  fteinen  ©traud^ 

Unb  alt  bie  taufenb  :93(umen  and), 

D  frifc^er  9tegen !    3)u  ®otte^  ©egen! 


20  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  21 


LESSON  VIII 

21.  Present  Indicative  of  tun,  to  do. 

I  do,  I  am  doing,  etc. 

t(^  tue  tDir  tun 

bu  tuft  if)r   tut 

er  tut  fie    tun 

Formal :  ©ie  tun. 

22.  Infinitive  after  Verbs. 

Qd)  tt)iinfcf)e,  SatI  ju  f^jiclen.    I  wish  to  play  ball. 

Qd)  ijabt  8uft,  einen  ^Bpa^itv^  I  have  a  mind  (want,  wish)  to: 
gang  5U  ntat^en.  take  a  walk.  \ 

Observe  :  i .   Many  verbs  and  nouns  take  an  infinitive  with 

gtt  to  complete  their  meaning. 

2.   This  infinitive  comes  at  the  end  of  its  clause,  which  is 

preceded  by  a  comma  in  German. 

23.  Accusative  Personal  Pronouns. 

Personal  pronouns  have  the  following  forms  in  the  accusa- 
tive, and  agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  antecedent : 

Singular.  Plural, 

1st  Pers,    mtC^,  me.  UU^,  us. 

2d  Pers,     bid),  thee,  you.  eU(^,  you. 

id  Pers,     i^n,  him,  it ;  fie,  her,  it ;  e^,  it.  fie,  them. 

Formal :  Sing,  and  Plur,  @ie,  you. 

Examples. 

?obt  er  XcCxi^  (un^)  ?  Does  he  praise  me  (us)  ? 

Sr  lobt  ®ic*  He  praises  you. 

§at  fie  ben  ©all?   ©ie^att^n.  Has  she  the  ball?     She  has  it. 

§at  er  bte  JRofe?     er  ^at  fie.  Has  he  the  rose?     He  has  it. 


§  24]  LESSON   VIII  21 

24.  Dative  Personal  Pronouns. 

Personal  pronouns  have  the  following  forms  in  the  dative, 
and  agree  : 

Singular.  PluraL 

\st  Pers.mXf  (to,  for)  me.  UTl^,  (to,  for)  us. 

2d  Fers.  bit,  (to,  for)  thee,  you.  euc^,  (to,  for)  you. 

id  Pers.  i^mXto,for)him.   i^rXto,for)her.  t^nen,  (to,  for)  them. 
Formal :  Sing,  and  Plur.  ^'l^tten,  (to,  for)  you. 
Note.  —  The  neut.  dat.  i^m  is  used  only  of  persons  or  animals. 
Examples. 

©eben  ©te  tnir  (un^)  @e(b.  Give  me  (us)  money. 

^i)  gebe  btr  (eud))  ^Srot.  I  give  bread  to  you. 

®te  [rfjettft  i^t  eitt  Sud).  She  gives  her  a  book. 

6r  baut  t^nctt  ein  §au^.  He  builds  them  a  house. 

(Sr  baut  Stinen  ein  §au^.  He  builds  a  house  for  you.\^ 

Observe  :  The  German  dative  forms  are  rendered  into  Eng- 
hsh  by  a  pronoun  simply  before  the  direct  object,  and  by  a 
pronoun  with  *  to  '  or  *  for  '  after  the  direct  object. 

EXERCISE   VIII 

befucf)en,  to  visit,  call  on.  Iteben,  to  love, 

ber  greunb,  friend.  ba^  ^apie'r,  paper^. 

bie  greuttbe,  friends.  tutl,  to  do. 

jatPO^t,  yes  (indeed),  O  yes.  n)Un[(^en,  to  wish, 
ber  8arm,  noise..' 

Idioms  :  SefurffC  tttac^Cn,  to  make  calls,  pay  visits. 

Suft  ^atien  (JU  +  infin.),  to  have  a  mind  to,  want  to. 

A.  I.  8obt  ber  Secret  eu(^  oft,  Sinber?  2.  ^a,  er  (obt  un^ 
oft.    3.  J)te  ©(filler  finb  aufmer!fam  unb  ber  Scorer  fobt  fie. 

4.  2Bir  Ueben  unfere  J^ante  unb  bringen  i^r  oft  Sfumen. 

5.  Unfer  SSater  ift  fe^r  giittg  unb  h)tr  Iteben  t^n.  6.  (gr 
er;^al)(t  un^  oft  9Bcir^en  unb  iDir  t)oren  fie  gem.  7-  8tebft  bu 
mtc^,  mcin  ^inb?    8.  ^amo^I,  tc^  liebe  bit^,  aSater.    9.  ©ie 


22  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  24 

tinber  be^  g^at^bar^  finb  artig  unb  njtr  fptelen  gem  tntt  i^nett- 

10.  SBtr  fptelen  ni^t  gem  tntt  bir ;  bu  bift  unartig.  n.  5)er 
©artner  brtngt  ba^  ©emufe  guv  ®tabt  unb  tierfauft  e^  ba. 
12.  gr  t)erfauft  mir  t)tel  ©emilfe.  13.  9Ser!auft  er  end)  auc^ 
®emufe?  14-  2Ba^  fc^enfen  @ie  bem  Wdb(i)tn?  15.  SBir 
f(f)en!en  t^m  etne  "^uppe,  16.  ^c^  ^abe  8uft,  etnett  ©palter* 
gang  ntit  -3^nen  ju  maiJ)en.  17-  ^t^  t)ore  einen  ?drm ;  ^oren 
©ie  i^n  au^  ?  18.  ^efu(J)en  @ie  ^'^re  greunbe  oft?  19.  -3a, 
n)ir  befuc^en  fie  oft.  20.  ^^c^  ^abe  feine  8uft,  ^efud)e  gu 
ntarf)en.  21.  3=(^  iDunfi^e  einen  :93rief  ju  fc^reiben ;  trer  ^at 
meine  geber?  22.  Sari  ^at  fie.  23.  3Bo  ift  niein  'ipaiDier? 
24.  ^ii)  ^abe  e^  ^ier. 

B,  Answer  in  German:  i.  SBer  'ijat  nteinen  Sfeiftift? 
2.  §at  er  au(^  meine  geber?  3.  §oren  ®ie  ben  Sarm? 
4.  2Ben  liebft  bu,  ntein  Sinb?  5.  ®pie(t  i^r  gem  mit  mir? 
6.  9Ber  pflanjt  ba^  ©emufe?    7-  SBo  tterfauft  er  bie  :93 lumen? 

8.  §aben  @ie  8uft,  einen  ©pajiergang  mit  un^  5U  ma^en? 

9.  2Ba^  fdienfft  bu  bem  9^a^bar?    10.  SBa^  f^enfft  bu  mir? 

11.  S^iden  ®ie  ber  gran  ^©lumen?  12.  ?obt  ber  ge^rer 
feine  ©filler?  13.  2Ba^  er jcifilt  euc^  bie  8et)rerin ?  14.  SBa^ 
f^enft  bie  abutter  ben  Sinbern?  15.  SBa^  fc^enft  ^f)nen 
^f)re  a)Mter?  16.  SBem  fi^enft  fie  ben  ^afl?  17.  SBa^  tut 
ber  ©artner?  18.  SBa^  tut  i{)r,  tinber?  19.  2Ba^  tun  ®ie, 
§err53raun? 

C.  I.  What  do  you  wish  to  do?  2.  I  wish  to  visit  my 
friend.  3.  I  like  to  visit  him.  4.  The  gardener*s  children 
wish  to  play  with  us.  5.  We  do  not  want  to  play  with  them. 
6.  We  like  to  play  with  you,  Charles.  7.  Our  neighbor  gives 
us  flowers.  8.  His  gardener  brings  them  to  us.  9.  We  thank 
him  for   his  flowers.     10.  Does   he   bring  you  also   flowers? 

11.  The  gardener  sells  his  vegetables  ;  he  sells  them  in  the  city. 

12.  We  do  not  praise  you;  you  are  not  attentive.  13.  Why 
do  you  not  learn  your  lesson?  14.  I  am  learning  it  now. 
15.  Do   you   need   your  book?     16.  Yes,  I  need   it;    please 


§25] 


LESSON  IX 


23 


bring  it  to  me.     17.  Do  you  hear  me?     18.  Yes,  I  hear  you 
quite  well. 

D,  gefeftM: 

2lm  §au^  ift  eiti  ©arten, 
©a  bin  trf)  f 0  gem ! 
©a  ^Upf  ic^  unb  faring'  tc^ 
Urn  ^aum  unb  nm  Seet ; 


J)a  rnf  ic^  unb  fing'  \i), 
@o  laut  e^  nur  ge^t : 
-3m  ®arten,  tnt  ©arten, 
S)a  bin  t(^  f 0  gem ! 


25. 


LESSON  IX 
2Rcin  Model  and  Possessive  Adjectives. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc. 

Fem, 

NeuL 

All  Genders. 

N, 

me  in 

meine 

mein 

meine,  my 

G, 

meinc^ 

meincr 

meine^ 

meincr,  of  my 

D. 

me  in  cm 

meincr 

mein  cm 

mein  en,  (to,  for)  my 

A, 

meineu 

meine 

mein 

meine,  my 

Remarks  :  i.  Thus  are  declined  the  possessive  adjectives  : 
mein,  my.       fein,  his,  its.  unfer,  our.       3=^r,  your, 

bein,  thy.  ii^r,  her,  its,  their.        euer,  your. 

Also,  ein,  a,  one  (sing,  only)  ;  fein,  no,  not  any. 

Note.  — Unfcr  usually  drops  e  before  final -m  or  -tt  (utiferm,  unfcrn). 

2.  Observe  the  correspondence  between  the  pronoun  of  ad- 
dress and  the  possessive  : 

2>U  lemft  beine  3lufgabe.  You  learn  your  lesson. 

S^r  lemt  cure  3lufgabe.  You  learn  your  lesson. 

I      ©te  lemen  3^1^^  3lufgabe.  You  leam  your  lesson. 

3.  Observe  also  the  correspondence  for  the  third  person, 
especially  for  fein  and  if)r,  of  inanimate  objects  : 

©ieSIume  t)erliertt^rc  garbe.     The  flower  loses  jtscolor. 
5) a^  ®ra^  tierliert  fetne  garbe.     The  grass  loses  its  color. 
®ie  ^at  t^ren  §Ut.  She  has  her  hat. 


24  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  25 

4.  The  termination  of  the  possessive  adjective  depends  on 
the  gender,  number,  and  case  of  the  noun  it  quahfies  (the 
thing  possessed)  ;  the  stem  depends  on  the  gender  and  num- 
ber of  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  it  refers  (the  possessor), 
as  in  the  examples  above. 

Note.  —  The  neut.  diminutive  tfa^  35Zabd)en,  *the  girl,*  takes  the  pers. 
pron.  and  poss.  adj.  referring  to  it  in  the  fern.,  unless  a  child  is  meant : 
S)ag  9}iabc^en  liebt  i^xt  Tlnttex;  fie  liebt  fie,  *The  girl  loves  her 
mother;   she  loves  her.' 

EXERCISE    IX 

ba^  ^abestmmer,  bathroom.  fi^ett,  to  sit. 

ba^  ^ttt^  bed.  fottft,  else,  or  else,  otherwise. 

bretttiett,  to  burn.  ba^    ©peifesimmer,    dining- 

ber  Siid}erf(^ran!,  book-case.  room. 

effen,  to  eat.  ber  @|3ieget,  mirror. 

fiinf,  five.  ba^     ©tubierjimmer,    study 

ba^  ®ef(^en!,  gift,  present.  (room). 

gett)0t)nli(^,  usually,  generally,  bte  ©tittle,  the  chairs. 

ba^  §au^,  house.  fucf)ett,  to  look  for,  seek. 

{)inter  (^^/.),  behind.  t)ter,  four. 

Itegen,  to  lie,  be  situated,  be.  ba^     SBo^njimmer,    sitting- 

neben  (da^.),  near,  beside.  room. 

fc^Iafett,  to  sleep.  3^^tt,  ten. 

ba^  ®(i)Iaf3ttnmer,  bed-room. 

A.  Continue  the  following,  including  all  forms  of  the  third 
person :  i.  Qii)  [uc^e  Tueinen  <33(et[ttft,  bu  .  .  .  betnen  .  .  .  zc. 

2.  3cf)  [(f)i(fe  metnem  Sruber  ein  ©efdjenf,  2C,  3.  Qti)  f^enfe 
meiner  (Sc^iDcfter  eine  "^uppe.  4.  Qii)  braui^e  mein  ^vai) 
(meitte  :33u(^er)  nidjt.  5.  ^ij  befurfie  ben  greunb  meine^ 
S3ruber^  (meiner  ©(^tDefter).  6.  Qd)  ju(J)e  ba^  §au^  meiner 
greunbe.    7.  Qd)  ttebe  meine  SJJntter. 

B,  I.  §ter  ftefjt  unfer  .^an^.     2.  Q\t  e^  ni^t  pbfd)? 

3.  Qd)  mo^ne  im  §anfe  mit  meinen  ©riibern  nnb  meiner 


§  25]  LESSON   IX  25 

©(^mefter.  4-  Uttfer  55ater  unb  unfere  Tlntttv  n)o{)nen  and) 
\m  |)aufe.  5.  Unfer  §au^  f)at  nur  ^t^n  ^tmmer  unb  eine 
Mrfjc.  6.  aStr  fi^en  gen)ot)n(i(^  ttn  3BoI)n3itnnier.  7.  2Bir 
effen  itn  ©peifejimmer  unb  fd)(afen  in  unfern  (Sc^Iafjimmern, 

8.  T)a^  (Stubierjintnter  meine^  SSater^  ift  gro^  unb  fc^dn; 

9.  (Sr  arbeitet  {e^t  in  [einent  ©tubierjimmer,  10.  Seine 
53u(^er  fte^en  im  Silc^erfrfjranf  ober  Uegen  auf  feinent  ®c^reib^ 
tifc^.  II.  Qm  Sinter  brennt  immer  ein  geuer  int  dimmer. 
12.  S)a^  §au^  \)at  fiinf  ©^lafsimmer.  13.  Qm  ©c^Iaf^^ 
gintmer  meiner  $Kutter  [te^en  il}r  SSttt  unb  Dier  ©tittle, 
14-  ®te  genfter  i^re^  3^^^^^^  fi^^  9^o6  unb  mac^en  e^  \}tU, 
15.  3^^r  (Spiegel  fte^t  neben  bent  genfter,  16.  ®a^  ©abe^ 
gintmer  ift  neben  bent  Sif)Iaf  jintnter  nteine^  3Sater^,  1 7.  ^in^ 
ter  bent  §dufe  ift  ein  ©arten.  18.  §aben  Sie  au^  einen 
©arten  Winter  Qijxtm  §aufe  ? 

C.  Answer  in  German,  introducing  possessive  forms  where 
possible:  i.  Sa^  fud)t^arl?  2.  SBent  fc^icfen  Sie  ein 
©ef^enf?  3.  SBeffen  SdMjex  bxandjcn  Sie?  4.  Sen  be- 
fu(^en  Sie?  5.  ^ft  ba^  Qijv  §au^?  6.  Set  n)oI)nt  in 
^'firent  §aufe?  7.  SBie  tjiele  3'^^^^  f)^^  -Sf)^  §au^? 
8.  SBo  arbeitet  ^f)r  §err  33ater?  9.  ©0  ift  fein  Stubier- 
jintmer?  10.  So  finb  feine  ^nd)ev  getDd^nlic^?  n.  SBa^ 
liegt  fonft  auf  feinent  Sdjteibtifc^  ?  12.  SBa^  (iegt  auf 
3<^rent  Jifrfie?  13.  So  fte{)t  ber  Spiegel  Qijxc^  ©rubers? 
14.  Setc^e^  3^^^^^'  ift  91^0^  unb  f)ell?  15.  Seffen  ©arten 
ift  ba^?    16.  So  ift  ber  ©arten  be^  5«a(f)bar^  ? 

Z>.  I.  That  is  my  house.  2.  Your  house  is  quite  pretty. 
3.  I  live  here  with  my  wife  and  our  two  children.  4.  The 
sister  of  my  wife  lives  here  also  (also  here).  5.  She  is  the 
aunt   of  my   children.      6.    My   house   has   only   ten  rooms. 

7.  The  children  sleep  in  a  room  beside  my  wife's  bedroom. 

8.  Our  children  are  small  and  they  sleep  in  one  bed.  9.  In 
their  room  [there]  are  also  two  chairs  and  a  table.     10.  Their 


26  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§26 

table  stands  near  the  window.  11.  I  work  usually  in  my  study. 
12.  My  wife  likes  to  sit  there  beside  me.  13.  Our  children 
play  in  the  garden  behind  the  house.  14.  My  neighbor's 
children  are  playing  with  them.  15.  What  is  the  girl  doing? 
.16.  She  is  playing  with  her  dog.  17.  Is  the  boy  playing  with 
the  dog?  18.  No,  he  is  playing  with  his  ball.  19.  My  chil- 
dren like  to  play  with  our  neighbor's  children. 

E,  8efeftlt(J:  , 

S)ie  (Sonne  ge^t  jnr  ^JiltV  ^/^ 
2?pm  gelbe  tommt  bie  ®u^         Y        i 
Unb  an(^  bte  ©c^cifletn  alljumat,/^''^^'""^^"^  " 
(Sie  freu'n  fic^  [dE)on  auf  t()ren  ©tatL 
3^m  ^aum  ba  fingt  !etn  23ogeI  mef)r, 
®ie  bunfte  9?a(i)t  ^ie^t  fd)nel(  ba^er, 
-53alb  iDirb  ber  a)?onb  am  §immel  fte^n^ 
^c^  ben!,  '^  ift  ^eit  gn  «ett  p  gef)n ! 
®uf  5)?ad)t !    ®uf  5«a(i)t !    2luf  SBteberf e^n ! 

LESSON  X 

26.  Imperfect  Indicative  of  fetn  and  l^aben^ 

I  was,  etc.  I  had,  etc. 

\i)  n)ar         n)ir  n^aren 
bu  marft       i^r  n)art 
er  n)ar         fie    n)aren 

Formal :  (gte  niaven. 

27.  Imperfect  Indicative  of  marflCtt,  to  make. 

I  made,  was  making,  did  make,  Was  I  making?  did  I  make  ? 

etc.  etc. 

t^  mai^tc  n)tr  mac^ten  niac^te  i(^?    ntai^ten  mtr? 

bu  mai^teft         t^r  ntai^tet  niad)teft  bu?  marfitet  tt)r? 

er  ntacE)tc  fie    nta(^ ten  ntad)te  er?     ntadjten  fie? 

Formal:  ©ie  marten*  Formal:  marten  Sie? 


bu  ^QXit\i 
er  \)M,t 

n)ir  l^atten 
i^r  ^attet 
fie    fatten 

Formal : 

@ie  fatten. 

§  3o]  LESSON   X  27 

Observe  :  A  large  number  of  verbs  (called  'weak')  form  the 
imperfect  indicative  like  madden,  but  infinitive  stems  ending  in 
-t,  -hf  or  consonants  after  which  t  cannot  be  pronounced,  in- 
sert e  between  stem  and  ending  (arbeitete,  regncte,  :c.). 

28.  Strong  Imperfects. 

(gtngen,  to  sing.  48Ieiben,  to  remain.  Xnn,  to  do. 

I  sang,  etc.  I  remained,  etc.  I  did,  etc. 

id)   fang  id)   blieb  tc^  tat 

bu   fang  ft  bu  btiebft  bu  tatft^ 

er    fang  er    btieb  er    tat 

tt)ir  fang  en  iDtr  blieb  en  xoiv  tat  en  / 

if)r  fangt  i^r  btieb t  it)r  tatct  - 

fie  fang  en  fie  blieb  en  fie  tat  en 

Observe  :  i.  Many  verbs  (called  'strong')  form  the  imper- 
fect indicative  by  changing  the  stem  vowel,  without  adding  a 
tense  ending. 

2.     The  person  endings  are  the  same  as  in  other  verbs. 

Note.  — The  impf.  indie,  of  sueh  strong  and  irregular  verbs  as  are  used 
in  the  exercises  will  be  given,  for  the  present,  in  the  vocabularies. 

29.  Adverbial  Accusative.  ] 
©r  n)ar  btefcn  ©ontmer  t)ier.        He  was  here  this  summer, 
gr  n)ar  einen  5Konat  ^ier.           He  was  here  a  month. 
®a^  Snd)  toftete  einen  3)oHar.   The  book  cost  a  dollar. 

Observe:  Time  and  price  are  usually  expressed  by  the 
accusative. 

30.  Word  Order. 

Qd)  ^abe  ^ente  fein  ©etb.  I  have  no  money  to-day. 

Wtin  93etter  ift  ^ente  ^ter.  My  cousin  is  here  to-day. 

§ente  ift  ba^  ^Better  fdjon.         The  weather  is  fine  to-day. 
-3ni  ®arten  fte()t  ein  -Saunt.        A  tree  stands  in  the  garden. 

Observe:  i.  Adverbial  expressions  of  time  precede  noun 
objects  and  other  adverbs. 


28 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§30 


2.  When  any  member  of  a  principal  sentence  other  than 
the  subject  precedes  the  verb  the  subject  comes  after  the  verb, 
which  is  the  second  idea  in  a  principal  assertive  sentence. 


EXERCISE  X 


a'nttDOrten,  to  answer,  reply. 

batb,  comp,  et)er,  soon. 

beginnen,  begann,  to  begin, 
commence. 

bleiben,  blieb,  to  remain,  stay. 

bann,  then. 

ber  5)oHar,  dollar. 

erreii^en,  to  reach. 

frifd),  fresh,  cool. 

fritt)er,  earlier,  formerly. 

geben,  gab,  to  give. 

ge^en,  gtng,  to  walk,  go. 

geftern,  yesterday. 

ber  ®ott,  God. 

bte  ^anb,  hand. 

ber  IJ'ttedit,  manservant,  la- 
borer. 

bie  Snei^te,  laborers. 

foften,  to  cost. 


long 


lange    {adv.),    long, 

time, 
bie.  iUeber,  songs, 
na^  (dat.),  after. 
neuUc^,  lately,  the  other  day. 
O^tte  {ace.) J  without. 

ber  9tegenfd)irm,  umbrella. 

fagen,  to  say,  tell. 

fe^ett,  |a^,  to  see. 

fingen,  fatig,  to  sing. 

bie  ©tunbe,  hour/^ 

ber  SBalb,  forest,  wbod(s). 

tDann?  when? 

treiter  {adv.),  further,  along, 

on. 
ba^  Setter,  weather. 
tDO^ttt?  where  (to)?  whither? 
iDUnberfi^dn,  very  beautiful. 
JU  §aufe,  at  home. 


A,  I.  ^tu\x6)  ma(^te  \6)  einen  ®pa3tergattg  mit  einem 
^reuttbe.  2.  gr  !)atte  einen  ®to(f  in  [einer  §anb  unb  id) 
I)atte  meinen  9?egenfc^irm.  3.  ®a^  SBetter  iDar  f^on  unb  bie 
?uft  frifd).  4-  ,f^]i  e^  ni(f)t  icf)on  unter  ©otte^  §imme(?^' 
fagte  id).  5.  „3^^of)t!''  anttnortete  mein  greunb,  „e<3  ift 
n)unberf(^on.''  6.  SBir  gingen  meiter  unb  fa^en  balb  einen 
©arten.  7.  -3^  ®arten  tDaren  ^net^te.  8.  ©ie  arbeiteten 
fe^rflei^ig.  9.  Sie  pflanjten  Slunten  unb  ®emlt[e.  10.  2Bir 
fa^en  auc^  ein  §au^  neben  bent  ®arten.  n.  .^inter  bent 
@aufe  it)ar  ein  SBalb.     12.  ^n  bent  §aufe  it)o^nte  ber  ®art^ 


§  3o]  LESSON   X  29 

ner  mit  feiner  grau  unb  feinen  Sinbern.  13.  ®ie  grau  be^ 
©drtner^  fdienfte  un^  Sfumen  unb  wix  banften  i^r,  14.  333ir 
blteben  eine  ®tunbe  itn  SBalbe  l^tnter  •bem  ©arten  unb  mein 
greunb  fang  etn  8ieb.     15.   S)ann  gingen  iDir  nacf)  ^au[e. 

16.  g^  begann  ju  regnen  unb  tvxx  brauc^ten  ben  $Regenf(f)irm» 

17.  9?ac^  einer  ©tunbe  erretc^ten  mir  unfer  §au^  in  ber 
etabt. 

^.    Continue:  i.  ©eftem  mar  ic^  ntc^t  l^ter,  ,  .  ,  bu,  2c. 

2.  3<(^  fjatte  nteinen  ©tod,  bu  ♦  ,  ♦  betnen,  2c.  3.  grii^er 
n)o^nte  td^  in  ber  ©tabt*     4-  ^'c^  arbeitete  eine  (gtunbe. 

5.  -3(^  blieb  eine  ©tunbe  im  355a(be.  6.  Qd)  fang  t^iele  Sieber, 
7.  Qii)  ging  geftern  jur  @tabt.  8.  aJJein  9tegenf(^irm  foftete 
einen  Dollar,  bein,  2c, 

C.  Answer:  i.  SBa^  tat  id^  neuli^  ?   2.  SBer  ging  mit  ntir? 

3.  SBie  mv  ba^  ^Setter?      4.  SBer  arbeitete?      5.  SBo? 

6.  gBeffen§au^faf)enn)ir?  7- SBer  tDofjutentiti^nt?  8.  SBo 
tuar  fein  §au^?  9.  9Ba^  fd)en!te  un^  bie  gran?  10.  SBa^ 
tt)ar  Winter  bent  ©arten?  n.  SBie  lange  imren  n)ir  ba? 
12.  SBa^  tat  ntein  greunb?  13.  2Ba^  taten  mir  bann? 
14.  Srau(J)ten  n)ir  ben  Otegenf d)irm ?  15.  SBoI)in  gingen  n^ir? 
16.  SBann  erreii^ten  tt)ir  unfer  §au^? 

Z>.  I.I  visited  my  friend  Schafer  yesterday.  2.  I  said  to 
him:  "Do  you  want  to  take  a  walk  with  me  ?'*  3.  "No,"  re- 
pHed  he,  "  I  do  not  want  to  take  a  walk  to-day,  I  am  not  quite 
well."  4.  Then  I  went  without  him.  5.  He  remained  at  home. 
6.  The  weather  was  not  very  fine,  but  it  was  not  raining.  7.  I 
wished  to  visit  a  friend.  8.  My  friend  lived  in  a  house  near 
the  wood.  9.  His  house  had  a  garden.  10.  His  gardener  was 
working  in  the  garden  with  the  manservant.  11.  He  was 
planting  cabbage  and  cauHflower.  12.  The  gardener's  wife 
was  picking  flowers.  13.  My  friend  gave  me  the  flowers. 
14.  I  remained  an  hour  in  his  house.  15.  His  wife  played 
on  the  (auf  bent)  piano,  and  sang  me  a  song.     16.  I  thanked 


30  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  31 

her  for  the  song.  17.  Then  we  took  a  walk  in  the  woods 
behind  his  house.  18.  After  an  hour  I  went  home  again. 
19.  It  began  to  rain,  and  I  needed  my  umbrella. 


LESSON  XI 

31.  2)tcfcr  Model. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc,       Fe?n,  Neut.  All  Genders, 

N.  biefcr  biefe  bief  e^,  this  bie[e,  these 

G,  biefcj^  btefer  biefc^,  of  this  biefcr,  of  these 

D.  biefem  bte[er  biefcm,(to,  for)  this  bief  en, (to,  for)  these 

A.  bie[ett  biefe  biefe^,  this  biefc,  these 

Remarks  :    i.  In  the  same  way  decline  jcttcr, '  that '  (yonder) ; 
jebcr,  '  each,' ' every ' ;  meldjer?  *  which?' 

Notes. —  i.  S)tefer  is  commonly  used  for  'that,'  as  well  as  for  *this.' 
2.  The  unchanged  bic^   (also  jeneS  and  IDelc^e^?)   is  used,  like  ba^ 

(§8),    before   fein :    ^\t^  tft    tneine    (gd)n)efter,    *This   is  my   sister'; 

SBcIt^C)^  finb  tneine  S3u(^er  ?    *  Which  are  my  books? ' 

2.   Thus  also  the  short  forms  of  the  possessive  pronouns  : 

tnetner,  mine.  feiner,  his,  its.       .  un[(e)rer,  ours. 

beiner,  thine.  i^rer,  hers,  its,  theirs.        eurer,  yours. 

^'^rer,  yours. 

Further,  ettier,  one ;  fettier,  none. 

Note. — The  contracted  forms  mein§,  bein§,  fein6,  eing,  !ein8,  are 
often  used  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  neut.  sing. 

32.  Use  of  Possessive  Pronouns. 

3^1^  ^abe  meinett  §Ut;  er  ^t  I  have  my  hat;    he  has  his; 

fetnen;  fie  ^at  i^ren.  she  has  hers. 

2Btr  ^ben  unfere  -93itc!^er  unb  We  have  our  books,  and  you 

®te  ^aben  -3f)re.  have  yours, 

©tefer  §ut  tft  mein(er). '  This  hat  is  mine. 


§  32]  LESSON   XI  31 

Observe  :  i.  The  possessive  pronouns  correspond  with  their 
antecedent  like  the  possessive  adjectives  (§  25,  4),  but  their 
case  depends  on  their  relation  in  the  sentence. 

2.  When  used  as  predicates,  they  may  also  have  the  unin- 
flected  forms  mein,  beiti,  fein,  :c. 

EXERCISE  XI 

ber  3lbenb,  evening.  ba^  Sanb^U^,  country-house. 

an  (^^/.),  on,  by,  at.  ber  SKo'nat,  month. 

auf  ®efu(^,  on  a  visit.  ba^  2JJotorboot^  motor-boat. 

auf  bem  8anbe,  in  the  country,  ber  See,  lake. 

bte  2lu^ftcl)t,  view,  prospect.  fi^en,  fa^,  sit. 

bet  {dat),  at,  near,  by.  fo,  as,  thus. 

bet  un^,  at  our  house.  ba^  Ufer,  shore,  bank. 

beltJUnbern,  to  admire.  bie  3Seranba,  veranda. 

fa^ren,    fu^r,    to   go    (in   a  Derbringen,      t)erbrac^te^     to 

vehicle),  drive,  etc.  spend,  pass  (time), 

bte  i^e'rien  (//.  only),  holidays.  t)On  {dat,),  of,  from. 

I^eute^  to-day.  ba^  Staffer,  water, 

bie  -3n[el,  island.  bie  ^txif  time, 
ber  Sa^n,  row-boat,  canoe,  skiff. 

A,  I.  933o  tierbrat^ten  ®ie  btefen  ©otnnter  bie  ^erten? 
2.  SBtr  tjerbra^ten  unfere  auf  bem  8anbe;  tt)o  t)erbrac^ten  ®ie 
^\)xt  ?  3.  ©ir  t)erbracf)ten  unfere  an  einem  ©ee.  4.  Unfer 
Sanb^au^  fte^t  auf  einer  ^Xi\d  in  biefem  (See.  5.  (Sin^reunb 
metne^  9Sater^,  §err  5KUHer,  ^t  and)  etn^,  aber  fein^  ift  nid)t 
auf  ber  ^nfel,  e^  fte^t  am  Ufer  be^  @ee^.  6.  ©ie  uerbrac^ten 
®ie  bte  3^^^?  7-  ^^^  t)erbrad}ten  fie  getDo^n(t(^  auf  bem 
aSaffer.  8.  Q6)  ^atte  ein  9Kotorboot  unb  meine  greunbe 
l^atten  aucf)  ein^.  9.  -3^re^  voax  grower  ate  mein^.  10.  9J?etn 
greunb  3l(bert  tDar  bei  un^  auf  -Sefud).  n.  ^^eber  t)on  un^ 
l^atte  einen  Sa^n.  12.  Seiner  xoax  ni(^t  fo  gro^  tt)te  meiner. 
13.  SBir  fu^ren  jeben  Slag  auf  bem  SBaffer.  14.  (Sr  ful)r  in 
f einem  ta^ne  unb  id)  in  meinem.    15.  ^eben  Slbenb  fa^en 


32  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  32 

wiv   auf   unferer   aSeranba  unb   betDunberten  bie  2lu^fict)t, 
16.  ®o  t)erbrac{)tett  mir  einen  SJionat  fet)r  angenef)Tn, 

B.  Fill  in  the  blanks  with  a  suitable  word  or  words  of  the 
biefer  model:  i.  aJJein  ategenfrfiirm  foftete  einen  ©ollar;  mie 

.  t)iel  foftete  .  .  ,  ?  2.  ^ft  ^^re  geber  fo  gut  trie  .  _  ? 
3.  ©tefe^  «u(^  ift  ,  .  .  ;  n)erd}e^  tft  .  _  ?  4.  3JJetn  3Sater 
ift  (titer  al^  ,  .  *  5.  ^c^  ^abe  fein  a^effer;  ^benSie  ,  ,  ,? 
6.  ^aben  Sie  etnen  Sleifttft?  Qd)  ^abe  .  ,  .  7.  DKein 
«Ieiftift  ift  Heiner  aU  .  .  ,  8.  ^^r  «Ietftift  ift  fteiner 
al^  .  ,  ♦  9.  SBelc^er  @ut  ift  grower,  ,  .  ,  ober  .  .  .  ? 
10.  9Bo  ift  ein  ©tod?    @ier  ift  ,  _ 

C.  Answer,  using  pronominal  forms:  i.  ^at  §err  9JJUHer 
ein  8anbf)au^?  2.  ^eli^e^  8anb^au^  ift  f(^oner,  biefer  ober 
jene^?  3.  SBeffen  9}?otorboot  ift  grower?  4.  SBeffen  ift 
fteiner?  5.  9BeI(^e^  9)?otorboot  bett)unbern  ®ie?  6.  gu^r 
fein  ^aljn  fc^netter  al^  beiner?  7.  SBeffen  ®a^n  brau^ten 
fie  geftern?  8.  aBeId)en  Sa^n  braud^en  wiv  ^eute,  biefen 
ober  jenen?  9.  9luf  wd(i)tv  SSeranba  fa^en  @ie  ?  10.  SBeffen 
greunb  ift  3IIbert  ?  11.  Sinb  biefe  SSuiijtx  me  in  ?  12.  SBeffen 
S3Ieiftift  ift  bie^  ? 

D.  I.  Has  your  father  a  country-house?  2.  Yes,  he  has 
one.  3.  Where  is  his  country-house?  4.  It  is  (stands)  on 
(an)  the  shore  of  a  lake.  5.  My  father's  friend,  Mr.  Mliller, 
has  also  one.  6.  His  is  beside  ours.  7.  His  house  is  larger 
than  ours,  but  ours  is  prettier  than  his.     8.  Here  we  passed 

X  our  holidays  this  summer.  9.  Where  did  you  pass  yours? 
^\^io.  I  passed  mine  on  an  island  in  the  lake.  11.  My  friend 
Albert  Schafer  visited  me  there.  12.  Each  of  us  had  a  canoe. 
13.  Which  canoe  went  (fa^ren)  faster,  yours  or  his?  14.  His 
went  faster  than  mine.  15.  We  went  on  the  water  every  day, 
^'^^^  or  took  a  walk  on  the  shore^  16.  The  view  from  our  veranda 
was  very  fine.  17.  We  often  sat  there  and  admired  it. 
18.  Thus  we  passed  the  summer  very  pleasantly.  19.  After  a 
month  we  went  (fa'^ren)  to  the  city  with  my  father  and  mother. 


§  32]  LESSON   XII  33 

E,  gefeftud: 

®u  bift  iDte  etne  Stume 

@o  ^olb  unb  f(^on  unb  rein; 

3cf)  fc^au'  bic^  an,  unb  SBe^mut  ~  5>i~J^V^t>t-^ 

(Scl)teicf)t  mir  in^  §erj  ^inein-    jA<uA^- 

9Ktr  tft,  al^  ob  \i)  bie  §anbe 
3luf^  §aupt  btr  (egen  follf , 
48etenb,  ba^  @ott  bii^  erl)a(te 
®o  rein  unb  [df)dn  unb  ^olb. 


LESSON  XII 
Review  Lessons  VII-XI. 

EXERCISE   XII 

bitten,  bat,  to  request ;  ask  for  ba^  SJJittterdfjen,  mother  dear. 

(urn,  acc^,  oben,  at  the  top,  above, 

ber  ®urft,  thirst.  reic^en,  to  pass,  hand, 

burftig,  thirsty.  rid^tig,  right,  correct. 

entf(^ulbigen,  to  excuse.  f(J)einen,  f(l)ien,  to  seem, 

bie  gami'Ue,  family.  fcfimeden,  to  taste, 

ba^  grdulein,  young  lady,  Miss,  f (J)neiben,  f (J)nitt,  to  cut. 

bie  ®abel,  fork.  ber  ©pargel,  asparagus, 

bie  ©abetn,  forks.  f))dt,  late, 

bie  ^artoffel,  potato.  ber  ^tetter,  plate. 

bie  S'artoffein,  potatoes.  bie  JeHer,  plates, 

fomnten,  !am,  to  come.  bie  U^r,  clock,  watch, 

leib  tun  (dat,  of  pers.),  to  be  um  {ace),  around,  for. 

sorry.  UUteu,  at  the  bottom,  below, 

lieber,  rather.  SBil^elm,  William, 

ber  Soffel,  spoon.  jur  @c^u(e,  to  school, 

bie  ?dffe(,  spoons.  gtt)ei,  two. 

bie  3}Jagb,  maid.  Jtt)ifc^en  {dat.),  between, 
bie  mWij,  milk. 


34  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  32 

Idioms:  i.  ^^  Ijabc  '^wtft  (bin  burftig),  I  am  thirsty. 

2.  1)a^  fdjmerft  mlr,  I  like  (the  taste  of)  that. 

3.  3t^  Cffe  ikhcVf  IC,  I  should  rather  eat,  I  prefer,  etc. 

4.  ^iefc  mr  gcl)t  rid)tig,  This  watch  is  right. 

5.  Sd)  bailfe,  No,  thank  you. 

A,  I.  S5te  gamtlie  fi^t  am  Jtfi^e,  2.  Oben  fi^t  ber  SSater, 
unten  bte  Wnttcv,  jtDifdjen  tf)nen  fi^en  bte  Sinber.  3.  Unfer 
3Sater  fi^neibet  un^  ba^  ?5I^if<f)»  4-  Sr  fc^netbet  e^  mit  etnem 
5Keffer,  5.  9Btr  effen  t)on  unferen  SleHertt.  6.  ^eber  t)on 
un^  l)at  einen  Xtlkx,  tin  3Jfeffer,  etne  ©abet  unb  einen  ?offeL 
7.  aJleiti  aWeffer  tft  fi^arf.  8.  SBil^elm  ^t  auc^  ein^,  aber 
fein^  tft  nidjt  fo  fc^arf  wk  metn^.  9.  3Kein^  tft  fc^arfer  al^ 
fettt^.  10.  ©te  3Magb  retc^t  bett  llmberti  ba^  ©emitfe. 
II.  2Bir  ^abett  ^eute  Sartoffeln  unb  (S|3argeL  12.  SBilttfc^eft 
bu  ©|)argel,  mem  -^uttge?  13.  Q6)  banfe,  3}Jittterc^en ;  er 
f(^me(ft  mtr  tttd)t,  14.  S^  effe  Iteber  Sartoffeltt.  15.  SBa^ 
tt)uttfd)eft  bu,  «ertt)a?  16.  Qd)  bttte  um  9KtI^  ;  id)  t)abe 
®urft.  1 7.  (S^  tft  je^t  3^tt,  jur  ®(^ute  ju  ge^en.  18.  ©eftern 
famen  iDtr  fpat*  19.  S)te  8el)rertn  fi^ten  bofe  ju  fetn.  20.  SBtr 
fagten :  „@^  tut  uu^  leib,  graulem  ©raun ;  unfere  Uf)r  ge^t 
nt(^t  rtc^ttg."    21.  S)ann  entf(^ulbtgte  fie  un^. 

B.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C  Continue  the  following  :  i.  3<(^  fi^e  (fa^)  am  3:ifd)e,  bU, 
:c.  2.  Qd)  fc^neibe  gleif(^  mit  einem  3J?effer.  3.  ^d)  ijabt 
(ijattt)  feinen  STelter.  4-  3(^  fotn  fpat  jur  (Sd)ule.  5.  .^d) 
reii^e  (reic^te)  ben  Sinbern  bie  Sartoffeln.  6.  Qd)  ^abe  (^atte) 
3:)urft.  7.  Q^  entfd}ulbige  (entfi^ulbigte)  bie  tinber.  8.  g^ 
tut  (tat)  mir  leib,  e^  .  .  *  bir,  2c. 

Z>.  I.  The  children  were  sitting  at  the  table  with  their  father 
and  mother.  2.  Their  father  cut  the  meat.  3.  He  cut  it  with 
a  knife.  4.  Each  of  them  had  two  knives,  two  forks,  and  two 
spoons.  5.  Charles'  knife  was  sharp;  it  was  sharper  than 
William's.     6.  William's  knife  was  not  so  sharp  as  his.     7.  The 


§  331  LESSON   XIII  35 

maid  handed  each  child  the  vegetables.  8.  They  had  potatoes 
and  asparagus.  9.  They  like  potatoes  and  asparagus.  10.  Mary 
was  thirsty,  and  her  mother  gave  her  milk.  11.  Yesterday  the 
children  were  (came)  late  to  (the)  school.  12.  Their  clock  was 
wrong.  13.  Ours  is  always  right.  14.  Their  father  and  mother 
asked  the  teacher  to  excuse  them. 

jE.  8efe[tii(f : 

(Etfd?gebet. 

@peife,  9Sater,  beitie  Stnber/        i  | «  T    i 
(j^X^    Jrofte  bie  betrubten  ®unber,  !j\Mr-^^^^ 
(Bpxiii)  ben  ®egen  ju  ben  ®aben,   ^ 
SBeI(^e  tDtr  je^t  Dor  nn^  ^aben, 
®a§  fie  un^  ju  biefem  8eben 
©tdrfe,  Sraft  unb  9?a^rnng  geben. 

—  3o^ann  ^etxmaxu 

LESSON  XIII 
33.  Strong  Declension  of  Nouns. 

I.  ber  ^unb,.dog.  II.  ber  Bof^n,  son. 

Sing.  Plur.  Sing,  Plur. 

N.  ber  ^unb        bie  §unbc  ber  @o^n        bie  @5^nc 

G,  be^  §unb(c))^  ber  §nnbc  be^  ©o^n(c)^  ber  ®3f)nc 

Z>.  bem  ©unb(e)    bengnnbcn  bem  ©o^n(c)    ben  ©B^nen 

A.  ben  ^^xxi^       bie  §nnbe  ben  ®o^n        bie  ©B^ne 

III.  bie  ^anb,  hand. 

Sing.  Plur. 

bie  ^anb  .     bie  §5nbc 
ber  |)anb       ber^ftnbe 
ber  $anb       ben^anbcn 
bie  ^anb       bie  ^iinbe 

Note.  —  For  classes  of  nouns  so  declined,  see  Lesson  XIX. 

Remarks:  i.  These  three  models  are  merely  variations  of 
the  same  type  of  noun  declension  (called  the  primary  form  of 
the  '  strong  declension  '). 


C; 


36  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§34 

2.  Feminines  are  invariable  in  the  singular ;  masculines  and 
neuters  take  -C)§  in  the  genitive  and  -c  in  the  dative  singular. 

Notes. —  i.  The  C  of  the  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  is  usual  in  monosyllables, 
less  so  in  polysyllables,  but  C  of  the  gen.  is  always  retained  after  final  §  sound. 

2.  The  C  of  the  dat.  sing,  is  omitted  when  a  prep,  immediately  precedes : 
au8  §0^,  *  of  wood';   but  exceptionally,  311  §aufc,  nac^  §aufe. 

3.  Nouns  in  -lli^  double  the  last  consonant  before  an  ending :  iBeforg* 
nt)^,  *  anxiety,'  gen.  sing.  iBeforgniffe^,  nom.  plur.  iBeforgitiffe;  so  also 
g  =  ff  after  short  stem  vowel :   glug,  *  river,'  gluffe^,  gliiff e. 

3.  All  add  -c  in  the  plural  with  additional  -n  in  the  dative. 

4.  Many  masculines  with  stem-vowel  a,  0,  u,  aiif  and  all  femi- 
nine monosyllables  of  this  model,  take  umlaut  in  the  plural. 

34.  Essential  Parts.  By  observing  the  case  forms  which 
are  identical,  the  full  declension  of  any  noun  may  be  inferred 
from  the  nominative  singular,  genitive  singular,  and  nominative 
plural,  which  are  given  in  the  dictionary  for  this  purpose. 

35.  Compound  Nouns.  In  compound  nouns  the  last  com- 
ponent only  is  declined ;  they  usually  follow  the  gender  of  the 
last  component : 

JVbm,  Sing.  Gen.  Sing.  Nom.  Plur, 

ber  §anbf(^ul),  glove.        be^  ^anbf(i)uKO^    i^t^  §anbf(^u^c 
ber  Obftbaum,  fruit-tree,  be^  Dbftbaum(c)^     bie  Cbftbaume 

Note.  —  Compounds  with  -Ittattn  have  as  plur.  -manner  (individuals  or 
occupations),  or  -IcutC  (collectively):  ©taat^manncr,  *  statesmen'; 
i^aitblcntC,  *  country-people.' 

36.  Rule  of  Gender.  Most  nouns  in  -tc!|,  -\%  -vx%  -ling,  and 
foreign  nouns  in  -a(,  -ti%  -ar,  -icr,  -or  are  masculine. 

EXERCISE   XIII 

N.B.     The  gen.  sing.  fem.  is  not  given,  being  the  same  as  the  nom. 

ber  9lrm,  -(e)^,  -e,  arm.  befommen,  befam,  to  get,  re- 

ber   9lrjt,   -e^,  ^X,  physician,  ceive. 

doctor.  brinoen,  brac^te,  to  bring. 


§  36]  LESSON  XIII  37 

ber  gfug,  -e§,  h,  river.  \^^^  <ij5j^erb,  -c^,  -e,  horse. 

ber  ?^'Ui  -e^,  "e,  foot.  ^jriidjtig,    splendid,    magnifi- 

ber  §anbfc^u^,  -(e)^,  -e,  glove.  cent. 

ba^  §eu,  -(e)^,  hay.  ba^  grfjaf,  -(e)  6,  -e,  sheep. 

ba§  3a^r,  -(e)^,  -e,  year.  ba^  ®cl)iff,  -(e) ^,  -e,  ship. 

ber  lopf,  -(e)^,  %  head.  fieben,  seven. 

bie  Su^,  "e,  cow.  ba^  Jier,  -(e) ^,  -e,  animal, 

tlitl^Ui^,  useful.  beast. 

ber  Dbftbaum,  -(e)^,  «e,  fruit-  bie  aSo^e,  -n,  week. 

tree.  Jtl)5lf,  twelve, 
ber  Dffijie'r,  -(e)^,  -e,  officer  ' 

(military). 

Note. — The  sign  °-  indicates  umlaut. 

A,  I.  Decline  in  full  without  umlaut :  ber  ®rief,  tneitt  3lrttt, 
iDet^er  Jag,  btefe^  3af)r,  !ein  ^nei^t.  2.  With  umlaut :  ber 
§ut,  mein  ®tuf)I,  btefer  -Saum,  n)elrf)er  @o^n,  biefe  ^u^,  ber 
Obftbaum.  3.  Supply  the  remaining  cases  of  the  following, 
explaining  how  they  may  be  inferred  from  the  forms  given : 
Norn.  Smg,  ©efc^en!  (//.),  Gen.  -(e)^,  Fiur.  -e ;  Z\\i)  (/«.), 
-e^,  -e;  ®opf  (//^.),  -(e)^,  -e ;  greunb  {m,),  -e^,  -e;  ®tabt 
(/),  —  "e  ;  (Sc^af  (;/.),  -(e)^,-e  ;  gug  {m.),-t^,  -t ;  Offijier 
(^.),  -(e)^,  -e  ;  9J?onat  (///.),  -(e)^,  -e. 

^.  I.  S)ie  ®i3I)ne  be^  Slr^te^  befurfjen  i^re  greunbe  in  ber 
®tabt.  2.  Sluf  biefetn  (Stu^Ie  Itegen  jiDei  §i:te  :  metner  unb 
3^^rer.  3.  SJJeine  §anbfd}U^e  liegen  auf  bem  %\\i)t.  4.  !Da^ 
§au^  meine^  greunbe^  fte^t  am  Ufer  be^  gluffe^.  5.  3n 
feinem  Oarten  fte^eti  jiDet  Obftbciume.  6.  ®te  @d)iffe  fa^rett 
auf  ben  gfiiffen.    7.  ©ie  ^ne(^te  bringen  ben  "ipferben  §eu. 

8.  9Bir  geben  ben  ^ferben,  ben  Silken  unb  ben  @cf)afen  §eu. 

9.  T)tefe  3:iere  finb  un^  fe^r  nii^Iic^.  10.  J)te  ^ferbe  ber 
Dffisiere  finb  )Dra(^tig.  n.  Sir  ^aben  jiDei  §anbe,  jmet 
^^itge,  gmet  9lrnte,  aber  nur  einen  Sopf.  12.  3=n  {ebent  -3a{)re 
finb  5U)o(f  aWonate.    13.  ®ieben  !j:age  nta^en  ^ine  SBodje. 


38  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§36 

14.  ^6)  f(^icfte  :^eute  meinetn  greunbe  etnen  Srief,  15.  Qn 
biefetn  4Briefe  erjdtilte  id)  i^m  Don  tneinen  gtuei  §unben. 
16.  ©iefe  iDaren  eitt  ®efd)enf  tjon  meinem  23ater.  17.  Qtbtn 
ZaQ  marf)e  id)  etnen  ©pajiergang  mit  meinen  ©unben*  18.  Q6) 
belom  geftern  ©efi^enfe  t)on  meinen  grennben.  19.  (5^  ift 
fet)r  angene^nt,  greunbe  ju  ^ben  unb  ®ef i^enfe  jn  befommen- 
C.   Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

Z>.  I.  I  received  a  present  yesterday  from  my  father. 
2.  He  sent  me  two  dogs.  3.  These  were  quite  young  and 
very  handsome.  4.  I  am  very  fond  of  these  animals.  5.  They 
take  a  walk  every  day  with  me.  6.  I  get  presents  often 
from  my  father  and  my  friends.  7.  That  is  very  pleasant  for 
me.  8.  I  received  two  letters  from  my  friend  Albert  to-day. 
9.  My  brother  brought  them  home.  10.  In  these  letters  Albert 
told  (erjd^ten)  me  about  (t)on)  his  holidays.  11.  He  spent 
them    in    the    country.     12.  His   uncle   has   a   house   there. 

13.  His  uncle  has  many  animals  —  horses,  cows,  sheep,   etc. 

14.  He  has  also  many  fruit-trees  behind  his  house.  15.  They 
are  large  and  very  fine.  16.  The  house  is  on  (an)  the  shore 
of  a  river.  17.  His  uncle  has  also  a  ship.  18.  My  friend 
used  to  sail  (ful^r)  every  day  in  this  shipT"  19.  Albert  is  the 
son  of  a  physician  in  this  city.  20.  His  father  lives  near 
(neben)  us.     21.  My  father  and  his  are  friends. 

£.    Sefeftiicf: 

IDanbrers  ZTad^tlteb. 

ilber  alien  ©ipfetn 

Qn  atten  SBt^feln  ^z^^^SAro^ 

©pureft  bu  '   ~ 

Saunt  etnen  @an(^ ;  }sS^^^3-W" 

!Dte  33c)gelein  j^tDetgen  int  SBalbe. 

SBarte  nur,  balbe 

9?n^eft  bu  auc^. 

— ©oet^e. 


§39]  LESSON  XIV  3.9 

LESSON  XIV 

37.  Perfect  Indicative  of  tjaicn,  fJJtcfeit* 

I  have  had  (played,  been  playing),  etc. 

ic^  f)abc  gel^abt  (gefpieft)  lt)ir  ^aben  ^tijabt  (gef^jiett) 

bu  ^aft  gel^abt  (gefpielt)  t^r  t)abt    ge^abt  (gejpie(t) 

cr  ijat    Qtijaht  (gefpielt)  fie   ^aben  ge^abt  (gefpielt) 

Formal :  (gie  ^abett  ge^abt  (gefpielt). 

Observe  :  i .  Verbs  conjugated  with  I)abcn  form  this  tense  by 
adding  the  past  participle  to  the  present  of  l^aben,  as  auxiliary. 

2.  The  past  participle  of  weak  verbs  is  usually  formed  by  pre- 
fixing gc-  and  adding  -t  (or  -et  after  b,  t,  etc. ;  see  §  27)  to  the 
stem,  e,g,  fpiel-en,  gC'fpieW;arbeit^en,  gc-arbeit-ct 

Note.  —  The  past  part,  of  all  strong  verbs  will  be  given  for  the  present 
in  the  vocabularies. 

38.  Use  of  Perfect  Tense. 

The  German  perfect  corresponds  to  the  English  perfect,  but 
also  often  replaces  the  English  past,  especially  when  referring 
to  a  period  recently  completed,  or  to  an  independent  fact  : 

Q6)  t)abe  e6  ge{)5rt.  I  have  heard  it. 

Qd}  ijahc  e^  geftern  ge^ort.         I  heard  it  yesterday. 

39.  Pluperfect  Indicative  of  ffaittif  lobem 

I  had  had  (praised,  been  praising),  etc. 

ii)  ^atte    ge^abt  (gefobt)  iDtr  fatten  ge^abt  (getobt) 

bu  ^atteft  ge^abt  (ge(obt)  il^r  l^attet  ge^bt  (gelobt) 

er  ^atte    ge^abt  (gelobt)  fie  Ijatttn  ge^abt  (getobt) 

Observe  :  Verbs  conjugated  with  Ijabctt  form  this  tense  by 
adding  the  past  participle  to  the  imperfect  of  ^abcn,  as  auxiliary. 


40  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§40 

40.  Word  Order  in  Principal  Sentences. 

Verb. 

@r  ift  l^eute  ntc^t  Iranf. 

©er  SSater  be^  ®^uler^        tDar  l^ier. 

§ter  ift  bet  SSater  be^  ©d^uler^. 

Qm  ©ommer  finb  bie  Saume  [(^on. 

®a^  Stub  ^at  ^eute  nit^t  t)tel  gefptett. 

Observe  :  i  .  In  principal  sentences  making  a  statement, 
the  verb  is  the  second  idea  (not  necessarily  the  second  word) . 

2.  Any  member,  except  the  verb,  may  occupy  the  first  place. 

3.  When  any  member  other  than  the  subject  precedes  the 
verb,  the  subject,  with  its  attributes  and  enlargements,  is 
thrown  after  the  verb,  and  occupies  the  third  place. 

4.  The  auxiliary  is  the  verb  in  compound  tenses,  and  the 
past  participle  comes  last  in  the  perfect  and  pluperfect. 

Notes. —  i.  The  connectives  mib,  aber,  obcr,  betin,  do  not  aflfect  the 
word  order.     2.  The  rules  of  word  order  are  often  disregarded  in  verse. 

41.  Cardinal  Numerals. 

21.  ein  unb  stDanjig 

22.  3it)et  unb  jtratijig 
30.  brei^tg 
40.  tjierjtg 
50.  funfstg  • 
60.  [ecf)3ig 
70.  fieb(en)jtg 
80.  at^tgig 
90.  neunjtg 

100.  ^unbert 

loi.  ^unbert  (unb)  etn^     123.  ^unbert  (unb)  brei  unb  jtDanjtg 
200.  gtDei^unbert  looi.  taufenb  unb  etn^ 

1000.  taufenb  1,000,000.  etne  aKilUo'n 

1897.  at^tje^n  l^unbert  [teben  unb  neunjtg,  or 
taufenb  a6:)t  ^unbert  fieben  unb  neunjig. 

Observe  ;    i.  The  form  ciiti^  is  used  in  counting. 


I.  etn^ 

II.  etf 

2.  jtDet 

12.  jn)5If 

3.  brei 

13.  bretje^n 

4.  t)ter 

14.  Dterje^n 

5-  fiinf 

15-  ftofjef)n 

6.  fed^^ 

16.  fet^sefin 

7.  fieben 

17.  fieb(en)je^n 

8.  ad^t 

18.  at^tge^n 

9.  neun 

19.  neunje^n 

10.  je^n 

20.  imnm 

§42]  LESSON  XIV  41 

2.  In  compound  numbers  from  21  upwards,  the  units  precede 
the  tens,  and  are  joined  to  them  by  UTlb:  25  =  fitnf  unb  StDaujig 
(Eng.  ^five  and  twenty')  ;   i56  =  {)unbert  fe(^^  unb  fittlfjig. 

3.  §unbert  and  taufenb  generally  omit  eitl  before  and  may 
omit  unb  after  them. 

42.  Multiplicative  Adverbs.  They  are  formed  by  adding 
-malf  *time,'  to  the  cardinals. 

(Sitimal;  jtDetmal;  je^nmal.      Once  ;  twice ;  ten  times. 

EXERCISE   XIV 

be^  9lbenb^,  in  the  evening.  laffen,  lie^,  getaffen,  to  leave, 

abbteren,  to  add  (arith.).  let. 

5)eutf(l){anb,  n,,-^,  Germany,  ber  ^Korgett,-^^  — ,  morning. 

ber  T)e5ember/  December.  be^  3Jf orgen^,  in  the  morning. 

btt)ibieren,  to  divide  (arith.).  multtplisteren,  to  multiply. 

huxd)  {ace:),  through,  by.  ba^  Sc^altja^r,  -(e)^,  -e,  leap- 

(Snglanb,  n,,  -^,  England.  year. 

(Snglifc^,  English  (language).  bte  ©C^Itttettfa^rt,  -en,  sleigh- 

faft,  almost,  nearly.  ride  (drive). 

fitiben,  f anb,  gefunben,  to  find,  f^reiben,  f c^rteb,  gef^rieben, 

geben,  gab,  gegebett,  to  give.  to  write. 

geftern     morgen,     yesterday  fubtra^teren,  to  subtract. 

morning,  tanjen,  to  dance, 

^eute  morgen,  this  morning.  tun,  tat,  getan,  to  do. 

ba^  SSergniigen,  -^,  pleasure. 

Idioms:     i.   (Sine  Sr^Uttcnfa^rt  tttarfjcn,  to  take  (go  for)  a  sleigh-ride 
(drive). 
2.    %iSc^  l)abc  tlici  SJcrgniigcn  gel)abt,  I  have  enjoyed  myself 
very  much. 

A,  Continue :  i.  ^i)  ^abe  {\)^iit)  etnen  @unb  ge^abt,  bu 
I)aft  (^tteft),  2C.  2.  ^i)  ^abe (^atte)  metnem  greunbe  etnen 
S3rtef  gef^rieben,  bu  .  . .  beinent,  2C.  3.  SBa^  ^abe  ic^  geftern 
ntorgen  getan  ?  4.  9?euUc^  ^abe  (^atte)  \i)  einen  @|)a5tergang 
gentac^t.  5.  §eute  ntorgen  ^abe  ic^  ntetner  3Kutter  :93tunien 
gefc^enft.  6.  ^^  {)abe  (^tte)  biefe  SBod^e  tm  ®arten  gefptelt. 
7.  @in^  unb  ein^  ntarfjt  jmet,  jtDei  unb  ein^  mad)t  brei  (con- 


42  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§42 

tinue  up  to  thirty).     8.  ^tDcimal  eiti^  ift  jtDci,  3lt)etmal  jtDei 
ift  Dier  (continue  up  to  thirty). 

B,  Read  in  German  :  2manitft22,  3  mat  12  ift  36,  4 
tnal  8  ift  32,  5  mat  9  ift  45,  6  mal  7  ift  42,  T  x  (mal)  10  ift  70, 
8X11  ift  88,  9X12  ift  108,  10X10  ift  100,  11X11  ift  121, 
12X12  ift  144.  Slbbieren  ©ie  2,341,  25,891  unb  989,346. 
©ubtra^ieren  ®ie  27,763  t)on  31,551.  aKuItipUjieren  @ie 
591  mit  478.    ®it)ibieren  (Sie  2,581,640  bur^  61. 

C  I.  3<m  !j)e3ember  ^ben  tPtr  t)iel  ©dinee  ge^abt. 
2.  ©eftern  ^beti  mir  t^iel  SSergniigett  ge^abt.  3.  !De^  3)Jor* 
gen^  fatten  i^ir  eine  (Sc^Iittenfal)rt  getnac^t  uttb  be6  Slbenb^ 
l^atten  tDir  getan^t.  4-  SK^tn  ^ruber  ^at  !5)eutfi^  gelernt. 
5.  (5r  ^t  t)ier  3^a^re  in  T)eutf(^tanb  gen)o^nt.  6.  grit^er  ^atte 
er  inSnglanb  getDol)nt.  7-  (5t:  f)at  in  unferer  ©d^nle  3)entfc^ 
gete^rt.  8.  ©a  ^atte  er  25  ©i^iiler.  9.  3=n  ©entft^Ianb 
l^atte  er  (Snglifd^  gele^rt.  10.  (Seine  ©d^iiler  ^ben  t)iet  t)on 
il^m gelernt.  n.  ®ie  finb  faft  immer  flei^ig  nnb  aufnterffam, 
12.  ^^\itix  @ie  meinen  Sfeiftift  getjabt?  13.  5yfein,  \i)  ^abe 
i^n  ^ente  ntorgen  nic^t  ge^abt.  14.  ^'c^  ^tte  t^n  in  nteinem 
©inbierjimmer  gelaffen.  15.  @r  mar  auf  bem  Jifrfie,  aber  \t%i 
liegt  er  nic^t  me^r  \i^.  16.  ^^  ^abe  i^n  ba  gefud^t,  aber  nid)t 
gefnnben. 

D.  I.  We  often  went  for  a  sleigh-ride  in  (the)  January* 
2.  Yesterday  we  enjoyed  ourselves  very  much.  3.  In  the 
morning  we  went  for  a  walk.  4.  In  the  evening  we  played  and 
danced.  5.  I  have  been  looking  for  my  pencil,  but  I  have  not 
found  it.  6.  Have  you  had  it  ?  7.  No,  but  it  was  in  your 
study  this  morning.  8.  It  was  on  your  table.  9.  Here  it  is ;  I 
have  found  it  now.  10.  My  sister  is  living  in  Germany  now. 
II.  She  had  lived  five  years  in  England.  12.  She  had  been 
teaching  German  in  a  school.  13.  She  had  more  than  thirty 
pupils.  14.  A  year  has  twelve  months.  15.  They  are  called 
(^ei^en)  January,  etc.  (see  below).  16.  Four  of  (t)on)  these 
months   have   thirty   days.     17.  Seven  have   thirty-one   days. 


§43]  LESSON   XV  43 

18.  (The)  February  has  usually  twenty-eight  days,  but  in  a 
leap-year  it  has  twenty-nine.  19.  The  days  of  the  week  are 
called  Sunday,  etc.  20.  Each  week  has  seven  days.  21.  The 
year  has  usually  three  hundred  and  sixty- five  days,  but  in  a 
leap-year  it  has  three  hundred  and  sixty-six. 

E,  Commit  to  memory:  ©ie  9)Jottate  be^  3^a^re^  ftttb: 
^anuar,  gebruar,  aWarj,  Sl^jri't,  aJJat,  ^u'ni,  ^u'li,  ^lugu'ft, 
(September,  Dttober,  9?ot)ember,  ©ejember. 

®te  Jage  ber  3Boc^e  finb:  ©ontttag,  a)?OTttag,  T)teti^jtag, 
SKittmod),  ©onner^tag,  greitag,  ©ottnabenb  ober  ©am^tag. 

©ie  t)ier  3:at)re^seiten  finb:  grunting,  ©ommer,  ©erbft^ 
aBititer. 

Note.  —  All  are  masc. ,  and  usually  require  art. ;  names  of  months  are 
rarely  inflected. 

LESSON  XV 
43.  Strong  Declension  of  Nouns  {continued). 

IV.   ba^  2)0rf,  village. 
Singular,  PluraL 

N.  ba^  3:)orf  bte  353rfcr 

G,  be^  ©orKc)^  ber  ©Srfcr 

Z>.  bemSorfCc)  benSorfcm 

^.  ba^  3:)orf  bie  S)3rfeir 

Note.  —  For  classes  of  nouns  so  declined,  see  Lesson  XIX. 

Remarks  :  i.  The  singular  is  after  the  §unb  model  (§  33). 

2.  The  !j)orf  model  differs  from  the  ^unb  model  by  adding 
•er  in  the  plural  (a,  0,  tt,  stems  always  with  umlaut),  and  is  called 
the  '  enlarged  form/ 

V.  ber  aWalcr,  painter.  VI.  ber  SSatcr^  father. 

Singular,  PluraL  Singular,       Plural, 

N,  ber  SKaler     bie  SJJater  ber   SSater      bte  3Sater 

6*.  be§  ajJaler  ^  ber  9JJa(er  be^  3Sater  ^   ber  3Sater 

D,  bem  9J?a(er     ben  SD^alern  bem  3Sater      ben  3Sateni 

A,  ben  aJtaler     bie  2Kaler  ben  3Sater      bie  3Sater 


44 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§44 


Notes.  —  i.   For  classes  of  nouns  so  declined,  see  Lesson  XIX. 
2.   Nouns  in  -tt  do  not  add  -tt  in  dat.  plur. :  ©arten,  ©cirten. 

Remark  :  These  models  differ  from  ^uttb  and  @Df)n  only  in 
the  omission  of  e  in  the  various  endings,  and  are  further  varia- 
tions of  the  strong  declension  —  called  the  'contracted  form/ 

44.  Rules  of  Gender,    i.  Most  nouns  in  -tt,  -cr,  are  masculine. 
2.    Collectives  beginning  with  ^c-  and  ending  in  -e  are  gen- 
erally neuter. 

45.  Pres.  and  Impf.  Indie,  of  {9nnen^  tttuffcil^ 


Present, 

Imperfect, 

I  can,  am 

I  must,  have 

I  could,  was 

I  had  to,  was 

able  to,  etc. 

to,  etc. 

able  to,  etc. 

obliged  to,  etc. 

i(J)  fann 

t(^    mu§ 

i(^  fonnte 

ii^   mu^te 

bu  lannft 

bn   mu^t 

bu  fonnte  ft 

bu  mu^teft 

er   fann 

er    mu§ 

er    fonnte 

er   ntupte 

n)ir  f  onnen 

tDtr  miiffen 

iDir  fonnten 

iDtr  muBten 

i^r  fonnt 

t^r  miiBt 

i^r  fonntet 

i^r  mu^tet 

fie  fonnen 

fie  miiffen 

fie  fonnten 

fie  mu^ten 

Examples. 

^6)  fann  l^eute  nid^t  fomnten.  I  cannot  come  to-day. 

@r  fonnte  nti^t  laufen.  He  was  unable  to  run. 

SBir  miiffen  bletben.  We  must  stay. 

®ie  mu^ten  fdimer  arbetten.  They  had  to  work  hard.-"**" 

Observe:  i.  These  verbs  govern  an  infinitive  (without  gu), 
which  comes  at  the  end  in  a  principal  sentence. 

2.  As  the  English  *must'  has  no  past  tense,  the  German 
imperfect  must  be  variously  rendered  as  above. 


auf  et^nmaf,  at  once, 
bie  9lyt,  ^e^  axe. 
bebecft,  covered. 


EXERCISE   XV 

betbe,  both. 

ber  Serg,  -(e)^,  -e,  hill,  moun- 
tain. 


§45]  LESSON   XV  45 

betrad^ten,  to  observe,  consider,  man  {pron,)y  one,  people,  etc. 

ba^  3)arf),  -(e)^,  ^er,  roof.  ber  2)?ann,  -(e)^,  "tx,  man. 

ber  !Campfer,  -^,  ^,  steamer,  metirere  (//.),  several. 

benn  {fonj^,  for.  morgen,  to-morrow. 

bort,  there,  yonder.  rei^t^,  on  the  (to  the)  right. 

ei'nmaf,  once.  ba^  ®c^fog,  -e^,  "er,  castle. 

fallen,  to  fell,  cut  down.  ba^  @ege(fcf)iff,  -(e)^,  -e,  sail- 

ba^  gelb,  -e^,  -er,  field.  ing-vessel,  ship. 

ba^  ©ebirge,  -^,  — ,  mountain-  fe^en,  [a^,  gefe^en,  to  see. 

range,  range  of  hills.  fo,  so. 

leaden,  to  hew,  chop,  cut.  ba^  @tro^,  -(^)^r  straw, 

ber  §tntergrnnb,  -e^,  "e,  back-  ba^  3:al,  -(e)^,  "er,  valley. 

ground.  ber^Taler,-^, — ,dollar(72cts.). 

ba^    §o{g,    -e^^    "er,    wood  ber  SSorbergrunb,  -e^,  ^e,  fore- 

(material).  ground, 

bte  8anbf(^aft,  -en,  landscape.  n)a^  fiir?  what  kind  (sort)  of? 

lin!^,  on  the  (to  the)  left.  jerfatten,  ruined,  in  ruins. 

A.  I.  Decline  throughout  like  T)orf:  ber  SBafb,  n)ef(^e^ 
§au^,  biefe^  ®(J)Io^,  mein  -93u(^,  !ein  Sftann.  2.  DecHne  like 
abater:  unfer  8el)rer,  ba^  33abe5tmmer,  fein  genfter,  biefe^ 
SKdbd^en.  3.  Dechne  like  SSater :  biefer  ©arten,  unfere  9Jlut== 
ter,  ^\fC  ©ruber.  4.  Supply  the  remaining  cases  of  the  fol- 
lowing :  ©arten  (w.),  -^,  ^ ;  Slrgt  (/«.)'  -e^,  ^e ;  ganb^au^  («.), 
-e^,  ^er ;  gelb  {n.\  -e^,  -er ;  S^iff  («.X  -e^,  -e  ;  Slaler  (w.), 
-^,  — ;  SEal  (;/.),  -e^,  ^er ;  ©ebtrge  (;^.),  -6,  — ;  §anb  (/.), 
— ,  "e.  5.  Continue :  '^i)  fann  meine  ©itd^er  nic^t  finben,  bu 
.  .  .  betne,  20.  ^&^  !onnte  {)eute  morgen  nteine  2luf gabe  nic^t 
mad)en,  bu  .  .  .  beine,  xz.  ^i)  ntu^  ntorgen  jur  (g^ule  ge* 
l^en.    ^i)  mu^te  geftern  Sriefe  [(^reiben* 

B,  I.  ©etra^ten  @ie  biefe  ganbfd^aft.  2.  @ter  Wnnen 
iDir  fo  t)iel  auf  einmat  fe^en :  (ginen  "^XvS^f  eine  ©tabt  mit 
Dielen  §aufem,  unb  l)tnter  ber  @tabt  ^elber  unb  SBScilber, 
Serge  unb  Slater.    3.  3^  3Sorbergrunbe  liegt  bie  @tabt  an 


46  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§45 

ben  Ufern  eine^  ^luffe^.  4.  9luf  bem  gluffe  faf)ren  (gegel^ 
f^iffe,  ©am^jfer  unb  Sa^ne,  5.  3^tn  gintergrunbe  fann  man 
ein  ©ebtrge  fe^en*  6.  Winter  ber  ©tabt  liegen  mel^rere  ©or- 
fer.  7.  S)ie  ©cic^er  ber  §aufer  in  biefen  !Dorfem  finb  ntit 
®tro^  bebedt,  8.  ©ort  arbeiten  bie  3Kanner  flei^tg  in  i^ren 
©arten  unb  getbern,  9.  9{ed^t^  auf  bem  33erge  Winter  ben 
S)orfern  fdnnen  @ie  einenSBalb  [e^en.  10.  Qn  biefem  SBalbe 
muff  en  bie  SnecJ^te  ^iiume  fallen  unb  mit  i^ren  tjten  §oIj 
^aden-  n.  .^m  §intergrunbe  linf^  fann  id)  and)  jmet 
©i^Wffer  fel^en.  12.  S)iefe  ©c^Ioffer  muffen  fe^r  alt  fein, 
benn  fie  finb  beibe  ganj  jerfallen. 

C,  Oral:  i.  Was  liegt  in  dem  Tale?  2.  Was  kann  man 
auf  dem  Berge  rechts  sehen?  3.  Wer  wohnt  da?  4.  Was  fiir 
Dacher  haben  die  Hauser?  5.  Wer  arbeitet  hier?  6.  Wo 
arbeiten  sie?  7.  Was  steht  hinter  den  Dorfern?  8.  Wer 
arbeitet  dort?  9.  Was  miissen  sie  tun?  10.  Was  konnen  Sie 
auf  dem  Berge  links  sehen? 

D,  I.  This,  landscape  is  very  fine.  2.  One  can  see  hills 
and  valleys,  towns  and  villages.  3.  In  the  foreground  on  the 
right  lie  two  villages.  4.  The  windows  of  the  houses  are  small, 
and  the  roofs  are  covered  with  straw.  5.  The  houses  in  the 
villages  in  Germany  are  often  covered  with  straw.  6.  In  the 
valley  on  the  left  lie  two  towns;  can  you  see  them?  7.  The 
houses  in  the  towns  are  larger  and  finer  than  the  houses  of  the 
villages,  but  the  gardens  are  smaller.  8.  In  the  background 
one  can  see  hills.  9.  On  the  hills  to  the  right  stand  two  castles. 
10.  Castles  usually  stand  on  hills.  11.  These  castles  are  in 
ruins,  for  they  are  very  old.  12.  I  can  see  two  steamers  on 
the  river  and  also  three  row-boats.  13.  In  the  fields  [there] 
are  cows  and  horses.  14.  They  are  standing  under  the  trees, 
for  it  is  very  hot.  15.  The  laborers  are  working  in  the  fields 
and  in  the  woods.  16.  They  are  making  hay,  and  felling  trees 
with  their  axes. 


§48]  LESSON   XVI  ^  dr  47 

E,  Lesestuck  :  Ein  Maler  hatte  ein  Bildnis  vom  Sohne  eines 
Kaufmanns  gemalt.  Der  Kiinstler  war  einmal  bei  dem  Kauf- 
mann  auf  Besuch.  Der  Kaufmann  zeigte  ihm  das  Bild  seines 
Sohnes  und  sagte  :  "  Dieses  Bild  ist  meinem  Sohne  sehr  ahn- 
lich."  Der  Maler  antwortete  :  "  Das  freut  mich  sehr,  aber  ich 
habe  noch  kein  Geld  von  ihm  fiir  das  Bild  erhalten."  Der 
Vater  erwiderte  :  "  Das  ist  ihm  auch  sehr  ahnlich." 


LESSON  XVI 
46..  Present  Indicative  of  toetben^ 

i(^  tDcrbe  iDir  trerbett 


X  bu  njtrft 

t^r  tt)erbet 

er  iDtrb^ 

fie    iDerben 

Formal : 

®ie  iDefben* 

Observe  :  The  t  of  the  second  and  third  singular. 

47.  Future  Indicative  of  ^a6cn,  tttad^eu* 

I  shall  have  (make),  thou  wilt,  etc. 

id)  tuerbe  ^aben  (madden)  tt)tr  tuerben  l^aben  (madden) 

bu  tDirft  ^abeti  (marf)en)  i^r  tDerbet  tjaben  (mac^en) 

er  njirb  ^aben  (madjen)  fie  iperben  ^abett  (tnac^en) 

Formal :  ®ie  tDerben  ^aben  (mad)en). 

Observe  :  This  tense  is  formed  by  adding  the  infinitive  to 
the  present  indicative  of  tDerbetl,  as  auxiliary. 

48.  Future  Perfect  of  j^aficn,  tnad^ctt. 

I  shall  have  had  (made),  etc. 
\i)    tt)erbe    ge^abt    (gemad^t)  tt)ir  ttjerben  ge^abt  (getnad^t) 

^ben  ^aben 

bu  mirft  ge^abt  (gemad^t)  l^aben  i^r    tperbet  ge^abt  (gemac^t) 

^aben 
er  ttJirb  ge^abt  (gemad^t)  {)aben  fie    merben  ge^abt  (gemad^t) 

^aben 


48  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§49 

Observe  :  This  tense  is  formed  by  inserting  the  past  parti- 
ciple before  the  infinitive  of  the  future. 

49.  Word  Order. 

SBtr  tDerben  ^txt  ijahtn.  We  shall  have  time. 

&  tt)trb  ^tit  get)abt  ^aben.       He  will  have  had  time. 

Observe  :  In  these  tenses  the  infinitive  comes  at  the  end, 
preceded  by  the  past  participle  if  both  occur. 

50.  Separable  Prefixes. 

9lu^f(^t(fen,  afireifen.  To  send  out,  to  set  out. 

^uma^ett,  au;^gef)en.  To  close,  to  go  out. 

Qii)  \d)xdtt  ba^  ®tnb  an^.  I  sent  the  child  out. 

9teift  er  ^eute  a6 ?  Does  he  set  out  to-day? 

Wlaijtn  ®te  bte  Znx  ju.  Close  the  door.  . 

Q6)  n)lmfd)e  au^juge^en.  I  wish  to  go  out. 

(Sr  tt)irb  morgen  fnrtge^en.  He  will  go  away  to-morrow.^5^- 

aSer  t)at  bie  Xm  aufgemat^t?  Who  opene'd  the  door? 

Observe:  i.  Certain  prepositions  and  adverbs  (such  as  au^^ 
tuit,  naif),  fort)  are  much  used  as  prefixes  to  verbs,  and  are 
always  stressed. 

2.  In  the  simple  tenses  these  particles  come  at  the  end  of 
principal  sentences  (including  direct  questions  and  commands). 

3.  They  precede  and  are  written  as  one  word  with  the  infini- 
tive (with  or  without  ju)  and  the  past  participle,  wherever  these 
occur. 

51.  Inseparable  Prefixes,  i.  The  prefixes  be-  er-,  tmp-, 
tni-f  ge-,  tier-,  ser-,  are  always  inseparable  and  unstressed. 

2.  Verbs  with  these  prefixes  omit  the  gc-  of  the  past  parti- 

Setrac^ten  ®te  ba^  ©i(b.  Observe  the  picture. 

&  ^at  ba^  §au^  tiettauft.  He  has  sold  tlie  house. 


§  52]  LESSON  XVI  49 

52.  Compound  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  simple  verbs 
from  which  they  are  derived:  au^fc^icfett^  [d^idte  au^,  au^^* 
gefc^idt;  au^ftetgen,  ftieg  au§,  au^geftiegen. 

EXERCISE   XVI 

auffte^en  (ftanb,    geftanben),  ber  Saffee,  -^,  coffee. 

to  get  up,  rise.  faufett,  to  buy. 

ber  Slu^flug,  -(e)^,  "e,   excur-  ber  ^or6,  -e^,  ^e,  basket. 

sion,  picnic.  pacfen,  to  pack. 

an^padcUf  to  unpack.  ber  ^iai^,  -e^,  "e,  place, 

au^fteigen,  to  get  off,  get  out.  ber  ^roDta'nt,  -(e)^,  provisions, 

au^fuc^en,  to  pick  out,  select,  fc^ott^  already. 

ber  ©a^^of,  -(e)^,  k,  sta-  ber  ©cfju^, -(e) ^,  shelter,  pro- 

tion.^^~'  tection. 

begleiten,   to    accompany,    go  fogleic^,  immediately. 

with.  ftetgen,    ftieg,    gefttegen,   to 

einpadett,  to  pack  up.  .mount,  climb, 

einftetgen,  to  go  aboard.  bie  Stra^enba^n,  -en,  street- 

erft,  first,  not  before.  railway,  tram, 

bie  ga^rfarte,  -n,  ticket  (for  ber  STee,  -6,  tea. 

traveling).  trittfen,   trattf,  getrun!en,  to 

frii"^,  early.  drink, 

ba^  ®aftf)au^,  -e^,  "er,  hotel,  unterbeffen,  meanwhile,  in  the 

inn.  meantime. 

I^elfett  (daf.),  ^{f,  ge^otfen,  to  Dietteic^t,  perhaps. 

help.  meit,  far. 

l^offentlic^,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  I  ber  3^g,  -(e)^,  "e,  train. 

hope.  3urit(ffef)ren,  to  return. 

Idiom  :  ^inctt  ^Ui^fKug  tttati^CIt,  to  make  an  excursion,  go  on  a  picnic. 

A,  I.  §offentIi(^  it)irb  ba^  Setter  tnorgett  fc^on  fein. 
2.  ©ann  merben  iDir  eineti  2lu^flug  matfien.  3.  2Bir  trerbeti 
frii^  auf ftet)en  utib  mit  ber  ©tra^enba^n  pm  Sa^n^of  fa^ren. 
4.  J)er  Se^rer  tDtrb  un^  begletten.  5.  Dort  t^erbett  tvix  erft 
unfere  gat)r!arten  faufen  unb  bann  einfteigen.    6.  Qn  S(u* 


50  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  52 

tnenba^  tDerben  n)tr  au^fteigen.  ?•  9?tc^t  itjett  don  S.  ift  em 
2BaIb  neben  bem  (See,  8.  ^fm  SBalbe  merbeti  h)tr  un^  etnen 
^ta^  au^fui^en,  9.  !t)ort  tt)erben  mir  fogletc^  unfere  ^orbe 
au^padtn ;  SJiarie  mirb  un^  ^elfen.  10.  ©eft^rn  ^aben  voir 
fd^on  *iprot)iant  fitr  unferen  Stuffing  eingepadt,  n.  J)ann 
njerbeti  mir  SEee  unb  ^affee  madden,  12.  Unterbeffen  tDer* 
ben  bie  ^inber  ® lumen  fur  ben  2:if(^  ))p(fen.  13.  S)ann 
iDerben  n^ir  effen  unb  trinfen.  14.  S^  ft)trb  Dtelletc^t  regnen* 
15.  2Ba^  iDerben  @te  bann  tun?  16.  ^m  ®aftl)aufe  be^ 
©orfe^  iDerben  n)ir  S^u^  fu^en.  17.  !De^  2lbenb^  merben 
toir  mit  bem  3^9^  S^^  ©tabt  juriicEfe^ren. 

^.  Continue :  ^i)  mad^e  ^eute  etnen  Stuffing,  bu,  ic. ;  id) 
mac^te  geftern  ♦  .  ♦  2c.;  tc^  ^abe  ^eute  .  ,  .  gemai^t,  ic; 
16)  ^atte  geftern  .  .  .  gemad^t,  ic;  i^  n)erbe  morgen  ♦  .  . 
ma^en,  2c.;  i^  iDerbe  .  ,  .  gemad^t  l^aben,  20,  Similarly 
continue  in  all  the  six  tenses:  i.  Qi)  fpiele  im  SQBalbe,  2C, 
2.  Q6)  laufe  meine  ga^rfarte,  bu  .  .  .  beine,  2c.  3.  3^ 
fu^e  tm  ©aft^aufe  @(^ufe.  4-  -3^  P^^^  ^rotiiant  ein* 
5.  Q6)  fu^e  einen  '^iai^  au^. 

C  Oral :  i.  Wird  es  morgen  regnen?  2.  Wird  das  Wetter 
morgen  schon  sein  ?  3.  Was  werden  Sie  dann  tun  ?  4.  Machen 
Sie  gern  Ausfltige  ?  5.  Wer  wird  die  Korbe  packen  ?  6.  Wer 
wird  sie  zum  Bahnhof  bringen  ?  7.  Wie  werden  Sie  fahren  ? 
8.  Wer  wird  den  Platz  aussuchen  ?  9.  Werden  Sie  sogleich 
essen?  10.  Was  werden  Sie  erst  tun?  11.  Was  werden  die 
Kinder  unterdessen  tun?  12.  Wann  werden  Sie  zur  Stadt 
zurlickkehren  ?     13.  Wie  werden  Sie  zuriickkehren  ? 

D,  I.  It  is  to  be  hoped  it  will  not  rain  to-morrow.  2.  No, 
it  will  be  fine  to-morrow.  3.  Then  I  shall  go  on  an  excursion 
with  my  teacher.  4.  He  likes  to  go  on  excursions  with  us. 
5.  Many  friends  will  accompany  us.  6.  Mother  will  pack  the 
baskets  this  evening.  7.  My  sister  will  help  her.  8.  I  shall  go  to 
the  station  in  (mit)  the  street-railway.   9.  Father  and  mother  can 


§53]  LESSON  XVII  51 

drive  to  the  station.  10.  The  teacher  will  pick  out  a  place  in 
the  woods.  11.  My  aunt  will  make  the  coffee.  12.  Mother 
will  unpack  the  baskets.  13.  We  shall  eat  and  drink  and  play- 
in  the  woods.  14.  Then  the  children  will  sing  and  dance 
under  the  trees.  15.  We  shall  enjoy  ourselves  very  much. 
16.  Shall  you  return  with  the  train  to  the  city?  17.  No,  we 
must  return  with  the  steamer. 

E.  Lesestuck :  Der  Dichter  Rossetti  war  auch  als  Maler  be- 
riihmt.  Ein  Ftirst  aus  Indien  besuchte  ihn  einmal  und  sagte 
zu  ihm  :  "  Konnen  Sie  mir  ein  Bildnis  von  meinem  Vater 
malen  ?"  "1st  Ihr  Herr  Vater  jetzt  in  London?'*  fragte  der 
Kiinstler.  "Nein,  mein  Vater  ist  tot,"  antwortete  der  Ftirst. 
**Haben  Sie  vielleicht  eine  Photographie  von  ihm?"  "Nein, 
wir  haben  gar  kein  Bildnis  von  ihm."  "Wie  kann  ich  denn 
sein  Bildnis  malen  ?  Das  ist  unmoglich.  Es  ist  lacherlich.  Das 
kann  ich  nicht  tun."  "  Weshalb  ist  es  J^ch^ich  ?"  erwiderte 
der  Ftirst.  "Sie  haben  Casar,  Hannibalund  die  zwolf  Apostel 
gemalt ;  warum  konnen  Sie  denn  meinen  Vater  nicht  malen  ?  " 

LESSON  XVII 
63.  Weak  Declension  of  Nouns. 

VII.  ber  Snaic,  boy. 

Singular,  Plural, 

N,  ber  Snabe  bte  ^naben 

G,  be^  ^naben  ber  ^naben 

D,  bem^ttabcn  ben  Snaben 

'  A.   ben  ^naben  bte  Snaben 

VIII.  ber  @raf,  count. 

Singular,  Plural, 

N,  ber  ®raf  bie  ®rafeit 

G,  be^  ®rafett  ber  ©rafen 

D,  bem  ®raf  en  ben  ®raf  en 

A,   ben  ©rafcn  bie  ©rafcn 


52  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§54 

IX.  bie  25Iume,  flower. 

Singular,  Plural, 

N.  bie  :©Iume  bie  ©lumett 

G,  ber  :93Iuttte  ber  ©lumen 

D,  ber  Slume  ben  Slume  n 

A,   bie  -33Iutne  bie  SSIutnen 

Notes.  —  i.    For    classes   of   nouns   so   declined,   see   Lesson    XIX. 
2.  §err  drops  C  before  ~tt  in  the  singular :  Genitive,  §errn,  2C* 

Remarks:   i.  These  models  are  all  variations  of  the  same 
type  of  declension,  called  the  '  weak  declension/ 

2.  In  masculines  all  cases  of  the  singular,  except  the  nomi- 
native, end  in  -n  or  -cn» 

3.  The  plurals  end  in  -n  or  -en  throughout. 

54.  Mixed  Declension   of  Nouns. 

X.  ber  5Wame,  name. 

Singular,  '  Plural 

N.  ber   ?Jatne  bie  9?amett 

G,  be^  g^amen^  ber  ^Jamen 

D,  bem  9^ame  n  ben  9^ame  n 

A,  ben  9?amett  bie  Seamen 

XI.  ber  Setter^  cousin. 

Singular.  Plural, 

N,  ber   SSetter  bie  SSettertt 

6^.  be^  3Setter^  ber  SSettern 

Z>.  bem  aSetter  ben  SSettern 

A,  ben  3Setter  bie  SSettern 

XII.  ba^  D^r,  ear. 
Singular.  Plural, 

N,  ba^  O^r  bie  D^rett 

G.  be^  D^r(c)^  ber  D^rcn 

D.  bem  O^r(e)  ben  D^rctt 

A,  ba^  O^r  bie  Dfjrcn 

Note.  —  For  classes  of  nouns  so  declined,  see  Lesson  XIX. 


§55] 


LESSON  XVII 


53 


Remarks:  i.  Model  X.  is  a  variation  of  the  Snabe  model 
(§  53),  adding  -^  in  the  genitive  singular. 

2.  Model  XI.  follows  the  ^Mdhv  model  (§  43)  in  the  singu- 
lar and  the  Stiabe  model  in  the  plural. 

3.  Model  XII.  follows  the  §Uttb  model  (§  33)  in  the  singu- 
lar and  the  ®raf  model  (§  53)  in  the  plural. 

55.  Rules  of  Gender,  i.  Nouns  in  -ci,  -f^tit,  -fcit,  -ft^faft, 
-nn^f  -irtf  are  always  feminine. 

Note.  —  The  ending  -itt  is  used  to  form  feminine  nouns  from  mascu- 
lines, often  with  umlaut;  they  double  -tt  in  the  plural :  greunb,  grcunbtlt, 
plur.  grcunbimten;  ®raf,  ©rafin,  ©rcifintten. 

2.  Foreign  nouns  in  -age,  -ic,  -if,  -cna,  -tat,  -(t)xon,  -uv,  are 

always  feminine. 

EXERCISE   XVII 


attrtd^ten,  to  do  (damage). 

ber  Slpfet,  -^,  %  apple. 

ber  3lpfeIbauTn,  -(e)^,  "e,  ap- 
ple-tree. 

ber  ©auer,  -n,  -tt,  peasant, 
countryman,  farmer. 

ba^  :95eet,  -e§,  -e,  garden-bed. 

ber  :93trttbaum,  -(e)^,  "e,  pear- 
tree. 

bte  Strtie,  -n,  pear. 

btii^ett,  to  blossom,  be  in 
bloom. 

ber  Stutnetigartett,  -^,  % 
flower-garden. 

bte  S3(itte,  -tt,  blossom. 

bie  Sortie,  -n,  bean. 

bie  grbfe,  -n,  pea. 

graben,  grub,  gegrabett,  to 
dig. 

ba^  ^i^f^'^t,  -e^,  -en,  insect. 


bte  ^irf^e,  -tt,  cherry. 

ber  3Jfenfc^,  -ett,  -en,  man 
(human  being). 

ba^  Obft,  -e^,  fruit  (of  gar- 
den or  orchard). 

retf,  ripe. 

ber  9?uf[e,  -n,  -n,  Russian 
(noun) . 

faen,  to  sow. 

ber  ©ante,  -n^,  -n,  seed. 

ber   (Sc^abe,  -n^,  -n   or  % 

damage, 
ber  ©paten,  -^,  — ,  spade, 
ber    3:eif,    -(e)^,   -e,    part, 

portion, 
bie  JToniate,  -n,  tomato.  ^ 
nmgraben,   to   dig   up,   dig 

over, 
unentbe^rfid^,  indispensable. 
JUerft  (adv,),  first. 


Idiom  :  I^Uttge  is  used  for  ^nabc  in  addressing  a  boy. 


54  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  55 

A.  I.  Decline  like  Snabc:  mein  ^unge,  biefer  Saner. 
2.  Like  Slume :  tneine  Sir[df|e,  bie  ^artoffeL  3.  Like  ®raf : 
fein  2J?enft^,  \od6)t  grau?  4-  Like  ^Jame:  ber  ®ame. 
5.  LikeD^r:  biefe^  .gnfeft  6.  LikeSSetter:  unfer  S^ai^bar. 
7.  Supply  the  remaining  cases  of  the  following :  9tofe  (/.),  — , 
-n;  9tuffe  {m,),  -%  -n;  aWann  (^^.)>  -^^f  "^^J  Srbfe  (/.),  — , 
-n;  geber  (/.),  — ,  -n;  Sett  {n.\  -e^,  -en;  ©paten  (m.), 
-0,  — ;  2ln^fid^t  (/),  —  -en. 

^.  I.  §tnter  nnferem  §anfe  l^aben  tt)tr  einen  ©arten. 
2.  §ier  ]^at  nnfer  ©drtner  biefe  2Bo(f)e  mit  einem  Snaben 
gearbeitet.  3.  t)te[er  Snabe  ift  ein  $Rnffe,  ber  ©o^n  eine^ 
Sanem.  4.  ®er  .^nnge  l^at  bie  Seete  ntit  einem  @|)aten  nm- 
gegraben  nnb  ber  ©cirtner  l^at  gefat  nnb  gepflanjt.  5.  SSStdn 
33ater  l^atte  i^nen  ben  ®amen  gegeben.  6.  ©er  3:eit  be^ 
©artene  red^t^  ift  fUr  ba^  ©emitfe  nnb  ber  Sletl  linf^  fitr  bie 
Slnmen.  7.  ©eftern  ^aben  fie  ^artoffeln  nnb  SEontaten  ge- 
pflanjt,  nnb  an^  grbfen  nnb  So^nen.  8.  3=m  Stnmengarten 
toerben  bie  Seild^en  balb  blitl^en.  9.  Die  Slpfet^  nnb  Strn^ 
banme  n)erben  and^  batb  in  Slitte  ftel^en.  10.  ©ie  ^irfdien 
n)erben  im  ^nni  reif  fein;  bie  Sirnen  nnb  tpfel  im  Dftober. 
II.  goffentlid^  iDerben  bie  ^nfeften  biefe^  .^a^r  ni^t  t^iel 
®(^aben  anric^ten.  12.  2Bir  l^aben  nte^r  Dbft  nnb  ©emitfe 
al^  nnfere  5Wa(^bam.  13.  ©emitfe  nnb  Dbft  finb  bem  aJJen^ 
f^en  nnentbe^rlid^. 

C,  Oral :  i.  2Bann  beginnen  bie  3Kenf(^en  im  ©arten  jn 
arbeiten?  2.  2Ba^  inn  fie  gnerft?  3.  3Bie  graben  fie  ben 
©arten  nm?  4.  SBo  liegt  ^^x  ©arten?  5.  SBer  ^at  biefe 
2Bo(^e  im  ©arten  gearbeitet  ?  6.  SBer  f)at  mit  i^m  gearbeitet  ? 
7.  3iBa^  l^aben  fie  getan?  8.  2Ba^  fUr  SInmen  finb  in  3^rem 
©arten?  9.  §at  ber  ^nnge  gnglifd^  gelernt?  10.  SBie  alt 
ift  er?  II.  SBeffen  ®o^n  ift  er?  12.  3Ba^  fnr  Dbft  {)aben 
©ie?  13.  aSann  toirb  ba^  Obft  reif?  14.  2Ba^  i^^^^  bie 
3fnfelten? 


I  56]  LESSON  XVIII  55' 

Z>.  I.  Vegetables  and  fruit  are  uidispensable  to  (the)  men. 
2.  They  must  have  gardens.  3.  They  dig  up  the  garden  with 
a  spade.  4.  Then  the  gardeners  sow  and  plant.  5.  Our  gar- 
dener is  a  Russian.     6.  His  father  and  mother  were  peasants. 

7.  Here  on  the  left  he  will  plant  the  cabbage  and  tomatoes. 

8.  Yonder  he  will  plant  the  beans  and  peas.  9.  He  bought  the 
seed"*  yesterday.  10.  He  has  already  planted  the  potatoes. 
II.  In  which  month  do  people  plant  them?  12.  The  pear-trees 
are  in  flower  in  April  or  May.  13.  We  have  picked  the 
cherries  already.  14.  We  had  more  cherries  this  year  than 
our  neighbors.  15.  In  October  we  shall  pick  our  apples  and 
pears.      16.  The   insects   do   much  damage    in   the   garden^ 

£,  gefeftud:    j^^^^*|^.aiL  ^  I^mW 

©onnettf ^ettt  unb  :©tutenbuft,  Unb  bte  <^^tnetterftnge  ftc^ 

T)a^  ift  ein  23ergnitgen !  Sluf  ben  §almen  tDtegen: 

2Bettn  in  bfauer  SJfaienlnft  2lc^,  tt)ie  ift  eTba  fo  fd^on 

^oc^  bie  Serpen  fliegen.  Slief  im  ®ra^  jn  liegen- 

SBenn  be^  Sa(^e^  SBetten  [ic^  Unb  junt  §immel  aufjufe^n ! 

liDurd^  bie  «53Iumen  f (^miegen,  ®a^  ift  ein  3Sergniigen ! 

LESSON  XVIII 

56.  Declension  of  Attributive  Adjectives,  i.  When  not  pre- 
ceded by  a  determinative,  they  take  the  endings  of  the  biefet 
model  (§  31)  throughout  (Strong  Form). 

Note.  — The  articles,  possess.,  interrog.,  demonstr.,  and  indef.  adjs.  are 
called  *  determinatives.' 

2.  When  preceded  by  the  definite  article  or  a  determinative 
of  the  biefer  model  they  take  the  ending  -c  in  the  nominative 
singular  of  all  genders,  and  in  the  accusative  singular  feminine 
and  neuter ;  otherwise  -ctt  throughout  (Weak  Form). 

3.  When  preceded  by  a  determinative  of  the  mein  model 
they  take  the  endings  -tv,  -c,  -t^  in  the  nominative  singular, 
and  -Ctt,  -tf  -t§  in  the  accusative  singular;  otherwise  -ctt 
throughout  (Mixed  Form). 


56 


GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


[§57 


\ 

I. 

Strong  Form. 

II.  Weak  Form. 

III.  Mixed  Form. 

M,     K     JV. 

M,    F.     -JV, 

J/.    F.      N, 

Sing, 

N, 

-er    -e    -e^ 

-e     -e     -e 

-er    -e     -e^ 

G. 

-e^    -er  -e^ 

-en  -en   -en 

-en   -en  -en 

D, 

-em  -er  -em 

-en  -en   -en 

-en   -en  -en 

A, 

-en   -e    -e^ 

-en  -e     -e 

-en   -e     -e^ 

All  genders. 

All  genders. 

All  genders. 

Plur. 

N,  -e 

-en 

-en 

(9.  -er 

-en 

-en 

2^.  -en 

-en 

-en 

A.  -e 

-en 

-en 

Note.  —  In  the  mixed  form,  the  adj.  follows  the  biefer  model  only  in 
the  three  places  where  the  ntein  model  lacks  distinctive  endings,  namely, 
nom.  sing.  masc.  and  neut.  and  ace.  sing,  neut.;  otherwise  it  is  like  the 
weak  form. 

57.  Paradigms  with  Nouns. 

I.  Strong  Form. 
Singular, 
Good  soup, 
gntc  ®up^e 
guterSnppe 
guter@np:pe 
gntc  ©uppe 

Plural, 
Good  wines,  etc. 

gnte    SBetne,    @n^|)en,  ©lafer 
gntcr  SBeine,    @np|3en,  ©Icijer 
gnten  2Beinen,  @nppen,  ©tafern 
gnte    SBetne,    (Snpi^en,  ©tdfer 

Notes. —  i.  Before  a  gen.  in  -^^  the  adj.  usually  has  -Ctt. 

2.  The  ending  -t^  of  the  nom.  and  ace.  sing.  neut.  is  often  dropped  in 
poetry  and  sometimes  in  prose. 

3.  Adjs.  after  pers.  prons.  are  strong,  exc.  in  dat.  sing,  and  nom.  plur., 
where  weak  endings  are  commoner :  2Rir  armPtt  SJiatllie. 


N, 

G, 
D, 

A, 


Good  wine. 

gntcr       SBetn 
gntc^(ctt)SBeine6 
gnt  cm     SBetne 
gntctt      aSein 


G. 
£>, 

A, 


Good  glass. 
gntC)^       ®Ia^ 
gutC!^(cn)®Iafe^ 
gnt  cm     ®Ia[e 
gntC)^      ®Ia^ 


§  57]  LESSON  XVIII  57 

II.  Weak  Form. 
Singular, 

The  good  man.        The  good  woman.  The  good  child. 

N,    ber  gutc  aJJann        bie  gutc   grau  ba6  gute    ^tnb 

G,    be^  guten3Kanne^     ber  gutcttgrau  be§  gutcn  tinbe^ 

Z).    bem  gutcn  2Kanne      ber  gut  en  grau  bem  gutcn  Stnbe 

A.    ben  gutcn  3)iann       bie  gutc  grau  ba^  gutc    Sinb 

PluraL 
The  good  men,  etc. 

N,  bie  gutcn  3Kciuner,    grauen,  Sinber 

G.  ber  gutcn  SKdnner,    grauen,  Sinber 

D,  ben  gutcn  3)?anuern,  grauen,  ^inbern 

^.  bie  gutcn  9Kdnner,    grauen,  Sinber 

III.  Mixed  Form. 
Singular, 

My  good  hat.  My  good  axe. 

N,    meitt     gutcr  §ut  meine  gutc  2lyt 

G.    meine^  gutcn  §ute^  meiuer  gutcn  2lft 

D,    meiuem  gut  en  §ute  meiner  gut  en  2lf  t 

A,    meinen  gutcn  §ut  meine  gutc  2lft 

My  good  book. 

N.  mein     gutc^S3ud^ 

G,  meine^  gutcn  53u^e^ 

D,  meiuem  gut  en  ®  ucf)e 

A,  mein     gutc^Su^ 

Plural. 
My  good  hats,  etc. 
N,    meine  gutcn  ^v\tf  3tyte,  -93itd^er 
G,    meiner  gutcn  |)itte,  Styte,   Sitc^er 
D,    meinen  gutcn  ^iiten,  %iitxif  Siic^ern 
A,    meine   gutcn  |)itte,  tyte,  ^ii^er 


58  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  58 

Remark  :  Two  or  more  adjectives  qualifying  the  same  noun 
follow  the  same  form :  ®utcr,  alter,  rotcr  SBein ;  be^  guten, 
altcn,  roten  Seined,  ic. 

58.  Adjectives  used  Substantively. 

©in  alte§  S3U(^  unb  ein  neue^.  An  old  book  and  a  new  one. 

J)er  9llte;  bte  2l(te,  The  old  man ;  the  old  woman. 

®ie  2Itten.  The  old  people  (ancients). 

£)a§  ®Ute  unb  ba^  ®d^5ne.  The  good  and  the  beautiful. 

Observe:  i.  Attributive  adjectives  may  be  used  substan-. 
tively,  and  are  then  written  with  a  capital. 

2.  The  English  'one'  after  such  adjectives  is  not  to  be  trans- 
lated into  German. 

EXERCISE   XVIII 

alfo,  so,  thus,  accordingly.  fe{)Ien  (dat^,  to  be  missing,  ail. 

anfommen  (fam,   gefommen),  fragen,  to  ask. 

to  arrive.  fit^Ien,  to  feel, 

ber  Slppett't,  -(e)^,  appetite.  ganj  {adj.),  whole, 

arm,  "er,  poor.  gar  nic^t,  not  at  all. 

bte   Slrjenei',  -en,  medicine,  ge^en,  ging,  gegangen,  to  go, 

physic.  walk, 

fieril^mt,  celebrated,  famous.  I^ei^en,  ^te^,  ge^eigen,  to  be 
bitter,  bitter.  called,  named, 

brett,  broad,  wide.  ber    ^opff^merj,   -eg,    -en, 
bag  ©rot,  -eg,  -e,  bread,  loaf.       headache  (usually//.), 

barauf,  thereupon,  then.  Iteb,  dear, 

ber  ©tener,  -g,  — ,  servant.  ndc^ft,  next, 

ber   3:)o!tor  (Sr.),  -g,  -en,  ber  ^atie'nt,  -en,  -en,  patient. 

doctor  (academic  degree).  ber  "iPutg,  -eg,  -e,  pulse, 

etntreten  (trat,  getreten),  to  pitnftli^,  punctual. 

enter.  ber  ©(^ulfanterab,  -en,  -en, 
enblt(^,  at  last,  finally.  school-fellow,  school-mate, 

effen,  a^,  gegeffen,  to  eat.  bie  ©tra^e,  -n,  street, 

bag  Effen,  -g,  meal,  dinner.  ber  STrannt,  -(e)g,  "e,  dream. 


§  58]  LESSON   XVIII  59 

u'ngebulbig,  impatient.  tt)arten,  to  wait  (for,  auf ,  acc^). 

terfc^reiben^    t)er[(^rieb,  Der-  iDinten  {dat^,  to  beckon. 

fct)rieben,  to  prescribe.  jeigen,  to  show. 

tJorig  {adj^),  last,  former.  bie  ^unge,  ~n,  tongue. 

Idioms:  i.  ^Ir^t  =  physician,  medical  man;  ^oftor  is  the  academic 
degree  in  any  faculty. 

2.  SSic  gc^t  C§  3^tteit,  ^crr  ^Oftor?     How  are  you,  doctor  ? 

3.  %^  ^Cigc  ^arl,  My  name  is  Charles;  9Bie  ^Ct^t  Ct?  What  is  his 
name  ? 

A,  I.  Decline  in  the  singular  in  German:  White  bread, 
good  cabbage,  red  ink.  2.  In  the  plural :  Rip^e  apples,  old 
books,  beautiful  hands.  3.  In  full :  Which  great  river,  my 
good  friend,  this  fine  view,  your  white  rose,  the  small  child,  my 
little  room.     4.  Continue  with  similar  examples. 

B,  I.  SSortgen 'Ctett^tag  ging  i(^  sum  ^Irjte,  §errn  !j)r.  2lue. 
2.  3^  iDar  gar  nidjt  h)ot)L  3.  -get)  \^^i{z  ^efttge  ^opffc^tner* 
jen.  4.  ©tefer  gute  §err  tft  ein  after  greunb  unb  @d^ut* 
fatnerab  tneine^  lieben  3Sater^.  5.  @ein  neue^  §au§  [te^t  in 
einer  frf)5nen  bretteti  (gtrq^e.  6.  ^c^  fam  piin!tli(^  an,  aber 
fc^on  iDarteten  tJtele  Ungebutbige.  7.  ©iefe  tuaren  arnte  ^a* 
tienten  be§  berii^mten  Slrgte^.  8.  3lI[o  mu^te  t(^  eine  ganje 
©tunbe  irarten.  9.  ©nblid)  minfte  ntir  ber  a(te  J)tener  unb 
t^  trat  ein.  10.  „aBa^  fe^It  3^nen,  ntein  junger  greunb?'' 
fragte  ber  Slqt.  n.  ^Sa^  fann  ic^  3f)^en  nii^t  fagen,  gerr 
!J)oftor,  ba^  mitffen  @ie  mir  fagen/'  12.  ,,§aben  ®ie  guten 
Slppetit  ? "  13.  „9^ein.''  14.  ,,§aben  @ie  ^opffc^ntergen  nac^ 
bem  effen?''  15.  ,,3an)o^r,  fe{)r  ^eftige.  16.  ^^  fd^Iafe 
nid^t  gut  unb  l^abe  oft  bofe  Slraume.''  17.  !I)ann  mu^te 
ic^  i^m  nteine  3^nge  jeigen  unb  er  fiitjtte  nteinen  ^uf^. 
18.  S)arauf  tjerfd^rieb  er  mir  eine  bittere  Slrjenei  unb  fagte: 
wSommen  ®ie  nd(^fte  3Bo^e  tt)ieber.'' 

C,  Continue:  i.  SSorige  SBo^e  ging  i^  ijum  Slrjte,  .  .  . 
gingft  bu,  :c.    2.  ^c^  fam  punftli(^  an.    3.  2Ba^  fe^Ite  mir? 


6o  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  58 

.  .  .  btr,  tc.    4-  S^  mu^te  lange  irarten.    5.  ^c^  ^abe  ben 
©arten  umgegraben. 

D,  Oral:  i.  Was  fehlte  Ihnen?  2.  Zu  wem  gingen  Sie? 
3.  Wann?  4.  Wie  heifit  er?  5.  1st  er  ein  beriihmter  Arzt? 
6.  Wo  wohnt  er?  7.  Waren  schon  viele  da?  8.  Wer  war 
da?  9.  Was  taten  sie?  10.  Wie  lange  mufiten  Sie  warten? 
II.  Was  sagten  Sie  zum  Arzte?  12.  Was  tat  er  darauf? 
13.  Wann  werden  Sie  wieder  zu  ihm  gehen? 

£,  I.  My  elder  brother  often  has  violent  headaches.  2.  Last 
week  he  went  to  an  old  friend.  3.  This  good  gentleman  is  a 
famous  physician.  4.  He  and  our  dear  father  are  old  school- 
mates. 5.  My  poor  brother  did  not  arrive  punctually.  6.  Acr- 
cprdingly  he  had  to  wait  a  long  time.  7.  The  old  servant  at 
lain^eckoned  to  him  to  enter.  8.  The  kind  old  gentleman 
asked:  "What  is  the  matter  with  you?"  9.  My  brother  re- 
pHed  ;  "  I  often  have  violent  headaches,  and  do  not  sleep  very 
well.  10.  I  also  have  bad  dreams."  11.  "Do  you  enjoy  (use 
fi^meden)  your  (the)  dinner  ?  "  1 2.  "  O,  yes."  13.  "  Show  me 
your  tongue."  14.  TRtb  the  doctor  felt  the  patient's  pulse, 
and  said  :  "You  have  been  eating  too  much.  15.  Take  a  walk 
every  morning  in  the  fresh  air.  16.  Here  is  also  a  bitter 
medicine.  17.  It  is  bitter,  but  it  is  very  good.  18.  Come 
again  next  Thursday. " 

F.  Lesestiick  :  Man  muB  kleinen  Kindern  immer  die  Wahr- 
heit  sagen.  Dies  ej:fuhr  unser  guter  GroBvater  einmal.  Einer 
von  seinen  Enkeln  "fSgte  ihn :  "  GroBvater,  warum  ist  dein 
Haar  so  weiB?  "  "  Ich  bin  sehr  alt,"  antwortete  er.  "Wie  alt 
bist  du  denn,  GroBpapa?"  fragt©  das  Kind  wieder.  "Ach, 
ich  war  schon  mit  Noah  in  der  Arche."  "  Dann  bist  du  wohl 
einer  von  seinen  Sohnen?"  "  Nein,  das  bin  ich  nicht." 
"  Aber  du  kannst  doch  nicht  seine  Frau  sein ;  also  muBt  du 
eins  von  den  Tieren  in  der  Arche  sein." 


159] 


LESSON  XIX 


6i 


LESSON  XIX 

59.  Summary  of  Noun  Declension, 

A,  Strong  Declension. 
I.  ©unbl 

II.  @o]^n[  Models, 
III.  §anbj 


IV.  ©orf  Model. 


[Primary  Form.] 
Smg.  N,  — 

G,  -(e)^ 

JD,  -(e) 

A.— 
Bur.  N,  -e 

G,-t 

n,  -en 

A.-t 


2  2 


^^1 


After  I.  are  de- 
clined :  Masc.  mon- 
osylls.  in  App.  A,  i ; 
neut.  monosylls.  in 
App.  A,  2  ;  nouns  in 
-^ai,  -x^,  -ig,  -ing, 
-m^f  -fa(;  foreign 
mascs.  in  -a(,  -an, 
-aXf  Atx ;  also  in  -or 
stressed.  After  II. 
are  declined  :  Masc. 
monosylls.,  exc.  as 
in  App.  A,  I  and  A, 
4;  the  neuts.  ^f^^f 
Sl^or,  and  some- 
times ©oot ;  those 
in  -aft ;  those  in  -a(, 
-an,  -ar  sometimes. 
After  III.,  fems.  in 
App.  A,  3. 


[Enlarged  Form.] 

N.— 
G.  -(e)^ 

A.— 
N.  -er 
G,-tx 
D,  -ertt 
A.  -er 


After  IV.  are 
declined :  Mascu- 
lines in  App.  A, 
4 ;  neuter  mono- 
syllables, except 
those  in  App.  A, 
2  ;  nouns  in  -htm ; 
ba^  ^Regiment, 
ba^  §ofpttaI  (or 
®pital);  nofem- 
inines;  stems 
having  a,  0,  «, 
take  umlaut  in 
the  plural. 


V.  g^aler 
VI.  33ater 


Models. 


[Contracted  Form.] 


D.— 

^•  — 
N.— 
G,— 
n.-n 

A.~ 


.5 

a;  i3 

B  a 

C/2 


After  V.  are  de- 
clined :  MascuHnes 
and  neuters  in  -d, 
-ctt,  -cr  (except  those 
in  App.  A,  5);  di- 
minutives in  -dien  and 
-Ictn;  neuter  collec- 
tives beginning  with 
@c-  and  ending  in 
-e;  ber  ^cife.  After 
VI.  are  declined : 
The  nouns  in  App. 
A,  5,  and  the 
feminines  3)iutter, 
2:o^ter* 


62 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§59 


B,  Weak  Declension. 


C,   Mixed  Declension. 


VII.  ^nabe  1 

CO 

•»  .• 

VIII.  ®raf      1 

X.  g^ame  Model. 

XI.  3Setterl| 

IX.  «IumeJ  ^ 

XII.  O^r    j| 

Sing,  N,  -(e)  ■ 

§1 

N.  -(e) 

N.— 

G.  -(e)n 

6^.  -(e)n^ 

\ 

a-(t)^ 

D,  -(e)n 

i^.  -(e)n 

.       D.  -(e) 

A,  -(e)nJ 

A.  -(e)tt 

^. — 

P/^r.  N,  -(e)n] 

3 

iV.  -(e)Ti] 

^^ 

iV.  -(e)n] 

^ 

^.-(e)n 

6^.-(e)n 

OS 

^.  -(e)n 

Z^.  -(e)n 

o 

^.  -(e)n 

o 

i^.  -(e)n 

o 

A.  -(e)n. 

"A 

^.  -(e)n. 

;z; 

A.  -(e)n. 

;z; 

Thus     are     de- 

Thus  ar( 

5   de- 

Thus     are     de- 

clined:  After  VII., 

clined:  Th( 

3sein 

clined:     After    XI., 

mascs.  in  -c;    after 

App.  A,  7. 

the   nouns   in   App. 

VIIL,     mascs.      of 

A,  8,  rejecting   c 

App.  A,  6,  many  for- 

throughout; after 

eign       mascs.,      all 

XII.,  those  in  App. 

ferns,  (except  as  in 

A,  9,  foreign  mascs. 

App.  A,  3,  and  those 

in  unstressed  -or* 

in  -c) ;  after  IX.,  all 

fems.  in  -c» 

EXERCISE 

XIX 

ba§  Slbenbbrot,  -(e)§,  supper,  au^rufjen,  to  rest,  repose, 

bte  3lbenbluf t, "  e,  evening  air.  einf (^laf en  (f (^Itef ,  gef (f)Iaf eti), 
atte  (//.),  all.  to  go  to  sleep, 

anfangen  (fing,  gefangen),  to  feuc^t,  damp. 

begin.  ba^  gutter,  -^,  fodder,  food, 

ber  21'rbetter, -^, — ,  workman,  bte  §t^e,  heat. 

aufl)Oren,  to  cease,  stop.  I^ungrtg,  hungry, 

auffteigeti  (ftieg,  geftiegen),  to  in  (ace),  into. 

rise,  mount. 


§  59]  LESSON   XIX  63 

lomtnen,  tarn,  gefommen,  to  ber  ©tatt,  -(e)«,  "t,  stable. 

come.  ber  ®tern,  -(e)^,  -e,  star, 

te^t,  last.  fu^,  sweet. 

hudjttn,  to  shine.  ber  Stau^  -(e)^r  dew. 

mube,  tired,  fatigued.  ber  Jei^,  -(e)^,  -e,  pond-r^ 

ber  9lebet,  -^,  — ,  fog,  mist.  ber  3SogeI,  -^,  %  bird.       \ 

ber  €)fi)\t,  -n,  -n,  ox.  ber  SBagen,  -^,  — ,  wagon,  car- 
rauc^en,  to  smoke.  riage. 

bje^9?u^e,  rest,  repose.  bie  SBoIfe,  -n,  cloud, 

ru^en,  to  rest.  ber  ^^^^9^  -(^)^r  -^^  branch, 
ber    ©^ornftem,   -{0^^   -^r      bough. 

chimney. 

Idiom  :  ^^  hin  fatt,  I  have  had  enough  to  eat. 

Review  Lessons  XIII,  XV,  XVII,  XVIII. 

A.  I.  @^  n)irb  3lbenb.  2.  S5ie  SBoIfen  unb  ber  ^imtnel 
tDerben  rot.  3.  ®te  §t^e  ^at  aufge{)ort.  4-  3Som  SKoffer 
be^  STei^e^  fteigt  ein  9tebet  auf.  5.  S)a^  ®ra^  ift  feurf)t  Dom 
Stau.  6.  Qn  ber  3lbenbluft  fpielen  t)ie(e  ^^nfeften.  7.  T)ie 
2S5get  auf  ben  ^^^^^9^^  b^^  S3dutne  fingen  i^r  le^te^,  fiige^ 
Sieb.     8.  S)ie    2lrbeiter   fommen  torn   gelbe  nadj  §aufe. 

9.  Dd^fett  unb  Sit^e,  ^ferbe  unb  ®(^afe  ge^en  in  ben  (Stall. 

10.  2l((e  finb  ntiibe  unb  n)Unf^en  au^juru^en.  n.  3tber 
SJJenf^en  unb  Jttere  finb  auc^  ^ungrig  unb  iDarten  auf  t^r 
Slbenbbrot.  12.  Salb  merben  fie  aber  alle  fatt  fein,  benn  ber 
©c^ornftein  raud^t  unb  bie  SBagen  bringen  gutter.  13.  S)ann 
Ibnnen  fie  gur  9tu^e  ge^en  unb  einf^tafen.  14.  ©ie  ©terne 
tDerben  batb  anfangen  ju  leu^ten. 

B.  I.  Decline  the  following  nouns  throughout,  prefixing  a 
possessive  pronoun  and  an  appropriate  adjective  :  ^U^,  53auni, 
4Bett,  §au^,  3SogeI,  SBagen,  ®(^af,  (Stall.  2.  DecHne  with 
definite  article  or  biefer  and  an  adjective  :  3JJenf(^,  8uft,  ®ra^, 
Solfe,  ^intmel,  3lbenb,  3lrbeiter,  ^^f^^t.  3.  Decline  with 
an  adjective  only :  5?ebef,  Seti^,  (Btcxn,  8ieb,  ^ferb,  Od^fe^ 
©ta.K,  2^ier,  (Si^ornftein. 


64  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  60 

C,   Oral  on  A. 

Z>.  I.  It  (e^)  is  a  beautiful  evening.  2.  Red  clouds  are 
in  (an)  the  sky.  3.  It  is  no  longer  so  hot.  4.  A  white  fog 
is  rising  from  the  water  of  a  large  pond.  5.  The  little  birds 
are  singing  sweet  songs  in  the  green  trees.  6.  The  tired  work- 
men are  returning  from  their  work  in  the  fields.  7.  They  are 
hungry ;  but  a  bright  fire  is  burning,  and  a  good  supper  will 
be  waiting  for  them.  8.  Then  they  can  go  to  (the)  rest. 
9.  Soon  the  bright  stars  will  begin  to  shine. 

E.  gefeftitd: 

Kletrtstnarte. 

SJJJarte  auf  ber  SBte[e,  ^^^I^^^^^^S^^^^f^f^^^^^^i^ 

3luf  ber  SBiefe  aJJarie,  Unb  ben  ©toden  [o  blau 

2l((e  ©rdfer  unb  tinmen  Unb  ben  golb'nen  $Rannn!eIn,  bjt^ 

®tnb  grd^er  al^  fie.  @t,  ma^  tc^  ba  fd^anM 

/ ,  . '' 

Wxt  tt)trb  f^on  ganj  bgag^  ©a^  ift  fetne  ©ternblnm'— 

SBetl  i(^  nirgenb  fie  fe^',  eiti  ttjpflein  ift  ba«. 

^i)  ^ab'  fie  tjerloren,  ^^  \)^V  fie  gefunben, 

SSerloren  im  ^(ee,  ,^  ,^  ,  ©efnnben  im  ®ra^. 

--^-l>^\xy  ^  _  3o^anttc«  Trojan. 


LESSON  XX 
60.                     Compound  Tenses  of  fettt* 

Perf,  Indie,  Pluperf,  Indie, 

I  have  been,  etc*  I  had  been,  etc. 

t^  6in   geiDefen  \i)  ttiar     getpefen 

"tVi  bift        ,,  bu  marft        „ 

er    ift          ^  er    tDar          „ 

n)ir  finb        ^  xm  tcaren       ,, 

Voft  feib        ^         •  if)r  mart         n 

fie  finb        ^  fie   mar  en       n 


§62]  LESSON   XX  65 

Fut  Ferf,  Indie, 

I  shall  have  been,  etc. 

i^   tDerbe    getDefen  fern 
bu   wirft  „         ,r 

er    tt)irb  „         ,, 

n)ir  tDerben  „  ,r 
i^r  iDerbet  „  „ 
fie   tt)erben       ,,         ,, 

/Jf;/.  /i^/;^.    gelDefen  (ju)  fein,  to  have  been. 

61.  Compound  Tenses  of  fommctt. 

Ferf.  Indie.  Fluperf.  Indie. 


I  have  ( 

come,  etc. 

I  had  come,  etc. 

t^   fitn 

gelotnmett 

x6)    toar 

gefommeu 

bu  bift 

tt 

bu    tt)arft 

ft 

er    tft 

ft 

er     voax 

tt 

ttJtr  finb 

ft 

voxx  iDareu 

It 

i^r  feib 

ft 

i^r   tt)art 

n 

fie  finb 

ft 

fie    h^aren 

If 

Fut  Ferf 

Indie. 

I  shall  have  come,  etc. 

i^   merbe    ge!i 

^mtneu  fciti 

bu   tDirft 

tf         ft 

er    tDtrb 

tf         ft 

n)ir  tDerbeu 

ft         ft 

i^r  tDerbet 

ft         ft 

fie   tDerbeu 

ft         ft 

Ferf.  Infin.     gefoTUmetl  (ju)  feitt,  to  have  come. 

62.   Verbs  with  f citt*     The  following  classes  of  verbs  are  con- 
jugated with  feiu  as  an  auxiliary  of  tense  : 
I.  The  two  verbs  of  rest : 

fein,  be.  bleiben,  remain. 


66  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§63 

2.  Verbs  of  motion,  such  as  : 

Begegnen,  meet.  fallen,  fall.  fommen,  come, 

etlen,  hasten.  folgett,  follow.  laufen,  run. 

fasten,  drive,  etc.  ge^en,  go. 

Note. —  Some  of  these  also  admit  l|atien  when  action  rather  than  des- 
tination is  expressed :  S)er  ^utf (^er  f^at  gu  fd)neU  gefa^rcn,  *  The  coach- 
man has  been  driving  too  quickly.' 

3.  Those  expressing  a  change  of  condition,  such  as  : 
fterben,  die.        tr)acf)[en,  grow.        tDcrben,  become. 

4.  The  following  impersonal  verbs  : 

geltngett,  succeed.        gefi^e^en,  happen.        gliicf en,  succeed. 

Note.  —  Verbs  conjugated  with  fcitt  are  indicated  in  the  vocabularies 
and  dictionary  by  (f.). 

63.  Present  and  Imperfect  Indicative  of  tDoKett. 

Present  Indicative.  Imperfect  Indicative, 

I  will,  etc.  I  would,  etc. 

\i)  n)ttl         tDtr  tDotlen  i(^  tt)oHte  xm  moHten 

bu  tDiflft       tt)r  tt)oHt  bu  tDoHteft  i^r  moHtet 

er  tDitt         fie  tDotten  er  tDoHte  fie   tt)ot(ten 

64.  Use  of  ttioMetu 

^^  tDiH  '^ente  abreifen.  I  will  (mean  to)  go  to-day. 

(5r  tDttt  nt(^t  fommen.  He  doesn't  intend  to  come. 

2Bir  n)oHten  ba^in  ge^en.  We  wanted  to  go  there. 

Observe:  i.  This  verb  renders  the  English  '  will,' *  would,' 
when  the  latter  expresses  more  than  mere  futurity  (an  exertion 
of  the  will  of  the  subject). 

2.  It  often  equals  '  want  to,'  *  intend  to,'  '  mean  to,'  etc. 

65.  Infinitive  of  Purpose. 

3^  ge^e  au^,  um  ein  Su(^  ju  I  am  going  out  (in  order)  to 
fanfen.  buy  a  book. 


§65]  LESSON  XX  67 

Observe  :  Purpose  is  often  expressed  by  an  infinitive  with 
jtt,  governed  by  nm* 

EXERCISE  XX 

abfa^ren  (f-,  fu^r,  gefa^rett),  ^erau^fotntnen  ([♦,  ^Civx,  ge* 
to  depart,  set  off,  set  out.  fommett),  to  come  out. 

anfe^en  (fa!^,  gefe^en),  to  look  l^tnau^fa^ren  (fO,  to  drive  out. 

at.  italienifc^,  Italian  (adj.). 

ba^  3luge,  -«,  -n,  eye.    •  laufen  ([♦)/  li^fr  gelaufen,  to 

auger^alb  (gen.),  outside  of.  run. 

au^ge{)en  (f.,  ging,  gegangen),  me^rmat^,  several  times. 

to  go  out.  mteten,  to  hire,  engage, 

begegnen  (f,,  da^.),  to  meet.  bie  9J?tnute,  -n,  minute, 

ba^  ^ilb,  -e^,  -er,  picture.  mitbringen  (brac^te,  gebrac^t), 
bie  48itbergalerie',  -n,  picture-       to  bring  along  (with). 

gallery.  nac^tjer,  afterwards, 

bteiben  (f.),  btteb,  gebtieben,  ber  ^axt,  -^,  -e  or  -^,  park. 

to  remain,  stay.  ber  @aal,  -(^)^/  ®ate,  hall, 

ba'^iri,  thither,  to   that   place,  ber    ©C^Itttfd^U^,    -(0^/    -^/ 

there.  skate. 

bie  ^Drof^fe,  -n,  cab.  ©^Iittf(^u^    laufen    ([.),    to 
ba^  (Si^,  -e^,  ice.  skate, 

fafleti  (f.),  fiel,  gefatten,  to  bie  SSiertelftunbe,  -n,  quarter 

fall.  of  an  hour. 

geltngen    (f .,   impers.,    dat.),  merben  (f .),  luarb  or  iDurbe,  ge* 

gelang,  gelungen,   to  sue-      tDorben,  to  become,  be. 

ceed.  tDe^l^alb?  why? 
gU  (adv.),  too. 

A.  Continue  the  following :  i.  ^(^  bttt  neultd)  fratt!  getDefett. 
2.  ^i)  tuar  miibe  gettjorben.  3.  ^6)  bin  au^gegangen,  urn 
einen  ^efuc^  jn  ntac^en.  4-  ^^  tDerbe  ntorgen  abgefa^ren 
fein.  5.  ^i)  bin  (tbar)  fc^nell  gelaufen.  6.  3=(f)  bin  (mar) 
tneiner  @d)n)efter  begegnet.  7.  ^i)  bin  (xoox)  auf  bent  gife 
gefaflen.  8.  (S^  ift  (mar)  nttr  gelungen,  ba^  -33uc^  3U  finben, 
e^  ift  (tt)ar)  btr,  :c.    9.  ^(^  bin  (mar)  Diet  ju  fpiit  gebtieben. 


68  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  65 

B,  I.  3f(^  bin  geftern  mit  meinem  alteti  greunbe,  fart 
85ff(er,  in  ber  ®tabt  gett)e[en,  nm  ben  !Jag  bort  p  Derbringen* 
2.  2Bir  finb  juerft  mit  ber  ©tra^enba^n  jur  gro^en  -93itber* 
galerie  gefat)ren,  3.  3}Jein  greunb  tDar  f(^on  me^rmal^  bort 
gemefen,  4.  9Bir  finb  in  ben  italienifi^en  ©aal  gegangen. 
5.  3^n  biefem  @aa(e  finb  tt)ir  eine  ©tnnbe  geblieben  nnb 
^aben  bie  ©ilber  angefe^en,  6.  ®ann  finb  trir  n)ieber  ^er^ 
au^gefommen,  benn  nnfere  Slngen  tDaren  miibe  genjorben. 
7.  9}?ein  grennb  n)o((te  ben  gro^en  ^arf  an^erf)alb  ber  ©tabt 
befu^en,  8.  2Bir  ^aben  eine  S)rofc^fe  gemietet,  nm  ^inan^- 
jnfa^ren*  9.  .^n  jtDanjig  SKinnten  finb  mir  bort  angefommen* 
10.  S)ann  finb  tt)ir  bnrdf)  ben  f(^onen  ^ar!  gegangen*  n.  9^ad^ 
einer  3SierteIftnnbe  finb   tt)ir   gnm  fleinen  See  gefommen* 

12.  e^  n)ar  fe^r  !alt  gen)efen  nnb  ba^  gi^  tDar  ^^rcid^tig* 

13.  SBir  fatten  nnfere  ©c^Iittfi^n^e  mitgebra^t  nnb  finb  eine 
©tnnbe  ©(^littfc^n^  gelanfen*  14.  9lnf  bem  ©ife  finb  t^ir 
einem  @c^nT!ameraben  begegnet,  15.  5ytad)^er  finb  \o\x  jnr 
@tabt  snriidgefe^rt,  benn  trir  t^aren  mitbe  nnb  ^nngrig  ge- 
tDorben,  16.  2Bir  tt)ot(en  nd(^fte  SBoc^e  mieber  jnr  ®tabt 
fa^ren* 

C,  Oral:  i.  Wo  sind  Sie  gestern  gewesen?  2.  Wer  war 
mit  Ihnen?  3.  Wie  sind  Sie  dahingekommen  ?  4.  Weshalb 
sind  Sie  dahingefahren  ?  5.  Wie  lange  sind  Sie  in  der  Bilder- 
galerie  geblieben?     6.  Weshalb  sind  Sie  nicht  langer  geblieben ? 

7.  Weshalb  sind  Sie  zum  Park  hinausgefahren  ?  8.  Was  haben 
Sie  nachher  getan  ? 

D,  (Render  the  past  tense  in  this  exercise  by  the  German 
perfect.)  i.  Where  were  you  yesterday,  Albert?  2.  I  was  in 
the  city.  3.  I  was  there  too,  but  I  did  not  meet  you.  4.  I 
was  sorry  not  to  have  met  you.  5.  Did  you  go  to  the  park 
first?  6.  No,  I  went  with  my  sister  to  the  picture-gallery  to 
see  the  German  pictures,       7.  How  long  did  you  stay  there? 

8.  We  staid  there  two  hours.     9.  Are  you  fond  of  the  German 


§  67]  LESSON  XXI  69 

painters?  10.  Many  of  their  pictures  are  splendid;  I  ad- 
mire them  very  [much].  11.  Had  you  been  in  the  picture- 
gallery  before  (f(J)on)?  12.  Oh  yes,  I  had  been  there  several 
times.  13.  Did  you  go  into  the  hall  of  the  Italian  pamters? 
f4.  No,  we  had  no  time ;  we  wished  to  visit  the  park. 
15.  Did  you  drive  there  (ba()tn)?  16.  Yes,  we  drove  in  a  cab. 
17.  Afterwards  we  walked  through  the  park.  18.  We  also 
skated.     19.  We  then  returned  home  to  eat  and  rest. 

E.  8efeftii(f: 

@^  blii^t  ein  [d)one6  ©tUmc^ett  @^  it)et^  ntcf)t  t)iel  gu  reben^ 
auf  unfrer  gritnett  Iji^VAJiAi^Unb  atle^  ma^  e^  [priest, 
(Settt  3lug'  tft  tt)ie  ber  §immel  ^\\  immer  nur  ba^fetbe, 
®o  ^eiter  utib  fo  blau.  3 ft  nur :  ,r2Sergt^  mein  nic^t." 

—  §offmann  t)on  galler^Ieben. 

LESSON  XXI 

66.  Adjective  Stems  in  -e,  -el,  -Ctt, -cr*  i.  Adjective  stems 
in  -e  drop  e  before  the  endings  :  miibe,  '  tired ' ;  ber  (bie,  ba^) 
tniib-e;  bie  miib-en,  etc 

2.  Adjectives  in  -cl  drop  c  of  the  inflectional  ending  before 
a  final  -it,  and  drop  c  of  the  stem  before  other  terminations ; 
so  usually  also  adjectives  in  -ct  preceded  by  a  vowel :  ebel, 
'  noble,'  ebein,  eble,  ebler,  eble^ ;  teuer, '  dear,'  teuern,  teure,  etc. 

3.  Adjectives  in  -cr  preceded  by  a  cons(.'nant  usually  drop  c 
of  the  inflectional  ending  before  -m  or  -Jt  only :  l^eifer, 
*  hoarse,'  ^eifertu,  ^eifem. 

4.  Adjectives  in  -en  may  drop  e  of  the  stem  before  any  ter- 
mination :  golben,  'golden,'  go(b(e)nen,  goIb(e)ne,  goIb(e)tte^/ 
etc. 

Note.  —  The  above  changes  are  euphonic,  and  serve  to  obviate  the 
repetition  of  the  weakened  C  sound  in  successive  syllables  (see  p.  xiv) . 

67.  Special  Cases,  i.  The  adjective  ^0(^,  'high,'  drops  c 
when  inflected  : 

3^er  l)oI)e  Saum.  The  high  tree. 


70 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§68 


2.  After  etn)a^,  'something,'  nic^t^,  'nothing/  t)iel,  'much/ 
tt)entg, '' little/  the  adjective  follows  the  strong  declension,  and 
is  written  with  a  capital : 

attva^  (nxd)t^)  ®ntC§.  Something  (nothing)  good. 

Tilt  tDenig  ®ntem.  With  little  that  is  good. 

3.  After  the  plurals  alle, '  all/  eintge,  ttlid^t^ '  some/  ntani^e, 
'  many/  mel^rere^ '  several/  folc^e, '  such/  titele,  '  many/  irentge^ 
'  few/  the  adjective  may  have  either  weak  or  strong  endings  : 

SlHe  gute(n)  3}Jenf(^en.  All  good  men. 

4.  Adjectives  in  -er  from  names  of  cities  are  indeclinable, 
and  are  written  with  a  capital : 

S5te  i^onboncr  3^itungen-  The  London  newspapers. 


^artfer  2Koben. 

Paris  fashions. 

68. 

Adjectives  as  Nouns. 

The  stranger  (m.). 

The  stranger  (/.). 

The  strangers. 

N,  ber   grentbe 
G.  be^  gremben 
D.  bent  grentben 
A,  ben  gremben 

bie  ^rentbe 
ber  grentben 
ber  gremben 
bie  grembe 

bte  gremben 
ber  gremben 
ben  gremben 
bte  gremben 

A  stranger  {m^. 

A  stranger  (/.). 

Strangers. 

N.  etn      grentber 
G.  etne^  grentben 
D.  etnent  gremben 
A.  einen  i^remben 

etne   ^^rembe 
etner  grentben 
etner  ^remben 
etne   grentbe 

i^retnbe 
grentber 
gremben 
gretnbe 

Observe  :  Adjectives  and  participles  used  as  nouns  vary  their 
declension  according  to  the  rules  for  adjective  declension 
(Lesson  XVIII),  but  are  written  with  capital  letters. 

Note.  —  Many  adjectives  and  participles  are  thus  used  in  German,  the 
English  equivalents  of  which  are  nouns  only :  fremb,  *  strange,'  ber  i^pXt) 
grembe,  2C.,  *the  strangef ';  reifenb,  *  travelling,'  ber  9^eifetibe,  IZ.,  'the 
traveller ';   t)ertt)atlbt,  *  related,'  ber  ^enuaubte,  :C.,  *  the  relative.' 


§68] 


LESSON   XXI 


71 


EXERCISE  XXI 


abreifen  (f.)r  to  set  out,  start,  f(i)Iafen,  f^Iief,  gefdjlafen,  to 


depart,  go  away, 
ber  Seamte^  official, 
ber  Sebiente,  servant, 
blinb,  blind, 
bie  !l)atne,  -n,  lady, 
beutfc^  (^#),  German, 
ebel,  noble, 
e^rtid^,  honest, 
erft  {adj}),  first, 
granfreic^,  n.,  -%,  France, 
fremb,  strange,  foreign, 
greube  tnac^en,  to  give  pleasure, 
ber  ®efanbte;  ambassador. 
glUdlic^,  happy, 
golben,  golden,  gold  (^^*.). 
I^eifer,  hoarse, 
^ari'^,  «.,  Paris, 
retd^,  rich. 
ber  9teifenbe,  traveler. 


sleep. 

f(^(e{^t,  bad,  poor. 

ba^  Spita'I,  -(e)^,  ^er,  hos- 
pital. 

ber  Staat,  -e^,  -en,  state. 

ftattfinben  (fanb,  gefunben), 
to  take  place. 

[terben  (f.),  [tarb,  geftorben, 
to  die. 

teuer,  dear,  costly. 

Ubera'II,  everywhere. 

u'ngIiidU(^,  unhappy,  unfortu- 
nate. 

ber  2SertDanbte,  relative. 

ber  SBein,  -(e)^,  -e,  wine. 

bie  SBeltau^fteltuttg,  -en,  in- 
ternational exhibition. 

SBien,  n,,  -^,  Vienna. 

iDiltfo'mmen,  welcome. 

bie  SBurft,  "e,  sausage. 


A,  I.  33iele  ©entf^e  mo^nen  in  unferer  8tabt.  2.  Unfer 
8e^rer  ift  ein  ©eutfrfjer ;  feine  grau  tft  eine  ©eutfc^e. 
3.  J)te  ©entfcf)en  ternen  gem  (gnglifc^.  4.  SJfeine  2Ser* 
manb ten  tDollen  auf  bem  8anbe  tDoI)nen.  5.  (gin  S^eifenber 
mu^  oft  in  f(^lec^ten  Setten  [d)(afen.  6.  S5ie[er  arme  ^linbe 
^at  nteiner  Sliutter  jirei  ^Ubfc^e  S'orbe  gemadjt,  benn  fie  ^at 
i^m  t)ie{  ®nte^  getan.  7.  Gr  tat  e^,  nm  i^r  eine  grenbe  ju 
mac^en.  8.  ©te  erfte  gonboner  SBeltan^ftellung  fanb  im 
3a^re  1851  ftatt.  9.  ^arifer  §anbf(^nf)e  nnb  SSiener 
SBitrfte  finb  UberaH  berit^mt.  10.  Dtefe  Steifenben  bett)un* 
berten  bie  fc^one  ?anbf(^aft.    n.  J^rau  2)?ofer  ift  eine  aSer^ 


72  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§68 

iDanbte  unfere^  alien  Slr^te^.  12.  gin  grember  tft  ntc^t 
immer  iDiMotnmen*  13.  I)er  alte  Sebiente.  meine^  guten 
Dnfef^  tft  geftorben,  14.  ©er  beut[(J)e  Oefattbte  tft  abgeretft, 
um  SSeriDanbte  ju  befut^ett,  15.  ®te  ©efattbtett  t)ott  grattf== 
ret(i)  unb  (gttglattb  fittb  angefommett,  16.  SStamtt  fittb  bte 
©tetter  be^  ®taate^«  17.  (Sitt  Seatttter  tttu^  e^rlid)  feitt, 
18.  ©ie  9fei(^ett  fittb  nid^t  itttttter  gliidUd^,  19.  Sluc^  2{rttte 
fottttett  glitcflirf)  feitt.  20.  ®er  Slrjt  n)i(I  bettt  uttglitdlic^ett 
^rattfett  gutett,  attett  SBeitt  gebett.  21.  3=tt  biefettt  (Spitat 
fittb  t)iele  Stattfe. 

^.   Oral  on  the  above. 

C.  Supply  the  proper  termination  of  the  following  stems : 
I.  gttt  ®eutf(^-  2.  9}?eittetit  23erlt)attbt-  3.  ^^^^  ^t^i- 
fettb-  4.  -3I)r  ^ebiettt-  .  5.  ©e^  artttett  Slittb-.  6.  2Be^ 
ttig  @(^dtt-.  7.  ®er  berit^ttttett  9?eifettb-.  8.  (gitt  reii^er 
SSermattbt-.  9.  ©ie  artttett  gretttb-  10.  !j)ett  gutett  33e^ 
biettt-  II.  !l)e^  beutf^ett  ©efattbt-*  12.  aSiele  uttgtitcJ^ 
Iid)e  Srattl- 

£>,  Inflect,  and  give  the  proper  orthographical  form  of  the 
adjectives:  i.  gttt  (golbett)  9iittg.  2.  SKeiti  (teuer)  ©o^ti. 
3.  3)te  (ebel)  ©attte.  4-  S)ettt  (ebet)  ©efattbtett*  5.  ©eti 
(^eifer)  (Sc^itlertt. 

^.  I.  I  have  many  relatives  in  this  village.  2.  Where  do 
your  relatives  intend  to  live?  3.  The  son  of  this  German  is  a 
celebrated  physician.  4.  The  blind  are  not  always  unhappy. 
5.  This  noble  German  has  done  much  good.  6.  The  London 
cabs  drive  very  fast.  7.  My  aunt  hkes  Paris  gloves  very 
much.  8.  Our  old  physician  is  a  relative  of  (t»Ott)  Mrs.  Moser. 
9.  This  German  [woman]  is  a  friend  of  my  aunt.  10.  Strangers 
and  poor  people  were  always  \velcome  at  our  house.  11.  The 
German  ambassador  was  a  very  noble  man.  12.  Ambassadors 
are  the  servants  of  the  state.  13.  The  young  may  (!ottttett) 
die;  the  old  must  die;  the  patient  has  died.     14.   I  have  sold 


§  69]  LESSON   XXII  73 

my  house  to  a  rich  man.  15.  We  have  bought  this  dear  wine 
for  the  patients  in  the  hospital.  16.  Good  old  wine  costs 
a  great  deal.  17.  Do  you  like  (to  eat)  Vienna  sausages? 
18.  This  honest  official  was  our  neighbor.  19.  Officials  are  not 
always  honest.     20.     Honest  officials  are  not  always  rich. 

F,  Lesestiick :  Die  Menschen  wohnen  in  Hausern.  Viele 
Hauser  zusammen  bilden  eine  Stadt  oder  ein  Dorf.  Eine  Stadt 
hat  lange  und  breite  StraBen.  Die  Stadt  ist  groB.  Die  Hauser 
sind  sehr  schon  gebaut.  Die  StraBen  der  Stadt  sind  gepfla- 
stert.  Zu  beiden  Seiten  stehen  Laternen.  Abends  ziindet  man 
sie  an.  In  den  Hausern  sind  oft  Laden ;  diese  haben  grolJe, 
schone  Schaufenster.  In  den  StraBen  und  auf  den  Platzen 
sieht  man  stets  viele  Menschen. 

LESSON  XXII 
69.  Word  Order  of  Objects,  etc. 

1.  ^i)  f(^i(fte  i^m  geftern  ein      I  sent  him  a  book  yesterday. 

2.  ^i)  fdjicfe  S^ttCtt  btefe^,  I  send  you  this. 

3.  gr  t)at  e^  mir  gef c^id t.  He  sent  it  to  me. 

4-  -Set)  fc^idte  mcittcm  ©O^nc      I  sent  my  son  a  book, 
ein  Suc^. 

5.  3d)    [(i)t(fte     geftern    ein     I  sent  a  book  to  him  (to  my 

:©u(^  an  t^n  (an  meinen        son)  yesterday:  '"  ' 
©o^n). 

6.  3^^  ^be  t^m  geftern  ein      I  sent  him  a  good  book  yester- 

gnte^  :93uc^  gefc^icft.  day. 

Observe:  i.  Pronoun  objects  without  prepositions  precede 
all  other  objects,  adverbs,  etc. 

2.  Personal  pronouns  precede  other  pronouns. 

3.  Of  several  personal  pronouns,  the  accusative  precedes. 

4.  Of  noun  objects  without  prepositions,  the  person  precedes 
the  thing. 


Ki/v(J 


74  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  70 

5.  Prepositional  objects  follow  other  objects  and  adverbs. 

6.  Adverbs  of  time  usually  precede  everything,  except  pro- 
nouns not  governed  by  a  preposition. 

70.  Word  Order  in  Dependent  Sentences. 

Qd)  arbeite  nidji,  iDeit  ic^  miibe   I  am  not  working,  because  I 

6in>  am  tired. 

Qd)  ^offe,  ba^  er  un^  Bcfud^cn  I  hope  that  he  will  visit  us. 

tDirb. 
Qii)  glaube,  ba^  er  ^tit  gcliafit  I  think  that  he  will  have  had 

fjahtn  tDtrb.  Jij"^- 

©a  id)  miibe  btn^  arbette  id)   As  iam  tired  I  am  not  work- 

nidjt  ing. 

(Sr  [agt,  ba§  er  fetne  ^dt  ge*  He  says  he  has  had  no  time. 

t)abt  (fiat). 

Observe  :   i.   The  verb  comes  last  in  a  dependent  sentence. 

2.  In  compound  tenses,  the  participle  and  infinitive  immedi- 
ately precede  the  verb,  i.e.  the  auxiliary. 

3.  If  both  participle  and  infinitive  occur,  the  participle  pre- 
cedes the  infinitive. 

4.  The  place  of  the  subject   in   a   dependent   sentence  is 
usually  the  same  as  in  English. 

5.  The  dependent  is  always  separated  from  the   principal 
sentence  by  a  comma. 

6.  When  a  dependent  sentence  precedes  the  principal  sen- 
tence, the  subject  of  the  latter  is  thrown  after  the  verb. 

^  7.   The  tense  auxiliary  ijahtu  or  [eitt  is  frequently  omitted  in 
'  a  ba^  clause. 

71.  Use  of  tactttt,  aUf  'mann. 

SBetitt  ic^  metne    ^^idjt  tue  When  I  do  (have  done)  my 

(getan  ^abe)^  bin  id)  gliid*      duty,  I  am  happy. 

iid).  -"^ 

^d)    befu(^te     immer     metne   I   always   visited    my    friends 

greunbe,    tocnn    id)    in   ber        when(ever)  I  was  in  town. 

®tabt  tDar. 


§  71]  LESSON   XXII  75 

3cf)  ging  geftern  au^,  aW  e^  I  went  out  yesterday  when  it 

je^tt  gefc^Iagett  ^atte,  had  struck  ten.  ^ 

^y  id)  iung  tt)ar,  mar  ic^  [tar!.  When    I    was    young    I    was 

strong. 
SBann  tt)ar  fetn  SSatcr  ^ier?      When  was  his  father  here? 

Observe  :   i.  'When '  =  ttJcntt  always  with  present  or  perfect. 

2.  '  When '  =  toenn  with  imperfect  and  pluperfect  of  a  habit- 
ual or  repeated  occurrence,  state,  or  condition  (=  *  whenever '). 

3.  *  When '  =  a(^  with  imperfect  and  pluperfect  only,  of  a  sin- 
gle, definite  occurrence,  or  of  a  state  or  condition  once  occurring. 

4.  '  When  ?' interrogative  =  mann? 
Note.  —  Remember  that  tOCtin  also  =  *  if.' 

EXERCISE   XXII 

befonber^,  especially,  particu-  ba^  (2cf)aufpiet,  -(e)^,  -e,  play. 

larly.  ber  ©c^aufpieter^  -^,  — ,  actor. 

ia  (^on/\),  as,  when,  since.  bic  ©d^aufpielerin,  -nen,  ac- 
ba^,  that  (con/.).  tress. 

enttiiufc^t,  disappointed.  ba^  ©piet,  -(e)^,  -e,  play,  act- 
bie  (5nttduf(f)ung,  -en,  disap-      ing. 

pointment.  fpre(^en,  fprat^,  gefprod^en,  to 
erfaltet  fein,  to  have  a  cold.  speak. 

ettt)a^,  something,  somewhat,  ba^    @tii(f,   -(e)^,   -e,  piece, 
geben,  to  act,  present  (a  play).        play, 

gefallen,    Qt^id^   gefallen,   to  ba^  ST^eater,  -^,  — ,  theater. 

please,  suit.  itbeme'^tnen  (itberna^m,  Uber* 
gtauben,  to  believe,  think.  nommen),  to  undertake, 

^errtic^,  magnificent,  splendid.  tDarUTU?  why?  wherefore? 

I)Offen,  to  hope.  iDCtt,  because, 

liegen,  lag,  gelegen,  to  lie,  be.  luxM,  back  (a^v.), 
bic  9?oIIe,  -n,  part. 

Idioms:  ^m  X^catcr,  at  the  theater;   ittig  XlfCattV  gC^Ctt,  to  go  to 

the  theater. 

A.  I.  SBantt  finb  Sie  tmbeutfd)en  Sweater  gemefen?  2.  SBir 
fittb  geftern  2lbenb  bort  gemefen.    3.  aSarum  finb  Sie  bafjin 


76  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  71 

gegangen?  4-  2BeU  matKS^afefpeare^  §am(et  gab.  5.  Sir 
iDoKten  befonbev^  gem  bie  beru{)tnte  (Scf)au[pie(erin  graulein  W. 
in  ber  9ioHe  ber  0|)I)e(ia  fet)en.  6.  ©ie  {)at  3f)nen  if)r  (Spief 
gefaHen?  7.  aSir  iDaren  ettDa^  enttciufc^t,  ba  unfere  ^Id^e 
fo  iDeit  juriid  lagen,  ba^  iDir  ni^t  gut  t)oren  fonnten.  8.  2lber 
id)  fann  3^f)nen  fagen,  ba^  ba^  ©tad  uM  fonft  fel)r  gut 
gefaHen  ijat  9.  §at  ber  berit^ntte  ®(J)aufpie(er  @,  ben  §am* 
let  gefpielt?  10.  g^ein,  §err  S.  mu^te  biefe  dtoik  iiber^ 
ne^nten,  ba  §err  ®.  nid)t  [pielen  tonnte.  n.  3)a^  tDar  auc^ 
eine  gro^e  6nttau[c^ung,  aber  i(^  I)offe,  ba^  er  morgen  3Ibenb 
fpielen  iDirb,  12.  Unb  tDe^^atb  !onnte  er  ni^t  fpielen? 
i>  S^  glaube,  ba^  er  erfaltet  wax  unb  ni(^t  fpre(i)en  fonnte. 

14.  ginben  ®ie  nid)t,  ba^  biefe^   ©t^aufpiel  ^errHrf)  ift? 

15.  ^atDoI)!!  Sefonber^  iDenn  ein  guter  ®(^aufpieler  ben 
gantlet  [pielt.  16.  Sir  iDoIIen  ndd)fte  SBoc^e  tDieber  in^ 
Sf)eater  ge^en,  urn  §errn  ®.  gu  fel)en. 

B.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C.  Complete  the  following  sentences  :  i.  Qd)  tauu  ^eute 
ni(^t  fommen,  meil  ...      2.  Sir  tDerben  ntUbe,  inenn  .  .  . 

3.  Sir    tonnten    I)eute    !eine    Sefu^e  maiden,  benn  .  .  . 

4.  9J?ein  ^^^reunb  glaubt,  bap  .  .  .  5-  Qdj  tDerbe  Sie  morgen 
befudien,  menu  ...  6.  3^1^  I)offe,  ba^  ...  7.  55er  Scf)iUer 
fontmt  nid)t,  ba  .  .  .  8.  ©r  fonnte  bie  Slufgabe  nid)t  madjen, 
meil  ...  9.  Qd)  bin  il)nt  begegnet,  al^  .  .  .  10.  ^c^  mid 
morgen  jur  etabt  fa{)ren,  um  .  .  . 

£).  1.  I  like  to  go  to  the  theater  when  I  have  time.  2.  I 
wanted  to  go  to  the  theater  yesterday  evening,  for  Miss  M.  was 
playing  the  part  of  (the)  Ophelia.  3.  But  I  was  obhged  to  stay 
at  home,  because  I  had  headache.  4.  I  was  very  [much]  dis- 
appointed, as  Miss  M.  is  a  celebrated  actress.  5.  People  say 
that  she  plays  this  part  especially  well.  6.  Were  you  there  yes- 
terday evening?  7.  Yes,  but  my  seat  was  so  far  back  that  I 
couldn't  hear  well.     8.  I  was  disappointed,  as  the  celebrated 


§73] 


LESSON    XXIII 


77 


actor  S.  didn't  play.  9.  They  (man)  say  that  he  had  a  cold 
and  couldn't  speak.  10.  I  do  not  believe  that  he  had  a  cold. 
II.  When  he  was  here  last  year  he  had  a  cold  and  couldn't 
play.  12.  Perhaps  he  doesn't  like  to  play  in  a  small  town. 
13.  If  he  is  well  to-morrow  evening,  I  hope  that  he  will  play 
(the)  Hamlet.     14.  When  will  Miss  M.  play  again  in  this  town? 

E.  Lesestiick  :  Ein  Schauspieler  spielte  die  Rolle  des  Geistes 
im  Hamlet  sehr  schlecht  und  wurde  ausgezischt.  Nachdem  er  (>Y  ' 
dies  eine  Zeitlang  ertragen  hatte,  versetzte  er  die  Zuhorer 
dadurch  wieder  in  gute  Laune,  daB  er  sagte  :  "Meine  Damen 
und  Herren  !  Es  tut  mir  sehr  leid,  dafi  ich  bei  Ihnen  keinen 
Erfolg  habe ;  wenn  Sie  nicht  zufrieden  sind,  so  mufi  ich  den 
Geist  aufgeben." 


72. 


LESSON  XXIII 
The  Relative  Pronoun  bcr* 


Singular. 

Plural. 

Masc.      Fern,    Neut. 

All  Genders, 

N.  ber        bte       ba^ 

bte,  who,  which,  that. 

G,   beffctt  ber  en  beffcn 

ber  cn,  whose,  of  which. 

D,   bent      ber       bem 

ben  en,  (to,  for)  whom,  which. 

A,   ben       bte       ba^ 

bte,  whom,  which,  that. 

Observe  :    These  forms  are 

the  same  as  those  of  the  defini 

article,  except  the  added  -en  of  the  genitive  singular  and  plural 
and  the  dative  plural. 


73. 


The  Relative  Pronoun  >csst\^tx. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


Fern. 
n)eld)e 


Neut, 
n)el(i)e^ 


All  Genders. 
tt)el(f)e,  who,  which,  that. 


Masc, 
N,  n)e(c^er 

D.   tDelt^em    iDelc^er    n)eld)etn    h)elc^en,  (to,  for)  whom,  etc 
A.    tDe((^en     mettle     xot\6)t^     meli^e,  whom,  etc. 


78  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  74 

Observe  :  SBelc^er  follows  the  bie[er  model,  but  lacks  the 
genitive,  which  is  replaced  by  the  genitive  forms  of  bct  (beffen, 
K.). 

74.  Relative  Clauses. 

S)a^  tft  ber  Slrjt,  ber  (Wtiijtv)  That   is   the  doctor   who  was 

^ter  tnar.  here. 

§ier     tft     ber      StOcE,      hen  Here   is  the   stick   which  you 

(tt)el(^en)  Ste  ge^abt  ^aben.  have  had. 

§ier  fittb  <33itc{}er,  bic  (tDe((i)e)  Here  are  books  that  are  useful. 

nut^ti^  finb. 

^ennen  ®te  bie  J)ame,  ber  Do    you  know   the   lady  we 

(tt)eld)er)  tviv  begegticten?  met? 

S)a^  §au^  ttJOrin  (=  in  bem)  The  house  in  which  I  live. 

i(^  iDo^ne. 

Observe  :  i.  The  relative  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  gen- 
der and  number  ;  the  case  depends  on  its  use  in  its  own  clause. 

2.  Since  all  relative  clauses  are  dependent,  the  verb  comes 
last  (§  70).  ■ 

3.  !j)er  and  tpeli^er  refer  to  both  persons  and  things;  ber  is 
more  common  than  H)etc()er,  which  is  chiefly  used  to  avoid 
repetitions  of  ber. 

4.  5)er  and  tvtldjtx,  referring  to  inanimate  objects,  are  some- 
times replaced  by  tt)0  (tDor  before  a  vowel)  preceding  a  prepo- 
sition. 

5.  The  relative  is  never  omitted  in  German. 

Note.  —  The  gen.  bcffCtt,  2C.  always  precedes  the  word  on  which  it 
depends:  ©in  ^autn,  bcffctt  iBIdtter  griin  finb,  *A  tree,  the  leaves  of 
which  are  green.' 

EXERCISE   XXIII 

2lbf(f)teb  ne^tnen,  na^m,  ge^  etnpfangett,  etnpfittg,  emp* 
notnmen,  to  take  leave.  fcittgetl,  to  receive. 

bringen,  brad)te,  gebrac^t,  to  bie  (grfrifrfjung,  -en,  refresh- 
bring,  ment. 

etntaben  (lub,  gelaben),  to  ba^  (Srlebni^,  -e^,  -e,  experi- 
invite.  ence. 


§  74]  LESSON   XXIII  79 

ber  ©aft,  -e^,  "e,  guest.  bie  9Kitternac^t,  "e,  midnight, 

ba^  ®ebi(^t,  -(e)^,  -e,  poem.  f(^Iagen,  fct)(ug,  gefc^tagen,  to 
bie  ©ema^Utt,  -nen,  wife.  strike, 

bie  ®efefl[d)aft,  -en,  company,  fingen,    fang,    gefnngen,    to 

party.  sing, 

tntereffa'nt,  interesting.  tjortragen  (trng,  getragen),  to 
lennen,    fannte,    gefannt,    to      recite. 

know,  be  acquainted  with.  gnbringen,  to  spend,  pass  (time), 

luftig,  gay,  merry.  pgegen,  present.^ 

A,  I.  3(^  bin  geftern  9lbenb  in  einer  ©efeflfi^aft  getnefen, 
3n  n)e(i^er  man  mic^  eingelaben  \)Oiiit.  2.  S^er  §err  be^ 
§anfe^,  in  bem  ic^  xoax,  ift  §err  ©einge,  beffen  ®eniaf)Un 
etne  SSermanbte  t)on  mtr  (of  mine)  tft.  3.  2l(^  h)tr  anfamen, 
empfingen  nn^  bie  35anten  be^  §anfe^.  4-  Sine  jnnge  ©ante,  , 
bie  id)  fe^r  gnt  fenne,  n)ar  (xvi6)  gngegen.  5.  Sie  fpiette  anf 
einem  ^(adter,  treli^e^  §err  §einge  feiner  gran  nenlid)  ge=j 
f(^enft  {)at.  6.  gin  Srnber  ber  5)ame,  tDelc^e  gefpiett  I}atte, 
fang  etn  pbfi^e^  8ieb.  7-  S)ann  fpielten  nnb  fangen  ntet)rere 
§erren  nnb  5>amen,  bie  ic^  nt(f)t  fenne.  8.  (gin  St^anfpieler, 
ben  id)  fd}on  tm  Jljeater  gefel)en  f)atte,  trng  ein  fc^one^  ®e^ 
bidjt  t)on  ®oetf)e  Dor.  9.  SSiele  ®afte  n)aren  pgegen,  n)eld}e 
in  ©entfi^tanb  gemefen  n)aren.  10.  (giner  t)on  i^nen  erjcifilte 
mtr  feine  griebniffe,  bie  fe^r  intereffant  njaren.  n.  2l(^  e^ 
elf  gefd}(agen  t)atte,  brai^ten  bie  Sebienten  (grfrifd}ungen. 
12.  S)ie  inngen  §erren  nnb  ®amen,  bie  fefjr  Inftig  geiDorben 
maren,  fingen  an  gn  tanjen.  13.  T)te  ®dfte,  melc^e  einen 
fel)r  angenet)men  3lbenb  jngebrac^t  fatten,  nat)men  erft  jmei 
©tnnben  nac^  aKitternad)t  3lbf^ieb. 

B.  Complete  orally,  supplying  suitable  relative  pronouns  : 
I.  DieGaste,  —  zugegen waren.  2.  DieGaste,  —  ereingeladen 
hatte.  3.  Der  Freund,  —  ich  ein  Geschenk  schicke.  4.  Das 
Buch,  —  auf  dem  Tische  hegt.  5.  Der  Schauspieler  von  — 
ich  spreche.     6.  Die  Dame,  —  wir  begegnet  sind.     7.  Die 


8o  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  74 

Damen,  —  wir  Blumen  schickten.  8.  Der  Herr,  —  Haus  ich 
gekauft  habe.  9.  Das  Haus,  in  —  er  wohnt.  10.  Die  Nach- 
barn,  mit  —  Kindern  wir  spielen.  11.  Das  Schauspiel,  von 
—  ich  Ihnen  erzahlte.  12.  Der  Schtiler,  —  der  Lehrer  lobt. 
13.  Der  Lehrer,  —  den  Schuler  lobt.  14.  Die  Lehrerin,  — 
Mutter  gestorben  ist. 

C.  I.  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Heinze,  whom  I  know  very  well,  in- 
vited me  to  a  party.  2.  The  party  of  (t)on)  which  I  am  speak- 
ing took  place  yesterday  evening.  3.  The  house  in  which 
these  good  friends  live  is  large  and  handsome.  4.  Many  ladies 
and  gentlemen,  whom  I  had  never  (yet)  seen,  were  also  pres- 
ent. 5.  A  young  lady  played  on  the  piano  and  sang  a  song 
which  pleased  the  guests  very  much  (fe^r  gut).  6.  The  piano 
on  which  she  played  was  a  new  one,  which  Mr.  Heinze  pre- 
sented to  his  wife  lately.  7.  When  she  had  sung,  a  celebrated 
actor  recited  a  very  beautiful  poem.  8.  The  poem  he  recited 
was  by  (t)on)  Goethe.  9.  A  friend  of  mine,  beside  whom  I  was 
sitting,  and  who  had  been  in  Germany,  related  his  experiences 
to  me.  10.  When  the  servants  had  brought  refreshments,  many 
of  (t)Ott)  the  older  guests  wanted  to  go  home.  11.  The  young 
gentlemen  and  ladies,  who  remained  in  order  to  dance,  took 
leave  two  hours  after  midnight. 

D,  Lesestuck  :  Der  Kronprinz  Olaf  von  Norwegen  ist  ein  rei- 
zender  kleiner  Bengel,  ist  aber  zuweilen  unartig.  Seine  Mutter, 
die  Konigin,  zlichtigt  ihn  immer  selbst,  wenn  es  notig  ist. 
Eines  Tages  war  der  Klein e  sich  bewuBt,  Strafe  verdient  zu 
haben.  Als  die  konigliche  Mutter  ihn  suchte,  war  er  nirgends 
zu  finden.  Auch  seine  GroBmutter,  die  Konigin  Alexandra 
von  England,  half  mitsuchen.  Als  sie  nun  in  ihr  Schlafzim- 
mer  trat,  rief  eine  helle  Kinderstimme  unter  dem  Bette : 
"  GroBmutter,  suchen  sie  dich  auch?  Komm  her  zu  mir; 
ich  will  dich  beschtitzen.*' 


§  76]  LESSON   XXIV  8 1 

LESSON  XXIV 
75.  The  Passive  with  tr)crben> 

Present  Indicative,  Imperfect  Indicative, 

I  am  (being)  praised,  etc.  I  was  (being)  praised,  etc. 

tc^    lt)erbe    gelobt  ic^   Ujarb     or  tDurbe    gelobt 


bu    iDirft 


bu  iDcirbft  or  tDurbeft 


er    tDtrb         „  er    marb     or  tDurbe        „ 

tt)ir  tDerben     „  tDir  inurben  r, 

i^r  tDcrbet      „  t^r  lt)urbet  „ 

fie   njerbett     „  fie  tDurbett  ,,  - 

Pres,  Infin,  gelobt  (ju)  iDerbetl,  to  be  praised. 

Examples. 

@r  trirb  oft  tJOn  un^  gelobt.  He  is    often  praised  by  us. 

Der   ®oben    tuirb  burd^   ben      The  soil  is  made  fertile  by  the" 
ategen  fru(f)tbar  gemai^t.  rain. 

Observe:  i.  The  past  participle  of  a  transitive  verb  added 
to  the  verb  tuerbett  forms  the  passive  voice  of  that  verb,  when- 
ever agency  is  implied  or  specified. 

2.  The  personal  agent  of  the  passive  takes  the  preposition 
t)Ott  =  ^  by '(+ dative)  ;  other  agency  is  expressed  by  burtl|  or  mtt. 

Notes.  —  i.  The  past  part,  of  a  verb  added  to  fctlt  denotes  a  perma- 
nent condition  resulting  from  the  action  of  the  verb,  no  agency  being  im- 
plied ;  a  participle  so  used  is  often  purely  adjectival  in  character  (see 
Lesson  XLIX)  :  S)a6  ge(b  tft  ge^pgt,  *The  field  is  ploughed';  3cl)  bttt 
befriebigt,  *I  am  satisfied.' 

2.  ^att  with  the  active  voice  often  replaces  the  passive  when  there  is 
no  definite  personal  agent:  Wan  befteUt  ben  ^oben  im  grut)Ung,  'The 
ground  is  prepared  in  spring.' 

76.  Prepositions  with  Accusative.  The  following  preposi- 
tions govern  the  accusative  only : 

hx^       bttrc^       fiir       gcgcit       oI)nc       mn       tuibcr 


82  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  77 

77.  f&x^f  till,  until  (time),  as  far  as  (space). 

53i^  2lbenb;   bi^  9{om.  Till  evening;  as  far  as  Rome. 

Notes.  —  i.  S3i^  is  more  commonly  used  as  an  adverb  followed  by  a 
prep,  of  direction:  iBi^  g^gen  2lbenb,  *till  towards  evening';  bi^  gur 
@tabt,  *as  far  as  the  town.' 

2.   With  numerals  U§  =*or' :  ^ier  bi^  fiinf^  'four  or  five.' 

78.  ^nx^f  through,  by  (means  of). 

gr  rettet  burt^  ben  SBalb.  He  ddes  through  the  wood. 

©urd^  einen  Srief  getDarnt.        Warffed  by  a  letterr-^s*- 

79.  ^ntf  for,  on  behalf  of. 

5)er  ;33rief  ift  fur  i^n.  The  letter  is  for  him. 

^C^  fprei^e  fitr  @ie.  I  speak  on  your  behalf. 

80.  ©cgctt,  towards,  against. 

(Sr  rettet  gegen  bie  ^riide.  He  rides  towards  the  bridge. 

@egen  at^t  U^r.  Towards  eight  o'clock. 

@te((en  Ste  ben  ©tU^^t  g^g^tt  Place   the   chair    against    the 

bte  SSJanb.  wall. 

SBir  fdmpfen  gegen  ben  geinb.  We  fight  against  the  enemy. 

81.  Olinc,  without. 

SD^nt  greunbe;  O'^ne  ®te.  Without  friends ;  without  you. 

82.  Xtntf  round,  around,  at. 

1.  Of  Place: 

&  gef)t  urn  bte  Stabt  ^erunt.      He  walks  round  the  town. 

Note. — The  adverb  l^erUttt  is  usually  added  after  the  object  in  this 
sense. 

2.  Of  Time: 

Urn  bte[e  3^tt ;  um  jnjei  U^r.     At  this  time;  at  2  o'clock. 

83.  SSibcr,  against,  contrary  to. 
3Btber  meinen  SBunfd^.    .  Against  my  wish.  ^ 

SBiber  metn"  ©rmarten.  Contrary  to  my  expectation?^ 


§  85]  LESSON   XXIV  83 

84.  Contractions.  T)ViVd),  fur,  and  uttt  are  generally  con- 
tracted with  the  neuter  of  the  unemphasized  definite  article, 
as  follows  : 

bur^^  (=  bur^  ba^)      fiir^  (=  fur  ba^)      um^  (=  um  ba^) 

85.  ^a  for  Pronoun.  With  personal  pronouns  of  the  third 
person  referring  to  inanimate  objects,  the  pronoun  is  replaced 
by  ba  (before  vowels  bar)  prefixed  to  the  preposition  (except 
bi^  and  o()ne)  and  written  with  it  as  one  word  : 

Dte^  ift  mein  §Ut ;   t^  ^abe      This  is  my  hat ;     I  gave  ten 
itlju  9Kar!  bafiir  gegeben.  marks  for  it. 

EXERCISE   XXIV 

anber,  other.  locfern,  to  loosen. 

bie  2lrbeit,  -en,  work,  labor.  ber  )Slax^,  -e^,  Indian  com. 

au^ftreuen,  to  scatter.  bie  9}?afd)me,  -n,  machine. 

bereiten,  to  make  ready,  pre-  ttO(^  nid)t,  not  yet. 

pare.  pflugen,  to  plough. 

beftedett,  to  till,  prepare.  bie  (£aat,  -en,  seed,  sowing. 

ber  Soben,  -^,  ground,  soil.  ber  ©dentann,  -(e)^,  ^er,  sower. 

ba'mal^,  then,  at  that  time.  ber  (2onnenf(f)ein,  -(e)^,  sun- 

bie  (Sgge,  -n,  harrow.  shine. 

ba^  Qnbt^  -^,  -n,  end.  tier^inbern,  to  hinder,  prevent. 

fruc^tbar,  fruitful,  fertile.  iDac^fen  (f.),  truc^^,  gemacfifen, 

ba^  ©etreibe,  -^,  grain,  corn.  to  grow. 

ber  §afer,  -^,  oats.  ber  SBeijen,  -^,  wheat. 

^eutjutage,  nowadays,  in  these  gte^en,  jog,  gejogen,  to  draw, 

days,  now.  juberfeu,  to  cover  (up). 

I^in  unb  ^er,  to  and  fro,  back- 
wards and  forwards. 

A.  I.  5)a^  gelb  iDirb  gegen  (5nbe  3Wcirg  ober  im  3lpn(  fitr 
bie  @aat  bereitet.  2.  Um  biefe  ^dt  tt)erben  SBeijen,  §afer 
unb  anbere^  ©etreibe  gefdt.  3.  ©pdter  pflanjt  man  ^ar* 
toffeln,  a}?at^,  2c.  4.  3^erft  tDtrb  ber  iSoben  ge|)flitgt. 
5.  5)er  Soben  n)irb  bann  mit  etner  Ggge  getocfert.  6.  So 
iDirb  er  burd)  ben  9iegen  unb  ben  Sonnenfd)etn  frud)tbar 


84  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  85 

gemac^t.  7-  OI)ne  Stegen  unb  Sonnenfc^ein  fann  bie  (Saat 
nidjt  it)a(f)fen,  8.  9^ad}^er  tDirb  ber  ®ame  ^eutjutage  burc^ 
eine  2)Ja[djme  gefcit,  tDeli^e  t)on  "ipferben  ober  Ct^fen  ^in  unb 
{)er  gejogen  tvxxb.    9.  grit^er  tat  man  ba^  o()ne  3Kaf(i)ine» 

10.  !Damat^  murbe  ber  Same  t)om  ®aemann  ge[at,  ber  ^in 
unb  l)er  gtng  unb  ben  Samen  au^ftreute,  n.  92ac^^er  tr)urbe 
ber  Same  burc^  bie  Sgge  gugebecft.  12.  3<ft  ba^  gelb  fc^on 
beftellt,  tDeldje^  Sie  uorige^  3^f)^  fauften?  13.  9iein,  e^  ift 
nod)  nid)t  beftellt.  14-  ©ie  3trbeit  njurbe  oft  burd)  ba^ 
fdjiedjte  SBetter  t)erl)inbert, 

B,  Oral :  i.  Um  welche  Zeit  wird  der  Weizen  gesat?  2.  1st 
Ihr  Weizen  schon  gesat?  3.  Wann  werden  die  Kartoffeln 
gepflanzt?  4.  Wann  pflanzt  man  Kartoffeln?  5.  Was  tut 
man  zuerst,  wenn  man  ein  Feld  fiir  die  Saat  bereiten  will? 
6.  Was  tut  man  dann?  7.  Wie  wird  der  Boden  gelockert? 
8.  Weshalb  wird  der  Boden  gelockert?  9.  Wie  wurde  der 
Same  friiher  gesat?      10.   Wie   wird  die  Maschine  gezogen? 

11.  1st  Ihr  Feld  schon  gepfliigt?  12.  Weshalb  ist  es  noch 
nicht  gepfliigt?     13.  Wollten  Sie  es  vorige  Woche  bestellen? 

14.  Wann   wollen   Sie  Ihren    Hafer  und   Ihre    Erbsen  saen? 

15.  Was  wollen  Sie  in  diesem  Beete  pflanzen? 

C,  Turn  the  following  orally  into  the  passive  voice  :  i.  Das 
schlechte  Wetter  verhindert  die  Arbeit.  2.  Der  Bauer  bestellte 
das  Feld.  3.  Die  Egge  deckt  den  Samen  zu.  4.  Die  Egge 
deckte  den  Samen  zu.  5.  Der  Saemann  streute  den  Samen 
aus.  6.  Die  Pferde  ziehen  die  Egge  hin  und  her.  7.  Der 
Regen  macht  den  Boden  fruchtbar.  8.  Man  pflanzt  jetzt  die 
Kartoffeln.  9.  Der  Knecht  pfliigt  das  Feld.  10.  Die  Knechte 
pflugten  die  Felder. 

Z>.  I.  Grain  is  sown  towards  [the]  end  [of]  March  or  in 
April.  2.  The  field  must  first  be  prepared  (use  man). 
3.  The  soil  is  ploughed,  and  then  a  harrow  is  drawn  to  and 
fro.  4.  It  is  drawn  by  horses  or  oxen.  5.  The  soil  is  loos- 
ened by  the  harrow.     6.  It  is  made  fruitful  by  the  rain  and 


§86]  LESSON  XXV  85 

sun.     7.  Without  rain  and  sunshine  the  wheat  cannot  grow. 

8.  In   these   days  the  seed    is   not   scattered    by  the    sower. 

9.  That  used  to  be  done  (use  man)  formerly,  but  now  it  is 
sown  with  a  machine.  10.  Our  field  is  not  yet  ploughed,  be- 
cause we  were  hindered  by  the  bad  weather.  1 1 .  We  wanted  to 
plough  it  earlier,  in  order  to  sow  our  wheat.  12.  We  mean 
to  begin  to  plough  it  to-morrow,  if  the  weather  is  fine.  13.  We 
shall  plant  our  potatoes  and  our  Indian  corn  next  week.  14. 
Our  cabbage  and  our  tomatoes  are  planted  already. 

E.  Lesesttick :  Es  ging  ein  Saemann  aus,  zu  saen.  Und 
indem  er  saete,  fiel  etliches  an  den  Weg ;  da  kamen  die  Vogel 
und  frafien  es  auf.  Etliches  fiel  in  das  Steinichte,  wo  es  nicht 
viel  Erde  hatte,  und  ging  bald  auf,  darum,  dafi  es  nicht  tiefe 
Erde  hatte.  Als  aber  die  Sonne  aufging,  verwelkte  es,  und 
weil  es  nicht  Wurzel  hatte,  ward  es  diirre.  Etliches  fiel  unter 
die  Dornen  und  die  Dornen  wuchsen  auf  und  erstickten  es. 
Ediches  fiel  auf  gutes  Land  und  trug  Frucht,  ediches  hun- 
dertfaltig,  etliches  sechzigfaltig,  ethches  dreiliigfaltig. 

LESSON  XXV 
86.  The  Time  of  Day. 

SBie  Diet  U^r  ift  e^?  What  time  is  it? 

6^  ift  ein^  (ein  U^r).  It  is  one  o'clock. 

Urn      5lt)oIf     Uf)r     tnittag^  At   twelve   o'clock  noon  (at 

(nacf)t^).  night). 

g^  ift  ein  SSiertel  anf  jmei.  It  is  a  quarter  past  one. 

@^  ift  ^(6  JlDei.  It  is  half- past  one. 

G^  ift  bret  55tertel  auf  jtDet.  It  is  a  quarter  to  two. 

Urn  I)alb  ein^  (ein  U^r).  At  half-past  twelve. 

Urn  23  3)iinuten  nac^  ein^.  At  23  minutes  past  one. 

@^  ift  21  3Jftnuten  t)or  JlDet.  It  is  21  minutes  to  two. 
2l(^t  Uf)r  morgen^  (Dormit- 

tag^).  Eight  o'clock  A.M. 

©rei  Uf)r  nac()mtttag^.  Three  o'clock  p.m. 

<£ec^^  U^r  abenb^.  Six  o'clock  p.m. 


/ 


S6  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  87 

Observe  :    i.  The  verb  feitl  in  these  expressions  is  singular. 

2.  U\^v  remains  uninfiected,  and  may  be  omitted. 

3.  *At'  =  ttm. 

4.  @itt  remains  uninfiected,  but  tin^  is  used  when  Ul^r  is 
pmitted. 

5.  The  'quarter  past'  is  expressed  by  ein  3Siertet  auf  -f  the 
\number  of  the  hour  following. 

6.  The  '  half-past '  is  expressed  by  Ijalli  +  the  hour  following. 

7.  The  '  quarter  to '  is  expressed  by  brei  33iertel  auf  +  the 
hour  following. 

8.  The  '  minutes  past '  is  expressed  by  nadf ;  the  *  minutes 
to '  by  nor. 

9.  The  abbreviation  '  A.M. '  =  morgett^  or  tJOrtntttag^  (abbre- 
viated 2?m.);  *  P.M. '=  nad^mittag^  (abbreviated  9im.),  abenb^, 
or  tiac[)t^,  according  to  the  lateness  of  the  hour. 

Notes. —  i.   Colloquially  auf  is  often  omitted  after  33iertel. 

2.  The  time  may  also,  as  always  in  railway  time-tables,  be  expressed 
thus:  ©in  U^r  fiinfje^n  =  1.15;  ein  U^r  breigig  =  1.30;  ein  Ut)r  fiinf* 
unbfiinfjtg  =  1.55. 

87.  Genitive  of  Time. 

S)e^  2^age^  ;  be^  Slbenb^.  By  day  ;  in  the  evening. 

Qi)    ging    etne^    2^age^    im      I  was  walking  one  day  in  the 

^axt  park. 

SJJitttrocf)^    ^aben    tDtr    na(^'      On  Wednesdays  we  have  no 

mittag^  !eme  @^ule.  school  in  the  afternoon. 

Observe  :  i.  Point  of  time  is  often  expressed  by  an  adverbial 
genitive  singular,  when  denoting  indefinite  time,  or  time  with 
reference  to  a  habitual  action,  but  only  with  Xa^,  '  day,'  days  of 
the  week,  and  divisions  of  the  day,  used  with  or  without  article. 

2.  When  the  article  is  omitted,  the  genitive  is  not  usually 
written  with  a  capital,  except  with  days  of  the  week. 

Notes. —  i.  With  determinatives  other  than  the  art.,  the  ace.  must  be 
used,  except  in  the  expression  btefct  SagC   (gen.   plur.)  =  *  of  late.' 

2.  ^a6:}tf  though  fem.,  is  similarly  used,  with  or  without  the  masc. 
art. :    (2)e«)  "^adjt^  jd)Iaft  man,  '  We  sleep  by  night.' 


§  87]  LESSON   XXV  87 

EXERCISE   XXV 

bebeuten,  to  signify,  mean.  ber  (Btvii)^  -(0^^  -^,  stroke, 

betnal)e,  almost,  nearly.^  mark. 

bamtt,  with  that,  with  it,  etc.  ber    Stuttbettjetger,    -^,    — , 

bocf),  yet,  still,  however.  hour-hand,  short  hand. 

frei(icf),  certainly,  to  be  sure.  bte  2^af(^e,  -tt,  pocket. 

ber   aKmutenjeiger,   -^,   — ,  tragen,    trug,    getragen,    to 

minute-hand,  long  hand.  bear,  carry,  wear, 

ber  ^ul^fc^Iag,  -(e)^,  ^e,  pulse-  bte  ^aijl,  -en,  number,  figure. 

beat.  jci^ten,  to  count, 

bie  9tunbe,  -n,  round,  circuit,  ber  3^i9^^r  -^f  — '  hsLud  (of 

ber   (Sefunbenjeiger,  -^,  — ,  a  time-piece). 

second-hand.  bie  ^tff^^/  -tt,  figure. 

ftef)en,    ftanb,    geftanben,   to  ba^  3iff^^Matt,  -(e)^,  ^er,  dial, 

stand.  face. 

A,  I.  Stragett  (gte  etne  U^r?  2.  ^airo^t,  xi)  ^abe  tint  in 
ber  (my)  2:a[d)e.  3.  3^iS^^  ®i^  ^i^  ^^^  ^^ff^^^I^^t  Qijvtx 
Uf)r.  4.  2Sa^  fefien  ©ie  auf  bem  3ifferblatt?  5-  Q^  [e^e 
3a^Ien  ober  ^'ff^^^/  ^^^  ^i^^  &i^  5tt)oIf.  6.  SBa^  bebeuten 
biefe  3iff^^^?  7-  ®i^  bebeuten  bie  ®tunben  be^  Slage^. 
8.  3lber  ein  XaQ  ijat  bod)  24  ®tunben,  unb  f)ter  ftel)en  nur 
jtDoIf.  9.  gretltd^  ;  aber  ber  fleine  3^tger,  ber  (gtunbenjeiger, 
nta(J)t  stDeimat  bte  $Runbe  in  24  ©tunben  unb  2  x  12  ma(^t  24. 

10.  aSBa^  bebeuten  bte  fteinen  @trid)e  jiDtfc^en  \)cn  ®tunben? 

11.  3)iefe  bebeuten  bie  SKinuten;  in  jeber  Stunbe  [tub  60 
SJJinuten.  12.  3Be^f)aIb  [inb  nur  5  (gtric^e  git^ifi^en  ten 
©tunben?  i3.'S)er  groge  3^iger,  ber  aJJinutenjeiger,  ntad}t 
bie  SJunbe  einntal  in  einer  ©tunbe  unb  5  x  12  nta^t  60. 

14.  U^ren  ^aben   gen)o^nIic^    auc^    einen   ©efunbenjeiger. 

15.  S)ie[er  tt)irb  t)om  Slrjte  gebrauc^t,  urn  bie  ^ul^fc^Idge  eine^ 
Sranfen  ju  ja^Ien. 

B.  Oral:  i.  Wie  viele  Stunden  hat  ein  Tag?  2.  Wie  viele 
Ziffern  hat  eine  Uhr  ?     3.  Was  fur  Zeiger  hat  sie  ?     4.  Wie  vie! 


83  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  87 

Uhr  ist  es,  wenn  beide  Zeiger  auf  1 2  stehen  (are  at  twelve)  ? 

5.  Wie  viel  Uhr  ist  es,  wenn  der  Minutenzeiger  auf  6  und  der 
Stundenzeiger  zwischen  eins  und  zwei  steht?  6.  Wenn  der 
Minutenzeiger  auf  9  steht  und  der  Stundenzeiger  beinahe  auf  4? 

7.  Um  wie  viel  Uhr  gehen  Sie  gewohnlich  zu  Bett?  8.  Wann 
sind  Sie  heute  morgen  aufgestanden  ?  9.  Wie  viel  Uhr  ist  es, 
wenn  der  Minutenzeiger  auf  4  steht  und  der  Stundenzeiger 
zwischen  6  und  7  ?  10.  Wenn  der  Minutenzeiger  auf  8  und 
der  Stundenzeiger  zwischen  8  und  9  steht? 

C,  I.  Can  you  tell  me  what  time  it  is?  2.  Yes,  I  have  a 
watch  in  my  pocket.  3.  I  will  show  you  the  dial.  4.  I  see 
that  it  is  a  quarter  to  eight,  for  the  long  hand  is  (fte'^t)  at  nine, 
and  the  short  hand  almost  at  eight.  5.  What  time  is  it  when  the 
minute-hand  is  at  6  and  the  hour-hand  between  9  and   10? 

6.  It  is  then  half-past  nine.     7.  How  many  hands  has  a  watch? 

8.  Mine  has  three,  one  for  the  hours,  one  for  the  minutes,  and 
one  for  the  seconds.  9.  Not  all  watches  have  a  second-hand, 
but  it  is  used  by  physicians  in  order  to  count  the  pulse-beats  of 
their  patients.  10.  At  what  o'clock  do  you  usually  get  up  in 
the  morning?  11.  I  usually  rise  at  half-past  seven.  12.  Yes- 
terday evening  I  was  working  until  after  midnight.  13.  I  was 
too  tired  this  morning  to  rise  at  the  usual  hour.  14.  It  was  20 
minutes  past  eight  when  I  got  up.  15.  Goethe,  the  great  Ger- 
man poet,  usually  rose  at  5  o'clock  or  at  half-past  5  in  the  sum- 
mer, when  he  was  (still)  young.  16.  The  train  for  (nacf)) 
Berlin  will  leave  at  9.10  a.m.  and  will  arrive  at  2.48  p.m. 

Z>.  8e[eftii(fe: 

1.  HatfeL 

2Bte  ^ei^t  ba^  35mg  bort  an  ber  Sanb? 
a^  fi^Iclgt  uttb  ^at  bo(^  feine  @aTtb ; 
6^  pngt  unb  ge^t  bo(^  fort  unb  fort ; 
(g^  gel}t  unb  fomntt  bo(^  nid^t  tiom  Ort, 

2.  Um  \c(i)^  UijV  morgen^  iDerben  bie  Stfjitfer  burrf)  bie 


§< 


LESSON   XXVI 


89 


®(o(fe  gemedt ;  fie  \md)tn  auf  unb  muffen  bann  fofort  auf* 
ftef)en;  bann  ti^afc^en  fie  §dnbe  nnb  @efirf)t  unb  gie^en  bie 
£teiber  an.  ^i^  I)alb  ad}t  Ul)r  (ernen  fie  il)re  Stufcjaben  ;  um 
brei  25iertel  auf  ad)t  frU!)ftitcfen  fie ;  nad)  bem  gritl)ftiicf  ^aben 
fie  eine  ^Ibe  ©tunbe  frei.  Um  neun  lU)r  (je(}en  fie  in  ha^ 
(2cf)u(5immer  unb  bleiben  bi^  elf  UI)r  bort.  23on  elf  U^r  bi^ 
f)a(b  jmotf  ift  ^aufe.  T)ann  ^aben  fie  3^i^^^f^^^^^  ^'^^^ 
arbeiten  im  ©tubierjimmer.  Um  ein  U()r  mirb  ju  SRittag 
gegeffen^ 

LESSON  XXVI 

88.     Pres.  and  Impf.  Subj.  of  fjaticn,  fein,  tncrben* 

Present,  Imperfect, 

I  have,  may  have,  etc.  I  had,  might  have,  etc. 

\d)  I)abe  iDir  t)aben  tc^  ptte  iDir  ptten 

bu  ^abeft        tl)r  ^bct  bu  ptteft  i{}r  b^ittet 

er  ^abe  fie    ^aben  er  ^iitte  fie   fatten 


I  am,  may  be,  etc. 

tcf)  fet  n)ir  feten 

bu  feieft         tf)r  feiet 
er  fet  fie  feien 


I  was,  might  be,  etc. 

\i)  tDare  inir  iDSren 

bu  tDareft  \\)X  iDiiret 

er  miirc  fie  tDiiren 


I  become,  may  become,  etc. 

ic^  tDerbe  xo\x  iDerben 
bu  n)erbcft  i^r  tDerbet 
er  merbe        fie   tDerben 


I  became,  might  become,  etc 

ic^  tDiirbe  mir  tniirben 

bu  miirbeft         i^r  n)urbet 
er  tDiirbe  fie   miirben 


Observe:  i.  The  persistent  c  of  the  present  endings;  also 
the  umlaut  of  the  imperfect. 

2.  These  tenses  of  ^aben,  fein,  and  n^erben  serve  to  form  the 
compound  tenses  of  other  verbs,  as  below. 


90 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§89 


89. 


Subjunctive  of  marffen,  ^ptcd}tn,  fatten* 


Present. 

I  make,  may  make, 

I  speak,  may  speak, 

I  fall,  may  fall, 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

id)  madie 

id)   fprec^e 

t(^   faOe 

bu  mac^cft 

bu  fpre(f)eft 

bu  faKeft 

er    Tnacf)e 

er    fprei^e 

er    fade 

lt)tr  madien 

tDir  fpred)en 

tDir  fallen 

t^r  tnadjct 

i^r  fprec^et 

tl)r  faHet 

fie  mad)tn 

fie  fprec^en 
Imperfect. 

fie  fallen 

I  made,  might  make. 

I  spoke,  might  speak. 

I  fell,  might  fall, 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

id)  madjtt 

i^  fpra^e 

id)  fiele 

bu  mad)teft 

bu  fprfidieft 

bu  fieleft 

er    mac^te 

er    fprac^e 

er    fiele 

tt)tr  tnat^ten 

tt)ir  fpracf)en 

tDir  fieten 

i^r  mad^tet 

t^r  fprSi^et 

t^r  fietet 

fie  mai^ten 

fie  f|3racf)eu 

fie   fielen 

Perfect. 

I  have  (may  have)  made,  spoken,  I  have  (may  have)  fallen, 

etc.  etc. 

id)  ^abe    gemat^t,  gef^jrod^en  id)  fei     gefallen 

bu  ^beft  gemad^t,  gefproi^en  bu  feieft  gefatlen 

er  {)abe    gemai^t,  gefprodjen,  :c.  er  fei     gefallen,  :c» 

Pluperfect, 

I  had  (might  have)  made,  spoken,  I  had  (might  have)  fallen, 


etc. 


etc. 


t^  ^atte    gema(^t,  gefproc^en  id)  iDcire    gefallen 

bu  ^dtteft  gentac^t,  gef|Dro^en,  :c.         bu  tDareft  gefallen,  20, 


§  9i]  LESSON   XXVI  91 

Future, 
I  shall  make,  speak,  fall,  etc. 

id)  iDerbe  madjen,  f|)red)en,  fatteti 
bu  tDerbeft  mail)en,  fprecf)en,  fallen 
er  tuerbe    mac^en,  fprec^en,  fallen,  :c* 

Future  Perfect, 
I  shall  have  made  (spoken),  etc. 
t^  n)erbe    gemac^t  (gefproc^en)  ^aben 
bu  n)erbeftgemacf)t  (gefprot^en)  ^aben,  it. 

I  shall  have  fallen,  etc. 

ic^  tDerbe    gefallen  fetn 
bu  tDerbeft  gefallen  fein,  :c. 

Observe  :    i .  The  persistent  c  of  the  endings. 

2.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  of  all  regular  weak  verbs  is  the 
same  as  the  imperfect  indicative. 

3.  Strong  verbs  with  a,  0,  u  in  the  imperfect  indicative  stem 
take  umlaut  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 

4.  The  compound  tenses  are  formed  by  adding  the  past 
participle  or  the  infinitive,  or  both,  to  the  auxiliary,  precisely  as 
in  the  indicative  (for  word  order,  see  §  49). 

90.  Use  of  Subjunctive,  i.  The  use  of  this  mood  is  con- 
fined almost  entirely  to  dependent  sentences. 

2.  The  English  forms  with  'may  '  and  'might'  in  the  para- 
digms only  partially  and  occasionally  represent  the  exact  force 
of  the  German  subjunctive  : 

©r  fagte,  ba^*er  Oelb  ^be.  He  said  he  had  money. 

^&)  ^be  oft  getDiinfc^t,  ba^  il^     I  have  often  wished  that  I  had 
®etb  ^iitte.  (might  have)  money. 

91.  Indirect  Statements  and  Questions. 

@r  fagt :  ^^'C^  bin  miibe."  He  says  :  "  I  am  tired." 

©r  fagt,  ba^  er  miibe  ift.  He  says  (that)  he  is  tired. 


92  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  91 

&  fagte  :  „Qi)  bin  mube/'  He  said  :  "  I  am  tired.'* 

@r  fagte, ba^  er  mlibe  fei(mdre).  He  said  (that)  he  was  tired, 

gr  fragte  :  „3[Ber  ift  ba  ? ''  He  asked  :  "  Who  is  there  ?  " 

(5r  fragte,  tt)er  ba  [ei  (mdre).  He  asked  who  was  there. 

Qii)   fragte,  ob   er   milbe   fet  I  asked  if  (whether)  he  was 

(mdre).  tired. 

®ie  f agten,  ba^  fie  tl)ren  3Sater  They  said  that  they  loved  their 

liebten^  father, 

©r  fagte,  er  fei  (tDdre)  mitbe.  He  said  (that)  he  was  tired. 

Observe  :  i .  Indirect  statements  and  questions  are  always 
dependent  clauses,  and  have  the  word  order  of  such  clauses 

(§  70). 

2.  The  verb  of  the  dependent  clause  is  usually  in  the  sub- 
junctive if  the  verb  of  the  governing  clause  be  in  a  past  tense, 
and,  unlike  EngUsh,  has  regularly  the  same  tense  which  it  would 
have  if  the  statement  or  question  were  direct. 

Note.  —  The  indie,  is  used  in  indir.  statement  to  express  a  fact  as 
undisputed  or  as  vouched  for  by  the  speaker. 

3.  Where  the  present  subjunctive  of  a  verb  has  no  forms 
distinct  from  those  of  its  present  indicative,  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive is  used  instead  of  the  present,  as  in  the  last  example 
but  one  above. 

4.  'If  or  *  whether '  in  dependent  questions  =  ob. 

5.  The  conjunction  ba§  may  be  omitted  in  clauses  of  indi- 
rect statement,  which  then  have  the  word  order  of  a  principal 

.  sentence  (verb  second). 

EXERCISE   XXVI 

anne^men    (tta^m,    genom==  bie    (Stnlabung,  -en,  invita- 

men),  to  accept.  tion. 

befe^ten,    befall,    befot)tett,  eittft,  once  (upon  a  time). 

{daif.)f  to  order,  command,  entbedett,  to  discover, 

berii^ren,  to  touch.  franjofifi^,  French, 

bicf ,  thick.  fitri^tetl,  to  fear,  be  afraid  of. 


§91]  LESSON   XXVI  93 

gebenten,    gebad)te,    gebad)t,  ber  9teDolDer,  -^,  —,  revolver. 

to  intend.  ber  ®cl)dbe(,  -^,  — ,  skull. 

^o(en,  to  get,  fetch,  bring.  ber  Sc^eif,  -^,  -e,  sheik, 

imftanbe  fein,  to  be  in  a  posi-  fofort,  immediately. 

tion  to,  be  able  to*^  fonbern  (after  neg,),  but. 

(aben,  tub,  gefaben,  to  invite,  toten,  to  kill, 

lebe'nbig,  living.  troi^bem,  in  spite  of  this  (that), 
ber  8btDe,  -n,  -n,  lion.  nevertheless. 

?}orb^3lfri!a,    n,,  -^,    North  bte  Uberra'frf)ung,  -en,  sur- 

Africa.  prise, 

reifeti  (f.,  ^.),  to  travel,  jour-  u'nangene^tn,      disagreeable, 

ney ;  go  (away),  set  out  (on  unpleasant. 

a  journey).  bie  SBaffe,  -tt,  weapon. 

iDarnen,  to  warn. 

Idioms:   i.  S5ci  Xi^d),  at  table,  at  meals. 

2.  3tt  ^ifd)  laben,  to  invite  to  dinner. 

A,  gitt  franjofifd^er  Offtjier,  ber  in  5yiorb^9lfrtfa  retfte, 
tt)urbe  einft  Don  einem  (Si^ei!  gu  ^Tifcf)  getaben.  Tlan  iDarnte 
i^n,  ba^  biefer  fetnen  ®d[ten  oft  unangene^me  Uberra[c^ungen 
bereite.  Stro^bem  [agte  ber  Offtjter,  er  tt)erbe  bte  ginlabung 
anne^tnen,  ba  er  biejen  9)Zann  nxi)t  fitri^te.  311^  er  nacf)^er 
bet  Sl'ifc^  n)ar,  fU^fte  er,  ba^  fetne  git^e  ettt)a^  Sebenbtge^ 
berii^rten.  :©a(b  entbedte  er,  bag  e^  ein  grower  8ott)e  n)ar* 
©ofort  befa{)I  er  fetnem  5)tener,  fetnen  *$Ret)olDer  ju  ^olen. 
S)er  ®c^ei!  fragte,  n)a^.  ba^  bebeute.  ©r  fagte  au(^,  bag  man 
ntit  biefer  fleinen  SBaffe  nic^t  imftanbe  fei,  ben  8ott)en  5U  toten, 
ber  einen  fe^r  biden  'Sd:)ahei  ^abe.  !j)er  ®aft  anttt)ortete,  er 
gebenfe  ben  Stedoloer  nii^t  gegen  ba^  Sier,  fonbern  gegen  ben 
(S(f)ei!  3U  braucfjen.  (Sr  fagte,  er  n)erbe  ben  @(^eif  fofort  toten, 
n)enn  ber  Some  unangenet)m  mitrbe. 

^.  Oral :  Turn  the  following  direct  statements  and  questions 
into  the  indirect  form,  prefixing  '  man  sagte,  dafi '  to  the  state- 
ments, and  either  '  man  fragte '  or  '  man  fragte,  ob '  to  the  ques- 
tions.    I.  Sie  sind  mtide.     2.  Der  Offizier  wird  die  Einladung 


94  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§91 

annehmen.  3.  Das  ist  ein  grower  Lowe.  4.  Dies  sind  groBe 
Lowen.  5.  Das  waren  grolie  Lowen.  6.  Der  Diener  wird 
den  Revolver  holen.  7.  Hat  er  den  Revolver  geholt  ?  8.  Wer 
hat  den  Revolver  geholt?  9.  Ist  der  Diener  imstande,  einen 
Lowen  zu  toten?  lo.  Wer  gedenkt,  die  Waffe  zu  brauchen. 
II.  Wird  er  den  Lowen  toten  ? 

C.  I.  The  officer  told  me  that  the  sheik  had  invited  him  to 
dinner.  2.  I  warned  him  that  the  sheik  was  an  unpleasant 
man.  3.  The  officer  answered  that  he  didn't  fear  the  sheik. 
4.  He  discovered  that  a  big  Hon  was  under  the  table.  5.  At 
once  he  asked  the  sheik  why  the  lion  was  there.  6.  He 
(biefer)  replied  that  it  (e^)  was  a  pleasant  surprise  which  he  had 
prepared  for  his  guest.  7.  The  officer  then  said  that  he  also 
had  a  pleasant  surprise  for  the  sheik.  8.  Thereupon  he  beck- 
oned to  his  servant,  and  the  servant  got  the  revolver.  9.  As 
(ate)  he  was  giving  it  to  his  master,  he  warned  him  that  a  Hon 
had  a  very  thick  skull.  10.  He  said  that  it  was  impossible 
(utltnogUd))  to  kill  him  with  this  weapon.  11.  The  officer 
replied  that  he  would  be  in  a  position  to  kill  the  sheik  if  the 
lion  became  disagreeable. 

I),  Lesestlick  :  Es  kam  einmal  ein  Bauer  in  die  Stadt  gefahren, 
hielt  vor  einer  Apotheke  an  und  lud  eine  grol^e  Stubentiir 
vom  Wagen  ab.  Als  er  die  Tiir  in  den  Laden  trug,  machte 
der  Apotheker  groBe  Augen  und  fragte  ihn,  was  er  hier  woUe  ; 
der  Tischler  wohne  nebenan.  Der  Bauer  aber  sagte,  er  wolle 
nicht  zum  Tischler,  sondern  zum  Apotheker.  Der  Arzt  sei  bei 
seiner  kranken  Frau  gewesen  und  habe  ihr  eine  Arzenei  ver- 
schrieben.  Als  der  Herr  Doktor  aber  das  Rezept  aufschreiben 
wollte,  sei  weder  Feder,  noch  Tinte,  noch  Papier  im  Hause 
gewesen ;  da  habe  er  es  mit  Kreide  an  die  Stubentiir  ge- 
schrieben.  Der  Apotheker  lachte,  bereitete  aber  dem  Bauern 
die  Arzenei,  der  damit  nach  Hause  zuriickfuhr  und  sie  der  Frau 
eingab. 


§  95]  LESSON   XXVII  95 

LESSON  XXVII 

92.  Prepositions  with  Dative.    The  following  nine  preposi- 
tions govern  the  dative  only : 

an^  bet  natii  turn 

an^tv  mit  feit  $tt 

gcgettiibcr 

93.  ^n^f  out  of,  of,  from. 

1.  Out  of  (motion)  : 

(gr  fommt  au^  bem  §au[e.  He  comes  out  of  the  house. 

2.  Of  (material)  : 

!Da^  §au^  ift  au^  §0(3  gebaut.     The  house  is  built  of  wood. 

3.  From  (origin)  : 

(gr  fommt  au^  (Snglanb.  He  comes  from  England. 

4.  From  (cause)  : 

Qi)  tue  e^  au^  gurd^t.  I  do  it  from  fear. 

94.  5(ugcr,  outside  of,  except. 

1.  Outside  of  (rest),  more  commonly  au^er^alb  +  genitive  : 
(Sr  iDO^tit  au^er  ber  Stabt.  He  hves  outside  the  town. 

2.  Except,  besides,  but : 

Tadjik  au^er  einem  ®tocfe.         Nothing  but  (except)  a  cane. 

95.  25ci,  near  (by),  beside,  at,  with. 

1.  Near  (by),  beside  : 

(Sr  ftanb  bei  ber  Xnx*  He  stood  by  (near)  the  door. 

2.  At  (the  house,  etc.,  of  =  French  c/iez),  with  : 

(Sr  iDO^ttt  beim  DnteL  He  lives  at  his  uncle's. 

3.  About  (one's  person),  with  : 

Qij  ^abe  ®elb  bet  mir.  I  have  money  about  me. 

Note.  —  S5ci  is  generally  contracted  with  unemphasized  bent:  bctUt  = 
bci  bem. 


96  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  96 

96.  win,  with,  along  with. 

1.  With  (instrument)  : 

Qii)  fcf)retbe  mit  ber  geber,  I  am  writing  with  the  pen. 

2.  (Along)  with,  in  company  with  : 

gr  fommt  mit  t^nett.  He  is  coming  with  them. 

97.  ^ad),  after,  to,  according  to. 

1.  After  (time,  order)  : 

9Ja(J)  ber  (2d)ule.  After  school. 

(Sr  !ommt  naif)  mir.  He  comes  after  (next  to)  me. 

2.  To  (with  proper  names  of  places)  : 

©r  retft  nac^  9f  om  (g^ina).  He  is  going  to  Rome  (China). 

3.  According  to  (may  follow  its  case  in  this  sense) : 
9Jac^  meiner  9Jfeinung.  According  to  my  opinion. 
aKeiner  3Meinung  nai).  According  to  my  opinion. 

98.  Sett,  since, 

@eit  bem  Sriege.  Since  the  war. 

(Sr  tft  [eit  aijt  "^aQCn  "^ter.  He  has  been  here  for  a  week. 

Note.  —  Observe  the  use  of  the  pres.  tense  in  this  idiom. 

99.  ^oUf  from,  of,  about,  by. 

1.  From  : 

(Sr  fommt  t)on  ber  @tabt.  He  comes  from  the  town. 

2.  Of,  about : 

SBir  rebeten  t)on  3^^nen.  We  were  speaking  of  you. 

3.  Of  (replacing  genitive  case)  : 

SSater  t)on  Dter  Stnbern.  Father  of  four  children. 

Notes.  —  i.  The  Eng.  prep.  *  of  with  a  noun  must  generally  be  ren- 
dered in  Ger.  by  a  gen.  without  a  prep.,  whenever  it  can  be  turned  into 
the  Eng.  poss.,  otherwise  by  tJOtt  :  2)er  ^'Opf  etttCi^  §unbC§,  *The  head  of 
a  dog  (a  dog's  head)  ';  !Dte  ^hitter  biejet  JCinber,  'The  mother  of  these 
children' ;    SStr  rebetl  tlOtt  bem  TOibd)en,  *  We  are  talking  of  the  girl.' 

2.  35ott  replaces  the  gen.  with  unqualified  plur.  nouns,  as  in  the  example 
under  3,  above  ;   also  to  avoid  repetition  of  genitives,  and  usually  after 

partitives :   2)a^  §au^  tiout  ^ruber  meineg  S^ater^ ;  einer  t}on  meinen 
greunben. 


§  I02]  LESSON  XXVII  97 

4.  By  (with  personal  agent  after  the  passive  voice)  : 
©r  iDUrbe  t)om  Sonig  geIo6t«         He  was  praised  by  the  king. 

100.  3ttf  to,  at,  for. 

1 .  To  (persons)  : 

gr  rebet  JU  mir.  He  is  speaking  to  me. 

&  ge^t  3U  feinem  greunbe.         He  is  going  to  his  friend  (or 

to  his  friend's  house). 

Note. — The  Eng.  prep.  *to*  with  a  noun  must  be  rendered  in  Ger.  by 
the  dat.  without  a  prep.,  whenever  the  noun  can  be  turned  into  the  Eng. 
indir.  obj.,  otherwise  generally  by  a  prep.,  as  in  the  examples  above  :  ©ebeil 
®ie  mix  ba^  ^UC^  :  *  Give  the  book  to  me  (=  Give  me  the  book).' 

2.  To  (places,  if  not  proper  names)  : 

gr  ge^t  gur  ®tabt.  He  is  going  to  town. 

3.  At  (with  names  of  towns,  etc.)  : 

Sr  iDO^nt  gu  ©eritn.  He  lives  at  Berlin. 

4.  At  (of  time,  with  ^^tt  and  ©tunbe,  and  with  names  of 
festivals) : 

^ur  rei^ten  3^tt  (©tunbe).  At  the  right  time  (hour). 

3u  SBei^nad^ten  (Oftern).  At  Christmas  (Easter). 

5.  At,  of  (price  and  measure)  : 

JEuc^  JU  3K.  3.—  ba^  9)?eter.        Cloth  at  3  marks  a  metre, 
gin  ^raten  gu  10  ^^funb.  A  roast  of  10  pounds. 

6.  For  (of  purpose)  : 

3uTn  3Sergnugen.  For  pleasure. 

101.  ©cgcttiibcr,  opposite. 

SiJtemem  §aufe  gegenuber.  Opposite  my  house, 

©egenuber  meittem  §aufe.  Opposite  my  house. 

Note.  —  This  preposition  usually  follows  its  case. 

102.  ^a  with  prepositions  replaces  inanimate  objects  (com- 
pare §  85),  but  not  with  au^er,  fett,  or  gegenuber. 

Note.  — For  other  preps,  with  dat.,  see  App.  B,  2,  3;  for  idioms,  App.  B,  4,  5. 


^8  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  102 

EXERCISE   XXVII 

abftetgen    (fO/   to   dismount,  ber  Omnibus,  — ,  -ffe,  omni- 

get  out  of  (a  vehicle).  bus. 

bie  SSant^  -en,  bank.  Oftern,  Easter, 

befe^en,  befa^,  befe^en,  to  look  ba^  9tatl)au^,  -e^,  ^er,  town- 

at,  view.  hall. 

beftettjen,  beftteg,  befttegen,  to  bie  9?etfe,  -n,  journey,  voyage, 

mount,    ascend,   get  into  (a  trip ;    eine   —    mac^ett,    to 

vehicle).  take  (go  on)  a  journey. 

bie  :93orfe,  -n,  Exchange.  bie    JReftauratio'n,  -en,    res- 

bie  greunbin,  -nen,  friend.  taurant. 

ber  ®aft^of,  -(e)^,  ^e,  hotel.  f(J)auen,  to  look,  gaze. 

ba^  ©ebciube,  -^,  — ,  building,  fi^en,  [a^,  gefeffen,  to  sit. 

ba^    ©ebrcinge,    -^,     crowd,  fobalb  tDie,  as  soon  as. 

throng,  crush.  bie  Staffe,  -n,  cup. 

ber  ^ut[c^er,-^,—,  coachman,  tierbringen,    t)erbra(^te,    t)er* 

driver.  brac^t,  to  spend,  pass  (time). 

lang^  (gen.,  dat.,  or  acc^,  along.  3^it(ang  (eine),  for  a  while. 

ntog(i(^   possible.  gn  gu^,  on  foot. 

nai^bem  {conj.\  after.  3U  3Jfittag  effen,  to  dine. 

niemanb,  nobody,  no  one. 

A,  I.  3^  Oftern  biefe^  ^^a^re^  ntadjte  id^  eine  9leife  nai^ 
gnglanb,  ido  i(^  [eit  me^reren  -^af)ren  nic^t  gemefen  iDar. 
2.  ©ine  greunbin  begleitete  mid^.  3.  Unfer  ©(f)iff  fnt)r  Don 
aWontreal  nai)  8onbon.  4-  9?a(^  fieben  3:agen  fanten  xoxx  in 
gonbon  an.  5.  ©obalb  xoxt  moglii^  fu^ren  xoxx  jn  nnferm 
©aft^ofe  bei  Scaring  Sro^.  6.  ©a  e^  f)3dt  abenb^  n)ar,  gingen 
xovc  balb  jn  Sett,  na^bem  \mx  eine  ^eitlang  an^  bem  genfter 
gefi^ant  fatten.  7.  i^^rit^  morgen^  gittgen  xoxx  an^,  nnt  bie 
®tabt  ein  n)enig  5U  be|e()en.  8.  SBir  beftiegen  einen  Dntni* 
bn^,  nnb  fagen  bei  bent  Sutfc^er.  9.  ©er  Omnibus  fu^r 
Icings  bem  „@tranb''  bi^  jnr  Sanf  t)on  gnglanb.  10.  S)a^ 
©ebrdnge  in  biefer  (Strafe  xoax  fef)r  gro^,  befonber^  bei  ber 


§  102]  LESSON  XXVII  ^ 

53ant  II.  T)iefem  ©ebdube  gegenuber  fte^t  Me  ©5rfe,  bic 
beruljtnte  Sonboner  „@yc^ange,"  12.  §ter  [tiegen  tt)ir  ab  unb 
gtngeti  3U  gu^  jum  Sfat^aM  ober  „®uilb^at(/'  iDte  e^  ^ei^t, 

13.  2Som  9?at()aufe  gingen  tt)ir  ju  etner  9teftauration,  ido  n)ir 
gu  aJiittag  a^en*  14.  ®ann  fut)ren  mir  mit  einer  ®rofrf)!e 
gu  einem  9Serh)anbten.  15.  Set  i()m  tDar  niemanb  3U  C^aufe, 
au^er  [einer  grau  ©ema^Iin,  16.  9^a^bem  tDir  bei  i^r  eitie 
SEaffe  S^ee  getrunfen  f)atten,  fe^rten  trtr  jutn  ©aft^ofe  juriicf. 
17.  (So  t)erbrac^ten  mir  ben  Jag  fe^r  angenefjnt. 

^.  Oral :  i.  Wann  machtest  du  die  Reise,  wovon  du  er- 
zahlst?  2.  Wohin  fuhr  das  Schiff  ?  3.  Wo  kam  das  Schiff  an  ? 
4.  Wo  steht  der  Gasthof,  wo  ihr  abstiegt?  5.  Wie  fuhrt 
ihr  dahin?  6.  Weshalb  seid  ihr  frlih  zu  Bett  gegangen? 
7.  Weshalb  schaut  man  aus  den  Fenstern?  8.  Wo  war  das 
Gedrange  besonders  groB?  9.  Welches  Gebaude  steht  der 
Borse  gegenuber  ?  10.  Sitzst  du  gem  beim  Kutscher?  11.  Hat 
der  Kutscher  viel  mit  euch  gesprochen?  12.  Sprechen  die 
Kutscher  gern  mit  Fremden?     13.  Wohin  fuhr  der  Omnibus? 

14.  Langs  welcher  StralSe  fuhr  er?  15.  Gehst  du  gern  zu 
FuB?  16.  Weshalb  seid  ihr  zur  Restauration  gegangen? 
17.  Warst  du  heute  bei  deinen  Verwandten?  18.  Bei  wem 
habt  ihr  Tee  getrunken  ? 

C.  I.  Miss  Klein  has  told  me  of  her  journey  to  London. 
2.  She  had  not  been  in  England  for  five  years.  3.  A  lady, 
a  friend  of  her[s],  went  with  her.  4.  Their  ship  did  not  go 
very  fast,  and  only  (erft)  after  ten  or  twelve  days  did  they 
arrive  in  London.  5.  They  were  tired  from  the  journey, 
and  went  at  once  to  their  hotel  at  (bet)  Charing  Cross.  6.  The 
next  morning  they  mounted  an  orrfhibus,  in  order  to  see  the 
city.  7.  One  can  learn  a  great  deal  from  the  driver,  if  one 
sits  beside  him.  8.  With  the  omnibus  they  drove  through  the 
streets  as  far  as  the  town-hall.  9.  Opposite  this  building  stands 
a  restaurant,  where  they  drank  a  cup  of  tea.  10.  Afterwards 
they  went  on  foot  to  the  Exchange  and  the  Bank  of  England. 


lOO  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  103 

II.  At  the  bank  the  crush  was  so  great  that  they-  had  to  take  a 
cab.  12.  They  then  drove  to  the  house  of  an  aunt  of  (Don) 
Miss  Klein,  with  whom  they  dined.  13.  Thus  they  spent  their 
first  day  in  London  very  agreeably. 

D,  Lesestiick  :  Ein  Reisender  war  stundenlang  durch  eine 
o  ie  Gegend  gefahren,  ohne  einem  menschhchen  Wesen  zu 
begegnen.  Endhch  erblickte  er  eine  elende  Htitte,  vor  deren 
Tiir  eine  hagere  Gestalt  gegen  den  Tlirpfosten  lehnte.  "  Mein 
Freund/'  fragte  der  Reisende,  *'  haben  Sie  Ihr  ganzes  Leben 
hier  zugebracht?  "     "  Noch  nicht !  "  lautete  die  Antwort. 


LESSON  XXVIII 


103. 

The 

Simple  Conditional. 

I  should  have, 

make, 

be. 

fall,  etc. 

tc^    tDiirbe    ^abeti 

ma^en 

[ein 

fotlen 

bu   miirbeft      „ 

ff 

tf 

tt 

er    iPitrbe       ,, 

ff 

ft 

ft 

tt)tr  tnurben     ,, 

ft 

ft 

ft 

i^r  tnitrbet      „ 

n 

ft 

ft 

fie  it)urben      „ 

tt 

tt 

tt 

Observe  :  The  < 

simple 

conditional  of  all  verbs 

is  formed  by 

adding  their  infinitive  to  the  imperfect 

subjunctive  of  Werben. 

104.         The  Compound  Conditional  with  ^abetl* 
I  should  have  had  (made),  thou  wouldst,  etc. 

id)  tDitrbe  jefjabt  (gemai^t)  l^afien 
bu  miirbeft  ge^abt  (gemac^t)  ^aben 
er  iDiirbe    ge^abt  (gemacf)t)  ^aben,  2c. 

Observe  :  The  compound  conditional  of  a  verb  conjugated 
with  ^aben  is  formed  by  adding  its  past  participle  to  the  simple 
conditional  of  l^abeu  (for  word  order,  compare  §  49). 


S  io6]  LESSON   XXVIII  lOI 

105.  The  Compound  Conditional  with  [cm* 

I  should  have  been  .(fallen),  thou  wouldst,  etc. 
t(^  iDiirbe    gemefen  (gefallen)  fcin 
bu  iDiirbeft  getDefen  (gefatfen)  feiti 
er  iDitrbe    getDefen  (gefatlen)  fein,  :c» 

Observe:  The  compound  conditional  of.  a  verb  conjugated,, 
with  [eitt  (see  §  62)  is  formed  by  adding  its  past  parfieiple  tC  the 
simple  conditional  of  feitl  (for  word  order,  compare  §  49)     . 

106.  Conditional  Sentences. 

SBenn  tc^  ®etb  ptte,(fo)  tnitrbe  If  I  had  money,  I  should  buy  a 

id)  ein  §au^  faufen,          •  house. 

Qd)  tDiirbe  ein  §au^  gefauft  I  should  have  bought  a  house, 

^aben,  Wtnn  id)  ®elb  get)abt  if  I  had  had  money. 

§dtte  ic^  ^tit,  [0  tDUrbe  id)  e^  If  I  had  (had  I)  time,  I  should 

tun.  do  it. 

SBenn  id)  ®elb   ^citte,  !onnte  If  I  had  money,  I  could  buy  a 

tc^  ein  ^au^  faufen.  house. 

§citte  id)  ^dt  ge^abt,  fo  ^iitte  If  I  had  had  (had  I  had)  time, 

id)  e^  getan.  I  should  have  done  it. 

(Sr  tt)trb  f ommen,  tnenn  er  f ann*  He  will  come  if  he  can. 

Observe:  i.  Conditional  sentences  regularly  consist  of  two 
parts  :  the  condition  and  the  result ;  and  either  part  may  come 
first. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  required  in  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect  of  the  '  if  clause,  the  result  being  then  expressed  by 
the  conditional ;  with  other  tenses  the  verb  is  in  the  indicative 
in  both  clauses  (see  last  example  above). 

3.  The  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjunctive  may  replace  the 
conditional  in  the  result  clause,  if  the  latter  follows. 

Note.  —  These  shorter  forms  are  used  to  avoid  complicated  construc- 
tions, as  for  example  in  the  modal  auxiliaries;  see  Lesson  XXXVII. 


I02  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  io6 

4.  When  the  'if  clause  precedes,  the  subject  of  the  result 
clause  is  thrown  after  the  verb  (as  in  the  first  example  above), 
the  particle  fo  being  usually  inserted  before  the  verb,  but  not 
translated  into  English. 

5.  SBcnn,  =  '  if,'  may  be  omitted  when  the  condition  pre- 
cedes the  result,  in  which  case  the  verb  begins  the  sentence, 
.and  the  result  clause  is  introduced  by  fo* 

,  EXERCISE   XXVIII 

abge^en  (fO^  to  go  away,  set  genefen  (f.)/  getta^,  genefen, 

out,  start,  depart.  to  get  well,  recover. 

abn)e[enb,  absent.  gating,  enough, 

ac^ !  ah  !  oh  !  ba^  ©ef^aft,  -(e)^,  -e,  busi- 
Serti'n,  n.,  Berlin.  ness. 

befe^t,  occupied,  full.  !oftfpteItg,  costly,  expensive, 

beforgen,  to  take  care  of,  see  mitfommen  (f .),  to  come  along 

to,  look  after.  (with). 

be^f)alb,  for  this  or  that  reason,  mttretfen  (f .),   to  travel   with, 

therefore,  on  that  account.  go  with,  come  along  (with). 

erfran!en  ([.),  to  fall  ill.  bte  SKtttel  (//.),  means, 

ber  gait,  -(e)^,  ^e,  fall,  case.  natiirlti^,  naturally,  of  course, 

bte  ©elegen^eit,  -en,  occasion,  U'nf often  (//.),  expenses. 

opportunity.  ^  \0^^X,  true. 

tDO^I,  probably,  I  suppose. 

Idioms  :  i.  ^ommctt  Stcj^  mi !    Do  come  along. 

2.  ^tt!^  SBetter  iff^iJu,  \\\^i  ttialjr  ?   The  weather  is  fine,  isn't  it  ? 

A,  3Burben  @te  eine  9?etfe  na^  ®ent[d)Ianb  ma^en,  iDenn 
@ie  ©elegen^ett  ptten?  — ^^atDO^I!  SBdre  metn  SSater  nic^t 
erfranft,  |o  iDcire  \^  \t%i  f(J)on  abgereift.  —  SJiiiffen  @te  be^^Ib 
p  §anfe  bletben?  —  9Benn  mein  9Sater  !ranf  ober  abinefenb 
ift,  ntn^  i^  feine  ©ef d)af te  beforgen.  —  ®a  er  mieber  genefen 
ift,  n)erben  ®te  balb  abreifen,  nt^t  im^r?  —  3^  tuiirbe  ft^on 
biefe  SSo^e  reifen,  \otxviX  bie  ©ampfer  nt(^t  alfe  befe^t  mdren. 


§  io6]  LESSON   XXVIII  103 

—  Qti^t  mitffen  @te  IDO^I  hx^  ncic^fte  SBod^e  tDarten,  —  3^! 
^'c^  mill  mit  bent  ©ampfer  fat)ren,  ber  nad)ften  SKittmo^  ab- 
ge()t.  SBenn  8ie  8uft  ij'dttcn  mit  jure  if  en,  fo  Mxt  e^  ntir  fe()r 
angene^m*  —  SBenn  ic^  bie  Witttl  I)dtte,  tnitrbe  id)  ©ie  gerne 
begteiten,  akr  ic^  filrd)te,  bie  9?ei[e  n)urbe  gu  !oftfpieIig 
merben.  —  2I(^ !  T)k  Unf often  finb  tDo^I  nic^t  fo  gro^,  tt)ie  (2ie 
glauben,  —  Qn  biefem  galle  n)iirbe  e^  mir  tjieKeic^t  ntdglid) 
fein.  —  J)ann  f ommen  ®ie  mit ;  ba^  ware  prac^tig !  —  (2ie 
n)llrben  natitr(i(^  juerft  :93erUn  befud)en,  nic^t  ma^r?  — ^a; 
tDenn  i^  ^tit  unb  ®elb  genug  ^citte,  fo  n)itrbe  i^  fpdter  nad) 
(Snglanb  reifen- 

B.  Continue  the  following:  i.  Qd)  miirbe  f ommen,  tvtmt 
idj  3eit  ^tttr  bu  ,  *  *  ,  tnenn  bu,  2c.  2.  SBenn  id)  ®elegen^ 
^eit  I)dtte,  fo  iDiirbe  id)  dm  9{eife  ma^en.  3.  Qd)  tt)iH  ju 
§aufe  bleiben,  menn  id)  tann.  4-  §citte  id)  ®elb  genug  ge* 
l^abt,  fo  Wit  id)  ba^  @au^  gefauft.  5.  SBdre  id)  nid)t  fran! 
gemefen,  fo  miirbe  id)  geftern  gefommen  fein,  6.  SBitrbe  id) 
gefalten  fein,  tt)enn  id)  ®d)(ittfc^u^  gelaufen  njdre?  7.  SBenn 
id)  morgen  iDo^I  bin,  fo  tDerbe  ic^  abreifen. 

C.  Complete  the  following  orally  by  adding  a  clause  ex- 
pressing condition  or  result:  i.  Wenn  die  Kinder  artig  sind, 
so  .  .  .  2.  Hatte  ich  Feder  und  Tinte,  so  .  .  .  3.  Ich 
wijrde  Berlin  schon  besueht  haben,  wenn  ...  4.  Wenn  sie 
nicht  erkaltet  gewesen  ware,  so  .  .  .  5.  Er  wiirde  schon 
abgereist  sein,  wenn  ...  6.  Wenn  es  morgen  regnet,  so  .  .  . 
7.  Wir  hatten  gestern  unser  Feld  gepfliigt,  wenn  ...  8.  Wdnn 
die  Unkosten  nicht  so  groB  waren,  so  .  .  .  9.  Wir  miissen 
bis  nachste  Woche  warten,  wenn  ...  10.  Es  wiirde  uns  sehr 
angenehm  sein,  wenn  ...  11.  Wenn  ich  morgen  nicht  zu 
mtide  bin,  so  .  .  .     12.  Ich  hatte  Sie  gem  begleitet,  wenn  .  .  . 

D.  I.I  have  a  mind  to  take  a  trip  to  Europe  this  summer. 
2.  If  I  had  had  time  and  money  enough,  I  should  have  gone 
(abreifen)  at  Easter.     3.  If  one  has  no  money  and  no  time, 


104 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§  107 


one  must  stay  at  home.  4.  I  should  travel  much  more,  if  I 
had  the  means.  5.  Would  it  be  possible  for  you  to  accom- 
pany me?  6.  I  should  accompany  you  gladly,  if  my  father 
had  not  been  ill.  7.  I  hope  he  will  soon  be  well  again. 
8.  Perhaps ;  and  in  that  case  it  would  be  possible  for  me  to 
go  with  [you].  9.  If  the  steamers  are  not  all  full,  we 
can  start  next  month.  10.  I  should  have  started  already,  if 
the  steamers  had  not  all  been  full.  11.  We  should  of  course 
visit  Germany,  should  we  not?  12.  Certainly;  and  afterwards 
we  should  take  a  trip  to  London,  where  I  have  relatives. 
13.  That  would  be  splendid.  14.  We  should  be  very  welcome 
at  their  house.  15.  You  would  enjoy  yourself  very  much  in 
London. 


E,  gefeftitd: 
©lodlein,  9lbenbglt)(f  letn,  laute 
grteben,  greube 
2ltten  2Jfen[(f)en  ju ! 
§e(Ie  la^  betn  8teb  erfcfiatten 
Unb  bring'  alien 
(Sine  fanfte  9tu^\ 


9tu^e  bem,  ber  f orgt  nnb  treint, 
$Ru^'  bent  greunb  unb  au^  bem 

getnb ! 
2lHen  8teben  bringe  bu 
9tul)e  unb  ^yx&^  mir  baju! 


107. 


LESSON  XXIX 
Article  with  Noun  in  General  Sense. 


%tx  Sftenft^  ift  fterblit^*  Man  is  mortal. 

^a;^  ®Ia^  ift  bur(^fid)ttg.  Glass  is  transparent. 

^te  ajfuft!  ift  etne  tunft.  Music  is  an  art. 

%tX  §unb  ift  ber  treue  greunb  The  dog  is  the  faithful  friend 
bC)^  a)Jenf  d^en.      ^  of  man. 

Observe  :  A  noun  used  in  a  general  sense  ('  in  general,*  '  all,' 
*  every,'  etc.,  being  implied  with  it)  regularly  has  the  definite 
article  in  German,  though  not  usually  in  English. 

Notes.—  i.  This  art.  is  frequently  omitted  in  the  plur.;  also  in  enu- 
merations and  proverbs :    Sltern  \\t\itX\,  S^Xt  ^tnber,   *  Parents  love  their 


§  no]  LESSON   XXIX  105 

children';   ®oIb  UTlb  @ttber  ftub  SD^etatte,  *Gold  and  silver  are  metals.' 
2.  The  art.  is  omitted  when  the  sense  is  partitive,  i.e.  when  *  some '  or 
*any'  is  implied:   §aben  "Sie  ^rot?  *Have  you  (any)  bread?'  (Sr  ftU* 
biert  2)^ufl!,  *  He  is  studying  music' 

108.  Article  with  Proper  Names. 

®cr  SSefut).  Mount  Vesuvius. 

2)er  Ontario.  Lake  Ontario. 

®cr  WCjtm.  The  (river)  Rhine. 

2)te  @d)tt)etj  ;  btC  SlUrfei'.  Switzerland ;  Turkey. 

^a^  f^one  granfreid^.  Beautiful  France. 

2)cr  fleine  ^arl.  Little  Charles. 

Observe:     i.  Geographical  names  always  take  the  article 
when  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  Place  names  are  neuter,  except  countries  in  -ei  and  -5, 
and  a  few  others. 

3.  All  proper  names  require  the  article  when  preceded  by 
an  adjective. 

109.  Various  Uses  of  Article. 

^m  ©omtner  ;  im  Sluguft.  In  summer ;  in  August. 

^  2lm  3Dtontag.  On  Monday. 

*  3?n  ber  ^dntgftra^e.  In  King  Street.       , 

^d  bcm  aJitttag^effen.  At  dinner.  L  K  fyc  /\ 

Snx  ®(J)uIe  ge^en.  To  go  to  school. 

Observe  :  The  article  is  required  before  seasons,  months, 
days  of  the  week,  streets,  meals,  and  places  of  public  resort. 

Note. — The  art.  is  also  used  before  @tabt,  §immet,  Srbc,  and  §otte. 

110.  Article  for  Possessive. 

®thtn  (Sic  mir  btC  §anb.  Give  me  your  hand. 

Sllle  ^abett  ba^^  Seben  Derloren.  They  all  lost  their  lives. 

Observe  :    i.  The  definite  article  usually  replaces  the  posses- 
sive adjective  when  no  ambiguity  would  result  as  to  the  possessor. 


io6 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§iii 


2.  With  plurality  of  possessor,  the  object  possessed  is  usually 
singular,  if  it  is  singular  .as  regards  the  individual  possessor. 

111.  Omission  of  Indefinite  Article. 

&  ift  (tnurbe)  2Irjt»  He  is  (became)  a  doctor. 

dx  ift  Citt  guter  Slrjt*  He  is  a  good  doctor. 

Observe  :  The  indefinite  article  is  usually  omitted  before  the 
unqualified  predicate  after  [eitl  and  tDcrbetl  when  it  indicates 
caUing  or  profession. 

EXERCISE   XXIX 


ba^  3lbenbeffen,  -^,  supper, 
abne^men,  to  take  away,  take 

off. 
bie  g^emie',  chemistry. 
bu'r(^[i(^tig,  transparent, 
ba^  (Sifen,  -^,  iron. 
(Suropa,  n,f  -^,  Europe, 
ber  getertag,-(e)^,-e,  holiday, 
bie  griebri^ftra^e,  Frederick 

Street, 
ba^  ®Ia^,  -e^,  ^er,  glass, 
ba^  ®oIb,  -e^,  gold.-^ 
grit^en  (ace),  to  greet,  bow  to. 
ijalh  (adj.),  half, 
^ierjulanbe,  in  this  country. 
^Inabfa^ren  (f.,  acc)^  to  go 

(etc.)  down, 
^oflitf),  polite, 
bie  8eute  (//.),  people. 


ber  5Ra(^mtttag,  -(e)^,  -e,  af- 
ternoon. 

ber  Ontario,  -^,  Lake  Ontario. 

bie  *^^t)fi'!,  physics. 

ber  9?^etn,  -(e)^,  the  (river) 
Rhine. 

bie  ©clllDeij,  Switzerland. 

f(i)tt)er,  heavy,  hard,  difficult. 

bie  ©eefitfte,  -n,  sea-coast. 

ftecfen,  to  thrust,  put,  stick. 

ber  ©tube'nt,  -en,  -en,  stu- 
dent. 

ftnbteren,  ftnbterte,  ftnbiert, 
to  study. 

ba^  ©tnbinm,  -^,  -ten,  study. 

treten  (f.),  trat,  getreten, 
to  walk,  go,  come. 

bie  3SergnUgnng^rei[e,  -n, 
pleasure-trip. 


bie  3Jiebi5t'n,  medicine. 

A.  I.  !j)a2^  ®Ia^  ift  bnrd^fic^ttg;  man  ntat^t  genfter  an^ 
®Ia^,  2.  ©a^  ®oIb  ift  f(^tDerer  at^  ba^  ©ifen.  3-  Unfere 
Sinber  ge^en  frii^  be^  9Korgen^  jnr  @(^ule ;  fie  finb  je^t  in  ber 
®(^ute.    4.  3^re  @d)ule  fte^t  in  ber  griebrit^ftra^e.    5.  2lm 


§  III]  LESSON  XXIX  107 

9Kttttt)0(f)  unb  (Sonnabenb  ^aben  fie  be^  9^acf)tntttag^  einen 
Ijaihtn  geiertag.  6.  9^acf)  betn  2lbenbeffen  macfjen  fie  geit)d{)n* 
lid)  il)re  3lufgaben,  7.  SBenn  fie  in  bie  ®d)u(ftube  treten,  ndy 
men  fie  ben  §ut  ab  nnb  grii^en  ben  Se{)rer  t)of(i(f).  8.  ^dflic^e 
Snaben  ftecfen  bie  §anbe  nic^t  in  bie  3:afd)e.  9.  !Der  Heine 
^art  ift  ein  ^oflirfjer  ^nnge.  10.  ^c^  bin  SJiater,  aber  mein 
25etter  ift  Stubent;   er   ftubiert   jeljt  '^i)X)\it  nnb  gt)eniie» 

11.  ©r  finbet  ba^  ©tnbinnt  ber  ^^t)fif  befonber^  intereffant^ 

12.  9?ac^ften  Sinter  it)irb  er  in  !l)eutfc^(anb  SJJebijin  ftnbieren* 

13.  Qn  ben  ^^^nen  n)irb  er  eine  9teife  nacf)  ber  (SdjWti^  ntac^en* 

14.  ^ierjnlanbe  mai)t  man  tine  3Sergniignng^reife  nad)  bem 
Ontario  ober  nad)  ber  (2eetitfte»  15.  Qn  Snropa  fal)ren  t)ie(e 
Ceute  ben  9ftl)ein  ^inab  ober  befni^en  bie  ^djWtx^.  16.  2lnbere 
reifen  nad)  @ng(anb  ober  nad)  bem  fd)5nen  g'^cinfreid)* 

B.  Oral:    i.  Weshalb  werden  Fenster  aus  Glas  gemacht? 

2.  Welches  ist  schwerer,  das  Eisen  oder  das  Glas?  3.  Gehst 
du  heute  zur  Schule?  4.  In  welcher  StraBe  steht  eure  Schule? 
5.  In  welchem  Monate  habt  ihr  Ferien?  6.  An  welchem  Tage 
der  Woche  habt  ihr  einen  halben  Feiertag  ?  7.  Wie  grlifien 
Sie  eine  Dame,  wenn  Sie  ihr  begegnen?  8.  Ist  es  hoflich,  die 
Hande  in  die  Tasche  zu  stecken?  9.  Sind  Sie  Student? 
10.  Was  studieren  Sie  jetzt?  11.  Welches  Studium  haben  Sie 
gern?  12.  Was  wollen  Sie  sonst  studieren  ?  13.  Wohin  wollen 
Sie  im  Sommer  reisen?  14.  Wie  bringen  die  Deutschen  die 
Ferien  zu?     15.  Und  die  Leute  hierzulande? 

C.  I.  Gold  is  dearer  than  iron.     2.  Rings  are  made  of  gold. 

3.  Windows   are    made   of    glass,    because   it   is   transparent. 

4.  Children  learn ;  students  study.  5.  I  am  a  student;  little 
Max,  my  brother,  is  only  (erft)  a  pupil.  6.  He  goes  to  school 
every  morning  in  King  Street.  7.  He  intends  to  become  a 
painter.  8.  I  am  studying  physics  and  chemistry  now,  for  I 
mean  to  be  (nierben)  a  doctor.  9.  The  study  of  medicine 
is  interesting ;  it  is  also  very  useful  to  man.      10.    When  we 


io8  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  112 

meet  ladies  in  (auf^  dat)  the  street,  we  take  off  our  hats  and 
bow  to  them.  11.  They  bow  to  us,  but  they  do  not  take  off 
their  hats.  12.  In  this  country  people  generally  take  a  pleasure- 
trip  in  summer.  13.  A  pleasure-trip  is  often  better  (beffer)  for 
the  health  than  a  bitter  medicine.  14.  Last  winter  I  visited 
Germany  with  my  mother.  15.  We  intend  to  pass  this  summer 
in  Switzerland.  16.  If  we  have  time  afterwards,  and  if  we  have 
enough  money,  we  shall  go  down  the  Rhine. 

D.  Sprichworter :  i.  Ubermut  tut  selten  gut.  2.  Ubung 
macht  den  Meister.  3.  Kleider  machen  Leute.  4.  Borgen 
macht  Sorgen.  5.  Die  Not  ist  die  Mutter  der  Erfindung. 
6.  Hunger  ist  der  beste  Koch. 

E,  Lesesttick  :  Ein  Tourist,  der  einen  entlegenen  Teil  von 
Irland  bereiste  und  die  Nacht  in  einem  kleinen,  wenig  be- 
suchten  Wirtshaus  verbracht  hatte,  klagte  dem  Wirte  am  Mor- 
gen,  dafi  seine  Stiefel,  die  er  vor  die  Zimmertlir  gesetzt  habe, 
nicht  angeriihrt  seien.  "  Ach,"  sagte  der  Wirt,  "  in  diesem  Hause 
konnten  Sie  sogar  Ihre  goldene  Uhr  vor  die  Zimmertlir  legen, 
und  kein  Mensch  wtirde  sie  anrtihren." 

LESSON  XXX 
112.  Expressions  of  Quantity. 

SSterutibjlDangig  \3^H  madden  Twenty-four  inches  make  two 

jtDei  gu^.  feet. 

3Sier  ^f  unb  ;  tauf  enb  aWann.  Four  pounds ;  a  thousand  men. 

'^\0t\  gtafd)en;  Jtt)0lf  Sllen.  Two  bottles;  twelve  yajds. 

gUnf  2)^arf,  JtDangtg  "iPfennig.  Five  marks,  twenty  'pfennigs/ 

giinf  ®Ia^  Sier.  Five  glasses  of  beer. . 

W\i  jwei  ^aar  ®(i)Uf)en.  With  two  pairs  of  shoes. 

®rei  33?eter  t)on  biefem  JEud).  S[x  metres  of  this  cloth. 

3)er  ©tod  tft  einen  gu^  lang.  The  stick  is  a  footlong; 

Observe:  i.  Nouns  expressing  measure,  weight,  or  number 
(except  feminines  in  -e)  retain  the  uninflected  form  of  the 
singular,  even  when  the  sense  is  plural. 


§  114]  LESSON   XXX  109 

2.  Feminines  in  -c  add  -n  in  the  plural. 

3.  The  noun,  the  quantity  of  which  is  expressed,  is  usually 
in  apposition  to  the  noun  expressing  the  quantity,  unless  pre- 
ceded by  a  determinative. 

4.  The  measure  of  distance,  weight,  etc.,  is  in  the  accusative. 

113.  Distributive  Article. 

^tDCimat  bC)^  3^f)^^^-  Twice^^year. 

T)xdmal  bic  SBoc^e.  Three  times^a  week. 

!l)ret  5Kar!  bic  6IIe,  Three  marks^  yard. 

Observe  :  The  Enghsh  indefinite  article  is  replaced  by  the 
definite  article  in  German  when  used  distributively  (=  *  each  '). 

Note.  —  In  expressions  of  time,  as  above,  masc.  and  neut.  nouns  are 
in  the  genitive,  fems.  in  the  accusative;  in  those  of  price  the  noun  is 
in  the  accusative. 

114.  Remarks  on  Numerals,  i.  ©in  is  used  adjectively  after 
a  determinative : 

S)er  etnc  ©ruber ;  tnein  etncr     The  one  brother ;  one  of  my 
©C^U^.  shoes.  "^^       ■ 

2.  ^xn  is  also  used  substantivel3rwith  the  definite  article,  in 
both  singular  and  plural : 

©er  etnc  ober  ber  anbere.  The  one  or  the  other. 

S)te    einctt    [agten   bie^,    bie      Some   said  this,  (the)   others  J 
anbern  ba^»  that.  y 

3.  S3cibe,  '  both,*  is  used  substantively  and  adjectively ;  sul> 
stantively  it  also  has  the  neuter  singular  form  bcibei^ : 

2)?etne  (SItern  finb  beibe  fjkx.      My  parents  are  both  here. 
®te  (meine)  beibcn  ©ritber.        The  (my)jwo  brothers. 
4Beibc^  ift  tDa^r.  Both  (thingsjlxe  true. 

EXERCISE   XXX 

bie  9lbteilung,  -ett,  department,   beftelten,  to  order. 
^  au^reid^ett,  to  be  enough,  suffice.  be3at){en,  to  pay. 
befomtnen,  befatn,  betotnmen,  billtg,  cheap, 
to  get,  receive,  obtain. 


no 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§114 


bte  ©onbon^  (//.),  candy, 
candies. 

bte  (Soufine,  -n,  cousin  (/). 

ba^  ®amenf(eib,  -(e)^,  -er, 
lady's  dress. 

ba^  T)u^enb,  -e^,  -e,  dozen. 

ber  gittfauf,  -(e)^,  ^e,  pur- 
chase. 

f ertig,  ready  ;  —  feitt,  to  have 
finished  (done). 

bte  ^Iaf(^e,  -n,  bottle. 

grau,  gray. 

bie  9Har!,  mark  (about  24  cts. ; 
abbr,  m.  or  2K!0* 

ba^  aJJeter,  -^,  — ,  metre. 

ba^  2Ktttag^effett,  -^,  dinner. 

ba^  a}?u[ter,  -%,  — ,  pattern, 
sample. 

ba^  "?|3aar,  -(e)^,  -e,  pair. 

ber  ^fettnig,  -^,-e/ pfennig,' 
(rio"  P^^^  o^  ^  mark). 

ba^  *iJ5funb,  -e^,  -e,  pound. 

bte  9te(f)ttung,  -eti,  bill,  ac- 
count. 


bte   9{eil)e,  -n,  row ;  turn. 

bie  atofine,  -n,  raisin. 

ber  SiotlDettt,  -(0^^  -^t  red 
wine,  claret. 

bte  @ac^e^  -tt,  thing,  matter, 
affair. 

bte  @(^aif)tel,  -tt,  box  (of 
cardboard,  etc.). 

ba^  @otnmerfletb,  -(e)^,  -er, 
summer-dress. 

folDte,  as  well  as,  and  also. 

ba^  Safi^etttuc^,  -(t)^,  "er, 
handkerchief. 

Uttgefci^r,  about,  nearly. 

bte  aSerfdufertn,  -nen,  sales- 
woman. 

ba^  SBaarett^au^,  -e^,  ^er,  de- 
partmental store. 

ba^  3^^9/  -(^)^/  -^t  stuff,  ma- 
terial. 
ber  30IC  -(^)^r  -^r  ii^ch. 
Set  3^^^^^  ~^r  sugar, 
jule^t,  last, 
gunai^ft,  next,  then. 


Idioms:    i.  ^infiiufe  ttta(I)ett^   to  make  purchases,  go  shopping. 

2.  5(tt  tier  OfJcilje  fetn  (an  bie  0^eil)c  fommcn),  to  be  one's  turn. 

A,  SSorige  SBoc^e  trar  eine  goufitte  t)otn  Sanbe  bei  utt^  auf 
©efud).  ®ie  !ommt  getDo^ttlii^  jlDeimal  be^  3^^^^^  W 
©tabt,  uttt  ©ittfaufe  ju  mac^ett.  9lm  ©ontter^tag  gittgett  n)ir 
alfo  jum  gro^en  SBaarett^aufe  t)on  garttnann  unb  ©o^ttv 
"S^ort  fann  matt  [aft  alle  (Sad^ett  befotrttnett,  bie  tttatt  braud^t, 
o^tte  it)eiter  ,5U  geljett.  3^^^ft  Qtttgen  tt)ir  in  bie  2lbteiluttg  fUr 
^amettfleiber.  'Die  SSerfauferitt  jeigte  utt^  eitt  SKufter  ju 
eittem  ®ommerf(eibe  ju  2Ji.  3.—  ba^  2}?eter.    ©ie  fagte,  ba§ 


§  114]  LESSON   XXX  HI 

ungefa[)r  6  3Keter  bat)oti  au^reic^en  tDiirben,  ba  ba^  SKufter 
50  ^oli  breit  fei.  9JJetne  Soufine  faufte  8  SJieter  bat>on,  ba 
e^  fo  biKig  h)ar.  ^undcf)ft  faufte  fie  auc^  6  2:afcf)entuc^er  fur 
i^ren  Sruber  unb  bejalitte  9J?,  12.50  ba^  I)u^enb  bafiir. 
T)ann  faufte  fie  jmei  "ipaar  §anbfc^u^e  fitr  bie  a)iutter.  ®ie 
toareti  beibe  fe()r  fc^dn.  1)ie  eiuen  maren  grau,  bie  anbern 
n)eiB»  3?ac^bem  bie  goufine  fertig  Wax,  tarn  id)  an  bie  9tei^e. 
Q6)  beftettte  5  ^funb  9Jofinen,  unb  10  ^funb  ^ucfer  gu  25 
pfennig  ba^  ^funb,  foU)ie  ein  35u^enb  glafc^en  9^? otmein  f iir  ben 
OnfeL  2lt^  tt)ir  fertig  n)aren,  fauf ten  n)ir  jtuei  ©d)a(^tet  53 on- 
bon^  fiir  bie  ^inber  unb  beja^ften  bie  9?ec^nung.  ®ann  fuf)ren 
iDir  mit  ber  (gtra^enba^n  jum  2)littag^effen  nac^  §aufe, 

B,  Oral:  i.  Wo  steht  das  grolSe  Waarenhaus  von  Hart- 
mann  und  Sohn?  2.  Machen  Sie  gern  Einkaufe  dort? 
3.  Weshalb?  4.  Wie  oft  gehen  Sie  dahin?  5.  Wie  fahren 
Sie  dahin?  6.  Wann  waren  Sie  zuletzt  da?  7.  In  welche 
Abteilung  gingen  Sie  zuerst  ?  8.  Wie  viele  Meter  Zeug  braucht 
man  ftir  ein  Sommerkleid  ?      9.  Wie  breit  ist   dieses   Zeug? 

10.  Wie  viel  kosten  Taschentuciier  das  Dutzend?  11.  Wie 
viel  bezahlt  man  fur  drei  Paar  Handschuhe,  zu  M.  2.50  das 
Paar?  12.  Wie  viel  kostet  guter  Tee?  13.  Wie  viel  Pfund 
Rosinen  brauchen  wir?  14.  Fiir  wen  ist  die  Schachtel  Bon- 
bons, die  Sie  gekauft  haben?  15.  Fiir  wen  sind  die  beiden 
Paar  Handschuhe  ? 

C.  I.  Hartmann  and  Son  have  a  large  departmental  store. 

2.  You  (man)  can  buy  many  things  very  cheap  at  Hartmann's. 

3.  My  mother  goes  shopping  there  usually  twice  a  week.  4.  We 
can  go  there  (bal^in)  with  the  street-railway  and  come  home 
before  dinner.  5.  Here  is  the  ladies*  dress  department 
6.  Please  show  us  several  patterns  for  a  summer-dress.  7. 
The  material  must  be  about  48  inches  wide.  8.  If  it  is 
wide  enough,  7  metres  will  suffice.  9.  This  material  costs  4 
marks  [and]  50  pfennigs  a  metre.     10.  Give  me  7  metres  of  it. 

11.  Next  show  us  handkerchiefs,  if  you  please.     12.  They  must 


112  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  115 

not  be  too  dear;  about  10  marks  a  dozen.  13.  I  shall  take 
two  dozen  of  these.  14.  How  much  are  (cost)  these  gloves 
a  pair?  15.  We  sell  them  at  7  marks  for  2  pairs.  16.  Now  it 
is  mother's  turn.  17.  Send  me  2  pounds  of  tea  and  3  pounds 
of  raisins.  18.  How  much  is  the  sugar?  19.  Twenty-five 
pfennigs  a  pound.  20.  That  is  too  dear.  21.  We  have  also 
sugar  at  22  pfennigs.  22.  Then  send  me  10  pounds  of  it. 
23.  We  must  buy  two  or  three  boxes  of  candies  for  my  little 
sisters.     24.  I  have  finished  now.     25.  So  have  I  (=  I  also). 

D,  Lesestlick  :  Konnen  Sie  mir  dieses  Goldstuck  wechseln  ? 
— Was  fur  eine  Munze  ist  das  ?  —  Es  ist  ein  amerikanisches  Fiinf- 
dollarstiick.  —  Ich  bedauere ;  das  mlissen  Sie  zur  Bank  tragen. 
—  Haben  Sie  die  Giite,  mir  vorher  den  Wert  des  deutschen 
Geldes  zu  erklaren.  —  Sehr  gern.  Hundert  Pfennig  machen  eine 
Mark  (in  Silber),  und  eine  Mark  ist  ungefahr  so  viel  wert  wie 
24  Cents  amerikanisch  oder  wie  ein  Shilling  sterling.  AuBer 
der  Mark  gibt  es  folgende  Silbermtinzen :  Zweimarkstucke, 
Dreimarkstucke  (oder  Taler),  Fiinfmarkstlicke  und  Fiinf- 
zigpfennigstucke.  Wir  haben  auch  Goldstlieke  zu  je  10  und  20 
Mark,  sowie  Papiergeld  in  Scheinen.  EndUch  gibt  es  Nickel- 
mlinzen  zu  5  und.  10  Pfennig,  sowie  ein  paar  Kupfermtinzen  von 
kleinerem  Betrage.  Also  bekommen  Sie  ungefahr  M.  20.80  flir 
Ihr  Goldstuck,  je  nach  dem  Kurse. 


LESSON  XXXI 
115.       The  Imperative  of  l^afictt,  fcin,  tocrbctU 

^at)e  (bu),  have  (thou).  fei  (bu),  be  (thou). 

^      'Met  him  have.  -  , '    'Met  him  be. 


t)abe  er,  J  *  fei  er, 

^aben  tDir,  let  us  have.  feten  tDtr,  let  us  be. 

l^abt  (if)r),  have  (ye).  feib  (i^r),  be  (ye,  you), 

^aben  fie,  let  them  have.  feien  fie,  let  them  be. 

I)aben  @ie,  have  (you).  feien  @ie,  be  (you). 


§  ii8]  LESSON  XXXI  113 

.     /c   N  1  /.u     \  iDerben  U)ir,  let  us  become. 

lt)erbe  (bu),  become  (thou).         ^    .  .n.  ^^  /  x 

^^  ^^^^^  \  n)erbet(t^r),  become  (ye,  you). 


'  (-  let  him  become.       trerben  fie,  let  them  become, 
toerben  ®ie,  become  (you). 

116.  Imperative  of  madden,  fttigcit* 

mac^e  (bu),  make  (thou).  finge  (bu),  sing  (thou). 

^     ^  '   '  let  him  make.  c  \  let  him  sing, 

ntad^e  er,  J  fmge  er,  J  ^ 

macf)en  tt)tr,  let  us  make.  ftttgen  tt)tr,  let  us  sing. 

mac^t  (i^r),  make  (ye,  you).  fingt  (il)r),  sing  (ye,  you). 

tna(J)en  fie,  let  them  make.  fingen  fie,  let  them  sing. 

tnac^en  @ie,  make  (you).  fingen  ®ie,  sing  (you). 

Observe:  i.  The  only  true  imperative  forms  are  the  2nd 
singular  and  the  2nd  plural ;  the  remaining  forms  are  present 
subjunctives  used  with  imperative  force. 

2.  The  imperative  of  most  verbs  (weak  and  strong)  is  formed 
as  above. 

3.  The  pronoun  of  the  3rd  singular  more  commonly  precedes, 
but  ®tc  always  follows  ;  the  3rd  plural  (=*  let  them  ' )  is  very  rare. 

4.  The  pronouns  bu,  i^r  are  not  expressed,  except  for  con- 
trast or  emphasis. 

117.  Imperative  with  laffett*  The  imperative  of  the  verb 
laffen,  '  let,'  is  used  as  an  auxiliary,  with  the  force  of  an  impera- 
tive, to  replace  the  3rd  singular  and  plural  and  the  ist  plural,  as 
follows  : 

fag      (2nd  sing.)     1 

lagt    (2nd  plur.)     \  un^  bleiben,  let  us  remain. 

taffen  @ie  (formal)  J 

118.  Infinitive. 
Present  Perfect 

(ju)  ^aben,  to  have.  ge^abt      (5U)  ^aben,to  have  had. 

(ju)  fein,  to  be.  getDefen    (^u)  fetn,  to  have  been. 

(,;;u)  tDerben,  to  become.  geiDorben  (;^u)  fein,  to  have  become. 

(ju)  madden,  to  make.  gemac^t    (p)  l^abett,  to  have  made. 


114  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§119 

Observe  :  The  perfect  infinitive  is  formed  by  prefixing  the 
past  participle  to  the  present  infinitive. 

119.  Participles. 

Present  Past 

l^ab  enb,  having.  ge  ^ab  t,  had. 

f et  cnb,  being.  QC  U)ef  Ctt,  been. 

Tttac^  cnb,  making.  flC  tuac^  t,  made, 

fing  enb,  singing.  gc  fung  en,  sung. 

Observe  :    i .  The  present  participle  of  all  verbs  ends  in  -cnb* 

2.  The  past  participle  of  weak  verbs  is  formed  by  prefixing 
gc-  to  the  stem  and  adding  -t;  the  past  participle  of  strong 
verbs  has  gc-  prefixed  and  ends  in  -en,  usually  also  with  change 
of  stem  vowel. 

Notes.  —  i.  Both  the  present  and  the  past  participles  are  also  used  as 
attributive  adjs. 

2.  For  the  fut.  passive  part.,  see  §  296. 

120.  Omission  of  gc-.  Foreign  verbs  in  -icrcn  and  verbs 
with  inseparable  prefixes  (see  §  51)  omit  the  prefix  gc-  of  the 
past  participle  : 

ftubteren,  study,        ftubtert       beja^ten,  pay,         bejal^tt 
entbecfeu,  discover,    entbecft       t)ergeffen,  forget,     Dergeffen 

121.  Present  of  fottcn* 

Indicative.  Subjunctive, 

\i)  foH  \m  fotten  tc^  [otte  it)tr  foCen 

bu  foHft         tf)r  foHt  bu  [olleft  tf)r  folfet 

er  foil  fie   foHen  er  foQe  fie   follen 

122.  Use  of  fotten. 

^d)  foil  (tt)ir  foHen)  au^ge^en.    I  am  to  (we' are  to)  go  out. 
©otl  i(^  bletben?  Shall  I  (am  I  to)  stay? 

J)U  foHft  ni(^t  fte^fen-  .  Thou  shalt  not  steal. 

6r  foK  fommen.  He  is  to  (shall)  come. 

Observe:  i.  In  the  first  person  fotten  =  'am  to,'  etc.,  in 
statements,  and  in  questions  *  shall '  or  '  am  to,*  etc. 


§  122]  LESSON   XXXI  115 

2.  In  the  other  persons,  fotten  is  equivalent  to  an  emphatic 
imperative  (=  'shall'  or  *are  to,'  etc.),  unless  interrogative. 

EXERCISE   XXXI 

auf  !t)eutf^,  in  German.  ber  Sa^,  -e^,  "e,  sentence, 

auf madden,  to  open.  f (fatten,  to  resound. 

au^lDCnbig,  by  heart.  fc^on  {adv,),  well,  very  well, 

ba^  -53(iiTn(ein,  -^,  — ,  little  bie  Seite,  -n,  page. 

flower.  \\i),  himself,  herself,  etc. 

ber  ©tester,  -^,  — ,  poet.  ber  ©onttenftra^I,  -(e)^,  -en, 

eriauben  {dat)y  to  permit,  al-  sunbeam. 

low.  fprie^en  ([.),  fpro^,  gefproffen, 

grtebrtt^,  Frederick.  to  sprout,  bud. 

bie  grii^Ung^Seit,  spring-time.  t)oHe'nben,  to  finish,  complete, 

ba^  ®rim,  -^,  green.  t)orbei,  past,  gone, 

l^erfagen,  to  recite,  repeat.  t)0rlefen,  to  read  aloud, 

bie  §o^e,  -n,  height.  bie   SKinterqual,   hard  winter 

tauten,  to  sound,  run,  read.  weather, 

lefen,  to,  gelefen,  to  read.  ba^  Sort,  -(e)^,  ^er,  word, 

ntit  einem  9WaI,  all  at  once.  bie  ^dit,  -n,  line  (of  writing), 

nennen,  nannte,  genannt,  to  ba^  3^^^^'^^*'  ~(^)^'  "^"^^  v^^^- 

name.  jerflie^en    ([.),    jerflo^,  jer^' 

no(f)  einmal,  once  more,  again.  floffen,  to  melt  (away). 

nnn,  now.  jn  Snbe,  at  an  end. 

bie     Stegenjeit,     -en,     rainy  ju^tiren  {dat),  to  Hsten. 

weather.  3Unia(^en,  to  close,  shut. 

A,  Sinber,  ma^t  bie  53ii(^er  auf  unb  la^t  un6  ba^  @ebi(^t 
auf  ®eite  132  lefen.  igagt  mir,  mie  ba^  ®ebi(^t  ^ei^t.  —  ©a^ 
©ebic^t  {)ei^t ,, ©er  grlt^Iing''  unb  ber  S)icf)ter  ^ei^t  griebri^ 
:33obenftebt.  — SJtarie,  fange  an,  e^  mir  t)or3u(efen.  — ^itte, 
entfdiulbtgen  (2ie  mic^,  grciutein  :©auer,  icf)  bin  erfdftet. — 
@ut,  nxein  Sinb;  alfo  fange  bu  an,  Slara.  —  (Srtauben  @te 
mir,  e§  ^erjufagen  ;  id)  \)cAt  e^  au^menbig  geternt.  —  ®d)dn; 
^drt  aufmerffam  ju,  Sinber.  — 


Il6  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§122 

.    SBenn  ber  grii^Itng  auf  bie  Serge  fteigt 
Unb  im  ©onnenftra^t  ber  ®d)nee  jerfltej^t, 
SBenn  ba^  erfte  ®run  am  Saum  fic^  jetgt 
Unb  im  ®ra^  ba^  erfte  Slitmlein  fprie^t, 
SBenn  t)orbei  tm  2^al  nun  mit  einem  3Kat 
3lHe  ategenjeit  unb  SBinterquat, 
©c^allt  e§  t»on  ben  §o^'n  bt^  jum  Stale  n)ett: 
G  Jt)ie  iDunberfdjon  ift  bie  grii^Iing^jeit ! 

—  35a^  {)aft  bu  [e(}r  gut  ^ergefagt,  mein  ^inb,  3=e^t  foHt 
i^r  bie  -©iti^er  mieber  aufmad^en*  8eft  nod)  einmat  3^*^^ 
5  unb  6.  §ier  fe^It  etma^,  nidjt  'wa\)v?  Siubolf,  nenne  mir 
ba^  fe^Ienbe  aSort,— iSa^  ^eitmort  „finb"  fe^tt,  ^raulein 
©auer.  —  ®an^  rid)tig,  mein  3^unge;  je^t  t)ot(enbe  ben  Sa^.— 
35er  t)oHenbete  Sa|  miirbe  tauten :  „Senn  alle  ategenjeit, 
ufit).,  t)orbei  finb/'  — 9^un,  ^inber;  bie  ©tunbe  ift  ju  @nbe ; 
i^r  follt  je^t  nad)  @aufe  ge^en,  — S3itte,  erjdfifen  Sie  un§  erft 
ein  3Kardjen  auf  3)eutf (^,  grdulein  Saner,  —  Qtt^t  Ijabe  ic^ 
feine  3eit,  aber  morgen  tDitI  id)  ba^  gem  tun,  ba  il)r  fo  artig 
gemefen  feib. 

B,  Continue  the  following:  i.  Qii)  foil  ^eute  morgen  ein 
®thxi)t  ^erfagen,  bu  •  ♦  .  2c.  2.  ®ofi  ii)  ba^  ®ebid|t  Dor^^ 
lefen  ober  t)erfagen  ?  3.  ©r  fagte,  x6)  folle  ni(^t  fo  t)iel  8drm 
mad)en,  er  fagte,  bu  ,  ♦  .  ic.  4.  Qii)  ^abe  gu  t)iel  fiir  ba§ 
Su^  be5af)tt,    5-  3^  ^be  (^atte)  ftei^ig  ftubiert, 

C.  Oral:  i.  Sollen  wir  die  Blicher  nicht  jetzt  aufmachen? 
2.  Wer  hat  dieses  schone  Gedicht  geschrieben?  3.  Wie  nennt 
man  einen,  der  Gedichte  schreibt?  4.  Wer  soil  zuerst  lesen? 
5.  Wer  soil  das  Gedicht  hersagen?  6.  Soil  Marie  jetzt  an- 
fangen,  oder  Rudolf?  7.  Sollen  wir  die  Bucher  wieder  auf- 
machen? 8.  Wer  hat  die  Tur  aufgemacht?  9.  Wer  soil  sie 
wieder    zumachen?       10.   Wer   will   die    Fenster   zumachen? 

11.  Was   sagt   der   Lehrer,  wenn  die   Stunde  zu   Ende   ist? 

12.  Wohin  sollen  wir  jetzt  gehen? 


§  125]  LESSON   XXXII  II7 

D.     I.    Tell    me   what   poem   you   read   yesterday,   Clara, 

2.  Please   excuse   me,    Miss    Bauer,    I   was    not    at    school. 

3.  Then  you  tell  me  (it),  Charles.  4.  It  was  a  poem  about 
(iiber^  acc^  spring.  Miss  B.  5.  Do  you  know  it  by  heart? 
6.  Not  yet,  Miss  B.  7.  Then  learn  it  this  evening,  and  recite 
it  to  me  to-morrow,  my  boy.  8.  Open  your  books,  and  let  us 
read  line[s]  one  to  (bi^)  eight.  9.  Now  close  them  again,  and 
you  recite  me  these  hnes,  Mary.  10.  You  are  to  hsten,  chil- 
dren;  Mary  is  to  recite  them.  11.  Please  tell  us.  Miss  B., 
what  word  is  missing  in  line  six.  12.  The  missing  word  is 
^sind.*  13.  Don't  make  so  much  noise,  children.  14.  Now 
go  home.  15.  Take  your  books  with  [you],  and  read  the  poem 
attentively.  16.  You  are  to  learn  it  by  heart  to-morrow. 
17.  Please  read  the  poem  aloud  to  us  first,  and  show  us  the 
pictures  you  brought  from  Germany.  18.  I  shall  do  so  (e^) 
to-morrow  if  you  are  good.  19.  Charles,  please  shut  the  door 
when  you  go  out  (^inau^). 

LESSON  XXXII 

123.  Prepositions  with  Dative  or  Accusative.  The  following 
nine  prepositions  govern  the  dative  when  they  indicate  locaHly 
merely,  and  answer  the  question  'where?'  or  'in  what  place?* 
the  accusative  when  they  imply  motion,  direction,  or  tendency 
towards  the  object  of  the  preposition,  and  answer  the  question 
'whither?'  or  'to  what  place  or  person?' 

tin  Winter  neben  unter  sttiifd^en 

auf  in  liber  tior 

124.  Contractions.  5(tt  and  in  are  generally  (in  expres- 
sions of  time  always)  contracted  with  the  unemphasized  bcm 
and  bai^:  am=ati  bem,  tm=tTt  bem,  attig=att  ba^,  itt!g=in  ba^; 
auf  is  contracted  with  ba^  only  :  auf)g  =  auf  ba^» 

125.  5(n^  on,  upon,  to,  at,  in. 

I.  Of  place  (surface  non-horizontal)  ;  ' 


Il8  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  126 

{d)  With  dative = on,  upon  (adjacent  to),  at  — 
©a^  Sitb  pngt  an  ber  SBanb.      The  picture  hangs  on  the  wall. 
^C^  fi^e  am  %\\&}t.  I  am  sitting  at  the  table. 

(b)  With  accusative  =  on,  to  (towards)  — 
Sr  fiangt  ba^   ^ilb   an   bie     He  hangs  the  picture  on  the 

2Banb.  wall. 

@r  ge^t  an^  genfter.  He  goes  to  the  window. 

2.  Of  time  and  date,  with  dative  only = on,  upon,  in  : 
2Im  aSormittag  (Slbenb).  In  the  forenoon  (evening). 

5lm  jnjeiten  -3uit.  On  the  second  of  July. 

126.  5Ittf,  on,  upon,  to,  for. 

1.  Place  (surface  horizontal)  : 

(a)  With  dative = on,  upon,  on  top  of — 
©ajg  4BU(^  tft  auf  bem  Sifd^e.      The  book  is  on  the  table. 

(Jf)  With  accusative  =  on,  to  — 
8egen  ®te  ba^  auf  ben  5£tfd^.     Lay  that  on  the  table. 
@r  gel^t  auf  ben  2J?arft.  He  is  going  to  the  market. 

2.  Of  future  time,  with  accusative  only  =  for  : 

(Sr  fommt  auf  jmei  STage.  He  is  coming  for  two  days. 

Note.— S3i)g  auf  +  ace.  =  * except/  'but':   (Sr  ag  aUe  Spfcl  bi)^  aitf 
cinen,  *  He  ate  all  the  apples  but  one.' 

127.  ^titter,  behind. 

!Der  §unb  liegt  l^tnter  bem     The  dog  lies  behind  the  stove. 
Dfen. 
•  @r  Iriec^t  l^inter  ben  Ofen.         He  creeps  behind  the  stove. 

128.  Sn,  in,  into. 

I.  Of  place,  with  dative = in;  with  accusative = into  : 
@r  arbeitet  int  ©arten.  He  works  in  the  garden, 

©r  ge{)t  in^  3^^^^^*  ^^  S^^^  ^^^^  ^^^  room. 


§  132]  LESSON   XXXII  Iig 

2.  Of  time,  with  dative  only  =  in  : 
gr  tat  e^  in  einer  ©tunbe.  He  did  it  in  an  hour. 

129.  ^thtn,  beside,  by,  near. 

6r  fte^t  nebcn  bem  2^tf(^e.  He  stands  beside  the  table. 

©teCe  e^  neben  bie  Snir.  Put  it  by  (near)  the  door. 

130.  fiber,  over,  across,  of,  about,  concerning. 

1.  Of  place,  with  dative  =  over  (above) ;   with  accusative  = 
over  (across). 

®ie  SBoIfe  ^dngt  iiber  bem  The  cloud  hangs  over  the  hill. 

Serge. 

^it  SSxndc  fU^rt  iiber  ben  The  bridge  leads  across  the 

glug.  river. 

2.  Of  excess,  with  accusative  only  =  over  :  * 

!Da6  foftet  iiber  etnen  Xaler.       That  costs  over  a  dollar. 

3.  With  accusative  only  =  of,  about,  concerning  : 

gr  rebete  iiber  feine  9teife.  He  spoke  of  his  journey. 

131.  Unter,  under,  among. 

1.  Of  place,  with   dative  or  accusative  =  under  (beneath, 
below) : 

!iDte  fcfjtDarge  S^a^e  irar  unter     The  black  cat  was  under  the 

bem  Xi\d)t.  table. 

(Sie  froc^  unter  ben  STifd^.  She  crept  under  the  table. 

2.  Of  number,  with  dative  or  accusative  =  among  : 

3)er  graufame  SBoIf  ift  nnter  The  cruel  wolf  is  among  the 

ben  (Sc^afen.  sheep. 

@r  ift  unter  bie  ©d^afe  gegan^  He  went  among  the  sheep. 

gen. 

132.  ©or,  before,  in  front  of,  ago. 

I.  Of  place,  with  dative  or  accusative  =  before,  in  front  of: 


I20  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§133 

3)er  ®tut)t  fte^t  t)Or  ber  Znx.      The  chair  stands  before   the 

door, 
©telle  xijU  t)Or  bie  SEiir*  Put  it  in  front  of  the  door. 

2.  Of  order,  with  dative  only  =  before  (ahead  of)  : 

®ie  fommett  t)Or  mir*  You  come  before  (precede)  me. 

3.  Of  time,  with  dative  only  =  before,  ago  : 

Qx  fommt  t)or  ncicfifter  SBoc^e*     He  comes  before  next  week. 
dx  tarn  t)Or  JtDei  Jagen  an*  He  arrived  two  days  ago. 

133.  3^tfr!)Ctt,  between. 

S)er  ®tU^t  ftef)t  JlDlfi^en  ber  The  chair  stands  between  the 
Xnx  Uttb  bem  genfter.  door  and  the  window. 

©teltetl  ®te  tl)n  JlDtfdjen  bie  Put  it  between  the  door  and 
%vix  unb  ba^  genfter.  the  window. 

134.  ^a  with  all  these  prepositions  replaces  pronouns  used 
for  inanimate  objects  (compare  §  85). 

EXERCISE   XXXII 

'  ba^  9lnben!en,  -^,  memory.  fontgltd^,  royal, 

ber   3lu^(dnber,  -6,  — ,   for-  bie  ginbe, -n,  linden. 

eigner.  ber  Suftgarten,  -^,  ",  pleasure- 
bie  San!,  ^e,  bench.  garden,  park, 

bie  Sriide,  -n,  bridge.  bie  9Kttte,  middle,  centre, 

ettitge,  a  few,  several.  ba^    9?attona't'!Den!maI,    -6, 
ber  @intt)oI)ner,  -^,  — ,  inhab-      ^er,  or  -e,  National  Monu- 

itant.  ment. 

fU^ren,  to  lead.  oftlii^,  eastern, 

ber  gu^ganger,  -§,  — ,  pedes-  ba^  SReiif),  -(e)^,  -e,  empire. 

trian.  bie  ©C^ilbtnac^e,  -n,  sentry, 

bie  ^auptftabt,  ^e,  capital.  ba^  ®(f)Io^,  -e^,  ^er,  castle, 
bie     ^auptftra^e,     -n,    main       palace. 

street.  bie  @(i)Io^fret^eit,  Precincts  of 
ber  ^aifer,  -^,  — ,  emperor.  the  Palace. 


§  134]  LESSON   XXXII  121 

ber    ®c^Io^^3la^,  -e^,   Palace  ba^  Jor,  -(e)^,  -e,  gate. 

Square.  bte  Uttttierfita't,  -en,  univer- 
bte  S|)ree,  the  (river)  Spree.  sity. 

ber  (Spring brunnen,  -^,  — ,  t)orbeige()en  (f.),  to   go  past 

fountain.  (an  +  dat'^, 

ber  3:iergarten,  -^,  %  deer-  ber  SBeg,  -(e)^,  ~e,  way,  road. 

park,  park.  tt)e[tU(^,  western. 

A.  Serttn  Itegt  an  ber  (Spree  unb  t[t  feit  18U  bte  §aupt^ 
ftabt  be^  ©entfc^en  9?ei^e^.  ^z%i  ^t  e^  itber  brei  W\h 
Itonen  ©intDo^ner.  ®ie  gauptftra^e  33erUn^  ^ei^t  Unter  ^^tn 
Sinben.  3n  biefer  Strafe  fte^en  Dier  9tei^en  Stnben  nnb 
be^^Ib  ^ei^t  fie  [0.  3^n  ber  Wxiit  jtDifc^en  ben  ginben  tiegt 
ein  breiter  5Beg  fur  ^^u^gcinger.  Unter  ben  33aumen  ftel)en 
S3anfe,  auf  benen  man  fi^en  !ann.  2lm  CftUc^en  (Snbe  ber 
Strafe  liegt  ba^  !onigIid)e  Si^fo^.  93or  bent  Sc^Ioffe, 
jtDifi^en  jtrei  3lrmen  be^  i^Iuffe^,  ift  ber  8uftgarten.  3ln  ber 
(Sdjlo^frei^eit  neben  bent  Sc^Ioffe  fte^t  ba^  ^lationaf- ©enfmat 
gum  3lnbenfen  an  Saifer  SBil^elm  ben  ©rften.  Winter  bent 
®d)Ioffe  ift  ber  Si^lo^plafe,  auf  bent  ein  grower  Spring- 
brnnnen  fte^t.  ©ine  fd}one  ©riide  fit^rt  t)om  ®(f)toffe  iiber 
ben  i^Iu^  jur  gauptftraj^e.  3)ann  ge^t  man  n)eiter  nnb  an 
ber  UniDerfitdt  tjorbei.  2luf  ber  UniDerfitdt  ftnbieren  t)ier  bi^ 
fiinftaufenb  ©tubenten.  ©i^  auf  einige  ^unbert  Slu^Idnber 
finb  biefe  ©eutfc^e.  21m  n)eftlirf)en  (gnbe  ber  Strafe  fte^t 
ba^  beriifjmte  53ranbenburger  2^or.  ®urcf)  iiiefe^  Jor  ge^t 
man  in  ben  5Eiergarten.  Sine  Sdjilbmac^e  fte^t  immer 
barunter. 

B,  Oral:  i.  Wann  waren  Sie  zuletzt  in  Europa?  2.  In 
welchen  Landern  waren  Sie?  3.  Wie  heifit  die  Hauptstadt  des 
Deutschen  Reiches?  4.  Wie  nennt  man  die  HauptstraBe  Ber- 
lins? 5.  Weshalb?  6.  Wo  liegt  der  Weg  ftir  FuBganger? 
7.  Wo  steht  das  konigliche  SchloB?  8.  Wer  wohnt  darin? 
9.  Wie  kommt  man  aus  dem  Tiergarten  in  die  HauptstraBe? 


122  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  134 

10.  Sind   Sie    gestern    an    der    Universitat    vorbeigegangen  ? 

11.  Wie  viele  Studenten  hat  die  Universitat?  12.  Studieren 
auch  Auslander  auf  der  Universitat?  13.  Zum  Andenken  an 
wen  ist  das  National-Denkmal?  14.  Wostehtes?  15.  Wohin 
fuhrt  diese  schone  Briicke?     16.   Wo  liegt  der  Lustgarten? 

C  I.  I  was  standing  between  my  two  (beibe)  friends. 
2.  He  did  that  exercise  a  month  ago.  3.  Put  (ftelten)  my 
chair  in  front  of  the  door.  4.  Don't  put  your  hands  into  your 
pockets.  5.  Let  us  put  (ftecfen)  the  letter  under  the  door. 
6.  We  can  see  clouds  above  the  hills.  7.  They  went  past  me 
on  the  street.     8.  Let  the  coachman  drive  behind  the  palace. 

9.  Let  us  go  to  the  market.  10.  They  will  come  in  the  even- 
ing.    II.  We  are  sitting  at  the  table. 

D,  I.  I  spent  six  months  in  Berlin  last  year.  2.  I  was 
studying  at  the  University.  3.  Accordingly  I  know  this  city 
very  well.  4.  It  is  situated  on  the  Spree.  5.  The  Spree  flows 
(fttefet)  into  the  Havel  (/.).  6.  The  main  street  of  Berlin  is  called 
Unter  den  Linden.  7.  It  is  celebrated  among  the  streets  of 
great  capitals.  8.  The  royal  palace  is  at  the  eastern  end  of  the 
street.     9.  At  the  western  end  stands  the  Brandenburg  Gate. 

10.  I  used  to  go  past  the  palace  every  day  on  the  way  to  the 
university.  11.  Among  the  celebrated  buildings  in  this  street 
is  the  Berlin  University.  12.  The  University  has  now  more 
than  3000  students.  13.  Among  these  are  several  hundred 
women.  14.  In  the  middle  of  the  street  [there]  are  four 
rows  of  lindens.  ^15.  One  can  sit  on  the  benches  under  these 
trees.  16.  The  middle  of  the  street  is  only  for  pedestrians. 
1 7.  A  fine  park  is  situated  in  front  of  the  royal  palace.  18.  Be- 
tween the  palace  and  an  arm  of  the  river  stands  a  monument 
in  memory  of  the  first  German  Emperor.  19.  From  the  palace 
you  (man)  go  over  a  bridge  which  leads  into  the  main  street. 

E.  Sefeftitcf: 

Serene  gtebe  bt^  jutn  ®rabe 
®(^tt)or'  t(^  bir  mit  §erj  unb  ©anb, 


§  136]  LESSON  XXXIII  123 

2Ba^  xi)  bin  unb  ma^  t^  ^abe 
!J)anf  ic^  bit,  mein  9SaterIanb ! 

3liii)t  in  SBorten  nur  unb  ?tebern 
3^ft  ntein  ^erj  gum  T)an!  bereit ; 
Mxt  ber  Jat  h)itl  ic^'^  ermibern 
©ir  in  9?ot,  in  ®ant|3f  unb  (Streit 

3^n  ber  greube,  tt)ie  im  8eibe, 
SRuf  i(^'^  greunb  unb  geinben  ?u : 
©mig  finb  t)ereint  n)ir  beibe 
Unb  mein  Stroft^  mein  @IM  bift  bu- 

—  Hoffmann  Don  gattcr«(cbcn. 


LESSON  XXXIII 

JV.B.  Before  studying  this  and  the  following  lessons,  review  carefully 
the  verb  paradigms  of  previous  lessons,  and  remember  that  the  compound 
tenses  of  all  verbs  are  formed  with  either  l^aben  or  fcitt  (§  62)  as  auxiliary. 

135.  Verb  Stems. 

madden  rcd^nen  tabetn 

rcben  ruber  n  fmgen 

Observe  :  The  stem  of  a  verb  is  what  is  left  when  the  end- 
ing -ctt  or  -tt  is  dropped  from  the  infinitive. 

136. 

Infin. 

Weak  Verb :    mac^en 
Strong  Verb:  fiugen 

Observe:  From  the  principal  parts  may  be  inferred  the 
various  forms  of  the  stem,  which  is  regularly  changeable  only  in 
strong  verbs. 


Principal  Parts. 

Imp/,  Indie. 

Past  Part 

mac^te 
fang 

flcmac^t 
gcfungctt 

124  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  137 

137.  Special  Forms  of  Weak  Verbs. 

1.  3feben,  'speak' :  reben,  rebete,  gerebet. 

Present  Indicative. 
\i)  rebe  tt)ir  reben 

burebeft  i^r  rebct 

er  rebct  fie  reben 

Observe  :  Verb  stems  ending  in  -b,  -t  {e.g.  reben,  arbetten), 
or  in  any  combination  of  consonants  after  which  -t  or  -ft  can- 
not be  pronounced  {e.g.  atmen,  rei^nen),  retain  c  of  the  ending 
throughout. 

2.  2^abetn,  'blame' :  tabein,  tabette,  getabett. 
®en)nnbern,   'admire':    ben^nnbern,    ben^nnberte,    be^ 

n)nnbert. 

Present  Indicative.  Imperative, 

\i)  table  n)tr  tabein  tabefn  tt)tr 

butabelft         if)r  tabelt  table         tabett 

er  tabelt         jie  tabetn  er  table        tabefn  fie 

Present  Indicative. 
ic^  betDunbere  \m  bett)unbern 

bu  bett)unberft  i^r  betDunbert 

er  betDunbert  fie  betDunbern    • 

Observe  :  Verb  stems  in  -t\  drop  e  of  the  stem  in  the  first 
singular  present  indicative,  and  in  the  second  and  third  singu- 
lar imperative ;  verb  stems  in  -c(  and  -er  drop  c  of  the  ending 
-en. 

Note.  —  Stems  in  -c(  drop  C  of  the  stem  in  the  pres.  subj. 

3.  Slanjen, '  dance  ' ;  reifen, '  travel.' 

Pres.  Indie,  bu  tanjcft,  bn  retfcft. 

Observe  :  Verb  stems  in  a  sibilant  {^^  fr^,  \^  j^  5)  insert  c  in 
the  ending  of  the  second  singular,  but  these  forms  are  usually 
spoken  and  often  written  bU  tanjt,  bn  reift,  2C. 


§138] 

LESSON   XXXIII 

138. 

Irregular 

Weak  Verbs. 

Infin, 

Imp/.  Indie. 

Imp/,  Subj, 

Past  Part 

brennen,  burn. 

branute 

brennte 

gebrannt 

fennen,  know. 

fannte 

fennte 

getannt 

nentien,  name. 

nannte 

nennte 

genannt 

rennen,  run. 

rannte 

rennte 

gerannt 

fenben,  send. 

fanbte    1 
fenbete  j 

fenbete 

gefanbt 
gefenbet  , 

iDcnbeti,  turn. 

njanbte  1 
n)enbetej 

tDenbete 

geiDanbt  " 
getDenbet. 

bringen,  bring. 

bra^te 

brac^te 

gebra^t 

benfen,  think. 

ba^te 

bac^te 

geba^t 

125 


Observe  :  i.  The  change  of  the  stem  vowel  to  a  in  the  imper- 
fect indicative  and  past  participle. 

2.  Except  in  the  last  two  verbs,  the  imperfect  subjunctive 
has  the  same  stem  vowel  as  the  infinitive.      • 

3.  The  shorter  forms  of  fenben  and  tDenben  are  more  usual. 

4.  The  last  two  verbs  have  also  a  consonant  change,   and 
umlaut  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive. 

5.  Otherwise  these  verbs  are  conjugated  regularly. 


EXERCISE  XXXIII 


bte  9lbfi(^t^  -en,  intention. 
begriiBen,  to  greet, 
befannt,  well-known, 
einfteden,  to  pocket, 
ent^alten,  ent{)ielt,  ent^alten, 

to  contain. 
erfUKen,  to  fulfill, 
erfennen,  to  recognize. 
ertDibern,  to  reply, 
folgen  (f.,  dat,),  to  follow, 
freunbtid},  friendly,  kind. 


fUHen,  to  fill. 

bte  ®abe,  -n,  gift,  present. 

ba^  ©etbftiid,  -(e)^,  -e^-coin. 

geit)t^,  certain. 

bie  §anbarbeit,  -en,  needle- 
work, knitting,  etc. 

bte  ^erjen^gitte,  kindliness. 

^^talien,  «.,  -^,  Italy. 

iebermann,  -^,  everybody, 
every  one. 

bie  Sonigin,  -nen,  queen. 


126  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§138 

Idt^eln,  to  smile.  ber  ©trutnpf ,  -e^,  ^e,  stocking, 

bie  aJJajeftci't,  -en,  majesty.  tabein,  to  blame, 

reben,  to  speak,  talk.  bie  Ztdm,  -n,  tear, 

fetben,  silken,  (of)  silk.  tjerbrentten,  to  burn  (/r.). 

©ignora,  madam.  iDegen  (g^n.),  on  account  of. 

ftricJen,  to  knit.  iDegne^men,  to  take  away. 

Idiom  :   ^a§  ift  Ott^  i^m  gcttlorbCtt  ?     What  has  become  of  him? 

A.  ®te  f  5nigtn  §e(ena  t)OTi  -Statieti  ift  tDegen  t^rer  §er^ 
gen^gixte  iiberalf  befannt.  ©ie  bentt  immer  an  bie  3lrmen  nnb 
UngtUdlii^en.  ^ebermann  bett)unbert  btefe  foniglic^e  gran, 
eine^  Staged  mad)te  Qijvt  Wlait]tat  einen  S^ajiergang  im 
^ar!.  Sort  begegnete  i^r  ein  Heine^  ajJcibrfien.  ©ie  Sdntgin 
begrit^te  ba^  aKab(^en  frennbUc^  nnb  fragte:  ^SBa^  fitr  §anb^ 
arbeit  fannft  bn  nta^en?''  ,,^6)  fann  (Striimpfe  ftriden/'  er^ 
iDiberte  bie  ®(eine.  ,,Sennft  t>n  mid),  tleine?''  fragte  bie 
Sonigin  Icic^elnb. '  ,r®en)i^,  ©ignora,  t(^  f)abe  ®ie  fofort  er== 
fannt;  ®te  finb  bie  Sonigin/^  ©ie  Sonigtn  fagte,  bie  Sleine 
foHe  i^r  ein  "ipaar  ©tritmpfe  ftricfen  nnb  fie  anf^  ©(^(o^ 
bringen.  9?a^  eintgen  3:agen  ttinrben  i^r  bie  ©tritmpfe  ge- 
bra(^t.  !3)te  ^dnigin  bac^te,  bent  ®tnbe  etne  gro^e  grenbe  jn 
maiden  nnb  fanbte  it)ni  ein  ^aar  feibene  ©tritnt|)fe,  fon)te  einen 
S3rief.  S)er  eine  bation  trar  mit  :93onbon^  geflitit ;  ber  anbere 
entf)ielt  me^rere  Oelbftitcfe.  ®en  na^ften  S^ag  bracftte  ba^ 
aJJabc^en  folgenben  «rief  anf^  ©cfilo^:  „Q\^vt  ®abe,  (gignora, 
l)at  mid)  t)iele  Strdnen  gefoftet.  ©a^  ®elb  ^at  mein  aSater 
eingeftedt;  bie  Sonbon^  ^t  mein  -93rnber  gegeffen;  bie 
©trnm^jfe  ^at  meine  3}?ntter  mtr  iDeggenommen  nnb  ben  ©rief 
l^at  man  Derbrannt.''  3lIfo  fann  man  fe^en,  ba^  gnte  3lbfic^ten 
ni^t  immer  erfitllt  n)erben. 

B,  Continue:  i.  Qi)  table  ben  3'nngen,  n)etf  er  bie  ^on^ 
bon^  gegeffen  t)at,  bn,  2c.  2.  3<d)  bemnnbere  bie  ^erjen^* 
giite  ber  tdnigin.    3.  3JJein  Onfel  fragt,  ob  tc^  gem  reife, 


§138]  LESSON   XXXIII  127 

.  .  .  ob  bu,  ic.  4.  Q6)  rebe  Die!  ton  metner  9Jetfe,  bu  ,  *  . 
Don  betner,  ic,  5.  3^^  erfannte  ba^  Sinb  fogletc^,  6.  3=ci^ 
fanbte  einen  Srief  auf^  ®dt)(o^, 

C,  Oral:  i.  Was  wird  hier  von  guten  Absichten  gesagt? 
2.  Bewundern  Sie  die  gute  Konigin?  3.  Wie  heifit  sie? 
4.  Warum  ist  sie  bekannt?  5.  Kannte  Ihre  Majestat  das 
kleine  Madchen?  6.  Wer  strickte  die  Striimpfe?  7.  Was  tat 
es  nachher?  8.  Weshalb  sandte  Ihre  Majestat  dem  Madchen 
die  Striimpfe?  9.  Wohin  wurde  der  Brief  gebracht ?  10.  Was 
stand  darin  geschrieben?  11.  Weshalb  tadeln  Sie  den  Vater? 
12.  Weshalb  tadelte  das  Kind  seinen  Bruder?  13.  Was  ward 
aus  den  Bonbons?     14.  Was  ward  aus  dem  Briefe? 

Z>.  I.  I  am  a  poor  Italian  girl.  2.  One  day  I  was  taking  a 
walk  in  the  park.  3.  I  met  a  beautiful  lady  who  greeted 
me.  4.  I  recognized  her  at  once.  5.  Everybody  knows  (the) 
Queen  Helena.  6.  Her  kindliness  is  [well-]known  in  Italy, 
as  also  in  other  countries.      7.    She  asked  me  if  I  knew  her. 

8.  She  asked  me  also  where   my  father  and  mother  lived. 

9.  Finally   she    said,    smiling:    "Can   you   knit   stockings?" 

10.  "Certainly,  signora,  I  often  knit  stockings."  11.  Then 
she  bowed  to  me  and  went  on  (tt)eiter).  12.  I  knitted  her 
a  pair  of  stockings  at  once,  and  sent  them  to  her.  13.  The  next 
day  a  servant  of  the  queen  brought  me  a  pair  of  silk  stockings, 
which  she  had  sent  me.  14.  He  also  brought  me  candies  and 
several  pieces  of  money.  15.  The  queen  thought  I  should  be 
very  happy.  16.  But  good  intentions  are  not  always  fulfilled. 
1 7.  The  letter  was  burnt,  and  the  candies  were  eaten  by  my 
brother.  18.  My  father  pocketed  the  money,  and  the  stockings 
were  sold  by  my  mother. 

E.  Lesestlick :  Als  Charles  Lamb  im  "  India-House  "  war, 
sagte  ein  Vorgesetzter  eines  Morgens  zu  ihm  :  "Herr  Lamb, 
ich  habe  bemerkt,  daB  Sie  jeden  Morgen  sehr  spat  ins  Bureau 
kommen."  "Das  gebe  ich  zu,"  erwiderte  der  Dichter,  "ver- 
gessen  Sie  aber  nicht,  dafi  ich  jeden  Nachmittag  sehr  friih 
fortgehe." 


128 


GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


[§139 


139. 


LESSON  XXXIV 
Declension  of  Personal  Pronouns. 


First  Person. 

Second  Person. 

Sing. 

N. 

%I. 

bu,  thou. 

G, 

tneitter,  of  me. 

beiner^  of  thee. 

D. 

mir,  (to,  for)  me. 

bir,  (to,  for)  thee. 

A. 

mid),  me. 

bi(^,  thee. 

Flur. 

N, 

tt)ir,  we. 

i^r,  ye,  you. 

G. 

unf  er,  of  us. 

euer,  of  you. 

D, 

un^,  (to,  for)  us. 

eu(^,  (to,  for)  you. 

A. 

un^,  us. 

Third  Person. 
Singular, 

eu(^,  you. 

• 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N, 

er,  he. 

fie,  she. 

e^,  it. 

G. 

fetner, 

of  him.            t^rer,  of  her. 

f  einer,  of  its. 

£>. 

i^m,  (to,  for)  him.       i^r,  (to,  for)  1 

her.       i^tn,  (to,  for)  it. 

A. 

i^n,  him. 

fie,  her. 

e^,  it. 

PluraL 
N.   fie,  they. 
G.  t^rer,  of  them. 
D,  i^nen,  (to,  for)  them. 
A.   fie,  them. 
Notes. —  i.  In  poetical  and  archaic  language,  the  following  forms  of 
the  genitive  are  found :  meiu,  bein,  fein,  i^r,  unfrer,  eurer. 

2.  The  gen.  and  dat.  of  the  3rd  sing.  neut.  do  not  occur,  except  when 
referring  to  persons  {e.g.  SHabc^en,  SRannlein,  etc.). 

3.  ^CffCtt    (gen.  of  \i^^^  replaces  the  neut.  gen.  feinet,  referring   to 
things :   3(^  erinitere  mid^  beffen  niC^t,  *  I  don't  remember  it.' 

4.  For  the  use  of  ba  before  preps,  instead  of  pers.  prons.  of  3rd  pers., 
see  §  85. 

140.   Agreement.     The  pronouns  of  the  third  singular  must 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  refer. 

Note.  —  grSuIctn,  '  young  lady,*  requires  the  fem.  pron.  ftc  (as  also  the 
fem.  poss.). 


§142]  LESSON   XXXIV  129 

141.  Pronouns  of  Address. 

2Bie  ge^t  e^  bit,  2^ante?  How  are  you,  aunt? 

^ift  bu  e^,  Itekr  greunb?  Is  it  you,  dear  friend? 

SBa^  mac^t  i^r,  ^inber  ?  What  are  you  doing,  children  ? 

2Ba^mac^ftbu,mein§imbc^en?  What  are  you  doing,  doggie? 

@Ott,  ic^  ertenne  ^X^  I  I  acknowledge  thee,  O  God  ! 

3Bie  ge^t  e^  Stin^Wf  ®^^^  ®-  How  are  you,  Mr.  S.? 

Observe  :  i.  'J)u  is  used  in  familiar  address,  as  to  a  near 
relative,  an  intimate  friend,  a  child,  an  animal. 

2.  ^tt  is  used  in  exalted  or  archaic  language,  as  in  address- 
ing the  Supreme  Being,  and  in  poetry ;  also  in  fables  and  fairy 
tales. 

3.  ^^v  (plur.  of  bu)  is  used  in  addressing  a  number  of  per- 
sons, each  of  whom  would  be  addressed  by  bu» 

4.  In  all  other  cases  ^you,'  whether  singular  or  plural,  is 
expressed  by  Sie  (.^^rer,  3"^^^^^  ©i^)r  the  pronoun  of  formal 
address,  the  verb  agreeing  in  the  third  plural. 

Notes.  —  i.  All  pronouns  of  address,  as  well  as  the  corresponding  poss, 
adjs.,  are  spelled  with  capitals  in  writing  a  letter. 

2.  ^Xf  (Bic  (3rd  sing,  fern.),  ^^t  (2nd  plur.)  are  used  in  archaic  and 
rustic  speech  as  prons.  of  address. 

142.  Impersonal  Verbs. 

•  g^  f riert  (f  df^neit,  regnet)*  It  is  freezing  (snowing,  raining). 

SSBie  ge^t'^  bir?  How  are  you? 

9Ba^  gibt'^?  What's  the  matter? 

@^  ift  (tut)  mir  teib.  I  am  sorry. 

3)ii(^  ^ungert  (f riert).  I  am  hungry  (cold). 

&  fagte,  ba^  tt)n  ^UUgere.  He  said  he  was  hungry. 

Observe  :  i.  Impersonal  verbs  are  used  only  in  the  third 
singular  with  t^  as  subject. 

2.  Many  verbs  are  used  impersonally  with  a  special  sense. 

3.  Those  denoting  bodily  or  mental  affection  drop  t^  if  the 
object  precedes  the  verb  of  a  principal  sentence,  and  also  in 
dependent  sentences. 


130  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  143 

143.  Idiomatic  Uses  of  t^^  1.  (&2  is  often  placed  before 
a  verb  (especially  feitt)  to  represent  the  real  subject,  which 
follows  the  verb,  and  with  which  the  verb  agrees ;  thus  used 
it  frequently  =  '  there  ' : 

aSBertfte^?   e^  tft  bte  STante.  Who  is  it?    It  is  aunt. 

(g^  tDaren  metne  33ettern.  It  was  my  cousins. 

a^  IeU(J)ten  bie  Sterne.  The  stars  are  shining. 

a^  ift  eitl  93oget  tm  Scifig.  There  is  a  bird  in  the  cage. 

a^  tiegen  :©ii(^er  ^ier.  There  are  books  lying  here. 

2.  When,  however,  indefinite  existence  is  expressed,  or  when 
the  assertion  is  general,  '  there  is,'  '  there  were,'  etc.,  must  be 
rendered  by  c^  gibt,  e^  gab,  2C.,  and  the  English  subject  be- 
comes the  direct  object  (ace.)  in  German": 

(£^  gibt  eintge  SSogel,  bie  nic^t  There  ar^  some  birds  which 
fingen.  do  not  sing. 

ge^te^  Qai^V  gab  e^  t)tete  There  were  a  great  many 
^irnen.  pears  last  year. 

@^  gibt  nut  einen  ©oetl^e.  There  is  only  one  Goethe. 

3.  With  fein, '  to  be,'  when  the  real  subject  is  a  personal  pro- 
noun, the  English  order  is  inverted,  and  the  verb  agrees  with 
the  real  subject : 

Qii)  bin  e^ ;  bu  bift  t^,  :c.  It  is  I ;  it  is  you,  etc. 

@inb  ®ie  t^?  Is  it  you? 

4.  After  a  verb,  t^  often  represents  a  predicate  or  clause, 
and  corresponds  to  the  English  '  one,'  or  *  so  ' : 

3fter3lr5t?  Is  he  a  doctor? 

Qa,  er  ift  e^.  Yes,  he  is  (one). 

53ift  bu  frei?     ^t^  bin  t^.  Are  you  free?     I  am  (so). 

SBir  iDoHen  fomtnen  Utib  i^r  We  will  come,  and  you  shall 
follt  c^  aud).  (do  so)  too. 


§  143]  LESSON   XXXrV  131 


EXERCISE   XXXIV. 

aCerbi'ng^,  certainly,  indeed.  I^erettl !  come  in  ! 

be^ifflic^,  helpful,  of.  assistance.  Jebeqeit,  always, 

ber  Seruf,  -(0^/  -^t  calling,  flopfen,  to  knock. 

profession.  Ttdttg,  necessary,  needful, 

bitten,  bat,  gebeten,  to  beg,  ber  9ff at, -(e)^/ advice. 

ask.  raten,  rtet,  geraten,  to  advise, 

banfbar,  thankful.  ber  Umftanb,   -e^,   "e,    cir- 

betttl  iadv^y  then.  cumstance. 

erm5glt(^en,  to  make  possible.  t)erbtenen,  to  earn, 

bte  ga^igfeit,  -en,  capacity.  t)orjtef)en,  to  prefer, 

freuen,  to  gladden ;  e^  freut  iDci^ten,  to  choose,  select. 

mi^,  I  am  glad.  ba^  ^utrauen,  -^,  trust,  con- 

gebenfen  {gen,)^  to  be  mindful  of.  fidence. 

Idioms;  i.  2Ste  gel^t  t^  ^Ijucn?     How  are  you? 

2.  ^^  hxn  miibC.  —  ^C^  Osxn  t^)  audi,  I  am  tired.  —  So  am  I. 

A.  2c^m.  @^  Kopft;  ^erein!  «ift  bn  e^,  ^Robert? 
IRobert.  ^a,  x6)  bin  e6,  §err  ?e^rer.  S.  g^  freut  nttt^,  bt(J) 
gu  fe^en,  Sfobert;  xoa^  gibt  e^  benn?  JR-  ^6)  n)oI(te@ie  bit^ 
ten,  mtr  etnen  guten  SRai  ju  geben.  ©^  ift  ^o^e  3^tt,  ba^  i^ 
einen  Seruf  xo'cdjit,  benn  x6)  bin  fcf)on  fei^je^n  3=at)re  alt. 
fi»  SBarum  gtaubft  bu  benn,  ba§  id)  btr  in  biefer  ©ai^e  raten 
fann?  %.  g^  ift  niemanb,  ber  meine  Untftcinbe  unb  nteine 
gaf)tg!etten  fo  gut  fennt,  iDie  ®te.  fi.  g^  freut  mid),  ba^  bu 
fo  t)tef  3utrauen  gu  mtr  ^ft.  9Bef(^en  Seruf  n)itrbeft  bu  dor* 
gie^en?  !R.  ^i)  mitrbe  ba^  ©tubium  ber  SJJebtjin  t)or5tef)en, 
abere^fe^fen  mtr  bte  9)?tttet  ba^u.  fi.  ®a^  ift  allerbing^ 
ein  foftfpielige^  ©tubium,  aber  anbere  finb  e^  and).  §eutgu== 
tage  gibt  e^  aber  t^iele  ©elegen^eiten,  ba^  notige  ©etb  ju  Der* 
btenen.  OfJ.  J)a^  miirbe  e^  mir  t)iel(ei(^t  ermogtidjen,  ^rjt  ju 
iDerben;  id)  ^be  e^  mtr  fange  gett)itnfc^t.  2-  (S(^5n;  e^  tt)irb 
mid)  ieberjeit  freuen,  bir  in  biefer  ^kai^t  bef)ilflid^  ju  fein. 
9(1.  3d)  I^ii^  -3^nen  fe^r  banfbar  bafiir,  ba^  ®ie  meiner  fo 
freunblid)  geben!en. 


132  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  .       [§  143 

• 

B,  Oral:  i.  Hat  es  geklopft  ?  2.  Wer  war  da  ?  3.  War 
es  Robert  oder  sein  Bruder  ?  4.  1st  es  schwer,  einen  Beruf  zu 
wahlen?  5.  Was  sagte  Robert  dariiber  ?  6.  Freute  es  den 
Lehrer,  seinem  Schiiler  zu  helfen  ?  7.  Wird  der  Lehrer  immer 
dieses  Jungen  gedenken  ?  8.  1st  Roberts  Vater  Arzt  ? 
9.  Willst  du  auch  Arzt  werden  ?  10.  Fehlen  dir  die  Mittel 
dazu?  II.  Wird  es  Robert  moglich  sein,  Arzt  zu  werden? 
12.  Wollen  Sie  mir  einen  guten  Rat  geben  ? 

C,  I.  There  is  a  book  lying  on  the  table.  2.  There  are  six 
chairs  in  this  room.  3.  How  are  you  to-day,  dear  friends? 
4.  How  are  you  to-day,  Mr.  Aue?  5.  I  am  always  glad  to  see 
you.  6.  I  am  unhappy ;  so  am  I ;  f>o  are  we.  7.  We  praise 
Thee,  O  God  !  Thou  art  always  mindful  of  us.  8.  Was  it  you, 
dear  aunt?  I  didn't  think  it  was  you.  9.  Sing,  little  birds, 
sing.  10.  Do  you  hear  me,  dog?  11.  Is  Mr.  Aue  very  cele- 
brated? He  is.  12.  There  are  always  enough  doctors,  but 
there  are  never  enough  good  ones. 

D,  I.  Robert's  teacher,  Mr.  Aue,  was  sitting  at  the  table. 
2.  There  was  a  knock  [at  the  door].  3.  "Who  is  there? 
Come  in,"  said  he.  4.  It  was  one  of  his  pupils.  5.  "I 
am  glad  to  see  you,  my  boy;  what  can  I  do  for  you?" 
6.  "  You  can  perhaps  give  me  (a)  good  advice,  Mr.  Aue.  7.  I 
must  choose  a  profession ;  it  is  high  time  now,  for  I  am  over 
sixteen  years  old."  8.  Mr.  A.  asked  him  what  profession  he 
preferred.  9.  "I  prefer  the  study  of  medicine,"  repHed  the 
boy,  "but  I  haven't  the  means."  10.  "It  is  an  expensive 
study,  to  be  sure,  but  so  are  others.  1 1 .  But  there  are  many 
opportunities  to  earn  money  nowadays."  12.  "  Perhaps  it  will 
be  possible,"  replied  Robert.  13.  "  My  father  was  a  doctor, 
and  I  mean  to  become  one  also,  if  I  can.  14.  It  is  a  noble 
calling."     15.  His  teacher  said  he  would  help  him. 

E,  Lesesttick :  Ein  Pfarrer  in  Schottland  fiel  eines  Abends 
in  ein  tiefes  Loch  und.  rief  um  Hilfe.  Ein  vorbeigehender 
Arbeiter  horte  ihn  rufen  und  fragte,  wer  es  sei.     Der  Pfarrer 


§  145] 


LESSON  XXXV 


133 


nannte  seinen  Namen,  worauf  der  Arbeiter  erwiderte  :  "  Na ! 
Regen  Sie  sich  nicht  unnotig  auf;  Sie  haben  bis  nachsten 
Sonntag  Zeit  und  heute  ist  erst  Mittwoch." 


144. 


LESSON  XXXV 
The  Strong  Conjugation. 


Prin,  Parts :  bleibetl,  remain. 

blteb 

geblteben 

fittgen,  sing. 

fang 

gefungen 

frteren,  freeze. 

fror 

gefroren 

Observe  :  Strong  verbs  form  the  imperfect  indicative  by  a 
change  of  stem  vowel,  without  adding  a  tense  ending ;  for  the 
past  participle  see  §  119. 

Note.  —  Remember  that,  apart  from  the  lack  of  tense  ending  in  the 
imperfect  indicative  and  subjunctive,  the  simple  tenses  of  strong  verbs  have 
the  same  endings  as  those  of  madden,  and  that  their  compound  tenses  are 
formed  exactly  like  those  of  weak  verbs. 


145. 


Vowel  Changes  of  Present  Stem. 


©pred^en,  speak. 

©tel^ten,  steal. 

gaCeti,  fall. 

Pres,  Indie, 

Pres,  Indie, 

Pres,  Indie, 

\i)    fprei^e 

t(^   ftefjle 

\^   fatte 

bu   f<)ri^ft 

bu  ftte^Ift 

bu  fSttft 

er    fprid^t 

er    ftie^tt 

er    fStrt 

mtr  fpred^eti 

tt)tr  fte{)tett 

n)tr  falteu 

i^r  fpred^t 

i^r  fte^rt 

t{)r  faltt 

fie  fpre^en 

fie   fte^Ieu 

fie   fatten 

Imperative, 

Imperative, 

Imperative, 

fprit^ 

fttefjl 

fatte 

er    fpret^e 

er    fte^te 

er    fatte 

fpredjen  it)tr 

fte^Ien  xm 

fatten  n)tr 

fprec^t 

Mm 

fattt 

fpre^en  fie 

ftet)(eu  fie 

fatten  fie 

134 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[f  146 


Observe:  i.  Many  strong  verbs  change  short  e  of  the  in- 
finitive stem  vowel  to  if  and  long  c  to  ic,  in  the  second  and 
third  singular  present  indicative  and  the  second  singular  impera- 
tive, and  also  drop  -c  of  the  latter. 

2.  Some  strong  verbs  with  a,  0,  of  the  infinitive  stem  take 
umlaut  in  the  second  and  third  singular  of  the  present  indica- 
tive, but  not  in  the  imperative. 

3.  Hence  the  principal  parts  of  such  verbs  are  as  follows  : 

In/in,    Impf.  Ind.    Past  Pari.    2  Sg.,  3  Sg,  Pr,  Ind,    Impve, 


geben 

fpred^en 

fef)en 

fte^Ieti 

fallen 

fdjiagen 


gab 
fprac^ 

\m 

fiel 
f(f)Iug 


gegebett 

gefproc^eti 

gefel^eti 

gefto^Ien 

gefafien 

gefc^Iagen 


gtbft,  gtbt 
fprt(f)ft,  fprt(f)t 
fte^ft,  fie^t 
ftie^Ift,  ftie^It 
fallft,  fadt 
fc^Iagft,  f(^Idgt 


gib 

fprttfi 

fie^ 

ftief)f 

fatle 

f(i)Iage 


Note.  —  The  whole  pres.  indie,  and  impve.-  should  be  practised. 


146. 

-Sittben, 

bind. 
i(f)  bitibe 
bu  bittbeft 
er  bttibct 
tDir  btnben 
i^r  binbct 
fie    binben 


Stems  in  -b,  -t,  2C. 

Present  Indicative, 


Sitten, 
beg. 
bitte 
bttteft 
bittet 

bittet 
bttteti 


gedjten, 
fight, 
fei^te 
ftc^tft 
fi(^t 
fe^ten 
ferf)tet 
fei^ten 


9fatett, 

advise. 

rate 

ratft 

rat   • 

raten 

ratet 

rateti 


©et^en^ 
bite, 
bet^e 
betgt 
betpt 
bei^en 
bet^t 
bei^ett 


Observe:  i.  Stems  in  -ti,  -t,  without  vowel  change  in  the 
present  indicative,  retain  -c  before  -ft,  -t. 

2.  Stems  in  -b,  -t,  with  vowel  change,  drop  -c  of  the  ending 
in  the  second  singular  and  -ct  in  the  third ;  in  other  forms  they 
retain  the  -e  and  -ct* 

3.  Stems  in  sibilants  usually  drop  -ci^  of  the  second  singular. 


.148] 


LESSON   XXXV 


135 


147.  Formation  of  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

t^  UkU         ii)  ffinge         tc^  friire         t^  fcf)Iuge 

Observe  :  The  stem  of  the  imperfect  indicative  regularly 
serves  for  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  but  with  added  umlaut 
when  the  imperfect  stem  vowel  is  a,  o,  or  u. 

Note.  —  In  some  verbs  the  vowel  of  the  impf.  subj.  does  not  correspond 
with  that  of  the  impf.  indie:  ^clfen,  *help,'  l}alf,  imp.  subj.  ^itlfe  ;  some 
have  double  forms:  gett)innen,  *win,'  gctrami,  impf.  subj.  gemdttne  or 
getriituic  ;  such  forms  occur  only  in  Classes  9,  10,  11  (§  148);  see  also 
Alphabetical  List  in  App.  D. 

148.  Classes  of  Strong  Verbs.  For  convenience  of  reference, 
the  principal  strong  verbs  are  arranged  here  in  classes,  accord- 
ing to  their  vowel  changes,  exceptional  forms  and  peculiarities 
being  given  in  the  notes  : 


I.     SBeigctt  Model. 
Far^s :  bei^ett  ^  hx^ 

gIei(J)en,  resemble,     rei^etl/  tear. 


gleiten/  glide. 

greifen/  grasp. 

fneifen/  pinch. 

leiben/  suffer. 

pfeifen/  whistle. 

1  Stem  -^  becomes  ff  after  shortened  vowel  in  the  parts,  unless  final. 
2  After  short  i  stems  -f  and  -t  are  doubled.     ^  Stem  -b  becomes  -U» 


reiten,^  ride. 
fd)Iet(^en,  sneak. 
f(J)Ieifen/  grind. 
frfimetBen/  fling. 


gebtffen  bite 

fi^tteiben,^  cut. 
frf)reiten,^  stride. 
ftretcf)en,  stroke, 
ftreiten/  contend. 
iDcidjen,  yield. 


2.     SBIcibctt  Model. 
Far/s :         bleibeti  blicb 

(lebei^eti,  thrive.        fd)etben,  part. 


letf)ett,  lend, 
meiben,  avoid, 
^reifen,  extol, 
reiben,  rub. 


fc^eineti,  shine. 
fd)retben,  write. 
f(^reten,  scream. 


geblicbett  remain 

fdjlDcigen,  be  silent, 
fteigen,  mount, 
tretbett,  drive, 
treifen,  show. 


136 


GERMAN   GRAMMAR 


[§148 


3.    fjrterctt  Model. 

Parts :         f  rtereti  f  ror 

btegen,  bend.  I^eben/  lift, 

bteten,  offer.  fc^ieben,  push, 

fliegen,  fly.  fc^tt)5ren/  swear, 

flie^en,  flee.  t)erlieren,  lose. 

1  l^ob  or  l^ub.  2  f^ttjor  or  td^iDur. 


gefroren  freeze 

iDdgen,  weigh  (/r.). 
tDtegen,  weigh  (intr.). 
gie^en,'    pull    (/r.), 
move  (intr.), 

8; 


4.     S^ic^cn  Model. 

erf(f)al(en,  resound,  frtei^en,  creep, 

flie^en/  flow.  rierfjen,  smell, 

gente^en/  enjoy.  faufen,^  drink 
gte^en/  pour.  (of  beasts). 

1  Consonant  changes  of  stem  as  in  bct^Ctt  model 
2  and  3  sing.  pres.  indie,  fdufft;  jduft. 


'mf  9qogcn. 


gef(^o[fen  shoot 

f(f)Ite§en/  lock, 
triefen/  drip. 
Derbrie^en/  vex. 


Moff,gejoffcn; 


5.     fjcflitctt  Model. 

Farts :       f  e^tetl 

fdi^t     gefo(J)ten 

ft^tft      fi^t     fight 

ertCfd^en,  become 

extinguished. 
fle(f)ten,  weave. 

metfen,  milk, 
quellen,  gush. 

fc^meljen,  melt. 
f^lDellen,  swell. 

6.     effett  Model. 

Farts:         effetl 

ag       gegcffen' 

i^t         t§        eat 

freffen,     eat    (of 

beasts), 
geben,  give. 

tneffen,  measure, 
fi^en/  sit. 

tretett,^  tread. 
t)ergeffen,  forget. 

1  Note  the  inserted  g, 
tritt,  p.  pple.  getretcn. 

►       '  fag,  gefcffen. 

3  Pres.  trittft,  trttt,  impve. 

§  148]  LESSON   XXXV  137 

7.  (Sc^Ctt  Model. 

Parts:      fe^eti      \^\)      gefc^en      ftcl^ft       fte^        see 

bitten,  beg.  Itegen,  lie.  gefc^efjen,  happen, 

lefen,  read.  genefen,^  recover. 

1  Pres.  gcnefcft,  geneft,  impve.  gencfe. 

8.  (S^jrer^en  Model. 

Parts:    fprei^eti  f^Dra^    gefijro^en   fprt^ft   fl^rid^    speak 

fpric^t 

bredien,  break.  ne^meti/  take.          treffen/  hit. 

erfc^reden/  be  ftec^eti,  sting. 

frightened. 

1  Impf.  erjd^rof.  2  na^m,  genommcn,  ntmmjl,  nlmmt,  tiimm. 
8  Impf.  traf. 

9.  ©tcl^lctt  Model. 

/izr/i".-     fte^Ien     [ta^t     geftol^Ien     fttc^tft     ftiefjl     steal 

ftie^It 
befe^Iett;  command.   empfe^Iett,  recommend,  fommett/  come. 
^  !am,  fommft,  fonimt  (rarely  with  umlaut). 

10.  Stinnett  Model. 

Parts:         f^jintiett         f|)ann  gefponnen  spin 

beginnen,  begin.       rtnnen,  flow.  finnen,  think. 

geiDinncn,  win.         frf)tt)tmmen,  swim. 

11.  ^clfctt  Model. 

Parts:  ^elfeti      l^ttlf      ge^otfeti      ^ttfft      l^ilf  help 

mi 

brefd^en/  thresh.  f(^eltett,  scold.        t)erbergen,  hide, 

gelten/be  worth.  fterben,  die.  t)erberben,  spoil. 

n^erben/  become. 
1  Impf.  brafcf)  or  brofd^.  2  impf.  ttjarb  or  trurbe  in  sg.,  pi.  hjurbcn, 

etc.,  only;   pres.  2  sg.  and  3  sg.  ItJirft,  tuirb  ;  impve.  ttJCrbc. 


138  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  148 

12.  Singctt  Model. 

Parts:    fitigen  fang  gefungen  sing 

binben,  bind.  rittgen,  wring.  fpringen,  spring, 

bringen,  press.  |(i)Ung en,  twine;  swallow,  trinfen,  drink, 

finben,  find.  fc^lDtnben,  vanish.  tt)tnben,  wind, 

gelingen,  succeed.  f(^n)tngen,  swing.  gtDingen,  force, 

flingen,  sound.  finfen,  sink. 

13.  8(^(agctt  Model. 

Parts:  fi^Iagen  fd)Iug  gefc^tagen  f(^fag[t  ft^Iage      strike 

fc^ISgt 

baden/  bake.  laben,^  load  ;  invite.  tragen,  carry, 

fasten,  drive.  f(i)affen/  create.  tDad^fen,  grow, 

graben,  dig.  ftel)en/  stand.  n^afdien,  wash. 

1  Impf.  bu!,  or  more  usually  bacfte.  ^  2  sg.  and  3  sg.  Icibft,  Icibt  or 
rabeft,  \^\itX.  ^\^Vi\,  fc^afffc  fdjafft.  *  ftanb  (ftunb,  obsolete), 
geftanben. 

14.  fallen  Model. 

Parts:   faCen      fiet       gefaflen       faKft      faCe         fall 

fallt 

blafen,  blow.  ^angen/  hang.  raten,  advise, 

braten,  roast.  ^anen/  hew.  rnfen,^  call, 

fangen/  catch,  ^et^en,  bid ;  be  called,  fi^fafen,  sleep, 

ge^en/  go,  walk.  laffen,  let.  fto^en,  knock. 

f)alten,  hold.  laufen,  run. 

1  Impf.  fing.  2  gtng,  gcgangen.  ^  i^pf.  {jing,  *  tjieb,  l^aufS 
l)aut.       5  ntffl,  ruft. 

15.  Anomalous  Verbs. 

Parts:    fetn  tt)ar  getpefen  be 

tun  tat  getan  do 


§  148]  LESSON   XXXV  139 


EXERCISE   XXXV 

N.B,  It  is  not  intended  that  the  following  exercise  should  be  com- 
pleted at  this  stage,  but  that  its  various  parts  should  be  used  from  time 
to  time  at  the  discretion  of  the  teacher,  for  drill  in  the  conjugation  of 
strong  verbs.  For  the  vocabulary  of  this  and  following  exercises,  see  end 
of  volume. 

A,  Review  §  148,  i,  and  translate:  i.  As  the  woodcutter 
was  grinding  his  axe,  it  slipped  out  of  his  hand.  2.  When  I 
was  young  I  suffered  much  from  (an,  dat.)  toothache.  3.  Mary- 
has  torn  (jerret^en)  her  new  dress.  4.  The  thief  was  seized 
(ergretfett)  as  he  was  sneaking  into  the  house.  5.  That  bad 
boy  has  pinched  his  httle  brother.  6.  Charles  was  punished 
because  he  whistled  in  school.  7.  The  boys  have  flung  their 
books  on  the  ground.  8.  Two  officers  were  riding  with  the 
emperor  through  the  park.  9.  The  farmers  were  cutting  their 
wheat  last  week. 

B,  Review  §  148,  2,  and  translate:  i.  The  emperor  as- 
cended the  throne  in  the  year  1888.  2.  You  thought  I  was  in 
the  wrong  because  I  was  silent.  3.  Would  you  stay  here  if  I 
staid  with  you  ?  4.  The  poor  girl  screamed  when  the  dog  bit 
her.  5.  Where  are  the  books  which  I  (have)  lent  you?  6.  The 
tree  was  not  thriving,  because  the  soil  was  too  poor.  7.  The 
teacher  has  proved  to  us  that  we  were  wrong.  8.  He  seemed 
to  be  angry  with  (auf,  ace.)  us.  9.  I  staid  at  home  because 
I  was  suffering  from  headache.  10.  The  sheep  were  being 
driven  to  the  pasture.  11.  I  have  already  copied  my  exercises. 
12.  I  hope  I  have  avoided  (t)ermeiben)  all  mistakes  this  time. 

C,  Review  §  148,  3,  and  translate  :  i.  The  birds  have  flown 
into  the  wood.  2.  The  students  have  lost  much  time  this 
winter.  3.  The  witness  swore  that  he  recognized  the  thief. 
4.  The  enemy  fled  when  they  were  attacked.  5.  I  picked  up  a 
book  which  was  lying  on  the  table.  6.  Robert  weighed  more 
a  year  ago  than  he  weighs  now.  7.  I  have  offered  a  thousand 
marks  for  this  picture.     8.  The  children  are  not  dressed  yet. 


I40  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  148 

9.  My  parents  have  (are)  moved  into  another  street.  10.  This 
pen  is  bent;  I  cannot  write  with  it.  11.  I  should  be  sorry  if 
I  lost  this  beautiful  ring. 

D,  Review  §  148,  4,  5,  and  translate:  i.  Has  the  gar- 
dener watered  the  flowers  and  cut  the  grass?  2.  A  river 
swells  when  the  ice  melts.  3.  This  river  is  always  swollen  in 
spring.  4.  This  basket  was  woven  by  a  bhnd  man.  5.  The 
cows  are  already  milked  and  have  been  driven  to  the  pasture. 

6.  The  doors  are  locked ;  I  locked  them  myself.  7.  It  vexed 
me  that  this  pretty  bird  had  been  shot  (use  man).  8.  Have 
you  smelled  those  roses?  They  smell  very  fine.  9.  The  cat 
drank  the  milk  which  I  poured  into  a  cup.  io„  The  dog  has 
(is)  crept  behind  the  stove  because  he  was  *  cold  (f rterett). 
II.  We  have  not  swum  in  the  river,  because  it  was  flowing  so 
fast. 

E,  Review  §  148,  6,  7,  and  translate  :  i.  Have  you  seen  my 
gloves?  2.  Yes;  they  are  lying  on  the  table.  3.  What  has 
happened  to  your  little  sister?  4.  She  stepped  on  a  piece  of 
glass  and  cut  her  foot.  5.  This  happened  in  the  holidays,  and 
she  recovered  very  slowly.     6.  She  has  now  quite  recovered. 

7.  Don't  forget,  my  boy,  that  the  door  is  locked  at  ten.  8.  It 
often  happens  that  the  professor  forgets  his  umbrella.  9.  This 
student  reads  many  books,  but  he  soon  forgets  what  he  has 
read.  10.  The  horse  was  eating  his  oats  in  the  stable,  while 
his  master  was  dining.  11.  Don't  step  on  the  ice,  Robert; 
it  is  very  thin,  the  sun  has  melted  it.  12.  Charles,  please 
give  this  letter  to  your  uncle.  13.  The  stranger  trod  on  my 
foot,  but  at  once  begged  my  pardon.  14.  Please  read 
(t30rlefen)  this  poem  to  me,  Sarah.  15.  The  newspapers  tell 
us  what  is  happening  in  the  world.  16.  See,  my  child,  how 
brightly  the  sun  shines. 

F,  Review  §  148,  8,  9,  and  translate:  i.  One  officer  com- 
mands many  soldiers.  2.  The  officer  commanded  his  soldiers 
to  shoot,  and  they  shot.     3.  Thin  ice  breaks  when  one  treads 


§  148]  LESSON    XXXV  141 

on  it ;  take  care,  child.  4.  The  child  was  frightened  when  it 
saw  the  soldiers.     5.  Speak  louder,  my  boy,  I  cannot  hear  you. 

6.  I  spoke  as  loud  as  I  could.  7.  This  man  speaks  French  and 
German  well.  8.  I  have  often  met  this  gentleman  ;  I  met  him 
yesterday  at  my  brother's.  9.  You  have  taken  my  book,  Mary ; 
take  this  one.  10.  My  watch  was  stolen  from  (au^)  my  room. 
II.  The  doctor  has  recommended  me  to  go  (jteljen)  to  a 
warmer  climate. 

G,  Review  §  148,  10,  11,  and  translate:  i.  That  fruit  is 
bad  (spoiled) ;  throw  it  away,  my  child.  2.  Honor  is  worth 
more  than  life.  3.  This  coin  is  not  current  here.  4.  The  good 
man  repays  evil  with  good.  5.  Why  do  you  scold  us,  dear 
mother?     6.  One  gladly  helps  one  (eitiem)  who  helps  himself. 

7.  This  boy  has  swum  over  the  river.  8.  You  have  reflected  long 
enough.  9.  The  boy  was  ashamed,  and  hid  his  face.  10.  The 
farmer  is  threshing  his  oats  to-day.  11.  The  wheat  is  already 
threshed.  12.  When  did  your  uncle  die?  13.  When  a  good 
king  dies,  the  people  (SSoI!,  n,)  mourn.  14.  My  youngest 
brother  won  a  prize  at  (bei)  the  examination.  15.  One  should 
always  finish  what  one  has  begun. 

H,  Review  §  148,  12,  and  translate  :  i.  Have  you  succeeded 
in  learning  (to  learn)  German?  2.  The  traveler  jumped  from 
his  horse  and  tied  him  to  (atl)  a  tree.  3.  I  have  found  the 
money  I  lost  yesterday.  4.  The  telephone  was  invented  by 
Mr.  Bell.  5.  My  pen  has  disappeared  ;  do  you  know  where  it 
is?  6.  Here  it  is;  I  have  brought  it  to  you.  7.  I  should  be 
much  obliged  to  you  if  you  sang  that  song  again.  8.  The 
women  on  the  shore  screamed  and  wrung  their  hands,  when 
the  boat  sank,  in  which  their  husbands  were  (fid)  befitlben). 
9.  They  were  at  once  swallowed  up  by  the  waves  and  were 
drowned.  10.  I  have  been  forced  to  sell  my  house.  11.  Clara's 
voice  sounded  very  hoarse,  as  she  had  a  cold. 

y.  Review  §  148,  13,  and  translate :  i.  Has  the  clock 
struck   yet?     2.  It  is  just   striking  ten.     3.  This  train  goes 


142  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  149 

very  slowly.  4.  Are  you  invited  (etulaben)  to  the  ball  at  Mrs. 
Braun's?  5.  The  gardener  is  digging  a  large  hole  in  the  gar- 
den. 6.  Yesterday  he  was  digging  (uTUgraben)  a  flower-bed. 
7.  This  tree  is  growing  fast.  8.  It  grew  two  or  three  feet 
last  year,  but  it  bore  no  fruit.  9.  God  created  the  earth  and 
all  that  is  therein. 

K.  Review  §  148,  14,  and  translate  :  i.  The  ship  struck  on 
a  rock  and  sank.  2.  The  wind  was  blowing  violently.  3.  The 
captain  did  not  leave  (tierlaffett)  his  ship  until  it  was  sinking. 
4.  The  child  fell  and  knocked  its  head  on  the  ice.  5.  The 
woodcutter  was  cutting  down  a  big  tree.  6.  What  was  the 
name  of  the  gentleman  whom  we  met  yesterday?  7.  Are  you 
still  asleep,  John?  I  have  called  you  twice.  8.  My  father 
never  lets  me  sleep  later  than  seven  o'clock.  9.  Our  doctor 
advises  me  to  rise  early.  10.  Mine  advised  me  to  rise  late. 
T  I.  My  father's  picture  hangs  over  my  writing-table.  12.  How 
do  you  like  this  town?  13.  When  did  you  begin  (atlfattgen)  to 
learn  German?  14.  This  train  stops  at  all  stations  (©tatiott,/.)- 
15.  If  you  had  run  more  quickly,  you  would  have  won  the 
prize.    16.  Adolf  runs  quicker  than  you. 

LESSON  XXXVI 

149.  Reflexive  Pronouns  and  Verbs. 

©irf|  loben,  to  praise  one's  self.      Sirf|  etttbilben,  to  imagine. 

Pres,  Indie.  Fres.  Indie, 

\&j   lobe    mic^  tc^   bilbe    tnir  ein 

bu   lobft  bic^  bu   bilbeft  btr    ein 

er    lobt    fief)  er    bilbet  fid)  ein 

tt)ir  toben  un^  tr)ir  bilben  un^  ein 

i^r  lobt    end)  i^r  bilbet  eucf)  ein 

fie   toben  \x6)  fie   bilben  fid)  ein 

©ie  toben  fid)  ®ie  btfben  fid)  ein 

Per/.  Indie,  P^rf,  Indie. 

\^  ^abe  mid)  getobt,  :c.        t(^  \)^^t  mir  eingebitbet,  2C.,  2C. 


§  152]  LESSON   XXXVI  143 

Observe  :  i.  The  pronouns  of  the  ist  and  2nd  persons  have 
no  special  form  for  reflexive  action. 

2.  Those  of  the  3rd  person  (including  the  formal  (Sie)  have 
the  form  fid)  for  both  dative  and  accusative  of  all  genders  and 
both  numbers. 

Note.  —  Transitive  verbs  in  English  are  frequently  also  used  intransi- 
tively; such  verbs  are  usually  reflexive  in  German :  S)a§  ^Setter  l)at  fid| 
gednbert, 'The  weather  has  changed';  2)ie  Xiix  offnete  flc^,  *  The  door 
opened.' 

150.  Goverament  of  Reflexives. 

^'C^  f(^amte  mi(^  feiner.  I  was  ashamed  of  him. 

©rbarme  bid)  ber  Slrmett.  Take  pity  on  the  poor, 

^egnugen  ®te  fid)  batntt.  Content  yourself  with  that. 

Qd}  tann  mir  ba^  bentetl-  I  can  imagine  that. 

Observe:  i.  The  reflexive  object  is  usually  in  the  accusa- 
tive, the  remote  object  being  in  the  genitive,  or  governed  by 
a  preposition. 

2.  The  reflexive  object  is  sometimes  in  the  dative  and  the 
remote  object  in  the  accusative. 

151.  Reciprocal  Pronouns. 

@te  tDerben  ftd^  iPieber  fe^en.      They  will  see  each  other  again. 
SBir  begegneten  un^  (^^z.).         We  met  each  other. 
SBir  (ieben  cinanben  We  love  one  another. 

Observe:  Reflexive  pronouns  are  used  in  the  plural  to  ex- 
press reciprocal  action  j  but  in  case  of  ambiguity  einattber  re- 
places them  for  all  persons. 

152.  Emphatic  Pronouns. 

!Du  fag  ft  e^  fclfift  You  say  so  yourself. 

(grfennt  euc^  fcI6cr.  Know  yourselves  (not  others). 

®ct6ft  ber  ?e^rer  fagt  e§.  Even  the  teacher  says  so. 

Observe  :  The  indecHnable  [elbft  or  [etber  is  used  to  em- 
phasize pronouns  and  nouns ;  fetbft  is  also  used  adverbially 
(=au(f)  or  fogar,  *even'),  and  then  precedes.  - 


144  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  152 

EXERCISE   XXXVI 

Idioms:  i.  Jpabeit  Sic  ftri^  gut  ttittcr^altcn?    Did  you  enjoy  your- 
self? 

2.  SSie  })at  3l|ttCtt  t>a^  @ff ctt  gcfrfimcrft?    How  did  you  enjoy 

your  dinner? 

3.  (Bi^  auf  bCtt  2Bcg  ntatf)Ctt,  to  set  out  (on  a  walk,  etc.). 

A.  §eute  ertt)a(^te  ii^  [i^ott  urn  ijalh  fed^^  U^n  3^^  f^anb 
fofort  auf  unb  fteibete  micf)  f(f)nell  an,  benn  t(^  ^atte  befc^Ioffen, 
eitten  ®pa5iergang  ju  mac^en,  9J?utter  riet  mtr,  mid)  iDarm 
an5U5ief)en,  fonft  tDiirbe  i(^  mic^  erfcilten.  ^c^  meinte  aber, 
ba^  fei  nt^t  nottg.  „^u  trrft  bii^,  liebe  S%ra/'  fprad^  fie, 
,,ba^  SBetter  ijat  fi^  geiinbert;  e^  ift  fe^r  fait  getDorben/'  911^ 
ic^  burcf)  ben  ^arf  ging,  begegnete  ic^  meiner  greunbin  6Ife» 
J)a^  n)unberte  mxfi)  nictit,  benn  tt)ir  treffen  nn^  oft  an  btefer 
©telle.  SBtr  begrii^ten  un6  unb  freuten  nn^  itber  btefe^ 
^ufammentreffen,  benn  ©Ife  ^atte  fief)  au(^  5U  einem  frit^en 
®|)a3tergang  entfi^Ioffen.  3tuf  bem  SBege  nnter^ielten  tDir 
nn^  prd(J)ttg.  5yjac^bem  wix  eine  ®tunbe  gegangen  tnaren, 
fe^ten  toxx  un^  auf  eine  ®anf  am  SBege,  um  un^  ein  n^enig 
au^5uru^en.  ©a  e^  aber  anfing  ju  fi^neien,  er^oben  toir  un^ 
balb  unb  mad^ten  un^  auf  ben  §eimn)eg.  Untertreg^  trennten 
tt)ir  un^  unb  i^  fe^rte  atlein  nac^  §aufe  juritd. 

B.  Continue  the  following:  i.  Qii)  faun  mtd^  fefbft  au^ 
fteiben,  bu  .  .  .  bid^,  ic.  2.  Qd)  tDerbe  mi(^  iDarm  anjie^en. 
3.  Qij  ijaht  mi(^  fe^r  barltber  gelDunbert.  4.  -^(^  fonnte 
mt(^  ni(^t  baju  entfc^Iie^en.  5.  SBir  ^aben  un^  oft  ^ier.ge- 
troffen.  6.  Qdj  fc^dme  mi(^  meine^  ^etragen^,  bu  ♦  ♦  ♦ 
beine^,  :c*    7.  Q6)  befanb  mid^  gar  ni^t  mo^f. 

C  Oral:  i.  Wie  geht  es  Ihnen  heute?  2.  Wie  befindet 
sich  Ihr  Herr  Vater?  3.  Glaubst  du,  daB  das  Wetter  sich 
heute  andern  wird?  4.  Haben  die  Kinder  sich  schon  ange- 
kleidet?  5.  Konnen  sie  sich  selbst  anziehen?  6.  Wo  haben 
sich  die  beiden  Freundinnen  getroffen?     7.  Wozu  hatten  sie 


§  152]  LESSON  XXXVI  145 

sich  beide  entschlossen?  8.  Wollen  Sie  sich  nicht  auf  diese 
Bank  setzen?  9.  Hast  du  deine  Aufgabe  nicht  selbst  ge- 
schrieben?     10.  Schamst  du  dich  nicht  deines  Betragens? 

D,  I.  The  weather  has  changed.  2.  We  must  dress  more 
warmly,  if  we  mean  to  go  out.  3.  Otherwise  we  shall  catch 
cold.  4.  I  think  you  are  mistaken ;  the  weather  is  warmer 
now.  5.  I  don't  wonder  at  that.  6.  The  weather  often 
changes  quickly  in  this  country.  7,  Well  (ttUTt),  have  you 
made  up  your  mind  to  take  a  walk?  8.  Certainly;  and  I 
shall  be  glad  to  accompany  you.  9.  We  shall  set  out  at  once. 
10.  Who  is  that  lady  you  bowed  to?  11.  Oh,  that  is  a  friend 
of  my  sister's.  12.  They  know  each  other  very  well.  13.  She 
and  I  always  bow  to  each  other  when  we  meet.  14.  I  am 
tired.  15.  So  am  I.  16.  Sit  down  on  this  bench  and  rest 
a  little.  17.  I  fear  it  will  begin  to  snow  soon.  18.  In  that 
case  we  must  go  home.  19.  I  am  sorry  that  we  must  part 
now,  but  we  have  enjoyed  ourselves  very  much  (gut).  20.  It  is 
to  be  hoped  we  shall  meet  again  this  evening. 

^.  SefeftM: 

^rt^ft  bu  :93 lumen,  fet  6ef^eiben, 
gfjttnm  nt(^t  gar  fo  t)tele  fort ! 
©ie^',  bie  ^(umen  mitffen'^  leiben, 
©ocf|  fie  jieren  il)ren  Drt. 

5Kttnm  eitt  paar  unb  Ia§  bie  attbern 
(gte^n  im  ®ra6  unb  an  bem  ®trauc^ ! 
2lnbre,  bie  t)oriiber  tDanbern, 
greu'n  fid)  an  ben  Slumen  auc^. 

9lad^  btr  fommt  titelletc^t  ein  mliber 
aOSanb'rer,  ber  be^  2Bege^  jte^t 
2^ritben  ®inn^  ;  —  ber  freut  \\&)  wieber, 
SBenn  er  au^  ein  9ti3^Iein  fie^t. 


146 


GERMAN  GRAMMAR 


[§IS3 


LESSON  XXXVII 


153. 

Mixed  Conjugation. 

Lifin. 

Impf.  Indie.       Fast  Part, 

Pres.  Indie,     Meaning, 

miffen 

iru^tc 

gett)ugt 

tDei^              know 

biirfen 

burfte 

geburft 

barf              may 

lonnen 

fonnte 

gefonnt 

fann           can 

mogen 

mo(f)te 

gemoi^t 

mag             may 

miiffen 

mu^te 

gemu^t 

mng           must 

foHen 

foflte 

gefoHt 

foil               shall 

n)oflen 

iDolIte 

getDoIIt 

\M           will 

Observe 

:  The  im] 

perfect  indicative  and  past  participle  have 

the  weak  ei 

idings  -te, 

,  -t,  without  umlaut. 

Note.  —  The  imperative  is  wanting  in  all, 

except  tt)tffen,  tt)iffe,  IZ,,  and 

U)oEett,  tt)oEe, 

,  :c* 

154. 

Present  Indicative. 

\i)  n)et^ 

barf 

!ann       mag 

mn^       foK       iDtH 

bu  trei^t 

barfft 

fannft     mag  ft 

mn^t      fotlft     tDtllft 

er    \^t\% 

barf 

fann       mag 

mu^        foH       trill 

iDtr  tDtffen 

biirfen 

fonnen    mbgen 

miiffen    foHen   tpotlen 

tf)r  iDi^t 

bitrft 

fonnt      mogt 

mix^t       font      iDoIIt 

fie  iDiffen 

biirfen 

fonnen    mogen 

miiffen    foHen   iDoIIen 

Observe 

:    I.   The 

vowel   change 

in   the   singular   (except 

follen)  and  the  absence  of  personal  terminations  in  the  first  and 
third  singular. 

2.  The  plural  is  formed  regularly  from  the  infinitive  stem. 

155.  Subjunctive. 

Pres.  \i)  itiiffe,    bitrfe,    fonne,    moge,    miiffe,    folle,    n)ofle, 

20.  :C.  2C.  2C.  2C.  2C.  2C. 

Impf,  \i)  loit^te,  biirfte,  fonnte,  modE)te,  mit^te,  follte,  iDoItte, 
20.  20.         20.  20.         20.       20.        20. 

Continue  the  paradigm  with  regular  subjunctive  endings. 

Observe  :  The  absence  of  umlaut  in  f  oHte  and  inotlte. 


§  158]  LESSON   XXXVII  147 

156.  Compound  Tenses. 

Perf.  Ind,        \i)  ^abe,    bu  ^aft,  2c.       getDU^t,  geburft,  it. 
Per/.  Subj.       id)  f)abe,    bu  f)abeft,  2C»     geiDu^t,  geburft,  :c. 
Plupf.  I/id,       t(^  ^atte,   bu  ^atteft,  2c.    getDU^t,  geburft,  2c, 
Plupf,  Subj,     x&f  ptte,   bu  I)atteft,  2c.    gett)u^t,  geburft,  :c. 
Put  Jnd,         t^  merbe,  bu  mirft,  zc,      tt)iffeu,   burfeu,  2C. 
7^///.  6'///^/.        t(^  merbe,  bu  i^erbeft,  2C»    tDiffeu,  bitrfen,  :c. 
Put  Perf.  Ind,  \6)  merbe,  bu  xovc]i,  :c,      geiDU^t,  2c.,  ^aben. 
PuUPerf.Subj.  \^  iDcrbe,  bu  merbeft,  :c.    getDU^t,  2c,,  ^aben* 
Simp,  Condi,    i^  tDurbe,  bu  iDUvbcft,  2C.  miffen,   bilrfen,  2c. 
Comp,  CondL  id)  miirbe,  bu  murbeft,  2c.  geit)u^t,  2c,,  {)aben. 
/V;/.  /«/;/.      geiDU^t  f)abeu,  geburft  I)aben,  2c. 

157.  Modal  Auxiliaries.  The  verbs  bitrfeu,  f5unen,  tuogen, 
TUitffen,  foHen,  tnoHeu,  with  the  verb  laffen,  are  called  '  modal 
auxiliaries,'  since  they  form  constructions  equivalent  to  various 
moods  ;  they  all  govern  an  infinitive  without  ju: 

^6)  fauu  lefeu.  I  can  read  {potential), 

^i)  mod)te  ge^en.  I  should  like  to  go  {optative), 

?affeu  @ie  un^  ge^en.  Let  us  go  {imperative), 

158.  General  Remarks  on  Modals.  i.  These  verbs,  unlike 
their  English  equivalents,  have  an  infinitive  and  past  participle, 
and  are  hence  capable  of  forming  a  complete  set  of  tenses : 

^d)  tDerbe  arbeiten  mliffeu.         I  shall  be  obliged  to  work. 
gr  tpirb  ni(^t  tommeu  f  ouneu.     He  will  not  be  able  to  come. 

2.  After  a  governed  infinitive,  in  the  compound  tenses,  the 
past  participle  takes  the  form  of  an  infinitive  : 

Sr  ^at  tttd^t  fpieleu  fBnnen.  He  was  unable  to  play, 

©r  ^at  e^  fd)icfeu  laffen.  He  caused  it  to  be  sent. 

Note.  — The  verbs  l)5rCttand  fcl)Ctt  (and  less  commonly  l)eigen,  ^e(fen, 
Iel)ren,  (crnen,  mad)en)  also  share  this  peculiarity :  3(^  \^Q\it  i^n  fommen 
l)oren  (fet)en),  'I  heard  (saw)  him  come.' 


148  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  I59 

3.  They  may  also  be  used  independently  (without  a  governed 
infinitive),  and  even  as  transitive  verbs,  and  have  then  the  regular 
forms  of  the  past  participle  in  compound  tenses  : 

@r  ^at  Titd^t  flctoottt.  He  was  not  willing. 

Qd)  ijabt  nit  SBeitl  Qtmodft        I  have  never  liked  win&. 

4.  Owing  to  the  defective  conjugation  and  limited  meaning 
of  the  English  modals,  German  modal  constructions  are  vari- 
ously rendered  into  English  (see  next  section  and  §§  174-180). 

5.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  regularly  used  for  the  simple 
conditional : 

Qd)  bitrfte  e^  tun.  I  should  be  allowed  to  do  it. 

Qd)  tndd^te  e^  tun.  I  should  Hke  to  do  it. 

6.  Distinguish  carefully  between  'could'  (='was  able'), 
fonnte  (indie.)  and  'could'  (= 'would  be  able'),  fiintlte 
(condl.) : 

(Sr  !onnte  e^  ntrf)t  tun,  ba  er  He  couldn't  (was  unable  to) 

franf  tDar.  do  it,  as  he  was  ill. 

dx  fSnnte  e6  ni^t  tun,  inenn  He  couldn't  (would  be  unable 

er  and)  iDOttte.  to)  do  it,  even  if  he  would. 

Note.  —  The  infin.  of  a  verb  of  motion  (especially  fomntett,  gcl^en)  is 
often  omitted  after  the  modals  when  an  adverb  or  adverbial  phrase  denot- 
ing *  whither  '  is  present:  ^d)  tt)iE  ^eretn,  *I  wish  to  come  in';  (Sr  fott 
na(^  §aufe,  *  He  is  to  go  home.' 

159.  Primary  Signification  of  Modals.  The  following  para- 
graphs contain  examples  of  the  commoner  uses  of  modals ; 
for  the  construction  of  the  compound  tenses  and  the  more 
idiomatic  distinctions,  see  Lesson  XL : 

1.  S)itrfen  (permission,  concession): 

!j)arf  t(f)  @ie  begteiten?  May  I  accompany  you? 

SBir  biirfen  9?omane  Ie[en.  We  are  allowed  to  read  novels. 

2.  Sbnnen  (abihty,  possibility)  : 

(Sr  fonntc  md)t  f(^n)immen.         He  could  not  swim. 

S5a^  fann  fetn.  That  may  (possibly)  be  so. 

gbnnen  (2te  J)eutfd}?  Do  you  know  German? 


§  i6o]  LESSON    XXXVII  149 

3.  SWogen  (preference,  concession)  : 

(Sr  moc^te  nid)t  arbeiten.  He  did  not  like  to  work. 

@r  mcic^te  (gem)  bleiben.  He  would  like  to  stay. 

gr  mag  bleiben.  He  may  (let  him)  stay. 

4.  SftUffen  (necessity,  obligation)  : 

SBtr  mitffen  atle  fterben.  We  must  all  die. 

SBir  iDerben  irarten  miiffett-        We  shall  have  to  wait. 

5.  @oHen  (obligation,  duty)  : 

Qii)  [ott  tnorgen  abreifen.  I  am  to  start  to-morrow. 

SJa^  [oHten  tDtr  tun?  What  were  we  to  do? 

S)a^  foHte  er  nic^t  tun.  He  ought  not  to  do  that. 

Note.  —  The  obligation  is  that  imposed  by  the  will  of  another. 

6.  SBoIten  (resolution,  intention)  : 

@r  tciir  nxd)t  iDarten.  He  is  unwiUing  to  wait. 

Qd)  n)ill  morgen  fc^reiben.  I  mean  to  write  to-morrow. 

7.  !^affen  (with  imperative  force,  §  117)  : 
?a[fen  ®te  mic^  bleiben.  Let  me  stay. 

160.  English  '  shall '  and  '  will.* 

3cf)  tDcrbc  ertrtnfen  unb  nte==  I  shall  be  drowned,  and  no- 

manb  hitrb  nttc^  retten.  body  will  save  me. 

Qij    tottt   ertrtnfen   unb   nie*  I  will  be  drowned,  and  nobody 

manb  foil  mic^  retten.  shall  save  me. 

Observe:  i.  The  English  'shall*  and  'will'  must  both  be 
rendered  by  tuerben  when  they  express  mere  futurity. 

2.  But  if  they  express  obligation  or  resolution,  they  must  be 
rendered  by  follen  and  tt)oHen  respectively. 

EXERCISE   XXXVII 

A.  Qii  tt)tH  pr  @tabt  fa^ren ;  millft  bu  mtt,  (gmtt?  — 55a« 
moi^te  id)  tt)of)(,  menu  ic^  biirfte,  aber  eigent(t(^  foHte  tc^ 
arbeiten.  3d)  mu^  ben  i^ater  erft  fragen,  ob  ic^  mitfa^ren  barf. 


I50  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  i6o 

—  S)ann  Tniiffen  iDtr  un^  beeilen,  —  @oHen  toxv  5um  ©a^n^of 
ge()en  ober  faf)ren?  — 8a^  un^  lieber  fasten,  fonft  mbc^ten  tDtr 
ben  3^8  t)erfautnen,  — 35a  [inb  it)ir  am  Sa^n^of,  — 8a^  un^ 
je^t  bie  gaf)rfarten  faufen;  e^  tft  ^o^e  ^eit.  — 3l(^,  t(^  mug 
meitt  'iportemonnaie  ju  §aufe  gelaffen  f)aben ;  fonnteft  bu  mir 
ettra^  ®etb  t)orf(^tegen?  — 9JJit  SSergniigen,  aber  ic^  ijaht  nur 
tDentg  bet  mir,  —  ®ann  miiffen  mir  britter  Piaffe  f a^ren,  fonft 
moc^te  e^  ni(f)t  au^rei^en,  — SBeigt  bu  tt)ie  tiiel  ^eit  tDir  in 
ber  @tabt  ^aben? — Uber  brei  ©tunben.  —  S)ann  merben  iDtr 
bem  gupallfpiet  beitro^nen  fonnen,  — ©a^  moc^te  id)  nic^t; 
id}  mag  biefen  ©port  ni(f)t ;  ic^  mo(J)te  tieber  ba^  2JJufeum  be^ 
fuc^en>  —  3l(^ !  xii)  tt)ugte  nic^t,  bag  bu  bi^  fitr  fo  etiDa^  inte^ 
teffierteft,  —  Sir  iDerbenun^  alfo  am  ©at)n^of  trennenmiiffen. 

—  Sann  unb  tDO  folten  irir  un^  mieber  treffen? — Um  5.45 
auf  bem  ^a^n^of,— ®ut ;  alfo  auf  SBieberfe^en ! 

B.  Continue:  i.  Qd)  tt)eig  uxiji,  \va^  ba^  bebeuteu  foIL 
2.  Qd)  rnugte  nxd)t  tna^  id)  moHte,  bu  *  .  .  bu,  :c,  3.  Qd) 
m'6d)te  au^gel)en,  tDenn  ic^  bitrfte,  bu  .  ♦  .  bu,  tc.  4.  Qdj 
fann  fe^r  gut  ©eutf^.  5.  Qd)  Unntt  tint  9?eife  madjen, 
tt)enn  ii^  iDoIIte,  bu  .  *  .  bu,  2c.  6.  Qd}  n)erbe  morgen  nxdjt 
lommen  fonnen.  7.  Qd)  ^abe  biefen  SKenfc^en  nie  gemoc^t. 
8.  Qd)  U)ar  !ranf  unb  fonnte  ni^t  arbeiten,  9.  Qd)  n)erbe 
biefe  3lufgabe  madien  mitffen.  10.  Qd)  foflte  ba^  eigentlii^ 
je^t  tun. 

C,  Oral:  i.  Konnen  Sie  Deutsch?  2.  Kann  Ihr  Bruder 
Deutsch  lesen?  3.  Konnte  er  diesen  deutschen  Brief  lesen? 
4.  Wohin  mochten  Heinrich  und  Emil  gehen?  5.  Diirfen  wir 
mit  (gehen)?  6.  Mochten  Sie  nicht  Heber  erster  Klasse  fahren? 
7.  Darf  ich  mich  auf  diese  Bank  setzen?  8.  Mogen  Sie  das 
FuBballspiel  nicht?  9.  Werden  Sie  heute  dem  Spiel  beiwohnen 
konnen?  10.  Diirften  Sie  nicht  ausgehen,  wenn  Sie  woilten? 
II.  Wo  konnte  ich  Sie  wieder  treffen?  12.  Wissen  Sie,  wie 
viel  Uhr  es  jetzt  ist?  13.  WuIJten  Sie  nicht,  wie  viel  Uhr  es 
war? 


§  i6i]  LESSON   XXXVIII  151 

D,  1.  Henry  and  Emil  mean  to  go  to  town.  2.  They  would 
like  to  attend  the  football  game.  3.  They  don't  know  whether 
they  may.  4.  They  really  ought  to  work  to-day.  5.  Father, 
may  I  go  to  town?  6.  Might  Emil  and  Robert  go  with  [me]  ? 
They  would  like  [to  go]  along  (mit).  7.  Yes,  but  you  will  have 
to  come  back  early.  8.  I  don't  know  whether  we  can  ;  we  will 
come  home  as  soon  as  possible.  9.  Emil  wanted  to  buy  a 
ticket,  but  couldn't  find  his  purse.  10.  Henry  had  to  advance 
him  some  money.  1 1 .  Will  they  be  obliged  to  travel  third  class  ? 
12.  I  think  (glauben)  not ;  they  must  have  money.  13.  Robert 
doesn't  wish  to  attend  the  football  game ;  he  doesn't  like  the 
game.  14.  He  has  never  Hked  it.  15.  Neither  have  I  (id)  aud^ 
ntd)t).  16.  He  prefers  to  visit  (t)efu(^t  Iteber)  the  museum 
when  he  is  in  town.  17.  We  didn't  know  that;  we  thought 
he  meant  to  accompany  us.  18.  Here  we  are  at  the  station. 
19.  We  must  part  here.  20.  But  we  could  meet  again  at 
the  (am)  museum,  couldn't  we?  21.  Certainly,  and  let  us  go 
home  at  6  o'clock.  22.  We  have  to  be  at  home  before 
seven. 

E,  Lesestiick :  Der  tlirkische  Gesandte  in  London  wohnte 
einst  einem  lebhaften  FuBballspiel  bei.  Er  folgte  dem  Spiel 
mit  groJBem  Interesse.  Als  es  voriiber  war,  fragte  ihn  sein 
Begleiter :  "  Nun,  was  denken  Sie  vom  FuBballspiel  ? "  Der 
Gesandte  antwortete  :  "  Ich  bin  noch  nicht  im  klaren  dariiber  ; 
flir  ein  Spiel  scheint  es  mir  ein  biBchen  zu  viel  und  fiir  eine 
Schlacht  ein  bifichen  zu  wenig." 


LESSON  XXXVIII 

161.   Possessive  Pronouns.    They  are  formed  as  follows  from 
the  stems  of  the  corresponding  possessive  adjectives  :  — 

1.  With  endings  of  btefer  model,  without  article  (see  §  31,  2). 

2.  With  definite  article  and  weak  adjective  endings  : 


152  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§162 

Singular, 
Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

iV.    ber  meinc  bie  metnc '  ba^  meinc 

G,    be^  meincn,  it.       ber  meincn,  :c,         be^  meincn,  iz. 

Plural. 

bie  mettien 
ber  meincn,  ic. 

3.  With  definite  article  and  ending  -ig  -f  weak  endings  : 
Singular. 
Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

N,    ber  metntgc  bie  meintGC  ba^  meintge 

G.    be^  meinigcn,  :c,     ber  metntgen,  iz.      be^  meinigcn,  2c* 

Plural. 

bie  tneinigen 
ber  tneinigen,  ic. 

Note. — In  unfrlge  and  eurige  the  C  of  the  stem  is  always  omitted. 

162.  Use  of  Possessive  Pronouns. 

S)er  §ut  ift  meiner  (ber  meine,  The  hat  is  mine. 

ber  meinige). 

3d)  ^cibe  meinen  §nt,  aber  fie  I  have  my  hat,  but  she  has  not 

l^at  (ben)  i^r(ig)en  nxijt  hers. 

Observe:  i.  The  three  forms  given  in  the  previous  section 
are  interchangeable,  without  difference  of  meaning,  the  first  (or 
shortest)  form  being  the  most  usual. 

2.  The  stem  of  the  possessive  pronoun  depends  on  the 
gender,  number,  and  person  of  its  antecedent. 

Notes.  —  i .  A  possessive  pron.  used  as  predicate  may  also  have  the 
uninflected  form:   S)iefe  S3u(f)er  ftnb  fcttt^  *  These  books  are  his.' 

2.  Observe  the  following  idiomatic  uses  of  the  possessive  pronoun  :  %\t 
3)lein(ig)en,  bie  ®ein(ig)eri,  *My  (his)  friends,  family,'  etc.;  3(^  trerbc 
bag  3D^ein(ig)c  tun,  *  I  shall  do  my  part.' 


§  i63]  LESSON   XXXVIII  153 

3.  The  forms  mcittC^gleidjCtt  (beinc^glcic^en,  etc.),  meaning  *  a  person, 
or  persons,  like  me,  you,'  etc.,  are  used  as  indeclinable  substs. :  SSir  trerbeit 
fcinci^g(cicl)Cit  nie  mieber  erbliden,  *  We  ne'er  shall  look  upon  his  like  again/ 

163.  Possessive  Dative. 

©^  fiel  t^m  auf  bctl  ^0)3f .  It  fell  on  his  head. 

gin  5Rage(  jcrri^  mir  ben  9?o(f ,  A  nail  tore  my  coat. 

gr    [(^iittelte     feinem     alten  He  shook  the  hand  of  his  old 

greunbe  bie  §anb.  friend. 

@r  fc^nitt  firff  ben  ginger  ab.  He  cut  off  his  (own)  finger. 

Observe:  i.  With  parts  of  the  person,  clothing,  etc.,  the 
possessive  adjective  is  commonly  replaced  by  the  dative  of  the 
personal  pronoun  or  of  a  noun  +  the  definite  article. 

2.  If  the  possessor  is  the  subject,  the  reflexive  pronoun  is 
used  when  the  action  is  reflexive. 

Note.  —  But  when  there  is  no  reflexive  action,  the  refl.  pron.  is  omitted : 
^X  fc^iittelte  ben  ^'Opf,  *  He  shook  his  head.' 

EXERCISE   XXXVIII 

A,  211^  etn  arnter  gol^^aner  etne^  2^age^  ant  Ufer  etne^ 
gfnffe^  ©cinnte  fcittte,  glitt  i^m  bie  Slyt  au^  ber  §anb  nnb  fiet 
in^  tiefe  Saffer.  „^d)  Ungliicftirfjer,"  rief  er,  ^inie  foH  it^ 
je^t  Srot  fUr  bie  3Keinigen  tierbienen?''  (5r  fe^te  fic^  ^in  nnb 
meinte  lant.  !j)a  ranf(f)te  ba^  SBaffer ;  etne  ^i^t  erfcfiien  nnb 
fragte  i^n,  ina^  i^m  gefrf)e^en  fei.  „3l(^!"  eriDiberte  ber  3lrnte, 
„bie  2lyt  ift  mir  in^  SBaffer  gefallen."  „Sei  rn{)ig/'  ^pvadj  fie, 
,Ad)  tt)ill  ba^  aKeinige  tnn,  bir  bie  9lft  n)ieber  jn  tjerfi^affen." 
S)ann  tand)te  fie  nnter  nnb  fant  mit  einer  gotbnen  9l^*t  ()eranf. 
,,3ft  biefe  3l^t  bein?"  fragte  fie.  „^d)  nein!"  ermiberte  ber 
^o(5f)aner,  „ba^  ift  bie  meinige  nic^t."  SBieber  tjerf^manb 
bie  9Jife  nnb  brac^te  eine  fifberne  ^eranf.  „3ft  ba^  bie 
beine  ?"  fragte  fie.    „anc^  ba^  ift  nic^t  nteine/'  tierfefete  er ;  bie 


154  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  163 

meittige  ift  au^  &\tn."  ^06:}  etntnal  taudjte  fie  unter  unb 
erfc^ien  mit  ber  ridjttgett,  ^SBeil  bu  fo  et)rUc^  getDefen  bift, 
iDifl  id)  bit  auc^  bie  golbne  unb  bie  filberne  l^i  f(^enfen/' 
^pxad)  fie*  gro^  banfte  il)r  ber  §o(5f)auer  unb  fel)rte  ju  ben 
©einen  juriicE* 

B.  ©mil  tna(^t  je^t  toilette,  3^^^ft  5^^^^  ^^  ^^^  9^*^*  ^^^* 
^uncti^ft  tt)afd)t  er  fic^  forgfctltig  bie  |)anbe  unb  ba^  ©efic^t, 
S5ann  biirftet  er  bie  3^^^^  ^^'^  fantmt  fic^  bie  §aare,  ©eftern 
gerri^  i^m  ein  5yfage(  ben  9?o(f,  §eute  unrb  er  n)o{)I  einen 
anbern  anjieljen  mitffen.  Start,  bift  bu  fertig,  au^5ugef)en? 
Qd)  gie^e  ntir  foeben  ben  Uber3iet)er  unb  bie  §anbfd)ul)e  an. 
Senn  greunbe  einanber  begegnen,  [0  ne()men  fie  ben  §ut  ab 
ober  geben  fic^  bie  §anb.  !Ca^  3:rottoir  ift  ()eute  fe^r  glatt ; 
man  fdnnte  teit^t  au^gleiten  unb  fi(^  ba^  ^ein  brec^en. 

C.  Continue:  i.  Wliv  ift  bie  3lyt  au^  ber  §anb  geglitten, 
bir,  2c.  2.  ^c^  l)aht  ntir  f(^neH  ben  diod  ange^^ogen,  bu  *  .  . 
bir,  2C.  3.  Qd)  iDerbe  mir  }e^t  bie  §anbe  lDafd)en,  bu  .  *  .  bir, 
2c,  4.  Qd)  bin  au^geglitten  unb  ijahe  mir  ein  :Sein  gebrot^en, 
bu  ♦  .  ♦  bir,  2c»  5.  Qd)  tDill  ba^-  SJJeinige  tun,  bu  *  .  .  ba^ 
©einige,  2c. 

£>.  I.  The  woodcutter  sat  on  the  bank  of  a  river  and  wept 
aloud.  2.  A  water-sprite  appeared  and  said  ;  "What  has  hap- 
pened to  you?  Why  are  you  weeping?"  3.  He  replied  that 
his  axe  had  slipped  from  his  hand  and  fallen  into  the  river. 
4.  The  unhappy  man  had  no  axe,  and  could  earn  no  bread  for 
his  [family].  5.  Thereupon  the  sprite  dived  and  brought 
up  a  silver  axe.  6.  She  asked  him  if  this  axe  was  his.  7.  He 
said  it  was  not  his,  since  his  was  of  iron.  8.  Then  she  showed 
him  a  gold  axe,  which  she  had  brought  up  out  of  the  water. 
9.  The  woodcutter  was  very  honest,  and  would  not  accept  this 
one.  10.  He  wanted  only  [what  was]  his  [own].  11.  At  last 
she  brought  up  his  and  gave  it  to  him. 

£.  1.  This  book  is  mine.  2.  I  have  my  pencil,  and  you 
have  yours.     3.  Emil  has  eaten  his  pear  and  also  (a)  part  of 


§  1 64] 


LESSON   XXXIX 


155 


mine.  4.  Everybody  loves  his  own  [relatives,  etc.].  5.  Henry, 
have  you  washed  your  face  and  combed  your  hair?  6.  We 
shake  hands  with  one  another.  7.  How  did  Robert  break  his 
leg?  8.  Take  off  your  hat,  Emil.  9.  Henry  has  torn  my 
coat.  10.  Put  on  your  gloves.  11.  A  stone  fell  (^perf.)  on  my 
foot.     12.  It  hurt  me  very  much. 

K   gefeftiid: 

®te^t  etti  ^trd^Iein  im  J)orf, 
ge^t  ber  SBeg  bran  t^orbei, 
unb  bie  §u^ner,  bie  ma(J)en 
am  3Beg  ein  ©efc^rei. 

Unb  ber  SBagen  t)oH  §eu, 
ber  fommt  t)on  ber  SBiefe, 
unb  oben  barauf 
fi^t  ber  §an^  unb  bie  gtefe. 

^Cie  iobein  unb  {uc^jen 
unb  lad^en  aHe  beib', 
unb  ba^  f(tngt  burd)  ben  3lbenb, 
e^  ift  etne  greub'! 

Unb  tDdr'  ic^  ber  S5nig, 
gleid)  tudr'  id)  babei 
unb  na()nte  jum  5:f)ron  ntir 
einen  3Bagen  t)oH  §eu. 


-  Robert  ^einid. 

LESSON  XXXIX 

164. 

Degrees  of  Comparison. 

Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

Xtxi),  rich 

Xt\6)tX 

ret(^ft 

neu^  new 

neuer 

neucft 

fii^,  sweet 

filler 

fiiBeft 

breit,  broad 

breiter 

breitcft 

156  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  165 

Positive.  Comparative.         Superlative. 

ebel,  noble  ebfer  ebelft 

teuer,  dear  teurer  teuerft 

tniibe,  tired  tuuber  mubeft 

aTigenef)m,  agreeable  atigenel)mer  angene{}mft 

frfjne II,  quickly  [(^tieller  fc^nellft 

Observe  :  i.  Adjectives  and  adverbs  form  their  comparative 
and  superlative  stems  by  adding  -(e)r  and  -(e)ft  to  the  positive 
stem. 

2.  Stems  ending  in  a  vowel  (except  c),  a  sibilant,  -b  or  -t,  re- 
tain c  in  the  superlative. 

3.  Those  in  -cl,  -en,  -cr,  drop  c  in  the  stem  of  the  compar- 
ative. 

4.  Those  in  -c  add  -x  and  -ft  only. 

5.  The  endings  are  added  regardless  of  length. 

165.  Umlaut  in  Monosyllables. 

gro^,  great    grS^er    gri5^(ef)t  !Iug,  wise    flitger    flitgft 

arm,  poor     firmer     firmft  oft,  often     Sfter      flfteft 

Observe  :  Most  monosyllables  with  a,  u,  u  (not  au)  in  the 
stem  take  umlaut ;  for  exceptions,  see  dictionary. 

166.  Irregular  Comparison. 

balb,  e^e,  soon  ef)er    ef)eft  l^otf),  high     l^ijl^er    ^o^ft 

gern(e),  gladly  Iteber  Uebft  na^e,  near    ndl)er    ncic^ft 

gut,  good,  well)  ^r.     ^.^  t)iel,  much    mel)r     meift 

iDoI)!,  well        J       '  tDenig,  little  minber  mtnbeft 

Notes.  —  i.  SJle^r  and  mtttbet  are  invariable. 

2.  SBcnig  has  usually  the  regular  forms  mettiger,  Wettigft. 

167.  Declension  of  Comparative  and  Superlative. 

Sin  flet^tgercr  ®(i)itler.  A  more  diligent  pupil. 

^tX  flet^tgere  @cf)Uler.  The  more  diligent  pupil. 

S)er  flei^igfte  @(^uler.  The  most  diligent  pupil. 


§  1 69 J  LESSON   XXXIX  157 

Observe  :  The  attributive  adjective  has  the  same  endings  in 
the  comparative  and  superlative  as  in  the  positive  (see  Lesson 
XVIII). 

168.  The  Comparative. 

&  ift  dJter,  al^  tc^.  He  is  older  than  I. 

^dj  bin  (cbcn)  fo  alt,  tote  er.  I  am  (just)  as  old  as  he. 

3e  (befto)  langer  bie  9?a^t  ift,  The  longer  the  night  is,  the 

bcfto  (umfo)  fiirjer  ift  ber  shorter  is  the  day. 

Jag. 

Observe:    i.  'Than'  =  ali3  in  a  comparison  of  inequality. 

2.  'As  .  .  .  as,'  'so  .  .  .  as'  =  fo  .  .  .  mtc  in  a  comparison 
of  equality. 

3.  'The  .  .  .  the'  before  comparatives  =  jc  or  bcfto  .  .  .  jc, 
bcfto  or  umfo,  and  in  complete  clauses  the  former  clause  has  the 
word  order  of  a  dependent  sentence  (verb  last),  the  latter  of  a 
principal  sentence  (verb  second). 

Notes. —  i.  The  form  with  IttC^t,  'more/  is  used  when  two  qualities  of 
the  same  object  are  compared :  ®ie  ift  mc^t  tlug  aU  fd^on,  *  She  is  more 
clever  than  pretty.' 

2.  The  English  *  more  and  more '  =  imtltcr  4-  comparative  :  2)er  (Sturnt 
U)lrb  immcr  ^eftigct,  *The  storm  grows  more  and  more  violent.' 

169.  The  Superlative  Relative. 

!j)er  ®ee  ift  breiter  al^  ber  The  lake  is  broader  than  the 

glu§,  aber  ba^  9JJeer  ift  am         river,    but  the  sea  is  the 

breitcften.  broadest. 

QVX    ^'Uni   ift    ber    Sag    am  The  day  is  longest  in  June. 

Idngften* 

©iefer  5*Iu^  ift  ber  breitcftc  This    river    is    the    broadest 

(l^Iu©  in  3lmerifa.  (river)  in  America. 

(Sr  lieft  am  bcftcn.  He  reads  best. 

Observe  :  i.  The  relative  superlative  of  adjectives  does  not 
occur  in  uninflected  form,  even  in  the  predicate. 

2.  When  no  previously  expressed  noun  can  be  supplied,  the 


158  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  170 

superlative  adjective  is  expressed  in  the  predicate  by  the  form 
with  om,  which  is  also  the  superlative  form  of  the  adverb. 

3.  If  a  noun  can  be  supplied  from  the  context,  the  superla- 
tive is  expressed  in  the  predicate  by  the  definite  article  +  the 
superlative  with  adjective  inflection. 

Note.  —  The  superl.  adj.  is  regularly  preceded  by  the  def.  art.  or  other 
determinative. 

170.  The  Superlative  Absolute. 

(gr  ift  Sufterft  gitttg.  He  is  most  (exceedingly)  kind, 

(gr  ^at  fcl^r  flug  ge^anbeft.         He  has  acted  most  wisely. 

Observe  :  English  *  most/  indicating  a  quality  in  a  very  high 
degree,  but  without  comparative  force,  is  expressed  in  German 
by  an  adverb  of  eminence. 

Notes.  —  i.  The  superl.  absolute  of  advs.  may  be  expressed  also  by  attf§ 
(=aitf  ba^)  prefixed  to  a  superl.  adj.  ;•  (Sr  beforgt  alleg  aufj^  bcftc,  *He 

attends  to  everything  in  the  best  possible  manner.'  2.  Advs.  in  -tg,  -Hd), 
-fatlt,  and  a  few  monosylls.,  use  the  uninflected  form  in  the  superl.  absolute  : 
dx  Idgt  freunblic^ft  griigen,  *He  v^^ishes  to  be  most  kindly  remembered'; 
l)Od)ft,  lilngft,  *  most  highly,  long  since.'  3.  A  few  superl.  advs.  end  in 
-Ctt^  with  special  meanings:  §i3d^ftcn§,  *at  most';  tnetftCUi^,  'for  the 
most  part';  Ttad)ftCtt§,  'shortly';  ttJenigfteUi^,  '  at  least.'  4.  There  is  also 
a  compar.  absolute :  (Sin  (Ottgetet  ©pa^tergaug,  '  A  somewhat  long  walk.' 

EXERCISE  XXXIX 

^.  @te  l^abett  fe^r  t)tel  gereift,  nid^t  tt)a^r,  §err  9}f.  ?— 
^an)o^I,  aber  metftett^  in  (guropa.  —  ©lauben  ®te  tttdjt,  ba^ 
matt  auf  amertfant[(J)en  (Sifenba^ttett  f^neller  unb  bequetner 
reift  al^  m  ^uropa  ?  —  ?Jetn,  f lonelier  nic^t;  bie  f(^nellften 
3iige  trtfft  man  in  (Snglanb,  fo  [agt  man  menigften^. — Unb  \vk 
ift  e^  in  gran!rei(^  ?  —  3tn(^  ber  ©(^netfjng  t)on  Calais  nac^ 
^ari^  ge^ort  jn  ben  fd)nel(ften  ber  9BeIt.  —  gnnben  ®ie  bie 
fleinen  9lbtei(e  nxd)i  l)od)ft  nnangenel)m,  in  meldje  bie  europa- 
ifdjen  (5i[enba^nti3agen  eingeteilt  finb  ?  —  '7fid)t  im  geringften  ; 
im  ®egentei(,  man  reift  auf  biefe  9Beife  Diel  ruljiger  unb  iDirb 


§  lyo]  LESSON   XXXIX  159 

t)iel  tDentger  t^on  ben  a}?itreifenben  geftort,  al^  bei  nn^.  —  ®inb 
unfere  Sd)(aflt)agen  nic^t  beffer  al^  bie  europdif d}en?  —  (grower 
freilid)  finb  fie,  aber  in  ben  Sd)Iafn)agen  briiben  ^aben  \t  jtDei 
9?eifenbe  einen  2lbtei(  fiir  fid),  mo  fie  anf^  bequemfte  fdjfafen 
unb  au^  i^re  2:oi(ette  mad)en  tonnen.  —  ^^n  -SSejng  auf  bie 
©eforbernng  be^  ©epiicf^  t)aben  wiv  e^  ^ier  bod)  mit  nnfern 
@epacff(^einen  bequemer,  nid)t  iDa^r?  — .^n  (Jnglanb  finbet 
man  allerbing^  biefe  ginric^tnng  auf  fel)r  lt)enigen  3^(1^^^ 
aber  in  ben  meiften  europdifdjen  8anbern  er^d(t  ber  9?ei' 
fenbe  }e^t  immer  einen  ®epd(ffd)ein,  —  -Sann  man  bort 
ebenfo  bi((ig  reifen,  iDie  ^ier?  —  ®ogar  billiger,  n)enn  man 
jtpeiter  ober  britter  Piaffe  fd^rt ;  am  bitligften  unb  am  lang- 
famften  fdf)rt  man  mit  bem  fogenannten  ,,Summe{jug/'  wtU 
^er  an  {eber  Station  anl}dlt.  ^'e  langfamer  man  fdl)rt,  befto 
billiger  fd[)rt  man,  — :33eften  S)an!,  §err  SS*,  fiir  Qijxx  ()od)ft 
tntereffante  3Jfittei(ung, 

B.    Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C  Insert  comparative  and  superlative  forms  respectively  in 
the  blanks :  i.  Qd)  bin  mitbe,  bu  bift  — ,  er  ift  — .  2.  ®ie  breite 
®tra^e,  bie  —  ©tra^e,  bie  —  ©tra^e,  3.  SBir  arbeiten  gut, 
xijv  arbeitet  — ,  fie  arbeiten  — .  4.  Qii)  fpiele  menig,  bu  fpietft 
— ,  £ar(  fpie(t  — .  5.  gine  angene^me  9Jeife,  eine  —  9teife, 
bie  —  SReife.    6.  Sfara  ift  flug,  3Karie  ift  — ,  aber  Sari  ift  —. 

D.  I.  I  find  traveling  (ba^  Steifeu)  most  interesting. 
2.  Traveling  is  most  agreeable  in  summer.  3.  The  days  are 
longest  then,  one  can  see  more,  and  it  is  much  pleasanter. 

4.  I   like  to  take  a  somewhat   long  journey   by   (ju)  water. 

5.  The  fastest  steamers  go  in  less  than  five  days  from  New  York 
to  Europe.  6.  Germans  travel  a  great  deal,  but  in  this  country 
people  travel  still  more.  7.  One  can  travel  second  class  very 
comfortably  in  Europe.  8.  Most  people  (bie  meiften  ?eute)  in 
Germany  travel  second  class,  even  the  wealthiest.  9.  Over 
there  you  (man)  can  travel  as  comfortably  second  class  as  first 


l6o  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  170 

class  in  America.  10.  Besides,  it  is  much  cheaper.  11.  You 
can  travel  cheapest  third  class,  but  the  mixed  trains  (^erfoTtetl- 
3Ug,  :w.)  often  go  very  slowly. 

E,  I.  The  European  express  trains  are  among  (ge^dretl  ju) 
the  fastest  in  the  world.  2.  Is  it  not  very  disagreeable  to 
travel  with  baggage?  3.  Not  at  all;  in  most  countries  you 
now  get  checks.  4.  In  England,  however,  this  arrangement  is 
found  on  very  few  trains.  5.  I  find  the  compartments  most 
pleasant.  6.  You  are  much  less  disturbed  by  your  (the)  fellow- 
travelers.  7.  The  European  sleeping-cars  are  smaller  than 
ours,  but  one  can  at  least  sleep  most  comfortably  in  them.  8.  I 
hope  to  be  able  to  take  a  trip  to  Europe  next  summer.  9.  You 
will  find  traveling  just  as  cheap  as  in  America  and  not  less 
comfortable.  10.  In  Germany  as  in  America,  the  farther  you 
travel  the  more  it  costs. 

F,  Lesestlick :  Ich  packe  meinen  Koffer  und  meine  Hand- 
tasche.  Ich  miete  einen  Wagen.  Ich  fahre  nach  dem  Bahn- 
hof.  Ich  bezahle  den  Kutscher.  Ich  gehe  an  den  Schalter. 
Ich  lose  eine  Fahrkarte  nach  Berlin.  Ich  rufe  einen  Gepack- 
trager.  Ich  gebe  mein  Gepack  auf.  Ich  bekomme  einen 
Gepackschein.  Ich  trete  in  den  Wartesaal.  Ich  warte  auf  die 
Abfahrt  des  Zuges.  Ich  gehe  auf  den  Bahnsteig.  Ich  steige 
in  einen  Wagen.     Ich  setze  mich.     Der  Zug  fahrt  ab. 

LESSON  XL 

171.   Compound  Tenses  of  Modal  Auxiliaries,     i.  The  fol- 
lowing condensed   paradigm   illustrates   the    compound    tense 
forms  of  the  modal  auxiliaries  (including  laffetl)  with  a  governed 
infinitive  : 
Perf.  Lidic,    x^  ^abe    f^tetett  bitrfcn,     fdnnett,     mogen,  2c. 

bu  f)aft        ,,         ,,  „ 

Perf,  Subj\    t(^  ^abe 

bu  ^abeft     ,,  ,, 

Plupf.  Indie,  \i)  ^atte 
Phipf,  Subj.  \i)  ^atte 


§  172]  LESSON   XL  l6l 

Observe  :  The  past  participle  here  has  the  form  of  an  infin- 
itive. 

Note.  —  The  last  form  above  replaces  the  compound  conditional,  which 
is  not  in  use. 

2.  The  following  examples  show  the  use  of  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive  as  a  shorter  compound  conditional : 

Q6)  Ijdttt  e^  tutt  bUrfen.  I  should  have  been  allowed  to 

do  it. 
Qd)  ^dtte  e^  tun  !onnen.  I  could  have  done  it. 

Qd)  i}'dttt  e^  tun  mogen.  I  should  like  to  have  done  it. 

Qi}  ijdttt  e^  tun  muffen.  I  should  have  been  obliged  to 

do  it. 
Q6)  Ijdttt  e^  tun  follen,  I  ought  to  have  done  it. 

Observe  :  In  all  these  examples,  except  the  fourth,  the 
German  modal  has  the  compound  tense,  and  the  governed  in- 
finitive the  simple  tense  ;  whereas  in  English  the  modal  has  the 
simple,  and  the  infinitive  the  compound  tense. 

3.  These  verbs  have  also  another  form  of  the  perfect  and  the 
pluperfect,  with  the  modal  in  a  simple  and  the  infinitive  in  a 
compound  tense.  The  following  parallel  examples  show  the 
respective  meanings  of  the  two  forms  : 

6r  ^at  e^  nt(f)t  tun  lonnen.  He  has  been  unable  to  do  it. 

(Sr  !ann  e^  getan  l^aben.  He  may  possibly  have  done  it. 

(Sr  i)at  e^  ni(J)t  tun  mogen.  He  didn't  like  to  do  it. 

6r  mag  e^  getan  ^aben.  He  may  possibly  have  done  it. 

dx  l)at  e^  tun  ntliffen.  He  has  had  to  do  it. 

gr  mu^  e^  getan  ^aben.  He  must  have  done  it. 

6r  t)at  e^  tun  tDoHen.  He  meant  to  have  done  it. 

dx  tt)tll  e^  getan  {)aben.  He  pretends  to  have  done  it. 

172.  Word  Order.  In  a  dependent  sentence  with  compound 
tense  and  governed  infinitive,  the  auxiliary  of  tense  (l}aben  or 
tDerben)  does  not  come  last,  but  precedes  both  the  participle 
and  the  governed  infinitive  ; 


i62  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§173 

(Sr  fagte,  ba§  er  e^  ni(^t  fiafic  He  said  that  he  had  not  cared 

tun  mogeti-  to  do  it. 

SBenn  er  ^atte  !ommen  tDoIIen.  If  he  had  wanted  to  come. 

^d)  iDCiB   ntc^t,  ob  id)  iDCrbe  I  don't  know  whether  I  shall 

fommen  fdnnen*  be  able  to  come. 

173.  Various  Uses  of  Modals.  The  following  sections  con- 
tain, for  reference,  examples  of  the  idiomatic  uses  of  the  modal 
auxiliaries. 

174.  ^iirfett* 

S)arf  id)  fragen,  tna^  er  xoxU  ?  May  I  ask  what  he  wants  ? 

®itrf te  id)  ®te  bitten  ?  Might  I  request  you  ? 

S)u  barf  ft  je^t  gel)en.  You  may  go  now. 

5)a^  biirfte  f(f)on  fein*  That  might  possibly  be. 

Qi)  barf  bel}aupten,  ba^  biefe  I   venture  to  assert  that   this 

?^ad)rtd}t  nt(i)t  n)at)r  tft.  news  is  not  true. 

S5a^  barf  id)  nidjt.  I  am  not  allowed  to  do  that. 

Observe  :  1-3  indicate  permission  ;  4,  5,  modest  assertion  ; 
6  shows  the  absolute  use. 

Note.  —  ^iirfett  renders  the  English  *may,'  *  might'  in  questions,  as  in 
I  and  2  above. 

175.  ^ijttttcm 

Qd)  I)atte  fommen  fdnnen.  I  could  have  come. 

S)a^  fann  fetn.  That  may  be. 

(Sr  fann  bie  Seftion  ntdjt.  He  doesn't  know  the  lesson. 

Qd)  ()abe  nid^t  gefonnt*  I  have  not  been  able. 

Observe  :  i  denotes  abihty ;  2,  possibility ;  3,  the  transitive 
use  ;  4,  absolute  use. 

176.  WlHtn. 

Sftoge  ber  §tmmet  ba^  geben!  May  Heaven  grant  that ! 
^d)  m5d)te  gem  bleiben.  I  should  like  to  stay. 

(5r  \}at  nie  arbetten  mogen.  He  has  never  liked  working. 

Qd^  ^Citte  ba^  fe^en  mijgen.         I  should  like  to  have  seen  that. 
3)n  magft  ben  ©all  be^alten.     You  may  keep  the  ball. 


§  178]  LESSON   XL  163 

®te   mtid^ten   \xd)    bod}    tDoljl   Perhaps  you  are  mistaken  after 

irren.  all. 

(Sr  tnac)  3e^n  Qa\)Xt  ait  fein*       He  may  be  ten  years  old. 
J)a^  mag  fein.  They  may  be  (but  I  doubt  it). 

3^cf)  mag  btefe^  SSnd)  nxd)t.        I  don't  like  this  book, 
^c^  ge()e  morgen,au^,  mag  e^  I    am   going    out    to-morrow 

regnett  ober  nid)t.  whether  it  rains  or  not. 

9Sie  bem  auc^  feitl  mag.  No  matter  how  that  may  be. 

Observe  :  i  denotes  a  wish ;  2-4,  preference  or  hking ; 
5,  permission ;  6,  modest  assertion ;  7,  8,  concession ;  9,  tran- 
sitive use;   10,  II,  special  idioms. 

Note. — The  adverb  gcrtt  further  emphasizes  the  idea  of  liking  or 
preference,  as  in  the  second  exaniple  above. 

177.  SKiiffciu 

Sllle  3}?enf(^en  mitffen  fterbeti.  All  men  must  die. 

Qd)  ^abe  au^ge^en  miiffen.  I  have  had  to  go  out. 

Qn  atom  mUB  e^  ft^on  fetn.  It  must  be  beautiful  in  Rome. 

g^  mu^  [el)r  fa(t  getDcfen  fein,  It  must  have  been  very  cold, 

ba  ber  See  jugefroren  t[t.  as  the  lake  is  frozen  over. 

Qd)  Ijaht  gemu^t.  I  have  been  obliged  to. 

Observe  :  i  denotes  necessity ;  2,  compulsion  by  another 
person ;  3,  4,  inference  ;  5,  absolute  use. 

Note.  —  *To  be  obliged,  compelled,'  aftef  a  negative  in  simple  tenses, 
is  usually  rendered  by  brauc^en :  (Sr  braud)t  nic^t  5U  ge^en,  'He  is  not 
obliged  to  go.' 

178.  epKctt. 

T)U  fodft  ntc^t  tiJtett.  Thou  shalt  not  kill. 

(5r  foil  nid)t  au^ge^en.  He  shall  not  go  out. 

&  i^attt  gel)en  follen.  He  ought  to  have  gone. 

9Ba^  fo((  geft^el^en?  What  is  to  be  done? 

SBa^  fotlte  ic^  tun ?  What  was  I  to  do? 

(5r  foH  fe^r  reic^  fein.  He  is  said  to  be  very  rich. 

3'C^  tDei^  nicf)t,  tva^  id)  fott.        I  don't  know  what  I  am  to  do. 

9Senn  er  tommen  foUte.  If  he  should  (were  to)  come. 

SS?a^  foH  ba^?  What  does  that  mean? 


1 64  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§179 

Observe:  i,  2  denote  command;  3,  duty  or  obligation; 
4,  5,  submission  of  the  speaker's  will ;  6,  statement  not  vouched 
for  by  the  speaker ;  7,  absolute  use ;  8,  conditional  use ; 
9,  special  idiom. 

179.  noUtn, 

&  iDiII  nt(^t  ge^ort^en.  He  won't  (refuses  to)  obey. 

Sr  iDill  morgen  abretfen.  He  means  to  go  to-morrow. 

(Sr  tDoHte  eben  ge^en.  He  was  just  about  to  go. 

®a^  (Si^  tt)ill  bre(f)en.  The  ice  threatens  to  break. 
&    iDtIt    in    3"^^'^^  gett)e[en   He  asserts  that  he  has  been  in 

fein.  India, 

^^d^  iDtK  ba^  ^U(^  nt(^t.  I  don't  want  the  book. 

Qd)  i)aht  nic^t  geiDolIt.  I  didn't  want  to. 

Observe  :  i  denotes  exertion  of  will  on  the  part  of  the  sub- 
ject; 2,  intention;  3,  4,  impending  action  or  event;  5,  asser- 
tion or  claim  not  vouched  for  by  the  speaker ;  6,  transitive  use ; 
7,  absolute  use. 

180.  Saffcn. 

Saffen  ®ie  un^  fortge^en.  Let  us  go  away. 

SIZan  ^t  i^n  reben  laffen.  He  has  been  allowed  to  speak. 

J)er     §auptmann     lie^     ben  The  captain  ordered  the  soldier 

(Solbaten  beftrafen.     ♦  to  be  punished. 

Qii)  Ite§  ba^  ^nd)  btnben.  I  had  the  book  bound. 

6^  lii^t  ft(^  ni(f)t  leugnen.  It  cannot  be  denied. 

6^  IciBt  ftc^  Iei(J)t  madden.  It  is  easily  done. 

Observe:   i,  imperative  use;  2,  permission;  3,  4,  causative- 
use;  5,  6,  impersonal  reflexive  use. 

Note.  —  After  (affcn  the  infinitive  of  transitive  verbs  has  passive  force, 
as  in  examples  3,  4,  5,  6,  above. 

EXERCISE   XL 

A,  I.  311^  id}  jnng  tt)ar,  fonnte  id)  fet)r  gnt  (gdjlittfd^n^  lau* 
fen.    2.  Qd)  I)citte  geftern  in^  JI)eater  ge^en  tonnen,  iDenn  id) 


§  iSo]  LESSON  XL  165 

gctDoHt  t)atte.  3-  511^  ^i^i>  mn^it  t(^  immcr  frii^  ju  :Sett 
ge^cti-  4.  ^tnn  \mt  utifere  Slufgaben  ntd)t  mac^ten,  fo 
iDiirbcn  mx  p  C^aufe  bkiben  muffett.  5.  SBir  ^abett  unfere 
Slufgabeti  forgfcittig  [c^reiben  miiffen.  6.  9Bir  luerben  nod) 
gtDei  ©tutibeti  baratt  arbeiten  miiffen.  7.  Sir  iDiirbeu  fie 
abf^reiben  miiffeu,  wtnn  wix  fie  fc^tec^t  mad)ten.  8.  Modjttn 
<Sie  tiic^t  gem  'ipari^  befuc^en,  njenn  Sie  @etegettl)eit  Ijcitten? 
9.  3c^  ^abc  nie  9iomane  (efeti  bltrfen,  10.  Qd)  fjatte  fie  gern 
cielefen,  n)enn  i^  geburft  ^atte.  n.  gmU,  bu  l)atteft  bent 
Srnber  ^elfen  follen.  12.  S)a^  n)oIIte  ic^  tt)ot)t,  aber  id)  fonnte 
e^  leiber  nic^t»  13.  3Benn  't>n  tt)m  tjdtteft  ^elfen  iDolIen,  fo 
l^dtteft  bu  e^  lei^t  tun  f5nnen.  14-  8affen  @ie  bie  Uf)r 
nic^t  fallen, 

B,  I.  gaffen  ®ie  ben  ^affee  jefet  ^ereinbringen.  2.  :33ei 
iDelc^em  ©c^neiber  ^aben  ®ie  biefen  Uberjie^er  ntad)en  laffen? 

3.  3^  ^abe  biefe  SBoc^e  nic^t  au^ge^en  fonnen ;  id)  wax  frauL 

4.  mx  fjdtten  biefe^  ^au^  fiir  9)1.20,000  faufen  fonnen, 
iDenn  voix  gemollt  {)dtten.  5-  3^fet  fonnten  tt)ir  e^  nic^t  fo 
l)i(ag  befomnten.  6.  aSir  ^ben  nid)t  getDoIIt,  aber  n)ir  {)aben 
gentu^t.  7.  Sbnnten  ®ie  mir  tt)ol)I  eine  geber  Iei{)en?  ^(^ 
modjte  gern  an  nteinen  3Sater  f(^reiben»  8.  ^c^  n)dre  pr 
©tabt  mitgefal)ren,  menu  id)  geburft  ptte.  9.  J)er  ge^rer 
fagte,  ba^  id)  nic^t  mit  bixrfe»  10.  SBenn  ieberntann  tdte, 
tt)a^  er  foHte,  fo  mitrbe  bie  SBelt  t)iel  beffer  fein.  n.  T)iefe 
Same  foil  fe^r  reic^  fein.  12.  ®ie  mill  oiele  S^ijxt  in  3^nbien 
gelebt  fjaben.  13.  3Kan  f)dtte  Un  ©ieb  ni(^t  entfommen 
laffen  foHen. 

C.  Continue  :  i.  Ich  diirfte  diesen  Roman  lesen,  wenn  ich 
wollte,  du  .  .  .  'wenn  du,  etc.  2.  Ich  hatte  es  ihm  sofort  sagen 
konnen.  3.  Ich  hatte  ihn  das  nicht  tun  lassen  soUen.  4.  Dies 
ist  der  Uberzieher,  den  ich  mir  habe  machen  lassen,  .  .  .  den 
du  dir,  etc.  5.  Ich  hatte  so  einen  Brief  nicht  schreiben  mogen. 
6.  Ich  werde  mir  ein  Sommerkleid  machen  lassen.      7.  Ich 


l66  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  i8o 

mochte  heute  gern  spazieren  gehen.  8.  Ich  habe  das  nicht 
tun  wollen.  9.  Ich  muB  es  wohl  getan  haben.  10.  Das  mag 
ich  vielleicht  gesagt  haben. 

D,  I.I  could  write  better  if  I  had  a  better  pen.  2.  You 
have  never  been  able  to  write  well.  3.  I  should  have  had 
to  stay  at  home  if  I  hadn't  done  my  exercises.  4.  I  should  not 
have  been  able  to  go  with  you  to-day.  5.  As  [a]  child  I  didn't 
like  to  go  to  school,  but  I  had  to.  6.  I  have  not  cared  to  go 
out  to-day.  7.  These  children  were  never  allowed  to  stay  up 
late.  8.  I  might  stay  up  late  this  evening,  if  I  wanted  to. 
9.  Shall  we  be  allowed  to  go  out  to-morrow?  10.  The  teacher 
said  we  ought  not  to  go  out  in  (bet)  this  cold  weather. 
II.  Where  is  the  overcoat  which  you  have  had  made  ?  12.  The 
tailor  will  have  it  sent  to  me  to-morrow.  13.  He  has  not  been 
able  to  send  it  to-day. 

E,  I.  Mary  could  have  written  her  exercise,  if  she  had 
wanted  to.  2.  Charles  has  had  to  write  his.  3.  We  always  had 
to  copy  our  exercises  when  we  had  done  them  badly.  4.  When 
I  was  young,  I  could  have  learnt  German,  but  I  wouldn't. 
5.  Now  I  should  like  to  learn  it  if  I  could,  but  I  can't.  6.  If 
the  weather  had  been  cold,  we  should  have  been  compelled  to 
stay  at  home.  7.  We  have  never  been  allowed  to  stay  out 
late.  8.  We  always  had  to  come  home  earher  than  we  liked. 
9.  You  should  have  dressed  more  warmly.  10.  The  weather 
has  changed,  and  you  might  easily  have  caught  cold.  11.  Don't 
play  when  you  should  study.  12.  This  man  is  said  to  have 
learnt  German,  but  he  knows  nothing  of  it.  13.  He  pretends 
to  have  been  two  years  in  Germany.  14.  Where  is  the  house 
which  this  gentleman  has  had  built  for  himself  ? 

F,  Lesestlick  :  Der  Dichter  Gilbert  begegnete  eines  Tages 
einem  aufgeregten  Herrn,  der  ihn  fragte  :  "  Haben  Sie  einen 
Herrn  mit  einem  Auge  namens  B.  gesehen  ?"  "  Nein," 
erwiderte  Gilbert,  "wie  heifit  denn  eigentlich  sein  anderes 
Auge  ?  " 


§  183]  LESSON   XLI  167 


LESSON  XLI 

181.  Declension  of  Place  Names. 

N,  ber    W^txn,  the  Rhine.  N,  bte  (S^njeij,  Switzerland. 

G,  be^  m^tm{t)^.  G,  ber  @c^n)et5. 

D.  bem  9J^ein(e).  D,  ber  (2cf)n)et5, 

^.  ben  SR^eitt.  A,  bie  ©^metj* 

iV.  ©eutfd^Ianb,  Germany.        N,  Berlin,  Berlin. 
G,  ©eutfc^lanb^.  G.  Sertin^. 

Observe:  i.  Proper  names  of  places  which  are  never  used 
without  an  article  (§  108)  are  declined  Hke  common  nouns. 

2.  If  not  generally  used  with  an  article  or  determinative, 
they  take  no  ending  except  -^  in  the  genitive  singular. 

Note.  —  S5uit  may  replace  this  gen.,  and  must  do  so  if  the  noun  ends  in 
a  sibilant :  2)ie  ©tragen  tlOtt  ^ari^,  *  The  streets  of  Paris.' 

182.  Apposition. 

N,  bie  ©tabt  8onbon,  the  city  N,  ba^   ^5ntgret(^    *ipreu^en, 

of  London.  the  Kingdom  of  Prussia. 

G.  ber  ®tabt  Sotibon.  G,  be^  Sontgreid)^  ^reu^en. 

Observe  :  When  a  place  name  is  defined  by  a  common  noun 
preceding  it,  the  two  nouns  are  in  apposition,  but  the  common 
noun  only  is  inflected. 

Note.  —  The  word  %\Vi^  is  regularly  omitted  in  names  of  rivers :  !l)cr 
mjtXXl,  bic  (gibe,  *The  (river)  Rhine,  Elbe.' 

183.  Adjectives  and  Nouns  of  Nationality. —  i.  Adjectives 
of  nationality  end  in  -ifrf|,  except  beutf^,  and  are  used  sub- 
stantively only  of  the  language,  being  then  written  with  a  capital : 
!©eutfrf) ;  gransbfifcf).  German  ;  French  (the  language). 

Note.  —  They  are  also  written  with  a  capital  when  forming  part  of  a 
proper  name:  2)ag  2)eutf(^e  3Jieer,  *The  German  Ocean.' 


i68  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  183 

2.  After  the  preposition  auf,  language  names  are  used  with- 
out article,  and  remain  undeclined ;  after  other  prepositions 
they  take  the  article,  and  are  declined : 

2luf  Deut[(^;  im  ©eutfc^en*        In  German. 

3.  Nouns  of  nationality  end  either  in  -c  (^ttabe  model),  or 
in  -er  (WcAtV  model),  except  ©eutfc^,  which  follows  the  adjec- 
tive declension : 

®er  granjofe;  ein  ^Xtn^t.  The  Frenchman;  a  Prussian. 

&n  (Sngldnber  (2ltneri!ancr)»        An  Englishman  (American). 
3)er  S)eutfd)e;  ein  S)eutf(^er.      The  German;  a  German. 

Note.  —  The  Eng.  plur.  adjectival  noun,  indicating  all  people  of  a  par- 
ticular nationality,  is  always,  except  in  the  case  of  2)cutf(i),  rendered  in 
German  by  the  noun  of  nationality :  2)ie  gran^ojen  flnb  Icb^after  al^  bic 
^nglcinber  Ober  bie  2)eutfd^en,  *The  French  are  more  vivacious  than  the 
English  or  the  Germans.' 

EXERCISE   XLI 

A.  (SOitt  ber  8anb!arte  ju  ftubteren.)  ®a^  ©eutfdie  dttxd), 
ober  T)eutfd)(anb,  mie  e^  gen)oI)n(i(^  ^ei^t,  ift  im  9^orben  tiott  ber 
9iorbfee,  tion  ©cinemar!  unb  t»on  ber  Oftfee  begrenjt ;  im  Often 
Don  9fiu^Ianb  unb  Ofterretrfj^Ungarn ;  fiiblii^  t)on  Ofterrei^  unb 
ber  ®(^n)et5 ;  bie  n)eftlid)e  ©renje  bi(ben  granfrei^,  33elgten 
unb  goHanb.  ©a^  J)eutf(^e  9?et(^  tDurbe  n)d^renb  be^  beutfc^^ 
franjofifd^en  S'rtege^  im  Qaljvt  18U  gegriinbet  unb  SBil^elm 
ber  (£rfte,  S5ntg  t)on  ^reu^en,  n)urbe  bamal^  al^  erfter 
S5eutj(f)er  Saifer  proMamtert.  @^  umfagt  Dter  Sontgreii^e, 
namlti^  :  ^reu^en,  ^at)ern,  ®ad)[en,  SBiirttemberg  unb  neun^ 
je^n  fletnere  Staaten,  fotDte  bie  brei  freien  9tei(J)^ftdbte,  §am* 
burg,  Bremen  unb  Siibed.  S)ie  §aupt[tabt  1)eut[d)Ianb§, 
fotDie  be^  Sonigreii^^  ^reu^en,  ift  Berlin.  Berlin  ubertrifft 
fc^on  an  ginnjo^nerja^t  bie  ©tabt  'ipari^,  ift  aber  nod)  ni(f)t  fo 
gro^  n)ie  bie  ©tabt  Sonbon.  ©ie  §auptftabt  ®al)ern^  ift 
aJiiind)en,  unb  ^ei^t  auf  (Snglifd)  ,Mvinid),"    ®ie  §au|)tftabt 


§  1 83]  LESSON   XLI  169 

be^  ^ontgretc^^  ©ac^fen  ift  ©re^ben,    ®ie  imi  grb^ten  gtuffc 
Don  J)eutfd)Ianb  finb  bar  9Jt)ein  unb  bie  iilbt. 

B,  Oral  on  the  map  of  Germany  (see  p.  xxvi). 

C.  I.  The  inhabitants  of  Germany  are  called  Germans ;  those 
(bie)  of  (t)on)  England,  Englishmen ;  those  of  France,  French- 
m,en.  2.  Enghshmen  speak  English,  Frenchmen  speak  French, 
and  Germans  speak  German.  3.  Do  you  speak  German? 
4.  Not  very  well,  but  I  can  read  it  a  little.  5.  Then  you  should 
know  something  about  Germany  and  the  Germans.  6.  We 
will  take  a  look  at  (fic^  attfefjett)  the  map  of  the  German  Em- 
pire. 7.  You  see  that  Germany  is  situated  between  France, 
Belgium  and  Holland  on  (in)  the  west  and  Russia  on  the  east. 
8.  Yes,  and  to  the  south  lie  Austria  and  Switzerland.  9.  The 
Baltic,  Denmark  and  the  North  Sea  form  the  northern  boun- 
dary. 10.  Of  the  rivers  of  Germany  the  two  largest  are  the 
Rhine  and  the  Elbe,  which  both  flow  into  the  North  Sea. 
II.  The  Rhine  is  celebrated  for  (iDCgen,  ^<?«.)  its  beautiful 
shores,  its  ruined  castles  and  its  excellent  wines. 

D,  I.  William  the  First  was  the  first  German  Emperor. 
2.  The  German  Empire  consists  of  four  kingdoms,  three  free 
imperial  cities  and  many  smaller  states.  3.  Bayern  is  called 
"  Bavaria "  in  EngHsh,  Preussen  is  called  "  Prussia,'*  etc. 
4.  The  city  of  Berlin  is  situated  on  the  Spree.  5.  It  is  the 
capital  of  the  kingdom  of  Prussia;  it  is  also  the  capital  of 
the  German  Empire.  6.  Berlin  is  not  yet  as  large  as  the  city 
of  London.  7.  Dresden,  the  capital  of  the  kingdom  of 
Saxony,  is  celebrated  for  its  picture-gallery. 

E.  gefeftud: 

Die  IDad^t  am  Ht^etn. 

@^  brauft  ein  9tuf  h)ie  Donnerl^att, 

SBie  (2c^n)ertgefUrr  unb  SBogenpratt : 

^um  $Rl)ein,  gum  9J^ein,  ^unt  beutf(^en  SR^ein! 

SBer  iDiH  be^  ©trome^  gUter  fein? 


1 70  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  184 

8teb  9SaterIanb,  magft  ru^tg  fein! 

geft  fte^t  unb  treu  bie  2Bad)t  am  dli)tin ! 

®o  lang'  ein  SJrdpflein  Slut  nodi  gfu^t, 
9?o(^  eine  gauft  ben  2)egen  gte^t, 
Unb  noc^  ein  Stmt  bie  Sii(f)[e  fpannt, 
Setritt  fein  geinb  t)ier  beinen  ©tranb ! 

S)er  ®d[)n)ur  erfc^atlt,  bie  SBoge  rinnt, 
3)ie  ga^nen  flattern  ^oc^  im  SBinb, 
2lm  3t^ein,  am  9t^ein,  am  beutfd^en  Stl^ein, 
2Bir  alle  tuoQen  §Uter  fein! 


LESSON  XLII 

184.  Ordinals. 

!J)er  jUJeite,  tiierte,  fitnfte  S^ag.  The  second,  fourth,  fifth  day. 

©a^  erfte,  britte,  ad^te  ^inb.  The  first,  second,  eighth  child. 

§eute  ift  ber  ^unbertnnbfiinfte  To-day  is  the   hundred   and 

2^ag  be^  ^a^re^,  fifth  day  of  the  year. 

g^eununbjtDanjigfter  Sanb.  Twenty-ninth  volume. 

(Srften^,  britten^.  In  the  first  place,  thirdly. 

Observe  :  i.  The  stem  of  ordinal  adjectives  is  formed  from 
the  cardinals  by  adding  -t,  up  to  19  (except  crft-  *  first,*  britt-, 
'  third,'  a6)t-f  '  eighth '),  and  -ft  from  20  upwards. 

2.  Compound  ordinals  add  the  sufiix  to  the  last  component 
only. 

3.  Ordinal  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  -tn§  to  the  ordi- 
nal stem. 

Note.  —  The  numeral  before  33anb,  *  volume,'  ^a^itel,  *  chapter/  @citc, 
*  page,'  etc.,  is  read  as  an  ordinal  when  it  precedes,  and  as  an  undeclined 
cardinal  when  it  follows;  9^limero,  *  number,'  is  followed  by  the  cardinal: 
Dag  britte  ^apitet,  'The  third  chapter';  ^apitd  ^vd,  *  Chapter  three'; 
^InxntXO  filttf,  *  Number  five.' 


§  1 86]  LESSON   XLII  171 

185.  Dates. 

3)er  lDtet)teI([)te  tft  f)eute?  What  day  of  the  month  is  it? 

^tn  tDiet3te((0tett  ^aben  tt)ir?         "     "     ''   "       "     "  " 

95Ja^  fitr  eiti  "^atnm  tft  ^eute?  What  is  the  date? 

e^  ift  ber  seljnte.  It  is  the  tenth. 

mx  ijaUn  ben  jel)nten.  "  "   "     " 

2lm  L  (=  erften)  ^^anuar.  On  the  ist  of  January. 

gotlbon,  3.  Sl^jrit  (=  Sonbon,  London,  3rd  April. 

ben  britten  Slpril). 

@oetf|e  ftarb  (im  ^a^re)  1832.  Goethe  died  in  1832. 

Observe  :  i.  In  dates,  the  ordinals  are  used  adjectively  be- 
fore the  names  of  the  months,  the  figures,  i,  2,  3,  etc.,  being 
read  as  ordinals  with  the  definite  article  and  the  proper  adjec- 
tive termination. 

Note.  —  In  correspondence,  the  ordinals  are  often  written  as  follows: 
ben  (or  b.)  Iftett,  3ten,  23ften,  etc. 

2.  The  year  number  is  either  preceded  by  im  ^a^re  or  writ- 
ten and  read  without  the  preposition  itt* 

186.  House  Numbers  and  Addresses,  i.  In  street  names, 
the  preposition  and  article  are  omitted  in  giving  an  address  and 
in  addressing  letters,  and  the  street  name  is  written  as  one 
word  with  -ftra^e ;  the  house  number  follows  the  street  name  : 

9J?ein  ^^l^eunb  tt)0^nt  ©critter-     My  friend  lives  at  number  13 
ftra^e  13.  Schiller  Street. 

2 .  In  addressing  letters,  the  name  of  the  town  precedes  that 
of  the  street  and  number  : 

§erm  ^art  ©c^neiber, 
§eibe(berg, 

(Sc^Iogftrage  15/IV. 

Note.  —  The  Roman  numeral  after  the  house  number  indicates  the 
story  (Stage,/,  or  ®tOCf,  m.). 


172  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  i86 

EXERCISE   XLII 

A.  gamburg,  J^riebrt^ftr.  21 /III. 

23.  Dftober,  1909. 
giebe  ^{ara ! 

entfc^ulbige,  bitte,  '^^'si,  \i)  T)tr  fa  lange  ntcf)t  gefi^rieben 
l}abe.  3d)  bin  fe^r  befc^dftigt  geiDefen,  ti^ie  ©u  gleic^  fel)en 
^uirft.  grften^  finb  tuir  am  11.  b^.  (=biefe^  SJJonat^)  aii^ 
itnferer  atten  aBo^nuug,  ©rfjillerftrafee  155,  tia(^  ber  obigeu 
31breffe  umgejogen,  iDobei  e^  natiirtic^  fe^r  t)iet  gu  tun  gab. 
3t))eiten^  feierten  n>tr  ant  19.  be^  tieben  33ater^  ©eburt^tag. 
gr  er^ielt  t)iele  ^ubfcl)e  ©efcfjenfe,  barunter  eine  f(^one  3tu^^ 
gabe  t)on  @()afefpeare^  SBerfen  in  10  Sanben,  n)(>t)on  bie  erften 
brei  bie  Xrauerf|)iele,  ber  t)ierte,  fiinfte  unb  fe(})[te  bie  '?uft- 
fpiele,  unb  ^^Vc^  T  bi^  9  bie  I)iftorifc^en  ®d)aufpiele  entt}alten^ 
ma^renb  fid^  ini  10.  Sanbe  bie  @ebid|te  befinben.  (g^  mar 
fein  49.  ©eburt^tag,  "t^  er  ant  19.  Dftober  1858  geboren 
nmrbe.  9lnt  miedietten  'J^atiember  l^aft  ®u  eigent(id)  ©eburt^- 
tag?  ^i)  ^abe  teiber  ben  Sag  tergeffen.  @eute  itber  ac^t 
5tage,  ben  30.  b^.,  erinarten  UJir  tneinen  atteften  :93ruber  au^ 
gngfanb.  §offent(i(^  ujerbc  \^  fpateften^  ant  10.  J)e;^ent^ 
ber  ju  ®ir  tommen  fonnen,  unt  S^ir  ben  tange  t)erf|jro(^enen 
53efu(^  absuftatten.  3lIfo  auf  SBieberfe^en !  9}Jit  J^erglit^en 
®rii|en  ^"^  Seine  fieben  gftern  Derbleibe  id^  ftet^ 
Seine  !©i(^  innig  liebenbe  g^reunbin 

glifabet^  2J?et)er. 

B.  Oral:  i.  SBa^  ift  \t%i  bie  gibreffe  ^^re^  53ruber^? 
2.  ^^n  tt^eld^em  @to(f  n)ot)nt  er?  3.  Sim  mietiielten  gebenfen 
©ie  untjujie^en?  4-  Sen  ujiedielten  ^aben  \m  f)eute? 
5.  Ser  tt)iet3ielte  ift  tnorgen?  6.  SBa^  fiir  ein  Saturn  ift 
beute  itber  ac^t  Sage?  7.  2Bann  mirb  ber  ©eburt^tag  3^re^ 
atteften  :33ruber^  gefeiert?    8.  3n  meldieni  ^^\(tt  murbe  er 


§  i86]  LESSON   XLII  173 

geboren?  9.  Qn  tDcIc^em  :33anbe  biefer  3lu^ga6e  finbet  matt 
bie  Jrauerfpie(e  ?  10.  SBelc^e  ©cinbe  ent^altett  bte  guftfpiele  ? 
II.  aBeId}e  Sattbe  ^abett  ®ie  f^on  gelefett?  12.  Sottttett  @ie 
tttir  fageti,  iDatttt  ®oetI)e  geftorbett  ift? 

C.  I.  What  day  of  the  month  is  it  to-day?  2.  What  date 
is  this  day  week?  3.  Of  what  date  is  Elizabeth's  letter?  4.  I 
have  read  the  first  and  the  second  volume,  but  not  the  third. 
5.  Bring  volume[s]  three  to  (bt^)  five  with  [you]  when  you 
come.  6.  Sunday  is  the  first  day  of  the  week,  Monday  the 
second,  etc.  7.  January  is  the  first  month  of  the  year,  Febru- 
ary the  second,  etc.  8.  Goethe  was  born  in  seventeen  hundred 
and  forty-nine,  on  the  12th  of  August.  9.  Give  the  ordinals 
corresponding  to  the  cardinals  in  §  41. 

Z>.  40  Hall  St.,  Chicago, 

August  27  th,  1 9 10. 
My  dear  friend  (/.)  : 

You  will  certainly  wonder  why  I  have  not  written  you 
sooner,  as  your  interesting  letter  from  Dayton  arrived  on  the 
15  th  of  this  month.  But  I  must  tell  you  that  I  have  been 
extremely  busy  in  the  last  two  weeks.  In  the  first  place,  my 
eldest  brother's  birthday  was  celebrated  on  the  20th,  and  we 
had  a  great  many  visitors  (sing.).  Secondly,  we  intend  to  move 
on  the  I  St  September.  Our  new  address  is  No.  115  Farewell  St., 
second  story.  There  is  (gibt)  a  great  deal  to  do,  but  the  work 
will  be  finished  by  the  (6i^  guttl)  3rd  or  4th  of  September. 
You  will  then  pay  us  the  promised  visit,  will  you.not?  Mother 
hopes  you  will  come  on  the  loth,  or  still  earlier.  With  kind 
regards  to  your  dear  mother, 

Your  loving  friend, 

Anna  Lehmann. 

£.  Lesestiick  :  Im  allgemeinen  sind  die  Deutschen  im  brief- 
lichen  Verkehr  viel  umstandUcher  als  wir.  Erstens,  was  die 
Anrede  betrifft,  so  redet  man  in  Briefen  nie  einen  Herrn  als 
"Herr"  oder  "lieber  Herr"  an.     Man  schreibt  "Sehr  geehr- 


174  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  187 

ter  Herr"  oder  "Verehrter  Herr.'*     Eine  verheiratete  Dame 
wird  als  "  Gnadige  Frau  "  oder  "  Verehrte  Gnadige  Frau  "  ange- 
redet ;  eine  unverheiratete  als  **  Gnadiges  Fraulein,"  oder  auch 
"  Sehr  geehrtes  Fraulein  "  (Bauer,  usw.).     Warm  man  an  Ver- 
wandte  oder  Freunde  schreibt,  so  gebraucht  man  ungefahr  die- 
selben  Redensarten  vvie  im  Englischen.     Zweitens,  was  SchluB 
und  Unterschrift  betrifft,  so  schreibt  man  an  einen  Fremden 
ungefahr  so :  Indem  ich  mich  ergebenst  empfehle, 
Verbleibe  ich  hochachtungsvoll 
W.  H. 
oder  ktirzer  :  Ergebenst  (der  Ihrige) 
W.  H. 
Die  englische  Redensart :  "Yours  affectionately,"  von  einem 
Sohne  z.  B.  an  seine  Mutter,  lautet  etwa  wie  folgt :  Dein  Dich 
innig  liebender  Sohn 

Wilhelm. 


LESSON  XLIII 

187.  Declension  of  Person  Names. 

Qi)  ^abe  ®eorg^  geber.  I  have  George*s  pen. 

^ier  ift  (Baxa^  ^Uppe,  Here  is  Sarah's  doll. 

!l)a^i[taKayen^(8utfen)^)«U(^.  That  is  Max*  (Louisa's)  book. 

Qii}  ijaht  e^  3Kaj:  gegeben*  I  have  given  it  to  Max. 

S)e^  gro^en  Safari  S^aten.  Great  Caesar's  deeds. 

S)te  :^rtefe  hc^  gicero.  The  letters  of  Cicero. 

"^a^  «U(f)  bC)g  fleinen  tarl.  Little  Charles'  book. 

Observe;  i.  Names  of  persons  are  inflected  only  in  the 
genitive  singular,  usually  by  adding  -)§♦ 

2.  Those  ending  in  a  sibilant  add  -Ctt§,  and  feminines  in  -e 
add  -tt§» 

3.  The  genitive  usually  precedes  its  governing  noun,  and  is 
then  inflected ;  if  the  genitive  follows,  it  has  the  article  and 
remains  uninflected. 


§  i893  LESSON  XLIII  175 

Notes.  —  i.  The  name  "Jesus  Christ"  is  usually  declined  thus: 
N.  3efu^  d^rifttt^,  G.  3eftt  et)rifti,  D.  3eftt  St)rifto,  A.  ^efum  (S^riftum, 
Voc,  3eju  e()rifte» 

2.  Family  names  are  used  in  the  plur.  with  added  -«§,  but  without  art. : 
(Sc^mibt)^  finb  nad)  ^ari«  gcreift,  *The  Schmidts  have  gone  to  Paris.' 

188.  Person  Names  with  Titles. 

^ontg  ^etnric^^  ©ij^ne.  King  Henry's  sons. 

S)ie  ®i3{)ne  be^  ^ontg^  ^arl.    The  sons  of  King  Charles. 

^er  gd(f)er  ber  grau  :93raun.     Mrs.  Braun's  fan. 

Observe  :  i .  Person  names  in  the  genitive,  preceded  by  a 
common  noun  as  a  title,  take  the  genitive  ending,  the  title 
remaining  uninflected  and  without  article,  if  the  governing  word 
follows. 

2.  If  the  governing  word  precedes,  the  title  has  the  article, 
and,  if  masculine,  the  genitive  ending,  the  proper  name  remain- 
ing uninflected. 

Note.  —  The  title  ^tXX  always  takes  -it  in  the  sing.,  except  in  the  nom.; 
throughout  the  plur.  it  takes  the  art.  and  -Ctt:  §errtt  ©(^tnibtS  §au^, 
*Mr.  Schmidt's  house';  bie  §errcn  ®.  unb  ^.,  *  Messrs.  S.  and  B.' 

189.  Ordinals  with  Person  Names.  The  ordinals  after  proper 
names  of  sovereigns,  etc.,  are  written  with  a  capital  letter,  and 
must  be  declined  throughout,  as  well  as  the  article  : 

'N.   Sari      ber    grfte.  Charles  the  First. 

G,  tarl(6)  be^   grften.  Of  Charles  the  First. 

n,  Sart      bem  (Srftett.  (To,  for)  Charles  the  First. 

A.  Sari       ben  grften,  Charles  the  First. 

Note.  —  The  Roman  numerals  I,  II,  etc.,  after  such  names,  must  be 
read  as  above:  ^arl  V.=  UtiXl  t>tX  gttttftc,  2C. 

EXERCISE   XLIII 

A.  Otto  gbuarb  Seopolb  t).  (=  t)on)  ©i^tnarcf  trurbe  uttter 
ber  gtegterunc;  Sontg  ??rtebrtc^  aBtlfjelm  III. am  1.  Slprit  1815 
ju  ®c^dn^aufen  in  ber  3Jiarf  -33ranbenburg  geboren-    ®r  toar 


176  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  189 

ber  ciltefte  ©o^n  i^erbinanb^  t).  ^x^mavd  unb  SBtl^elminen^, 
geborener  TOenden,  aSom  11.  bt^  jum  19.  geben^ja^re  ftu- 
bierte  er  juerft  in  ©ottingen,  fpciter  in  Berlin,  .^m  3a^)^^ 
1847  I)eiratete  er  ^^ciutein  3*^1)^^^^  ^-  ^uttfamer,  obgleiif) 
3^ot)anna^  SSater  anfang^  fe^r  bagegen  trar.  S5nig  SBil^elm 
I.,  3]ad)fo(ger  gviebrid)  SBil^etnt  IV.,  beftieg  1861  ben  |}reu^ 
^ifdjen  Xijvon  unb  am  28.  September  1862  iDurbe  :93i^marcE 
erfter  SJJinifter.  SBci^renb  feiner  2lmt^tatigteit  fanben  brei 
gro^e  ^riege  ftatt:  berbiinifi^e  1864,  ber  cJfterreiiJ)if(^e  1866, 
unb  in  ben  ^'aJiren  1870-18U  ber  gro^te  Srieg  un[erer  ^dt, 
ber  beutfc^^fran^ofifdje.  5?ac^bem  am  18.  ^'anuar  18Y1  ber 
^5nig  Don  "ipreu^en  ©eutfc^er  ^aifer  gen)orben  t^ar,  irurbe 
^i^mard  ber  erfte  S'anjier  be^  S)eut[{^en  9?eid)e^  unb  er^ielt 
gugleii^  ben  Jitel  eine^  giirften.  53i^  nad)  bem  Jobe  ^aifer 
griebrid)  III.  be^ielt  ^i^mard  biefe^  3lmt,  n)urbe  aber  t)om 
je^igen  Saifer  9BiI()eIm  II.  am  18.  Wdx^  1890  enttaffen  unb 
ftarb  ben  30.  ^uli  1898  in  feinem  83.  geben^ja^re. 

B,   Oral  on  the  above. 

C  (Titles  and  numerals  in  full.)  i.  William  II,  King  bf 
Prussia  and  German  Emperor,  was  born  at  Berlin  on  the  27th 
of  January,  1859.  2.  He  is  the  eldest  son  of  the  Emperor 
Frederick  III.  3.  He  passed  several  years  as  a  student  in  the 
University  [of]  Bonn.  4.  In  1881  he  married  Augusta  Victo- 
ria, daughter  of  Frederick,  Duke  (§erjog)  of  Schleswig-Hol- 
stein-Augustenburg.  5.  On  the  15th  of  June,  1888,  he  ascended 
the  throne.  6.  The  great  Prince  Bismarck  was  then  Chancellor 
of  the  German  Empire,  an  office  which  he  had  retained  during 
the  reigns  of  WiUiam  I  and  Frederick  III.  7.  Bismarck  had 
been  appointed  as  (at^)  first  minister  of  Prussia  by  William  I, 
September  28th,  1862,  and  had  remained  in  office  since  that 
time.  8.  On  March  i8th,  1890,  Emperor  William  II  dis- 
missed the  prince  and  gave  (t)er(ei^en)  him  the  title  of  (a)  Duke 
of  Lauenburg.     9.  The  eldest  son  of  William  II  and  of  Au- 


§  192]  LESSON   XLIV  177 

gusta  Victoria  is  Frederick  William,  the  present  crown-prince 
of  the  German  Empire. 

D,  Lesestuck  :  Kaiser  Wilhelm  I  war  auISerst  pflichtgetreu. 
Als  er  schon  hochbetagt  war,  hatte  er  einmal  sein  Erscheinen 
bei  einer  Parade  angektindigt.  Sein  Leibarzt  riet  ihm  dringend 
abzusagen,  da  bei  dem  schlechten  Wetter  das  SchHmmste  zu 
beflirchten  sei.  "  Dann  sterbe  ich  im  Dienste,"  antwortete  der 
Kaiser.  "  Ein  Konig  von  PreuBen,  der  nicht  mehr  die  Pflich- 
ten  seines  Amtes  erfullen  kann,  mtifite  die  Regierung  nieder- 
legen,"  und  er  ging  zur  Parade. 


LESSON  XLIV 

190.  Demonstratives. 

1.  biefer,  this,  that.  5.  berfelb(tg)e,  the  same. 

2.  Jener,  that  (yonder).  6.  foI(f)er,  such. 

3.  ber,  that,  the  one.  7.  bergletcfjcn,  of  that  kind. 

4.  berjenige,  that,  the  one. 

191.  ^tcfct,  jcttct.    I.  Both  follow  the  biefer  model,  whether 
used  as  adjectives  or  pronouns. 

2.  The  English  demonstrative 'that'  is  not  rendered  by  jencr, 
unless  when  remoteness  or  contrast  is  indicated. 

3.  "Siicf er  =  '  the  latter,'  the  nearer  or  last  mentioned  of  two 
objects  ;  jcncr  =  *the  former,'  the  more  remote  : 

3rtarie  unb  ^lara  [inb  @C^tr)e-      Mary  and  Clara  are  sisters  ;  the 
[tern;  btefe  ift  alter  at^  icnc>         latter  is  older  than  the  former. 

192.  Declension  of  bet*     t.    As   adjective  bcr  is  declined 
precisely  like  the  definite  article,  but  is  always  stressed ; 

"^tX  aWa'Ttn.  The  man. 

©e'r  9)iantt.  That  man. 

S)ie  ?eu'te.  The  people. 

!j)ie'  8eute.  Those  people. 


1 78  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§193 


2.  ^ct  as  pronoun  is  declined  thus  : 

Singular. 

Plural 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

All  Genders. 

N.     ber 

bie 

ba^ 

bie 

G,     beffen 

berett 

beffctt 

bercr  (bercn) 

n,     bem 

ber 

bem 

bencn 

^.     ben 

bie 

ba^ 

bie 

Observe  the  enlarged  forms  in  the  genitive,  and  in  the  dative 
plural. 

193.  Use  of  bctt  I.  As  pronoun  it  has  the  force  of  an 
emphasized  personal  pronoun  of  the  3rd  person,  and  often  im- 
pHes  contempt  or  depreciation  : 

^ennen  @ie  ben?  Do  you  know  that  man? 

^cm  tDitrbe  \^  fein  ®elb  lei^^     I  wouldn't  lend  that  fellow  any 

en;  ber  beja^It  nie.  money;  he  never  pays. 

2.  ^cr  or  berjcmgc  (§  194)  renders  the  English  'that^  before 
a  genitive,  and  before  a  relative  clause  : 

ajfein   §ut   nnb  ber  ntetner     My  hat  and  that  of  my  wife. 

gran, 
©tef er  ^anb  nnb  ber,  n)elc^er     This  volume  and  that  (the  one) 

f)ier  liegt.  which  is  lying  here. 

Notes.  —  i.  The  form  bcrctt  (gen.plur.)  =  *  of  them' :  Sie  t)iclc  ^ilt* 
ber  ^at  er?  @r  f)at  bercn  bret,  'How  many  children  has  he?  He  has  three 
(of  them).' 

2.  It  is  also  used  as  substitute  for  a  plur.  possess,  (comp.  §  199)  :  Utlferc 
S^ettern  unb  berett  ^inber,  *Our  cousins  and  their  children.* 

194.  Declension  of  berjentfle* 

Singular,  Plural 

Masc.              Fem.                Neut.  All  Genders. 

N.     berjentge        biejenige        ba^jentge  btejenigen 

G.     be^Jentgen      berjentgen      be^jentgen  berjentgen 

D,     bemjenigen     berjenigen      bemjenigen  benjenigen 

A,     benjenigen      biejenige        ba^jentge  biejenigen 

Observe:  These  forms  are  made  up  of  the  definite  article 
and  jctttg  with  weak  adjective  endings. 


§  199]  LESSON  XLIV  179 

195.  Use  of  bcriemgc*  It  may  replace  ber  (for  emphasis  or 
clearness)  before  a  genitive,  and  before  a  relative  clause  : 

S)te6  tft  mein  ^urf),  nicflt  ha^-  That  is  my  book,  not  that  of 
jcntgc  meiner  grau.  my  wife  (my  wife's). 

J)tefer  Sanb  unb  bcr(icnifle),  This  volume  and  the  one  that 
ber  bort  liegt,  is  lying  there. 

Note. — The  idiomatic  omission  of  the  demonstrative  before  a  pos- 
sessive in  English  is  permissible  in  German  only  before  a  person  name : 
3)^ein  §au§  unb  SStl^elm^,  '  My  house  and  William's.' 

196.  ^crfetbe^    It  is  declined  Hke  berjentge  (berfelbe,  bic* 
fetbc,  bdi^felbe,  2C.),  and  is  used  as  adjective  or  pronoun : 
I)a^  tft  berfclbe  ajJann.  That  is  the  same  man. 
SBeli^en    JRocf    tragen    (Ste?      Which  coat  are  you  wearing? 
^cnfclbcn,  ben  id)  gefterntrug.      The  same  I  wore  yesterday. 

197.  So(rf|»  When  used  alone,  fo(rf)  follows  the  btefer 
model;  after  ein,  it  follows  the  mixed  declension  of  adjectives; 
before  ein,  it  is  undeclined  : 

©olc^er  SBein  ;  ein  f  oI(^cr  Such  wine  ;  such  a  wine  ;  such 
SBeitt ;  folrf)  etne  grau !  a  woman ! 

Note.  —  Su(d)  with  citt  is  often  replaced  by  fo :  So  ein  $3ein ;  ein  fo 
guter  SSein. 

198.  ^erglciti^ctt*  It  is  used  as  indeclinable  neuter  substan- 
live  or  adjective : 

^ergletdjett  gefc^te^t  oft  ^ier*    That  sort  of  thing  often  hap- 

gutanbe.  pens  in  this  country, 

©ergleirfjen  3Bein(e).  Wine(s)  of  that  sort. 

199.  Demonstratives  as  Substitutes.  i.  ^icfct  and  ber= 
fclbc  are  used  instead  of  a  personal  pronoun  of  the  3rd  person 
to  avoid  ambiguity,  particularly  in  reported  speech  : 

©er  5Rebtter  bemerfte,  §err  21.  The  speaker  remarked  that  Mr. 

^abe    gefagt,   ba^    er    (ber  A.  had    said  that   he  (the 

9{ebner)biefen(^rbenfelben)  speaker)  had  slandered  him 

t)erleumbet  ijaht.  (Mr.  A.). 


i8o  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  200 

Note.  —  Similarly  also  the  gen.  of  bCt,  referring  to  things  (§  139,  n.  3) : 
3d)  crinnere  mic^  bcffcn  nic^t,  *  I  don't  remember  it.' 

2.  '^erfclbc  is  used  instead  of  a  personal  pronoun  to  avoid 
awkward  combinations  of  sounds,  such  as  i^n  ♦  ♦  .  ^^nett, 
©ie  .  .  .  fie,  2C,: 

®er  Safe  tft  gut ;    ic^  fann  The  cheese  is  good ;    I  can 
3^^nen  bcnfclfien  eni|)fef)Ien,       recommend  it  to  you. 

3.  The  genitive  of  ber  and  bcrfelbc  is  used  instead  of  the 
possessive  adjective  of  the  3rd  person,  to  avoid  ambiguity  : 

@r  fam  mtt  ®eorg  unb  beffcn   He  came  with  George  and  with 
©ruber    (or    bem     ©ruber       his  (George's)  brother, 
be^felben)- 

200.  ^a  and  l^ter  for  Demonstratives.  !Da6  and  jene6  are 
replaced  by  ba  (bar  before  a  vowel),  and  bte^  by  l)ier,  prefixed 
to  a  preposition  and  written  as  one  word  with  it : 

®at)OU  iDet^  id)  md)t^.  I  know  nothing  of  that, 

^iermit  tDtll  i^  f(^Iie^en»  With  this  I  will  close. 

Note. — This  substitution  of  bu  for  t>(l§  is  not  made  before  a  relative: 
3rf)  bac^te  an  ha^,  U)a^  ®ie  fagteu,  *  I  was  thinking  of  what  you  were 
saying.' 

EXERCISE   XLIV 

A.  3fuugen^,  3^uugen^ !  rief  ber  ge^rer,  jefet  bin  i(^  bfife 
Quf  eu^.  §at  e^  female  foli^e  2lufgaben  gegeben?  Qii) 
l^abe  beren  f(^on  me^r  aU  bret  !Du^enb  t^erbeffert  unb  fetne 
gefunben,  bte  ganj  rtrf)tig  tft.  ^nm  ©eifpiel,  ic^  finbe  in 
biefer  menigften^  fec^^ntal  ,,niir''  ftatt  ,,ntic^"  gefc^rieben. 
T)enft  einmal,  ift  e^  nic^t  f^redlid^,  benfelben  ge^Ier  fei^^mal 
in  einer  unb  berfelben  3lufgabe  gu  ntai^en?  T)k,  wtldje  id) 
je^t  in  bie  §anb  ne^me,  ^at  „Ia^  mir  ge^en"  ftatt  „Ia^  nti^ 
ge{)en''  u.  bgL  m.  (unb  bergleit^en  me^r).  3^ene  Slufgabe,  bie 
id)  eben  in  ben  "ipapierforb  tuerfen  moHte,  ift  bie  fc^Iimntfte  t)on 
atten.    ®o  eine  fc^ted^te  fjabe  ic^  nod)  nie  gefe^en;  i^  gtaube 


§  200]  LESSON   XLIV  l8i 

bie  tft  dtohtxt^;  bte  tDitnmeft  t)ott  ge()(ern,  ^e^t  tnu^  i^  tni) 
eitie  tud)ttge  (Strafe  aufer(egen,  3^erft  gebe  id)  eu^  bie  2luf* 
gaben  guriid  unb  bann  fod  Jeber  mir  fagen,  n)ie  Diele  gel){er 
er  \)at  !Cer,  totldjtx  tjott  3eI)Tt  bi^  fUnf^e^n  ijat,  foK  bie  3Iuf* 
gabe  einmat  abfcf)reiben;  berjenige,  tDetd^er  tion  fed^je^n  bi^ 
jtrangig  i)at,  [oil  fie  ^tDeimaf  abfc^reiben;  unb  bie{enigen,  bie 
tne^r  a(^  JtDan^ig  i^d)kx  ^aben,  mitffen  biefetbe  breimaf  ab* 
fd^reiben  unb  eine  ©tunbe  nad)fi^en. 

B.  Oral :  i.  Weshalb  war  der  Lehrer  auf  die  Schiller  bose? 
2.  Hatten  die  Schiiler  denselben  Fehler  oft  gemacht?  3.  In 
welcher  Aufgabe  fand  er  MaB  mir'  statt  Mafi  mich'?  4.  Fand 
er  sonst  dergleichen  Fehler  darin?  5.  Welche  Aufgabe  war 
die  schlimmste?  6.  Was  sagte  der  Lehrer  davon?  7.  Wessen 
Aufgabe  war  die?  8.  Welche  Schiiler  muBten  die  Aufgabe 
einmal  abschreiben?  9.  Welche  mufiten  sie  zweimal  abschrei- 
ben? 

C.  I.I  have  never  seen  so  fine  a  ring.  2.  It  is  much  finer 
than  my  sister's.  3.  This  is  a  beautiful  flower;  where  did  you 
(@ie)  find  it?  4.  These  are  not  my  books;  they  are  my 
brother's.  5.  You  are  mistaken;  they  are  George's.  6.  He 
who  says  that  sort  of  thing  is  no  friend  of  mine.  7.  Those  who 
are  richest  are  not  always  happiest.  8.  Which  Mr.  Meyer  do 
you  know?  9.  The  one  who  lives  in  Hall  St.  10.  That  is  the 
same  Mr.  Meyer  whom  I  know.  11.  Wines  of  this  sort  are 
always  dear.  12.  The  castle  on  that  hill  (yonder)  is  more  than 
five  hundred  years  old.  13.  I  cannot  believe  that  fellow  any 
more  ;  he  has  deceived  me  so  often.  14.  George  was  traveling 
with  my  cousin  and  his  (my  cousin's)  brother.  15.  He  is 
ashamed  of  his  conduct ;  he  is  ashamed  of  it.  16.  Mary  has 
written  to  Clara  that  her  mother  was  expecting  her  (Clara). 
17.  Goethe  and  Schiller  were  German  poets;  the  latter  died 
in  1805  and  the  former  in  1832. 

jD,  I.  Our  teacher  was  very  angry  with  us  yesterday.  2.  He 
said  he  had  never  seen   such  exercises.      3,  Those  we  had 


1 82  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  201 

written  were  the  worst  he  had  ever  seen.  4.  There  were  more 
than  three  dozen  of  them,  and  all  were  bad.  5.  The  worst  ex- 
ercise was  Robert's ;  it  teemed  with  mistakes.  6.  He  had  writ- 
ten '  mir  '  instead  of  *  mich  '  five  or  six  times.  7.  It  is  very  bad 
(jd^Iimm)  when  one  makes  the  same  mistake  more  than  once 
in  the  same  exercise.  8.  I  myself  had  written  MaB  mir'  twice 
instead  of  *  laB  mich,'  and  more  [mistakes]  of  that  kind.  9.  I 
don't  know  how  I  could  make  such  mistakes.  10.  Those  of 
us  who  had  done  our  exercise  worst  had  to  stay  in  for  an 
hour.     II.  Those  who  had  fewer  mistakes  had  to  copy  it. 

jE.  Lesestiick :  Ein  Gelehrter  sagte  eines  Morgens  zu  eini- 
gen  Bekannten  :  "  Ich  bin  soeben  von  einem  Menschen  rasiert 
worden,  der  in  Oxford  und  Heidelberg  die  hochsten  Ehren 
davongetragen  hatte,  und  auBerdem  als  sehr  gebildeter  Mann 
allgemein  bekannt  ist.  Und  doch  kann  er  einen  nicht  ordent- 
lich  rasieren  !  "  "  Aber  weshalb  in  aller  Welt  ist  denn  ein  so 
ausgezeichneter  Mann  Barbier?"  fragten  sie.  "  Ach  !  der  ist 
gar  kein  Barbier  !  Ich  habe  mich  heute  morgen  selbst  rasiert." 


LESSON  XLV 

201.  Interrogative  Adjectives. 

1.  totl^tx?    which?    what? 

2.  tt)a^  fitr  ein?    what  kind  of?   what? 

202.  Declension,      i.    SScI^cr?    follows  the  biefer  model. 
2.  2Bai^  ffi?  citt  is  declined  as  follows : 

Singular.  Plural, 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut.         All  Genders. 

N.  tt)a^  fiir  ein  tt)a^  fitr  eitic  n^a^  fitr  ein  tDa^  fiir 

G,  „     „  einc)^  ,,     „  einer     „     „  einc^  „     „ 

D.  ^     „  eincm  „     „  eincr     ,,     ,,  einem  „     „ 

A,  „     „  einen  „     „  eine       ,,     „  ein  „     „ 


§  2o6]  LESSON  XLV  185 

Observe  :  ©iit  only  is  declined,  agreeing  with  its  noun,  and 
being  omitted  in  the  plural. 

203.  Use  of  Interrogative  Adjectives. 
aBeI(^cr  9}?ann  tt)ar  ^ter  ?  Which  man  was  here  ? 

3Son  tvtiijtt  Same  f priest  er?  Of  what  lady  does  he  speak? 

5Ba^  fur  eincn  §ut  ^at  fie  ?  What  kind  of  (a)  hat  has  she  ? 

aSBa^  finb  ba^  fur  Slumen?  What  flowers  are  those? 

3Ba^  fur  §0(3  ^at  er?  What  kind  of  wood  has  he? 

9Be((^(C!^)  SSergniigen !  What  pleasure  ! 

3Ba^  f iir  Setter !  What  weather  ! 

aSetc^  etn  (Sturm !  What  a  storm  ! 

Observe  :  i.  9Bai3  filt  citt  is  often  divided,  the  fUr  em  with  its 
noun  following  the  verb. 

2.  @ttt  is  omitted  after  tt)a^  filr  with  names  of  materials. 

3.  2&e(d)cr  and  toa§  fitr  (tin)  are  also  used  in  exclamatory 
sentences,  the  neuter  lt)elcl)e^  often  dropping  the  termination, 
and  always  before  etn* 

204.  Interrogative  Pronouns. 

1.  irelc^er?  which?  which  one? 

2.  totx?  who? 

3.  tua^?  what? 

205.  Declension  of  tocld^cr.  As  pronoun  it  follows  the  biefer 
model,  but  lacks  the  genitive. 

206.  Use  of  mid)CV  ? 

SBeld^er  t)Ott  3^nen  ift  Slrjt?     Which  of  you  is  a  doctor? 
SBelc^cr   Don    btefen    !j)ameu  To  which  of  these  ladies  does 

ge^5rt  ber  gadder?  the  fan  belong? 

SBetc^er  (melc^e)  t)on  eud^?        Which  of  you? 
SBelc^C^  [tub  QijXt  ^ritber?       Which  are  your  brothers? 

Observe:  i.  9Bc(d|ct?  asks  'which?'  of  a  number  of  per- 
sons or. things,  and  agrees  in  gender  with  the  noun  for  which  it 
stands. 


l84  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§207 

2.  The  neuter  singular  toti^c^?  is  used  directly  before  the 
verb  fein,  irrespectively  of  the  gender  or  number  of  the  subject. 

207.  Declension  of  tner  ?  and  tt)a^  ? 
Masc,  and  Fern.  Neuter, 

N,  iDer?  who?  tt)a^?  what? 

G.  meffen  (n)e^)?  whose?  iDeffeti  (tDe^)?  of  what? 

D.  tnem  ?  (to,  for)  whom  ?  — 

A,  tt)en  ?  whom  ?  lt)a^  ?  what  ? 

208.  Use  of  tticr?  and  UJa^? 

aSer  ift  biefe^  Sinb?  Who  is  this  child? 

SScr  finb  btefe  SKcinner?  Who  are  these  men? 

2Ben  meinen  ®ie?  Whom  do  you  mean? 

aSa^  ^at  er  gefagt?         ^  What  did  he  say? 

aSoDon  fprtd^t  er?  What  is  he  speaking  of? 

aSoran  benfen  ©te ?  What  are  you  thinking  of? 

aSc^^alb?  tne^tDegen?  On  account  of  what? 

Observe:  i.  293er?  is  used  of  persons  only,  for  all  genders 
and  both  numbers ;  tnai^  ?  is  used  of  things. 

2.  In  the  dative  or  accusative  with  prepositions,  ttiai^?  is 
replaced  by  ttiD  (tt)or  before  vowels,  except  in  toatUTU,  *what 
for?'  ' why ?')  prefixed  to  the  preposition  and  written  as  one 
word  with  it. 

3.  Prepositions  governing  the  genitive  prefix  ttie^. 

EXERCISE   XLV 

A.  ©utett  3J?orgen,  §err  iSraun.  —  ©uten  2}Jorgen;  barf 
i(^  fragen,  mit  mem  \^  bte  g^re  f)abe,  ju  fprecf)en? — .^rf)  ^ei^e 
®uftat)  9J?et)er  unb  ^be  einen  (Smpf eljlung^brtef  an  ®ie.  — 
aSon  tDem  ift  ber  Srief  ?  —  aSon  .^^rem  greunbe,  bem  ^errtt 
S)lttmer. — SBelt^en  germ  ©ittmer  meinen  ©ie  ?  Sen  2Bein== 
l^dnbler?  — g^ein,  ben  ®eiben{)dnbler  in§amburg.  — Unb  ma^ 
tDunfrfien  @ie  t)on  mir?  — 3^(^  fnc^e  eine  SteKung  nnb  moc^te 


§  2o8]  LESSON   XLV  185 

®ie  urn  3iat  unb  S3eiftanb  bitten*  —  SBa^  fUr  eine  @te((ung? 
—  (Sine  ©tefiung  al^  <Sucf)fu^rer  ober  and)  aU  ®efd)dft^rei* 
fenber,  —  3Ba^  t)aben  @ie  fonft  fur  (Smpfe^tung^briefe  ?  —  Qd) 
l^abe  tne^rere  fe()r  gute.  — Unb  tt)a^  finb  <Bk  fitr  ein  ?anb^== 
mann?  —  3^(J)  bin  ein  'ipren^e,  — Se(cf)er  (Sprarf)en  finb  ®ie 
mdc^tig?  — Singer  beni  (Snglifd)en  tann  id)  granjofifd)  unb 
(Spanif^,  — 3n  meffen  ©efc^dft  t^aren  @ie  angeftetU?  — ^^d) 
h)ar  brei  ^'titu^^  bei  §errn  ©ittmer,  —  3Iu^  n)eld)en  ©rimben 
finb  (gie  au^getreten?  —  SBeil  ba^  Slima  t)on  Hamburg  nteiner 
©efunb^eit  nid)t  gufagte.  —  ®ut ;  i^  n^ill  fe^en,  tt)a^  id)  fitr 
©ie  tun  fann- — 2Bann  barf  ii^  @ie  mieber  bemii^en?  — 
Somnten  ®ie  morgen  frii^  ^unft  \)aib  e(f» 

B.  I.  Who  is  knocking?      2.  What  a  noise  !      3.  Ask  the 
gentleman    what    his    name    is.      4.  What    is    your    name? 

5.  Please  tell  me  also  whom  you  wish  to  see  (fpred)en,  fr,), 

6.  What  (Voa^  fitr  ein)  letter  is  this,  which  you  have  brought 
with  [you]?  7.  From  whom  is  it?  8.  It  is  a  letter  of  recom- 
mendation which  Mr.  Dittmer  has  given  me.  9.  There  are 
two  Mr.  Dittmer[s]  ;  I  don't  know  from  which  it  is.  10.  It  is 
from  the  one  in  Hamburg.  11.  What  does  the  young  gentle- 
man want  of  Mr.  Braun?  12.  What  are  they  talking  about? 
13.  What  is  young  Mr.  Meyer's  calling?  14.  What  is  he,  an 
Englishman  or  a  German  ?  15.  What  languages  is  he  master 
of?  16.  What  else  has  he  learned?  17.  What  other  (fonft) 
letters  of  recommendation  has  he?  18.  Kindly  (bitte)  tell  me 
in  whose  business  [-house]  you  have  worked.  19.  Why  did  you 
leave?  20.  What  reasons  had  you?  21.  What  kind  of  a  cli- 
mate has  Hamburg?  22.  What  kind  of  a  position  are  you 
seeking?  23.  I  shall  be  able  to  tell  you  better  to-morrow  what 
I  can  do  for  you.  24.  At  what  o'clock  can  you  come  to-mor- 
row morning?  25.  Between  nine  and  ten,  if  I  may  trouble  you 
again. 

C.  Oral:  Answer  in  German  the  questions  in  B. 


1 86  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  209 

D,  Lesestuck:  Im  Jahre  1848  drohte  uberall  in  Deutschland 
eine  Revolution.  Auch  in  der  freien  Reichsstadt  Hamburg  fand 
ein  Aufstand  statt.  Eine  Menge  Menschen  lief  nach  dem 
Rathause  und  forderte,  den  Blirgermeister  zu  sprechen.  Dieser 
erschien  denn  auch  und  fragte  die  Leute,  was  sie  eigentlich 
wollten.  "  Eine  Republik  wollen  wir  !  "  "  Aber,  Kinder,  ihr 
habt  ja  schon  eine  !  "  "  Dann  wollen  wir  noch  eine,"  riefen 
die  begeisterten  Republikaner. 

LESSON  XL VI 

209.  Fractions,     i.   They  are  regularly  formed  by  adding 

-tcl  to  the  ordinal  stem  minus  its  final  -t^  and  are  neuter  nouns  : 

ein  S)rittcl  =  i;  brei  9StertcI  =  f;   fiinf  ginunbjtDatijtgftcI 
—  5 

Note.  —  The  termination  -tcl  is  a  weakened  form  of  ^cil,  *  part.' 

2.  The  *  half*  =  bic  ^iilftc;  *half '  as  adjective  or  adverb  = 
I)a(b;  as  adjective,  l^alb  is  inflected  and  follows  the  deter- 
minative : 

^te ,!palf  te  tnetne^  33ermogen^.    The  half  of  my  property. 
2)Jein  ^albe^  93ermogen.  Half  my  property. 

3)ie  ^Ibe  (Sdimeij.  The  half  of  Switzerland. 

Note.  — With  place  names  not  requiring  the  article,  the  uninflected 
!^db  may  be  used :  ^tiWs  grantreid),  *  The  half  of  France/ 

3.  The  fraction  35iertcl  is  prefixed  to  its  noun  : 

eine  SStertelftunbe.  A  quarter  of  an  hour. 

®ret  3SierteIftnnben.  Three  quarters  of  an  hour. 

210.  Mixed  Numbers  with  ]^aI6*  i.  Invariable  adjectives, 
expressing  mixed  numbers  with  the  fraction  '  half,'  are  formed 
by  adding  ~]^al6  to  an  ordinal :  anbert^alfi  =  \\ ;  brittet|aI6 

—  ^2* 

Note.  —  The  ordinal  is  one  higher  than  the  cardinal  of  the  English 
idiom,  and  anbertt)alb  is  used  for  i^-,  aitbcr  being  an  old  ordinal  for 
'second.' 


§  2IO]     ^  LESSON   XLVI  .  187 

2.  These  numerals,  except  attbert^atb,  are  now  almost  uni- 
versally replaced  by  jtDeiunbein^atb,  breiunbein^atb,  zc,  either 
as  invariable  adjectives  with  noun  in  the  plural,  or  as  variable 
adjectives  with  noun  in  the  singular : 

SBir     marfc^terten      breiunb-  We  marched  twenty-three  and 

3tDan3tg  unb  etn^alb  Mtikn.  a  half  leagues. 

Or:     breiunb^tDanstg    unb  Twenty-three  leagues  and  a 

eine  ^albe  9)ZeiIe.  half. 

Note.  —  Other  mixed  numbers  are  read  as  in  English;  15!  =  fuilfjc^lt 
unb  fieben  %d}ttt 

EXERCISE   XLVI 

A.  Slnna,  xoix  ^ben  gtDet  §erren  mit  beren  ©amett  auf 
!iDonner^tag  ju  Sttf^  etngelaben  unb  tc^  mo^te  ba^  SRotige  mit 
Q\}ntn  befprec^en*  ©te  mitffen  gleic^  auf  ben  Waxtt  gef)en, 
ha  man  frii^  morgen^  am  beften  einfaufen  fann.  —  ®c^on, 
gnabige  gran;  alfo,  ma^  brauc^en  ®ie? — ©rften^  beftetlen 
©ie  d^  2)u^cnb  3luftern ;  bann  jmeierlet  gletfd) :  einen  9?in* 
berbraten  ju  10|-  bi^  12|  *ipfunb,  fomie  ein  *^aar  §U^ner  ju  je 
3^  bi^  4  ^funb  unb  brei  ©unb  ©pargel.  —  SBte  t)ielerlet 
"iPubbing  gebenfen  ©ie  ju  geben?  —  ^tvtkxlti:  ©c^ofolabe* 
"ipubbtng,  ben  ©te  f^on  oft  gemac^t  ^aben,  unb  einen  2)?at^* 
))ubbing.  ^n  le^terem  get)oren  :  i  Saffe  9)2ai^me^I,  i  JIaffe 
©irop,  i  Jeeloffet  ©alj,  2^  gglbffel  gutter,  H  Slaffen  aWtfc^, 
ein  ei,  i  S^affe  SBaffer  unb  etn  iDenig  33?u^fatnu^.  -93einaf)e 
l^atte  xi)  ben  gtf^  t)ergeffen ;  alfo  no(^  4J  ^funb  2ac^^*  ^'ft 
noc^  9tI)etntDein  im  Seder? — SBtr  ^aben  ungefci^r  anbert^Ib 
!Du^enb  i^Iafi^en.  —  SBeniger  al^  bie  §a(fte  bat3on  mirb  ge* 
niigen,  SBie  balb  fonnen  ©ie  juriid  [ein  ?  —  ^n  brei  23ierte(* 
[tunben  ;  e^  ift  ja  nicfjt  iDett  jum  30?ar!te. 

B.  Oral  (read  the  following  in  German,  and  answer  7)  : 
I.  Addieren  Sie  ^,  f,  ^  und  -j\.  2.  Wie  viel  macht  |^,  -^^^ 
und   ^%\?     3.   Subtrahieren   Sie    8of  von    looj^p     4.  Multi- 


1 88  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  210 

plizieren  Sie  f  mit  f.  5.  Wie  dividiert  man  2^  durch  |? 
6.  I  +  (plus)  ^^  —  (minus)  f  X- 1-  -f-  2|.  7.  Der  wievielte  Teil 
von  i2isti?  2?  3?  4?  5?  6?  7?  8?  9?  10? 

C  I.  When  one  invites  guests  to  dinner,  one  must  purchase 
what  is  necessary.  2.  Father  had  invited  two  German  gentle- 
men with  their  wives.  3.  After  breakfast  mother  and  Anna 
were  discussing  the  necessary  purchases.  4.  Anna  was  to  go 
to  the  market  at  once.  5.  It  is  better  to  make  purchases  in 
the  morning  than  in  the  afternoon.  6.  Mother  said  we  required 
a  roast  of  beef  of  eight  or  eight  and  a  half  pounds.  7.  Anna 
was  also  to  order  three  and  a  half  dozen  oysters,  a  pair  of 
chickens  of  about  four  and  a  half  pounds  apiece,  and  two  and 
a  half  pounds  of  fish.  8.  Anna  asked  mother  how  many'  kinds 
of  pudding  she  was  going  to  have.  9.  "Two  kinds,"  said 
mother,  and  asked  Anna  if  she  could  make  an  Indian  meal 
pudding.  10.  '*Yes,  ma'am,"  said  the  latter,  "you  (matt)  take 
two  and  a  half  cups  of  milk,  three  and  a  half  tablespoons  of 
cornmeal,  half  a  cup  of  molasses,  a  quarter  of  a  teaspoon  of 
salt  and  a  little  nutmeg.  11.  Then  you  let  it  bake  for  three 
quarters  of  an  hour."  12.  Anna  then  went  to  the  market  to 
order  the  meat  and  vegetables.  13.  She  returned  earlier  than 
she  expected,  for  she  was  back  in  half  an  hour.  14.  She  is  an 
industrious  girl,  and  is  always  very  punctual. 

D.  Lesestlick :  Hier  ist  noch  ein  Tisch  frei ;  bitte,  meine 
Herren.  —  Die  Speisekarte,  bitte.  —  Hier,  mein  Herr  ;  Suppe 
gefallig?  —  Ja,  bringen  Sie  uns  Suppe.  —  Wunschen  Sie  eine 
Vorspeise?  —  Ja,  geben  Sie  uns  ein  Dutzend  Austern.  —  Schon. 
Wunschen  Sie  Gemlise?  — Bringen  Sie  uns  griine  Bohnen  und 
Kartoffeln. — Was  fur  Fleisch? —  Flir  mich  Kalbsbraten.  — Was 
essen  Sie  zum  Nachtisch  ?  —  Kase  und  Obst.  — Was  flir  Obst? 
Birnen  oder  Weintrauben? — Ein  paar  Weintrauben.  —  Eine 
Tasse  Kaffee  gefallig?  —  Ja.  Kellner,  die  Rechnung,  bitte. — 
Hier,  mein  Herr,  M.  9.25.  —  Hier  sind  zehn  Mark.  Das 
iibrige  ist  flir  Sie.  —  Danke,  meine  Herren,  Adieu  ! 


§  213]  LESSON  XLVII  189 

LESSON  XLVII 

211.  Relative  Pronouns. 

1.  ber,  who,  which,  that. 

2.  U)e((i)er,  who,  which,  that. 

3.  Itier,  he  (the  one)  who,  whoever. 

4.  iDa^,  what,  that  which. 

5.  be^g(eic^en,  the  hke  of  whom,  etc. 

6.  bergletcf)en,    "    "    "      " 

For  declension  and  use  of  bet  and  tticldjcr,  see  §§  72-74; 
ton  and  tva§  are  decUned  Hke  the  interrogatives  lt)er?  and  iDa^? 
(§  207). 

212.  Use  of  tocr  and  toa^. 

aScr  nic^t  ^oren  tDltt,  mu^  He  who  (those  who)  will  not 
fit^Ietl.  hear  must  feel. 

SSa^  tc^  [age,  tft  ttJa^r.  What  (that  which)  I  say  is  true. 

©r  mill  ntc^t  ftubieren,  ttia^  He  will  not  study,  which  is  a 
f(J)abe  x)t  pity. 

Silled,  ttja^  er  fagt.  All  (that)  he  says. 

T)a^  Sefte,  ttia^  id)  ^abe.  The  best  that  I  have. 

Observe  :    i.  2Bcr  and  toa§  as  relatives  are   indefinite  and 

compound  in  meaning,  and  include  the  antecedent. 

2.  '  He  who,'  *  those  who,'  are  rendered  by  tticr  in  general  state- 
ments only;  otherwise  by  ber(ientge)  +  relative  (§§  193-195). 

3.  SBai^  must  replace  the  relative  ba^  or  n)eI(J)e^  when  the 
antecedent  is  a  phrase,  and  may  replace  it  when  the  antecedent 
is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective. 

Note.  —  *Ever'  =  auti)  or  tmitter  after  a  relative  pronoun  for  additional 
emphasis:  3Ber  e^  anti)  (immer)  gefagt  ^at,  *  Whoever  has  said  it.' 

213.  Use  of  t>t^qUxd)cn,  bcrglcid^en* 

(gin  9)?ann,  bc^gleii^en  (^af.)  A  man  the  like  of  whom  I 
tc^  noc^  nie  begegnet  bin.  have  never  yet  met. 

(Sin  9J?ann,  bei^gleidien  norfi  A  man  the  like  of  whom  has 
nie  gelebt  ^at.  never  yet  Hved. 

Sinber,  bcrgleirfjen,  2C.  Children  the  Hke  of  whom,  etc. 


I90  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  214 

Observe  :  These  forms  are  indeclinable,  the  former  referring 
to  a  masculine  or  neuter  noun  in  the  singular,  the  latter  to 
feminine  or  plural  nouns. 

214.  Agreement  in  Person. 

!3)er  Slrjt,  tt)elc^er  ^ier  mar.  The  doctor  who  was  here. 

Qfi),  bcr  id^  bein  greunb  bin.  I  who  am  your  friend. 

23ater  unfer,  bcr  2)tt  im  §im==  Our  Father  who  art  in  heaven, 
met  bift. 

Observe  :  If  the  antecedent  is  in  the  first  or  second  person, 
the  relative  (in  this  case  always  bcr)  is  followed  by  the  personal 
pronoun  of  that  person. 

Note. — The  pers.  pron.  of  the  2nd  pers.  may  be  omitted,  in  which  case 
the  verb  is  in  the  3rd  pers. :  £)  @ott,  ber  im  §immel  ift ! 

215.  SBic  as  a  Relative.  @oIi^  etn  or  fo  ein  is  often  fol- 
lowed in  German  by  toit  (='as  '•)  and  a  personal  pronoun  agree- 
ing in  gender  and  number  with  its  antecedent ;  the  f otd^  or  fo 
may  also  be  omitted  : 

(©old),  fo)  ein  ^rtef,  toic  tDir     Such  a  letter  as  we  expected. 

t^n  erU)artetett. 
(®ol(^e)   grit(i)te,   ttlic  fie  in      Such  fruits  as  grow  in  India. 

3:nbten  n)ad)fen. 

216.  Word  Order  of  Relatives,  i.  A  relative  must  immedi- 
ately follow  its  antecedent  when  the  latter  precedes  the  verb 
of  a  principal  sentence  : 

©er  SKann,  bcr  geftern  "^ter  The  man  who  was  here  yester- 
mar,  ift  tDieber  gefomnten.         day  has  come  again. 

!5)en  SRann,  bcr  Je^t  rebet,  I  do  not  know  the  man  who  is 
fenne  ic^  ni(J)t.  speaking  now. 

2.    So  also  when  a  separation  would  cause  ambiguity  : 
Qi}  traf  einen  grennb,  ben  tc^    I  met  a  friend,   whom   I   had 
lange  ni(f)t  gefe^en  ^atte,  bei      not  seen  for  a  long  time,  at 
f einem  ^rnber.  his  brother's. 


§  21 6]  LESSON   XLVII  191 

3.  Similarly  when  the  antecedent  is  the  subject  of  a  depend- 
ent clause : 

Qd)  glaube,  ber  9)tann,  bcr,  tc.  I  think  that  the  man  who,  etc. 

4.  In  other  cases  the  relative  need  not  immediately  follow, 
and  the  relative  clause  should  not  needlessly  interrupt  the 
sentence  : 

Qd)  \nijtt  ben  §Ut   au^,  ber  I   picked  out  the  hat  I  liked 

tnir  am  beften  gefiet,  best. 

&    tt)tH    5Ur    ®tabt     juritcf,  He    means   to   return   to   the 

in  Ujclcffcr  er  geboren  n)nrbe.  town  in  which  he  was  born. 

EXERCISE   XLVII 

A,  5l(^  ber  per[tfd}e  ©tester  (Saabi  einntal  ju  (Sc^iff  auf  bent 
9Beere  fn^r,  fa^  man  ein  SBoot,  n)elcf)e^  anf  ba^felbe  jnfam.  g^e 
biefe^  aber  ba^  ®(^iff  errei^en  fonnte,  brac^  e^  entjtpei,  nnb 
gttjei  9Kdnner,  bie  firf)  bartn  befanben,  fielen  in^  SBaffer.  ©in 
SJJJatrofe  f|)rang  t)om  @d)iffe  in^  SBaffer  nnb  rettete  ben  einen, 
n)a^renb  ber  anbere  nmfam.  @aabi  fragte  ben  5Katrofen : 
,,.ffie^^atb  I)aft  bvi  bemjenigen,  ber  fc^mimmen  lonnte,  ba^ 
^tbtn  gerettet?''  „3Ba^  id)  tun  fonnte,  ba^  l^abe  id)  getan/' 
antmortete  jener,  „benn  ic^  fonnte  nnr  einem  f)elfen.  S)iefe 
2ften[c^en  maren  jmei  :©rUber,  bie  ic^  fannte :  3^^^^i^  ^^^ 
21U.  3)iefer  ^at  mir  ftet^  nnr  ®nte^  ern)ie[en,  nnb  mic^ 
tt)a^renb  einer  fdjmeren  Sranf^eit  gepf(egt,  n)a^  idj  i()m  je^t 
tiergolten  Ijaht ;  jener  be^nbelte  mid)  immer  mie  einen  §nnb 
un\>  id)  lie^  i^n  ertrinfen.  SBer  mein  geinb  gemefen  ift,  fann 
nicf|t  ermarten,  t>a^  id}  i^m  e^er  ^elfe,  a(^  einem  grennbe/' 
r,D  ®ott,  ber  bn  gerec^t  bift!''  rief  Saabi,  ,,n)er  anberen  ®nte^ 
tnt,  tut  \id)  felber  ®Vitt^ ;  totx  aber  anberen  53i)fe^  tut,  anf 
ben  fcillt  ba^  ®ofe  jnrlicf,  tt)a^  er  an  anberen  Derbroc^en  f)at." 

i?.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C  I.  He  who  studies  much  will  learn  much.  2.  Those  who 
study  most  will  learn  most.     3.  The  best  that  I  have  is  not  too 


192  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  216 

good  for  you.  4.  Whoever  has  done  that  is  no  friend  of  mine. 
5.  We  had  to  stay  in  [after  school],  which  was  a  pity,  as  the 
weather  was  so  fine.  6.  Make  a  pudding  like  the  one  (=  such 
as)  you  made  last  week.  7.  Saadi  was  a  poet  the  like  of  whom 
the  world  has  seldom  seen.  8.  He  lived  in  a  city  the  name  of 
which  I  have  forgotten.  9.  I  do  not  know  the  novel  the  title 
of  which  you  have  nam^d.  10.  What  I  have  said  I  have  said. 
II.  Ali  was  the  man  whose  life  the  sailor  saved.  The  one 
whom  he  did  not  help  has  perished.  12.  We  praise  Thee,  O 
God,  who  art  in  heaven  ! 

D,  I.  The  Persian  poet  Saadi  was  once  in  a  ship  at  (on  the) 
sea.       2.  He  saw  a  small  boat  which  was  approaching  the  ship. 

3.  This    boat,    in   which   were    two   men,    broke   to   pieces. 

4.  Only  one  of  the  unfortunates  who  were  in  it  could  swim. 

5.  A   sailor   who   was    in  Saadi's   ship  jumped  into   the    sea. 

6.  He  saved  the  one  who  could  swim,  and  let  the  other  drown. 

7.  Saadi  asked  him  why  he  had  saved  the  one  who  could 
swim,  and  not  the  one  who  could  not  swim.  8.  "  The  man 
whose    life  I  saved,"  said  he,   "  has   always   treated  me  well. 

9.  The  one  I  allowed  to  perish  was  his  brother,  who  always 
treated  me  badly.  10.  He  who  doesn't  help  me,  cannot  ex- 
pect that  I  should  help  him."  11.  The  good  that  we  do  to 
others  is  repaid  (tiergelten)  to  us.  12.  The  sailor  did  what  he 
could.     13.  We  should  always  do  what  we  can  to  help  others. 

E,  Sprichworter  (the  forms  of  tt)er  and  tt)a^  are  very  com- 
mon in  proverbs  and  maxims):  i.  Wer  A  sagt,  muB  auch  B 
sagen.  2.  Wer  Gott  vertraut,  hat  wohl  gebaut.  3.  Wem 
nicht  zu  raten  ist,  dem  ist  auch  nicht  zu  helfen.  4.  Wer  steht, 
sehe  zu,  dal5  er  nicht  falle.  5.  Wer  viel  saet,  wird  viel  ernten. 
6.  Was  man  nicht  hat,  kann  man  nicht  geben.  7.  Wer  anderen 
eine  Grube  grabt,  fallt  selbst  hinein.  8.  Wer  zuletzt  lacht, 
lacht  am  besten.     9.  Wer  nicht  arbeitet,  soil  auch  nicht  essen. 

10.  Wer  seine  Arbeit  fleiBig  tut,  dem  schmeckt  auch  seine 
Suppe  gut.  II.  Wer  lernt  am  Morgen,  hat  abends  keine 
Sorgen. 


§  2i8]  LESSON   XLVIII  193 

LESSON  XLVIII 

217.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

1.  man,  one,  they,  people,  etc.  6.  nidjt^^  nothing. 

2.  iebermann,  everybody,  etc  7.  etn  paar,  a  few. 

3.  jemanb,  anybody,  some  one,  etc.  8.  einer,  one,  some  one. 

4.  niemanb,  nobody,  not  anybody,  9.  feiner,   no   one,   none, 

etc.  neither. 

5.  etlDa^,  something,  anything.         10.   tDetdjer,  some,  any. 

218.  Wlan.  i.  This  pronoun  has  the  force  of  'one,*  'they,' 
*  we,'  '  you,*  '  people,'  etc.  (compare  French  on),  and  is  used 
only  in  the  nominative  : 

aWan    [agt,    ba^    ber    ^ontg  They  (people)  say  the  king  is 

!ran!  t'ft.  ill. 

£)I  unb  SSaffer  tann  man  nid^t  One  (we,  you)  cannot  mix  oil 

jufammen  mifd)en.  and  water. 

2.  2)Zan  must  not  be  replaced  by  a  personal  pronoun  : 

SSKan  n)irb  miibe,  tvtnn  man  A  man  (one)*  gets  tired  when 
tange  arbeitet.  he  works  a  long  time. 

3.  ©ittcr  sometimes  replaces  man  in  the  nominative,  and 
always  in  the  other  cases  : 

2Benn  cincr  miibe  ift,  fann  er  When  a  man  (one)  is  tired,  he 

nt(J)t  gut  arbeiten.  cannot  work  well. 

6^  tut  elncm  leib,  n)enn,  2C.       One  is  sorry  when,  etc. 

4.  The  possessive  adjective  and  the  reflexive  pronoun  corre- 
sponding to  man  are  fcitt  and  fic^  respectively : 

SJfan  follte  fic^  fcincr  ge^Ier  One  (we)  should  be  ashamed 
fc^dmen.  of  one's  (our)  faults. 

5.  The  man  construction  may  replace  the  passive  forms  with 
tt)erben,  but  only  when  the  agent  is  indefinite  or  unknown  : 

SBie  fd)reibt  man  ba^  SiJort?     How  is  the  word  written? 
SRan  ertaubt  un^,  ju  tanjen.     We  are  allowed  to  dance. 


194  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§219 

219.  3i<^t>ctmatttt,  jcmanb,  ttiemaitb*  They  are  used  in  the 
singular  only,  and  have  as  genitives  jebermanni^,  jematlbc^, 
ntemanbe)^^ 

^^ebertnattn^     (Sad^e    tft    nie-  Everybody's  business  is  no- 

manbei^  ©a(^e*  body's  business. 

@agen  @te  e^  nteTnanb(eTn),  Don't  tell  it  to  any  one. 

§aben  @ie  JeTnanb(en)  gefe^en ?  Have  you  seen  any  one? 

Note.  —  3emanb  and  ntemanb  sometimes  take  -cm  or  -tU  in  the  dat. 
and  -Clt  in  the  ace. 

220.  ^itoa^,  nxd^i^.     i.  These  are  indeclinable  forms : 

-3(^     ^abe     tttt>a^;      er   ^at    I    have    something;     he    has 
nt(f)t^.  nothing. 

2.  SttDa^  =  '  some '  before  nouns  in  the  singular,  and  also 
colloquially  as  a  pronoun  : 

^ttoa^  Srot.  Some  bread  (i.e.  not  much). 

§at  er  ®elb  ?   (Sr  ^at  Cttoa^.     Has  he  money?     He  has  some. 

221.  (Bin  paax.  This  form  is  indeclinable ;  paar  is  not  written 
with  a  capital : 

3Ktt  ein  paat  STalern.  With  a  few  dollars. 

222.  fitter,  feittcr*     i.  For  declension  and  general  use,  see 

§  31- 

2.  They  may  replace  jemattb  and  ntemanb,  respectively,  and 
always  do  so  before  a  genitive  or  t)On: 

S^  flo^ft  Ctttcr.  Somebody  is  knocking. 

Reiner  t)On  un^  glanbt  t^m.        Not  one  of  us  believes  him. 

223.  SBetr^cr.  For  declension,  see  §  31 ;  it  often  has  the 
force  of  '  some,'  referring  to  a  preceding  noun  : 

§at  er  SBein  ?    6r  \)at  tddd^m.    Has  he  wine  ?    He  has  some. 


§  223]  LESSON  XLVIII  1 95 

Note.  —  The  indeclinable  irgettb  is  prefixed  to  a  number  of  words  with 
intensive  indefinite  force :  irgeilb  jemanb  or  irgcnb  eilter,  *  anybody  (at 
all),'  'somebody  (or  other)';  irgcnb  ettt)a§,  'anything  (at  all),'  'some- 
thing (or  other)';  irgcnbtro,  'somewhere  (or  other),'  etc.;  gar  is  similarly 
used  before  negatives:  gar  fcin(er),  'none  at  all,'  'no  one  at  all';  gar 
nic^t^,  '  nothing  at  all,'  '  nothing  whatever.' 

EXERCISE   XLVIII 

A.  SBetin  irgenb  etnem  ettt)a^  ®ro^e^  gelungen  ift,  fo  gfaufit 
iebermann,  er  ijattt  ba^  aud^  tun  f5nnen,  tpentt  er  irgenb  ®e* 
legen^eit  ge^abt  l^atte,  !j)a^  meinten  auc^  bie  f^antfc^en  §df' 
tinge,  al6  ^oluntbu^  nac^  feiner  gntbedung  9lnieri!a^  attgemein 
beiDunbert  tDurbe,  3)ian  gab  i^m  gu  g^ren  ein  gro^e^  ©aft- 
ma^L  :33ei  bie[er  ©elegen^eit  fagte  jemanb  gu  ^otumbu^: 
„^a^  ift  ni^t^  Sefonbere^,  eine  neue  3BeIt  ju  entbeden;  ba^ 
t)dtte  irgenb  einer  tun  fbnnen.''  ^otumbu^  na^ni  ein  @i  unb 
fragte  ben  §errn,  ber  neben  i^m  fa^,  ob  er  ba^felbe  aufrec^t 
ftellen  fonne.  ytad)  einigen  SSerfuc^en  gab  biefer  e^  auf, 
©ann  t)erfu(^ten  e^  bie  anberen  ^erren  ber  3{eif)e  na(^,  aber 
niemanben  gelang  e^.  ©nbli^  na^m  ^olumbu^  felber  ba^  & 
unb  [e^te  e^  mit  einem  teii^ten  @to^e  auf  ben  Zi^d),  fo  ba^ 
bie  (Senate  nat^gab  unb  ba^  gi  aufred^t  ftanb.  „@o  etma^ 
ptten  ®ie  auc^  mof)(  tun  fonnen,  nteine  §erren/'  fprad)  er, 
,,aber  feiner  t)on  .^^nen  {)at  e^  getan ;  ba^  ift  ber  Unterfcf)ieb 
jtrifc^en  mir  unb  3^^nen/'  unb  Jeberntann  mu^te  i^m  rec^t 
geben. 

B.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C.  I.  Everybody  knows  that  America  was  discovered  by 
Columbus  in  1492.  2.  Before  his  time  people  knew  nothing 
of  the  new  world.  3.  It  was  believed  (use  man)  that 
there  was  no  land  beyond  the  sea.  4.  After  this  discovery 
people  admired  and  praised  him.  5.  As  usual  many  people 
said  that  this  was  no  great  thing  (nothing  great).  6.  Almost 
everybody  thought  he  could  have  done  the  same  [thing],     7.  So 


196  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  223 

it  is  (ge^^t)  always  when  anybody  succeeds  in  doing  anything 
special.  8.  When  Columbus  returned  from  America  a  great 
banquet  was  given  him.  9.  At  (bei)  this  banquet  he  heard 
somebody  say  :  "  I  could  have  done  that,  too,  if  I  had  only  had 
an  opportunity."  10.  Columbus  took  an  egg  and  said  :  **  Can 
any  one  of  you  set  this  egg  on  end?"  11.  Everybody  at  the 
table  tried  it;  nobody  succeeded.  12.  At  last  some  one 
asked  Columbus  if  he  could  do  it  himself.  13.  "Certainly," 
said  he,  "nothing  is  easier."  .  14.  With  a  shght  blow  on  the 
table  he  set  it  upright.  15.  "(My)  gentlemen,"  he  said, 
"  anybody  at  all  could  have  done  it,  but  why  did  nobody  do  it  ?  " 

D,  I .  Doctors  say  that  people  take  cold  most  easily  when 
they  are  tired.  2.  People  should  assist  not  only  their  friends, 
but  (fonbertt)  also  their  enemies.  3.  Is  there  anybody  at  the 
door?  4.  I  donH  see  anybody.  5.  Will  you  [have]  some 
meat?  .6.  No,  thank  you,  I  still  have  some.  7.  May  I  give 
you  anything  else?  8.  Has  he  any  money?  9.  He  has  some, 
but  only  a  few  marks.      10.   I  can  give  him  nothing  at  all. 

11.  Nobody  believed  that  Columbus  could  discover  America. 

12.  None  of  the   courtiers   could   have  discovered  America. 

13.  Not   one   of  the    gentlemen   could   set  the   egg  -upright. 

14.  Could  any  one  of  you  have  done  it?  15.  I  believe  I  could 
have  done  it  if  I  had  been  Columbus. 

E,  Lesestiick :  Zwei  Stunden  nach  Mitternacht,  es  war  am 
12.  Oktober,  riefen  zwei  Matrosen :  "Land!  Land!"  Sie 
hatten  auch  die  Kiiste  in  der  Tat  entdeckt.  Sie  waren  nur 
noch  zwei  Meilen  davon  entfernt.  Bei  Tagesanbruch  sah  man 
eine  schone  flache  Insel.  Kolumbus  kleidet  sich  in  Scharlach. 
Er  befiehlt,  die  Anker  fallen  zu  lassen,  die  Boote  zu  bemannen, 
und  mit  einer  Fahne  in  der  Hand,  die  man  zu  diesem  Zwecke 
verfertigt  hatte,  betritt  er  das  Boot.  Kolumbus  stieg  zuerst 
ans  Land,  fiel  auf  die  Kniee  und  betete.  Seinem  Beispiele 
folgte  die  ganze  Mannschaft,  die  mit  ihm  gelandet  war.  Auf 
diese  Weise  wurde  Amerika  entdeckt. 


§  226]  LESSON   XLIX  197 


LESSON  XLIX 

224.  The  Passive  Voice.  The  passive  voice  is  the  active 
voice  inverted,  that  is,  the  direct  object  of  the  active  becomes 
the  subject  of  the  passive,  and  the  active  subject  becomes  the 
agent ;  hence  only  transitive  verbs  can  have  a  true  passive. 

225.  Passive  with  toerben*  i.  This  passive  is  formed  by 
means  of  tDerben  (=  *  become')  +  the  past  participle  of  the 
verb  to  be  conjugated,  as  in  the  paradigm  below. 

2.  In  accordance  with  the  meaning  of  iDCrbetl^  this  form  of 
the  passive  indicates  a  passing  into  and  continuing  in  a  state  or 
condition. 

3.  It  is  used  whenever  agency  is  specified  or  implied ;  the 
personal  agent  is  denoted  by  t)On  +  dative ;  other  agency  by 
burd^  or  mtt : 

^tnber  tDerbetl  tlPtl  i^ren  &-  Chil'dren   are    loved    by   their 

tern  geliebt.  parents. 

@r  tnurbe  beftraft.  He  was  (being)  punished, 

©in   ^tnb   Itiirb  tntmer  hid^t  A  child  is  always  easily  led  by 

burd^  ®Ute  geleitet.  kindness. 

226.  Passive  of  (oben^  to  praise. 

Present. 
Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

I  am'  being  praised,  etc. 
tcf)  merbe  gelobt  ic^  merbe    gelobt 

"t^yx  iDirft       „     2c.  bu  tDcrbeft     ,,    zc. 

Imperfect. 
Indicative.  Subjunctive, 

I  was  (being)  praised,  etc. 
\i)  tourbe    (tt)arb)  gelobt    ^         tc^  n)urbe    gelobt 
bu  tDurbeft  (marbft)    „     :c.       bu  njitrbeft     ,.     :c. 


198  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  226 

Perfect. 
Indicative.  Subjunctive. 

I  have  been  praised,  etc. 
\i)  bin  gelobt  tDorben  \i)  fei    gefobt  raorben 

bu  bift      „  n     ^c,  bu  feieft    „         ,,      2C, 

Pluperfect. 
Indicative,  Subjunctive, 

I  had  been  praised,  etc. 

\i)  tt)ar   gelobt  toorben  td^  tDdre    gelobt  tt>«3rben 

bu  tDarft     „         ,,     :c.  bu  iDdreft     ,,         »      ic. 

Future. 
I  shall  be  praised,  etc. 

ic^  iDerbe  gelobt  merben  ic^  merbe    gelobt  U)erben 

bu  tt)irft       ,,         „      2c.  bu  iDerbeft     „         ,,      2C, 

Future  Perfect. 
I  shall  have  been  praised,  etc. 

tc^  trerbe  gelobt  tDorben  fein        t(J)  U)erbe   gelobt  tDorben  fein 
bu  iDirft      ,,        ,t        n  zc.    bu  merbeft     ,,         ,,        ,,  it* 

Conditional. 
Simple.  Compound, 

I  should  be  praised,  etc.  I  should  have  been  praised,  etc. 

\6)  miirbe    gelobt  merben        x6)  tDitrbe    gelobt  tDorben  fein 

bu  miirbeft     „         „     :c.    bu  n)urbeft      „        „        ,,  :c. 

Infinitive. 
Fres,     getobt  (ju)  ttJerben^  to  be  praised. 
Ferf.     gelobt  tDorben  (ju)  fein,  to  have  been  praised. 

Imperative. 
iperbe  gelobt,  2C.,  be  praised,  etc. 
Observe  :   The  prefix  gc-  of  geUJOrben  is  dropped  throughout 
in  the  passive. 

Notes. —  i.  The  impf.  and  plupf.  subj.  are  usually  substituted  for  the 
condl.  2.  The  fut.  perf.,  comp.  condl.,  perf.  infin.,  and  impve.  passive 
rarely  occur. 


§  228]  LESSON   XLIX  199 

227.  The  Passive  with  fetlt*  i.  A  passive  is  also  formed 
by  means  of  the  various  tenses  of  fcitt+  the  past  participle  of 
the  verb  to  be  conjugated. 

2.  This  form  of  the  passive  indicates  a  state  or  condition  re- 
garded as  complete  and  permanent,  and  as  resulting  from  the 
action  of  the  verb ;  it  is  never  used  when  agency  is  expressed 
or  implied,  and  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  passive 
with  trerbett: 

'J)ie   Saben  ttJCtbcn  um   je^n  The  shops  are  closed  at  ten 

Ut)r  gefd)Ioffett»  o'clock. 

®ie  ftttb  frf)OTl  gefc^Ioffen,  They  are  closed  already. 

2)a^  §au^  ift  Derfauft.  The  house  is  sold. 

Qd)  bin  bef^cifttgt  gcttiefcn.  I  have  been  busy. 

228.  Limitations  of  the  Passive,  i.  When  the  direct  object 
of  a  transitive  verb  is  a  thing  (not  a  person),  the  thing  becomes 
the  subject  in  the  passive,  the  person  remaining  as  indirect 
object : 

&  t)erfpra^  mir  §Ufe.  He  promised  me  help. 

§ilfe    tDUrbe    mir    t)on    i^m     I  was  promised  help  by  him. 
t)erfpro(^en. 

2.  Verbs  having  only  an  indirect  personal  object  in  German 
(often  transitive  in  English)  have  no  passive  form  : 

6itt  greunb  begegnete  mir.  I  was  met  by  a  friend. 

3.  Purely  intransitive  verbs  can  have  a  passive  in  the  im- 
personal form  only : 

(5^  tDUrbe  geftern  getanjt.  There  was  dancing  yesterday, 

©eftern  tDurbe  getanjt.  "      "       "           " 

Qd)  glaube,  ba^   je^t  getanjt  I  think  there  is  dancing  going 

iDirb.  on  now. 

Note.  —  @^  of  this  construction  is  omitted,  unless  it  immediately 
precedes  the  verb;  the  impers.  construction  is  sparingly  used,  and  is  usually 
replaced  by  the  matt  constr.  (§  218,  5). 


200  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  228 

4.  The  passive  is  much  less  used  in  German  than  in  English, 
being  often  replaced  by  a  matt  construction  (§  218,  5)  and 
occasionally  by  a  reflexive,  especially  with  laffen: 

a^  tDtrb  firfl  |cf)On  finben.  It  will  doubtless  be  found. 

S)a^  laftt  firfl  leid^t  madjen-  That  can  easily  be  done. 

EXERCISE   XLIX 

^.  Sn  ytom  lebtett  t)or  alter  ^dt  ^wd  blittbe  -Settler,  TdQ^ 
ixd)  fonttte  man  ben  ettten  in  ben  ©tra^en  rnfen  ^oren :  „SBem 
@ott  ^ilft,  bent  ift  ge^olfen!''  S)er  anbere  aber  rief :  „2Bent 
ber  Saifer  ^ilft,  bent  ift  ge^olfen!''  2ln(^  ber  S'ai[er  ^orte 
ba^,  nnb  lie^  ein  ^rot  baden  nnb  ntit  ©otbftitcfen  fitflen. 
S)a^  ©rot  murbe  auf  feinen  -Sefe^I  bent  -33Iinben  gegeben,  ber 
be^  H^aifer^  SKat^t  gepriefen  ^atte»  %U  jener  ba^  ft^ttjerc 
©einit^t  be^  ^rote^  fitl)Ite,  t)er!anfte  er  e^  bem  anberen 
©linben,  SSon  biefent  mnrbe  e^  nai^  @anfe  getragen  nnb 
erbro(^en,  liber  ba^  ®oIb,  wtldjt^  barin  entf)alten  tdav,  wav 
er  jnglei^  erftannt  nnb  erfrent,  &  banfte  ®ott  nnb  ^orte 
anf,  jn  betteln.  !J)er  anbere  Settler  n)ar  aber  no($  imnier 
gejiDnngen,  ^n  bettetn.  gr  iDnrbe  be^^alb  jnnt  Saifer  bernfen 
nnb  tjon  i^nt  befragt,  marnm  er  noij  imnier  bettle,  nnb  tva^ 
an^  bem  ©rote  gemorben  fei,  ba^  man  i^m  l)abe  geben  laffen. 
gr  antit)ortete,  ba^  ©rot  [ei  t)on  i^m  feinem  Sameraben  t^er* 
fanft  morben,  ba  er  ba^felbe  fnr  teigig  ge^alten  {)abe.  !Der 
Saifer  aber  rief:  ^^n  ber  J^at,  iDem  @ott  ^ilft,  bem  ift  ge* 
Ijolfen!''  nnb  ber  Slinbe  mnrbe  fortgejagt. 

B,  Oral :  i.  Von  welchen  Bettlern  wird  hier  erzahlt?  2.  Von 
welchem  wurde  Gottes  Macht  gepriesen  ?  3.  Womit  war  das 
Brot  gefiillt,  das  der  Kaiser  backen  lieB  ?  4.  Welchem  Bettler 
ward  es  gegeben?  5.  Wem  wurde  es  verkauft?  6.  Was  ward 
zunachst  aus  dem  Brote?  7.  Worliber  war  der  zweite  Blinde 
erfreut?  8.  Wozu  war  der  andere  gezwungen?  9.  Zu  wem 
wurde  er  berufen?     10.   Was  fragte  der  Kaiser?      11.    Was 


§  228]  LESSON   XLIX  201 

wurde  ihm  geantvvortet ?      12.   Was  sagte  der  Kaiser  dazu? 

13.  Was  geschah  endlich  diesem  Bettler? 

C  Continue:  i.  Ich  bin  vom  Lehrer  gelobt  worden,  du, 
etc.  2.  Ich  werde  von  ihm  bestraft  werden.  3.  Ich  ware  dazu 
gezwungen  worden.  4.  Es  wird  mir  nicht  erlaubt  werden,  aus- 
zugehen,  .  .  .  dir,  etc.  5.  Mir  ist  nichts  davon  gesagt  worden, 
dir,  etc.  6.  Man  glaubt  mir  nicht,  .  .  .  dir,  etc.  7.  Meine 
Aufgabe  ist  schon  abgeschrieben,  deine,  etc.  8.  Mir  wird 
geholfen,  dir,  etc. 

Z>.  I.  Two  bhnd  [men]  were  forced  to  beg  in  the  streets 
of  Rome.  2.  One  of  these  continually  extolled  the  power  of 
the  emperor.  3.  The  power  of  God  was  extolled  by  the  other. 
4.  The  emperor  had  a  loaf  baked.  5.  By  his  order[s]  it  was 
filled  with  gold-pieces.  6.  This  loaf  was  then  sent  to  the  beggar 
by  whom  the  emperor  had  been  extolled.  7.  When  it  was 
brought  (use  man)  to  him,,  he  said  it  was  heavy  and  doughy. 
8.  It  was  sold  by  him  to  his  comrade.  9.  When  it  had  been 
broken  open  by  the  latter,  he  was  rejoiced  at  the  gold  which 
was  contained  in  it.  10.  He  had  become  rich,  and  ceased 
to  beg.  II.  The  other  was  still  (no(f)  immer)  forced  to  beg. 
12.  The  emperor  caused  this  man  to  be  summoned.  13.  The 
beggar  was  asked  what  he  had  done  (mad)en)  with  the  loaf. 

14.  The  blind  man  replied  that  it  had  been  bought  by  his 
comrade.  15.  The  unfortunate  man  was  driven  away  and  was 
compelled  to  beg  agaia. 

E,    I.  If  I  had  lost  my  position,  I  should  be  forced  to  beg. 

2.  The  letter  is  already  written  and  will  be  copied  at  once. 

3.  Is  this  house  sold?  4.  When  was  it  sold?  5.  We  are  not 
allowed  to  go  out  when  it  is  raining.  6.  Are  you  allowed  to 
read  novels?  7.  When  I  said  that,  I  was  not  believed.  8.  It 
was  not  formerly  believed  that  the  earth  is  round.  9.  Nothing 
has  been  said  to  me  of  the  matter.  10.  If  they  did  what  they 
should,  they  would  be  helped.  11.  He  has  been  promised 
help  by  everybody.     12.  This  officer  has  been  thanked  by  the 


202  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  229 

emperor.     13.  There  will  be  dancing  at  (in)  the  party  to-mor- 
row.    14.  I  have  been  told  that  Mr.  Sauer  is  ill. 

F,  Lesestiick :  Ein  Soldat  war  von  einer  Flintenkugel  ver- 
wundet  worden.  Die  Arzte  machten  mehrere  Einschnitte,  um 
sie  herauszunehmen.  Der  Soldat  verlor  zuletzt  die  Geduld  und 
fragte,  warum  sie  ihn  so  qualten.  *'Wir  suchen  die  Kugel," 
sagten  sie.  "Warum  haben  Sie  mir  das  nicht  friiher  gesagt  ? 
Ich  habe  sie  in  der  Tasche,"  erwiderte  der  Soldat. 


LESSON  L 

229.  Indefinite  Pronominal  Adjectives. 

1.  all,  all  (the).  5.  eittige,  some,  a  few. 

2.  gang,  all,  whole,  the  whole     6.  etlii^e,     "      "   " 

(of).  7.  mehrere,  several. 

3.  Jeber   (}ebtt)eber,  ieglti^er),     8.  genug,  enough. 

each,  every.  9.  me^r,  more. 

4.  manc^er,  many  a  (one).  10.  t»te((e),  much  (many). 

II.  tt)enig(e),  Httle  (few). 

Remark;  All  the  above  may  be  used  as  adjectives  or  as 
pronouns. 

230.  5tU.   I.   This  word  expresses  number  as  well  as  quantity ; 
when  declined  it  follows  the  bie[er  model : 

3lffe^  Srot ;  aHc  tinber.  All  the  bread ;  all  (the)  children, 

gr  ^at  alle^,  tua^  er  tt)itn|(^t.     He  has  all  he  wants. 
S)te  Snaben  finb  alle  {)ier.         The  boys  are  all  here. 

Note.  —  5(tt  is  never  followed  by  the  unstressed  definite  article. 

2.  With  a  possessive  adjective  it  always  precedes,  and  re- 
mains uriinflected  in  the  singular  : 
Sfff  i^r  ®elb  ;  aUc  i^re  §Ute.     All  her  money ;  all  her  hats. 


§233]  LESSON   L  203 

3.  5(U  stands  appositively  with  a  noun  or  pronoun  : 
Qij  fenne  fie  aHc*  I  know  all  of  them. 

231.  (Ban^.  i.  This  adjective  expresses  quantity,  not  num- 
ber, and  denotes  an  object  as  complete  and  undivided  ;  when, 
therefore,  the  English  '  all'  =  *  the  whole,*  it  must  be  rendered 
by  gans : 

Qd)  arbeite  ben  gan^cn  ZaQ.     I  work  all  (the  whole)  day. 

2.  ®an5  is  declined  like  an  adjective,  and  always  follows  the 
determinative  : 

55er  ganje  Zaq.  The  whole  day. 

3)Zein  qanic^  gigentum.  The  whole  of  my  property. 

3.  Before  proper  names  of  places,  unaccompanied  by  an 
article  or  other  determinative,  it  may  remain  uninflected  : 

©anj  (or  ba^  gan^e)  gnglanb.   The  whole  of  England. 

Bu^:  ©ie  ganje  ©C^lDeij.  The  whole  of  Switzerland. 

232.  3ci»cr  (jcbtticbcr,  jcglidicr).  i.  Qtbtx  (biefer  model)  is 
used  to  denote  each  individual  belonging  to  a  class  : 

3cbcr  SSanm  I)at  Sfte.  Every  tree  has  branches. 

2.  It  is  sometimes  preceded  by  ein,  and  then  follows  the 
mixed  adjective  declension : 

(Sr  ^at  einem  jebcn  gebanft.       He  thanked  each  one. 

3.  It  replaces  iebermatttl  before  a  genitive  or  twit : 

(Sin)  jcber  t)On  ben  §erren.        Every  one  of  the  gentlemen. 
Note.  —  3cbtt)eber,  jcgUdier  are  less  common  substitutes  for  jeber. 

233.  9Jlan(i^er  (btefer  model)  may  remain  uninflected  before 
an  adjective  : 

SJJanc^e^  3"^^^  ift  tierfloffen.      Many  a  year  has  gone  by. 
9[)?an(J)e  iDaren  gugegen.  Many  (people)  were  present. 

dJlanijcx  gutc  (man(^   gntcr)  Many  a  good  man. 
maun. 


204  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  234 

234.  ©ittigc,  ctlidjc,     i.  They  follow  the  biefer  model,  and 
denote  a  small  number  : 

9Sor  etntgcn  (etlicfjen)  ^ci^ten,  A  few  years  ago. 
©inige  maren  un^ufrieben.         Some  were  dissatisfied. 

2.  They  are  used  in  the  singular,  but  only  before  nouns  of 
quantity,  material,  etc.,  to  denote  a  limited  amount : 
Qd)  \}aht  etnige!^  ®elb.  I  have  some  money  (not  much). 

Note.  —  Unless  the  idea  of  limited  quantity  is  emphasized,  *  some  '  and 
*  any '  are  omitted  when  rendering  into  German. 

235.  @ett«o,  mc^r*     i.  They  are  indechnable,  and  are  also 
used  adverbially : 

@r  tft  tvtit  genug  gegangen.       He  has  walked  far  enough. 
-3cf)  f)abe  melir  ®elb  al^  ©te»      I  have  more  money  than  you. 

2.  ®enug  always  follows  its  adjective  or  adverb,  but  may 
precede  or  follow  its  noun  : 

J)a^  tft  f(f)ItTnm  gcnug.  That  is  bad  enough. 

®elb  genug  (or  genug  ®elb).        Money  enough. 

236.  aWeljrerc  is  mostly  used  in  the  plural  (biefer  model)  : 
3Ke^rerc  (Seute)  murben  franf.     Several  (people)  fell  ill. 

Note.  —  The   neut.   sing.    mt^XtXt^   is   sometimes   used    as   a   pron. : 
Tlel}Xext§  ift  gefd)ei^en,  *  Several  things  have  happened.' 

237.  S^fcl,  ttJcntg.     i.  They  usually  remain  uninflected  in  the 
singular  when  used  adjectively: 

S^i)  ^abe  tt)entg  (t)tel)  ®elb.        I  have  little  (much)  money. 

2.  ©in  iDCtttg  (uninflected)  =  *a  little '  : 

3}?it  em  trienig  ®elb.  With  a  little  money. 

§aftbu®elb'?     gin  tpetltg.  Have  you  money?     Alittle. 

3.  They  are  usually  declined  in   the  plural,  and  always  so 
when  used  pronominally : 

SBaren  t)telc  Seute  jugegen?         Were  many  people  present? 
g^  trarett  nur  iDenige  ba.  There  were  only  a  few  there. 


§  237]  LESSON   L  205 

EXERCISE    L 

A.  @^  ift  in  ber  Zai  fc^recflic^,  menn  bie  fefte  (5rbe  einem 
unter  ben  git^en  bebt  nnb  jittert.  gin  jebe^  f)eftiGe^  grbbe- 
ben  toftet  Diefe  3)?en[d)en(eben,  aber  fetten  fo  t)ie(e  Staufenbe, 
tT)ie  ba^ienige,  \od&}t^  am  28.  S)e5ember  1908  in  ^talien  ftatt* 
fanb  nnb  bie  ganje  Sett  ntit  ©ntfe^en  erfUHte,  ©anje  (gtdbte 
in  S'alabrien  nnb  (gijilien  tt)nrben  babnr(^  i)erni(J)tet  nnb  nnr 
iDenige  35orfer  blieben  nnbefc^cibigt.  3ln^  einer  ©tabt  fam  bie 
fnrc^tbare  9^ac^ri(^t,  ba^  famtHc^e  ginmo^ner  nm^  Seben  ge^^ 
fommen  feien.  3n  9)^^lTitta  maren  in  fnrjer  ^di  faft  al(e 
gro^en  ©ebiinbe  fomie  manege  t)on  ben  Meineren  ^cinfern 
ganj  jerft5rt  nnb  ntan(^  alter  Jempet  jerrltttet.  2ln  ntancf)en 
Drten  maren  fo  menige  9Wenfd^en  nnDerle^t  geblieben,  ba^ 
beren  nic^t  genng  iDaren,  nm  ben  anberen  bei^nfte^en.  33iele 
tion  biefen  genten  Dertoren  aCe^,  ni(^t  nnr  alt  i^re  ^aht,  fon* 
bern  and)  Seib  nnb  Sinb,  bie  nnter  ben  SCrltntmern  begraben 
lagen.  J)iefe^  grbbeben  ^at  t)iel  me^r  2Kenf c{)enteben  gef oftet, 
at^  ber  ganse  bentf(^=fran5ofifc^e  ^rieg. 

B.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C.  I.  All  the  pupils  have  come.  2.  All  my  relatives  live  in 
Germany.  3.  Mr.  B.  is  quite  poor  now ;  he  has  lost  all  his 
money.  4.  Could  you  not  lend  me  some  money?  5.  I  have 
only  a  few  marks,  but  I  will  lend  you  all  I  have  with  me. 
6.  Pardon  me ;  I  had  quite  forgotten  your  name.  7.  When 
any  part  at  all  of  the  earth  trembles,  the  whole  earth  trembles 
more  or  less.  8.  Every  one  of  the  courtiers  tried  to  set  the  egg 
upright.  9.  Many  tried  it,  but  only  a  few  succeeded.  10.  If 
one  [man]  does  evil,  many  suffer  by  it  (babnrc^).  11.  Many  a 
good  man  suffers  for  others.  12.  A  little  is  better  than  nothing 
at  all.  13.  Some  of  the  pupils  are  here ;  the  others  have  not 
come  yet.  14.  They  should  be  here  every  morning  at  9 
o'clock.  15.  I  visited  Sicily  some  years  ago.  16.  Money  lost, 
little  lost ;  friends  lost,  much  lost ;  courage  lost,  everything 
lost. 


2o6  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  238 

D.  I.  It  is  something  terrible  when  the  earth  trembles  under 
one's  feet.  2.  Almost  every  year  earthquakes  take  place  in 
some  part  or  other  of  the  world.  3.  Some  of  them  are  not 
very  violent.  4.  By  others  whole  towns  are  destroyed  and 
many  thousands  perish.  5.  Among  the  most  violent  earth- 
quakes of  our  time  was  that  of  (t)on)  San  Francisco  in  1906. 
6.  On  that  occasion  almost  the  whole  of  the  city  was  destroyed 
by  fire.  7.  Several  hundreds  of  the  inhabitants  lost  their  lives. 
8.  The  earthquake  in  Italy  in  1908  was  something  much 
more  dreadful.  9.  Many  of  the  towns  and  villages  of 
Sicily  and  Calabria  were  entirely  annihilated.  10.  In  a  few 
minutes  the  whole  city  of  Messina  lay  in  ruins.  11.  Very 
few  of  the  inhabitants  remained  uninjured.  12.  Many  children 
lost  their  parents.  13.  Many  a  father  had  lost  wife  and  child. 
14.  Almost  all  had  lost  all  their  possession[s].  15.  All  Italy 
was  filled  with  horror.  16.  It  cost  more  human  Hves  than  all 
the  earthquakes  of  the  last  hundred  years. 

E,  8e[eftii(f : 

®er  bu  t)on  bem  §immel  btft, 
Sltle^  8eib  unb  ©djmerjen  [tiHeft, 
®en,  ber  boppelt  etenb  \\i, 
©oppelt  mit  (Srqutdung  fiideft, 
9ld),  icf)  bin  be^  Sl^retben^  mitbe ! 
Sa^  foil  aH  ber  ©cfimerg  unb  8uft? 
©ii^er  grtebe, 
^omm,  ad)  fomm  in  metne  4Bruft! 


LESSON  LI 

238.  Adverbs,  i.  Most  adjectives  may  be  used  as  adverbs 
without  change  ;  for  comparison  of  adverbs,  see  Less.  XXXIX. 

2.  The  ordinary  rules  for  the  formation  and  derivation  of 
adverbs  are  omitted  here ;  adverbial  forms  are  best  learned  by 
observation  and  from  the  dictionary. 

3.  The  following  sections  contain  examples  of  the  more  diffi- 
cult idiomatic  uses  of  certain  adverbs. 


§243] 


LESSON   LI 


207 


239.  5luri|. 

3luc^  id)  trar  gegen  iijU.  Even  I  was  against  him. 

3)iein  ^ruber  wax  nidjt  tniibe,     My  brother  was  not  tired,  and 

unb  id)  and)  nic^t,  I  was  not  tired  either. 

Qd)  bin  ntube.  —  Qd)  and).  I  am  tired.  —  So  am  I. 


240. 

@r  it)irb  bo'^  fommen. 
&  iDtrb  bo^  fo'Tttmen. 
§abe  tc^  e^  bod)  gefa'gt! 
§aft  bu  e^  nxd)t  geprt? 
©o'di ! 

Qd)  ijabt  e^  nic^t  getan. 
®ie  ^aben  e^  bo'd)  getan. 
^ommen  @ie  boc^  herein. 


He  will  come  after  all. 
He  will  come,  I  hope. 
I  said  so  (didn't  I)  ! 
Didn't  you  hear  it? 
I  did. 

I  didn't  do  it. 
Yes,  you  did. 
Pray  (do)  come  in. 


Observe  :  i.  In  exclamatory  sentences  with  hod)  (see  third 
example)  the  verb  often  begins  the  sentence. 

2.  T)od)  gives  an  affirmative  reply  to  a  negative  statement  or 
question. 

241.  ©ben. 

'©a^  ift  eben,  ica^  id)  merne.       That  is  just  what  I  mean. 
Sr  ift  eben  angefommen.  He  has  just  arrived. 


24». 

grft  ben!en,  bann  fprec^en. 
gr  fomtnt  erft  am  greitag. 
®ie  ift  erft  jtrei  ^^a^re  alt. 

243.  ®crtt. 

Qd)  effe  gem  ^i^d). 

S)a^  mag  gem  feitt. 

Qd)  tDlirbe  e^  gem  tun. 

gr  morf)te  Ueber  nid)t  fommen. 

Sr  fame  gem. 


First  think,  then  speak. 

He  isn't  coming  before  Friday. 

She  is  only  two  years  old. 


I  am  fond  offish. 

That  may  well  be. 

I  should  gladly  do  it. 

He  would  rather  not  come. 

He  would  like  to  come. 


2o8  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  244 

244.  Sa. 

Jun  @te  e^  ja'*  Be  sure  to  do  it. 

dx  t[t  ja  metn  SSa'ter.  He  is  my  father,  you  know. 

©a^  f)atte  id)  [a  tjergeffen.         Why,  I  had  forgotten  that. 

245.  mod^. 

©tub  ®ie  nO(f)  t)ter  ?  Are  you  still  here  ? 

Qd)  wax  nO(J)  nie  bort.  I  was  never  there. 

9foc^  t)eute ;  noc^  geftern ;  nod^  To-day  at  the  latest;  only  yes- 

immer*  terday ;  still. 

^od)  tint  Xa]\t;  noc^  glDCt.  Another  cup;  two  more. 

9^od^  einmaf  fo  ttieL  As  much  again. 

Observe  :    ^od)  precedes  the  negatives  nie,  nirfjt,  IC* 

246.  ^ttr. 

^ommen  ®ie  nur  herein.  Just  come  in. 

SBa^  tDiinfcf)en  ®ie  nur  ?  What  do  you  want  (anyway)? 

247.  8(!)iJtt. 

©inb  ©te  [c^on  ba?  Are  you  there  already? 

@^on  ^eute.  Not  later  than  to-day. 

3ft  fie  f(^on  in  9tom  getnefen?  Has  she  ever  been  in  Rome? 

^C^  bin  f(^on  ad)t  Zag^t  ijitx.  I  have  been  here  for  a  week. 

2)a^    ©d^iff   ift   f(J)on  geftern  The  ship  arrived  (as  early  as) 

angefommen,  yesterday. 

(5r  mirb  f(^on  !omnten.  He  will  surely  come, 

gr  ift  je^t  f(^on  ba.  He  is  there  by  this  time. 

248  ^ol)l 

©ie  finb  mo^I  ntitbe.  I  suppose  you  are  tired. 

Sranf  ift  er  tDoI}!,  aber  nic^t  He  is  ill,  to  be  sure,  but  not 

gefa^rlit^.  dangerously. 

T)a^  ift  tt)0l)I  ma^r.  That  is  no  doubt  true. 

J)a^  mag  IDO^I  fein.  That  is  very  hkely  so. 


§  249]  LESSON   LI  209 

249.  Bucrft. 

3)iefe^  ®(^tff  fatn  juerft  an.      This  ship  arrived  first. 

Qi}    gel)e    juerft   (erft)    gum  I  am  going  first  to  the  tailor's, 

@cf)neiber,  batin  jum  ^ndj-      then  to  the  bookseller's. 

^anbter. 

EXERCISE   LI 

A,  gin  ©Iciubtger  fatn  eine^  9}Jorgen^  ju  etnem  T)ii)ttv, 
aU  btefer  no(^  ju  ^ett  (ag,  unb  ijattt  f(J)on  ba^  ganje  3^^^^: 
burc^fuc^t,  al^  berfelbe  ermacfite, — SBa^  iDoHen  ®ie  nur? 
fragte  er.  —  Seien  ®te  boi^  f o  gut,  biefe  Stec^nung  gu  begleicfjen. 

—  (2e^r  gerne,  aber  fet)en  @te  erft  in  {ener  ©c^ubtabe  nac^,  ob 
ba  ®elb  liegt.  —  'I)a^  I)abe  ic^  erft  eben  getan.  —  S)ann  tierfudjen 
®ie  e^  borf)  mtt  ber  anberen.  —  2lu(^  ba  tft  nid^t^  ;  ba  ^abe  id) 
juerft  gefud)t,  —  3luf  bent  SEtfc^e  ()aben  @te  tDo^t  nic^t  nad)^ 
gefe^en? — Dod^ ;  aber  ba  ift  eben  fo  tt)entg  gufe^en.  —  §aben 
(gie  au^  int  @cf)retbtif(^  gefui^t  ?  —  3luc^  ba,  aber  t^ergeben^. 

—  §abe  id)'^  tntr  bod)  gebad)t!  ©^  wax  nod)  geftern  3lbenb 
ntd)t^  barin.  !Dann  ntuffen  ®te  woijl  ntetne  Za^djtn  burt^^ 
fud)en.  —  S)a^  tft  auft  fd)on  gefi^et)en.  —  ®a^  tft  Jd  unglaub* 
Ud) !  9Ja,  trenn  fic^  ujeber  in  ben  (2d)ub(aben  no(^  fonft  irgenbtt)o 
@elb  beftnbet,  fo  fann  tc^  Ste  unnti^gUd)  bejalilen.  Sontmen 
(2ie  nur  noc^  etnntal  unb  t^ergeffen  @ie  [a  ntd)t  bte  9te(^nung 
ntitjubringen.    2l(f o,  auf  ffiteberfel)en ! 

B,  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C,  I.  Speak  louder,  I  pray  you  ;  I  can't  hear  you.  2.  Just 
read  the  letter,  if  you  wish  (to).  3.  Uncle  has  just  arrived ; 
aunt  is  not  coming  till  Monday.  4.  I  would  rather  not  go  to 
the  theater  this  evening.  5.  First  (the)  business  and  then  (the) 
pleasure.  6.  Be  sure  not  to  take  that  book  ;  I  have  only  read 
the  half  of  it.  7.  Who  arrived  first,  your  uncle  or  your  aunt? 
8.  Your  cousin  must  have  arrived  in  Berlin  by  this  time.  9.  I 
should  like  to  know  whether  he  is  there  already.     10.  That  is 


2IO  GERMAN   GRAMiMAR  [§250 

just  what  I  should  like  to  know  myself.  11.  I  have  only  ten 
marks  left  (=  still).  1 2.  Do  take  another  piece  of  roast,  Miss  L. 
13.  Why,  I  have  twice  as  much  as  I  can  eat.  14.  You  surely 
don't  mean  that!  15.  Yes,  I  do.  16.  I  haven't  seen  Mr. 
Braun  since  Easter.  17.  Neither  have  I.  18.  I  suppose  he 
isn't  in  town.     19.  Yes,  he  is  ;  my  wife  saw  him  only  yesterday. 

D,  I.  The  tailor  has  come  and  wants  his  money.  2.  He 
should  not  have  come  when  I  am  still  in  bed.  3.  I  suppose 
you  didn't  tell  him  I  was  sleeping.  4.  O  yes,  I  did.  5.  He  • 
has  been  here  for  the  last  hour.  6.  He  says  he  would  hke  to 
have  his  money  not  later  than  to-day.  7.  I  should  gladly  pay 
him  if  I  could.  8.  Only  yesterday  I  had  to  pay  several  bills. 
9.  I  must  pay  two  or  three  more  to-morrow.  10.  They 
are  twice  as  large  as  this  one.  11.  I  shall  pay  these  first  and 
the  tailor's  afterwards.  12.  He  might  wait  another  week. 
13.  A  week  is  not  a  (!ein)  very  long  time,  after  all.  14.  That 
he  must  (do),  I  suppose.  15.  Just  tell  him  he  is  to  be  sure  to 
come  back  (tt)teber)  next  week.  16.  But  I  shall  not  be  at 
home  before  Friday.  17.  I  shall  surely  have  enough  money 
then. 


LESSON  LII 

250.  Prefixes  of  Compound  Verbs,  i .  The  prefixes  of  com- 
pound verbs  are  either  stressed  or  unstressed,  i.e,  the  principal 
stress  falls  either  on  the  prefix  or  on  the  verb  stem  : 

Stu'^ge^en;  tiergc'^en.  To  go  out;  to  pass  away. 

2.  Unstressed  prefixes  are  inseparable  (see  §  51) : 
^^  ^abe  e^  tjerfproi^en.  I  have  promised  it. 

3.  Stressed  prefixes  are  separable  (for  word  order,  see  §  50)  : 
^i)  ge^e  ^eute  au^.  I  am  going  out  to-day. 

^arl  tft  eben  au^gegangen,        Charles  has  just  gone  out. 
^ommen  @ie  bo(^  l^erein.  Pray,  do  come  in. 


§  252]  LESSON  LII  211 

Note.  —  The  difficulties  of  detail  explained  in  the  following  paragraphs 
depend  upon  the  principles  stated  above. 

251.  Quasi- Prefixes,  i.  Besides  the  ordinary  verb  prefixes, 
many  words  and  phrases  in  common  use  have  practically  the 
function  of  separable  prefixes,  and  follow  the  same  rules  of 
word  order. 

2.  Such  are  nouns  as  objects,  with  or  without  prepositions  : 

©lb  barauf  arfft  Pay  heed  to  it. 

gr  [agte,  ba^  t(J)  nii^t  atj^tgebe.  He   said   I   was    not   paying 

attention. 
5Kimm  bic^  in  ad^i  Take  care. 

Note.  —  Nouns  so  used  are  now  usually  written  with  a  small  letter,  and 
often  in  one  word  with  the  governing  preposition. 

3.  So  also  certain  adjectives  : 

Saffen  ©ie  mtd^  lo^.  Let  me  go. 

Sr  iDurbe  freigefproi^en.  He  was  acquitted. 

Notes. —  i.  Some  adj.  prefixes  are  insep.,  even  when  stressed,  and 
retain  the  prefix  gc-:  dv  fing  an  5U  tuci^fagett,  *  Hehegan  to  prophesy'; 
(Bit  Ijat  fl(^   gercd^tfertigt,  *  She  has  justified  herself.' 

2.  ^oUf  except  in  the  literal  sense,  is  unstressed  and  insep. :  Sr  l)at  hd^ 
2Ber!  tJoUenbct,  'He  has  completed  the  work';  (gr  ^at  ha^  @(a^  tioU' 
gcgoffen,  *  He  has  poured  the  glass  full.' 

252.  Double  Prefixes,  i.  Separable  -f-  separable  ;  both  sep- 
arable : 

gr  ijat  ba^  tiotau'^gefagt.  He  predicted  that. 

2.  Separable  +  inseparable  ;  the  former  alone  separable  : 
Qd)  9eftef)e  ba^  jm  I  admit  that. 

(Sr  erfannte  e^  an.  He  acknowledged  it. 

3.  Inseparable  +  separable  ;  both  inseparable  : 
-^c^  bea'bfi(^tige,  e6  ^u  tun.       I  intend  to  do  it. 

(gr  ^at  ba^  tiera'nftaltet.  He  has  arranged  that. 


212  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§253 

253.  ^cr,  l)itt.  i.  The  simple  prepositional  prefixes  of  direc- 
tion, ab-,  an-,  auf-,  au^-,  ein-,  nieber-,  itber-,  utn-,  unter-, 
t)or-,  are  used  only  when  the  compound  verb  denotes  motion 
in  a  general  way,  without  specifying  or  implying  a  starting-point 
or  destination,  or  when  there  is  no  idea  of  motion : 

(Sr  ift  eben  au^gegangen*  He  has  just  gone  out. 

®ie  tamen  geftern  an*  They  arrived  yesterday. 

9Bir  rei[en  morgan  ah.  We  are  off  to-morrow. 

SBa^  5ie{)en  ®ie  tior?  What  do  you  prefer? 

2.  The  prefixes  l|cr~,  'hither,'  and  Ijin-,  'thither,'  indicate 
direction,  respectively,  to  or  from  the  speaker  or  spectator : 

^omnten  ©ie  ^en  Come  here  (to  me). 

dv  [oil  I|ingef)en.  He  is  to  go  there. 

3.  2ln^-,  t)or-,  and  also  ab-  in  the  sense  of '  down,'  require 
l)tX-  or  !f)tn-  prefixed,  when  a  starting-point  is  implied  but  not 
specified;  the  others  (an-,  anf-,  2C.),  when  a  destination  is 
implied  but  not  specified  : 

gr  gtng  gnr  Znv  (finan^.  He  went  out  at  the  door. 

Sr  jog  etn  Sucfl  t|Crt)Or.  He  produced  a  book. 

®e^en  (Ste  l^tnnnter  (^inab).  Go  down  (stairs). 

dx  ift  l^cranfgefommen.  He  has  come  up  (stairs). 

4.  When  the  starting-point  or  destination  is  specified,  these 
compound  prefixes  are  used  when  the  preposition  and  prefix  do 
not  correspond  : 

2Str  fn^ren  oft  nac^  gollanb   We  often  crossed  over  to  Hol- 

Ijinuficr*  land. 

&  fiel  t)ont  ©ac^e  fieraft*  He  fell  (down)  from  the  roof. 

5.  When  preposition  and  prefix  correspond,  the  compound 
prefix  may  be  used  : 

dx   gtng    an^    bent   3!^^^^  ^^  ^^"^  ^^^  ^^  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^  ^ 
(^inan^),  al^  t(^  eintrat.  entered. 


§  254]  LESSON   LII  213 

254.  Prefixes  with  Varying  Stress,  i.  The  prefixes  burd^-, 
itber-,  um-,  Uttter-,  are  sometimes  stressed  (separable)  and 
sometimes  unstressed  (inseparable). 

2.  Some  of  these  compounds  are  used  both  separably  and 
inseparably,  usually  with  different  meaning  : 

(Sr  ift  ^ier  bu'rrfigeretft.  He  passed  through  here, 

©r  f)at  ba^  8anb  burd)ret'[t.  He  has  traversed  the  country. 

T)er  (Strom  ift  u'ficrgetreten.  The  stream  has  overflowed. 

@r  iibertra't  ba^  ®ebot.  He  transgressed  the  command. 

3.  Some  are  used  inseparably  only  : 

90?ein  ^lan  ift  burd^freu'jt.         My  plan  is  thwarted, 
^'c^  Uberla'ffe  ba^  3^^)^^^-  I  ^^^^^  t^^t  to  you. 

Unterbre'c^en  ®te  mic^  nid^t.      Don't  interrupt  me. 

4.  Others  are  used  separably  only  : 

(Sr  ift  u'mge!e^rt.  He  has  turned  back, 

©er  ^effet  foi^t  u'6cr*  The  kettle  is  boihng  over. 

Notes.  —  i.  The  insep.  transitive  compound  is  often  replaced  by  the 
simple  verb  +  the  prefix  as  prep. :  (Sr  burd)fc^ritt  ba^  Xox  or  (gr  frf)ritt 
burd)  ha^  Xov,   *He  passed  through  the  gate.' 

2.  Winter-  as  prefix  is  insep.;  ttlicbcr-  is  insep.  only  in  WkhtX^o'Un, 
*  repeat ' :  (gr  t)at  mid)  I)interga'ngen, '  He  has  deceived  me ' ;  (Sr  ^tnterlie'g 
nid)t«,  *Heleft  nothing';  3c^  l)abe  e§  tDieberl)o'U,  *I  repeated  it.' 

3.  The  prefix  lltt^-  has  varying  stress,  but  is  insep.,  except  in  the  past 
part,  of  some  verbs,  and  in  the  infin.  and  past  part,  of  others.  For  details, 
see  dictionary. 

EXERCISE   LII 

A,  5Wi!o{aM  I.  t)on  Sfu^Ianb  ging  oft  in  feiner  ^auptftabt 
^eter^burg  auf  3lbenteuer  au^.  2luf  biefe  Seife  gebac^te  er, 
bte  geben^meife  feiner  Untertanen  ju  beobac^ten.  )Rnx  felten 
tDnrbe  er  bei  btefen  ©dngen  erfannt,  benn  er  t)erffetbete  fid)  in 
etnen  gen)of)nItc^en  Offtjier^manteL  gtnmat  ^atte  er  fid)  in 
eine  3Sorftabt  ^inau^begeben,  ^atte  aber  babei  nid^t  auf  ben 
SBeg  a^tgegeben.    gnblid)  tt)urbe  er  gema^r,  bap  er  fid)  tjerirrt 


214  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§254 

l^atte,  g^  blteb  i^m  alfo  nid^t^  itbrig,  al^  m  etner  J)rof(^!e 
an5Ut)ertrauen,  &  rief  eine  ^erbei,  ftieg  ein  unb  bebeutete 
bem  £utf(^er,  if)n  jur  ®tabt  ^meinjufa^ren  unb  il)n  am 
SBittter^alat^  absufe^en,  Sort  angetommen,  [tieg  ber  ^av 
au^,  2lt^  er  aber  beja^len  iDoIIte,  ftellte  e^  fief)  ^erau^,  ba^  er 
a(I  fein  ®elb  t^erau^gabt  fjatte,  „aSarte  nur  ^ter/'  fagte  er 
gum  ^utf(J)er  unb  tDoKte  tn^  (S(^Iog  eintreten,  „td)  ttJtH  btr  ba^ 
®elb  fofort  ^erau^fc^iden.''  „9^etn,  2Saterd)en/'  unterbrat^ 
ttju  ber  a^ann,  n\o  ^aben  mi(^  bte  §erren  Dffistere  f^on  ein 
^jaarmat  ^tntergangen.  @ie  gtngen  gur  3Sorbertur  ^inein 
unb  bann  gur  §tntertur  ujieber  ^tnau^,  unb  [o  fam  i^  um 
mein  gute^  ®elb,  Uberfa§  mtr  nur  beinen  3JfanteI ;  fif)t(f ft 
bu  mir  ba^  ®elb  ^erau^,  [o  fdjtde  trf)  i^n  btr  fogleti^  ^tnein." 
S)er  Saifer  tt)ar  alfo  gejiDungen,  bem  ^utfdjer  ben  9J?antet  ju 
uberlaffen,  benn  er  eriannte  an,  ba^  ber  9Kann  rerfit  {)atte» 

B.  Oral :  i.  Weshalb  ging  der  Kaiser  oft  auf  Abenteuer  aus? 
2.  Warum  wurde  er  dabei  selten  erkannt?  3.  Wie  kam  es, 
daB  er  sich  verirrte  ?  4.  Wohin  hatte  er  sich  begeben  ?  5 .  Was 
tat  er  also?  6.  Welchen  Befehl  gab  er  dem  Kutscher?  7.  Wes- 
halb bezahlte  er  nicht  sogleich  den  Kutscher?  8.  Was  ver- 
sprach  ihm  der  Kaiser?  9.  Von  wem  war  dieser  oftmals  hin- 
tergangen  vvorden?  10.  Wie  hatten  sie  ihn  betrogen? 
II.  Wozu  war  Seme  Majestat  gezwungen?  12.  Weshalb  tat 
er  das? 

C.  I.  Have  you  observed  the  conduct  of  this  man?  2.  I 
shall  not  be  recognized.  3.  Take  care,  or  else  we  shall  be 
recognized.  4.  Betake  yourself  to  the  country.  5.  Take  care 
of  (auf,  ace.)  your  health  when  you  are  young.  6.  Take  care, 
the  train  is  coming.  7.  I  have  entrusted  all  my  money  to  a 
friend.  8.  Get  into  the  carriage.  9.  Get  out  of  the  carriage. 
10.  Order  the  cabman  to  drive  into  the  city.  11.  The  Czar 
got  out  [of  the  carriage].  12.  We  shall  have  spent  all  our 
money.     13.  Do  you  wish  to  enter  the  palace?     14.  Come  in 


§  254]  LESSON  LII  215 

at  the  front-door.  15.  Send  the  cabman  in  at  the  back-door. 
16.  First  send  me  out  my  money.  17.  The  emperor  did  not 
cheat  the  cabman.  18.  It  is  impossible  to  be  in  the  right 
always.  19.  The  cabman  was  in  the  right,  and  the  emperor 
was  obliged  to  acknowledge  it.  20.  Even  emperors  are  not 
always  in  the  right. 

D.  I.  Nicholas  I  once  betook  himself  to  a  suburb  of 
St.  Petersburg.  2.  He  didn't  give  heed  to  the  way,  and  went 
astray.  3.  He  w^as  forced  to  trust  himself  to  a  cab.  4.  The 
cabman  drove  him  into  the  city,  and  set  him  down  at  the 
palace.  5.  When  he  had  arrived  there,  it  turned  out  that  His 
Majesty  could  not  pay.  6.  He  searched  all  his  pockets  and 
found  nothing.  7.  He  told  the  cabman  he  had  spent  all  his 
money.  8.  "  I  will  go  into  the  palace  and  bring  you  out  your 
money."  9.  "Oh,  no  !  In  this  way  I  have  often  lost  (foTtttnen 
urn)  my  money.  10.  It  is  very  easy  to  go  in  at  the  front-door 
and  out  at  the  back-door.  11.  I  have  been  cheated  only  too 
often.  12.  Just  hand  over  your  cloak  to  me."  13.  *^Youare 
right ;  I  will  entrust  it  to  you.  14.  But  promise  to  hand  it  over 
to  the  servant,  when  I  send  you  out  your  money."  15.  The 
Czar  sent  out  the  money,  and  the  cloak  was  handed  over  to 
the  servant. 

E,  Lesestuck:  Am  14.  Oktober  1806  saB  Hegel,  der 
berlihmte  Philosoph,  der  damals  Professor  in  Jena  war,  am 
Schreibtische  und  arbeitete  an  einer  Abhandlung,  als  der 
Schreibtisch  plotzlich  von  groBen  Eisensplittern  liberstreut 
wurde.  Er  rief  das  Stubenmadchen  und  sagte  argerlich  :  "  Was 
ist  das  fiir  eine  Unordnung?"  Das  Madchen  teilte  ihm  mit, 
da{5  die  PreuBen  und  Franzosen  in  den  StraBen  kampften  und 
dais  dies  die  Ursache  der  Storung  sei.  "•  Das  ist  mir  gleich,'* 
sagte  Hegel,  "  das  interessiert  mich  gar  nicht ;  sorge,  daB  ich 
in  Ruhe  arbeiten  kann."  Das  war  am  Tage  der  groBen 
Schlacht  bei  Jena,  wo  das  preuBische  Heer  von  Napoleon 
beinahe  vernichtet  wurde. 


2i6  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  255 

LESSON  LIII 

255.  Conjunctions.  Conjunctions  are  either  coordinative, 
connecting  sentences  of  the  same  rank  or  order,  or  subordina- 
tive,  connecting  a  sentence  with  another  on  which  it  depends. 

256.  Connectives,  i.  The  coordinative  conjunctions  proper 
are  the  common  connectives,  and  do  not  affect  the  word  order  : 

aber,  but.  benn,  for.        fonbern,  but,  on  the 

alletn,  only,  but  yet.  ober,  or.  contrary. 

Unb,  and. 

2.  When  two  principal  sentences  connected  by  Uttb  have  a 
common  subject,  the  verb  of  the  latter  sentence  usually  follows 
the  conjunction  immediately : 

aWein    greunb    ift    frani  unb   My  friend   is   ill   and   has   to 
tnuft  ba^  §au^  i^ixttn.  stay  in  the  house. 

3.  If  any  other  member  of  the  sentence  introduced  by  utlb 
precedes  the  verb,  a  personal  pronoun  must  follow  as  subject : 

3)?em   greunb    ift    frattf   unb   My  friend  is  ill,  and  so  he  must 
be^^atb  mu^  cr  ba^  §au^       stay  in  the  house, 
pten. 

4-  ®enn  never  introduces  a  dependent  sentence,  except  in 
indirect  statements  with  ba^  omitted  : 

dv  fagte,  ba^  er  nicf)t  fame,  He    said  he    wasn't   coming, 
bcnti  er  fei  franf.  for  he  was  ill. 

5.  3lber  often  follows  the  verb  of  its  sentence  (especially 
when  another  conjunction  is  present),  and  then  =  '  however ' : 

(Sr  fomtnt  tt)O^I  nt(^t,  tDentt  er   He   will   hardly  come ;    if  he 
after  fommt,  2C.  should  come,  however,  etc. 

6.  ©onbern  corrects  or  contradicts  a  preceding  negative 
statement : 

@r  tDtrb  ntdjt  fterben,  fonbcrn  He  will  not  die,  but  (on  the 
genefen.  contrary)  he  will  recover. 


§  258]  LESSON   LIII  217 

257.  Adverbial  Conjunctions,  i.  Adverbs  and  adverbial 
phrases  often  have  the  function  of  a  connective  conjunction, 
and  introduce  a  sentence  coordinate  with  the  preceding  sen- 
tence ;  they  then  throw  the  subject  after  the  verb : 

dv  ift  Iran!;  alfo  fommt  er     He  is   ill;   hence  he  won't 
nid^t.  come. 

2.  These  adverbial  conjunctions  may  also  follow  the  verb  as 
ordinary  adverbs  : 
(Sr  ift  !ran!;   er  fommt  alfo     He  is  ill;    hence  he  won't 

nid^t.  come. 

258.  Special  Cases,  i.  3lud^does  not  cause  inversion  of  verb 
and  subject  when  it  modifies  a  member  of  the  sentence  which 
precedes  the  verb  : 

%n^  mein  SSater  Dertte^  mtc^.     Even  my  father  forsook  me. 

2.  ©Ctttt  =  'unless  '  never  begins  a  sentence  : 

Qij  fomme  morgen,  e^  fet  benn     I  shall  come  to-morrow  unless 
ba^  e^  regnet.  it  rains. 

3.  5yiuit  in  the  sense  of  *  now '  implies  a  relation  to  a  preced- 
ing statement ;  Je^t  denotes  time  only  : 

9lUtt  fommt  e^  oft  t)or,  2c.  Now,  it  often  happens,  etc. 

3e^t  ift  e^  3^it.  It  is  time  now. 

4.  Adversative  adverbial  conjunctions,  e.g.  alfo,  freitirf),  ttUtt^ 
2C.,  followed  by  a  pause  (indicated  by  a  comma),  cause  no 
inversion : 

^reilic^,  ba^  mag  toaijX  fein.        Of  course,  that  may  be  true. 

EXERCISE    LIII 

A.  gin  getDiffer  :93anfier  brauc^te  einen  8aufburfc^en  an 
feiner  Sanf  unb  ^atte  be^^alb  eine  2lnjeige  in  bie  ^^^^^^9 
einfe^en  laffen.  5)arauf  melbeten  fic^  am  anbern  2^age  ettra 
60  Snaben.    ©ogleic^  fd)i(fte  er  fie  atte  fort,  bi^  anf  einen. 


2i8  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§258 

©^  fatten  stt)ar  emtge  t)on  t^neti  fe^r  gute  (Stnpfe^tung^briefe, 
allein  er  entlie^  fie  unb  iDci^Ite  einen,  ber  gar  feinen  Srief 
Ijattt.  ®a  fagte  ein  §err,  ber  sufdlltg  babei  tDar :  „3)ie[er 
3unge  ^atte  boc^  feinen  ©mpfe^Iung^brief,  nnb  tro^bem  ^aben 
@ie  i^n  betior^ngt,  SSarum  taten  ®ie  ba^  eigentUd)?'' 
„®riefe  ^atte  er  freilii^  nxd)t/'  fautete  bie  2lntn)ort,  „bagegen 
f)atte  er  eine  2J?enge  (gmpfe^Iungen.  Qd)  bemerfte,  jum  ©ei- 
fpiel,  ba^  er  bie  ©tiefel  abpnfete,  unb  au^erbem  ^ob  er  eine 
®te(fnabel  t)ont  <33oben  auf ;  f otgtirf)  ift  er  jugteic^  reintic^  nnb 
forgfditig,  Slnrf)  na^nt  er  bie  Wni^t  ab  unb  antrt)ortete  ntir 
ft^nell  unb  rii^tig  ;  baf)er  ntu^  er  nic^t  nur  ^oflirf),  fonbern 
auii)  !(ug  nnb  aufmerffam  fein,  gr  briingte  [i(^  ni(^t  t)or,  alfo 
ift  er  and)  befdjeiben*  Ubrigen^,  ifi)  gebe  nief)r  anf  ba^,  tna^ 
i(^  an  einem  9)Zenf^en  beobac^ten  !ann,  at^  anf  bie  beften 
(Sntpfet)Iung^briefe," 

B.  I.  The  pupils  came  late,  and  therefore  had  to  stay  in. 

2.  I  did  not  keep  his  letter,  but  threw  it  into  the  waste-basket. 

3.  Don't  come  in  at  the  front-door,  but  at  the  back-door.  4.  I 
can't  come  to-day,  but  I  can  come  to-morrow.  5.  My  brother 
saw  the  advertisement,  and  at  once  made  application.     6.  The 

•banker  said  the  boy  pleased  him,  for  he  was  so  polite.  7.  Many 
had  good  recommendations ;  nevertheless  they  didn't  get  the 
position.  8.  You  have  no  recommendations ;  consequently  I 
can't  give  you  the  position.  9.  He  took  off  his  cap,  hence  I  am 
sure  he  is  polite.  10.  Besides,  he  didn't  press  forward  like  the 
others.  11.  Moreover,  I  observed  that  he  wiped  his  boots 
when  he  came  in.     12.  Hence  he  must  be  tidy. 

C.  I.  Nearly  every  one  knows  the  story  of  M.  Laffitte,  who 
was  a  celebrated  French  banker.  2.  When  he  was  (still)  quite 
young,  he  applied  to  (bei)  a  Paris  banker,  and  asked  for  a  posi- 
tion in  (an)  his  bank.  3.  It  is  true  he  had  letters  of  recom- 
mendation. 4.  Nevertheless  the  banker  dismissed  him,  for  he 
didn't  need  even  an  errand-boy.  5.  As  young  Laffitte  was  going 
out,  however,  the  banker  observed  that  he  picked  up  a  pin,  which 


§  259]  LESSON   LIV  219 

lay  on  the  floor.  6.  Consequently  he  thought :  "  At  least  this 
boy  is  careful."  7.  Accordingly  the  banker  wrote  him  a  letter 
in  which  he  said  :  "  I  find  that  I  have  after  all  (bO(f))  a  place  for 
you.  8.  It  is  not  a  very  important  (tDirf)tig)  one,  to  be  sure, 
but  still  it  is  better  than  nothing  at  all.  9.  So  then,  I  shall 
expect  you  to-morrow  m.orning."  10.  Naturally  Laffitte  accepted 
the  place  with  pleasure.  11.  Afterwards  he  became  a  very 
wealthy  man.  12.  He  was  besides  one  of  the  most  celebrated 
ministers  of  France. 

LESSON  LIV 

259.  Subordinative  Conjunctions,  i.  Those  most  commonly 
occurring  are  : 

at^,  as,  when,  than.  obgfetrf),  (al)though. 

al^  ob,  al^  menn,  as  if.  obf(^on,      " 

auf  ba^,  (in  order)  that.  obtt)O^I,       " 

bet)or,  before.  feit(bem),  since, 

bi^,  until.  fobatb,  as  soon  as. 

ba^  as,  since,  when.  folange,  as  long  as. 

bamit,  in  order  that.  fotnte,  as  soon  as,  as  well  as. 

ba^,  that.  unterbeffen,  while, 

e^e,  before.  n)al)renb,  while, 

fatte,  in  case.  IDCU,  because, 

inbem,  while.  tuenn,  if,  when, 

inbeffen,  "  tvtnn  au(^,  (al)though,  even  if. 

Tta^bem,  after.  '  tDenngleic^,     "         "     "    " 

ob,  whether,  if.  hjennfc^ott,      "         "     "    " 

ob  aucf),  (al)though.  tt)ie,  as,  like. 

tt)ietDO^I,  (al)though. 

2.  These  conjunctions  connect  a  subordinate  sentence  with 
a  principal  sentence,  or  with  another  subordinate  sentence,  and 
throw  the  verb  to  the  end : 

'  Q6)  glaube,  ha^  er  fommt.  I  think  he  will  come. 

Qd)  tDei^  nic^t,  ob  e^  n)a^r  ift,      I  don't  know  whether  it  is  true 

ba^  er  Ucrrcift.  that  he  is  going  away. 


2  20  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  260 

260.   Special  Cases,    i.  '  As  '  in  the  sense  of  'while'  =  ttlbettl 
(inbeffen,  unterbeffett): 
dx  [djiief,  inbem  id)  tDai^te*         He  slept  while  I  watched. 

2.  '  As  '  or  '  since  '  indicating  cause  =  ba: 

(Sr  faun  ^eute  nt(J)t  fommen,  ba  He  can't  come  to-day,  as  it  is 
e^  regnet.  raining. 

3.  *  Since 'as  preposition  =  feit;  as  subordinative  conjunc- 
tion of  time  =  [eitbem  (or  feit) : 

(Sr  tft  fd^on  feit  t)ortger  SBod^e  He  has  been  here  since  last 

^ter.  week. 

Qd)  ^abe   i^n  nic^t  gefe^en,  I  have  not  seen  him  since  he 

fettbem  er  angefommen  ift.  arrived. 

4.  '  Since  '  as  adverb  or  coordinative  adverbial  conjunction  = 
feitbem: 

©eitbcm  fd^retbt  er  nic^t.  He  hasn't  written  since. 

5.  9lte  =  '  but '  after  negatives ;  nt(f)t^  iDeniger  at^  =  ^any- 
thing but ' : 

9?t(^t^  aU  Unglitd .  Nothing  but  bad  luck. 

9lt^t^  toenigcr  aU  retd^.  Anything  but  rich. 

6.  ^'nbeffen,  unterbeffen  are  coordinative  in  the  sense  of 
'  meanwhile  ' ;  subordinative  in  the  sense  of  *  while  ' : 

Qd)  tDadjte;  ittbeffcn  frfilief  I  watched;  meanwhile  my 
metn  greunb.  friend  slept. 

Qd)  mai^te,  unterbeffen  metn  I  watched  while  my  friend 
greunb  ft^Itef.  slept. 

7.  Ob  =  '  if '  or  '  whether  '  in  indirect  questions  : 
grage  i^n,  oh  er  miibe  ift.  Ask  him  if  he  is  tired. 

8.  In  obgletd^  (tDenngleidf),  obft^on,  zc,)/ though,"  although/ 
the  latter  part  may  be  separated  and  placed  after  the  subject ; 
aud^  is  always  so  separated  : 

Dfigle^  er  rei(^  tft.  Although  he  is  rich. 

Dti  er  fllet^  (aucf),  :c.)  retd)  tft.  ''       "   ''  " 


§  26 1]  LESSON    LIV  *  221 

9.  The  ob  or  IDetlU  may  also  be  omitted  in  these  conjunc- 
tions, and  in  aU  ob,  al^  iDCntt;  the  verb  then  begins  its 
sentence : 

Q^t  er  gleic^  reii^.  Though  he  is  rich. 

(S^  fi^emt,  a(^  fame  er.  It  seems  as  if  he  would  come. 

10.  SSt\)OX  expresses  time  only ;  e^e  also  expresses  preference  : 

@^c  (betior)  e^  buttfel  iDtrb.         Before  k  gets  dark. 
@^c  ic^  ba^  tue,  trete  ic^  lieber     Rather  than  do  that,  I  will 
au^.  resign. 

11.  Distinguish  carefully  between  'after'  and  'before*  as 
prepositions  and  as  conjunctions  : 

mad^  bem  «aKe.  After  the  ball. 

9lat3^bcm  er  fort  iDar.  After  he  had  gone. 

SJor  bem  3lbenbeffen.  Before  supper. 

©l^e  (bet)or)  id)  tf)ti  fa^.  Before  I  saw  him. 

261.  Correlative  Conjunctions,  i.  These  conjunctions  con- 
sist of  two  parts,  the  second  being  necessary  to  complete  the 
first ;  the  following  are  the  most  important : 

balb  .  .  .  balb,  at  one  time 

.  .  .  at  another;  now  .  .  . 

now  (then). 
(chtn)  fo  .  .  .  iDte,  (just)  as 

...  as. 
befto  (ie) .  .  .  befto  ({e,  um[o), 

the  .  .  .  the. 
fo  .  .  .  |o,  as  .  .  .  as. 

2.  In  sentences  introduced  by  folDO^l  .  .  .  at^  (aui))  the 
verb  agrees  with  the  last  subject : 

®0tt)0^I   id)   at^    (and))  tnetn  Both   my  cousin   and  I   have 
SSetter  ift  angefommen.  arrived. 


etitlt)eber  . . 

.  ober,  either 

.  .  . 

or. 

treber  .  .  . 

nod),  neither 

.  •  . 

nor. 

nic^t  nur  . 

.  .  fonbem 

and), 

not  only 

.  .  .  but  also. 

fon)of)f  .  . 

.  al^  (au^), 

both 

.  .  .  and. 

222  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  261 

3.  !j)eftO  and  je  are  used  interchangeably  in  either  member 
of  a  proportional  clause ;  the  former  member  is  subordinate, 
the  latter  principal,  but  with  inversion  of  subject  and  verb. 

^C    (befto)    e^er     er    fommt,   The    sooner    he    comes,    the 
bcfto  (Je)  et)er  !ann  er  ge^en.      sooner  he  can  go. 

4.  ®0  ♦  .  ♦  fo  introduce  correlative  clauses  containing  ad- 
jectives compared  together  in  the  positive  degree,  the  former 
being  subordinate : 

(Bo  gro^  er  ift,  fo  feige  tft  er*  He  is  as  cowardly  as  he  is  big. 
(Bo    gerne    itJ)    fame,  fo  un-  Gladly  as  I  would  come,  it  is 
Ttldgtic^  ift  e^,  quite  impossible. 

EXERCISE  LIV 

A.  911^  etn  alter  ?otfe  eitie^  ftUrmifc^ett  Sage^  mtt  anberen 
am  Ufer  be^  2JJeere^  ftanb,  fa^  er  brau^en  etn  gro^e^  ©egel- 
f ct)tff  t^orbetf a^ren,  35a  er  erfannte,  ba^  ba^felbe  falf c^  gefteuert 
tDarb,  rief  er  aM:  „@ntlDeber  mu^  bie  ®rtgg  einlenfen,  ober 
fie  mirb  am  SSorgebirge  f(^eitern,  Qii)  mu^  ^inau^,  bamit  id) 
ben  ©teuermann  tvaxm."  „3Benn  bn  and)  ^tnau^fii^reft/'  er* 
n)tberte  man  i^m,  „fo  fonnteft  bu  boi)  nx(i)t  ^elfen,  ba  betn 
^oot  fofort  fentern  trlirbe,  nnb  bu  t)erfinfen  mil^teft,''  ^SoIIte 
e^  gletc^  metn  Seben  foften,  fo  miH  16)  t[)m  tpenigften^  jurnfen, 
tt)k  er  ftenern  mn^.  Senn  e^  aui^  mein  letter  9luf  tft,  fo 
bleibt  mir  ntc^t^  itbrtg,  al^  ben  9Serfud)  jn  maiijtn."  2l{fo  ^olte 
er  fein  (2prad)roI)r  nnb  ftteg  in  fein  fletne^  ^oot  ein,  ©obalb 
ba§  (gegel  aufgelji^t  ttiar,  flog  ba^  33oot  pfeilfi^neK  oor  bem 
(gturme  bal)in.  .^m  Slugenbltde  aber,  ba  ba^felbe  au^  bem 
©dju^e  be^  3Sorgebirge^  f)eran^fd)o^,  fd)Iug  e^  nm»  ^^nbeffen 
^tte  er  nod^  eben  bem  ©tenermann  jnrnfen  fonnen:  „8inf^ 
mit^t  t^r  ftenern*''  SBii^renb  bte  Srigg  n)etterfn^r,  tierfan! 
ber  ^elbenmitttge  Sllte  in.  bte  S^tefe*  ©oi^  wax  fein  ©elbenmnt 
nic^t  t)ergeben^  gemefen,  ba  ba^  ®^iff  mit  §nnberten  oon 


§  26 1]  LESSON  LIV  223 

2)?enfc^en(eben  gerettet  mar,    @o  gro^  ba^  Opfet  ttjar,  \o 
grop  tt)ar  and)  ber  8o^n. 

^.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C.  Complete  the  following  sentences  :  i.  Ich  habe  ihn  nicht 
gesehen,  seitdem  ...  2.  Seit  .  .  .  muB  meine  Tante  zu  Hause 
bleiben.  3.  Wir  studierten,  unterdessen  ...  4.  Nachdem 
.  .  .  ,  muB  ich  noch  eine  Aufgabe  schreiben.  5.  Wir  mtissen 
vor  .  .  .  abreisen.  6.  Der  Lotse  versank,  ehe  ...  7.  Wir 
gehen  nicht  ins  Konzert,  da  .  .  . 

JD.  I.  It  seems  as  if  the  ship  must  (sufy\)  be  wrecked. 
2.  Even  if  the  pilot  goes  out  in  his  boat,  perhaps  he  will  not 
be  able  to  save  it  after  all.  3.  Neither  he  nor  his  boat  will 
ever  return.  4.  While  the  others  were  talking,  the  old  man 
got  (I)oIen)  his  speaking-trumpet.  5.  After  he  had  got  it,  he 
embarked  in  his  little  boat.  6.  As  soon  as  everything  was 
ready,  he  hoisted  the  sail.  7.  Although  the  storm  was  very  vio- 
lent, the  heroic  pilot  resolved  to  make  the  attempt.  8.  If  his 
boat  capsizes,  he  will  certainly  lose  his  life.  9.  He  must  warn 
the  steersman,  before  the  latter  comes  too  near  the  promon- 
tory. 10.  Even  now  it  seems  as  if  he  would  be  (fomtnett) 
too  late.  II.  Meanwhile  the  storm  became  more  and  more 
violent.  12.  It  is  anything  but  easy  to  steer  a  small  boat 
through  a  stormy  sea  (^ee,/.).  13.  Not  only  will  the  ship  be 
wrecked,  but  also  hundreds  of  men  will  perish.  14.  Either 
the  pilot  must  warn  the  steersman  or  the  ship  will  be  wrecked. 
15.  At  one  time  it  seemed  as  if  he  would  succeed,  at  another 
it  seemed  as  if  his  boat  would  capsize.  16.  The  greater  the 
danger,  the  greater  is  the  heroism  of  the  pilot.  17.  Before  his 
boat  sank,  however,  he  called  to  the  steersman  through  his 
speaking-trumpet.  18.  As  the  latter  now  knew  how  he  should 
steer,  he  saved  the  brig.  19.  Even  if  the  old  man  lost  his  life, 
still  he  had  his  reward.  20.  After  he  was  dead,  his  heroism 
was  honored  by  every  one. 


224  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§262 

E.    8efeftU(J: 

3ur  @(^mtebe  gtng  etn  {unger  §elb^ 
gr  ^atf  ein  gute^  ®cf)it)ert  beftellt* 
S)od^  al^  ert  tDog  in  [einer  ^anb, 
J)a^  ©(^iDcrt  er  t)iel  ju  firmer  erfatib* 

J)er  alte  ®(^mteb  ben  :33art  fic^  ftreid^t: 
,,J)a^  ®(^it)ert  ift  nti^t  ju  f^mer,  no(^  Ietcf)t; 
3u  fc^marf)  ift  euer  2lrnt,  irf)  mein'; 
S)od^  morgen  foil  ge^olfen  fein!'' 

3ein,  ^euf !  bei  alter  9?itterfcf)aft! 
!j)urd)  meine,  ni(^t  bur^  genera  ^raft!" 
©er  ^fiingling  fpri(^t'^,  il^n  Sraft  buri^bringt, 
S)a^  (gdfitDert  er  ^od^  in  8itften  f^tDingt, 


LESSON  LV 

262.  Agreement  of  Verb  and  Subject,  i.  This  agreement  is, 
in  general,  the  same  in  German  as  in  English ;  for  exceptions, 
see  below. 

2.  With  several  subjects,  the  verb  may  agree  with  the  nearest 
singular  subject,  especially  if  the  subjects  follow  the  verb,  or 
are  grouped  together,  or  form  a  climax : 

SSorbei  ift  SBinb  unb  9?egen.  Wind  and  rain  are  past. 

@elb  unb  ®Ut  ift  f)in.  Money  and  wealth  are  gone. 

33erm5gen,    9Juf,   8eben  ftcl^t  Property,  reputation,  life  are  at 
auf  bem  ©piele.  stake. 

3.  With  titles  of  rank  and  compliment,  the  verb  is  often  in 
the  third  plural  in  address  and  in  official  documents  : 

SBa^  tDitnf (^en  gnabige  gran  ?    What  do  you  wish,  madam  ? 
©eine  2)iaj;eftdt  ^abcn  gern^t,    His  Majesty  has  been  pleased, 
2C.  etc. 

4.  The  agreement  of  a  verb  with  a  collective  is  in  general 
the  same  as  in  English. 


§  264]  LESSON   LV  225 

263.  Appositive  Noun.  i.  A  noun  in  apposition  with  another 
usually  agrees  with  it  in  case  : 

^arl,  meiniiincjftcr^Sruber,  tft  Charles,  my  youngest  brother, 

fratif.  is  ill. 

!Die  Sranf^eit  ^arl^,  meine^  The    illness    of    Charles,    my 

{ilngften  Sruber^.  youngest  brother. 

Qii)    begegnete    ^arl,  feinem  I  met  Charles,  his   youngest 

iiingften  Sruber.  brother. 

2.  The  case  of  a  noun  in  apposition  after  a(^  or  toxt  depends 
upon  the  sense,  the  indefinite  article  being  omitted  after  al^ 
before  an  unqualified  noun  : 

Qi)    fannte    t^n    aU    Snabe  I  knew  him  as  a  boy  (when  I 

(=  al^  id)  ein  Snabe  iDar).  was  a  boy). 

Qiij  fannte  i^n  ati^    Snaben  I  knew  him  as  a  boy  (when  he 

(=  a(^  er  ein  ^nabe  n)ar).  was  a  boy). 

@r  \}at  feinen  befferen  greunb  He  has  no  better  friend  than  I. 

ginent  9)?anne    tote  Sic  (e^  A  man  like  you  is  not  to  be 
finb)  ift  ntt^t  gn  tranen.  trusted. 

Notes.  —  i.   %i^  indicates  identity  and  ttlic  comparison:  (Sr  !ommt 
ai^  MniQ,  *  He  comes  as  a  king '  (and  is  one  ) ;   (Sr  fommt  Wic  till  MnXQ, 
*He  comes  like  a  king'  (though  he  may  not  be  one). 
.    2.  P"or  apposition  in  expressions   of  quantity,  see  §   112,  3;    in  titles 
and  proper  names,  §§  182,  188. 

264.  Appositive  Adjective,  i.  An  uninflected  adjective  or 
participle  may  stand  in  apposition  to  a  noun  (usually  the  sub- 
ject) : 

!j)te    "iPferbe,    t)om   3^ge    cr=   The  horses,  frightened  by  the 
frfircdt,  gtngen  bmij.  train,  ran  away. 

2.  Unless  the  apposition  is  with  the  subject,  the  Enghsh  ap- 
positive construction  should  be  rendered  into  German  by  a 
subordinate  clause  : 

Q(i)  ^be  bte  U^r  t)erIoren,  bte  I  have  lost  the  watch  given  me 
SSater  mir  fd)enfte.  by  father. 


2  26  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  264 

Notes.  —  i.  The  appositive  adjectival  construction,  frequent  in  Eng- 
lish, is  but  sparingly  used  in  German. 

2.  The  appositive  construction  may  be  replaced  by  the  attributive  con- 
struction, for  vi'hich  see  §  298. 

EXERCISE   LV 

A,  I.  A  large  number  of  guests  had  been  invited  to  the  ball, 
but  only  [a]  few  were  present.  2.  Not  more  than  a  dozen  had 
come  at  9  o'clock.  3.  Among  these  was  the  sister  of  (the) 
Count  B.,  the  German  ambassador.  4.  [Your]  Majesty  is 
always  in  the  right.  5.  Do  you  want  the  carriage  at  once, 
madam  (gncibtge  grau)  ?  6.  The  eldest  daughter  of  Henry  the 
Seventh,  King  of  England,  married  James  the  Fourth,  King  of 
Scotland.  7.  These  were  the  grandparents  of  Mary  Stuart, 
Queen  of  Scotland.  8.  The  city  of  Dresden  is  the  capital  of 
the  kingdom  of  Saxony.  9.  Have  you  ever  seen  William  the 
Second,  the  present  German  Emperor?  10.  I  saw  him  as  a 
boy,  but  not  since  he  has  become  Emperor.  11.  When  I  saw 
him,  he  was  riding  through  the  park  with  Prince  Henry,  his 
younger  brother.  12.  A  multitude  of  human  beings  lost  their 
lives  by  (bur(f))  the  earthquake.  13.  The  greater  part  of  the 
inhabitants  of  Messina  perished. 

B,  I.  Dear  father  and  (dear)  mother,  I  am  sorry  you  have 
had  to  wait  for  us  so  long.  2.  I  asked  you,  as  my  oldest 
friend,  to  assist  me.  3.  You  were  right;  you  have  no  better 
friend  than  I.  4.  Yes,  indeed,  one  can  always  trust  a  friend 
like  you.  5.  The  name  of  my  brother  George's  teacher  is 
Moser.  6.  To  do  right  and  to  be  happy  is  one  and  the 
same  [thing].  7.  The  German  people  (3SoI!,  n^  are  (is)  most 
intelligent  and  industrious.  8.  I  gave  the  beggar  20  pfennigs, 
and  he  went  on  (tt)eiter)  quite  happy.  9.  A  dozen  silver  spoons 
costs  forty  marks.  10.  Indignant  at  (iiber^  acc^  his  conduct, 
I  went  away  at  once.  11.  Messrs.  Schmidt  and  Braun  have  a 
large  departmental  store  in  Schiller  Street.  12.  I  was  not 
speaking  with  Elsa,  your  eldest  sister,  but  with  Clara,  your 
youngest  sister.  13.  The  teacher  is  satisfied  with  the  exercises 
written  by  his  pupils. 


§267]  LESSON   LVI  227 

C  Lesestiick  :  Ein  Professor  kam  eines  Abends  nach  Hause 
und  sagte  zu  seiner  Frau  :  "  Siehst  du  wohl,  wir  Professoren 
sind  doch  nicht  so  vergeBlich,  wie  man  glaubt.  Ich  habe 
meinen  Regenschirm  diesmal  doch  nicht  vergessen  !  "  "  Aber," 
erwiderte  seine  Frau,  "du  hast  deinen  Regenschirm  nicht 
mitgenommen ;  du  hast  ihn  zu  Hause  gelassen." 


LESSON  LVI 

265.  Nominative.     1.  The  nominative  is   the   case   of  the 
subject,  and  is  also  used  as  a  vocative. 

2.  Verbs  indicating  a  state  or  transition,  such  as  fein,  totxitu, 
bleiben,  ^ei^en,  take  a  predicate  nominative  : 

(Sr  hlitb  (Solbat.  He  remained  a  soldier. 

Sr  t}d^t  SarL  His  name  is  Charles. 

Note.  —  With  trcrben,  511  is  often  used  to  indicate  transition:    3)a§ 
SBaffer  tDUrbe  511  ®i^,  '  The  water  turned  to  ice.' 

266.  Accusative,     i.  The  accusative  is  the  case  of  the  direct 
object  of  a  verb. 

2.  Se^ren,  '  teach/  takes  the  accusative  of  the  person  taught, 
as  well  as  of  the  thing  taught : 

Qi}  Ie{)re  fie  ^^l)fi!-  I  am  teaching  them  physics. 

Note.  —  When  both  person  and  thing  are  mentioned,  untCtric^ten  itt 
+  dat.  is  more  usual :  3ci)  uuterrtd)te  fie  in  ber  $t)t)ftf. 

3.  gragen,  '  ask,'  takes  an  accusative  of  the  person,  but  only 
a  neuter  pronoun  or  clause  as  accusative  of  the  thing  : 

3(f)  tnill  <2ie  ettra^  fragen.        I  want  to  ask  you  something. 
(Sr  fragte,  ob  irf)  fame.  He  asked  if  I  was  coming. 

267.  Predicate   Accusative,     i.  Verbs   of  naming,   calling, 
etc.,  have  a  second  accusative  with  predicative  force  : 

Qd)  nannte  i^tt  einen  9Jarrcn.  I  called  him  a  fool. 


228  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  268 

2.  Some  verbs  of  regarding,  considering,  declaring,  etc., 
similarly  take  an  accusative  with  al^ : 

Qi)  betrac^te  tf)n  aU  einen  geinb.      I  consider  him  an  enemy. 

Note.  —  ^oltctt  takes  fiir  +  ace. :  ^d)  \)altt  i()n  fitr  einen  guten  9J?ann, 
*  I  consider  him  a  good  man.' 

3.  Verbs  of  choosing,  electing,  appointing,  etc.,  usually  take 
JU  +  article,  but  sometimes  have  an  accusative  with  at^  : 

3J?an  tDCi^Ite  i^tt  geftern  sum   They  chose  him  as  chairman 
(aU)  SSorfi^enbem  yesterday. 

Note.  —  The  predicate  ace.  in  all  these  constructions  becomes  a  nom. 
in  the  passive:  §einrii^  I.  tDurbe  ber  5^ogIer  (Fowler)  gennant;  (Sr 
lt)urbe  al^  ^orfi^enbcr  gett)dl)lt. 

268.  Adverbial  Accusative.  The  accusative  is  used  adverbi- 
ally to  express  time  'when '  and  *  how  long,'  price  (§  29),  and 
measure  (§  112,  4)  ;  also  way  or  road  after  verbs  of  motion  : 

SBel^Ctt  SBeg  ge^en  ®k  ?         Which  way  are  you  going? 

269.  Accusative  Absolute.  The  accusative  is  often  used 
absolutely  to  form  adverbial  phrases,  either  with  or  without  an 
adjective  or  participle : 

^etl  §Ut  in  ber  §anb.  Hat  in  hand. 

2)ie  gdttbe  emporge^obett.        With  hands  uplifted. 

EXERCISE   LVI 

A.  I.  As  a  child  I  always  used  to  say  that  I  meant  to  be  a 
soldier.  2.  I  entered  the  army  at  (mtt)  twenty  (years)  as  lieu- 
tenant. 3.  I  remained  a  lieutenant  ten  years,  but  now  I  am 
a  captain,  and  I  expect  to  become  a  general  in  the  course  of 
(the)  time.  4.  Among  Englishmen  the  Duke  of  WelHngton  is 
called  "the  Iron  Duke."  5.  They  regard  him  as  one  of  the 
greatest  generals  that  ever  lived.  6.  The  Germans  call  Bis- 
marck "  the  Iron  Chancellor."     7.   In  1862  Prince  Bismarck 


§  269]  LESSON   LVI  229 

became  prime  minister  of  Prussia  and  in  187 1  chancellor  of  the 
German  Empire.  8.  He  was  made  (eruentten)  a  duke  by  the 
Emperor  William  II,  when  the  latter  dismissed  him  in  1890. 
9.  Ask  that  stranger  what  his  name  is.  10.  He  says  his  name 
is  Meyer,  and  that  he  is  a  commercial  traveler.  11.  Here  we 
must  part ;  you  must  go  your  way,  and  I  will  go  mine. 
1 2.  Our  neighbor's  son  is  anything  but  pohte ;  this  morning  he 
came  in  at  the  front-door,  his  hat  on  his  head  and  his  hands  in 
his  pockets. 

B,  I.  One  of  my  brothers  is  a  physician  and  the  other  is 
a  merchant.  2.  When  I  was  at  (auf,  dat^  the  high-school, 
Mr.  B.  taught  me  English  and  Mr.  S.  taught  me  chemistry. 
3.  Everybody  thought  Mr.  B.  an  excellent  teacher.  4.  On 
this  account  he  was  chosen  headmaster.  5.  In  the  elementary 
schools  the  children  are  taught  reading  (Jnfin.),  writing,  and 
arithmetic.  6.  The  fool  remains  a  fool  his  [whole]  life  long. 
7.  When  water  freezes  it  turns  to  ice ;  when  ice  melts  it  turns 
to  water  again.  8.  The  Niagara  Falls  are  regarded  as  one  of 
the  wonders  of  the  world.  9.  As  a  young  man  Abraham  Lin- 
coln was  a  clerk  in  a  store ;  later,  however,  he  became  a  law- 
yer. 10.  In  the  year  i860  he  was  elected  President  of  the 
United  States.  11.  In  1794  Napoleon  was  appointed  general- 
in-chief  of  the  French  army  in  Italy.  12.  In  1799  he  became 
first  consul  and  afterwards  emperor. 

C.  Lesestiicke  :  i.  Ein  Fremder  vom  Lande  auf  Besuch  in 
London  wollte  einem  Konzerte  beiwohnen.  Er  erkundigte  sich 
am  Schalter  nach  dem  Preise  der  Sitze.  "  Vordersitze,  zwei 
ShiUing;  Riicksitze,  einen  Shilling;  Programme,  einen  Penny." 
"  Na,  dann  geben  Sie  mir  ein  Programm  :  darauf  sitzt  sich's 
schon  ganz  bequem,"  sagte  der  Fremde. 

2.  Ein  Dichter  sandte  einen  Band  seiner  Gedichte  an  einen 
Bekannten  und  bat  denselben,  ihm  zu  sagen,  was  er  davon  halte. 
Er  erhielt  folgende  Antwort :  "  Ich  habe  Ihr  Werk  gelesen  und 
habe  selten  ein  Buch  mit  grofierem  Vergnligen  niedergelegt." 


230  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  270 

LESSON    LVII 

270.  Genitive.  The  use  of  the  German  genitive  is  much  the 
same  as  that  of  the  English  possessive,  or  the  objective  with  *  of.* 

271.  Position  of  Genitive.    The  genitive  more  usually  follows 
the  governing  noun,  unless  the  genitive  is  a  person  name  : 
!Da^  $au^  meine^  greunbe^.    My  friend's  house. 
©C^tller^  SBerfe.  The  works  of  Schiller. 

272.  Genitive  with  Adjectives  and  Verbs,  i.  Some  German 
adjectives  govern  a  genitive,  usually  corresponding  to  an  *of' 
construction  in  English : 

@r  tft  fetner  ©ac^e  getri^.  He  is  sure  of  his  case. 

ltn[ercr  9lcf)tung  tPltrbtg.  Worthy  of  our  respect. 

!De^  5Korbe^  f  d^ulbig.  Guilty  of  murder. 

Note.  —  2o^,  *  rid  of,'  takes  ace. :  3d)  mod)te  U}n  log  tDerbeu,  *  I  should 
like  to  get  rid  of  him ' ;  with  Uoll,  *  full  of,'  the  ace.  is  more  usual :  2)a§ 
©lag  ift  tioU  SScht,  *  The  glass  is  full  of  wine  ';  gettli^,  *  certain  of,'  mitbe, 
*  tired  of,'  take  ace.  of  neut.  pron.,  but  gen.  of  noun:  3d)  bin  C^  getDi§/I 
am  certain  of  it';   3(^  bin  t>C§  ^axUn§  miibe,-*I  am  tired  of  waiting.' 

2.  The  German  equivalents  of  many  Enghsh  transitive  verbs 
take  a  genitive : 

6r  gebai^te  biefcr  SCatfai^e.        He  mentioned  this  fact. 
Qd)  bebarf  ^'^rer  §i(fe.  I  need  your  help. 

3.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  acquitting,  depriving,  and 
some  others,  take  a  genitive  of  the  remoter  object : 

SRan  !Iagt  xi}n  \>t^  SJJorbe^  an.    He  is  accused  of  murder. 
2)er  ^flt^t  entbunben.  Relieved  of  duty. 

4.  Impersonal  verbs  expressing  mental  affection  take  a  geni- 
tive of  the  remoter  object  (the  cause  of  the  emotion)  : 

@^  iammert  mtc^  fetner.  I  pity  him. 

Wid)  rent  mettter  ©itnben.        I  repent  of  my  sins. 

Notes.  —  i.  Some  of  these  verbs  are  also  used  personally  with  the 
cause  of  the  emotion  as  subj. :  @r  jammert  mid) ;  tneiuc  (Siinben  reuen 

2.  For  the  gen.  after  refl.  verbs,  see  §  150. 


§  276]  LESSON   LVII  231 

273.  Adverbial  Genitive,  i.  The  genitive  may  express  ad- 
verbial relations  of  place  and  manner,  mostly  confined  to  fixed 
phrases : 

(Seinc!^  28egei^  ge^en.  To  go  one's  way. 

8in!er§anb;  trocfticn  gU^C;^.    On  the  left  hand ;  dryshod. 
9D?etne^  ©rac^ten^.  In  my  opinion. 

^tDeitcr  Slaffe  reifen*  To  travel  second  class. 

®utcr  T)mge  fein.  To  be  of  good  cheer. 

Note.  —  For  gen.  of  time,  see  §  87. 

2.  The  adverbial  genitive  with  -tt)etfe  is  a  common  mode  of 
forming  adverbs  of  manner  from  adjectives  : 
©tUcEUd^erineife.  Fortunately. 

274.  The  Dative.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  the  indirect  ob- 
ject, and  denotes  the  person  for  whose  advantage  or  disadvan- 
tage a  thing  is  or  is  done,  corresponding  not  only  to  the 
English  '  to  *  or  *  for,'  but  also  to  '  from ' : 

®ie  gab  bcm  ^inbc  53onbon^.   She  gave  the  child  candy. 
6r  fauft  mir  ©itc^er.  He  is  buying  books  for  me. 

(Sr  l)at  mir  ®elb  gefto^ten.         He  stole  money  from  me. 

275.  Dative  with  Adjectives.  German  equivalents  of  English 
adjectives  followed  by  '  to  '  (with  some  others)  take  the  dative ; 

6r  b(ieb  mir  treu.  He  remained  faithful  to  me. 

<Sie  tft  bem  ©ruber  d^ntid^.        She  is  like  her  brother. 

276.  Dative  with  Verbs.  The  dative  stands  as  the  personal 
and  only  object  after  many  verbs,  the  equivalents  of  which  are 
transitive  in  English  : 

(5r  begegnete  (folgte)  mir.  He  met  (followed)  me. 

6r  ^at  mir  gebro^t.  He  threatened  me. 

9Bie  tann  tc^  ^f)mn  btenen?  How  can  I  serve  you? 

gr  iDtrb  mir  beifte^en.  He  will  assist  me. 


232  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  277 

277.  Ethical  Dative.  The  dative  is  used  freely  in  German 
to  denote  the  person  who  has  some  interest  in  an  action  or 
thing,  and  when  so  employed  is  called  the  '  ethical  dative,'  or 
*  dative  of  interest ' : 

%n  mir  ba^  nii^t.  Don't  do  that  (I  tell  you). . 

!j)u  btft  mir  ein  netter  Surfi^ !  A  nice  fellow  you  are  ! 
@ef)t  mir  nur  bie  f cf)dnen  2tpf el.   Just  look  at  these  fine  apples. 

Note.  —  For  dat.  with  preps.,  see  Lessons  XXVII  and  XXXII;  for 
possessive  dat.,  see  §  163. 

EXERCISE   LVII 

A.  211^  ©eniamin  granfUn  ein  fletner  ^'unge  tuar,  begeg* 
Tiete  i^m  eitte^  fatten  SJiorgen^  ein  Wlann,  ber  eine  2lyt  trng. 
dx  ftopfte  bem  Snaben  freunblicf)  auf  bie  ®(^ntter  unb  fragte 
i^n,  ob  fein  3Sater  einen  @(f)Ieifftein  l)abe.  „®ttvx^/'  txwi^ 
berte  i^m  ber  Sleine.  „!j)n  bift  mir  ein  pb[(f)er  Qnn%t/'  fagte 
ber  grembe  jn  t^m,  ^mitlft  bn  mir  eriauben,  meine  3{ft  baranf 
gn  fc^Ieifen?''  „©eine  2Borte/'  erjafilt  granfftn,  „fc()met(^el* 
ten  meiner  gitelfeit  unb  id)  antiDortete  if)m:  dttd^t  gerne. 
S)ann  ftreii^efte  ber  9Jfann  mir  bie  ^ade  unb  bat  micf),  it)m  ein 
njenig  ^ei^e^  SBa[fer  ju  ^olen.  2lu^  ba6  fonnte  id)  i^m  ntc^t 
ab[d}Iagen,  ba  er  mir  fo  freunbUi^  ju  [ein  fif)ien,  unb  id)  brat^te 
i^m  einen  Seffel  t)oII»  ©ann  fuf)r  ber  grembe  fort:  2}focf)teft 
bu  mir  tDo^t  ein  :|3aar  SJiinuten  ben  ©c^Ieifftein  bre^en?  Qd) 
mat^te  miij  toric^tertpeife  an  bie  2lrbeit  unb  bre^te,  bi^  mir 
Sopf,  9iu(Jen  unb  3lrme  me^  taten.  3Ite  bie  3lft  fertig  n)ar, 
gab  mir  ber  3Kann  unermartet  eine  D^rfeige  unb  rief :  ®ie 
©(^ulglode  ^at  f^on  Icingft  geldutet!  9)?acf)e,  ba§  bu  fort^ 
fommft,  fleiner  @(^(inget,  [onft  ge^t  e^  bir  fc^Ied^t.  S5iefe 
Segeben^eit/'  [agt  granfUn  iDeiter,  „ift  mir  im  fpdteren  2thtn 
jebe^mal  eingef alien,  trenn  id)  mer!te,  ba^  {emanb  mir  ober 
anberen  ju  feinem  eigenen  SSorteil  f(^meid)eln  tDoHte.  S)ann 
bad)te  ic^  mir  immer:  ®em  Tlanm  ift  nic^t  gu  trauen,  ber  ^at 
bir  gett)i^  eine  21ft  ju  fc^Ieifen.'' 


§  277]  LESSON   LVII  233 

B.  Oral  exercise  on  the  above. 

C,  I.  Good  children  obey  their  parents  and  follow  their 
advice.  2.  This  house  is  too  expensive  for  me.  3.  I  should 
like  to  get  rid  of  it,  but  nobody  will  buy  it  from  me.  4.  A 
good  king  is  ever  mindful  of  his  subjects.  5.  His  subjects  are 
not  always  grateful  to  him.  6.  The  emperor  thanked  the  chan- 
cellor and  reHeved  him  of  his  duty.  7.  It  is  not  worth  while 
to  read  such  a  book.  8.  I  am  sorry  that  I  began  it.  9.  In 
America  people  don't  like  to  travel  second  class.  10.  Is  the 
gentleman  whom  we  met  just  now  an  acquaintance  of  yours? 
II.  No,  he  is  an  entire  stranger  (gattj  fretub)  to  me.  12.  He 
resembles  my  friend  Schafer  very  much.  13.  I  should  be  glad 
of  the  opportunity  to  make  his  acquaintance. 

D.  I.  My  neighbor  has  been  accused  of  forgery.  2.  I  do 
not  believe  that  he  is  capable  of  such  a  crime.  3.  He  is  a  man 
who  is  worthy  of  all  respect.  4.  I  am  of  the  same  opinion,  and 
I  am  convinced  of  (Don)  his  mnocence.  5.  All  his  friends  are 
certain  of  his  acquittal.  6.  They  will  do  what  they  can  to  assist 
him.  7.  What  is  the  matter  with  you  to-day?  You  seem  to  me 
to  be  very  sad.  8.  My  father  has  forbidden  nie  to  attend  the 
foot-ball  game.  9.  He  needs  my  help  at  home.  10.  I  often 
"help  him  mornings  and  evenings. 

E,  I.I  met  a  man  one  cold  morning.  2.  He  called  me  a 
nice  little  boy  and  patted  me  on  the  shoulder.  3.  "Do  you 
think  your  father  would  allow  me  to  grind  my  axe  on  his  grind- 
stone?" 4.  "lam  certain  of  it,"  I  answered  him.  5.  "Wouldn't 
you  like  to  help  me  to  grind  the  axe?  "  6.  As  he  seemed  to  me 
to  be  so  friendly,  I  could  not  refuse  him  this.  7.  "  Well,  just  get 
me  a  kettle  full  of  hot  water.  8.  Now  turn  the  grindstone  for 
me  a  few  minutes."  9.  I  was  soon  tired  of  the  work,  and  my 
back  and  arms  were  sore.  10.  But  he  wouldn't  allow  me  to 
stop  till  the  work  was  done.  11.  As  long  as  he  needed  my 
help  he  flattered  my  vanity.  12.  When  the  axe  was  done  he 
wanted  to  get  rid  of  me  at  once.  13.  So  he  gave  me  a  box  on 
the  ear,  and  told  me  I  should  go  to  school.     14.  The  school- 


234  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  278 

bell  had  already  rung,  and  I  went  my  way  sadly.  15.  This 
occurrence  often  came  to  my  mind  afterwards.  16.  I  said  to 
myself :  "  Don't  trust  those  who  have  an  axe  for  you  to  grind. 
17.  They  will  flatter  you  to  their  own  advantage." 

LESSON  LVIII 

278.  The  Indicative  Mood.  The  indicative  is  the  mood  of 
reality  and  direct  statement  or  question. 

279.  The  Present,  i.  This  tense  answers  to  all  the  English 
forms  of  the  same  tense  (e.g.  \6)  lobe  =  *  I  praise/  '  am  prais- 
ing/ '  do  praise '),  and  is  used  to  denote  action  now  going  on, 
or  to  state  a  general  fact  or  custom. 

2.  It  is  used  for  the  imperfect  to  give  greater  vividness  to 
historical  narrative  : 

"ipiij^ltd^  pffnct  er  ba^  %0X,  Suddenly  he  opens  the  gate, 
itnb  ein  Jiger  ftiirst  ^erau^.      and  a  tiger  rushes  out. 

3.  It  is  also  used  to  denote  what  has  happened  and  still  con- 
tinues, especially  with  [c^ott,  feit,  and  [eitbem  : 

3Bie  lange  tft  er  fc^on  !ranf  ?      How  long  has  he  been  ill? 
®ettbem  er  !ranf  X%  fann  er  He  has  not  been  able  to  sleep 
ni(^t  ft^Iafen.  since  he  has  been  ill. 

4.  It  is  often  used  for  the  future,  as  sometimes  in  English : 
^(f)  fomme  morgen  tnieber.       I  return  to-morrow. 

280.  The  Imperfect,  i.  This  is  the  past  tense  of  historical 
narrative ;  it  also  denotes  customary,  repeated,  or  contempo- 
raneous action,  answering  to  the  English  forms  '  was  doing,' 
'  used  to  do,*  etc. : 

3^n  fed^^  Jagen  ft^uf  ®Ott  bte  In  six  days  God  created  the 
SBett  unb  rulfte  am  fie-  world,  and  rested  on  the 
bentett.  seventh. 

(Sr  ging  jebett  STag  au^.  He  used  to  go  out  every  day. 

(£r  toarf|tc,  tDd^renb  ic^  frflltef .  He  was  watching  while  I  slept. 


§  284]  LESSON   LVIII  •     235 

Note.  —  *  Would,'  of  customary  action,  must  be  rendered  by  the  impf. 
or  by  ^flcgctt  .  .  ,  jtt :  (Sr  fagtc  oft  or  ^flcgtc  oft  ju  fagen,  *  He  would 

often  say.' 

2.  It  is  used  with  [ci^ott  and  crft  to  denote  what  had  happened 
and  still  continued  : 
(Sr  mar  fd^on  brei  S^age  ^ter,  He  had  been  here  three  days 

al^  ic^  anfam.  when  I  arrived. 

281.  The  Perfect,  i.  This  tense  indicates  an  event  in  past 
time,  continuing  up  to,  but  not  including,  the  present : 

^^  l^afic  meitte  Ut)r  ijcrlorcn.   I  have  lost  my  watch. 

2.  It  often  answers  to  the  English  past,  when  referring  to  a 
period  recently  completed ;  also  of  an  event  as  a  separate  and 
independent  fact : 

^i)  6m  geftern  aui^gcgangcn.    I  went  out  yesterday. 
®Ott  ^at  Utl^  gcfdffaffCtt*  God  created  us. 

3.  The  perfect  replaces  the  German  future- perfect,  as  the 
present  does  the  future  : 

3^(^    fomme,    fobalb    td^    %^^   I  shall  come  as  soon  as  I  have 
afigcmaci^t  l^abc.  attended  to  that. 

282.  The  Pluperfect.  This  tense  is  used  of  a  past  action 
completed  before  another  had  begun  : 

6^  toar  gcfc^C^cn,  ate  tc^  fam.  It  had  happened  when  I  came. 

283.  The  Future.  This  tense  corresponds  in  general  to  the 
English  future,  but  is  also  used  to  denote  probability  or  con- 
jecture : 

Sr  toirb  {)eute  2lbenb  lammen.  He  will  come  this  evening. 
(Sr  toirb  tt)0l)I  balb  ^ter  fcin.        He  will  probably  be  here  soon. 

284.  The  Future-Perfect.      This   tense   corresponds  to  the 
English  future-perfect,  but  also  expresses  probability,  etc. : 
^i)  tocrbe  meitte  2lrbeit  tJOlt^    I  shall  have  finished  my  work 

cnbct  ^a6cn,  e^e  fie  lommeti.      before  they  come. 
®er  :Srief  tntrb  gefterti  angc^   No    doubt    the    letter    came 
fommcn  fern*  yesterday. 


236  GERMAN   GRAxMMAR  [§  285 

285.  The  Subjunctive  Mood.  i.  The  subjunctive  is  the 
mood  of  indirect  statement  and  of  supposed  or  unreal  condition. 

2.  The  present  subjunctive  also  replaces  the  missing  persons 
of  the  imperative  (§  116,  i). 

3.  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  may  be  used  to 

express  a  wish : 

aSarc  xi}  bamat^   bet  .^^nen  Would  that  I  were  (had  been) 
(getDefen)!  with  you  then  ! 

4.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  clauses  expressing  purpose, 
especially  after  a  past  tense  in  the  governing  clause,  with  the 
conjunctions  ba^^  auf  ba^,  bauttt : 

&  eilte,  baft  (auf  ba^,  batnit)  He  hastened  in  order  not  to  be 
er  nidjt  au  fpcit  fame.  too  late. 

5.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  sometimes  used  to  express 
possibility : 

®a^  gingc  tDO^L  That  might  possibly  do. 

Qi)  bac^te  ba^  tPCire  gut.  I  should  think  that  might  do. 

Note.  —  For  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in  indirect  statements,  see 
§  91;  for  its  use  in  conditional  sentences,  see  §  106. 

286.  Imperative  Mood.  i.  The  imperative  expresses  com- 
mand or  entreaty. 

2.  For  laffen  with  imperative  force,  see  §  117  ;  for  foHett  as 
imperative,  see  §  122,  2;  other  substitutes  for  the  imperative 
are  the  present  and  future  indicative,  and,  in  exclamatory 
clauses,  the  infinitive,  the  past  participle,  or  an  adverb  or  ad- 
verbial phrase  : 

T)n  bicttift  (ttitrft  fileiiiCtt)!  You  stay  ! 

3ine  cinftcigctt!  All  aboard  ! 

©tttt  gcftanben!  Stand  still ! 

fjort  mit  i^m !  Away  with  him  ! 


§  286]  LESSON   LVIII  237 


EXERCISE    LVIII 

A.  I.  Now  I  must  [be]  off  (fort),  but  I  return  next  week. 
2.  My  birthday  falls  on  the  (auf  ben)  30th  of  (the)  next 
month.  3.  How  long  has  Charles  been  learning  French? 
4.  He  has  been  learning  it  since  his  fifth  year.  5.  The  Schro- 
(iers  have  been  visiting  at  our  house  for  a  fortnight,  but  they 
leave  us  to-morrow.  6.  My  cousin  arrived  only  yesterday 
morning.  7.  Yesterday  evening  he  set  out  again,  as  he  had 
promised  to  be  at  home  to-day.  8.  No  doubt  he  has  arrived 
by  this  time.     9.  I  suppose  he  will  write  as  soon  [as]  he  arrives. 

10.  I  shall  have  learnt  my  lessons  before  the  clock  strikes  nine. 

11.  I  was  hastening  in  order  that  everything  might  be  finished 
before  nine  o'clock.  12.  Some  of  us  had  finished  half  an  hour 
before  the  clock  struck.  13.  All  aboard!  The  train  starts  in 
two  minutes. 

B,  I.  We  go  away  to-morrow,  and  we  don't  know  when  we 
shall  be  back.  2.  There  is  a  knock  [at  the  door]  ;  no  doubt 
it  is  the  postman.  3.  He  comes  every  day  at  about  this  time. 
4.  My  friend  Schlegel  has  been  at  the  University  for  five 
years.  5.  When  I  was  at  the  University,  I  used  to  spend  my 
holidays  in  the  Black  Forest  every  summer.  6.  No  doubt  you 
enjoyed  yourself  very  much.  7.  Robert  would  always  play 
when  he  should  have  been  working.  8.  The  telegraph  was  in- 
vented by  an  American  named  (natttetl^)  Morse.  9.  Another 
American  named  Howe  invented  the  sewing-machine.  10.  John, 
you  will  bring  Mr.  B.  this  letter,  and  wait  for  an  answer. 
II.  I  had  been  only  twenty-four  hours  in  San  Francisco  when 
the  earthquake  took  place.  12.  Only  drive  quickly,  coachman  ! 
Drive  quickly  ! 

(7.  I.  The  express  train  arrives  this  evening  at  7.45  and 
leaves  at  7.55.  2.  I  suppose  you  are  tired  after  your  long 
journey.  3.  How  long  have  you  been  living  in  this  street? 
4.  For  the  last  three  years.     5.  Uncle  had  been  a  fortnight  ill, 


238  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  287 

before  he  knew  what  was  the  matter  with  him.  6.  God  grant 
that  his  illness  may  not  be  serious  !  7.  He  is  not  very  ill ;  I 
doubt  not  he  will  get  well  in  a  few  days.  8.  He  kept  on  (f  ort- 
fat)ren  JU)  working,  though  he  should  have  been  in  bed. 
9.  Would  that  he  had  followed  my  advice  !  10.  He  was  just 
about  to  set  out  for  Europe  when  he  fell  (trierbetl)  ill.  11.  Make 
no  noise  (translate  in  different  ways),  children,  till  I  come  back. 

D.  Review  Exercises  XXVI  and  XXVIH. 

E.  8e[eftii(f: 

§aHo !    ©te  STiiren  auf getan ! 
§or^  3U,  n)er  ^oren  tnill, 
tcf)  bin  ber  §erbft,  ein  luft'ger  3JJann^ 
\i)  ftef)'  nic^t  (ange  [tilt ! 

@eut  fa^r'  \^  ®erff  unb  ©afer  ein 
unb  trag'  ben  (Smtefranj, 
unb  abenb^  bann  beim  fit^ten  SBein 
mac^'  id)  a)?nftf  unb  Slanj. 

Unb  morgan  auf  bte  :33aum'  ^inauf !  — 
^opf  tDcg  unb  auf gepa^t ! 
§et!   tDte  ba^  rot  unb  gelb  pf)auf 
]^erunterf(J)(dgt  t)om  2lft !  — 

^6)  bin  ber  §erbft,  i^r  Jennet  mid^, 
\i)  \\t\)  ni(f)t  gerne  [tilt. 
@at(o,  §aHo!  brum  tummie  fid^, 
tt)er  frd^Iicf)  tDerben  trilt ! 


LESSON  LIX 

287.    Infinitive  without  p.    This  form  is  used  as  follows :  — 
I.  With  tDerben  to  form  the  future  tense,  and  with  the  modal 
auxiliaries  biirfen,  f5nnen,  laffen,  :c.  (§  157). 


§  288]  LESSON   LIX  239 

2.  With  the  verbs  bleibett,  finben,  l^ei^en,  l^elfen,  ij'6xtn, 
le^ren,  lernen,  mac^en,  nennen,  fe^en : 

6r  bUeb  ftcl^em  He  remained  standing. 

Qd)  f)e(fe  i^tn  arficitcm  I  am  helping  him  to  work. 

2Bir  fa^eti  fie  tommcn.  We  saw  her  come  (coming). 

Note.  — ^clfCtt,  (c^rcit,  (critCtt  also  take  an  infinitive  with  5U,  es- 
pecially with  a  compound  tense:  3c^  t)abe  gelemt  ju  gel)orc^en,  *I  have 
learned  to  obey.' 

3.  In  certain  phrases  with  ge^ett  and  other  verbs  of  motion: 
Qd)  ge^e  (fa^re)  f^ja^icrcn*        I  go  for  a  walk  (drive). 

!l)a^  Sinb  mug  fc^tafcn  ge^ett.  The  child  must  go  to  bed. 
Qd)  ge^e  morgen  fifc^Ctt*  I  am  going  fishing  to-morrow. 

288.  Infinitive  with  ju*  This  form  usually  corresponds  to 
the  English  infinitive  with  ^to,'  and  is  used  :  — 

1.  After  verbs  requiring  an  infinitive  complement,  except 
those  mentioned  in  §  287  : 

@^  fitngt  an  ju  regnen.  It  is  beginning  to  rain. 

Sr  fc^eint  xdd)  ju  fetn.  He  seems  to  be  rich. 

Qdj  i)abt  t)ie(  JU  tun.  I  have  a  great  deal  to  do. 

Notes. —  i.  With  most  of  such  verbs  a  bo^  clause  may  replace  the  infin., 
and  must  do  so  unless  the  subject  of  the  two  clauses  is  the  same :  ©r 
glaubt,  !htg  JU  jctn  {or  ba§  ex  !(ug  ift),  *He  thinks  himself  clever';  @r 
njiinfc^t  jtt  fommcn,  *He  wishes  to  come';  (Sr  triinfcl^t,  ba^  id)  fommc, 
*He  wishes  me  to  come';  observe  from  the  last  example  that  the  English 
construction  of  the  ace.  with  infin.  is  inadmissible  in  Ger. 

2.  BaQtltf  'tell,'  requires  a  bag  clause  with  foUcit :  @agcn  <Bk  itim, 
bag  cr  fommen  foU,  *Tell  him  to  come.' 

2.  After  verbs,  as  adverbial  complement  denoting  purpose, 
usually  preceded  by  urn,  which  heads  the  infinitive  clause  : 

dx  !am,  um  midf)  ju  n)arnen.      He  came  to  warn  me. 

3.  After  nouns,  as  adjectival  complement : 

Sr  ^at  £uft  5U  bletben.  He  has  a  mind  to  stay. 

4.  After  adjectives  as  adverbial  complement  ; 
Qd)  bin  bcrctt  p  ^elfen.  I  am  ready  to  help. 


240  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  288 

Note.  —  Where  ^It  (=  *too')  precedes  the  adjective,  ttttt  may  be  used: 
dx  ift  JU  ftolj,  um  5tt  bettein,  '  He  is  too  proud  to  beg.' 

5.  After  [ein,  fte^ett,  bleiben,  with  passive  force  ; 
@ie  ift  nirgenb^  p  finben.  She  is  nowhere  to  be  found. 

(S^  fte^t  5U  erlDarten*  It  is  to  be  expected. 

ii^  hUxii  t)tel  p  tun.  Much  remains  to  be  done. 

Note.  —  Observe  the  following  analogous  idiom  with  ^abeit:  3c^  ^ubc 
einen  ^rief  5U  fc^retben,  *I  have  a  letter  to  write.' 

EXERCISE   LIX 

A,  I.  The  man  let  Franklin  turn  the  grindstone.  2.  He 
would  not  let  him  stop  till  the  axe  was  done.  3.  If  you  see 
anybody  come  in,  please  tell  me  (it).  4.  We  heard  somebody 
walking  behind  us.  5.  We  stood  still  (remained  standing)  at 
the  corner  to  see  who  it  was.  6.  Help  me  to  do  this  work,  and 
I  will  help  you  to  do  your  exercises.  7.  My  brothers  wanted 
to  go  fishing,  but  father  bade  them  stay  at  home.  8.  I  wish  you 
to  hear  what  I  have  to  say ;  do  not  expect  me  to  keep  silent 
always.  9.  My  father  wishes  me  to  come  home  before  ten 
o'clock.  10.  Schlegel,  my  schoolmate,  has  gone  to  Berlin  to 
study  medicine.  11.  We  staid  at  home  yesterday  to  receive 
you,  but  you  did  not  come.  12.  My  eldest  brother  has  had 
the  misfortune  to  break  an  arm.  13.  He  is  very  much  to  be 
pitied.  14.  I  have  a  dozen  letters  to  write.  15.  I  shall  not 
have  time  enough  to  write  them  all  this  evening.  16.  I  should 
like  to  go  for  a  drive  before  dinner.  17.  We  are  always  glad 
to  see  our  friends. 

B.  I.  Who  has  left  these  books  lying  on  the  table?  2.  John; 
he  says  he  forgot  to  bring  them  upstairs.  3.  Young  people 
should  not  remain  sitting  while  older  people  are  obliged 
to  stand.  4.  I  am  glad  to  make  the  acquaintance  of  (fennen 
lernen)  this  gentleman.  5.  I  have  heard  (say)  that  the  cele- 
brated statesman  M.  is  coming  here.  6.  I  should  like  to  hear 
him  speak.  7.  I  am  sorry  not  to  have  heard  him  when  he  was 
here.     8.  Those  who  have  not  learned  to  obey  have  not  yet 


§  289]  LESSON  LX  241 

learned  to  command.  9.  Everybody  believed  Mr.  Hartmann 
to  be  a  rich  man,  but  he  has  become  bankrupt.  10.  Yes,  he 
thought  himself  to  be  richer  than  he  really  was.  11.  If  you 
wish  me  to  wait,  write  to  me  at  once.  12.  A  well-known 
proverb  says  (tauten):  "  Man  (t^n  Tttn\i})  does  not  live  to  eat, 
but  eats  to  live."  13.  You  will  be  glad  to  learn  (erfa^retl)  that 
we  mean  to  visit  you  next  week.  14.  My  sister  is  still  too 
young  to  go  to  school.  15.  Are  there  any  houses  to  sell  in 
your  street?  16.  Whether  the  prisoner  is  innocent  of  this 
crime  remains  to  be  decided. 

C.  Lesestiick  :  Eines  Abends  erschien  ein  wiirdiger  Burger 
auf  einer  Sternwarte  und  sagte,  er  sei  gekommen,  um  den  Mond 
durchs  Teleskop  zu  sehen.  "  Kommen  Sie  nach  funf  Stundea 
wieder;  der  Mond  geht  erst  gegen  zwei  Uhr  morgen  friih  auf, 
und  jetzt  ist  es  doch  erst  neun  Uhr. "  "  Das  weiB  ich  recht  gut," 
antwortete  der  Besuch.  "  Deshalb  komme  ich  ja  eben  jetzt ; 
wenn  er  erst  aufgegangen  ist,  kann  ich  ihn  auch  ohne  Teleskop 
sehen." 


LESSON  LX 

289.  Substantival  Infinitive,     i.  Any  infinitive  may  be  used 
in  the  singular  as  a  neuter  noun  of  the  2J?aIer  model,  and  takes 
a  capital : 
@ein  laute^  9ficben  ift  Icifttg.      His  loud  talking  is  annoying. 

Note.  —  Such  an  infinitive  has  the  force  of  the  English  form  in  -ing, 
denoting  an  act,  gg.  t^a^  fiefctt,  '  (the  act  of)  reading,'  or  of  an  Eng. 
noun,  e.g.  ha^  ScbCtt,  '  life.' 

2.  This  infinitive  (with  or  without  adjuncts)  often  stands  as 
the  subject  of  a  verb,  preferably  with  ju^  which  must  be  used 
when  e^  precedes  the  principal  verb  : 

®Ute    greuube  5U    ^abeu  ift  To  have  good  friends  is  better 
beffer,  al^  vtxi)  ju  feiu.  than  being  rich. 

6^  ift   augene^m,  getobt  ju  It  is  pleasant  to  be  praised. 
tDcrbeu. 


242  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  290 

290.  Infinitive  with  Prepositions,  i.  Only  the  prepositions 
Um,  (an)ftatt,  and  ol^ne  can  govern  an  infinitive  (with  ju) 
directly : 

Um  mi(^  JU  befui^en.  (In  order)  to  visit  me. 

Slnftatt  liinger  JU  bleiben.  Instead  of  staying  longer. 

Otint  ein  2Bort  JU  fagetl.  Without  saying  a  word. 

2.  Observe  from  the  above  that  the  English  gerund,  or 
verbal  in  -ing,  answers  to  this  German  construction,  except 
after  um. 

3.  The  English  gerund  is  a  noun,  and  may  stand  as  subject 
or  object;  it  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  English 
present  participle,  which  is  an  adjective,  and  which  must  refer  to 
some  noun,  expressed  or  understood,  e.g.  Fishing  (gerund  subj.) 
is  exciting  (participial  adj.);  I  hke  fishing  (gerund  obj.);  I  am 
tired  of  fishing  (gerund  obj.  of  prep.). 

4.  The  preposition  governing  an  English  gerund  is  not 
always  required  in  German,  and  the  gerund  is  then  rendered 
by  an  infinitive  : 

T)k  ®abe,  gut  ju  fpred^en.        The  gift  of  speaking  well. 
6r  Ijat  Urfacfie^  ba^  JU  [agen.     He  has  cause  for  saying  that. 

5.  But  when  the  German  construction  requires  a  preposition, 
this  preposition  is  put  into  the  governing  clause  and  preceded 
by  ba(r),  which  represents  the  governed  infinitive  or  ba^  clause  : 

^rofefforSJ?.  fiubet93erguiigeu  Professor  M.  finds  pleasure  in 
baran,  ^d)ad}  p  f^iteleu.  playing  chess. 

!5)a^  ®lnd  befte^t  barin,  JU*  Happiness  consists  in  being 
frieben  p  fetn.  contented. 

Qd)  ijaht  ni(f)t^  bagcgen,  ha^  I  have  no  objection  to  the 
ba^  §au^  tierfauft  mirb.  house  being  sold. 

6.  A  gerund  preceded  in  English  by  a  noun  in  the  posses- 
sive, or  by  a  possessive  adjective,  must  be  rendered  by  a  ba^ 
clause : 


§  292]  LESSON   LX  243 

Qd)  ^abe  ntc^t^  baflcgcn,  baft  I  have  no  objection  to  your 

3^V  :93ruber  Meibt.  brother's  remaining. 

SBtr  tierlaffen  un^  barauf,  baft  We  rely  on  your  coming. 

®ie  fommen. 

7.  When  the  gerund  governed  by  a  preposition  expresses  an 
adverbial  relation,  it  must  be  expanded  into  a  subordinate 
sentence  : 

211^  er  un^  fa^,  fief  er  fort.        On  seeing  us,  he  ran  away, 
^tibem  iDir  anbere  Uberreben,  In  persuading  others,  we  per- 

iiberreben  tnir  uM  felbft.  suade  ourselves. 

291.  Interrogative  Infinitive.  The  English  infinitive  in  in- 
direct questions  must  be  replaced  in  German  by  a  finite  clause  : 

Qi)  ttJetg  tt)a^  t(^  tun  foH*  I  know  what  to  do. 

©age  tnir,  n)0  id)  fte^en  fott.      Tell  me  where  to  stand. 

292.  Elliptical  Infinitive,  i.  The  infinitive  is  used,  as  in 
EngUsh,  in  various  elliptical  constructions  : 

SBarum  mit^  tocdtn  ?  Why  waken  me  ? 

Danarf)  p  urtcilcn*  To  judge* by  that. 

2.  For  the  elliptical  infinitive  with  imperative  force,  see 
§  286,  2. 

EXERCISE   LX 

A.    I.  The  habit  c^  speaking  distinctly  is  most  important. 

2.  You   cannot   neglect   your   work   without   my  knowing   it. 

3.  Before  leaving  (the)  town  we  must  visit  our  old  friend 
Schulz.  4.  It  would  be  a  pity  to  go  away  without  having  visited 
him.  5.  I  hope  nothing  will  prevent  our  visiting  him  to-mor- 
row. 6.  If  you  go  swimming  without  your  father's  knowing  it, 
he  will  be  very  angry.  7.  Little  Charles  was  drowned  yesterday 
while  swimming  in  the  lake.  8.  We  were  punished  for  laugh- 
ing in  the  class.  9.  It  is  better  to  think  without  speaking  than 
to  speak  without   thinking.     10.  You  will   finally  succeed  in 


244  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  292 

learning  French.  11.  We  learn  to  speak  French  while  speak- 
ing French.  12.  His  being  rich  is  no  excuse  for  his  wasting  his 
money.  13.  I  have  so  much  to  do  that  I  don't  know  where 
to  begin.    14.  I  am  tired  of  reading ;  it  is  time  to  retire  to  rest. 

B,  I.  Did  you  ever  hear  the  proverb  :  "  Speech  (speaking) 
is  silver;  silence  (being  silent)  is  gold"?  2.  A  certain  man 
called  his  sons  to  him  {refl^  before  dying  and  told  them  that 
there  was  a  treasure  buried  in  his  field.  3.  After  his  death 
they  began  digging  everywhere,  without,  however,  finding  the 
treasure.  4.  One  of  them  finally  guessed  what  his  father 
meant.  5.  "Since  digging  the  ground,"  said  he,  "we  have 
better  crops,  and  that  is  what  father  meant."  6.  Don't  allow 
yourself  to  be  disturbed  by  my  coming ;    don't  stop  writing. 

7.  After  writing  this  letter,  I  shall  be  able  to  talk  with  you. 

8.  You  say  that  the  matter  is  quite  clear,  but  your  saying  so 
makes  no  difference.  9.  Our  teacher  would  always  insist  on 
our  writing  a  German  exercise  every  day.  10.  Don't  make 
any  mistakes  in  copying  your  exercise.  11.  Instead  of  scold- 
ing us,  please  show  us  how  to  avoid  the  mistakes.  12.  Oh  no  ! 
Instead  of  my  helping  you  always,  you  must  learn  to  help 
yourselves. 

C  gefeftitd: 

^i)  ging  itn  SBatbe  3^c^  tt)oHf  e6  breifjen, 

@o  fixr  mic^  ^in,  S5a  fagf  e^  fein  : 

Unb  nt{i)t^  ju  [uc^eti,  „®o{(  ic^  jum  SBelfett 

J)a^  tt)ar  mein  ®inn.  ©ebrodien  fein  ?'' 

3^m  ©(fatten  fa^  \i)  ^^  grub'^  mtt  alien 

gin  -53liimc^en  fte^n,  J)en  SBur^lein  au^, 

Wvt  Sterne  lenc^tenb  ^nm  ®arten  trng  tc^'^ 

SBie  Stngletn  fc^on.  Sim  pbfi^en  §an^ 

Unb  :pflan3f  ^^  tt)teber 

2lm  fttlfen  Ort, 

9^nn  5n)eigt  e^  immer 

Unb  blU^t  fo  fort. 

—  ©oet^c. 


§  295]  LESSON   LXI  245 

LESSON  LXI 

293.  Participles,  i.  The  verb  has  three  participial  forms, 
namely,  the  present,  the  past,  and  the  future  passive  (§  296). 

2.  The  past  participle  is  a  regular  part  of  the  compound 
tenses  of  the  verb,  and  of  the  passive  voice.  For  the  adjectival 
use  of  participles,  see  below. 

294.  Present  and  Past  Participles,  i.  When  used  as  ad- 
jectives, they  are  variable  or  invariable  like  ordinary  adjectives  : 
S)a^  f^Iafettbc  tinb.  The  sleeping  child. 

2)?eine  tiere^rtcn  SItern,  My  honored  parents. 

®te  t[t  befriebtgt.  She  is  satisfied. 

2.  Like  other  adjectives,  they  may  be  used  substantively 
(§68): 

!Der  $Rei[enbe ;  bie  2?erit)attbten.    The  traveler ;  the  relatives. 

3.  They  are  also  used  as  adverbs  : 

(Sr  ift  bebeutenb  grower.  He  is  considerably  taller. 

Slu^gejeii^net  gete^rt.  Remarkably  learned. 

Note.  —  For  appositive  participle,  see  §  264. 

4.  The  participle  must  follow  all  its  adjuncts,  and  come  at 
the  end  of  the  phrase  : 

SSi^    auf   ben  pd^ften  ®rab   Enraged  to  the  highest  degree. 
ctttritftet. 

295.  Past  Participle  Idioms,  i.  The  past  participle  is  used 
after  fommen  to  denote  the  manner  of  the  action  : 

©r  fam  gckufcn*  He  came  running. 

2.  It  occurs  in  absolute  constructions,  with  or  without  a  sub- 
stantive (usually  in  the  accusative) : 

53Keinen® ruber  au^genoTttmen.   My  brother  excepted, 
grifc^  getDagt,  ^alb  geiDonnen.  Well  begun,  half  done. 

Note.  —  For  the  imperative  use,  see  §  286,  2. 


246  GERMAN  GRAMMAR  [§  296 

296.  Future  Passive  Participle.  It  has  the  form  of  the 
present  participle  preceded  by  JU,  is  formed  from  transitive 
verbs  only,  and  is  always  used  attributively : 

(Sine  5tt  lohmi>C  §anblung-         An  action  to  be  praised. 

297.  Participle  of  Time  and  Cause,  i.  The  English  present 
participle  often  has  the  force  of  an  adverbial  clause  of  time  or 
cause,  and  when  so  used  is  rendered  in  German  by  a  sentence 
introduced  by  a  subordinative  conjunction. 

2.  The  conjunctions  thus  used  to  express  time  are  ba,  at^, 
*  when,'  inbetn,  tDii^renb,  '  while  ' : 

^U  (ba)  id)  i^n  lommen  fa^,  Seeing  him  coming,  I  went  to 

gtng  \6)  xt}m  entgegen,  meet  him. 

gnbcm  er  \id)  fammelte,  fu^r  Recovering   himself,   he    con- 

er  fort*  tinned. 

^6)   traf   ttjU,   al^  (toafirenb,  I  met  him  when  (while)  travel- 

inbem)  x6)  in  (guropa  reifte.  ing  in  Europe. 

3.  For  time,  expressed  by  the  English  perfect  participle, 
nat^bem,  '  after,'  or  at^,  '  when,'  is  always  used,  followed  by  the 
pluperfect : 

Slad^bem  (al^)  li)  ben  Srief  Having  read  the  letter,  I  threw 
gelefen  l^atte,  tt)arf  id)  xiju      it  away, 
ioeg. 

4.  To  express  cause,  ba,  inbem, '  as,'  *  since,'  or  loeil,  ^  be- 
cause,' is  used : 

S)atci)il^nnt(^t  gefunbenl^atte,  Not  having  found  him,  I  went 

gtng  xi)  fort.  away. 

gnbcm  Xfi)  l^offe,  ®ie  jn  fe^en.  Hoping  to  see  you. 

aScil  er  el^rli^  ift,  fann  man  Being    honest,   he   is   to  be 

i^m  tranen>  trusted. 

298.  The  Adjectival  Participle.  i.  The  English  present 
participle  with  the  force  of  a  relative  clause  is  rendered  in  Ger- 
man by  a  relative  clause  : 


§  298]  LESSON   LXI  247 

Qi)  begegnete  einer  grau,  bie  I  met  a   woman    carrying  a 

ein  S'inb  trug.  child. 

(Sin    2)fantt,    ber   t)orbetging,  A  man  passing  by  bowed  to 

gru^te  mid^,  me. 

2.  A  German  participle  used  attributively  very  commonly 
replaces  the  construction  employed  in  the  last  example  above : 

gin     t)OrtiCtgcf|enbcr     Ttann  A  man   passing  by  bowed  to 
grii^te  mxii).  me. 

Note.  —  Attributive  participles  and  adjectives  immediately  precede  the 
substantive  qualified.  This  construction  is  very  common  in  modern  jour- 
nalistic style :  !Die  ®tabt  5l(gier  (iegt  an  ber  SBeftfeite  etner  gerdumigen, 
t)on  ^ap  ^efcaba  im  SBeften  unb.  ^ap  3Ratifu  im  Often  begrenjten,  natf) 
S^orbcn  geoffneten  ^errltd)en  i8u(f)t,  *  The  city  of  Algiers  lies  on  the  west 
side  of  a  spacious  and  magnificent  bay,  bounded  by  Cape  Pescada  on  the 
west  and  Cape  Matifu  on  the  east,  and  open  towards  the  north.' 

EXERCISE   LXI 

A.  I.  The  lost  ring  has  been  found.  2.  The  view  from  our 
veranda  is  charming.  3.  Sleeping  dogs  do  not  bite.  4.  Clara 
is  a  charming  Httle  girl.  5.  The  child  stood  weeping  before 
the  closed  door.  6.  A  ruined  castle  stands  to  the  left  on  the 
hill.  7.  Our  fellow-travelers  were  all  Englishmen.  8.  Let 
us  not  think  of  the  past.  9.  A  soldier  came  riding  along 
(balder).      lo.   Turning   to    me,  the   beggar   asked   for   alms. 

11.  He  went  away  complaining  that  I  had  given  him  very  little. 

12.  BeUeving  what  my  friends  said,  I  followed  their  advice. 

13.  Not  having  had  experience  enough,  I  knew  not  what 
to  do.  14.  The  bad  news  received  yesterday  has  made  us  all 
very  sad.     15.  I  have  found  all  the  letters,  yours  included. 

B.  I.  This  young  man  has  already  earned  a  considerable 
sum  of  money.  2.  Honored  Sir :  Your  long-expected  letter 
has  arrived  at  last.  3.  Our  professor  is  a  very  learned  man. 
4.  The  thief  came  in  through  a  broken  window.  5.  We  have 
not  had  time  to  make  our  intended  excursion  (in)to  the  woods. 
6.  Smiling,  he  began  to  read  the  letter,  but  before  finishing  it 


248  GERMAN   GRAMMAR  [§  298 

he  was  raging.  7.  The  coachman  came  driving  up  as  we  were 
at  the  door.  8.  I  shall  show  you  the  mistakes  to  be  avoided. 
9.  It  is  to  be  regretted  that  you  did  not  ask  me  for  advice  be- 
fore beginning  this  exercise.  10.  Having  no  hope  of  passing 
the  examination,  I  went  home.  11.  The  famine  occasioned 
by  war  is  often  worse  (f(i)Itmm)  than  war  itself.  12.  He  con- 
tinued praying,  his  hands  raised  to  heaven. 

C  On  a  certain  occasion,  Frederick  the  Great  found  that 
the  enemy  was  opposed  to  him  with  a  superior  force.  Being 
very  anxious  regarding  (UTU)  the  outcome  of  the  battle,  which 
was  to  take  place  on  the  next  day,  he  resolved  to  make  a 
round  through  the  camp  by  night.  This  he  did  in  order  to 
ascertain  the  state  of  mind  prevaiHng  among  his  troops.  While 
doing  so  (that)  he  observed  a  soldier  seeking  to  avoid  him,  and 
acting  generally  in  (auf)  a  suspicious  manner.  Halting,  he 
called  the  soldier  to  him  (refi,).  The  latter,  seeing  no  possi- 
bility of  escaping,  stood  still,  saluting.  **  Where  are  you  (@r) 
going?"  asked  the  king,  looking  him  in  the  face.  "To  tell 
the  truth,  [Your]  Majesty,  I  was  just  on  the  point  of  deserting." 
Instead  of  calUng  the  guard  to  arrest  the  soldier,  the  king  said  : 
"  Just  try  (use  (Sr)  your  luck  once  more  with  me.  In  case  of 
our  losing,  we  will  desert  together." 

D.  Lesestiick  :  Die  Mause  hatten  einmal  Krieg  mit  den  Fro- 
schen.  Nach  vielen  blutigen  Schlachten  wahlte  endlich  jeder 
Teil  seinen  groBten  Helden,  um  den  Streit  in  einem  Zweikampfe 
auszumachen.  Als  alles  fertig  war,  traten  die  beiden  Kampfer 
auf.  Sie  griffen  einander  mit  der  groBten  Tapferkeit  an.  Der 
Frosch  teilte  Ohrfeigen  aus  wie  ein  Bar.  Die  Maus  bifi  wie  ein 
Lowe.  In  dieser  Kampfwut  bemerkten  sie  aber  nicht,  daB 
ein  hungriger  Habicht  tiber  ihnen  schwebte.  Plotzlich  stiirzt 
dieser  auf  die  Kampfenden  herab.  Er  packt  mit  der  rechten 
Kralle  den  Frosch,  mit.  der  linken  die  Maus.  Da  liefen  alle 
Zuschauer  davon.     Der  Krieg  hatte  ein  Ende. 


APPENDIX. 


A,    REFERENCE  LISTS  OF  NOUNS. 


N.B,    In  the  following  lists  words  of  less  common  occurrence  have 
been  omitted. 

I.   Masculine  monosyllables  of  ^ttttb  model  (§  33). 


%at,  eel. 
^rm,  arm. 
55orb,  shelf. 
S)OC^t,  wick. 
2)0(C^,  dagger. 
2)om,  cathedral. 
®rab,  degree. 
§a(m,  blade  (grass). 
§uf,  hoof. 


§unb,  dog. 
2ad)^,  salmon. 
lOaut,  sound. 
Wloxh,  murder. 
£)xtf  district. 
$fab,  path. 
^o(,  pole. 
^Utg,  pulse. 
^Utlft,  point. 


(B6)Vil),  shoe. 
@toff,  material, 
©traug,  ostrich. 
Zaq,  day. 
S;aft,  bar  (music), 
X\)ton,  throne. 
3ott,  inch. 


Note.  —  The  above  list  contains  only  nouns  with  stem  vowel  a,  0,  U,  dVi* 
2.   Neuter  monosyllables  of  ^ttttb  model  (§  33). 


SBanb,  tie. 

SBeet,  garden-bed. 
SBctI,  hatchet. 
33ein,  leg. 
^oot,i  boat. 
53rob,  loaf. 
!J)ing,  thing. 
(Srj,  ore. 
geU,  hide, 
geft,  festival, 
gloi^  raft. 
®ift,  poison. 
§aar,  hair. 
§ecr,  army. 
§eft,  handle. 
3a^r,  year. 
3od),  yoke. 

1  Also 


^nie,  knee, 
^reuj,  cross. 
lOanb,  province. 
2o^,  lot. 
9Jia6,  measure. 
9}iecr,  sea. 
9^et5,  net. 
61,  oil. 
^aar,  pair, 
^fcrb,  horse, 
^futlb,  pound. 
^Ult,  desk. 
9ierf)t,  right. 
^eid),  empire. 
$Riff,  reef. 
S^og,  horse. 
(Ball,  salt. 
Sote.  2  Also 

249 


®d^af,  sheep. 
@(i)iff,  ship. 
@c^tt)ein,  pig. 
®eil,  rope. 
@teb,  sieve. 
®)3tc(,  game. 
@tii(f,  piece. 
2^au,  cable. 
2^ei(,  share. 
%m,  animal. 
Xor,  gate. 
Serf,  work. 
3elt,  tent. 
3cug,  stuff. 
3icl,  goal. 


with  umlaut. 


250. 


APPENDIX 


3.   Feminines  of  ^attb  model  (§  33). 


^ngft,  anguish. 
3lugf(ud)t,  evasion. 
Sljct,  axe. 
^anf,  bench. 
iBraut,  bride, 
^ruft,  breast, 
gaiift,  fist. 
§rit({)t,  fruit. 
@an8,  goose. 
@ruft,  grave, 
^anb,  hand. 


§aut,  skin, 
^luft,  cleft, 
^raft,  strength. 
^U^,  cow. 
I^unft,  art. 
!i?uft,  air. 
I^uft,  desire. 
SJ^ac^t,  power. 
SD^agb,  maid-servant. 
SRaug,  mouse. 
9^a(i)t,  night. 
And  nouns  ending  in  -nt§  and 


D^a^t,  seam. 
9^0t,  need. 
9^(Ug,  nut. 
®^nur,  string. 
©tabt,  town. 
SSanb,  wall. 
SBurft,  sausage. 
3unft,  guild. 
3ufatnmen!unft,  meet- 
ing. 


4.   Masculines  of  ^orf  model  (§  43). 


^ofcn)i(f)t,i  villain. 
@eift,  spirit. 
@ott,  god. 
2tibf  body. 


bcr  Met,  field, 
ber  5lpfel,  apple, 
ber  ^oben,  floor,  soil, 
ber  i8ogen,i  bow. 
ber  iBruber,  brother, 
ber  gaben,  thread, 
ber  ©arten,  garden. 
ber  ©raben,  ditch. 


Tlann,  man. 
Ort,  place. 
9Janb,  edge. 
S5ormunb,  guardian. 

And  nouns  in  -tum« 
1  Also  of  §unb  model. 

Nouns  of  fBaitV  model  (§ 
ber  §afen,  harbour, 
ber  §ammer,  hammer. 
ba^  ^(ofter,  cloister, 
ber  !?aben,  shop, 
ber  Tlanielf  cloak, 
bie  9}lutter,  mother, 
bcr  5RageI,  nail, 
ber  Ofen,  stove. 
1  Also  of  SJ^aler  model. 


SKalb,  forest. 
SSurm,  worm. 


43). 
ber  battel,  saddle, 
ber  ®c^nabel,  beak, 
ber  @C^rt)ager,  brother- 
in-law. 
bie  Xo&jtex,  daughter, 
ber  ^ater,  father, 
ber  ^ogel,  bird. 


6.  Nouns  of  @raf  model  (§  53). 


S5dr,  bear. 
S8urf(^,  lad. 
Shrift,  Christian, 
giirft,  prince. 
@efeE,  fellow. 
@raf,  count, 
b,  hero. 


§err/  master, 
^irt,  herdsman. 
§ufar,2  hussar, 
ajlenfd^,  man. 
^axx,  fool. 
9?^rt),  nerve. 
Ddj^f  ox. 


^fau,  peacock, 
^rtnij,  prince. 
@^a^,  sparrow. 

Sor,  fool. 
SBorfal^r,  ancestor. 


1  Sing,  adds  -n  only. 


2  Also  of  Ol)r  model. 


APPENDIX 


2SI 


7.  Nouns  of  ^amt  model  (§  54). 

SBud^ftabe,  letter  (Sebanfe,  thought.  ^amt,  name. 

of  alphabet.  gun!e(n),2  spark.  @amc(n),2  seed. 

ge(«/  rock.  @Iaube(n),2  faith.  €)C]^abe(n),3  injury. 

griebe(n),2  peace.  §aufe,  heap.  SBtUe,  will. 

And  ha^  §er;j,  heart,  C  ^crgettS,  ^.  §eq. 
1  Also  ^clfcn  (WlaUv  model).  2  Also  of  Tlakx  model. 

3  Also  of  35ater  model. 

8.  Nouns  of  Setter  model  (§  54). 


ha^  %\iQt,  eye. 

ber  S3aucr/  peasant. 

ha^  (Snbc,  end. 

ber  @et)atter,  godfather. 

1  Also  adds  -n  throughout  sing. 


ber  ^onful,  consul, 
ber  9^ad)bar,  neighbor, 
ber  ^antoffe(,2  slipper, 
ber  ©faciei,  sting. 

2  Also  maltv  model. 


9.   Nouns  of  D^r  model  (§  54). 


ber  ^^n,  ancestor. 
ba«  33ett,  bed. 
ber  gorft,  forest, 
bag  §emb,  shirt. 
ber  §ufar,^  hussar. 


ber  3J?aft,  mast. 
ha^  £)\)X,  ear. 
ber  @d^mer3,  pain, 
ber  @ee,  lake, 
ber  @taat;  state. 

1  Also  of  @raf  model. 


ber  (Stra^(,  beam, 
ber  Untertan/  subject, 
ber  B^n^f  interest. 


B.     REFERENCE   LISTS   OF   PREPOSITIONS. 

I.   Prepositions  with  the  Genitive. 

The  prepositions  governing  the  genitive  are  chiefly  nouns  used  ad- 
verbially; they  are  easily  recognizable  because,  with  a  few  exceptions,  the 
corresponding  English  locution  is  followed  by  *of.'.  The  following  are 
those  of  common  occurrence : 


anftatt,  ftatt,  instead  of. 
aiiger^alb,  outside  of. 
biegfeit,  on  this  side  of. 
l^atb(en),  ^alber,  for  the  sake  of. 
inmitteit,  in  the  midst  of. 
inner^alb,  inside  of. 
jenfeit,  on  the  other  side  of. 
fraft,  by  virtue  of. 
taut,  in  accordance  with, 
mittelft,  by  means  of. 


ober^alb,  above. 

urn  .  .  .  iDillen,  for  the  sake  of. 

ungeac^tet,  in  spite  of. 

unter^alb,  below; 

untreit,  unfern,  not  far  from. 

tjermittelft,  by  means  of. 

toermoge,  by  means  of. 

trd^renb,  during. 

toegen,  on  account  of. 


252 


APPENDIX 


Notes.  —  i.  §afb(en),  l^alber  always  follows  the  gen.  2.  With  uttl 
♦  .  ,  tt)iUen  the  gen.  stands  between  um  and  ttJillcn.  3.  Utigea(l)tet, 
tt)egen,  gufolge  may  precede  or  follow  the  gen.  4.  Before  ^alb(en), 
iregen,  ,  ♦  ♦  tDiUen,  the  gens,  of  the  pers.  prons.  have  the  forms  meinet-, 
beinet-,  jetnet-,  unfert-,  euret-  i^ret-,  3l)ret- :  meinet^a(b(en),  unfert= 
iregen,  um  3{)rettt)iUen,  5.  To  the  above  list  may  be  added  a  number  of 
adjectival  abverbs,  such  as:  gelegetttUd),  'on  the  occasion  of;  l^inftc^tUd^, 
*in  regard  of;   unbej(^abet,  'notwithstanding.' 

2.  Additional  Prepositions  with  the  Dative. 

entgegcn,  contrary  to.  ncbft,  famt,  together  with, 

glcic^,  like.  gutriber,  contrary  to. 

ncid^ft,  gundd^ft,  next  to. 

Note.  —  (Sntgegen,  gund(^ft  usually  follow  the  dat.;  gtctd^  may  precede 
or  follow. 

3.  Prepositions  with  Varying  Case. 

bttttten,  within  {of  time) i  gen.  or  dat, 
entlang,  Idttg^,  along,  gen,,  dat.,  or  ace, 
gemd§,  agreeably  to,  gen.  or  dat. 
ob,  above,  at,  concerning,  gen.  or  dat. 
tro^,  in  spite  of,  gen.  ;  as  well  as,  dat, 
gufolge,  in  consequence  of,  gen,  or  dat. 

Notes.  —  i.  (gntlang,  Idttgg,  may  precede  or  follow.  2.  ®emag  takes 
gen.  or  dat.  when  it  precedes;  dat.  only  when  it  follows.  3.  3l^f'^i9^  takes 
gen.  when  it  precedes;   dat.  when  it  follows. 

4.  Equivalents  of  English  Prepositions. 

English  and  Germa.n  differ  widely  in  the  idiomatic  use  of  prepositions. 
For  convenient  reference,  the  most  commonly  occurring  English  preposi- 
tions are  given  below  in  alphabetical  order  with  examples  showing  their 
German  equivalents. 

About. 

^aben  ^\t  ®e(b  bet  fid)  ?  Have  you  money  about  you? 

Bag  VOt\%\  bu  tlOtt  i^m  (iibcr  i{)n)?  What  do  you  know  about  him? 

®ie  ftritten  ftd^  untig  ®elb.  ,  They  quarrelled  about  the  money. 

UttgCfa^r  (CtttJa)  m.  10.  About  (nearly)  10  marks. 


APPENDIX 


253 


At. 


3m  Sl^eater  (Concert). 

5(m  Zi\d)e ;  bci  Xifc^. 

Sin  ber  Xiir. 

3u  (in)  ^^ari^. 

5luf  bent  SJlarfte  (33aUe). 

5(uf  ber  ^oft 

(5r  ftubiert  auf  ber  Unitjerfttat. 

^r  ift  *!Profeffor  an  ber  Unit)erfitdt 

5lttf  aUe  gdUe. 

3^n  bie^em  3lugenbU(f. 

Um  f)atb  t)ier. 

S3ci  jtage^anbrud^;  hci  ^adjU 

Bur  reci)ten  3^tt  (^Stunbe). 

3tt  SBeinac^ten  (Cftern). 

2:ee  p  3JL  5  ba«  ^funb. 

Um  ben  (jitm)  ^alben  ^rei«. 


At  (in)  school  (church). 

At  the  theatre  (concert). 

At  the  table;   at  table. 

At  the  door. 

At  (in)  Paris. 

At  the  market  (ball). 

At  the  post-office. 

He  is  studying  at  the  University. 

He  is  a  professor  at  the  University. 

At  all  events. 

At  this  moment. 

At  half-past  three. 

At  daybreak;   at  night. 

At  the  right  time  (hour). 

At  Christmas  (Easter). 

Tea  at  5  marks  a  pound. 

At  half  (the)  price. 


By. 


(gr  n)arb  l^ott  9?anbern  getotet. 
^urd)  bie  ^:poft. 
^urd)  ^ranfbett  tjer^inbert. 
2Wit  ber  (Sifenba^n  reifen. 
SBci  (an)  ber  §anb  ergreifen. 
»ei  Xage^Ud^t ;  bet  ^a(i)t. 
3tt  ?anb  ;  3U  ®d^iff. 


He  was  slain  by  robbers. 

By  post. 

Prevented  by  illness. 

To  travel  by  rail. 

To  seize  by  the  hand. 

By  daylight;   by  night. 

By  land;  by  ship. 


For. 


3(^  tat  c§  filt  i^n. 

(Sd)one«  ^Better  pm  ^pa^ieren. 

Sr  reift  jum  33ergnugen. 

Qnm  ^eifpieL 

Sr  ift  fcit  ijmei  ^agen  l^ier. 

^dj  tjerreife  auf  ad)t  Xagc. 

dv  wax  einen  9Jionat  l^ter. 

j^nx§  erfte. 

^um  ^meiten  SJJate. 

Sum  @eburt^tag. 


I  did  it  for  him. 

Fine  weather  for  walking. 

He  travels  for  pleasure. 

For  example. 

He  has  been  here  for  two  days, 

I  am  going  away  for  a  week. 

He  was  here  for  a  month. 

For  the  present. 

For  the  second  time. 

For  a  birthday  present. 


254 


APPENDIX 


In. 


3ittt  §aufe ;  tit  cittcr  Sod^c. 
^m  §ittimel ;  am  ^immel. 

5luf  ber  Strogc. 

5(uf  bent  ?anbe, 

5(uf  biefe  355eifc. 

5(uf  bie  S)auer. 

Uttter  tarl  V. 

3u  3Sagen ;  bci  faltem  SBettcr. 

ai'leiner  9Jieinung  nari)* 

Snm  @ebdd)tni6  (ju  (S^ren). 


3(3^  f^rcd^c  uott  i^m. 

3)er  ^onig  t^on  ®panien. 

(Sitter  Uutt  ttteittett  greuttben, 

^er  35ater  tiou  Oier  ^itabeit. 

Snv  Zixx  ^ittau^» 

2)ie  ®d^(a(^t  bci  ^rag,  attt  9^tL 

SBa«  fott  aui^  ntir  tuerben? 


In  the  house;  in  a  week. 

In  heaven;  in  the  sky. 

In  the  evening. 

In  the  street. 

In  the  country. 

In  this  manner. 

In  the  long  run. 

In  the  reign  of  Charles  V. 

In  a  carriage;  in  cold  weather. 

In  my  opinion. 

In  memory  (honor)  of. 


Of. 


I  speak  of  him. 

The  king  of  Spain. 

One  of  my  friends. 

The  father  of  four  boys. 

Out  of  (at)  the  door. 

The  battle  of  Prague,  of  the  Nile. 

What  will  become  of  me  ? 


On. 


5lttf  bem  ^Xifd^e  (ber  ^an!). 
5(uf  ber  @rbe ;  ouf  (Srben. 
9luf  ber  5Reife ;  am  gittger. 
S)en  (am)  ^meiten  Wixxi. 
2)ie  ©d^tffe  auf  bem  gtuffe, 
^tw  ^2)or!  Uegt  ont  ^ubfoti  unb  ant 

SD^eere. 
3tt  $ferb ;  $u  gug. 

ma  gteig. 

Sm  33egriffe. 

f&tx  biefer  @elegenl)ett. 

Utitcr  biefer  iBebitiguttg, 


On  the  table  (the  bench). 

On  the  ground;  on  earth. 

On  the  journey;  on  the  finger. 

On  the  second  of  March. 

The  ships  on  the  river. 

New  York  is  on  the  Hudson  and  on 

the  sea. 
On  horseback;  on  foot. 
On  purpose. 
On  the  point  of. 
On  this  occasion. 
On  this  condition. 


to. 


^6)  ttJiE  5ttnt  ^ater  ge^en. 
^ad^  @uropa ;  ttad)  bonbon. 
@e^e  ttt  bie  (pr)  @tabt. 


I  will  go  to  my  father. 
To  Europe;  to  London. 
Go  to  the  city. 


APPENDIX  255 

Sr  ge^t  attfi3  ?anb.  He  goes  to  the  country. 

@el)ft  bu  5ttr  ®C^ulc?  Are  you  going  to  school  ? 

©r  ging  in§  (.^nm)  X\)eattX,  He  went  to  the  theater. 

@e^e  an^  (^vitn)  genfter.  Go  to  the  window. 

5(ttf  ben  (sum)  SJlarft  gcl^cn.  To  go  to  the  market. 

5(ttf  bic  Unitjcrfltat  gc^cn.  To  go  to  the  University   (as  a  stu- 
dent). 

3ttt  UnltJerfltcit  gcl^cn.  To  go  to  the  University  (building). 

With. 

Wit  einem  @tocf  fd^tagcn.  To  strike  with  a  stick. 

S^on  gangem  §cqcn.  With  all  my  heart. 

3tt  biefer  Slbfic^t.  With  this  intention. 

5.  Prepositions  with  Verbs,  Adjectives,  and  Nouns. 
The  object  of  many  verbs,  as  well  as  the  complement  of  nouns  and 
adjectives  corresponding  with  them  in  signification,  is  indicated  by  prepo- 
sitions. The  proper  use  of  prepositions  in  such  cases  must  be  learnt  from 
practice  and  from  the  dictionary ;  but  below  is  given,  for  convenient 
reference,  the  regimen  of  particular  classes  of  verbs,  etc.,  which  differ 
most  widely  from  their  English  equivalents. 

At,  of. 

Of  joy,  vexation,  wonder,  etc.  =  iibcr  +  accusative: 
2Bir  drgcrn  un8  iiber  i^n.  We  are  vexed  at  him. 

^r  !(agt  iibcr  bie  §11^6.  He  complains  of  the  heat. 

(Sr  tad^te  iiber  un8.  He. laughed  at  us. 

3^r  (Srftaunen  iibcr  bic  9^ac^ri(^t.       Her  surprise  at  the  news. 

Note.  —  Sijfc  takes  auf  +  ace.  of  person:    3rf)  trar  bbfe  auf  t^tt,  *1 
was  angry  at  him.' 

For. 

1.  Of  expectation,  etc.  =  auf  +  accusative: 

<©ic  ttJar  ni(i)t  barauf  gefagt.  She  was  not  prepared  for  that. 

SSir  l^offcn  auf  gutc8  Setter.  We  hope  for  good  weather. 

(Sr  tnartete  auf  @ie.  He  was  waiting  for  you. 

2.  Of  longing,  inquiry,  etc.  =  uad^ : 

2)urft  na6;i  SBet«f)ett.  Thirst  for  wisdom. 

<Sie  fe^ut  fid^  uadj  5Ru^e.  She  longs  for  rest, 

^uc^e  uat^  ber  Sa^rl^eit,  Search  for  the  truth. 


256  APPENDIX 

3.   Of  entreaty,  etc.  =  ttttt : 
3ci)  hat  i^n  urn  @clb.  I  asked  him  for  money. 

Tltin  Summer  urn  t^m  My  concern  for  him. 

From. 

Of  protection,  etc.  =  tior  +  dative : 
^ettt  un^  tiur  biefer  ^d^tnac^.  Save  us  from  this  disgrace. 

In. 

1.  Of  plenty,  want,  etc.  =  art  +  dative: 

^rm  am  ^eutel.  Poor  in  purse. 

2.  Of  confidence,  etc.  =  attf  +  accusative :   . 
S^ertrauen  ®ie  auf  mi(f|.  Trust  in  me. 

Of. 

1 .  Of  plenty,  want,  doubt,  etc.  =  an  +  dative : 

&  fel)(t  an  ^anntxn.  There  is  lack  of  men. 

SJiangel  ait  @elb.  Want  of  money. 

3d)  t)eqtt»Clf(c  am  (5rfoIg.  I  despair  of  success. 

2.  Of  remembrance,  etc.  =  ait  +  accusative : 

3(^  benfe  an  @ie.  I  am  thinking  of  you. 

(Srinnere  it)n  baratt.  Remind  him  of  it. 

3.  Of  suspicion,  envy,  pride,  etc.  =  auf  +  accusative  : 

(Sr  ift  argtt)i3^nif(^  auf  mid^.  He  is  suspicious  of  me. 

dx  ift  auf  mic^  nelbifd).  He  is  envious  of  me. 

3d)  bin  ftol^  auf  meinen  @o^n.  I  am  proud  of  my  son. 

4.  Of  fear,  etc.  =  tior  +  dative  : 

gltrd^t  tJOr  bent  ^U^e.  Fear  of  lightning. 

Wi6^  graut  t>Ot  bem  Xoht.  I  am  in  dread  of  death. 

5*.   Of  disease,  etc.  =  att  +  dative : 
^m  gteber  er!ran!t.  Sick  of  a  fever. 

To. 

I.    Of  address,  etc.  =  ait  +  accusative: 
3c^  fc^reibe  ait  einen  greiinb.  I  am  writing  to  a  friend. 

(Sin  an  mtd^  abreffierter  33rief.  A  letter  addressed  to  me. 

SSenben  ®le  fid)  ait  i^n.  Apply  to  him. 


APPENDIX  257 

2.  After  many  nouns  and  adjectives  signifying  an  affection  of  the 
mind  =  fiCgClt : 

iBarml)er5ig  gegcit  bie  5(rmeu.  Merciful  to  the  poor. 

iSr  ift  freuublic^  gcgCtt  mic^.  He  is  friendly  to  me. 

<Sei  nac^fid)tig  gcgclt  il)U.  Be  indulgent  to  him. 

3.  Of  attention  =  auf  +  accusative  : 

@ib  auf  meine  SSorte  adft  Pay  attention  to  my  words. 

C.     VERB  PARADIGMS. 

N,B.  In  the  paradigms  no  special  English  forms  are  given  for  the 
subjunctive,  as  ^uch  forms  are  only  occasionally  correct,  and  often  mis- 
leading. 

I.     Auxiliaries  of  Tense. 


^abCtt,  to  have. 

Principal  Parts:  ^aben, 

l^atte,  ge^abt 

Present. 

Indicative, 

Subjunctive, 

I  have,  etc. 

id)  \^\it 
bu  ^aft 
cr  t)at 

tt)ir  ^abeu 
it)r  ^abt 
fte    \)o,^ty\. 

Imperfect. 
I  had,  etc. 

id)  l^obe 
bu  l^abeft 
er   ^abe 

tt)ir  l)aben 
i^r  l^abet 
fte    l^aben 

\^  ^atte 
bu  ^atteft 
cr  ^atte 

UJirl^atteu  . 
i^r  ^attet 
fie   ^atteu 

Perfect. 

id^  l^citte 
bu  l)atteft 
er  ^ttc 

U)ir  l^otten 
\\)x  ^dttet 
fie    lidtteti 

I  have  had,  etc. 

\^    ^abe    gel)abt 
bu    ^aft     ge^abt 
er     ^at      gel}abt 
iDir  ^aben  ge^abt 
i()r  l^abt    ge^abt 
fte    l^abeu  ge^abt 

i(^    '\)o,\it    geljabt 
bu    ^abeft  ge^abt 
cr    ^^\it    get)abt 
Xq\x  \^o.\^tv.  ge{)abt 
i!)r  {)abet  gc^abt 
fie    l^aben  ge^abt 

258 


APPENDIX 

Pluperfect. 

Indicative, 

I  had  had,  etc. 

Subjunctive, 

i(^    l)Ottc    %t\)^\ii 

{^    l^dtte    gc^abt 

bu    l^otteft  gel)abt 

bu    ^atteft  ge^abt 

cr    ^atte    ge^abt 

er     ^citte    ge^abt 

tDir  fatten  ge^abt 

tt)ir  \)Mtx\.  gcljabt 

i^r  \^^iiti  ge^abt 

i^r  ^(ittet  ge^abt 

fic    liatten  ge^abt 

Future. 
I  shall  have,  etc. 

fte    t)atteu  gel)abt 

i(^    tt)erbc    l^abcn 

i(^    rt)erbe*  'S)^\ityi 

bu    iDirft     l^oben 

bu .  tuerbeft  ^abeu 

er    tt)irb     l^aben 

cr    tuerbe    l^abeu 

tx)ir  iDerben  ^aben 

tt)ir  ttJerbeu  l^aben 

il)r  tDerbet  ^abcn 

t{)r  tDerbet  l^abeu 

ftc    tDerben  ^aben 

fte    rtjerbeu  l^aben 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  had,  etc. 
trf)    tDerbe    ge'^abt  ^abeu  id)    h)erbe    ge^abt  l^aben 

bu    tDirft     ge^abt  l^aben  bu    tDerbeft  ge^abt  ^aben 

er     iDirb      ge^abt  \)(x\ityi  er     merbe    ge^abt  \)Qi^i^Xi 

trir  tt)erbeu  ge^abt  f)aben  n)ir  tt)erben  ge^abt  ^abeu 

%  tDerbet  ge^abt  l^abeu  t^r  trerbet  ge^abt  \)oJQtxi 

fte    tt)erbeu  ge^abt  ^abeu  fte    tDerben  ge^abt  ^aben 

Conditional. 

Compound. 
I  should  have  had,  etc. 
td^  tDiirbe  ge^abt  ]^abeu 
bu.  ttJiirbeft  ge^abt  ^abeu 
er  triirbe  gel)abt  \^oSity\, 
tt)ir  tniirbeu  ge^abt  \^^\ivx 
\\)X  tDiirbet  ge^abt  \^^^t^ 
fte    ttJiirbeu  ge^abt  l^abeu 

Infinitives.  Participles. 

\)^\stn,  to  have.  Pres.^  '\)Oi\itXi\i,  having. 

Perf.y  ge^abt  \)^\iV^,   to  Past,   ge^abt,  had. 
have  had. 


Simple, 
I  should  have,  etc. 
id)  tt)urbe  t)aben 
bu  tt)urbefl  "^^^txi 
cr  iriirbe  ^aben 
tt)ir  tDiirbeu  ^aben 
il^r  tt)urbet  l^abeu 
jte    lt)iirbeu  ^aben 

Imperative. 
Have,  etc. 
i^abc 
^abt 
Ijaben  @ie 


Pres., 


APPENDIX 


259 


@eitt,  to  be. 


SBcrben,  to  become. 


Principal  Parts  :  fein,  imax,  gctrcfen. 

"  "      ttjcrben,  toaxh  (wurbe),  getDorbcn. 


Present. 

Indicative.         Subjunctive, 

I  am,  etc. 


x6)  bin 
bu  btft 
cr  ift 
tt)ir  fmb 
i^r  fctb 
ftc    fmb 


id)   fei 
tiVi    fetcft 
cr    jei 
tt)ir  jcien 
i^r  jciet 
feien 


fte 


Imperfect. 
I  was,  etc. 


id, 
bu 


ttjar 
iDarfi 
cr    xoax 
tt)ir  tt)aren 
il^r   mart 
ftc    tDarcn 


x6) 
bu 
cr 


njarc 
njcireft 
mdrc 
n)t»  ttJdren 
i^r  tDdret 
jtc    tDdrcn 


Perfect. 
I  have  been,  etc. 

\6)   bin  ^           .id)   jci 
bu    biji                bu    fcicfl 

cr    ift  I  I       cr    \t\ 

tt)ir  ftub  I  ^      ttjir  fcicn 

i^r  ?eib  ^       il)r  kiet 

ftc    fmb  J            fie    feien 

Pluperfect. 
I  had  been,  etc. 


CO 


id, 

ttjar 

bu 

tt)arjl 

cr 

ttjar 

tuir  ujaren  | 

il)r 

ft)  art 

fte 

tt)arcn 

id) 

iDdrc 

bu 

n)drcji 

cr 

rt)drc 

xo'vc  rodren  f 

i\)X 

ttJdret 

fte 

tt)drcn 

Present. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive, 

I  become,  etc. 


id^    ttjerbe 
bu    ttjerbeji 
cr    tDcrbe 
voxx  rtjerben 
i^r  tDcrbet 
fte    tuerben 


i6)   tDcrbe 
\>vi    tDtrft 
cr    tDirb 
xo'xx  iDcrben 
i^r  tt)crbet 
fte    iDcrben 

Imperfect. 
I  became,  etc. 
ttjarb  (tDurbc)     id^ 
tDarbft  t>\x 

(tDurbeft)  cr 

cr     tt)arb  (murbe) 
tt)ir  tDurben 
i^r  ftjurbet 
tt)urben 


id) 
bu 


tDiirbe 
t>\x    tDiirbcft 
cr    tDiirbc 
xo'xx  tt)urben 
i^r  tDiirbet 
jie   tDiirben 


fte 


Perfect. 
I  have  become,  etc. 


id) 

bu 
cr 


bin 
bift 

ift 
tt)ir  ftub 
il^r  jeib 
fte    ftub 


ic^    fei 
bu    feieft 
cr    \tx 
xo'xx  fcien 
i^r  feict 
fte    jeien 


id) 

ttjar 

bu 

tDarft 

cr 

tt)ar 

tt)ir  ttJarcu  f 

i^r 

trart 

fte 

iraren 

Pluperfect. 
I  had  become,  etc. 


CO 
3 


id) 

trdre 

bu 

trdreft 

cr 

trdre 

iDir  tt)dreu  | 

il)r 

tDdret 

fie 

ttJdren 

26o 


APPENDIX 


Future. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive, 

I  shall  be,  etc. 


Future. 

Indicative.  Subjunctive, 

I  shall  become,  etc. 


id^    tDerbe 

t(^    tuerbe 

id)    tDerbe 

id^    tDerbe 

bu    tt)irft 

bu    tDerbeft 

bu    njirft 

bu    tDerbeft 

er     tt)irb 

-^  er    raerbe 

r& 

er     tDirb 

f    er     tDerbe 

3 

trir  iDerben 

»    tt)ir  tDerbeu 

S' 

tt)ir  tDerbeu 

%   tDir  tDerbeu 

■    % 

Vcfc  tDerbet 

il^r  trerbet 

il)r  tDerbet 

i^r  tDerbet 

J4 

fie    tt)erben  ^ 

fie    tt)er  beu 

fie    tDerben  ^ 

fie    tDerbeu  ^ 

Future  Perfect. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been,  etc. 

I  shall  have  become,  etc. 

t(^    tDerbe 

icf)    it)erbe 

t(^    tDerbe 

^    id^    tDerbe 

CO 

bu    ttjirft 

g    bu    toerbeft 
^   er     ttierbe 
'  ^   tt)ir  tDerben 

en 

?3 

bu    tDirft 

§    bu    tDerbeft 

5 

er    tDirb 
tt)ir  h)erben 

er    tDirb 
tDir  tDer beu 

|,   er    tDerbe 
S    tDir  tDerbeu 

o 

i^r  tDerbet 

1^   %  trerbet 

j5* 

i^r  tDerbet 

"2  i^r  tDerbet 

2 

fte    tt)er bcu 

fte    tDerbeu 

fie    tDerbeu 

^    fie    tDerbeu 

S* 

Conditional. 

•  Conditional. 

Simple.                 Compound, 

Simple,                 Compound. 

I  should  be,  etc.       I  should  have 

I  should  become,    I  should  have 

been,  etc. 

etc.                  become,  etc.  • 

id^    tDiirbe 

id)    rt)iirbe 

id^    tDiirbe 

id^    tDiirbe 

en 

\iVi    tt)urbeft 

bu    triirbeft 

bu    tDiirbeft 

bu    tDiirbeft 

5 

er     tDurbe 

-^  er     tniirbe 

er     tDiirbe 

5    er     tDiirbe 

o 

tt)ir  triirbeu 

S*   rtiir  triirbeu 

'  s 

tDir  tDiirbeu 

^   tDir  tDiirbeu 

^   ^ 
3 

i^r   triirbet 

i{)r  triirbet 

J3 

il)r  tDiirbet 

ii)r  tDiirbet 

<^ 

fte    tDiirbeu 

fie    njiirbeu 

fie    tDiirbeu 

fie    tDiirbeu 

s* 

Imperative  :  fei,  feib,  feieu  @ie,  be. 

tDerbe,  tDerbet,  tDerbeu  ®ie,  become. 


Infinitive  :    Pres.,  Stxxi,  to  be. 

"      tDerbeu,  to  become. 


Perf.,  getDefeu  \t\v.,  to  have 
been. 
"      getDorbeu  ieiu,  to  have 
become. 


Participle  :    Pres,^  jeienb,  being.  Past,   getDefeu,  been. 

"       tDerbeub,  becoming.  "       getDOrbeu,  become. 


APPENDIX 


261 


2.     Auxiliaries  of  Mood. 


Prin.  Parts  :    bitrfcn        burftc         gcbiirft         (biirfcn,  after  infin 


fbuneu        !ouutc        ge 

fount 

(fonueu 

«      {( 

mogeu         mod)tc        gemot^t 

(mogeu 

«      it 

nti] 

ffeu        mugte        gemugt 

(miiffen 

ti      (( 

jollcu          foUte          gejoUt 

(foEen 

((      i( 

iDoEcn        ttjottte         gcmoUt 

(ujolleu 

((      tt 

Present  Indicative. 

Id) 

barf 

faun          mag 

mug 

foil 

tDiU 

bu 

barffl 

tannft        magft 

mugt 

foUft 

tniEft 

tx 

barf 

faun          mag 

mug 

foil 

lt)tU 

tt)ir 

biirfen 

i      !onuen      mogeu 

miiffen 

t      folleu 

tt)otteu 

i^r 

burft 

fount        mogt 

miigt 

foUt 

tt)oUt 

fic 

biirfeu      fonueu      mogeu 

miiffen      fotten 

ujollen 

Present  Subjunctive. 

id) 

bitrfe 

tonne         mbge 

miiffe 

foUe 

tt)oIIe 

bu 

biirfeft 

tonneft       mbgeft 

miiffeft 

foUeft 

UJoUefl 

cr 

bitrfe 

tonne         moge 

miifie 

foUe 

tDoUc 

2C» 

K.                  2C. 

:c. 

ac. 

K. 

Imperfect  Indicative. 

id) 

burfte 

tonnte        modjte 

mugte 

foUte 

trotttc 

bu 

burfteft 

tonnteft      mod)teft 

mugtejl 

foUteft 

ujolltefl 

2C. 

JC.                 JC. 

:c. 

tc. 

tc. 

Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

id) 

burfte 

tonnte     .    mod)te 

miigte 

foUte 

tnoHtc 

bu 

burfteft 

tonnteft      moc^teft 

miigteft 

foUteft 

troUteft 

K. 

K.                  2C. 

:c. 

:c. 

K. 

Compound  Tenses. 
Per/,        ic^  l^abe  geburft  (gefonut,  gemod)t,  gemugt,  gefoUt,  getroUt) 

"  tc^  ^abe  bietben  biirfen  (fonueu,  mbgen,  miiffen,  foUen,  ttjollen) 

F/up/.       id)  !)atte  geburft  (gefonnt,  gemoc^t,  gemugt,  gefoUt,  gemoUt) 

"  id)  ^atte  bleiben  biirfeu  (fonueu,  mogeu,  miiffen,  foUen,  mollen) 

Fu^.  [(i)  merbe  biirfen  (fonueu,  mbgen,  miiffen,  folleu,  trollen) 

Fu^.  Per/,  id)  trerbe  geburft  (gefonnt,  gemodjt,  gemugt,  gefollt,  gettiollt) 
l)aben. 


262 


APPENDIX 


3.   Weak  Conjugation. 

Principal  Parts:   loben,  lobtc,  gclobt. 
Infinitives:  Pres.^  loben,  to  praise;  Perf.^  gelobt  l^abctt,  to  have  praised. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Indicative.             Subjunctive, 

Indicative.           Subjunctive, 

I  praise,  etc. 

I  praised,  etc. 

id^    lobe              ic^    lobe 

id^    lobte            ic^    lobte 

bu    lobft             bu    lobeft 

bu    lobteft          bu    lobteft 

er     lobt              cr    lobe 

er    lobte            er     lobte 

tDir  loben            n)ir  loben 

xoxx  lobteu           tt)tr  lobten 

i^r  tobt              %  lobet 

il)r  lobtet            il)r  lobtet 

fie    loben           fie    loben 

fie    lobten          fie    (obten 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

I  have  praised,  etc. 

I  had  praised,  etc. 

id)    ^abe     ' 

\&)    I)abe 

Id) 

^^Mt 

id)    ^atte     ^ 

bu    l)aft 

bu    l^abeft 

bu 

^atteft 

bu    ^dtteft 

er    bat 

^  er    ^o^it 

er 

^atte 

^   er     ^tte 

2. 

tt)ir  l)aben 

1;   njir  ^aben 

o" 

cr 

roit  f)atteit 

0^   tDir  fatten 

0 

cr 

il)r  l)abt 

if)r  babet 

tl)t 

^attet 

i^r  \)Mt\ 

fie    ^aben   . 

fie    ^aben   . 

fte 

l^atten 

fte    l^dtten 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  praise,  etc. 

I  shall  have  praised,  etc. 

\^    tDerbe 

id)    ttjerbe 

td, 

trerbe 

id)    njerbe 

bu    mirft 

bu    trerbeft 

bu 

ttJirft 

:^   bu    trerbeft 

0 

er    tt)irb 

o"   er     trerbe 

0 

er 

tt)irb 

S:   er     trerbe 

<s 

n)ir  roerben 

'  2    tt)ir  merben 

>  0* 

loir  merben  f 

^   tt)ir  ttjerben 

^ 

i^r   merbet 

tl)r  roerbet 

tl)V 

tt)erbet 

^   if)r   tDerbet 

fie    tDerben 

fie    merbeu 

fte 

trerben 

fie    tDerben 

Conditional. 

Imperative. 

Simple.                Compound. 

I  should  praise,      I  should  have 

lobe,  praise. 

etc.                   praised,  etc. 

lobt,  praise. 

id^    tt)iirbe 

i(^    miirbe 

loben  ®ie,  praise. 

bu    miirbeft 

bu    luiirbeft 

Participles. 

cr     ttjiirbe 

o"   er     tiiiirbe 

crs 

lt)ir  triirben 

2    U)ir  tDurben 

Pres.,  lobenb,  praising. 

i^r  miirbet 

i^r  miirbet 

cr 

Past,  gelobt,  praised. 

fie    miirbeu 

fie    rciirbeu 

s 

APPENDIX 


263 


4.   Strong  Conjugation. 

Principal  Parts  :  ftngen,  fang,  gcfungen. 
Infinitives:  Pres.,  fmgcn,  to  sing;  Per/,,  gefungcn  l^abcn,  to  have  sung. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Indicative.           Subjunctive 

Indicative.           Subjunctive, 

I  sing,  etc. 

I  sang,  etc. 

id)    fmgc              \^   fmgc 

id) 

fang               id)   fdngc 

bu    fingft              bu    fiugejl 

bu 

faugft             bu    fciugcfl 

er    ftugt              cr    fiugc 

cr 

faug           .     cr    fciuge 

\oxt  ftugcu            n)ir  ftugcu 

it)ii 

:  \o,x^%t\x           tuir  fdugcn 

i^r  fingt               i^r  ftuget 

il)r 

faugt              il^r   fdugct 

fie    ftugcu            fic    ftugeu 

ftc 

(augcn           ftc    fdugcu 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

I  have  sung,  etc. 

I  had  sung,  etc. 

i(^    l^abc 

td^    ^abc 

id) 

\)^\it 

\^    \!;mt 

bu    ^aft 

«    bu    '^^^t\i 

CO       bu 

^attcft 

«    bu    ^dtteft 

cr    ^at 

^  cr    ^abc 

^  s^     cr 

^attc 

^  cr     ^dttc 

lt)ir  l)abcu 

«    tt)ir  \)o^itxi 

'  w     irir 

^)^i\tx\. 

"  «    trir  \)<iii\viK 

i^r  l)abt 

«    i^r  ^abct 

2       \\)X 

^attct 

»    i^ir  \Q.iit\ 

ftc    l^abcn 

fic    ^abcn 

ftc 

fatten 

fic    ^dttcn 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  sing,  etc. 

I  shall  have  sung,  etc. 

t(^    trerbc 

id)    tDcrbc 

id) 

tDcrbc 

en    \&)    trcrbc 

bu    iDirft 

bu    tt)crbcft 

bu 

trirft 

c'   bu    UJcrbeft 

cr     trlrb 

"§*  cr    iDcrbc 

I    '^ 

tt)irb 

«    cr    tDcrbc 

tDir  trerben 

2    U)ir  trcrbcu 

§     trir  tDcrbcu 

^   iDir  xotx\iVi\ 

i!)r  ujcrbet 

i^r  ttjcrbet 

iDr 

ttjcrbct 

%  i^r  XQtxUi 

ftc    ujcrbcu 

ftc    ttjcrbcu 

fte 

lt)crbcn 

S    fie    iDcrben 

Conditional. 

Imperative. 

Simple.                    Compound 

ftugc,  sing. 

I  should  sing,            I  should  ha\ 

^e 

ftngt,  sing. 

etc.                          sung,  etc. 

ftugcu  8ic,  sing. 

i(^    ttjiirbe 

id)    UJiirbc 

CO 

bu    miirbcft 

bu    tDiirbcft 

Participles. 

cr    raiirbc 

~§  cr    ttJiirbc 

CO 

Pres.,  fiugeub,  singing. 

tuir  miirbcu 

3    trir  ttjiirbcn 

Past^  gefuugcu,  sung. 

il)r  tDurbet 

il)r  ttjiirbct 

0 

ftc    tDiirbcu 

ftc    tuiirbcn 

264 


APPENDIX 


5.   Conjugation  with  feilt* 

Principal  Parts:  faEen,  fiel,  gefallett. 
Infinitives:  Pres.^  fallen,  to  fall;  Perf.,  gefatlen  fein,  to  have  fallen. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Indicative.            Subjunctive.              Indicative.             Subjunctive, 

I  fall,  etc. 

I  fell,  etc. 

tc^    faUe               id)    faEe                 i(^ 

fiel                 ic^    fiele 

bu    fciUft              bu    falleft              bu 

fielft               bu    fieleft 

er    fdllt               tt    faEe                 er 

fiel                 er    fiele 

tt)ir  fallen             tt)tr  fatten              tntr 

fieleu             njir  fielen 

il)r  fallt               i^r  fallet               il)r  fielt                il)r  fielet 

fie    fatten             fie    fatten               fie 

fielen             fie    fielen 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

I  have  fallen,  etc. 

I  had  fallen,  etc." 

t(^    bin 

id)    fei      1 

i"^ 

mar 

i(^    n)are 

bu    bift 

«      bu    feieft 

«        ^" 

tt)arft 

bu    rccireft 

CO                                         ' 

er    ift 

%>     er    fei 

t       er 

trar 

^     er     tDdre 

0 

tt)ir  finb 

^     tDir  feien 

«       mir  iBtttcn 

«     n)ir  ttiaren 

tl)r  feib 

^      i^r  feiet 

«        lf,r 

tDaret 

^      il)r  tt)dret 

fie    finb    .. 

fie    feien  .. 

fte 

tDaren 

fie    n)aren 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  fall,  etc. 

I  shall  have  fallen,  etc. 

t(^    ttJerbe 

i(^    njerbe 

id) 

tDerbe 

id)   tDerbe 

bu    mirfi 

bu    tx)erbeft 

bu 

tDirft 

5,   bu    tDerbeft 

er    tDirb 

'u    er    inerbe 

"0    er 

\0\X\i 

&  er    inerbe 

ttJir  merben 

1^  tt)ir  ttjerben 

2    wir  >Derben 

^    tt)ir  n)erben 

i^r  merbet 

't^r  iDerbet 

if)r 

irerbet 

1^  it)r  trerbet 

fte    n:)erben  , 

fie    tDerben  . 

fte 

ttjerben 

fie    tnerben 

Conditional. 

Imperative. 

Simple.                    Compound. 

fatte,  fall. 

I  should  fall,            I  should  have 

fattt,  fall. 

etc.                        fallen,  etc. 

fatten  @ie,  fall. 

t(^    n^iirbe 

i(^    triirbe 

bu    tDiirbej^ 

bu    ti:)urbeft 

CO 

Participles. 

er     ttJiirbe 

"o*   er     tpiirbe 

0 

PS 

Pres.,  fattenb,  falling. 

njir  tDiirben 

2    trir  tDiirben 

s 

Pasty  gefatten,  fallen. 

il)r  iDiirbet 

il)r  triirbet 

"^ 

fie    tt)iir bei 

ti 

.  fie    tt)iirb 

en 

APPENDIX 


265 


6.   Passive  Voice. 

Infinitives:  Pres.,  gelobt  merben,  to  be  praised;  Perf.y  gelobt  tt)orben 
fein,  to  have  beea  praised. 


Present. 

Imperfect. 

Indicative.            Subjunctive 

Indicative,             Subjunctive. 

I  am  praised,  etc. 

I  was  praised,  etc. 

it^    ttjerbe 

id)    trerbe 

id^    tDurbe 

ic^    triirbc 

bu    trirft 

bu    ttjerbeft 

bu    tt)  It  rbe  ft 

bu    tDurbeft 

cr    n)irb 

2,   cr     tt)erbe 

CO 

er    tt)urbe 

2,   cr     tt)iirbe 

Xo'xx  ttjerben 

c^   tt)ir  trerben 

■  0^ 

<3* 

tDir  tDurbeu 

1^   tDir  ttJiirbeu 

t^r  merbet 

t()r  tt)crbet 

i{)r  tDurbet 

i^r  tDiirbet 

ftc    merben 

fte    trerbeu 

fie    tDurbeu 

fie    ttJiirbeu 

Perfect. 

Pluperfect. 

I  have  been  praised,  etc. 

I  had  been  praised,  etc. 

id)   bin 

«    td)    fet 

CO 

\^    tt)ar 

^    id)    tDdre 

bu   bift 

g^   bu    feieft 

0 

bu    trarft 

%:   bu    tDdreft 

cr    ift 

S^   cr     fei 

& 

er     tuar 

^   er     tDCire 

XOXX  flttb 

g    tDir  feieu 

■  5 
0 

tuir  tDarcu 

g    tDir  tDdren 

i^r  feib 

%   \\)x,  feiet 

5" 

i^r  traret 

%   \\)x  tDdret 

ftc    pnb 

^    fie    feieu 

?J 

fie    ttjaren 

^    fie    tDdreu 

Future. 

Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  be  praised,  etc. 

I  shall  have  been  praised,  etc. 

\^   tDcrbc 

^    id)    iDcrbc 

CO 

ic^    tt)erbe 

2,   id)    tDerbe 

bu    tt)trft 

%:   bu    ttjcrbeft 

0 

bu    trirft 

%   bu    tDcrbeft 

cr     iDirb 

S^   cr     tt)erbe 

C^ 

cr     tt)irb 

5    cr    tDcrbc 

tDir  tDcrben 

§    mir  tDcrbeu 

■  5 

trir  tDcrbeu 

S^   tDir  tDcrben 

i^r  rt)crbct 

%   \\)x  tt)erbet 

il)r  trerbet 

^  il^r  tDcrbet 

fie    tt)crbcn 
Co 

^    fte    tDcrb'eu 

NDITIONAL. 

?J 

fie    tDcrbeu 
Ii 

§•   fie    tDcrbeu 

kIPERATIVE. 

Simple.  Compound. 

I  should  be  I  should  have 
praised,  etc.      been  praised,  etc. 

^  ic^    tDiirbc 

g^  bu    tt)iirbeft 

S^  er     tDiirbc 

§  tDir  tDiirben 

3-  il)t  tt-iirbet 

^  fie    roiirbcn 


Id) 

tDiirbc 

bu 

tDiirbeft 

er 

ttjiirbe 

tDir  tDiirben  | 

tl)r 

tDiirbet 

fte 

tDiirben 

ttJcrbc  getobt,  be  praised. 
tDCrbet  gelobt,  be  praised. 

tDcrben  @te  gelobt,  be  praised. 

Participles. 
Pres.^  gU  lobenb,  to  be  praised  (as 

adjective  only). 
Past,  gelobt  tDOrben,  been  praised. 


266 


APPENDIX 


D,    ALPHABETICAL  LIST   OF   STRONG  AND   IRREGULAR 
VERBS. 

1.  The  following  list  contains  only  verbs  in  common  use. 

2.  Compound  verbs  are  omitted,  as  a  rule,  and  their  conjugation  is  to 
be  inferred  from  that  of  the  corresponding  simple  verb,  e.g.  t)erbinben, 
see  binben  ;  betriigen,  see  triigeu  ;  but  compounds  which  have  no  cor- 
responding simple  verbs  will  be  found  in  the  list. 

3.  The  vowel  of  the  2nd  and  3rd  sing.  pres.  indie,  and  of  the  2nd 
sing,  imper.  is  given  only  when  it  differs  from  that  of  the  infin. 

4.  The  vowel  of  the  impf.  subj.  is  given  only  when  it  differs  from  that 
of  the  impf.  indie. 

5.  Forms  in  parenthesis  are  less  usual. 

6.  Verbs  followed  by  f.  are  conjugated  with  feitt  only;  those  followed 
by  f.,  f).  are  sometimes  conjugated  with  l^abetl  (§  62,  2,  note) ;  all  others 
with  f)aben  only. 


Infinitive. 

baden,  bake 

befe'^ten,  command 
befletgen,  r^., strive 
beginnen,  begin 
beigen,  bite 
bcrgen,  hide 
berften,  \.,  burst 

betregett,^  induce 
biegen,2  bend 
bteten,2  offer 
binben,  bind 
bitten,  ask 
blafen,  blow 
bleiben,  \.,  remain 
braten,  roast 
brec^en,  break 
brennen,  bum 
bringen,  bring 
benfen,  think 
bref(^en,  thresh 


Imperfect. 

bn!  or 

bacfte 

befal)t 

beftig 

begann 

big 

barg 

barft  or 

borft 

bettJog 

bog 

bot 

banb 

bat 

blieg 

blieb 

briet 

brad) 

brannte 

brafrf)  or 
brofd^ 


p.  Part.        Pr,  Ind.    Impve,    Impf.  Subj. 

gebacfen  a 


befo^Ien 

beftiffen 

begonnen 

gebiffen 

geborgen 

geborften 

betDogen 

gebogen 

geboten 

gebnnben 

gebeten 

geblafen 

gebtieben 

gebraten 

gebrod)en 

gebrannt 

gebrad^t 

gebad^t 

gebrofd^en 


le  ie  0 

d  or  b 

i  t 

t(e)       i(e)     a  or  0 


i  I 


t  t 


brcnntc 


APPENDIX 


267 


Infinitive. 

bringen,  f.,  \).,  press 
biinfcn,  seem 

biirfen,  may 

cmpfe^Icn,  recom- 
mend; j<r<?  befe^Ien 
erbletd^en,  f.,  turn 

pale 
edbfd)en,8  \,,  be 

extinguished 
crtc^redcn,*  f.,  be 

frightened 
cffcn,  eat 
fasten,  f.,  \).,  go, 

drive 
foUen,  U  fall 
fangen,  catch 
fed)ten,  fight 
finben,  find 
fted^ten,  braid 
fliegen,2  \„  \,  fly 
Pie^cn,^  fv  \t  flee 
ftie6en,2  J.,  \,  flow 
frcffen,  eat 
fricren,t.,^v  freeze 
gebdrcn,  bear 
gebett,  give 
gebei^cn,  f.,  thrive 
ge^en,  \,,  go,  walk 
getingen,  \.,  succeed 
gelten,  be  worth 
gcncfen,  j.,  recover 
geniegcn,  enjoy 
gefd^cl)en,  S,,  happen 
gett»inncn,  win 
giegeTt,^  pour 
gtcic^cn,  be  like 
glciten,  \,,  glide 
graben,  dig 


Imperfect.  P.  Part.        Pr.  Ind.    Impve.   Imp/.  Subj. 


brang 
beud)te 

burftc 


txh\\6) 

erfc^raf 
a6 

per 

fod)t 
fanb 
Pod)t 
Pog 

m 

fra6 

fror 

gebar 

gob 

gcbie^ 

gtng 

getatig 

salt 

genag 

gettog 

gefd)at) 

geroann 

glid) 
glitt 
grub 


gebrungen 

gcbeud)t        biittft  or 

beud^t 
gcbiirft  barf, 

barfft,  barf 


erbUc^cn 

crIofct)eit  I 

erfd^rocfen  i 

gcgeffcn  I 

gcfa^ren  0 


gefallen 

gefangen 

gefoc^ten 

gefunben 

gepod^tcn 

geflogen 

gepoljen 

gcpoffen 

gefrcffcn 

gefrorcn 

geboren 

gcgebcn 

gebie^en 

gegattgcit 

gelungen 

gcgolten 

gcnefen 

gctioffcn 

gcfc^c^cn 

gemonnen 

gegoffen 

gcglid)cn 

geglittcn 

gegraben 


It 

I 


ic 
I 


i        fi  or  6 


a  or  0 


268 

APPENDIX 

Infinitive, 

Imperfect. 

p.  Part. 

Pr.  Ind.    Impve.   Imp/.  Subj. 

greifen,  seize 

griff 

gcgriffen 

l^aben,  have 

^atte 

ge^abt 

WM^ 

l^alten,  hold 

^ielt 

gel^alten 

a 

l^angeu,  hang 

^ing 

ge^angen 

a 

l)auen,  hew 

^ieb 

ge^auen 

l)eben,  lift 

l^ob  or  ^ub 

1  ge^oben 

Ijeigen,  be  called 

l)ie6 

gel^eigen 

l^elfen,  help 

I)alf 

ge^olfen 

i           i           il 

fennen,  know 

fantite 

gefannt 

fentitc 

fUngen,  sound 

flang 

geflungen 

fneifen,  pinch 

fntff 

geftiiffen 

fomnten,  \,,  come 

!am 

gefommen 

0(0) 

fonnen,  can 

!onnte 

gefonnt 

fann, 

fannft,  !ann 

!ried|en,2  \,,  t, 

!roi^ 

ge!rorf)eu 

creep 

labett,  load,  invite 

lub 

gelabcn 

laffen,  let 

Ueg 

gelaffen 

a 

laufen,  \,,  \,  run 

lief 

gelaufen 

(iu 

leiben/  suffer 

Utt 

gelitten 

lei^en,  lend 

Ue^ 

geUeI)en 

lefen,  read 

Ia0 

gelefen 

te          Ic 

Uegen,  lie 

tag 

gelegen 

liigen,  lie 

log 

gelogen 

tneiben,  shun 

ntieb 

gemieben 

ntel!en,8  milk 

tnolf 

getnolfen 

i           i 

tlteffen,  measure 

mag 

gemeffen 

i           i 

tttogen,  may,  like 

moci)tc 

gemod)t 

mag, 
magft,  mag 

miiffett,  must 

tnugtc 

gemugt 

tnug, 
mugt,  mug 

ne^men,  take 

ital^nt 

genontnten 

nimmft,  ntmm 
nimmt 

nettnen,  name 

Ttanntc 

gettannt 

nennte 

:|)fetfen,  whistle 

^fiff 

gepfiffen 

Ipreifen,  praise 

prieg 

ge^riefen 

queUen,  \.,  gush  out 

quoE 

gequoUen 

I           I 

raten,  advise 

rtet 

gerateix 

a 

retben,  rub 

ricb 

geriebcn 

reigen,  \f  f,,  tear 

rig 

geriffcn 

APPENDIX 

Infinitive. 

Imperfect 

p.  Part:      Pr.  Ind.    Impve. 

rcitcn,^  \,,  \,  ride 

ritt 

gcrttten 

rennen,  f.,  %,  run 

ranntc 

gerannt 

ried^en,  smell 

roc^ 

gerod)cn 

ringett,^'^  wring 

rang 

gernngen 

rinneTi,  \,,  flow 

rann 

gcronnen 

rufen,  call 

rief 

gernfen 

faufen,  drink 

toff 

gefoffen 

fiu: 

jaiigen,  suck 

fog 

gefogen 

fd)affen,ii  create 

fc^uf 

gefd)affen 

f(i)aEcn,8  f,,  \,  sound 

frf)oa 

gefdjoUen 

fc^eibcn,  \,  f.,  part 

fd)teb 

gefd^teben 

fd^einen,  shine 

j(^ien 

gefd^ienen 

fd)e(ten,  scold 

fc^alt 

gefd^oltcn 

I       t 

fci^eren,i2  shear 

f(i)or 

gefd)oren 

ie  or  e    ie  or  c 

fc^iebcn,  shove 

fc^ob 

gefd)oben 

fd)te6en,  shoot 

fd)o6 

gefdt)offen 

fc^lafen,  sleep 

fd)lief 

gefd^lafen 

S 

fd^tagcti,^^  strike 

f^Ing 

gefd)(ogen 

a  ' 

fd^lcid^cn,  I,  \,  creep 

jd)Ud) 

gefd^Uc^en 

jd^leifen,!!  grind 

fcl)tiff 

gefd^liffen 

fc^Uegen,  shut 

f(f)to6 

gefd^toffen 

fd)Iingcn,  sling 

fc^tang 

gefd)Inngcn 

fc^mcigen,  fling 

fct)mi6    , 

gefd)miffen 

fdjmcIsen^H  f.,  ^,, 

fc^molg 

gcfd^molgcn 

t           I 

melt 

f(i)nciben,  cut 

fd)nttt 

gcfd^nittcn 

f^reibcn,  write 

fd^rieb 

gefc^rieben 

fd^rctcn,  scream 

fd)rie 

gefd^rleen 

jcf)rcitcn,  S.,  stride 

fciiritt 

gejd^rittcn 

j(i)rt)etgen,  be  silent 

fd)mieg 

gejdt)tt)icgcn 

jd^raeEen,*  \.,  swell 

f(^  troll 

gcfd^ttJoUen 

I           t 

fd^mtmmcn,  \,,  W 

fdt)n)cintnt 

gcfd^n)om* 

swim 

men 

fd)tninben,  f.,  vanish 

f(i)n)anb 

gefd^ttjunben 

jd^tDingcn,  swing 

fd^trang 

gcfd^ttjnngcn 

fd^inorcn,  swear 

fd^tt)or  or 
fd)rt)ur 

gefd)tt)orcn 

fcl^ctl,  see 

fa^ 

gefcl)cn 

ie         ie 

fein,  \.,  be 

luar 

gcmefcn 

bin,  bift, 
ift,  fei 

269 


renntc 


0  or  0 


a  or  5 


270 

APPENDIX 

Infinitivt. 

Imperfect. 

p.  Part. 

Pr.  Ind. 

Impve. 

Imp/.  Subj. 

fetlbcn,!^  send 

fanbte 

gefanbt 

jenbetc 

fieben,^^  boil 

fott 

gefotten 

fingcn,  sing 

fang 

geUingen 

finfen,  f.,  sink 

fant 

gefunten 

finnen,  think 

fann 

gefonncn 

a  or  0 

fil^en,  sit 

fa6 

gefeffen 

foUen,  shall 

foatc 

gefoUt 

foUft,  fott 

fpeien,  spit 

frie 

gefpieen 

jpinnen,  spin 

fpann 

gejponncn 

a  or  0 

f^rcd^en,  speak 

fpradi 

gef^jroc^en 

i 

I 

fpriegcn,  \.,  \,  sprout 

f^rog 

gcf)3ro6en 

iprtngen,  S.,  \,  spring 

f^rang 

gefprungcn 

fted)en,  stick 

pad) 

geftodieu 

i 

i 

ftecfen,^  stick 

fta! 

geftecft 

C  or  i 

c  or  I 

fte^en,  stand 

ftanb 
(ftunb) 

geftanben 

ftel)(cTi,  steal 

\m 

gefto^Ien 

ie 

ic 

a     1 

ftetgen,  \.,  \,  mount 

ftieg 

geftiegen 

fterben,  \.,  die 

ftarb 

geftorben 

i 

I 

ii 

ftogcit,  %,  \.,  push 

ftieg 

geftogen 

0 

ftrei(^en,  stroke 

ftrid) 

geftrid^cn 

ftreiten,  strive 

ftritt 

geftrttten 

trageu,  carry 

trug 

getragen 

a 

treffen,  hit 

traf 

getroffen 

i 

I 

treiben,  drive 

trieb 

getrieben 

treten,  \.,  \,  step 

trat 

getreten 

trittft, 
trttt 

tritt 

trtefen,i6  j.,  \^  drip 

troff 

getroffen 

triigen,  deceive 

trog 

getrogen 

tun,  do 

tat 

getan 

tjerberben^i"^  !♦,  1^,, 

toerbarb 

Derborben 

I 

I 

ii 

spoil 

Derbriegen,  vex 

Dcrbrog 

terbroffen 

toergeffen,  forget 

t)ergag 

t)ergeffen 

t 

I 

berlteren,  lose 

tjerlor 

toerloren 

tr)a({)fen,  f.,  grow 

tDUCi)^ 

gert)ad)ien 

a 

tt)dgen,  v^^eigh  (/r.) 

njog 

geirogen 

lt)afci)ett,  vi^ash 

tt)uj[(i) 

getrafd^en 

a 

h)eben,i6  weave 

lt)ob 

geiDoben 

APPENDIX 

271 

Infinitive. 

Imperfect. 

p.  Part. 

Pr.  Ind.    Impve. 

Imp/.  Snbj, 

tt)eid)cn/8  ?.,  \,  yield 

XQ\^ 

gctt)id)en 

iDeifen,  show 

tt)ieg 

gett)ie|en 

tDenben,^^  turn 

ttjanbte 

gemanbt 

tccttbetc 

tDerben,  sue,  woo 

njarb 

gen:)orben 

I 

ii 

iDcrben,  l,  become 

tDurbe, 
tDarb 

gettjorben 

njirb 

njui'bc 

tt)crfen,  throw 

tuarf 

gemorfen 

i            I 

il 

iDiegen,  weigh  {inir,) 

trog 

gemogen 

trinben,  wind 

iDanb 

gett)unben 

tt)iffen,  know 

ttJUgtC 

getDugt 

tfcig, 

njeigt,  tDctg 

lt)oUen,  will 

tt)oEtc 

gctDoUt 

it)itt, 

wolltc 

ttJittft,  tuitt 

gci^cn,  accuse 

3ie^ 

gc3iel)cn 

3icl)en,i9  draw  (1)0, 

gog 

gc^ogeti 

move  (f.) 

3tt)lngen,  force 

gnjang 

gestDimgcn 

^  beiregen,  *move,'  is  wk.  2  Has  also  eu  for  ie  in  2nd  and  3rd  sing, 
pres.  indie,  and  2nd  sing,  impve.  in  poetic  diction.  ^  (ofd)en,  *  extinguish,* 
is  wk.  *  Wk.  when  tr.  ^  Also  fleut^ft,  flcud^t,  flcuc^  in  poetry.  »  be* 
gteiteit,  *  accompany,'  is  wk.  '^  Derleibetl,  *  spoil,'  is  wk.  ^  Usually  wk. 
^  bereiten,  *  prepare,'  is  wk.  10  limringcn,  *  surround,'  is  wk.  ^1  In  other 
senses  wk.  12  befrf)ercn,  *  make  a  present,'  is  wk.  ^^  ratf(^Iagcn,  *  delib- 
erate,' is  wk.  1*  jci^metgett,  *  smelt,'  is  wk.  ^^  Also  reg.  wk.  ^^  Also  wk. 
17  Wk.  or  St.  when  tr.  18  toeid^en,  'soften,'  is  wk.  i^  Also  jeud^ft,  jeuc^t, 
geud^,  in  poetry. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


1.  Numerals  refer  to  the  sections.  2.  Noun  inflections  are  indicated  in  the  usual  way; 
the  plural  only  of  feminines  is  given;  umlaut  is  indicated  by  ';  the  e  before  ^  in  genitive 
singular  of  nouns  has  been  usually  given;  for  rules  as  to  its  retention  or  omission,  see 
§  33,  Rem.  2,  n.  i.  3.  Proper  names  with  identical  spelling  in  both  languages  have  been 
omitted.  4.  For  the  inflection  of  adjectival  substantives,  see  §  68.  5.  With  adjectives, 
"  indicates  umlaut  in  comparison.  6.  In  the  case  of  words  used  both  as  adjective  and 
adverb,  the  adjectival  form  only  is  usually  given.  7.  Verbs  are  weak,  unless  otherwise 
indicated;  those  marked  st.  (strong)  or  irr.  (irregular)  will  be  found  in  App.  D;  the  con- 
jugation of  a  compound  verb  is  given,  as  a  rule,  under  the  simple  verb.  8.  Verbs 
followed  by  f.  are  conjugated  with  fctlt  only;  those  followed  by  f.,  ]^»  are  sometimes  con- 
jugated with  i^ahen  (§  62,  2,  note);  all  others  with  l^abeit  only.  9.  Compound  verbs, 
except  those  beginning  with  bc-,  ettt^-,  Cltt-,  cr-,  gc-,  t>CX-,  jcr-,  are  separable,  unless 
otherwise  indicated.  10.  The  stress  (')  is  marked  only  in  exceptional  cases.  11.  The 
meanings  given  are  usually  confined  to  those  used  in  this  grammar. 


^Benb,  m.y  -c^,  -e,  evening;  bed 
2lbcnb6  or  abenbd,  in  the  eve- 
ning. 

5!bcnbbrot,  «.,  -c«,  supper. 

5l&enbcffcn,  w.,  -d,  supper. 

5(bcnbgWrflcin,«.,  -^,  — ,  evening- 
bell. 

5lbcnbtuft, /.,  ^e,  evening  air. 

516entcucr,  w.,  -«,  — ,  adventure. 

ahtv,  but;  however. 

ah^affttn,  5/.,  f.,  to  depart,  set 
out,  start. 

5(6fa^rt,/.,  -en,  departure. 

abgc^cn,  st.y  f.,  to  go  away,  set 
out,  start,  depart. 

5(6^anb(ung,  /.,  -en,  treatise, 
paper. 

oBIabcn,  st.,  to  unload. 

abnc^mcn,  st.,  to  take  away,  take 
off. 


aB^U^cn,  to  clean,  wipe. 

abtCtf Ctt,  fv  to  set  out,  start,  depart, 
go  away. 

abfagen^  to  decline  (an  invita- 
tion, etc.). 

5Cbf(i^tcb,  m.,  -c8,  departure;  — 
ne^men,  to  take  leave. 

ab^tifia^tn,  st.,  to  refuse,  deny. 

aBf(i^rciBcn,  st.,  to  copy  (out). 

abfe^Ctt,  to  set  down. 

5(bfld^t,/.,  -en,  intention. 

abftattett,  to  pay  (a  visit). 

abftcigcn,  st.,  f.,  to  dismount, 
descend,  get  out  of  (a  vehicle). 

'Hhttilf  m.,  -t^,  -c,  compart- 
ment. 

5(btcUung, /.,  -en,  department. 

a'bttiefenb,  absent. 

a^ifl  ah'  oh!  alas! 
%^t,  /.,  care,  attention. 
a^i^tbttif  St.,  to  give  heed,  pay 

attention. 


273 


274 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


abbtcren,  to  add  (arith.). 
abicu  [pr.  abi'o'],  good-bye. 
5lbrcffc,/.,  -n,  address. 
a^nlid^,  like,  similar  (to). 
aUf  all  (the),  the  whole. 
attci'n,   adj.f    alone;    conj.j    but, 

only. 
attcrbi'ngi^,  certainly,  indeed. 
attgcmci'n,  general,  universal;  im 

— en,  in  general. 
tttt^umat,  all  together. 
al)^,  than,  as  (a),  when. 
ai^Of   so,    thus,    accordingly,    so 

then. 
alt,  -^cr,  old;  Dor  — cr  3^^*/  '^^ 

old(en)  times. 
^mcrtfa,  «.,  -^,  America. 
amcrifaniftti,  American. 
%mi,  n.,  -e^,  -^er,  office. 
^mt^trittgfctt,  /.,  tenure  of  office. 
an   {dat.  or  ace),  on,    upon,   to, 

at,   in,   beside,   by,   of,   for;  — 

(dat.)  tiorbeige^en,  to  go  past. 
^nbcnfcn,  «.,   -^,    memory;    gum 

—  an  (ace),  in  memory  of. 
anbcr,  other;  bie  — n,  the  others, 

others;  htu  — n  ^ag,  the  next 

day. 
anbern,  refl.,  to  change  (intr.). 
anbert^alii,  one  and  a  half. 
anerfcnnett,  irr.,  to  acknowledge, 

recognize. 
anfangctt,  st.,  to  begin, 
anfang^,  at  first. 
angcnc^m,  agreeable. 
angrctfen,  st.,  to  attack. 
an^atten,  st.,  to  stop,  draw  up. 

Slnfcr,    m,y    -g,    — ,    anchor;    ble 

—  fallen  laffen,  to  cast  anchor. 
anfleiben;    refl.,    to    dress    one's 

self. 


anlommtn,  st.,  \,,  to  arrive. 

anfunbigcn,  to  announce. 

annc^mcn,  st.,  to  accept. 

5Cnrcbc,/.,  -n,  (mode  of)  address. 

anreben,  to  address,  speak  to. 

anric^tcn,  to  do  (damage). 

anrii^ren,  to  touch. 

anfd^auen,  to  look  at,  gaze  at. 

anfe^cn,  st.,  to  look  at. 

anftctten,  to  appoint;  angeftettt 
fein,  to  have  a  position. 

^nttOOXtff.,  -en,  answer. 

anitOOXitXlf  to  answer,  reply. 

ant)crtrauen,  to  entrust. 

tlngetgc,/.,  -n,  advertisement. 

an^iel^cn,  st.,  to  draw  on,  put  on 
{of  clothing);  \i6)  — ,  to  dress 
(one's  self). 

an^Unbcn,  to  kindle,  light. 

5t^fel,  m.,  -^,  ^,  apple. 

5l^fel6aum,  m.,  -t^,  ^t,  apple- 
tree. 

5(|J0ftc(,  m.,  -^,  — ,  apostle. 

5l^0t^cfc,  /.,  -n,  drug-store. 

5lpotf)efcr,  m.,  -8,  —,  druggist. 

5l)J^cti't,  m.,  -e«,  appetite. 

5lpril,  m.,  April. 

5l'rfieU,/.,  -en,  work. 

arbeitcn,  to  work. 

5(r6citer,  m.,  -g,  — ,  workman, 
laborer. 

%x6)t,f.,  -n,  ark. 

arger(t(!^,  angrily. 

5lrm,  m.,  -e6,  -t,  arm;  branch  (of 
a  river). 

arm,  -^er,  poor. 

arttg,  well-behaved,  good. 

^Irjcnet,/.,  -en,  medicine,  physic. 

^Ir^t,  m.,  -eg,  -^e,  physician,  doc- 
tor. 

Sift,  m.,  -eg,  -^e,  bough,  branch. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


275 


audi,  also,  too,  even;  —  baS  ift 
nic^t  mein,  that  is  not  mine 
either;  —  ha  ift  nid^tg,  there  is 
nothing  there  either. 

Slue,/.,  -Tl;  meadow. 

auf  {dat.  or  ace),  on,  upon,  to, 
for,  at,  in,  by;  cin  3Siertet  — 
jmei,  a  quarter  past  one;  brei 
SSiertd  —  jtDei,  a  quarter  to 
two. 

aufcrlcgctt,  to  impose  upon,  as- 
sign. 

aufcffctt,  St.,  to  eat  up. 

OUffrcffctt,  St.,  to  eat  up,  devour. 

5(ufga6e,/.,  -n,  exercise,  lesson. 

aufgcBctt,  st.,  to  give  up,  aban- 
don; give  in  charge. 

aufgc^en,  st.,  f.,  to  rise  (of  the 
sun,  etc.);  spring  up  (of  seed). 

auf^cBcn,  st.,  to  pick  up. 

auf^iffcn,  to  hoist  (a  sail,  etc.). 

ouf^iircn,  to  cease,  stop. 

aufmat^cn,  to  open. 

aufmcrffam,  attentive. 

auf^affen,  to  take  care,  look  out. 

aufrc(!^t,  upright;  —  ftellett,  to  set 
on  end. 

aufrcgcn,  to  excite;  refl.,  to  be- 
come (get)  excited. 

oufft^lagcn,  st.,  to  open. 

auffc^rciben,  st.,  to  write  down. 

auffc^cn,  St.,  to  look  up( wards). 

5Jufftanb,  m.,  -t^,  ^t,  insurrec- 
tion. 

aufftC^Ctt,  St.,  f.,  to  rise,  get  up. 

aufftcigcn,  st.,  f.,  to  rise,  mount. 

auftrctcn,  st.,  f.,  to  come  forward, 
appear. 

auf  tun,  irr.,  to  open. 

oufttJat^cn,  \,,  to  awake  {intr.). 

aufwacftfcn,  st.,  f.,  to  grow  up. 


5luQe,  ».,  -3,  -n,  eye;  grogc  — n 
mac^en,  to  stare. 

5iu8(e)(etn,  n.,  -^,  —,  little  eye. 

5(ugcnbUrf,  w.,  -e«,  -c,  moment. 

Slugu'ft,  m.,  August. 

au^  (dat.),  out,  out  of,  of,  from. 

5(u^flug,  m.,  -c8,  ^t,  excursion, 
picnic. 

5(u^gaBc, /.,  -n,  edition. 

au^gc^cn,  st.,  f.,  to  go  out. 

au^ge^eic^net,  eminent,  distin- 
guished. 

au^glcttcn,  st.,  \,,  to  slip. 

au^graficn,  5/.,  to  dig  up. 

5lu^l(tnber,  m.,  -^,  — ,  foreigner. 

an^madicn,  to  settle,  decide. 

an^padcrif  to  unpack. 

au§tt\^tn,  to  be  enough,  suflSce, 
be  sufficient. 

au^rufcn,  st.,  to  call  out,  exclaim. 

aUi^ru^cn,  intr.  or  refl.,  to  rest, 
repose. 

auger  {dat.),  outside  of,  except, 
but,  besides. 

aufterbem,  adv.,  besides,  more- 
over. 

auftet^atB,  prep,  (gen.),  outside  of. 

ttufterft,  extremely. 

5(u^fi(^t, /.,  -en,  view,  prospect. 

au^ftetgen,  st.,  \,,  to  get  off,  get 
out  (of  a  vehicle). 

au^ftreuen,  to  scatter. 

au^furffen,  to  pick  out,  select. 

au^teiten,  to  deal  out,  distribute. 

^ufter, /.,  -n,  oyster. 

au^treten,  st.,  f.,  to  retire,  resign. 

au^menbig,  by  heart. 

au^5te^en,  st.,  to  draw  out;  take 
off  (a  coat,  etc.). 

au^5if(^en,  to  hiss  (tr.), 

5(st,/.,  ^t,  axe. 


276 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


S3a(^,  m.y  -eg,  ^t,  brook,  rivu- 
let. 

S3ocfe, /.,  -n,  cheek. 

hadm,  St.,  to  bake. 

JBiidcr,  m.,  -^,  — ,  baker. 

JBabcjimmcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  bath- 
room. 

S3a^n^of,  w.,  -c8,  -^C,  station  (rail- 
way). 

S5a^nftcig,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  platform 
(railway). 

l^alb,  el^er,  am  e^eften,  soon,  pres- 
ently; —  .  .  »  — ,  at  one  time 
...  at  another. 

SBatt,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  ball. 

93anb,  m.,  -eg,  -^e,  volume. 

fiangc,  afraid;  tnir  tt)irb  — ,  I  (be- 
gin to)  feel  alarmed,  etc. 

S5anf,/.,  ■"•C,  bench. 

f8antf  /.,  -en,  bank,  banking- 
house. 

S5anficr  [pr.  banfie'],  w.,  -g,  -g, 
banker. 

f8At,  w.,  -en,  -en,  bear. 

SBarbie'r,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  barber. 

S3art,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  beard. 

Bauen,  to  build. 

23aucr,  m.,  -g  or  -n,  -n,  peasant, 
countryman,  farmer. 

S3aum,  w.,  -eg,  ^t,  tree. 

S3ai)ern,  ».,  -g,  Bavaria. 

S8eamt(er),  adj.  subst.,  official. 

hthtn,  to  quake,  tremble. 

bebaucrn,  tr.,  to  pity;  intr.,  to  be 
sorry. 

Bebcrfen,  to  cover. 

Bebeuten,  to  signify,  mean;  order, 
instruct  {dat.). 

25ebient(cr),  adj.  subst.,  servant. 


beetten,  refl.,  to  make  haste, 
hurry. 

S3cet,  n.,  -eg,  -e,  garden-bed. 

S3efe^(,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  order,  com- 
mand. 

Befe^lcn,  st.  {dat.),  to  order,  com- 
mand. 

Bcfinben,  st.,  refl.,  to  be  found,  be 
(situated);  be  {of  health)',  tDie 
—  ©ie  [ic^?  how  are  you? 

S3cforbcrung, /.,  -en,  forwarding, 
transportation. 

Befragen,  to  ask,  question. 

Befiird^ten,  to  fear,  apprehend. 

S3cgcBen^eit,  /.,  -en,  event,  inci- 
dent. 

begegncn,  \,  {dat.),  to  meet. 

Begciftert,  enthusiastic. 

Bcgtnnen,  5^,  to  begin,  commence. 

ibegleit^en,  5^.,  to  pay,  settle  (an 
account). 

Begleiten,  to  accompany,  go  with. 

S3eg(etter,  m.,  -g,  — ,  companion, 
attendant. 

iDcgraben,  st.,  to  bury. 

Begren^cn,  to  limit,  bound. 

Begriiften,  to  greet. 

be^alten,  st.,  to  keep,  retain. 

be^anbeln,  to  treat. 

be^ilflirfi;  —  fein,  to  be  of  assist- 
ance. 

bet  {dat.),  near  (by),  by,  beside, 
at,  with,  about,  on,  of;  — 
^if(^,  at  table;  —  meinent  Onfel, 
at  my  uncle's  (house,  etc.);  — 
mlr,  with  me,  about  me,  at  my 
house;  —  biefem  ^Better,  in  this 
weather. 

beibc,  both,  (the)  two;  allc  — , 
both. 

a3cin,  n.,  -eg,  -e,  leg. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


277 


Bctttal^C,  almost,  nearly. 

S3cif))tc(,  «.,  -t^,  -t,  example. 

Bet^en,  5^.,  to  bite. 

S3ciftanb,  m.,  -eS,  assistance,  help. 

bciftc^cn,  St.  (dat.),  to  assist,  help. 

BcinJO^ncn  (dat.),  to  be  present 
at,  attend. 

Bcfannt,  well-known. 

S3cfannt(cr),  adj.  suhst.,  acquaint- 
ance. 

bcfpmmcn,  st.,  to  obtain,  get,  re- 
ceive. 

JBetgicn,  «.,  -«,  Belgium. 

licmanncn,  to  man. 

bcmcrfcn,  to  remark,  observe. 

bcmit^cn,  to  trouble. 

JBcngcl,  m.,  -^,  — ,  urchin,  chap. 

beo'bat^tcn,  to  observe,  watch. 

l&cquc'm, comfortable;  e^  —  ^aben, 
to  be  convenient,  etc. 

bcrctffncn,  to  calculate,  compute. 

bcrctfcn,  to  travel  through. 

iiereit^  ready,  prepared. 

bereiten,  to  prepare,  provide. 

SBcrgr  ^^-j  -^^,  -^,  hill,  mountain. 

JBcrU'n,  n.,  -^,  Berlin. 

S3eruf,  w.,  -t^,  -t,  calling,  pro- 
fession. 

Bcrufcn^  St.,  to  call,  summon. 

berit^mt,  celebrated,  famous. 

bcrii^rcn,  to  touch. 

bcfc^aftiflt,  occupied,  busy. 

bcfdjeibcn,  modest. 

Bcfc^licfecn,  St.,  to  resolve,  deter- 
mine. 

bcfrfjil^cn,  to  protect. 

befe^en^  5^,  to  look  at,  view. 

bcfc^t,  occupied,  full. 

Ibcfonbcr,  special,  extraordinary. 

bcfonberiS,  especially,  particu- 
larly. 


Bcforgcn,  to  see  to,  look  after. 

bcflJrec^cn,  st.y  to  discuss,  talk 
over. 

ficffcr  {see  gut). 

bcftC^cn,  St.;  —  auf  {ace),  to  in- 
sist on. 

ficftcigcn,  st.,  to  mount,  ascend, 
get  into  (vehicle). 

bcftcttcn,  to  prepare,  till;  order. 

bcftrafen,  to  punish. 

23efu(^,  m.,  -t^,  -t,  visit,  call; 
visitor  (s);  auf  —  fcitt,  to  be  on 
a  visit. 

bcfut^cn,  to  visit. 

bcten,  to  pray. 

betrat^tcn,  to  look  at,  consider, 
observe. 

S3etrag,  w.,  -c«,  -"-c,  amount, 
sum. 

JBctragcn,  «.,  -«,  conduct,  be- 
havior. 

bctreffcn,  st.,  to  concern,  regard; 
iDtt^  it)n  betrifft,  as  far  as  he  is 
concerned. 

bctrctcn,  st.,  to  tread  on,  enter. 

betritbt,  afiHcted,  sorrowful. 

betriigcn,  st.,  to  cheat,  deceive. 

S3ctt,  n.y  -t^,  -en,  bed;  ju  — 
ge^en,  to  go  to  bed;  gu  —  Ucgen, 
to  lie  (be)  in  bed. 

ftetteln,  to  beg. 

Settler,  w.,  -«,  — ,  beggar. 

BetJOrjUgen,  insep.,  to  give  prefer- 
ence to. 

bemunbem,  to  admire. 

betDU^t,  conscious. 

beja^ten,  to  pay. 

S3c5Ug,  w.,  -e^,  reference;  in  — 
auf,  with  respect  to,  regarding. 

S3ilb,  n.,  -eg,  -er,  picture. 

bilbcn,  to  form. 


278 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


JBilbcrgalerie, /,  -n,  picture-gal- 
lery. 

S3ilbni^,  n.y  -eg,  -c,  portrait. 

hiUXQ,  cheap. 

S3irnbaum,  w.,  -eg,  -^t,  pear-tree. 

S3trnc,  /.,  -n,  pear. 

h'l^  {ace),  till,  until,  up  to,  as  far 
as;  —  gu,  —  nac^,  as  far  as, 
even  to,  up  to,  until;  t)ier  — 
fiinf,  four  or  five;  —  auf,  ex- 
cept. 

Bift(i^cn  (eln),  a  little. 

bitten,  St. J  to  ask,  beg,  request; 
(ic^)  bitte  {lit.  'I  beg'),  if  you 
please,  please. 

Bitter,  bitter. 

hiaHf  blue. 

hhibcn,  St. J  f.,  to  remain,  stay,  be. 

SBteiftift,  w.,  -e6,  -e,  (lead-)  pen- 
cil. 

Btinb,  blind. 

Btii^en,  to  blossom,  (be  in)  bloom. 

Slitmt^en,  w.,  -g,  — ,  little  flower, 
floweret. 

23(ume,/.,  -n,  flower. 

S3tumengartett,  w.,  -g,  ^,  flower- 
garden. 

S3(umenfo^I,  w.,  -eg,  cauliflower. 

Sliimtein,  ».,  -g,  — ,  little  flower, 
floweret. 

a3Iut,  n.y  -eg,  blood. 

SBliite,  /.,  -n,  blossom,  bloom. 

JBlutenbuft,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  fragrance 
of  flowers. 

Blutig,  bloody. 

S3oben,  w.,  -g,  •«•,  ground,  soil; 
floor. 

S3o^ne,/.,  -n,  bean. 

f8onhon^f  pi.,  candy,  candies. 

93oot,  n.,  -eg,  -e  or  ^iite,  boat. 

S3ot0ett,  n.,  -g,  borrowing. 


S3iJrfe,  /.,  -n,  Exchange(-build- 
ing). 

biife,  bad,  cross,  angry. 

brau(^en,  to  use,  need. 

Braufen,  to  roar,  thunder. 

brec^en,  st.,  to  break;  pick, 
gather  (flowers,  etc.). 

bteit,  broad,  wide. 

Brennen,  irr.,  to  burn. 

S3rief,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  letter. 

briejlirfi,  epistolary;  — er  3$erle]^r, 
correspondence. 

S3rigg  [pr.  brif],/.,  -g,  brig. 

bringen,  irr.,  to  bring,  take. 

S3rot,  «.,  -eg,  -e,  bread,  loaf. 

f8tMt,f.,  -n,  bridge. 

S3ruber,  m.,  -g,  -^,  brother. 

SBruft,/.,  -^e,  breast. 

S3u(f|,  «.,  -eg,  -^er,  book. 

S3urf|erf(i^ranf,  w.,  -eg,  -^t,  book- 
case. 

SBuc^fii^rer,  m.,  -g,  — ,  book- 
keeper. 

Sii^fe,/.,  -n,  rifle. 

S3ummel5ug,    w.,    -eg,  ^e,  slow 

train. 
S3unb,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  bundle,  bunch. 
S3urea«  [pr.  biiro'],  «.,  -g,  -g  or 

-J,  office. 
S3urger,  w.,  -g,  — ,  citizen. 
JBitrgermeifter,  m.,  -g,  — ,  mayor, 
biirften,  to  brush. 
Sutter,/,  butter. 


G^iifar,  w.,  -g,  Caesar, 
dent,  m.,  -g,  -g,  cent. 
G^^emie',/.,  chemistry. 
G^oufme,/.,  -n,  cousin. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


^ 


ba^    adv. J    there,    in   that    place; 

here;  then;  conj.,  as,  because, 

since,  when. 
babet,  near  it,  by  it,  etc.;  at  the 

same  time,  while  doing  so;  — 

fein,  to  be  present,  be  there. 
^arf|,  n.,  -eg,  -^er,  roof. 
baburc^,  through  it,  by  it,  etc. 
bafiir,  for  it,  etc. 
bagegen,  against  it,  etc.;  on  the 

other  hand. 
ba^er,  hence,  therefore. 
ba^erjic^cn,  st.,  f.,  to  come  on. 
baljitt,  thither,  to  that  place,  there. 
bol)infal)tcn,  5/.,  j,,  to  drive  there. 
ba^inftiCQCn,  st.y  f.,  to  fly  away. 
ba^infommcn,  5/.,  f.,  to  go  (get) 

there. 
WmaU,  then,  at  that  time. 
^amc, /.,  -It,  lady. 
^amcnflcib,  ».,  -c«,  -cr,  lady's 

dress. 
bamit^  with  it,  etc.;  conj.,  in  order 

that. 
^ampfcr,  w.,  -«,  — ,  steamboat, 

steamer. 
^ttncmarf,  n.,  -«,  Denmark. 
biimfc^,  Danish. 
^antf  m.,  -e«,  thanks;  beftcn  — , 

many  thanks. 
banfbar,  thankful. 
banfcn  (dat.),  to  thank;  owe;  'vi) 

banfc,  no  thank  you. 
bann,  then,  next. 
baran,  on  it,  at  it,  etc. 
barauf,  on  it,  etc.;  thereupon. 
barin,  in  it,  etc. 
baruber,  over  it,  about  it,  at  it, 

etc. 


279 


barum,  therefore;  — ,  bag,  be- 
cause. 

barunter,  under  it,  among  it,  etc. 

^a^  {see  ber). 

ba^,  that,  in  order  that. 

Saturn,  «.,  -«,  T)ata  or  ^atett, 
date. 

bat)on^  of  it,  from  it,  about  it,  etc. 

bationlaufcn,  st.,  f.,  to  run  away. 

batjontragcn,  st.y  to  win. 

baju,  to  it,  for  it,  etc.;  moreover, 
into  the  bargain. 

^egcn,  w.,  -g,  — ,  sword. 

bcin,  poss.  adj.,  thy,  your. 

bcinct^  poss.  pron.,  thine,  yours. 

bcimgc  (ber,  bie,  bag),  poss.  pron.y 
thine,  yours. 

bcnfcn,  irr.,  to  think,  fancy;  — 
an  (ace),  think  of. 

bcnn,  conj.,  for;  adv.,  then. 

bcr,  bic,  ba^,  def.  art.,  the;  rel. 
pron.,  who,  which,  that;  de- 
monstr.  adj.,  that,  etc.;  de- 
monstr.  pron.,  the  one,  he, 
she,  it. 

bcrcn,  of  them,  their;  of  which, 
etc. 

bergtet(!^en^  the  like  of  whom,  etc.; 
of  the  same  kind;  fonft  — , 
others  of  the  same  kind. 

bcrjcnigc  (bic — ,  ba^ — ),  demonstr. 
pron.,  he,  the  one,  etc. 

bcrfctbc  (bic — ,  ba^ — ),  the  same; 
he,  she,  it,  etc. 

bc^ftalb,  for  this  (that)  reason, 
therefore,  on  that  account. 

bcutfrff,  German;  ber  ^Deutfd^e,  the 
German;  ein  2)eutf(^er,  a  Ger- 
man; !Dcutf(^,  n.,  German  {the 
language);  auf  — ,  in  Ger- 
man. 


28o 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


bcutft^-franspflfti^,  Franco-Ger- 
man. 

^CUtfd^tanb,  w.,  -^,  Germany. 

^t^tmhct,  m.,  December. 

bic^,  thee,  you. 

^tti^tcr,  m.y  -g,  — ,  poet. 

hid,  thick. 

bie  {see  bet). 

^teB,  m.,  -t^,  -t,  thief. 

Wiener,  m.,  -g,  — ,  servant. 

^tenft,  w.,  -e6,  -e,  service. 

^icn^tag,  w.,  -^,  -t,  Tuesday. 

biefcr,  this,  that;  the  latter;  this 
(man,  etc.),  he,  etc. 

^ing,  n.,  -t^,  -e,  thing. 

t>itf  (to,  for)  thee,  you. 

bttJtbtercn,  to  divide  (arith.). 

t>0(i^f  yet,  still,  however,  but, 
after  all,  etc. 

^o'ftur,  m.,  -^,  "^otto^xtn,  doctor 
{academic  degree). 

Cottar,  w.,  -^,  -^,  dollar. 

^onncr^iatt,  m.,  -e^,  thunder-clap. 

^onncti^tag,  w.,  -g,-e,  Thursday. 

bo^^clt,  double. 

^orf,  n.,  -e^,  -^er,  village. 

^orn,  w.,  -e§,  ^/.  -en,  -e  or  -^er, 
thorn. 

hoxt,  yonder,  there. 

^r.  {see  ^oftor). 
bran  {see  baran). 
branftcn,  adv.,  outside. 
brel)cn,  to  turn. 
brci,  three. 
brcimal,  three  times. 
bret^tgfalttg,  thirty-fold. 
bringcnb,  urgent. 
brol^en,  to  threaten. 
^rofc^fe,  /.,  -n,  cab. 
briilbcn,  over  there. 

brum  {see  barum). 


bu,  thou,  you. 

bunfcl,  dark. 

burci^  {ace),  through,  by,  with. 

burti^brt'ngen,  st.,  insep.,  to  pene- 
trate, be  infused  into. 

burc^flC^tig,  transparent. 

bur^fu'rficn,  insep.,  to  search, 
ransack. 

burfen,  irr.,  mod.  aux.,  to  dare, 
be  permitted,  allowed,  etc.; 
barf  id)?  may  I? 

biirrc,  dry,  dried  up. 

^urft,  m.,  -t^,  thirst;  —  l^abcn^ 
to  be  thirsty. 

burfttg,  thirsty. 

^U^cnb,  n.,  -e^,  -c,  dozen. 


(B 


then,  just  now;  erft  — ,  only  just 

now. 
cbenfo,  just  as,  as.  * 

ebel,  noble. 

(Sbuarb,  m.,  -g,  Edward. 
©ggc, /.,  -n,  harrow. 
ttft,  conj.,  before. 
Cl^cr,  adv.,  rather,  sooner. 
Q:ffU,  /.,  -n,  honor;   i^m  JU  — n, 

in  his  honor. 
C^ren,  to  honor. 
C^rttC^,  honest. 
(St,  n.,  -t^,  -cr,  egg. 
ei!  ah!  why!  indeed! 
etgcn,  adj.,  own. 
Ctgcnt(i(!^,  really,  anyway, 
cin,  art.,  a,  an;  num.,  one. 
Ctna'nbcr,     one     another,     each 

other. 
einer,  pron.,  one,  a  man,  etc.;  hit 

— C;  the  one;  bie  — en,  some. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


281 


ctnfal^rcn,  5^,  to  haul  in. 

cinfoUcn,  st.,  \,,  to  occur  (to  one's 
mind). 

etngeben^  st.,  to  give,  administer. 

etnige,  a  few,  several,  some. 

©infauf,  w.,  -c«,  -"-e,  purchase; 
(Sinfdufe  tnadien,  to  make  pur- 
chases, go  shopping,  shop. 

einlaufen,  to  make  purchases,  go 
shopping,  shop. 

cmlabcn,  5/.,  to  invite. 

^inlabung, /.,  -en,  invitation. 

eintcnfcn,  to  turn,  tack. 

einmal,  once;  auf  — ,  at  once; 
nod^  — ,  once  more,  again;  eiTi= 
rtd,  once  (upon  a  time);  ben= 
fen  <Sic  — ,  just  think;  nid^t  — , 
not  even. 

cin^jarfcn,  to  pack  up. 

Qmn^innq,/.,  -tn,  arrangement. 

etlt^,  num.,  one  {in  counting). 

cinfc^lafcn,  5^,  \,,  to  go  to  sleep, 
fall  asleep. 

^mfci^mtt,  m.,  -e«,  -t,  incision. 

Cinfc^cn,  to  put  in,  insert. 

cinft,  once  (upon  a  time). 

cinftcrfen,  to  pocket. 

cinfteigen,  st.,  \.,  to  go  (get) 
aboard,  get  into  (a  vehicle). 

eintcUcn,  to  divide. 

eintrctcn,  st.,  f.  (in,  ace),  to  enter. 

©inhm^ttcr,  m.,  -«,  — ,  inhabi- 
tant; — yx^,  /.,  population. 

(§\^f  n.,  -e«,  ice. 

^fcn,  «.,  -«,  iron. 

©ifcnBa^n,  /.,  -en,  railway,  rail- 
road. 

©tfenba^nhJagcn,  m.,  -g,  — ,  rail- 
way-carriage, car. 

^ifeni>Uttcr,  m.,  -g,  — ,  splinter 
of  iron. 


QMtiltxiff.,  -en,  vanity. 

e'lcnb,  miserable,  wretched. 

eUfabet^,/.,  -g,  Elizabeth. 

©Ifc,  /.,  -n3,  Elsa,  Elsie. 

(^iitxxif  pi.,  parents. 

cmpfangcn,  st.,  to  receive. 

cm^fcl^ten,  st.,  to  recommend, 
commend;  refl.,  to  take  (one's) 
leave. 

©m^jfc^lung,  /.,  -en,  recommen- 
dation. 

@m^fe^tung!§5ricf,  m.,  -e«,  -e, 
letter  of  introduction  {or 
recommendation). 

©nbc,  «.,  -^,  -n,  end;  jn  — ,  at 
an  end,  over. 

enb(t(^,  at  last,  finally. 

cngUfrfl,  English;  (Sngtifc^,  w., 
English  {the  language);  auf  — , 
in  English. 

^ttfcl,  w.,  -8,  — ,  grandson. 

entbcrfcn,  to  discover. 

©ntbecfung, /.,  -en,  discovery. 

cntfcrnt,  distant. 

cnt^alten,  st.,  to  contain. 

cntfommcn,  5/.,  f.,  to  escape. 

cnttang,  along. 

cnttoffen,  st.,  to  dismiss. 

Ctttlcgen,  remote,  distant. 

cntfc^Itcftcn,  st.,  refl.,  to  resolve, 
make  up  one's  mind. 

entft^ulbtgcn,  to  excuse. 

©ntfc^cn,  n.,  -g,  horror. 

enttdufc^t,  disappointed. 

©nttdufc^ung,/.,  -en,  disappoint- 
ment. 

cnthjebcr,  either. 

ent^ttiei,  in  two,  to  pieces;  — 
brec^en,  st.,  to  break  up,  break 
to  pieces. 

er,  he,  it. 


282 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


txhiidtXlf  to  catch  sight  of,  see, 
discover. 

crBrcri^cn,  5^,  to  break  open. 

(Srifc,/.,  -n,  pea. 

(SrbBcBen,  «.,  -«,  — ,  earth- 
quake. 

^rbc, /.,  earth,  ground,  soil. 

erfa^rcn,  st.y  to  experience,  learn 
(by  report). 

crftttbcn,  St.,  to  invent;  find. 

^rftnbung, /.,  -en,  invention. 

^rfolg,  m.,  -t^,  -t,  success. 

crfrcucn,  to  make  glad;  crfreut, 
delighted. 

^rfrifrfiung,  /.,  -en,  refresh- 
ment. 

crfiittcn,  to  fulfil;  fill. 

crgcbcnft,  (most)  humbly,  very 
truly  (yours). 

erl^altcn,  5/.,  to  receive,  get;  pre- 
serve, keep. 

er^eben,  st.,  to  lift;  refl.,  to  rise, 
get  up. 

erfattctt,  refl.,  to  catch  cold,  take 
cold;  erfaltet  fein,  to  have  a 
cold. 

erfcnncn,  irr.,  to  recognize;  per- 
ceive. 

txliaxta,  to  explain. 

crfronfcn,  f.,  to  fall  ill. 

crfunbigcn,  refl.,  to  make  in- 
quiries. 

ertaubcn,  to  permit,  allow. 

^rlefini^,  «.,  -eg,  -t,  experi- 
ence. 

•crmiigtic^cn,  to  render  possible. 

crnennen,  irr.,  to  appoint. 

^rntcfran^,  w.,  -e«,  ^t,  harvest- 
wreath,  garland. 

crnten,  to  reap,  harvest. 

(Jrquirfung,  /.,  -en,  comfort. 


crtcici^cn,  to  reach,  arrive  at. 
crfc^attcn,  wk.  or  st.,  \.,  to  sound, 

resound. 
crfc^cmcn,  5^,  f.,  to  appear. 
(Srf(!^Ctnen,  ».,  -^,  appearance. 
erft,  adj.,  first;  adv.,  first,  only, 

not  before,  not  until;  —  eben, 

only  just   now,    not   till   now; 

— tn^f  in  the  first  place. 
crftaunett,  to  be  astonished. 
crftirfcn,  intr.,  to  choke,  smother. 
crtragcn,  st.,  to  bear,  endure. 
crtrtnfcn,  st.,  \.,  to  be  drowned, 

drown  (intr.). 

crhjac^cn,  f.,  to  awake. 

cmartcn,  to  expect. 

crhjcifen,  st.,  to  show;  do. 

erttJtbctn,  to  reply,  answer;  re- 
turn (tr.). 

cr^a^len,  to  relate,  narrate, 
tell. 

C^^  it,  etc.;  there;  so. 

Cffcn,  St.,  to  eat;  ju  SJilttag  — ,  to 
dine. 

©ffen,  n.,  -g,  eating,  meal. 

©ftliiffcl,  m.,  -^,  — ,  tablespoon. 

Ctlic^c^,  some. 

Ctttia,  adv.,  about. 

titva^f  something,  anything, 
some,  any;  fo  — ,  anything 
(something)  of  the  kind,  such 
a  thing;  adv.,  somewhat. 

ewd^,  you,  (to,  for)  you. 

CUCr,  poss.  adj.,  your. 

CUrer,  poss.  pron.,  yours. 

curigc  (ber,  bie,  ha^),  poss.  pron., 
yours. 

Europe,  n.,  -§,  Europe. 

tnxopixi^aif  European. 

Cttjxq,    adj.,    eternal;     adv.,    for- 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


283 


8f 

fttl^tg,  capable. 

JJa^tgfett, /.,  -en,  capacity. 

galjnCr/.,  -n,  flag,  banner. 

fa^ren,  st.,  \,,  %,  to  go,  go  (in  a 
vehicle),  drive,  ride,  travel, 
sail,  etc. 

ga^rfarte,/.,  -n,  ticket  (for  trav- 
eling). 

gott,  w.,  -t^,  ^t,  fall;  case. 

fatten,  St.,  f.,  to  fall. 

fatten,  to  fell,  cut  down. 

falfc^,  false,  wrong. 

gami'Iic,/.,  -n,  family. 

faft,  almost,  nearly. 

fani,  decayed,  bad,  stale.  ^ 

gauft,/.,  ^,  fist,  hand. 

JJebmar,  w.,  February. 

gcber,/.,  -n,  pen. 

fel^ten,  to  be  lacking,  missing;  be 
the  matter  with,  ail  {dat.)\ 
— b,  missing,  lacking. 

%z\)\tXf  m.,  -g,  — ,  error,  mis- 
take. 

fetem,  to  celebrate. 

Seiertag,  m.,  -c6,  -e,  holiday. 

fcin,  fine,  nice,  gentle. 

JJetnb,  m.y  -t^,  -t,  enemy. 

JJetb,  n.y  -eg,  -tx,  field.     . 

genfter,  «.,  -^,  — ,  window. 

JJe'rien,  pi.,  holidays,  vacation. 

fern,  far  (away),  remote. 

fertig,  ready;  —  fein,  to  be  ready, 
have  finished,  have  (be)  done. 

feft,  firm,  solid. 

feud^t,  damp.        • 

geuer,  «.,  -«,  — ,  fire. 

finben,  st.,  to  find;  —  (£ic  nid^t? 
don't  you  think  (consider)  ? 

JJifd^,  w.,  -t^,  -c,  fish. 


f[a(^,  flat,  level. 

gtaft^c,/.,  -n,  bottle. 

Pattern,  to  flutter,  wave. 

5leiftt|,  «.,  -e«,  meat. 

flei^tg,  diligent,  industrious. 

fliegen,  5/.,  f.,  \),,  to  fly;  soar. 

glintenhigcl, /.,  -n,  musket-ball. 

glug,  w.,  -t^,  -"-c,  river. 

folgen  {dat.)y  to  follow;  — b,  (the) 
following. 

fotgtid^,  hence,  therefore,  conse- 
quently. 

forbern,  to  demand. 

fort,  away,  off;  —  unb  — ,  con- 
tinually. 

fortbliil^en,  to  continue  to  bloom. 

fortfa^ren,  st.,  to  continue,  go 
on;  f.,  to  drive  (go,  etc.)  on. 

fortge^en,  st.,  \,,  to  go  away. 

fortjagen,  to  drive  away. 

fortfommen,  st.,  \.,  to  get  away; 
tnac^c,  bag  bu  fortfommft,  be  off 
with  you,  begone. 

fortne^men,  st.,  to  take  away. 

fortf^irfen,  to  send  away,  dis- 
miss. 

fragen,  to  ask. 

granfretti^,  w.,  -«,  France. 

granjofe,  w.,  -n,  -n.  French- 
man. 

franjiififci^,  French;  granj(ififc§, 
French  {the  language);  auf  — , 
in  French. 

gran,/.,  -en,  woman,  wife,  lady, 
madam,  Mrs. 

grttutetn,  «.,  -6,  — ,  young  lady, 
Miss. 

fret,  free;  unoccupied. 

grei^err,  w.,  -n,  -en,  baron. 

freili^,  certainly,  to  be  sure,  of 
course. 


284 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


grcitag,  w.,  -S,  -e,  Friday, 
fremb,  strange,  foreign. 
gremb(cr),  adj.  suhst.,  stranger, 

foreigner. 
fjreubc,/.,  -n,  joy,  pleasure. 
frcucn,  impers.,  to  gladden;  ba0 

freut  mid^,  I  am  glad  of  that, 

that   pleases    me;    refl.,    to   be 

glad,  rejoice. 
fjrcunb,  m.,  -e6,  -e,  friend. 
grcunbtn,/.,  -nen,  friend  (/.). 
frcunblit^,    friendly;    adv.,    in    a 

friendly  manner,  kindly. 
grtcbc,  w.,  -n^,  peace. 
^xkM^f  m.,  -^,  Frederick. 
grtcbrirflftraftc,      /.,       Frederick 

Street. 
frifc^,  fresh,  cool.  y<q 
fro^,  glad,  joyous. 
friJ^Ht^,  merry,  gladsome. 
grofrf),  w.,  -e^,  ^t,  frog. 
grU(^t,/.,  ^t,  fruit. 
fruc^tBar,  fruitful,  fertile. 
frii^,  early;  —  morgen^,  early  in 

the  morning. 
ftii^cr,  earlier,  formerly. 
fJru^Ung,  w.,  -e^,  spring;  — ^jett, 

/.,  springtime,  spring. 
f?ru()fturf,  w.,  -t^,  -t,  breakfast. 
friiflfturfen,  insep.,  to  breakfast. 
fii^lcn,  to  feel. 
fu()rcn,  to  lead. 
futtcn,  to  fill. 
fiinf,  five. 
fiitifstg,  fifty. 
fitt  (ace),  for. 

futc^tbar,  frightful,  terrible. 
fiirc^tcn,  to  fear,  be  afraid  of. 
fjiirft,  w.,  -en,  -en,  prince. 
fjuft,  m.,  -e«,  -^e,  foot;  gu  — ,  on 

foot. 


guPattfpicI,  «.,  -e«,  -t,  football 
game. 

guftgiingcr,  m.,  -^,  —,  pedes- 
trian. 

gutter,  w.,  -«,  food,  fodder. 


©abe,/.,  -n,  gift,  present. 

©abcl,/., -n,  fork. 

^ang,  w.,  -e§,  -"-C,  walk,  expedi- 
tion. 

gan^,  whole;  quite,  wholly. 

gat,  very,  at  all,  etc. 

©artcn,  w.,  -g,  ^,  garden. 

Partner,  w.,  -^,  — ,  gardener. 

©aft,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  guest. 

©aft^au^,  «.,  -eg,  -^er,  hotel,  inn. 

Oiafttfof,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  hotel. 

©aftma^l,  «.,  -eg,  ^er,  banquet. 

@aut,  m.,  -eg,  -^e,  horse,  nag.    y( 

©cbftube,  w.,  -g,  — ,  building. 

geben,  st.,  to  give;  present,  act, 
play  {theatre);  eg  Qtbt,  there  is 
(are);  iDag  gibt  eg?  what  is  it? 
what  is  the  matter?;  etttiag  — 
auf  {ace),  to  attach  impor- 
tance to. 

gcbUbet,  educated,  cultured. 

©Cbirgc,  n.,  -g,  — ,  mountain- 
range,  range  of  hills. 

geboren,  born;  — e,  maiden- 
name  (French  nee). 

gcbraut^cn,  to  use,  employ. 

©cburt^tag,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  birthday; 
gum  — ,  as  atbirthday  present. 

©cbiif^,  n.,  -eg,  -e,  thicket, 
bushes. 

gcbcnfen,  irr.,  to  think  of,  re- 
member {gen.);  intend. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


28s 


©cbtciftt,  n.,  -c«,  -c,  poem. 
©cbrftngc,   «.,   -^,  crowd,   press, 

crush. 
(Scbutb,/.,  patience. 
gefallett^  st.  (dat.),  to  please,  suit; 

me  gefattt  3^nen  ba^?  how  do 

you  like  that? 
gefdllig,    agreeable  ;    (ift   3{)nen) 

®uppe  —  ?   do   you   wish  (will 

you  have)  soup  ? 
gegen  (ace),  against,  towards,  about. 
(^C'gCllb,  /.,  -en,  district,  region. 
(^Cgcntcil,    w.,   -e«,   -e,   contrary, 

opposite  ;    im    — ,  on  the  con- 
trary. 
gegcttitbcr  (dat.\    opposite  (to). 
ge^cn,  St.,  f.,  to  go,  walk;  ju  gufe 

— ,  to  walk;  impers.,  to  fare; 

mie  ge^t  cd  3^nen?  how  are  you?; 

fonft  gel^t  e^  bit  fd^led^t,  or  it  will 

be  the  worse  for  you;  fo  laut  e^ 

nur  Qe^t,  as  loud  as  (I,  etc.) 

can,  as  loud  as  possible. 
gC^iiren,    to    belong;    —   ^u,    be 

reckoned   as,    be    (among);  be 

necessary  (for,  ju). 
dJcift,  m.,  -t^,  -tx,  spirit,  ghost. 
QClb,  yellow. 

Mtit>,  n-.y  -t^,  -tx,  money. 
^elbftucf^  n.,  -e^,  -C,  coin,  piece 

of  money. 
©etcgcn^cit, /.,  -en,  opportunity, 

occasion. 
(Scle^rt(cr),   adj.   subst.,    learned 

man,  scholar. 
gcUngcn,  st.,  I,  impers.  {dat.),  to 

succeed;    e8   ift  mir   getungen, 

ju,  I  succeeded  in. 
©cma^Un,/.,  -nen,  wife;  grau  — , 

wife. 
©cmtife,  ».,  -^,  vegetables. 


gcncfctt,  St.,  \,,  to  get  well,  recover 
(from  illness). 

genug,  enough. 

genitgen^  to  suffice,  be  enough. 

©e^ftrf,  ».,  -eg,  baggage,  lug- 
gage. 

©e^ttdfc^cttt,  m.,  -c«,  -e,  (bag- 
gage-)check. 

©epiirftroger,  m.,  -6,  — ,  porter. 

gered^t,  just,  righteous. 

gcring,  small,  little,  slight;  nid^t 
im  — [ten,  not  in  the  least. 

gcnt(c),  lieber,  am  Ueb[ten,  gladly, 
willingly,  with  pleasure;  red^t 
— ,  very  gladly;  etmag  —  tun, 
to  like  to  (be  pleased  to)  do 
anything;  —  l^aben,  to  like,  be 
fond  of;  —  e[fen,  to  like  (to 
eat);  lieber  tun  ic,  to  prefer 
to  do,  etc. 

©crftc, /.,  barley. 

@cfanbt(cr),  adj.  subst.,  ambas- 
sador. 

@cf(^(ift,  n.,  -e«,  -c,  business; 
business-house. 

@cf^aft^reifcnb(cr),   adj.   subst., 

commercial  traveler. 

gefc^C^en,  st.,  f.,  impers.,  to  hap- 
pen; bag  ift  fc^on  — ,  I  (etc.) 
have  already  done  so. 

©efc^cnf,  n.,  -e8,  -e,  gift,  present. 

(S^efcf)rci,  n.,  -eg,  outcry,  clamor. 

©cfcttft^aft,  /.,  -en,  company; 
party. 

©efit^t,  «.,  -eg,  -er,  face. 

©eftalt,/.,  -en,  form,  figure. 

gcftcrn,  yesterday. 

©cfunb^cit,/.,  -en,  health. 

©ctreibCr  n.,  -g,  grain,  corn. 

gettja^r,  aware. 

@cnjt(^t,  n.,  -eg,  -e,  weight. 


286 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


gctuifi,  certain. 

OCtt)(^!^nli(i^^  usual,  general,  ordi- 
nary. 

@t|jfcl,  m.,  -^,  — ,  summit,  peak. 

(3ia^,  n.,  -t^,  -^tx,  glass. 

glatt,  smooth,  slippery. 

glauBcn  {dat.  of  per s.),  to  believe; 
think. 

©Ictubtgcr,  w.,  -8,  — ,  creditor. 

gleirf),  like,  similar  {dat.);  \iCi^  ift 
tnlr  — ,  it  is  all  the  same  to  me, 
I  don't  care;  adv.y  at  once, 
presently,  directly;  co7tj.y  al- 
though; see  also  iDenn — , 

glcttcn,  St.,  \,,  to  glide,  slip. 

^torfe,  /.,  -n,  bell;  bell-like 
flower,  hare-bell,  blue-bell. 

mMXtlXXf  n.,  -^,  —,  little  bell. 

©liid,  ».,  -e^,  (good)  luck,  hap- 
piness. 

gliidUti^,  happy. 

glii^cn,  to  glow,  be  warm  (hot). 

gniibig,  gracious;  — e  'i^XdVi,  mad- 
am, ma'am. 

(SJolb,  «.,  -t^,  gold;  — ftiicf,  w., 
-e^,  -t,  gold-piece,  gold  coin. 

golben,  golden,  gold  {adj.). 

^fiii,  w.,  -e^,  -^er,  god;  God. 

©raB,  w.,  -e^,  -^er,  grave,  tomb. 

gralien,  st.,  to  dig. 

^raf,  w.,  -en,  -en,  count. 

%m^f  n.,  -e^,  -^er,  grass. 

^xm,  grey. 

^tcnjC,/.,  -n,  frontier,  boundary. 

firofi,  -er,  grofet,  large,  tall,  big, 
great;  ber  — e  3^^9^l^^  the  min- 
ute-hand, long  hand. 

©ro^muttcr,/,  -^^  grandmother. 

(^ro^pai^ap  w.,  -^,  -^,  grandpapa. 

©WfttJater,  w.,  -g,  ^,  grandfather. 

©rube,/.,  -n,  pit,  ditch. 


griin,  green. 

©riin,  «.,  -«,  green. 

©runb,  w.,  -e^,  -^e,  ground,  rea- 
son. 

griinbcn,  to  found. 

©ruft,  m.,  -c§,  -"-e,  greeting;  mit 
f)erjU(^en  ©rilfeen,  with  kind 
regards,  etc. 

grii^en,  to  greet,  salute;  bow  to. 

gut,  beffer,  be[t,  good;  kind;  adv., 
well,  very  well;  re(f)t  — ,  quite 
well;  —  tun,  to  benefit. 

©iite,  /.,  goodness,  kindliness. 

giitig,  kind. 

$aar,  «.,  -eg,  -t,  hair. 

^abe,/.,  belongings,  possessions. 

I^aben,  to  have;  possess;  rec^t  — , 
to  be  (in  the)  right. 

$abic^t,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  hawk. 

l^acfen,  to  hew,  chop,  cut. 

^afcr,  m.y  -g,  oats. 

laager,  lean,  gaunt. 

^alb,  adj.,  half;  —  fec^g,  half- 
past  five. 

^(ttftc,  /.,  -n,  half  {as  noun). 

^atto!  halloa! 

^alm,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  stalk,  blade. 

fatten,  St.,  to  hold;  deem;  —  fiir, 
consider  as. 

$anb,/.,  -^e,  hand. 

J^anbari&ett, /.,  -en,  needle- work, 
etc. 

^anbfrfjul^,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  glove. 

^anbtafd^c,  /.,  -n,  hand-bag, 
satchel. 

^angen,  st.,  to  hang. 

^an^,  m.,  -eng  (/row  ^o^anneg), 
Jack. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


287 


^art,  *cr,  hard. 

^anttlf  m.j  -c6,  -c,  breath; 
breeze. 

^au^t,  «.,  -e«,  ^cr,  head. 

^au^Jtftobt,/.,  -^e,  capital  (city). 

^auptftraftc,/.,  -n,  main  street. 

^am,  w.,  -eg,  -"^er,  house;  nad^ 
— C,  home;  ^u  — C,  at  home. 

-^ccr,  ».,  -eg,  -e,  army, 

licftig,  violent. 

]^et!  ho!  heigh! 

J^eimtncg,  m.,  -eg,  -c,  way  home; 
fid^  auf  ben  —  madden,  to  set 
out  (start)  for  home. 

^Ctnrtffl,  w.,  -g,  Henry. 

^ci'ratcn,  to  marry. 

l^cifcr,  hoarse. 

l^cift,  hot, 

fjti^tn,  St.,  to  be  called,  be 
named;  bid;  h)ie  ^cifet?  what  is 
the  name  of?;  i(^  ^ei^e  53.,  my 
name  is  B.;  bag  ^eifet,  that  is 
(to  say). 

l^citcr,  clear,  bright,  cheerful. 

^tVbf  w.,  -en,  -en,  hero,  cham- 
pion. 

J&elbenmut,  w.,  -eg,  heroism. 

^clbenmiittg,  heroic, 

l^ctfcn,  St.  {dot.),  to  help. 

l^efl(C),  bright,  clear. 

l^cr,  hither. 

^erabftiirjcn,  f.,  to  dash  down. 

^eraufbringen,  irr.,  to  bring  up. 

l^crauffommcn,  st.,  f.,  to  come  up, 
come  here. 

l^crau^fommcn,  st.,  f.,  to  come 

out. 
^icrau^ne^mcn,  st.,  to  take  out. 
l^crau^fc^trfcn,  to  send  out  (here). 
I^crauigft^teffcn,   5/.,   f.,  to  shoot 

forth  {intr.). 


l^crau^ftcttcn,  refl.,  to  turn  out. 

i|crbcirufen,  st.,  to  call  (to  one's 
self). 

^crbft,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  autumn. 

l^crein,  in  (towards);  — !  come 
in! 

l^creinbringcn,  irr.,  to  bring  in 
(here). 

I^crfommcn,  st.,  \,,  to  come  here. 

$crr,  w.,  -n,  -en,  master,  gentle- 
man, Mr.;  (bet)  —  !t?e()rer,  (the) 
teacher;  meinc  — cn,  gentlemen 
{voc). 

\)txxi\ii),  magnificent,  splendid. 

I^crfagcn,  to  recite,  repeat. 

]^cruntcrf(i|(agcn,  st.,  f.,  intr.y  to 
fall  down. 

^tx^,  n.,  -eng,  -en,  heart. 

^crjen^fiiitc,  /.,  kind-hearted- 
ness, kindliness. 

i!ftx^ix(tl,  hearty,  affectionate. 

Jpcrjog,  m.,  -eg,  -e  or  ^t,  duke. 

$CU,  n.j  -eg,  hay. 

I^CUtc,  to-day;  —  friil^,  this  morn- 
ing; —  morgen,  this  morning; 
—  abenb,  this  evening. 

l^eutjutage,  nowadays,  in  these 
days,  now. 

I^tcr,  here. 

I^ierjulanbe,  in  this  country. 

J^ilfc, /.,  help,  assistance. 

$immc(,  m.y  -g,  — ,  sky,  heaven. 

^tn,  thither,  along;  —  nnb  l^er, 
hither  and  thither,  to  and  fro, 
backwards  and  forwards. 

^tnabfa^rcn,  st.,  f.,  to  go  (drive, 
etc.)  down. 

I^inauf,  adv.,  up,  up  on. 

l^tnau^,  adv.,  out. 

I^inau^bcgcbcn,  st.,  refl.,  to  betake 
one's  self,  go. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


(jinau^fa^rcn,  5/.,  f.,  to  go  (drive, 

etc.)  out. 
]^inau)^gc^cn,  st.,  \,,  to  go  out. 
^inctn,  adv.,  in. 
I^incinfa^rcn,  st.,  \,,  to  go  (drive, 

etc.)  in  (into). 
l^incinf alien,    st.,    \,,    to   fall    in 

(into). 

l^metngc^cn,  5^.,  f.,  to  go  in  (into), 

enter. 

^incinft^trfcn,  to  send  in  (into). 

l)incinf^(ci(i^cn,  st.,  \.,  to  glide 
into,  steal  into,  come  over. 

l^mgcl^ett,  5/.,  f.,  to  go  (walk) 
along;  flir  \x6)  — ,  to  saunter 
along. 

l^tnfc^cn,  to  set  down;  refl.,  to  sit 
down. 

l^tntcr,  behind. 

i^mtcrge'^cn,  st.,  insep.,  to  de- 
ceive, cheat. 

^intcrgrunb,  w.,  -e6,  ^t,  back- 
ground. 

^tntertur,  /.,  -en,  back-door. 

^iftonf(^,  historical. 

^t^C,/.,  heat. 

^f^^,  p^er,  pc^ft,  high,  tall.     . 

]^0(i^atf)tung^tloIl,  very  respect- 
fully. 

1^0(!^betagt,  (far)  advanced  in 
years. 

I|(i(!^ft,  extremely,  very  highly. 

l^offcn,  to  hope. 

l^offentttd^,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  I 
(etc.)  hope. 

J^dfliti^,  polite. 

^of(ing,  w.,  -e^,  -e,  courtier. 

k'^¥ff;  -n,  height. 

l^ulb,  lovely,  sweet. 

i^olcn,  to  get,  fetch,  bring. 
5,  «.,  -eg,  -"-er,  wood. 


^ols^aucr,  m.,  -g,  — ,  wood-cutter. 

l^i^ren,  to  hear;  listen  to. 

^ii^ft^,  pretty,  nice. 

^uf|n,  «.,  -eg,  ^er,  fowl,  chicken. 

^unb,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  dog. 

^unbcrt,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  hundred  {as 
noun). 

Ijnnbcrtfaltig,  a  hundred-fold. 

hunger,  w.,  -g,  hunger. 

Ijungrig,  hungry. 

l^U^fen,  to  hop,  skip. 

^nif  m.,  -eg,  ^e,  hat. 

fitter,  w.,  -g,  — ,  keeper,  guard- 
ian. 

^iitte,/.,  -n,  hut,  cabin. 


3 
t*r  I. 

i^m,  (to,  for)  him. 

i^n,  him,  it. 

t^ncn,  (to,  for)  them. 

3t)ncn,  (to,  for)  you. 

i^r,  2  pL,  ye,  you. 

t^r,  pass,  adj.,  her;  their. 

3^r,  poss.  adj.,  your. 

i^XtXf  poss.  pron.,  hers;  theirs. 

S^rer,  poss.  pron.,  yours. 

i^rigc  (ber,  bte,  bag),  poss.  pron., 
hers;  theirs. 

S^rtge  (ber,  ble,  bag),  poss.  pron., 
yours. 

immcr,  always;  nO(^  — ,  still. 

imftanbe  fcin,  to  be  capable  (of), 
be  in  a  position  (to). 

in  (dat.,  ace),  in,  at,  into,  to. 

inbcm,  while. 

tnbeffcn,  meanwhile. 

Snbien,  n.,  -g,  India. 

inntg,  heartfelt;  —  Uebenb,  affec- 
tionate. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


289. 


gnfc'ft,  «.,  -c^,  -en,  insect. 
3nfcl, /.,  -n,  island. 
intcrcffa'nt,  interesting. 
Sntercffc,  w.,  -^,  -n,  interest. 
intcrefficrcn,  to  interest;  refl.,  to 

take  an  interest,  be  interested 

(in,  fur). 
irgcnb,  at  all,  etc. 
irgcnbnJO,  anywhere  (at  all);  fon[t 

— ,  anywhere  else. 
Qrtanb,  w.,  -^,  Ireland. 
irren,  refl.y  to  be  mistaken. 
Stattcn,  «.,  -8,  Italy. 
itaUcniftii,  Italian. 


3 

ja,  yes;  indeed,  really,  you  know, 

etc.;  tun  ^k  ba^  —  nic^t,  be 

sure  not  to  do  that. 
3a^r,  n.,  -t^,  -t,  year. 
Sa^re^jett, /.,  -en,  season. 
3anuar,  w.,  January. 
jatDO^l^   yes    (indeed),    certainly, 

Oh  yes. 
Jc,    every,    each;    —    ...    befto 

(umfo),   the    .    .    .    the    (before 

compar.)\  — nac^,  according  to. 
jcbcr,    each,    every,    every    one; 

ein  — ,  each,  every,  etc. 
jcbcrmann,  -^,  everybody,  every 

one. 
icbcrjctt,  always. 
jcbc^mal,  always. 
jemalS,  ever,  at  any  time. 
jemanb.    somebody,    some    one, 

anybody. 
jcner,  adj.,  that  (yonder);  pron., 

that,  that  one,  the  former,  he, 

etc. 


It^tf  now. 

je^tg^  adj.,  present. 

jjobeln^  to  yodel,  sing  in  the  style 

of  the  Swiss  mountaineers. 
^O'^flltna,/.,  -^,  Joanna,  Joan. 
inttj^tUf  to  shout  for  joy. 
^n%  m.,   July. 
jung,  -er,  young. 
Sunge,  m.,  -n,  -n  or  coll.,  -n6^ 

boy,  lad. 
^iingling,  m.,  -e^,  -c,  young  man^ 

youth. 
3u'm,  m.,  June. 


^affec,  m.,  -6,  coffee. 

^a^n,  m.,  -t^,  -^e,  row-boat,  skiff, 
canoe. 

^aifer,  m.,  -^,  — ,  emperor. 

^alabricn,  n.,  -^,  Calabria. 

^albS^taten,  m.,  -«,  — ,  roast 
veal. 

fait,  ^tx,  cold. 

Camera 'b,  m.,  -en,  -en,  comrade, 
companion. 

fftmmen,  to  comb. 

£am^f,  m.,  -c6,  ^t,  combat,  con- 
flict. 

fftmpfen,  to  fight. 

^ampfcnb(cr),  adj.  suhst.,  com- 
batant. 

^am|)fcr,  m.,  -6,  — ,  fighter,  com- 
batant. 

tam^fnJUt,/.,  fury  of  battle. 

^anjlcr,  m.,  -^,  — ,  chancellor. 

^art,  m.,  -^,  Charles. 

^artoffel, /.,  -n,  potato. 
^(tfe,  m.,  -^,  — ,  cheese. 
faufcn,  to  buy. 


290 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


^aufmann,  m.,  -C«,  -leute,  mer- 
chant. 

laum,  scarcely,  hardly. 

fcin,  no,  not  a,  not  any. 

feincr,  no  one,  nobody. 

better,  w.,  -g,  —,  cellar. 

^ellncr,  w.,  -^,  — ,  waiter. 

fctincn,  irr.j  to  know,  be  ac- 
quainted with. 

fcntern,  f.,  to  capsize. 

£cffel,  w.,  -9>,  —,  kettle. 

£tnb,  w.,  -t^,  -it,  child. 

^inberftimme,/.,  -n,  child's  voice. 

^inhc^\)tx^,     w.,    -en^,     child's 

heart. 
^irrfllcin,  w.,  -«,  — ,  little  church. 
^irfc^C,/.,  -n,  cherry. 
fta^en^  to  complain. 
tlax,  clear,  bright;  tm  — en  fcin, 

to  be  clear,  have  made  up  one's 

mind. 
2iata,f.,  -«,  Clara. 
^Itffe,/.,  -n,  class. 
^latJie'r,   «.,   -C^,   -t,   piano;    — 

fpteten,  to  play  the  piano. 
^Icc,  m.,  -g,  clover. 
^Icib,    w.,    -e^,    -tX,    dress;    />/., 

dresses,  clothes. 
Ilctbcn,   to   dress;   refi.j   to   dress 

(one's  self). 
!lein,  small,  little;  bcr  — C  S^W^f 

the  short  hand,  hour-hand. 
^Uma,  n.,  -g,  ^limata,  climate. 
f  linden,  st.,  to  sound,  resound. 
ilop^Ctlf  to  knock,   clap,   pat;   cS 

flopft,  there  is  a  knock,  some- 
body is  knocking. 
flu^;  ^n,  intelligent,  clever. 
Slnabe,  w.,  -n,  -n,  boy,  lad. 
^nec^t,  m.y  -t^,  -c,  man-servant, 

laborer,  hired-man,  man. 


lie,  ».,  -e^,  -t,  knee. 
I,  m.f  -c^,  ^t,  cook. 

:,  m.y  -g,  — ,  trunk. 
[,  w.,  -e^,  cabbage. 

^oinm^n^f  w.,  Columbus. 

fommcn,  st.,  f.,  to  come;  toit 
fommt  e^,  bafe?  how  is  it  that  ?; 
um6  !^eben  — ,  to  lose  one's  life, 
perish. 

^iJnig,  w.,  -e«,  -c,  king. 

^iJnigtn,/.,  -nen,  queen. 

Wmglit^,  royal. 

^ilmflrei(^,  m.,  -c«,  -C,  king- 
dom. 

li^nntn,  irr.,  mod.  aux.y  to  be  able, 
can,  etc.;  to  know,  be  versed 
in,  know  how  to. 

^on^e'rt,  «.,  -t^,  -t,  concert. 

^p|lf,  w.,  -e^,  ^c,  head. 

^iipfleln,  w.,  -g,  — ,  little  head. 

^o^ff timers,  w.,  -c§,  -en  (w5w- 
fl//>'  ^/.),  headache. 

^orB,  w.,  -e^,  -"-e,  basket. 

foften,  to  cost. 

foftfpiettg,  costly,  expensive. 

^raft,/.,  -^e,  strength,  force. 

^rattc,/.,  -n,  claw,  talon. 

(ranf,  ^er,  ill,  sick;  bet  ^ranfc,  the 
sick  man,  patient. 

^tanf^eit,  /.,  -en,  illness,  sick- 
ness. 

^rctbc,/.,  chalk. 

^ricg,  w.,  -e^,  -e,  war. 

^ronijrtnj,  w.,  -en,  -en,  crown- 
prince. 

^Vi6)tff.y  -n,  kitchen. 

^ugel,/.,  -n,  bullet. 

^u^,/.,  ^e,  cow. 

fit^l,  cool. 

^itnftler,  w.,  -«,  — ,  artist. 

^upfcrmunse,/.,  -n,  copper  coin. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


291 


^ur^,    w.,    -C«,    -C,    rate    of    ex- 

chaxige. 
furs,  -^^^f  short. 
Sliiftc,/.,  -n,  coast,  shore. 
^utfc^Ct,  w.,  -«,  — ,  coachman, 

driver,  cabman. 


s 


Ittt^cln,  to  smile. 

la(i}tn,  to  laugh. 

(ftc^crltc^,  ridiculous,  absurd. 

Sad^S,  w.,  -e^,  -c,  salmon. 

laben,  st.,  to  invite;  gu  3:ifc^  — ,  to 
invite  to  dinner. 

2aben,  w.,  -g,  -«■,  shop,  store. 

2anb,  «.,  -C§,  ^er,  land,  country; 
soil;  auf  bent  — t,  in  the  coun- 
try; auf^  —  S^^cti,  to  go  to  the 
country. 

(anbcn,  f.,  to  land. 

Sanb^aui^,  «.,  -C§,  -"-cr,  country- 
house. 

Sanbfartc, /.,  -n,  map. 

Sanbfcliaft, /.,  -en,  landscape. 

Sanb^mann,  w.,  -e^,  -leute,  coun- 
tryman; n)a^  flir  ein  —  finb  (Sic? 
what  countryman  are  you? 

lan^f  ^tv,  adj.,  long. 

lang(e),  -^er,  adv.,  long,  a  long 
time,  for  a  long  time;  fo  — ,  as 
long  as. 

IttngS  (gen.,  dat.y  or  ace),  along. 

tangfam,  slow. 

iangft;  fd^on  — ,  long  ago. 

Sarm,  w.,  -e^,  noise. 

laffcn,  St.,  mod.  aux.,  to  let,  leave; 
cause  to  be  (done),  have 
(done);  mac^cn  — ,  to  have 
made. 


Satcmc,  /.,  -n,  lantern,  stree't- 
lamp. 

2aufburf(ifte,  w.,  -n,  -n,  errand- 
boy. 

taufen,  st.,  f.,  t).,  to  run;  hasten. 

Saune,  /.,  -n,  humor,  temper, 
whim. 

iant,  loud;  adv.,  aloud. 

tauten,  to  sound;  run,  read,  be. 

(ftutcn,  to  ring. 

Icbcn,  to  live. 

Scben,  n.,  -^,  life;  um«  —  fommen, 
to  lose  one's  life,  perish. 

(cbc'nbig,  living. 

Scbcn^ja^r,  «.,  -e«,  -t,  year  (of 
life). 

Scbcn^UJCtfc,  /.,  -n,  manner  of 
life. 

(cb^aft,  lively,  exciting. 

UtX,  empty. 

(cgcn,  to  lay,  put. 

Ic^ncn,  to  lean. 

Ic^rcn,  to  teach. 

Scorer,  m.,  -^,  — ,  teacher,  mas- 
ter. 

Sc^rcrtn, /.,  -nen,  teacher  (/.). 

Scibfttst,  m.,  -t^,  ^t,  physician- 
in-ordinary. 

Uid^i,  light,  easy,  slight. 

2cib,  n.,  -c^,  grief,  sorrow. 

ktb  tun,  impers.  (dai.),  to  be 
sorry;  e«  tut  ntlr  — ,  I  am 
sorry. 

Icibcn,  St.,  to  suffer,  endure. 

(cibcr,  unfortunately. 

lei^cn,  St.,  to  lend. 

Scrtfte,/.,  -n,  lark,  skylark. 

Icrncn,  to  learn,  study. 

Icfcn,  5^,  to  read. 

Sefcftiirf,  «.,  -c^,  -e,  extract  for 
reading. 


292 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


(c^t,  last;  — crcr,  (the)  latter. 

Icuc^tcn,  to  shine. 

Scute,  ply  people. 

ticb,  dear. 

Siebe, /.,  love. 

Ucbcn,  to  love. 

licber,  comp.  of  gem,  rather;  — 
ef[en,  to  prefer  (to  eat). 

Sieb,  w.,  -e^,  -er,  song. 

Uecjcn,  St.,  to  lie,  be  situated, 
be. 

Sicfe,/.,  Lizzie. 

Siltc,/.,  -n,  lily. 

Sinbe, /.,  -n,  lime-tree,  linden. 

(inf,  left. 

ImU,  on  the  (to  the)  left. 

loben,  to  praise. 

^i>^,  n.y  -t^,  ^er,  hole,  pit. 

Udtm,  to  loosen. 

Siiffct,  w.,  -^f  — ,  spoon. 

!So!^n,  m.,  -t^,  reward. 

(of en,  to  buy,  get,  take  (ticket). 

Sotfe,  w.,  -n,  -n,  pilot. 

Siittie,  w.,  -n,  -n,  lion. 

Sttftf/,  -^e,  air. 

Sttft,  /.,  -^e,  desire,  inclination, 
pleasure;  —  t)aben,  to  have  a 
mind  to,  want  to,  wish  to. 

Suftgatten,  w.,  -g,  •«^,  pleasure- 
garden,  park. 

lufttg,  gay,  merry. 

Suftf^iel,  w.,  -e^,  -t,  comedy. 


m.  {see  mati). 

mat^eHf  to  make,  do;  ettte  Jrcube 
— ,  to  give  pleasure,  please; 
etnen  (SpajierQang  — ,  to  take 
(go  for)    a   walk;   fic!^   auf  ben 


^elmtDeg  — ,  to  set  out  (start) 
for  home;  \\6)  an  ettDtt^  — ,  to 
set  about  anything;  tnad^C, 
ha^  bu  fortfommft,  be  off  with 
you,  begone. 

^aci^t,  /.,  ^t,  power,  might. 

mitcl^tig  (gen.),  master  of. 

ajlabc^en,  n.,  -^,  —,  girl. 

50'i<l9b,  /.,  -^e,  maid(-servant). 

SRai,  w.,  May. 

SJlatenluft, /.,  ^e,  air  of  May. 

9Jlai^,  m.,  -e^,  maize,  Indian 
corn;  — mel^l,  n.,-t^,  Indian 
meal,  corn- meal;  — pubblng, 
m.,  -^,  -^,  Indian  meal  pud- 
ding. 

SfJlaieftttt,/.,  -en,  majesty. 

Wlaif  n.,  time  (repeated);  ntlt 
einem  — ,  all  at  once;  4  —  4 
mad^t  16,  4  times  4  is  16. 

ntalen,  to  paint. 

aWaler,  w.,  -^,  —,  painter. 
man,  indef.  pron.,  one,  we,  you, 

they,  people,  etc. 
man(^,  many  a,  many. 
manc^mat,  often,  frequently. 
SJlann,  m.,  -t^,  ^tx,  man. 

9Jlannf(!^aft, /.,  -en,  crew. 
Wlaniti,  w.,  -«,  ^,  cloak. 
Max^m,   n.y   -^,   — ,   fairy-tale, 

story. 

aJlarie',/.,  -ne,  Mary. 

aWarf,/.,  mark  (wowe>');  Tl*  3. — , 

(=  brei  Waxt)  three  marks. 
SJJarf, /.,  -en,  march  (district). 
2)larft,   w.,  -eg,  "e,  market;   auf 

ben  —  ge^en,  st.,  f.,  to  go  to  (the) 

market. 
Wlax^,  w.,  March. 
SJlafc^ine, /.,  -n,  machine. 
ajlatrofe,  w.,  -n,  -n,  sailor. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


293 


SWau^,  /.,  ^t,  mouse. 

Wthi^Vn,/.,  medicine. 

SJlccr,  w.,  -e^,  -e,  sea. 

tttel^r,  more;  nid^t  — ,  no  more,  no 
longer,  not  now. 

me^rcrc,  several. 

mc^rmali^,  several  times. 

aJlcilc,/.,  -n,  league. 

tttcin,  poss.  adj.,  my. 

ttlCtncn,  to  mean,  think,  express 
I  the  opinion  (that),  refer  to. 

p  mcin(cr),  pers.  pron.,  of  me. 

incinct,  poss.  pron.,  mine. 

mcintge  (ber,  Me,  ba6),  poss.  pron., 
mine;  bic  SD^einigen,  my  family, 
etc.;  ha^  SO^einige  tun,  to  do  my 
share,  do  what  I  can. 

tncift,  most. 

mciftcn^,  mostly,  for  the  most 
part. 

SOlciftcr,  m.,  -§,  — ,  master. 

melben^  to  announce;  refl.,  to 
apply  (for  a  situation). 

Wltnqtf  /.,  -n,  multitude,  great 
many. 

Mtn^^,  m.,  -en,  -en,  man  (human 
being),  person;  feitl  — ,  no- 
body, no  one;  pi.,  people. 

9Wcnf(^CttIcben,  w.,  -«,  — ,  (hu- 
man) life. 

mcnfc^Uc!^,  human. 

mcrfcn,  to  mark,  note,  perceive. 

Wlcffcr,  «.,  -«,  — ,  knife. 

SSltitX,  m.  or  n.y  -g,  — ,  metre. 

mi^f  me. 

mictcn,  to  hire,  engage. 

9JlU(i^,/.,  milk. 

TOttio'n, /.,  -en,  million. 

SJltni'fter,  m.,  -g,  — ,  minister 
(political). 

tninui^,  minus. 


aWinutc, /.,  -n,  minute. 

TOnutcnjeigcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  minute- 
hand,  long  hand. 

mir,  (to,  for)  me. 

mit  (dat.),  with,  along  with;  by 
(in  multiplication). 

mitl^nngen,  irr.,  to  bring  with 

(one),  bring  along. 
mitfa^rcn,  st.,  f.,  to  go  (drive, 

etc.)  with;  go  along  (with). 

mitgc^cn,  st.,  f.,  to  go  with,  go 
along  (with). 

mitfommcn,  st.,  f.,  to  come  (go) 
with  one,  come  (go)  along. 

mttnclfmcn,  st.,  to  take  with  (one), 
take  along. 

mitreifctt,  f.,  to  travel  (go)  with, 
come  (go)  along  (with). 

9Jlitrcifcnb(er),  adj.  subst.,  fellow- 
traveler. 

mitfud^Ctt,  to  look  for  along  with 
others. 

SDltttag,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  midday, 
noon;  gu  —  effen,  to  dine. 

SOltttagi^cffcn,  n.,  -«,  dinner. 

^xttt,  /.,  middle,  centre. 

mtttcikn  (dat.),  to  inform. 

ajlittctlung,  /.,  -en,  communica- 
tion, information. 

Wxitti,  n.,  -g,  — ,  mean(s). 

Wliiicxnatiii,  /.,  -^e,  midnight. 

aWittnJorff,  m.,  -«,  -e,  Wednesday. 

m<)gen,  irr.,  mod.  aux.,  may,  like, 
etc.;  id^  mag  bag  nid^t^  I  do  not 
like  that;  id^  ntijd^tc  (gem),  I 
should  like  to. 

miigUrff,  possible. 

Wlo'natf  m.,  -eg,  -c,  month. 

^onb,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  moon. 

501ontag,  m.,  -g,  -e,  Monday. 

aWorgen,    m.,    -g,    — ,    morning; 


294 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


ht^  — «,  morgen^,  in  the  morn- 
ing; tjeutc  (geftem)  tnorgen,  this 
(yesterday)  morning. 

morgcn,  to-morrow;  —  friil^,  to- 
morrow morning. 

Wloioxifooif  n.,  -eg,  -bfite  or 
-boote,  motor-boat. 

miibe,  tired,  fatigued. 

multt^jn^iercn,  to  multiply. 

9Jlunrf|Cn,  w.,  -^,  Munich. 

aUiinjc,/.,  -n,  coin. 

aUufc'um,  «.,  -g,  9JJufecn,  mu- 
seum. 

aJluflX/.,  music. 

SJiu^fatnuftr  /.,  ^c,  nutmeg. 

muffen,  irr.,  mod.  aux.,  to  be 
obliged  to,  be  forced  to,  have 
to,  must. 

WMSitXf  «.,  -g,  — ,  pattern, 
sample. 

abutter,/.,  ^,  mother. 

Wluttcrd^cn,  w.,  -«,  — ,  mother 
(dear). 

SJlil^c,/.,  -n,  cap. 


91 

tta!  well!  now! 

Xid^  {dat.),  after,  to,  according 
to;  —  $aufc,  home;  btX  3ug  — 
SB,,  the  train  for  B. 

^ati^itaXf  w.,  -g,  -n,  neighbor. 

tiat^bcm,  C(7wy.,  after. 

S^arfffolgcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  successor. 

na(i^gelben,  st.,  to  yield,  give  way. 

tta(!^^er^  afterwards,  thereupon. 

Slat^mittag,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  after- 
noon; beg  — g,  in  the  afternoon. 

^atijxid^if  f.y  -en,  news. 

nati^fe^en,  5^,  to  look,  search. 


na<t^[x^tn,  5/.,  to  stay  in  (as  pun- 
ishment, after  school),  be  de- 
tained. 

n(l(!^ft,  next. 

Slat^t,/.,  ^t,  night. 

S^at^ttfc^,  w.,  -eg,  dessert. 

^a(i\tixt'bf  n.,  -eg,  -er,  evensong. 

S^laget,  w.,  -g,  ^,  nail. 

nai|(c),  ^,  nad)ft,  near. 

9la^rung,  /.,  -en,  nourishment, 
food. 

Slamc,  w.,  -ng,  -n,  name. 

namlid^,  namely,  that  is  to  say. 

naft,  ^er,  wet. 

91attDnal=^cnfma(,  «.,  -g,  -^er, 
national-monument. 

naturlitfl,  natural;  adv.j  natur- 
ally, of  course. 

^thcl,  m.,  -g,  — ,  fog,  mist. 

ncbcn  {dat.f  ace),  near,  by,  be- 
side. 

nefienan,  near  by,  next  door. 

ne^mcn,  st.,  to  take;  5lbf(^ieb  — , 
to  take  leave,  say  good-bye. 

nctn,  no. 

ncnnen,  irr.,  to  name;  tell;  iDic 
nennt  man  biefe  (Strafe?  what 
is  the  name  of  this  street? 

neu,  new. 

ntnixdif  lately,  the  other  day. 

nic^t,  not;  —  me^r,  no  longer, 
not  now;  noc^  — ,  not  yet;  gar 
— ,  not  at  all;  @le  finb  miibc, 
—  IDal^r?  you  are  tired,  are 
you  not? 

nxd^t^,  nothing. 

^xddmixn^t,  /.,  -n,  nickel  coin. 

nic,  never;  nod)  — ,  never  yet. 

niebcrtcgcn,  to  lay  down,  resign, 

ntemanb,  nobody,  no  one,  no 
person,  not  anybody,  etc. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


295 


^itoian^,  w.,  Nicholas* 
mrgcnb()§),  nowhere. 
^li^tf  f.)  -n,  water-sprite,  nixie. 
nodi,   still,   yet,   as  yet,   etc.;  — 
nid^t,  not  yet;  —  immcr,  still; 

—  ein,  one  more,  another;  — 
QCftcrn,  no  later  than  yester- 
day, only  yesterday;  —  einmd, 
once  more,  again;  —  cben, 
just,  barely ;  —  nie,  never  yet. 

9lorb=5(fnfa,  «.,  -«,  North  Africa. 
S'lorbcn,  m.j  -3  and  — ,  north. 
SRorbfee, /.,  North  Sea,   German 

Ocean. 
Slornjegcn,  «.,  -^,  Norway. 
^otf  f.y  ^t,  need,  necessity. 
nMgf  necessary,  needful. 
S^iotJCmficr,  m.,  November. 
nun,  now;  well. 
nur,  only,  just;  anyway. 
nit^lic^,  useful. 

O 

0!  O!  oh! 

o(,  whether,  if. 

oben,  at  the  top,  above;  upstairs; 

—  barauf,  upon  it. 
obgteid^r  although,  though. 
Obig,  above,  adj, 

Oh\if  n.y  -e«,  fruit  (of  garden  or 
orchard). 

Obftboum,  w.,  -c«,  ^t,  fruit-tree. 

£)^^{t)f  m.y  -(c)n,  -(c)n,  ox. 

&t>tf  desolate,  dreary. 

obcr,  or. 

Dfcn,  m.y  ~^,  ^,  stove. 

Offistc'r,  m.y  -t^,  -e,  officer 
{milit.). 

Dffljicrigmantcl,  m.,  -^,  ^,  offi- 
cer's cloak. 


oft,  often,  frequently. 

oftmali^,  often. 

O^ne  {acc.)y  without. 

O^r,  n.y  -cd,  -en,  ear. 

O^rfctgc,/.,  -n,  box  on  the  ear. 

Oftubcr,  m.y  October. 

Omntbui^,  m.y  —,  -ffe,  omnibus. 

Onfcl,  m.y  -^,  —,  uncle. 

Ontario,  w.,  -g,  Lake  Ontario. 

O^Jfcr,  n.y  -^,  — ,  sacrifice. 

orbentlic^,  proper. 

Ort,  m.y  -eg,  -e  and  ^tx,  place, 
spot. 

Often,  m.y  -g  and  — ,  east. 

Oftcm,  Easter. 

6fterret(ft,  «.,  -«,  Austria. 

6fterteic^=Ungam,  w.,  -«,  Austria- 
Hungary. 

iJfterrcid^ifdji,  Austrian. 

i^ftUd^,  eastern. 

Oftfcc,/.,  Baltic. 


$aar,  «.,  -C3,  -c,  pair,  couple; 
cin  paar,  a  few;  ein  paarmal, 
several  times. 

pacfen,  to  pack;  seize. 

^a^ic'r,  n.y  -e«,  -t,  paper. 

$a|)tergelb,  «.,  -e^,  paper-money. 

^a^ierforb,  m.,  -e^,  ^t,  waste- 
basket. 

^arabc,/.,  -n,  parade. 

^ari'i^,  «.,  Paris. 

$arf,  m.y  -t^,  -e  or  -g,  park. 

^attc'nt,  m.y  -en,  -en,  patient. 

^aufe, /.,  -n,  pause;  recess. 

perflft^,  Persian. 

^etctigburg,  «.,  -«,  St.  Peters- 
burg. 


296 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


^farrcr,  w.,  -«,  — ,  clergyman, 
minister. 

:pfctlf(^nett,  swift  as  an  arrow. 

^Pfennig,  m.,  -e«,  -e,  'pfennig' 
(to (3  P^-^t  of  a  mark). 

^fcrb,  n.,  -e^,  -t,  horse. 

:pflan5cti,  to  plant. 

:pftaftern,  to  pave. 

:pflcgen,  to  tend,  nurse. 

tPflic^t,/.,  -en,  duty. 

:pf(it^tQetrcu,  faithful  to  duty. 

p^Mcn,  to  pick,  pluck,  gather. 

:pflugen,  to  plough. 

tPfunb,  n.,  -e^,  -e,  pound. 

$^i(ofo'^^,  w.,  -en,  -en,  philoso- 
pher. 

^fjf>t0^xapi)W  f  /.,  -n,  photo- 
graph. 

mWlfn  physics. 

5|Sla^,  w.,  -e^,  -"-e,  place,  seat; 
public  place,  square. 

:pIii^Uc^,  sudden. 

:|j(u^,  plus. 

^ortemonnate  [pr.  portmona'], »., 
-6,  -^,  purse,  pocket-book. 

iprd^tig,  splendid,  magnificent, 
fine. 

^ret!^,  m.,  -e§,  -e,  price;  prize. 

:prcifcn,  5^,  to  praise,  extol. 

^xm^t,  m.,  -n,  -n,  Prussian 
(jtoun). 

^reu^en,  «.,  -«,  Prussia. 

ipreuftifc^,  Prussian  (adj.). 

^rofeffor,  m.,  -g,  ^rofeffo'rcn,  pro- 
fessor. 

?Progta'mm,  «.,  -e^,  -e,  pro- 
gramme. 

^rofldmieren,  to  proclaim. 

!|Srot)ia'nt,  m.,  -e§,  provisions. 

^Subbing,  m.,  -6,  -g,  pudding. 

^nl^f  w.,  -eg,  -e,  pulse. 


^nU^tiila^f  m.y  -e8,  ^e,  pulsation, 

pulse-beat. 
$unft,  m.,  -e«,  -C,  point;  —  10 

U^r,  at  ten  o'clock  precisely, 
piinftlit^,  punctual. 
^nppt,/.,  -n,  doll. 

a 

qn'ditn,  to  torment,  vex. 
Cluell,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  spring,   foun- 
tain. 
Ouctte,/.,  -n,  spring,  fountain. 


9flanun!cl,  /.,  -n,  crowfoot,  but- 
tercup. 

rafieren,  to  shave. 

fftat,  w.,  -eg,  advice. 

ratcn,  5^.  (dat.),  to  advise. 

fRaif^an^,  n.,  -eg,  -^er,  town-hall, 
city-hall. 

Cfiiitfel,  «.,  -g,  — ,  riddle. 

raut^cn,  to  smoke. 

taufc^en,  to  murmur,  gurgle. 

rcc^nen,  to  reckon. 

[Rcc^nung, /.,  -en,  bill,  account. 

rec^t,  right;  —  gern(e),  very 
gladly;  —  gut,  quite  well;  — 
geben,  to  admit;  —  l^aben,  to 
be  (in  the)  right. 

XC^t§,  on  the  (to  the)  right. 

reben,  to  speak,  talk. 

fRthtn^axi,  /.,  -en,  phrase,  ex- 
pression. 

S^iegctt,  m.,  -g,  rain. 

9flegenf(^trm,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  um- 
brella. 

JRcgCttJCtt,/.,  -en,  rainy  weather. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


297 


9flegtcrung,  /.,  -en,  government, 
rule;  Utlter  ber  — ,  in  the  reign. 

rcgncn,  to  rain. 

rctd^,  rich. 

9flei(^,  «.,  -eg,  -t,  empire,  king- 
dom. 

rctrffcn,  to  pass,  hand. 

Oicic^^ftabt,  /.,  ^t,  imperial  city. 

rcif,  ripe. 

9fici^C,/.,  -n,  rank,  row,  turn;  id^ 
fomme  an  bic  — ,  it  is  my  turn; 
ber  —  nac^,  in  turn. 

rein,  clean,  pure. 

tCtnlic^,  cleanly,  neat,  tidy. 

tRcifc,  /.,  -n,  journey,  voyage, 
trip;  eine  —  madden,  to  take 
(go  on)  a  journey. 

tcifen,  f.,  1^.,  to  travel,  journey, 
go;  go  (away),  set  out  (on  a 
journey). 

9'leifcnb(er),  adj.  subst,,  traveler. 

retjcnb,  charming. 

^ttpnhWt,  /.,  -en,  republic. 

ditpnUitantt,  m.,  -g,  — ,  repub- 
lican. 

fRcftauratb'n, /.,  -en,  restaurant. 

rcttcn,  to  save,  rescue. 

9tt\)ointxo'n,  /.,  -en,  revolution. 

ffitt)0'it)tt,  m.,  -^,  — ,  revolver. 

ffit^tpi,  n.,  -e^,  -e,  recipe,  pre- 
scription. 

9fl^cin,  w.,  -e«,  the  (river)  Rhine. 

Oi^cmttJCm,  m.,  -e^,  -e,  Rhenish 
wine,  hock. 

ri(i|ti0,  right,  correct;  —  Qe^en,  to 
be  right,  correct  {of  time- piece). 

9ltnbcrBratcn,  m.,  -g,  — ,  roast 

of  beef. 
Sling,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  ring. 
tinnen,  st.j  f.,  to  flow,  run,  pass 

by. 


DlUtcrfti^aft,/.,  knighthood. 
Oiorf,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  coat. 
iRotte,/.,  -n,  part  {theat.). 
JRom,  «.,  -g,  Rome. 
Sfloma'n,  w.,  -eg,  -t,  romance, 

novel. 
^«»fCf/,  -tt/  rose. 
9flofmc,/.,  -n,  raisin. 
OiiJj^lcin,  w.,  -g,  — ,  little  rose. 
rot,  ^er,  red. 
IRottocin,  w.,  -eg,  -c,  red   wine, 

claret. 
gfliiftc,/.,  -n,  turnip. 
9luden,  m.,  -g,  — ,  back. 
[Ritrffi^,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  back-seat. 
9fluf,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  call,  shout,  cry. 
rufen,  st.,  to  call,  cry  out. 
Siu^e,/.,  rest,  repose. 
tU^cn,  to  rest,  repose. 
rulfig,  quiet,  calm. 
runb,  round. 

9^unbe,  /.,  -n,  round,  circuit. 
Dfiuffe,  m.,  -n,  -n,  Russian  (noun), 
tRuftlanb,  w.,  -g,  Russia. 


^^  {see  t§). 

<Baaif  m.,  -eg,  ©ale,  hall. 

@aat,/.,  -en,  seed,  sowing,  green- 
crop. 

(Bac^e,  /.,  -n,  thing,  matter, 
affair. 

(Bac^fcn,  w.,  -g,  Saxony. 

©iiemann,  m.,  -eg,  -^er,  sower. 

fdcn,  to  sow. 

fagcn,  to  say,  tell. 

(Balg,  w.,  -eg,  -c,  salt. 

Samc(tt),  w.,  -ng,  -n,  seed. 

fomtUti^,  all  {collectively). 

©amjgtag,  w.,  -g,  -e,  Saturday. 


298 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


fanft,  -^er,  soft,  sweet. 

fatt,  satisfied,  sated. 

@a^,  m.,  -t^,  ^t,  sentence. 

©d^ati^tcl,  /.,  -n,  box  {of  paper  or 
card-hoard). 

@c^abc(n),  w.,  -n(^),  (Sc^abeti  or 
©d^ciben,  damage,  harm. 

@(^abci,  w.,  -^,  — ,  skull. 

Sd^af^  w.,  -e6,  ~t,  sheep. 

(Sc^djlein,  w.,  -g,  — ,  little  sheep, 
lamb. 

©(i^alc,/.,  -n,  shell. 

((j^attcn,  to  resound. 

<B^aiittf  m.,  -g,  — ,  wicket, 
ticket-office. 

(Bti^altla^Xf  n.,  -t^,  -t,  leap- 
year. 

fd^iimen,  refl.,  to  be  ashamed. 

f^arf,  ^er,  sharp. 

@rf|arta(!^,  m.,  -g,  scarlet. 

Sdfiattcn,  w.,  -g,  shade,  shadow. 

f^aucn,  to  look,  gaze;  see. 

8(^aufcnftcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  (show-) 
window. 

©(^auflJicI,  w.,  -e^,  -e,  play, 
drama. 

©ci^auf^tctcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  actor. 

©(^aufpiclerin, /.,  -nen,  actress. 

@^cif,  w.,  -^,  -^,  sheik. 

©C^ettt,  m.,  -e^,  -e,  note,  bank- 
note. 

fd^cincn,  st.^  to  shine;  seem. 

ft^ettem,  f.,  to  be  wrecked. 

^^tnitXif  to  give,  make  a  present 
of,  present. 

ft^idcn,  to  send. 

@(^iff,  w.,  -eg,  -c,  ship;  gu  — ,  on 
ship,  by  ship, 

SWbttJad^e, /.,  -n,  sentry. 

@^(arf|t,  /.,  -en,  battle. 

fd^lafCtt,  St.,  to  sleep. 


Sd^Iafmagcn,  w.,  -g,  — ,  sleeping- 
car. 

©c^lafsimmer,  «.,  -«,  — ,  bed- 
room. 

fd^lagcn,  5/.,  to  strike. 

fc^led^t,  bad,  poor;  fonft  gel^t  eg  bir 
—  {see  gcifcn). 

fd^leid^en,  5^.,  f.,  to  creep,  sneak. 

ft^kifen,  5/.,  to  grind. 

©(i^lcifftcin,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  grind- 
stone. 

fci^Iimm,  bad. 

Sc^lingel,  w.,  -g,  — ,  rogue,  ras- 
cal. 

©t^Uttcnfa^rt, /.,  -en,  sleigh-ride 
(drive);  ettte  —  maiden,  to  take 
(go  for)  a  sleigh-ride. 

©rffUttfd^U]^,  w.,  -eg,  ~e,  skate;  — 
kufen,  St.,  f.,  1^.,  to  skate. 

Sc^tuft,  «.,  -eg,  ^tx,  castle,  palace. 

Srf|(ofifrcif|Ctt,  /.  {proper  name  = 
precincts  of  the  palace). 

©(i|(oft^ta^,  w.,  -eg,  -^e,  castle- 
square. 

S^tu^,  w.,  -eg,  -"-e,  conclusion, 
ending. 

fc^mccfen,  to  taste;  bag  fd^medft 
mtr,  I  like  (the  taste  of)  that. 

f^metrfietn  {dat.),  to  flatter. 

©(^^mers,  w.,  -eg,  -en,  pain,  grief. 

©(fimettcrUng,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  butter- 
fly. 

©rfimicb,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  (black-) 
smith. 

S^mtcbc,/.,  -n,  smithy,  forge. 

f(!^mtcgen,  refl.,  to  nestle;  wind, 
meander. 

Sti^ttee,  m.,  -g,  snow. 

ft^nctbcn,  5/.,  to  cut. 

Srfineibcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  tailor. 

fci^ttetcn,  to  snow. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


299 


ft^nett,  quick,  rapid. 

©C^ncttjug,  m.y  -t^,  ^t,  express 
train. 

(Scftofolabc,/.,  chocolate;  —  *^ub* 
bing,  m.j  -g,  -^,  chocolate  pud- 
ding. 

\6)mt  already,  not  later  than,  as 
early  as. 

\6)^n,  beautiful,  handsome,  fine; 
adv.,  well,  very  well. 

©(^pmftcttt,  w.,  -c«,  -t,  chimney. 

©C^Otttanb,  w.,  -%,  Scotland. 

\^Xtdi\6),  dreadful,  terrible. 

fti^rcibcn,  st.,  to  write. 

(5c^|tcibtif(^,  m.,  -t^,  -t,  writing- 
table,  desk,  writing-desk. 

©C^ublabc,/.,  -n,  drawer. 

(Bc^ulc,  /.,  -n,  school,  school- 
house. 

©d^iiler,  w.,  -g,  — ,  pupil,  scholar. 

©(ftutglorfc, /.,  -n,  school-bell. 

©d^ul^OUi^,  «.,  -C^,  -^er,  school- 
house,  school. 

Sti^ulfamcrab,  w.,  -en,  -en, 
school-mate,  school-fellow. 

<Sc^u(ftubc,/.,  -n,  school-room. 

(©(gutter,  /.,  -n,  shoulder. 

©d^ul^immer,  w.,  -«,  — ,  school- 
room. 

©(^iiffcl,/.,  -n,  dish,  platter. 

@({|U^,  w.,  -c^,  shelter,  protec- 
tion. 

fci^mad^,  ^cr,  weak. 

fc^tDarj,  -^er,  black. 

[(i^nieben^  to  hover,  soar. 

ft^tocigcn,  5^,  to  be  (keep) 
silent. 

©d^Wcis,/.,  Switzerland. 

\^tOtXf  heavy;  hard,  difficult, 
serious. 

if  «.,  -C^,  -cr,  sword. 


©(i^tocrtgcHirr,  «.,  -e^,  clashing 
of  swords. 

©(^tticfter, /.,  -n,  sister. 

ft^toimmcn,  st.,  f.,  1^.,  to  swim. 

fd^ttJtngen,  st.,  to  swing,  brandish. 

ft^hJiircn,  5^.,  to  swear. 

©c^ttiur,  w.,  -e^,  -"^e,  oath. 

fCfftStfifftitig,  sixty-fold. 

(Sec,  w.,  -c^,  -(e)ii,  lake. 

©CCfufte,/.,  -n,  sea-coast. 

(5cge(,  «.,  -6,  — ,  sail. 

©cgclfc^iff,  w.,  -eg,  -c,  sailing- 
vessel,  ship. 

@egen,  w.,  -g,  blessing,  benedic- 
tion. 

fegnen,  to  bless. 

fe^cn,  St.,  to  see. 

fe^r,  very,  very  much. 

fciben,  silken,  (of)  silk. 

©eiben^ttnbtcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  silk- 
merchant. 

fein,  irr.,  f.,  to  be;  aux.,  to  be, 
have;  mir  ift  alg  ob,  I  feel  as  if. 

feitt,  poss.  adj.,  his,  her,  its. 

fctlicr,  poss.  pron.,  his,  hers,  its  ; 
bie  ©eiticn,  his  family,  etc. 

feitttge  (ber,  bte,  \i(x^),  poss.  pron.y 
his,  hers,  its. 

fcit,  since;  x6)  hxn  —  ad^t  X(i%tn 
l^ter,  I  have  been  here  for  a 
week  (for  the  last  week). 

©cite,/.,  -n,  side,  page. 

©efunbenjetger,  m.,  -«,  — ,  sec- 
ond-hand. 

feller,  self,  myself,  etc.;  even. 

felBft,  self,   myself,  etc.;  even. 

felten,  seldom. 

fenben,  irr.,  to  send. 

(September,  w.,  September. 

fe^en,  to  set,  place;  refl.,  to  sit 
down,  seat  one's  self. 


300 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


fl(i^,  himself,  herself,  etc.;  (to, 
for)  himself,  etc.;  recipr.,  one 
another;  filr  — ,  for  one's  self; 
alone. 

flC,  she,  it;  her,  it;  they,  them. 

©ic  (formal) J  you. 

flcficn,  seven. 

Oicjttora  (pro.  ©injora),  /.,  lady, 
madam. 

(BMhcx,  n.,  -^,  silver. 

©tlbcrmiinsc, /.,  -n,  silver  coin. 

fllbctn,  (of)  silver. 

{ingcn,  st.,  to  sing. 

@inn,  w.,  -C^,  -C,  sense;  mind, 
feeling,  intention. 

<B\Xf>)^f  m.,  -^,  molasses. 

<Bii^f  m.j  -t^,  -t,  seat,  place. 

ft^cn,  St.,  to  sit;  barauf  ft^t  \W^, 
one  can  sit  on  it. 

©t^tUen,  w.,  -6,  Sicily. 

fo,  so,  as,  thus;  there  now;  — 
tm,  such  a;  —  cttDa^,  anything 
of  the  kind;  —  ,  .  .  XO\t,  as  .  .  . 
as;  —  iDlc  au^f  as  also,  as  well 
as;  —  grog  .  .  ,  —  grog,  great 
as  .  .  .  just  as  great ;  {untrans- 
lated in  *  result '  clause), 

foBalb  (mic),  as  soon  as. 

focbcn,  just  now. 

fofort,  forthwith,  immediately,  at 
once. 

fogar,  even. 

fogcnannt,  so-called. 

fogleid^^  immediately,  at  once. 

©O^n,  w.,  -C^,  ^t,  son. 

fol(^er,  such. 

©olba't,  w.,  -en,  -en,  soldier. 

fottcn,  irr.y  mod.  aux.y  to  be  in 
duty  bound  to,  be  to,  shall, 
must,  ought;  be  said  to,  etc. 

©ommer,  w.,  -g,  — ,  summer. 


©ommcrfletb,  «.,  -c6,  -cr,  sum- 
mer dress. 

fonbcm  {after  neg.),  but. 

©onnabcnb,  w.,  -g,  -c,  Saturday. 

©onnc,/.,  -n,  sun. 

©onnenfc^cin,  w.,  -c«,  sunshine. 

Sonncnftra^I,  w.,  -c^,  -en,  sun- 
beam, sunshine. 

©onntag,  w.,  -g,  -t,  Sunday. 

fonft,  else,  or  else,  besides,  other- 
wise; bergleid^en  — ,  others  of 
the  same  kind. 

©orge, /.,  -n,  care,  sorrow. 

forgcn,  to  be  anxious,  be  full  of 
care,  take  care. 

©orgcn,  «.,  -^,  sorrowing. 

forgfaltig,  careful. 

folDte^  as  well  as,  and  also. 

fpantfd^,  Spanish;  (gpanifd^,  Span- 
ish {the  language). 

f^anncn,  to  cock  (a  gun). 

'Bpaxqtif  m.,  -^,  — ,  asparagus. 

fpftt,  late;  — tv,  later,  afterwards. 

(Bpatm,  m.,  -g,  — ,  spade. 

f^atcftcn^,  at  the  latest. 

f^ajteren,  f.,  to  take  a  walk,  etc.; 
—  gel^en,  5/.,  f.,  to  take  (go  for) 
a  walk. 

Bpa^kxqanQf  m.,  -c^,  ^t,  walk; 
einen  —  tnad^en,  to  take  (go 
for)  a  walk. 

f^JCifcn,  to  feed,  nourish. 

S^eifcfarte,  /.,  -n,  bill  of  fare, 
menu. 

BptX^t^mmtXf  n.,  -«,  — ,  dining- 
room. 

©picgel,  w.,  -«,  — ,  mirror, 
looking-glass. 

(Bpkl,  n.,  -c^,  -t,  play,  game; 
'  acting. 

f^iclcn,  to  play;  act. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


301 


^pitai,  w.,  -eg,  ^tx,  hospital. 

Bpoxt,  m.,  -eg,  sport. 

Sprad^e, /.,  -n,  language. 

<Bpta<ijXOtlX,  n.,  -eg,  -t,  speaking- 
trumpet. 

\pxtdien,  st.y  to  speak;  say;  pro- 
nounce; trans.,  to  speak  to, 
see,  interview. 

<Bpxi^tt}OXt,  n.,  -eg,  -^er,  proverb. 

^pXXt^tn,  St.,  f.,  \).,  to  sprout,  bud. 

<Bpxxn^hxnnmn,  m.,  -g,  — ,  foun- 
tain. 

fiJrtngcn,  st.,  \,,  to  spring,  jump. 

f)3Urcn,  to  trace,  perceive. 

(Btaai,  m.,  -eg,  -en,  state  (polit.). 

©tobt,/.,  -^e,  town,  city. 

@tatt,  m.,  -eg,  -^e,  stable. 

@tar!e,/.,  strength,  force,  vigor. 

Statto'n,/.,  -en,  station,  stopping- 
place. 

jtait  (gen.),  instead  of. 

ftattfinbcn,  st.,  to  take  place. 

Btanh,  m.,  -eg,  dust. 

fterfen,  wk.  or  st.,  to  thrust,  put, 
stick. 

(BttdnaM,  /.,  -n,  pin. 

fte^en,  st.,  to  stand;  be,  be  situ- 
ated, lie. 

fteigen,  st.,  f.,  to  rise,  mount, 
ascend;  ang  ?anb  — ,  to  land; 
—  in,  to  enter  (a  carriage,  etc.). 

©tctm(^|tc  (bag),  n.,  adj.  subst., 
stony  place(s). 

(BitUtff.,  -n,  place. 

ftettcn,  to  place,  put,  set. 

©tettung, /.,  -en,  position,  situa- 
tion. 

ftcrben,  st.,  f.,  to  die. 

©tern,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  star. 

(Bttxnhlnmtf  /.,  -n,  star-like 
flower. 


©ternnjartc, /.,  -n,  observatory. 

\itt^f  always,  ever. 

Stcucrmann,  m.,  -eg,  *er,  steers- 
man, helmsman. 

fteuem,  to  steer. 

©ticfel^  m.,  -g,  — ,  boot. 

ftttt,  still,  quiet,  calm. 

ftiUen,  to  still,  assuage. 

ftiKftc^cn,  St.,  ^.,  f.,  to  stand 
still. 

(Biodf  m.,  -eg,  -"-e,  stick,  cane; 
story  (of  a  building). 

ftiircn,  to  disturb,  trouble. 

©tiirung,/.,  -en,  disturbance,  in- 
terruption. 

Bio^,  m.,  -eg,  ^t,  blow,  knock. 

Strafe,/.,  -n,  punishment. 

©tranb,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  strand,  shore, 
Strand  (street  in  London). 

Strafte,/.,  -n,  street,  road. 

©traften^atftt;  /.,  -en,  street-rail- 
way, tram. 

@trau(J|,  m.,  -eg,  -^e  or  -«-er,  bush, 

shrub. 
\ixt\^tixi,  to  stroke,  pat. 
ftretC^cn,  st.,  to  stroke. 
(Streit,  m.,  -eg,  -e,  strife,  contest. 
<Bixx6)f  m.,  -eg,  -e,  stroke,  line, 

mark. 

ftrirfen,  to  knit. 
©tro^,  n.,  -eg,  straw. 
©trom,  m.,  -eg,  ^t,  stream,  river. 
©trumpf,  m.,  -eg,  -^e,  stocking. 
©tuftenmttbd^cn,  n.,  -g,  — ,  house- 
maid. 
©tuibentttr,  /.,   -en,   door   of   a 

room. 
©tilrf,   n.,   -eg,   -e,   piece;    play, 

drama. 
©tube'nt,  m.,  -en,  -en,  student. 
ftubteren,  to  study. 


302 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


©tubicrsimmcr,  «.,  -«,  — ,  study 

(room). 
©tubtum,  n.y  -^,  ©tubien,  study. 
^int)i,  m.,  -eg,  -«^e,  chair. 
©tunbc,  /,    -n,    hour;    lesson. 

ftunbcnlang,  for  hours. 

©tunbenjeigcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  hour- 
hand,  short  hand. 

Sturm,  m.,  -e^,  -«-e,  storm. 

ftiirmift^,  stormy. 

fubtra^iercn,  to  subtract. 

fuc^icn,  to  seek,  look  for. 

fub(t(i§,  southern,  southerly,  on 
the  south. 

©iinbcr,  w.,  -^,  — ,  sinner. 

(Buppc,/.,  -n,  soup. 

fiig,  sweet. 


tabctn,  to  blame. 

Xa^ciff.,  -n,  blackboard. 

Xa^,  m.,  -e^,  -c,  day;  eine^  — e6, 
one  day. 

Xaqt^anhmd^f  m.,  -e^,  day- 
break. 

tdqixd),  daily. 

^a(,  w.,  -eg,  -«-er,  valley. 

JJ^atcr,  w.,  -g,  — ,  taler  (72  cents); 
dollar. 

^antc, /.,  -n,  aunt. 

Xan^,  m.,  -eg,  -«^e,  dance,  dancing. 

xan^m,  to  dance. 

^apf erf ett, /. ,  valor,  bravery. 

^afd^c,  /.,  -n,  pocket. 

^af^cntuti^,  n.y  -eg,  -^er,  hand- 
kerchief. 

2;affe,/.,  -n,  cup. 

^^^r/-)  ~^T^,  deed,  action,  act;  in 
bcr  — ,  indeed,  in  fact,  truly. 

XdtX,  m.,  -eg,  dew. 


taui^en,  to  dive. 

taufenb,  a  thousand. 

SCaufenb,   «.,   -eg,   -c,   thousand 

(woww). 
^ee,  w.,  -g,  tea. 
Xtcio^ti,  m.j  -g,  — ,  teaspoon. 

Xtiiiif  m.,  -eg,  -t,  pool,  pond. 

tcigtg,  doughy. 

XtWf  m,  and  n.,  -eg,  -c,  part,  por- 
tion; party. 

XtUjto'pf  n.j  -eg,  -c,  telescope. 

better,  w.,  -g,  — ,  plate. 

Xtxapti,  m.,  -g,  — ,  temple! 

tcucr,  dear;  expensive. 

Xf)taitX,  «.,  -g,  — ,  theatre. 

XljXOtt,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  throne. 

ticf,  deep. 

Xk^Cf  f.f  -n,  deep,   depth(s). 

XxtXf  «.,  -eg,  -e,  animal,  beast. 

^iergarten,  w.,  -g,  ■«^,  park. 

Xinit,/.,  -n,  ink. 

$£ifc^,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  table;  gu  — 
(ein)(aben,  to  invite  to  dinner; 
bet  —  fein,  to  be  at  table. 

Xi^djqtMf  n.y  -eg,  -e,  grace  (at 
meals). 

X^dfU^t  Wj  -^f  — f  cabinet- 
maker, joiner. 

2:ttel,  m.,  -g,  — ,  title. 

Xohf  m.f  -eg,  death. 

XoxUitt  [pr.  toale'tte],  /.,  -n, 
toilet. 

^ornate,/.,  -n,  tomato. 

Xox,  «.,  -eg,  -e,  gate. 

tiirid^tertoeife,  foolishly. 

ioi,  dead. 

tiitctt,  to  kill. 

Xonxx\t  [pr.  turi'ft],  w.,  -en,  -en, 

tourist. 
tragen,  st.,  to  bear,  carry;  wear; 
bring,  take. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH    VOCABULARY. 


303 


JtrttttC,/.,  -n,  tear. 
traucn  (dat.),  to  trust. 
Xxantt^pXti,  n.y  -t^,  -t,  tragedy. 
Jtraum,  w.,  -c^,  ^t,  dream. 
trcffcn,  St.,  to  hit,  strike;  chance 

upon,     meet     (with),     fail     in 

with,  find. 
Xxtxi^zn,  «.,  -^,  activity;  life. 
trcnnen,  to  separate,  divide;  refl.y 

to   part,    separate    {intr.). 
treten,  st.,  f.,  \),,  to  tread,  walk,  go. 
treu,  true,  faithful. 
trinfcn,  St.,  to  drink. 

trocfen,  dry. 

2:rii^flem,  n.,  -^,  —,  (little)  drop. 

%Xfi\if  m.,  -t^f  consolation,  com- 
fort. 

triJftcn,  to  console,  comfort. 

Xvottolt  [pr.  trotoa'r],  ».,  -^,  -^, 
sidewalk,  pavement. 

tro^bem,  in  spite  of  this  (that), 
nevertheless. 

itixhtf  troubled,  sad. 

Xvixmmtt,  pL,  ruins. 

tilrfltig,  thorough,  efficient;  cinc 
— e  (Strafe,  a  severe  punish- 
ment. 

iummtin,  refl.,  to  bestir  one's 
self. 

tun,  irr.,  to  do;  tt)ti)  — ,  to  hurt, 
pain. 

XnVff.y  -en,  door. 

titrfift^,  Turkish. 

^iirpfoftcn,  m.,  -g,  — ,  door-post. 


tibcr  {dat.,  ace),  over,  above, 
across,  concerning,  through, 
about,  at,  more  than;  f)eute  — 


Qd^t  2^age,  a  week  from  to-day, 

this  day  week. 
uBera'tt,  everywhere. 
iiBcrta'ffen,  st.,  insep.,  to  give  up, 

hand  over. 
Ubermut,  m.,  -e^,  insolence,  pre- 
sumption. 
iil&crnc'^mcn,  st.,  insep.,  to  take 

over,  undertake. 
Ubcrmfcftung,  /.,  -en,  surprise. 
ii^erftreu'cn,  insep.,   to   bestrew, 

cover. 
itbertre'ffcn,  st.,  insep.,  to  exceed, 

surpass. 
Ufterste^cr,  m.,  -«,  — ,  overcoat. 
itbrtg;  bag  — e,  what  is  left,  the 

remainder. 
ubrigblctbcn,  st.,  f.,  to  be  left, 

remain. 
iiBrtgcni^,  moreover. 
U6ung,/.,  -en,  practice,  exercise. 
n.  t>qL  m.  (unb  bergleid^en  ntc^r)* 
Ufcr,  n.,  -g,  — ,  shore,  bank. 
U^r,  /.,    -en,   clock,    watch;    tDit 

t)iel  —  ift  eg?  what  time  is  it?; 

brei  — ,  three  o'clock;  um  n)ie 

t)iel  — ?  at  what  time  (o'clock)  ? 
um  (ace),  around,  about,  for,  at; 

um  +  infin.,  in  order  to,  to. 
umfa'ffen,    insep.,    to    comprise, 

include. 
u'mgrabcn,  st.,  to  dig  up,  dig  over. 
u'mfommen,  st.,  \,,  to  perish;  um 

etmag  fommen,  to  lose  anything. 
U'mft^logcn,  st.,  f.,  to  turn  over, 

capsize. 
Umftanb,    m.,    -eg,    ^e,    circum- 
stance. 
umft(inMt(i^,  ceremonious. 
u'm^ic^cn,    st.,    f.,    to    remove, 

move  {intr.). 


304 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


tmaitQCne^m,  disagreeable,  un- 
pleasant. 

U'narttg,  ill-behaved,  naughty. 

unbcfc^abtgt,  uninjured. 

unt>,  and;  —,  fo  tdditV  (ufh).),  and 
so  forth. 

Ultcntbc^rl^,  indispensable. 

untXtDaxtct,  unexpected. 

ungcbulbig,  impatient. 

ungcfd'I)r,  about,  nearly. 

unglau'BUrf),  incredible. 

U'ngliicfUdfl,  unhappy,  unfortu- 
nate. 

llmtierfttttt,  /.,  -en,  university. 

irnfoftcn,  pL,  expenses. 

unmil'gltrfi,  impossible;  id)  fantt  e^ 
—  tun,  I  can't  possibly  do  it. 

U'nniittg,  unnecessary. 

U'norbnung,  /.,  disorder,  untidi- 
ness. 

Utt!^,  us,  (to,  for)  us. 

unfcr,  poss.  adj.y  our. 

unfcrcr,  poss.  pron.,  ours. 

unfrtge  (ber,  bie,  ba^),  poss.  pron., 
ours. 

untcn,  at  the  bottom,  below, 
downstairs. 

Unter  {dat.,  ace),  under,  beneath, 
below,  among,  in;  —  ber  dlt- 
gierung,  in  the  reign. 

nnitvhn^d^tnf  st.,  insep.,  to  inter- 
rupt. 

untcrbcffcn,  meanwhile,  in  the 
meantime,   while. 

Untcr^altcn,  5/.,  insep.,  to  enter- 
tain; refl.,  to  enjoy  one's  self. 

Untctf^tcb,  m.,  -e^,  -e,  differ- 
ence. 

Untcrf(!^rtft,/.,  -en,  signature. 

Unttxtan,  m.,  -^  and  -en,  -en, 
subject  (of  a  ruler). 


u'ntertaud^ctt,  to  dive  (down), 
untcmeg^,  on  the  way. 
unticr^eiratct,  unmarried. 
untierlc^t,  uninjured. 
Ux^ad^t, /.,  -n,  cause. 
ufhj.  (unb  fo  tDeiter),  and  so  forth, 
et  cetera. 


tj.  (t)On,  in  titles  of  nobility). 
fSaicXf  m.,  -g,  -«•,  father. 
fSiXUxttftn,  n.,  -^,  — ,  little  father 

{Russian  mode  of  address). 
JBatcrlanb,  «.,  -e^,  -e,  fatherland, 

native  country. 

S^ctlc^en,  w.,  -g,  — ,  violet. 
S^cranba,   /.,    -^    or    33eranben, 

veranda. 
ticrou^gabcn,  to  pay  out,  spend. 
UcrBeffcrn,  to  correct. 
tierblet^cn,  st.,  f.,  to  remain. 
tJcrBrec^en,  st.,  to  be  guilty  of. 
ucrBrenncn,  irr.,  to  burn. 
ticrfinngcn,   irr.\   to  spend,   pass 

(time). 
tJCrbicncn,  to  earn;  deserve. 
't>ZXt\)Xtn,  to  honor,  revere. 

ucrctnen,  to  unite. 

toerfertigcn,  to  make,  prepare. 

tJcrgcBeni^,  in  vain. 

tjergetten,  st.,  to  repay. 

ticrgcffcn,  st.,  to  forget. 

tJCrgcftltrff,  absent-minded,  for- 
getful. 

85crgttugcn,  w.,  -g,  pleasure,  joy, 
delight;  t)iel  —  ()aben,  to  enjoy 
one's  self  very  much. 

JBcrgnugungj^rctfc,/.,  -n,  pleasure- 
trip. 
^eri^ci'ratet,  married. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


305 


tJetl^tnbcrn,  to  hinder,  prevent. 

ticrirrcn,  refl.^  to  lose  one's  way. 

bcrfaufcn,  to  sell. 

JBcrfftuferin,  /.,  -nen,  sales- 
woman. 

©crfcftr,  w.,  -e^,  intercourse. 

bcrflcibcn,  to  disguise. 

ticrlci^cn,  st.,  to  confer,  give 
(title,  etc.). 

ticrltercn,  st.,  to  lose. 

tocrm(^tcn,  to  annihilate. 

ticrfaumcit,  to  miss  (train,  etc.). 

bcrfc^affcn,  to  procure,  get. 

ticrfci^rcibcn,  st.,  to  prescribe. 

t)crfrf|hJmbcn,  st.,  \,,  to  vanish, 
disappear. 

berfc^cn,  to  reply,  answer;  in 
gute  Saune  — ,  to  put  in  good 
humor. 

tJCrfmfcn,  st.,  f.,  to  sink,  founder. 

Ucrf^JrccJ^cn,  5/.,  to  promise. 

J8crfu(i^,  w.,  ~t^,  -e,  trial,  attempt. 

t)erfll(i|cn,  to  try,  attempt. 

(lertrauen^  to  trust,  confide. 

SSerhianbt(cr),  adj.  subst.,  rela- 
tion, relative. 

uernjclfcn,  to  wither. 
t)cmunbcn,  to  wound. 

fStiitXf  m.,  -g,  -n,  cousin. 

t)XClf  mti)X,  meift,  much,   a  great 

deal  of;  pL,  many. 
tJtclcrlct,  indecL,  many  kinds  of. 
totcttei'cfit,  perhaps. 
t)XtX,  four. 

fBkxitl,  «.,  -9,  — ,  quarter. 
SSicrtclftu'nbc,  /,  -n,  quarter  of 

an  hour. 
fSoqti,  w.,  -«,  ^,  bird. 
SSilg(e)(ein,  «.,  -«,  -— ,  little  bird, 

birdie. 

kioa,  full. 


t)Ot(c'tlbctt,  insep.,  to  finish,  end, 
complete;  DoUenbet,  complete, 
etc. 

\)0n  {dat.)y  of,  from,  by,  with, 
about,  concerning. 

bor  {dat.,  ace),  before,  of,  in 
front  of,  ago. 

kJOrbci,  past,  gone. 

tiorbcifalfrcn,  st.,  \,,  to  go  (drive, 
sail,  etc.)  past^ 

tjorbcigc^cn,  st.,  f.,  to  go  (walk) 
past. 

SJorbcrgrunb,  w.,  -c3,  -^e,  fore- 
ground. 

JBorbcrfl^,  w.,  -c^,  -e,  front-seat. 

JBorbcrtur,  /.,  -en,  front-door. 

tJOrbrttngcn,  refl.,  to  press  for- 
ward. 

JBorgcBirgC,  «.,  -«,  — ,  promon- 
tory. 

SS(Jrgcfc^t(cr),  adj.  subsl.,  su- 
perior (officer). 

\)OXf}tXf  before(hand),  first. 

t)OX\Q,  adj.,  last,  former. 

tJOrlcfcn,  St.,  to  read  aloud. 

Uorf(^ieftcn,  5/.,  to  advance 
(money). 

JBorf^Jcifc, /.,  -n,  e«/re^. 

SSorftabt,/.,  ^e,  suburb. 

!S8orteil,  w.,  -e^,  -c,  advantage. 

Uortragcn,  st.,  to  recite. 

t)OXnf)CXf  by,  over,  past. 

tiorii&crhjanbcm,  to  pass  by. 

tJOrjtc^cn,  67.,  to  prefer. 


SSaarenliau^,  «.,  -c«,  -^cr,  depart- 
mental store. 
ttiacftfcit,  5^,  (.,  to  grow. 


3o6 


GERMAN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY. 


SBa^t,/.,  watch,  guard. 

SSaffc,/.,  -n,  weapon. 

SBagcn,  m.,  -3,  — ,  carriage, 
waggon. 

ttiagCtt,  St.,  to  weigh  (tr,), 

tO'^i^ltn,  to  choose,  select. 

toa^r,  true;  ©ic  flnb  tnilbe,  nid^t 
— ?  you  are  tired,  are  you  not  ? 

ttia^renb  {gen.),  during;  conj., 
while. 

SSa^r^cit, /.,  -en,  truth. 

SSalb,  m.j  -t^, ^tx,  forest,  wood(s). 

aSanb,/.,  ^t,  wall. 

SSanb(e)rcr,  m.,  -^,  — ,  wanderer, 
pilgrim. 

toanbern,  f.,  to  wander,  go,  pass. 

hjann?  when? 

tnarm,  ^tx,  warm. 

njarncn,  to  warn. 

hjartcn,  to  wait. 

SBartcfaal,  w.,  -e^,  -fclle,  waiting- 
room. 

toarum?  why?  wherefore? 

toa^?  what? 

XQd^,  rel.  pron.,  that  which,  what, 
which. 

tt)a^  fiir  (ein,  -t,  — )?  what  kind 
of  (a)?  what? 

hJafrfjCtt,  sL,  to  wash. 

Staffer,  n.,  -g,  —  or  ^,  water. 

toec^feltt,  to  change,  exchange. 

ttttdcn,  to  waken. 

mebcr  ♦  .  .  nodff  neither  .  .  .  nor; 
nor. 

SScg,  m.,  -e^,  -e,  way,  road, 
street. 

tt)ZQ,  away,  out  of  the  way. 

ftlCgCtt  (gen.),  on  account  of. 

mcgnc^mcn,  st.,  to  take  away. 

aSedmut,  /.,  sadness,  melan- 
choly. 


\Dtfl  tun  (dat.)y  to  hurt,  pain. 
SBci^,     ».,     -c«,    -cr,     woman; 

wife. 
ttici(^i,  soft. 

ttJcU,  because,  as,  .since. 
SBcin,  w.,  -eg,  -e,  wine. 
meincti,  to  weep. 

aScin^ttnbler,  w.,  -g,  — ,  wine- 
merchant. 

aScmtraulie,  /.,  -tt,  grapes. 

SBcife,  /.,  -n,  way,  manner;  auf 
biefe  — ,  in  this  way. 

hJCtft,  white. 

ttJett,  far. 

Iticttcrfa^rcn,  st.,  f.,  to  go  (sail, 
etc.)  on. 

aSeijcn,  m.,  -^,  wheat. 

hJClc^cr?  which?  what? 

tueld^er,  rel.  pron.,  who,  which, 
that;  indef.,  some. 

aSclfen,  n.,  -g,  withering. 

SBcttc,/.,  -n,  wave,  ripple. 

SBelt,/.,  -en,  world. 

SBcltaUi^ftcttung,  /.,  -en,  inter- 
national exhibition. 

ItJCm?  (to,  for)  whom? 

njcn?  whom? 

njenig,  little;  few. 

ttienigftcn^,  at  least. 

hJCnn,  when,  whenever;  if;  — 
and),  — gteid^,  even  if,  although. 

nicr?  who? 

tt)tt,  rel.  pron.y  he  who,  the  one 
who,  etc. 

tuerben,  st.,  f.,  to  become,  grow, 
turn  out  to  be,  be;  aux.  of  Jut., 
shall,  will;  aux.  of  passive,  to 
be;  eg  tr>trb  ^benb,  evening  is 
coming  on;  —  aug,  to  become 
of;  —  gn,  to  turn  into. 

toerfcn,  st.,  to  throw. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


307 


SBcrf,  «.,  -e^,  -t,  work,  writings, 

etc. 
SaScrt,  w.,  -c«,  -C,  worth,  value. 
tocrt,  worth,  of  the  value  of. 
SScfcn,  «.,  -«,  — ,  being. 
toci^^alb?  why? 
hJCffcn?  whose? 
toeftUdl^  western,  westerly. 
toei^ttjcgcn?  for  what? 
SBctter,  w.,  -8,  weather. 
tOXtf  how,  how?  what?;  as,  like; 

fo  —  auc^,  as  also,  as  well  as. 
totcber,  again;  now. 
hitcbcrfommcn,  st.,   f.,   to  come 

back,  return. 
aSiebcrfe^cn,     «.,     -«,     meeting 

again;    auf   — ,   good-bye    (till 

we  meet  again),  au  revoir. 
aSietl,  n.y  -^,  Vienna;  — tx,  (of) 

Vienna. 


SBicfc,/.,  -n,  meadow. 
njictiicl(f)te  (ber)?  what   day  of 

the  month? 
SSUtfelm,  w.,  -^,  William. 
aSU^elmmc, /.,  -M,  Wilhelmine. 
tottt!o'mmen,  welcome. 
tDtmmcln,  to  swarm,  teem. 
SBinb,  m.,  -c^,  -t,  wind,  breeze. 
njinfcn  {dat.),  to  beckon. 
SBtntcr,  w.,  -6,  — ,  winter. 
SBtntcr^alaw  [pr.  -palft'J,  «.,  — , 

— f  winter-palace. 
SBinterquat,  /.,  -en,  torment  of 

winter,  hard  winter  weather. 
aSt^fcl,  m.,  -«,  — ,  tree-top. 
\o\Xf  we. 

aStrt,  w.,  -c^,  -e,  host,  landlord. 
S93trtj^i|au!^,  ».,  -c^,  -^-er,  tavern, 

inn. 
ttfiffen,    irr.,   to  know  (of  facts) ; 

know  how  to,  can. 


too,  where;  where? 

toobei,  whereby,  in  connection 
with  which,  etc. 

SBoc^c,/.,  -n,  week. 

SSogc, /.,  -n,  billow. 

aSogcn^Jtafl,  w.,  -c«,  dashing 
waves. 

too^in?  whither?  where  to? 

tooffl,  indecL,  well  (0/  health)', 
adv.,  well,  then,  indeed,  I  sup- 
pose, I  wonder,  I  am  sure,  of 
course,   doubtless,  etc. 

too^ncn,  to  dwell,  live,  reside. 

aSo^nung, /.,  -en,  dwelling,  resi- 
dence, house. 

aSo^njimmer,  n.,  -«,  — ,  sitting- 
room. 

2Bo«e,/.,  -n,  cloud. 

toollen,  irr.,  mod.  aux.,  to  will, 
desire  to,  wish  to,  want  to,  be 
about  to,  mean  to,  etc.;  claim 
to,  assert. 

toomit,  with  which  (what). 

toorauf,  at  which,  on  which,  etc.; 
whereupon. 

aSort,  n.,  -e6,  word;  pi.,  SSfirter, 
words  {as  vocables);  pi.,  SBortC, 
words  {in  discourse). 

toariibcr,  at  what,  whereat. 

toi)t)on,  of  which  (what),  etc.; 
whereof. 

tooju?  for  what?  etc. 

tounbern,  refl.,  to  wonder,  be  as- 
tonished; impers.,  eS  tt)unbert 
ntici^,  I  wonder. 

tounbcrf(^iJn,  very  beautiful. 

toitnfc^en,  to  wish,  desire,  want. 

toiirbtg,  worthy. 

aSurft,/.,  -^e,  sausage. 

aSurjcI, /.,  -n,  root. 

SBitrjlctn,  n.,  -«,  — ,  rootlet. 


3o8 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY 


8 

^O^l,/.,  -m,  number,  figure. 

^dt^Uttf  to  count;  number,  have. 

Sd^n,  w.,  -e«,  ^t,  tooth. 

3ar,  w.,  -en,  -en,  Czar. 

5.  J8.  (sum  ^eifpiel),  for  example, 
e.g. 

5C^n,  ten. 

3eic^enftunbC,  /.,  -n,  drawing- 
lesson. 

^eigen,  to  show;  refl.,  to  show 
one's  self,  appear. 

3ctgcr,  w.,  -6,  — ,  hand  (of  time- 
piece); ber  grofee  (fleine)  — ,  the 
long  (short)  hand,  minute- 
(hour-)hand. 

Stilt,  /.,  -n,  line. 

Stitff;  -en,  time;  t)or  dter  — ,  in 
old(en)  times. 

S^^^tog;  eine  — ,  a  (short)  while. 

3cttung,  /.,  -en,  newspaper. 

3cttnjort,  n.,  -e6,  -^er,  verb. 

JcrfaKcn,  ruined,  in  ruins. 

gerflicftcn,  5^,  f.,  to  melt  (away). 

SCrrctften,  5^,  to  tear  (to  pieces). 

gerruttcn,  to  shatter. 

gcrftiJrcn,  to  destroy,  demolish. 

3c«g,  w.,  -e«,  -e,  stuff,  cloth, 
material. 

Jte^en^  5^,  to  draw;  intr.j  f.,  to 
go,  travel. 

gicrcn,  to  adorn. 

differ,  /.,  -n,  figure,  number. 

3ifferb(attr  «.,  -c«,  -^er,  dial,  face. 

^tmmct,  «.,  -«,  — ,  room. 

SitnmtxiUXf  /.,  -en,  door  of  a 
room. 

gtttcrn,  to  tremble. 

SoUf  w.,  -e^,  -e,  inch. 

^tt  (dat.)y  to,  at,  for,  in,  on,  by; 


—  ^aufe,  at  home;  —  3^]^nen, 
to  your  house,  etc.;  adv.,  too; 

\-infin.,  to. 

jubringcn,    irr.,    to    pass,    spend 

(time). 
5U(^ttgcn,  to  chastise. 
3urfcr,  w.,  -«,  sugar. 
^ubecfen^  to  cover  (up). 
5wcrft,  first. 
5Ufattig,     accidental;     adv.,     by 

chance. 
jufrtcben,  contented,  satisfied. 
3ug,  m.,  -e6,  -^e,  train  (railway). 
SUgcbCtt,  5/.,  to  admit. 
^Ugegen,  present. 
5Ug(ei(^,  at  the  same  time. 
5U^auf,  in  heaps. 
5U^iircn,  to  listen. 
Svif)&ttXf  m.,  -g,  — ,  hearer;  pL, 

audience. 
jufpmmcn,  5/.,  f.,  —  auf  (ace),  to 

approach. 
julttutcn,  to  ring  (to). 
^Ulcljt,  last  (of  all),  at  last. 
^umadicn,  to  close,  shut. 
5Unrirf|ft^  next,  in  the  next  place, 

then. 
§unbcn,  to  kindle. 
3«n9Cf/.,  -n,  tongue. 
Swriid,  adv.,  back. 
gurucffa^rcn,  5^,  f.,  to  drive  (etc.) 

back. 
juriirffattcn,  5^.,  f.,  to  fall  back, 

recoil. 
juriirfgcbcn,  s^.,  to  give  back. 
5UrU(ffc^ren,f.,  to  return,  go  back. 
surufen,  sL,  to  call  (shout)  to. 
jufagcn  (dat.),  to  suit,  agree  with- 
5ufammcn,  together. 
3«fammentrcffcn,  n.,  -«,  meeting, 

encounter. 


GERMAN-ENGLISH   VOCABULARY. 


309 


Svi^^antt,  m.y  -0,  spectator. 

jufc^icn,  st.y  to  look  on;  take 
care. 

3utrawcn,  «.,  -«,  trust,  con- 
fidence. 

JUUJeikn,  sometimes. 

^tttatf  it  is  true,  indeed. 

3tOCrf,  w.,  -c^,  -c,  object,  pur- 
pose. 

jmci,  two. 

jWcicrki,  two  kinds  of. 


Smiq,     w.,     -c«,     -c,     branch, 

bough. 
Jtlictgcn,  to  send  out  shoots. 
StOtxtampf,  m.,  -eg,  ^t,  duel. 

^njcimat,  twice. 

Jhiciten^,    in   the   second    place, 

secondly. 
^ttiingen^  st.y  to  force,  compel. 
^njtfd^Ctt    (dat.,    ace),    between, 

among. 
Stuiilf,  twelve. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


a,  an,  etn;  twice  a  day,  jhjcimd 

bed  Xage^;  twice  a  week,  jtDci* 

mat  bie  SSod^c. 
able  (to  be),  fiinncn,  irr. 
about,  prep. J  toon  {dat.);  unt  (occ); 

round  — ,  utu  .  .  .  ()crum. 
about,  flff?;.,  ungefa^r,  etma;  to  be 

—  to,  cben  iDoIlen,  irr.-,  Im  SBc* 

Qtiffc  fein,  «Vr.,  f. 
above,  prep.,  liber  (</a/.). 
accept,  annef)meTi,  st. 
accompany,  bcgleiten. 
accordingly,  folglicf),  dfo,  balder. 
account  {bill),  D^cd^nung,  /.,  -en; 

{report),  S8ericf)t,  m.,   -e«,  -e; 

on  —  of,  ft)egen,  ge«.;  on  this 

— ,  ba^er,  bc«f)alb. 
accuse,  auHagen. 
acknowledge,  anerfetttten,  irr. 
acquaintance,  i8efanntfd)aft,  /., 

-en ;      {person      known)  ^      33e* 

fannt(er),     adj.    subst. ;    make 

any    one's    — ,    etnen    fcnnen 

lernen. 
acquittal,  greifprec^ung,  /. 
act  {conduct  one's   self),  \id)   be* 

tragen,  st. 
actor,  (©c^aufpieler,  m.,  -«,  — . 
actress,  fSd^aufpielerin,/.,  -nen. 
address     {place     of     residence), 

Hbreffe,/., -n. 


admire,  behjunbem, 

advance  {loan),  tjorfc^iefeen,  st. 

advantage,  58orteit,  m.,  -e«,  -€♦ 

advertisement,  2lngeige,/.,  -m 

advice,  9?at,  m.,  -e^. 

advise,  raten,  5/.  {dat.). 

after,    />re^.,    nad^    (f/a/.);    conj., 

nac^bem;  —  all,  boc^» 
afternoon,  9^ac^mittag;  m.,  -t^,  -€♦ 
afterwards,  nad^^er,  fpciter, 
again,  toieber. 
ago,  t)or  {prep.,  dat.);  a  week  — , 

^eute  t)or  ac^t  Xagcn. 
agreeable,  angene^m. 
air,  ^u\t,f.,  -^e. 
all,  att;  ganj;  at  — ,  trgcnb;  not  at 

— ,  gar  nid^t,  nid^t  int  gering[ten; 

after  — ,  bod^. 
allow,  eriauben  {dat.);  laffen,  st.; 

be  — ed,  bUrfen,  irr. 
almost,  beinal^e,  faft. 
alms,  Hlmofen,  «.,  -«,  — . 
along;  —  with,  mit. 
aloud,  kut;  read  — ,  t)or(efen,  st. 
already,  fd^on, 
also,  auc^. 

although,  obgleld^  :c. 
always,  Immer,  ftet^. 
a.m.,    35m.    (33ormittag«) ;   mor*' 

gen«. 
ambassador,     ®cfanbt(er),     adj. 

subst. 
America,  2lmerifa,  «.,  -6. 


311 


312 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


American,  noun,  Sltnerifaner,  m., 

-^,  -» 
American,  adj.,  amerifanifd^. 
among,  unter,  gmifdjen  (dat.  or  ace); 

be  —  (belong  to),  ge^oren  gu. 
and,  unb. 

angry,  bofe  (at,  ouf,  ace). 
animal,  Xier,  n.,  -e^,  -e, 
annihilate,  t)ernic^ten. 
another,    adj.,    ein    anber(er,  -e, 

-e^);  one  — ,  einatiber;  —  cup 

of  tea,  nod^  eine  Xaffe  2^ee, 
answer,  Hnttrort,  /.,  -en. 
answer,  antmorten. 
anxious,  beforgt  (urn,  ace). 
any,  toelc^er,  etma^;  — body,  — 

one,    jemanb;    —   one    at    all, 

irgenb    einer;    — thing,    etma^; 

—thing  but,  ni(^t6  tDeniger  al^. 
apiece,  je. 
appear  (seem),  fc^einen,  st.;  (make 

one's  — ance),  erfd^eitien,  sL,  f.; 

gum  5Sorf(^ein  tommen,  st.,  f. 
apple,  5lpfel,  m.,  -g,  -^. 
application  (to  make),  \i6)  melben. 
apply  to,  fic^  melben  bei. 
appoint,  ernennen,  irr.  {aU  or  gu). 
approach,  fid^  na^em  {dat.). 
April,  5lpri'I,  m. 
arithmetic,  9?ec^nen,  n.,  -g. 
arm,  5lrm,  m.,  -e^,  -e. 
army,  §eer,  «.,  -e^,  -e;  Hrmee',/., 

-n. 
arrangement,  (Slnrid^timg,/.,  -en. 
arrest,  toer^aften,  arretieren. 
arrive,,  anfommen,  st.,  f.;  anian* 

sen,  f. 
as,  trie;  (when),  aU;  —  .  .  .  — , 

(eben)fo  .  .  .  h)ie;  (since),  ba;  — 

if,  aU  tDenn,  aU  ob;  —  soon  — , 

fobdb,  fottjie. 


ascend,  befteigen,  st.,  tr. 

ascertain,  feftftellen. 

ashamed  (to  be),  fic^  fd^amen. 

ask  (inquire),  fragen;  {question)^ 
befragen;  (request),  bitten,  st. 

asleep  (to  be),  fd^Iafen,  st.;  fall  — , 
einf(f)Iafen,  st.,  f. 

asparagus,  ©pargel,  m.,  -6,  — , 

assist,  beifte{)en,  st.  (dat.). 

astray  (to  go),  fic^  ijerriren. 

at  (A  pp.  B,  4,  5),  in,  an,  auf  (dat. 
or  ace);  gu,  bei  (dat.,  of  place); 
um  (ace),  gu  (dat.,  of  time); 
um,  gu  (of  price) ;  —  all,  irgenb ; 
not  —  all,  gar  nic^t;  —  last 
(finally),  enbltd^;  (last  of  all), 
gulefet;  —  least,  tDenigften^;  (all) 
—  once  (suddenly),  auf  ei'nmal; 
(immediately),  fofort;  —  one 
time  ...  —  another,  balb  ♦  ♦  ♦ 

attack,  angreifen,  st. 
attempt,  ^erfud^,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
attend  (he  present  at),  bein)0]^nen 

(dat.). 
attentive,  aufmerffam. 
August,  5lugu'ft,  m. 
Augusta,  5lugu[te,  /.,  -n0, 
aunt,  ^ante,/.,  -n. 
Austria,  6[terreld^,  n.,  -g, 
avoid,  t)ermeiben,  st. 
away,  n)eg,  fort, 
axe,  l\ii,f,^t. 

B 

back,  9?ii(fen,  m.,  -§,  — , 
back,  adv.,  guriidf. 
back-door,  Winter  tilt,  /.,  -en. 
backgroimd,  ^intergrunb,  m.,  -t^, 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


313 


bad,  fc^Umm;  f(f)lcd^t;  biife;  Ubcl; 

arg,  -er. 
baggage,  ®epacf,  «.,  -c6. 
bake,  baden,  5^ 
ball,  ^a(I,  w.,  -e«,  -e. 
Baltic,  Oftfee,/., 
bank  {banking-house),   39anf,  /., 

-en;    (0/  a   stream),    Ufer,    n., 

-^,  — . 
banker,  53anfier,  w.,  -^,  -^. 
bankrupt,  banfero'tt;  become  — , 

banferott  madden. 
banquet,  ©aftma^l,  «.,  -e^,  -^er. 
basket,  ^orb,  m.,  -t^,  -^e. 
battle,  ©cf)(a(^t, /.,  -en. 
Bavaria,  ^at)ern,  w.,  -^. 
be,  fein,  irr.,   f.;  (m^/t   passive), 

tDerben;  —  in  a  position  (to  do 

anything),  imftanbe  fein;  I  am 

to,  ic^  fott;  how  are  you?  mie 

ge^t  e^  3f)nen?  mie  befinben  (Sie 

fic^? 
bean,  ^o^ne, /.,  -n. 
bear,  tragen,  st. 
beautiful,  fc^bn. 
because,  n)eil. 
beckon,  minfen. 
become,  merben,  st.,  f. 
bed,  33ett,  «.,  -e^,  -en;  garden , 

^eet,  n.,  -e«,  -e. 
bedroom,  (S(f)Iafjimmer,  n.,  -6,  — . 
beef  (roast  of),  ^ftinberbraten,  m., 

-«,  — . 
before,  prep.,  t)or  (dat.  or  ace). 
before,  adv.,  t)or()er. 
before,  conj.,  e^e,  beoor. 
beg  (ask),  bitten,  st.;  {ask  alms), 

betteln. 
beggar,  SBettler,  m.,  -«,  — . 
begin,  beginnen,  st.;  anfangen,  st. 
behind,  prep.,  f)inter  {dat.  or  ace). 


Belgium,  58elgien,  n.,  -6. 

believe,  glauben  {dat.  of  pers.). 

bell,  mode,/.,  -n. 

bench,  ^anf//.,  -^e. 

bend,  biegen,  st. 

beside,  neben  {dat.  or  ace);  bet 

{dat.). 
besides,  aufeerbent. 
betake  one's  self,  \i6)  begcben,  st, 
between,  jmifc^en  {dat.  or  ace). 
beyond,  ienfeit  {gen.). 
bid     {order),    ^eifeen,    st.     {ace)', 

{offer),  bieten,  st. 
big,  gro6,  -er,  grofet. 
bill  {account),  ^Rec^nung,  /.,  -en. 
bird,  SBogel,  m.,  -^,  ^;  little  — , 

birdie,   33i5g(e)Iein,  n.,  -^,  — ; 

SBogelc^en,  n.,  -^,  — . 
birthday,  ©eburt^tag,  m.,  -e€,  -e; 

for  (as)  a  —  present,  gum  ®e* 

burt^tag. 
bite,  beifeen,  st. 
bitter,  bitter. 
black,  fc^tDarg,  -^er;  Black  Forest, 

@d)n)argmalb,  m.,  -eg. 
blind,  blinb. 
blow,  blafen,  st. 

blow  {knock),  (Stofe,  m.,  -t^,  -"-c. 
boat,  ^oot,  «.,  -e6,  -e  and  iBfite; 

^a{)n,  m.,  -eg,  -^e. 
book,  ^ud^,  n.,  -eg,  -^er. 
boot,  ©tiefel,  m.,  -g,  — ♦ 
bom,  part.,  geboren. 
both,  beibe,  beibeg. 
boimdary,  ©renge,/.,  -n. 
bow  to,  griifeen  {ace). 
box     {of    paper    or    cardboard), 

©(^ad^tel,/.,  -n;  —  on  the  ear, 

Of)rfeige,/.,  -n. 
boy,  3unge,  m.,  -n,  -n(g);  ^nabe, 

m.,  -n,  -n. 


314 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABUIARY 


branch  {of  a  tree,  etc.),  '^\Qt\^,  m., 

-t^,  -e;  {pj  a  stream),  ^rm,  w., 

-e«,  -c. 
bread,  S3rot,  «.,  -e^. 
break,  brec^en,  st.\  —  to  pieces, 

ent^meibred^en;    —    open,     er- 

bred^en. 
breakfast,  grii{)ftM,  w.,  -eg,  -c, 
bridge,  33rucfe, /.,  -n» 
brig,  ^riQQ,  /.,  -6. 
bright,  ^elL 
bring,  bringen,  irr.;  —  out,  ]^er= 

au^bringen;  —  up,  l^eraufbringen, 

irr. 
brother,  SBrubcr,  w.,  -g,  ■«•. 
build,  bauen. 
building    {edifice),    ©ebfiube,    «., 

-^,  -* 

bum,  iw^r.,  brennen,  irr.;  tr.,  Dcr- 
brennen. 

bury,  begrabcn,  5^ 

business,  ®ef(^aft,  «.,  -c«,  -c. 

busy  {occupied),  befd^aftigt. 

but,  aber;  allein;  {after  neg.),  fon=s 
bern;  not  only  ...  —  also,  nid^t 
nur  ,  .  ♦  fonbcrn  au(^;  anything 
— ,  nid^tg  menigcr  alg;  nothing 
— ,  nid^tg  alg, 

buy,  faufcn;  —  from,  ab!aufen 
{dat.  of  pers.). 

by  {with  passive),  Don  {dat.); 
near  — ,  bel  (dat.),  uebeit  (Ja^. 
or  ace.) ;  —  (a  certain  time), 
bi«,  big  s^t  ;  —  night,  bei  '^ad:}t, 
be«  9^ad)t«,  nac^tg,  {See  also 
A  pp.  B,  4.) 


cab,  S)rof(^!c,  /.,  -n. 
cabbage,  ^o^,  m.,  -e6. 
cabman,  ^utfd^er,  m.,  -g,  — » 


Calabria,  ^alabricn,  «.,  -«, 

call  {summon),  rufen,  5/.;  {name)y 

nennen,  «rr.;  —  to,  gurufen  (dfl^),  ^ 

be  — ed  (named),  f)ei6en,  st. 
calling    {profession),    iBeruf,    m., 

-t^,  -e. 
camp,  Sager,  n.,  -^,  — . 
can,  fonnen,  irr. 
candy,  candies,  33onbong,  pL 
cane,  ©tocf,  m.,  -t^,  ■«-c. 
canoe,  ^(xfya,  m.,  -i%,  -"-c, 
cap,  9)^u1je, /.,  -n. 
capable,  fa()ig. 

capital  {city),  ^auptftabt, /.,  -^c. 
capsize,   umfc^lagen,   st.,  f.;   fen* 

tern,  f, 
captain  {of  a  ship),  ^apitcin,  m., 

-eg,  -e;  (wi/.  officer),  §aupt* 

tnann,  m.,  -eg,  -leute. 
care,  ntiigen,  irr.-,  take  — ,  ftd^  in 

ad^t  nel^men;  take  —  of,  a(^t* 

geben  auf  {ace). 
careful,  forgfattig. 
carriage,  SEBagen,  m.,  -6,  — ♦ 
case,  gad,  m.,  -eg,  ^t. 
castle,  ©d^lo^,  w.,  -eg,  *er. 
cat,  ta^e,/.,  -n. 
catch,  fangen,  st.-,  —  cold,  fid^  er* 

fiilten. 
cauliflower,  ^lumenfol^l,  m.,  -eg. 
cause,  Derurfad^en;  —  to  be  made, 

madden  laffen,  st. 
cease,  auf^oren. 
celebrate,  feiern. 
celebrated  {famous),  berut)mt. 
certain,  getuife. 
chair,  (Stu()l,  m.,  -eg,  ^t, 
chancellor,  dangler,  m.,  -g,  — , 
change    {alter),   tr.,    anbcrn,   t)er* 

anbern;  intr.,  fid^  (inbern. 
Charles,  -^arl,  m.,  -g. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


315 


charming,  rctgcnb. 
cheap,  bittig;  ma^lfcU. 
cheat,  ^interge'f)en,  st.,  insep. 
check  {for  baggage),  ©epacffd^ein, 

m.,  -e^,  -c. 
chemistry,  (S^cmie, /. 
cherry,  ^irfc^e, /.,  -n. 
chicken,  ^u^n,  «.,  -eg,  -^cr, 
child,  ^inb,  n.,  -c«,  -cr. 
choose,  mci^len,  erma^len  (d^  or 

city,  ©tabt,/.,  •«-c» 

Clara,  ^lara,/.,  -«. 

class,  Piaffe,/.,  -n. 

clean,  rein. 

clear,  flar. 

clerk,    lOabenbicncr,    m.,    -9,    — ; 

^anblung^ge^ilfc,  w.,  -n,  -n. 
clever,  flug,  ^er. 
climate,  ^lima,  n.,  -^,  ^Umata. 
cloak,  '^flantdf  w.,  -g,  ■^. 
clock,  Ul^r,  /.,  -en;  what  o' —  is 

it?  tt)ie  t)lel  Ul^r  i[t  e^?;  it  is  nine 

o* — ,  e^  ift  neun  Ul^r. 
close,  gumac^en;  fc^Iiefeen,  st. 
cloud,  SBolfe,/.,  -n. 
coachman,  ^utf(^er,  w.,  -«,  — . 
coat,  9?0(f,  m.,  -c^,  •«■€. 
coffee,  ^affee,  m.,  -8. 
coin,  9J2un^e,/.,  -n. 
cold,  fait,  -"^er;  be  (feel)  — ,  fricren, 

St.;  catch  — ,  fid^  erfditen;  have 

a  — ,  erfaltet  fein,  irr.,  f. 
Colimibus,  ^olumbu8,  m. 
comb,  fammen. 
come,  fommen,  5/.,  f.;  —  in,  l^cr* 

ein  fommen,  f.;  —  in!  I^eretn!; 

—  to   mind,   einfaHcn,    5/.,   f. 

(dat.). 
comfortable,  bequem. 
command,  befe^Ien^  st.  (dot.). 


commercial  -  traveler,     ©efd^fiftg* 

reifenb(er),  adj.  subst. 
compartment,  Slbteil,  w.,  -eS,  -e. 
compel,   gtDingen,   st.;    be   — led, 

miiffen,  irr. 
complain,  flagen;  fid^  beflagen. 
comrade,  ^amerab,  w.,  -en,  -en. 
conduct,  iBetragen,  n.,  -«. 
consequently,  foIgUd^,  alfo,  balder, 
considerable,  bebeutenb. 
consist  of,  beftel^en  au«,  5^  (dat.). 
consul,  ^o'nful,  w.,  -g,  -n. 
contain,  ent()alten^  st. 
continually,    beftanbig,    fortrtjal^* 

renb. 
continue  (intr.),  fortfal^ren,  st. 
convince,  iibergeu'gcn,  insep. 
copy,  abfd^reiben,  st. 
com  (Indian),  9)lai^,  m.,  -e3» 
comer,  (gdfe,  /.,  -n. 
corn-meal,  SO^ai^mel^I,  «.,  -c^. 
cost,    foften    (ace.    of  pers.    and 

price) . 
coimt  (title),  ©raf,  m.,  -en,  -en. 
count,  iai)Un. 
coimtry,  $?anb,  n.,  -c^,  -^cr;  in  the 

— ,  auf  bem  ![?anbe;  in  this  — , 

l^iergulanbe;  to  the  — ,  aufg  :2anb. 
coimtry-house,  Sanbl^au^,  n.,  -cd, 

-^er. 
corn-age,  93?ut,  m.,  -eg. 
course;  of  — ,  natiirlid^. 
courtier,  ^iifling,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
cousin,  ^Setter,  m.,  -g,  -n;  (Sou=» 

fine,  /.,  -n. 
cover,  bebecfen. 
cow,  ^ul^, /.,  "^e. 
create,  fd^affen,  st. 
creep,  fried^en,  st.,  f. 
crime,  53erbrec^en,  n.,  -g,  — ♦ 
crop  (harvest),  (Smte,/.,  -n. 


3i6 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


crown-prince,  ^ronprlng,  w.,  -en, 

-en, 
crush,  ©cbrttngc,  «.,  -«♦ 
cup,  Xaffe,/.,  -n. 
current  (to  be),  get  ten,  st. 
cut,  fd^neiben,  st.;  —  down  (fell), 

um()aueTi,  st. 
Czar,  Sax,  m.y  -en,  -en. 


damage,    ®d^abe(n),    w.,    -n(«), 

(Sd^aben  owrf  ■^;  do  — ,  ©d^aben 

anrid^ten. 
dance,  tanjen. 
danger,  ©efal^r,/.,  -en. 
date,  !Datum,  w.,  -g,  ^ata  and 

T)aUn. 
daughter,  Xo^Ux,/.,  ^. 
day,  2^ag,  w.,  -e^,  -e;  in  these  — s, 

tieutgutage;  one  — ,  eine^  Jage^; 

what  —  of  the  month  is  it?  hex 

n)iet)lelte    tft    t)eute?;    this    — 

week    (fortnight),    l^eute    liber 

ad^t  (t)ierje()n)  2:age. 
dead,  tot. 

deal ;  a  great  —  of,  \ti)x  t)iel. 
dear  (beloved),  teuer;  (expensive), 

teuer,  foftfpielig. 
death,  Xob,  m.,  -e«. 
deceive,  betrilgen,  st. 
December,  ^cjember,  m. 
decide,  tr.,  entfd^etben,  st.;  intr., 

\x6)  entfd^eiben;  befd^Uefeen,  st. 
Denmark,  ^Danemarf,  «.,  -«. 
department,    ^Ibtellung,  /.,    -en; 

ladies'  dress  — ,  5lbteilung  filr 

^amenfleiber. 
departmental  store,  SBaaren^aug, 

».,  -e^,  -^er. 


desert  (mil.  term),  befertieren. 

destroy,  jerftfiren.. 

dial,  3iffci^^ttitt,  n.,  -t^,  -"-er. 

die,  fterben,  st.,  f. 

difference,  Unterfd^ieb,  m.,  -t^,  -e. 

dig,  graben,  st.;  —  up,  —  over, 

u'mgraben,  sep.,  st. 
diligent,  fleifeig. 
dine,  effen,  st.;  yw  9)^ittag  effen. 
dinner,    (gffen,    n.,    -6;   9}^ittag^* 

effen,  n.,  -^;  at  — ,  bei  ^tlfc^; 

to  — ,  gn  Xifd^;  before  — ,  Dor 

3:ifc^. 

disagreeable,  unangenef)nt. 

disappear,  t)erfd^tx)inben,  st.,  f. 

disappointed,  enttaufc^t. 

discover,  entbedfen. 

discovery,  ©ntbedfung,  /.,  -en« 

discuss,  befpred^en,  st. 

dismiss,  entlaffen,  st. 

distinct,  beutlid^. 

disturb,  ftoren. 

dive,  u'ntertaud)en,  sep.,  st. 

do,  tnn,  irr.;  —  an  exercise  (les- 
son), eine  5lufgabe  niac^en;  — 
damage,  ©d^aben  anrid^ten. 

doctor  (physician),  ^Irjt,  m.,  -eg, 
•^e;  (academic  degree),  ^oftor, 
m.,  -g,  ^ofto'ren. 

dog,  ^unb,  m.,  -eg,  -c, 

doll,  *^uppe,  /.,  -n. 

done  (ready),  fertig, 

door,  Jiir, /.,  -en. 

doubt,  S^\ot\.\t\,  m.,  -g,  — ;  no  — , 
mo^l,  of)ne  3^^U^J» 

doubt,  gmeifein  (an,  dat.);  bejioei^ 
feln  (ace). 

doughy,  teigig. 

down,  adv.,  ()inab,  l^inunter. 

dozen,  ^u^enb,  n.,  -eg,  -e. 

draw  (pull),  gie^en,  st. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


317 


dreadful,  fd^redfUd^,  furd^tbar,  fUrd^* 

terlic^,  entfeljUc^. 
dream,  Xraum,  w.,  -c^,  -^c. 
dress,  ^leib,  w.,  -c«,  -cr;  lady's 

dress,  !Damcnf(eib;  summer  — , 

(Sommerfleib. 
dress,  tr.,  anjiel^en,  st.;  anfleiben; 

intr.,  fid^  anjiet)en,  st.;  fic§  an* 

fleiben. 
drink  {of  people),  trinfen,  st.;  {of 

beasts),  faufcn,  st. 
drive,  tr.,  faf)ren,  st.;  treiben,  st.; 

—  away,  forttreiben,  st.;  —  {in 

a  vehicle),  intr.,  fal^rctl,  St.,  \,,  ]^» 
driver,  ^utfd^er,  m.,  -^,  — , 
drown    {be    drowned),    ertrinfen, 

St.,  \. 
duke,  §ergog,  m.,  -c6,  -c  and  ■«-c. 
during,  n)a()renb  {gen.). 
duty,  ^flit^t,/.,  -en. 


E 

each,  icbcr;  —  other,  cinanbcr, 
ear,  £)\)X,  n.,  -t^,  -en;  box  on  the 

— ,  D^rfeigc,  /.,  -n, 
early,  fril^. 
earn,  tjerbienen. 
earth,   Srbc,  /.,  -n;  on  — ,   auf 

(Srbcn. 
earthquake,  (Srbbcbcn,  n.,  -«,  — . 
east,   Often,   m.,  -^  and  — ;  on 

(in,  to)  the  — ,  im  Often,  iJftUc^. 
Easter,  Dftem,  pi.;  at  — ,  urn  (gu) 

Dftem. 
eastern,  aftUd^» 
easy,  teirf)t. 
eat    {of   people),    effen,    st.;    {of 

beasts),  freffen,  5/. 
Edward,  (Sbuarb,  m.,  -«. 


egg,  (Si,  «.,  -e^,  -er. 

either;  —  ...  or,  entmeber  .  .  . 

ober. 
elect,  marten,  ermci^Ien  (dg  or  gu). 
elementary    school,     Slementar- 

fc^uIe,/.,  -n. 
EUzabeth,  (glifabet^, /.,  -«. 
else,  fonft. 

embark,  elnfteigen,  st.,  f.  (in,  ace). 
emperor,  ^aifer,  m.,  -«,  — . 
empire,    ^aiferreic^,   n.,   -e8,   -e; 

the    German   — ,   ba^   !Deutfcf)e 

$Reid^. 
end,  (Snbe,  n.,  -^,  -n;  set  on  — , 

aufred^t  ftetten. 
enemy,  geinb,  m.,  -e^,  -c. 
England,  (Snglanb,  «.,  -«. 
English,    engtifd^;    —    language, 

(gngtifc^,  n.;  in  — ,  auf  (gnglifd^; 

into  — ,  in^  Snglifd^e;  the  — ,  bie 

©ngldnber. 
Englishman,   Snglanber,  m.,  -^, 

enjoy  one's  self,  S3ergntlgcn  l^aben, 

irr.;  {in  conversation),  \x6)  un* 

ter{)a'lten,  st.,  insep. 
enough,  genug. 
enter,  eintreten,  st.,  f.  and  1^.  (in, 

ace);   f)ineinge^en,   st.,    f.    (in, 

ace). 
entire,  gang. 

entirely,  gang,  gttnglid^,  bollftfinbig. 
entrust,  ant)ertraucn. 
errand-boy,   !i?aufburfd^e,   m.,   -n, 

-n. 
escape,  entfommen,  st.,  f.;  entlau^* 

fen,  St.,  f, 
especially,  befonber^. 
etc.  (et  cetera),  tc,  ufm.  (unb  fo 

iDciter). 
Europe,  ©uropa,  «.,  -«. 


31^ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


European,  adj.,  europciifd^. 
even,  adv.,  au6),  fogar;  —  if,  tocnn 

and), 
evening,   3lbenb,   m.,  -t^,  -e;  in 

the  — ,  be^  2lbenb^,  abenb^;  this 

— ,  f)eute  abenb. 
ever  {at  any  time),  je,  jemd^;  {al- 
ways), immer,  ftet^. 
every,  jeber;  — body,  —  one,  jeber, 

iebermann;    — thing,    alle^;   — 

where,  iibera'IL 
evil,  bbfe. 
examination,     (Sjamen,    w.,    -6; 

"jpriifung, /.,  -en. 
excellent,  Dor^refflid^. 
Exchange    {building),    SBorfc,  /., 

-n. 
excursion,  5lu^flug,  m.,  -e^,  -^e; 

make    (go    on)    an    — ,    einen 

5lu^f(ug  madden. 
excuse,  (gntfd^ulbigung,/.,  -en. 
excuse,  entfc^ulbigen.  . 
exercise  {task),  ^lufgabe,/.,  -n;  do 

an  — ,  eine  5lufgabe  madden. 
expect,  ermarten. 
expensive,  foftfpielig. 
experience,  (Srfa^rung,  /.,  -en. 
'  express  train,  (Sd^nell^ug,  m.,  -e^, 

extol,  preifen,  st. 
extremely,  (iufeerft,  ^'6^\t 


F 

face,  ©efic^t,  n.,  -eg,  -er;  {of  a 
time- piece),  3iff^t^blatt,  n.,  -e^, 
■^er. 

fall,  fallen,  st.,  f.;  —  ill,  franf  mer* 
ben,  St.,  f. 

fall,  gaE,  m.,  -eg,  -^c. 


famine,  ^ungergnot, /.,  ■«'e. 

famous,  beruf)mt. 

far,  meit;  as  —  as,  big  nad^;  big 

gu. 
farmer  {peasant),  ^aucr,  m.,  -g 

and  -n,  -n. 
fast  {quick),  fd^neH. 
father,  33ater,  m.,  -g,  ■«•. 
fear,  fiird^ten. 
February,  gebruar,  m. 
feel,  fii^ten,  empfinben,  st. 
fell,  fallen. 

fellow;  that  — ,  ha,  demonstr. 
fellow  -  traveler,      a)^itreif enb  (er) , 

adj.  suhst. 
few  (a),  einige;  toenige;  ein  paar 

{indecl.). 
field,  gelb,  n.,  -eg,  -er. 
fifty,  fiinfjig. 
fill,  full  en;  erfullen. 
finally,  enbli(^. 
find,  flnben,  st. 
fine  {beautiful),  fd^on;  {delicate) y 

fetn. 
finish,  beenbigen;  {complete),  t)olt* 

e'nben,  insep.;    to    have  — ed, 

fertig  fein  (mit,  dat.). 
fire,  geuer,  n.,  -g,  — . 
Afirst,  adj.,  erft;  adv.,  erft,  guerft; 
^^    in  the  —  place,  erfteng. 
fish,  gifd^,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
fish,  fifc^en;  go  — ing,  fifd^en  gel^en, 

St.,  f. 

five,  fiinf. 

flatter,  fd^meld^eln  {dat.). 
flee,  flie^en,  st.,  f.,  1^. 
fling,  fc^meifeen,  st. 
floor,  58oben,  m.,  -g,  -«•;  gugboben. 
flow,  fliegen,  5/.,  f.,  I). 
flower,  53tume,  /.,  -n;  be  in  — , 
blil^en. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY 


319 


flower-bed,   33(umenbect,  «.,  -e8, 

-e. 
flower-garden,  SBlutncngartcn,  w., 

-«, -. 
fly,  fticgen,  si.,  I,  ^, 
fog,  SRthd,  m.,  -^,  — . 
follow,  fotgcn,  I  {dat.);  bcfolgen 

{ace.  of  thing). 
fond  of  (to  be),  gem  \)abtn,  cffen, 

trinfen  2C. 
fool,  9^arr,  w.,  -en,  -en;  Xox,  w., 

-en,  -en. 
foot,  gu6,  W-,  -e^,  -^e;  on  — ,  ju 

football   game,    gufebaHfpiel,   w., 

-e«,  -e. 
for,  prep.  (A  pp.  B,  4,  5) ;  fiir  (aee.) ; 

gu   (0/  purpose);   feit   (0/  Z^'wg 

/>a50;   auf  (of  fuL  time,  ace.); 

iDegen  (^en.,  on  account  of). 
for,  c^w;.,  benn. 

forbid,  tjerbieten,  st.  {dat.  of  per s.). 
force,  Wl(x6)iJ.',  {mil.),  Xruppenan* 

l^^,  J- 
force,  jmingen,  st. 
foreground,  ^Sorbergrunb,  m.,  -t^, 

forgery,  galf(^ung, /.,  -em 

forget,  Dergeffen,  5/. 

fork,  ®abcl,/.,  -n» 

form,  bilben. 

former  {of  two),  jener. 

formerly,  frii^cr. 

fortnight,  Dierge^n  Xage,  pi. 

forward,  toormart^;  press  — ,  \i6) 

oorbrangen. 
France,  granfreic^,  «.,  -«. 
Frederick,   gricbrid^,  m.,  -«. 
free,  frei. 
freeze,  fricren,  st. 
French,    franj5[i[(^;   — language, 


grang5flfc§;  in   — ,   auf   gran* 

giiflfd^;  the  — ,  bie  granjofen. 
Frenchman,  granjofe,  m.,  -n,  -n» 
Friday,  greltag,  m.,  -g,  -t. 
friend,  greunb,  m.,  -e^,  -e;  greun=» 

bin,/.,  -non. 
friendly,  freunbUd^. 
frighten,  tr.,  erfd^recfen;  be  — ed, 

erfd^redfen,  st.,  f. 
fro  (to  and),  {)in  unb  ^er;  auf  unb 

ah. 
from,    t)On,   aug   {dat.);    —  fear, 

au«  gurd^t. 
front;    in    —    of,    bor   {dat.    or 

ace). 
front-door,  33orbertur,  /.,  -en. 
fruit  {in  general),  gruc^t,  /.,  -^e; 

{orchard  or  garden),  Obft,  «., 

-e«. 
fruitful,  frud^tbar. 
fruit-tree,  Dbftbaum,  m.,  -t^,  -"-e. 
fulfil,  erfullen, 
full,  t)oIl  {ace.  or  gen.);  {occupied)^ 

befefet. 


game,  Spiel,  n.,  -c«,  -e. 

garden,  ©arten,  m.,  -«,  ■«•. 

gardener,  ©cirtner,  m.,  -«,  — ♦ 

gate,  %ox,  n.,  -e«,  -e. 

general  {title),  ©enera'I,  m.,  -t^, 
-e;  — in-chief,  Oberbefe^I^* 
l^aber,  m.,  -g,  — ;  {distinguished 
soldier),  gelb^err,  m.,  -n,  -en. 

generally,  gemo^nlid^. 

gentleman,  §err,  m.,  -n,  -en; 
gentlemen!  meine  ^etren! 

George,  ®eorg,  m.,  -g. 

German,  bcutfd^;  —  language, 
^Deutfd^,  «.;  in  — ,  auf  !5)eutfd^; 


320 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


into  — ,  in^  ^eutfi^c;  the  — , 
bcr  ^eutf(^e. 

Germany,  ^eutfd^Ianb,  n.,  -«. 

get  {receive),  befommen,  st.-,  cr* 
I)dten,  st.\  {fetch),  {)o(en;  {he- 
come),  h)erbcn,  st.,  f,;  —  in(to  a 
vehicle),  einftetgcn,  st.,  f.;  — 
out  (of  a  vehicle),  au^fteigen; 
—  up,  aufftc^en,  st.,  f.;  —  well, 
genefen,  st.,  f.;  —  rid  of,  lo^ 
h)erben,  st.,  \,  {ace.). 

girl,  Wah6)txi,  n.,  -«,  — . 

give,  geben,  st.;  —  as  a  present, 
fc^enfen;  —  {a  title,  etc.),  t)er* 
Ieii)en,  st.;  —  heed,  ac^tgeben, 
St.  (to,  auf,  ace). 

glad,  fro^;  I  am  — ,  c§  freut  nttc^; 
id)  freuc  mic^  {gen.  of  thing). 

gladly,  9ern(e),  Ueber,  am  lieb- 
ften. 

glass,  ©lag,  ??.,  -eg,  -^er. 

glove,  ^anbfd^u^,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 

go  {walk),  ge^en,  5^.,  f.;  {of  or  in 
a  vehicle),  faf)ren,5/.,  \,;  {travel), 
reifen;  {depart  on  a  journey), 
abreifen,  f.;  {move),  gie^en,  st., 
f.;  —  astray,  \i6)  toerirren;  be 
— ing  to,  tDoden,  irr.;  im  58e* 
griff e  fein,  irr.,  f.;  —  for  a  walk, 
fpajieren  ge{)en,  st.,  f,;  einen 
(Bpagiergang  mac^en;  —  for  a 
sleigh-drive,  eine  (Bc^Uttenfa^rt 
mac^en;  —  down,  l)inabfa!)ren, 
St.,  f»;  —  in,  I)ineinget)en;  —  on, 
n)eiterge^en;  —  out,  augge^en, 
l^inaugge^en;  —  shopping,  ©in* 
faufe  mac^en,  einfaufen. 

god,  ®ott,  m.,  -eg,  -^er, 

God,  @ott,  m.,  -eg. 

gold,  noun,  ®oIb,  n.,  -eg. 

gold(en),  adj.,  gotben. 


gold-piece,  ©olbftildf,  ».,  -eg,  -c. 

good,  gut,  beffer,  beft;  {well-be- 
haved), artig. 

grain,  ©etreibe,  n.,  -g. 

grandparents,  ©rofeeltem,  />/. 

grant,  geben,  st. 

grass,  @rag,  «.,  -eg,  -^er. 

grateful,  banfbar. 

great,  grofe,  -^er,  grCgt;  a  —  deal 
(of),  fe^r  t)iel;  a  —  many,  fel^r 
Diele. 

green,  griln. 

greet,  begrilfeen. 

grind,  fd^Ieifen,  st. 

grindstone,  ©d^Ietfftetn,  m.,  -eg, 
-e. 

ground  {soil,  earth),  S8oben,  w., 
-g;  (grbe,/. 

grow,  n)ad)fen,  st.,  f.;  —  dark, 
bunfel  luerben,  st.,  f. 

guard  (wi/.),  SKac^e,/.,  -n. 

guess,  ^«/r.  raten,  st. ;  tr.  erraten. 

guest,  ®aft,  m.y  -eg,  -^e* 


habit,  ®ett)o]^nl^eit,/.,  -en. 

hair,  §aar,  «.,  -eg,  -e. 

half,  ac^f ,  ^alb;  the  — ,  bie  ^'^\\it\ 
—  an  hour'  eine  ()albe  Stunbe; 

past  ten,  !)alb  elf;  one  and  a 

— ,  anbertf)alb. 

hall,  (Baal,  m.,  -eg,  ©ale. 

halt,  l)alten,  ^^ 

hand,  §anb,  /.,  -^e;  (0/  a  time- 
piece), 3etger,  w.,  -g,  — ;  long 
— ,   minute — ,  9J?inutengeiger; 

short    — ,    hour ,    (Stunben* 

jetger;  second — ,  (©efunben* 
getger. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


321 


hand    (pass),    rcic^en;    —   over, 

Uberla'ffen,  st.,  insep. 
handkerchief,  Za\(i)tntnd),  «.,  -c3, 

■^er. 
handsome,  fc^fin. 
hang,  intr.,  \)an^m,  st. 
happen,  gefcf)e^en,  st.,  f. 
happy,  glilcfUc^. 

hard,  \)axt,  ^er;  {difficult),  fd^rtjcr, 
harrow,  @ggc,  /.,  -n. 
hasten,  eilen,  1^.,  f.;  fid^  bceilen. 
hat,  §ut,  m.,  -t^,  -^e. 
have,  fjahtn,  irr.;  fein,  irr.,  f.;  — 

to,  miiffcn,  irr.;  —  a  cold,  cr* 

fciltet  fein;  —  a  mind  to,  Suft 

l^aben  ^u;  to  —  (a  thing)  made, 

madden  laffen. 
Havel,  ^a'od,  f. 
hay,  §cu,  n.,  -e«. 
he,   er;  berfelbe;  that  man,  etc., 

bcr;  —  who,   mx;  ber(ienige) 

h)el(^cr. 
head,  ^opf,  m.,  -c6,  -^c;  ^aupt,  «., 

headache,  ^opfmcl^,  «.,  -«;  ^opf* 

fc^mer^,  m.,  -t^,  -en  {usually 

pi.). 
headmaster,  $Rcftor,  w.,  -«,  D^Jcf^ 

toren;  ^ircftor,  w.,  -8,  ^Dlrcf* 

to'ren. 
health,  ©efunb^cit,  /. 
hear,  tj'dnn, 
heart  (by),  auSmcnbtfi, 
heaven,  ^immcl,  m.,  -«,  — » 
heavy,  fd^mcr. 
heed  (to  give),  ad^tgcbcn,  st.  (to, 

auf,  ace). 
help,  §Ufe,/. 
help,  ^elfen,  5^  (dat.). 
hence  {therefore),  alfo,  baljcr. 
Henry,  ^cinreid^,  w.,  -d. 


her,    /?er5.    />row.,    fie    {ace);    \f)t 

{dat.). 
her,  />05s.  adj.,  it)V. 
here  (in  ^/t^'^  place),  l^icr;  (/<?  ^/tw 

/>/ace),  f)er,  l)ierf)cr. 
heroic,  l^elbentniitig. 
heroism,  ^elbenmut,  m.,  -c8. 
hers,  i^rer;  ber  (bie,  bag)  i^r(ig)e. 
hide,  Derbergen,  st.;  tjerftccfen, 
high,  i)o6),  t)6t)er,  f)oc^ft. 
high-school,  ©ijmnafium,  w.,  -8, 

©^mnafien, 
hill,  ^crg,  w.,  -c6,  -e;  ^llgel,  w., 

-«, -. 
him,  [i)n  {ace);  il^m  (<ia/.)- 
himself,  rejl.,  fld^  (felbft);  (he)  — , 

(er)  felbft,  felber. 
hinder,  t)erf)inbern, 
his,  pass,  adj.,  fein. 
his,  poss.  pron.,  fetncr;  bcr  (bic, ' 

t>a^)  (ein(ig)e. 
hoarse,  ^eifer. 

hoist  {a  sail,  etc.),  aufl^tffcn. 
hole,  2oii),  n.,  -eg,  -^er. 
holidays  {vacation),  gerlen,  pi. 
home,  adv.,  nad^  ^aufe;  at  — ,  gu 

§aufe. 
honest,  el^rlld^. 
honor,  S^re, /.,  -n. 
honor,  e^ren,  t)eref)ren. 
hope,  ^offnung,/.,  -en. 
hope,  ^offen;  it  is  to  be  — d,  t)of* 

fentUd^. 
horror,  (Sntfetjen,  «.,  -«. 
horse,  $ferb,  n.,  -e8,  -e. 
hospital,  §ofpitat,  ®pita'(,  w.,  -e«, 

^er. 
hot,  l^eife. 

hotel,  ©aft^of,  m.,  -c«,  -"-e. 
hour,   (Stunbe,  /.,  -n;  — hand, 

(Stunbenjetger,  m.,  -8,  — . 


322 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


house,  ^au^,  «.,  -c6,  -^er;  at  the 

—  of,  bei  {dat.  of  pers.);  to  the 

—  of,  gu  {dat.). 

how,  h)ie;  —  long?  felt  mann?; 

—  are  you?  —  do  you  do? 
iDic  ge^t  eg  31^nen?  toit  beftnben 
(Bit  \i(i)? 

however,  aber,  jebo(^. 

human,  menfc^lic^;  —  life,  Wtn^ 

fcftenleben,  n.,  -8,  — ;  —  being, 

SD^enfd^,  m.,  -en,  -en. 
himdred,  noun,  §unbert,  n.,  -e6, 

-e. 
hungry,  l^ungrig;  be  — ,  hunger 

l^aben,  ^ungrig  fein,  irr.,  f. 
hurt,  tt»e^  tun,  irr.  (dat.). 
husband,    Tlann,    m.,    -eg,   -"-er; 

@atte,  m.,  -n,  -n. 


I,  pers.  pron.y  i(^, 

ice,  @ig,  w.,  -eg. 

if,  iDenn;  (whether),  ob;  even  — , 
tt)enn  aud^. 

ill,  txant,  -^er. 

illness,  ^ranf^eit,  /.,  -en. 

imperial  city,  D^eic^gftabt, /,  -"-e. 

important,  tDic^tig. 

impossible,  unmogUc^. 

in,  prep.,  in  {dat.  or  ace);  adv., 
l^erein,  ^inein;  —  the  country, 
auf  bent  ?anbe;  come  — !  I^erein! 

inch,  3  oil,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 

include,  einfd^Uefeen,  st. 

indeed,  in  ber  3:at;  yes  — ,  jamol^I. 

Indian  com,  SD^aig,  m.,  -eg. 

Indian  meal,  Mai^mt^l,  n.,  -eg. 

indignant,  entriiftet  (at,  ilber,  ace). 

indispensable,  unentbel^rUd^. 


industrious,  fleifeig. 
inhabitant,  @inrt)of)ner,  nt.,  -g,  — ^ 
ink,  2:inte,/.,  -n. 
innocence,  Unfi^ulb,/. 
innocent  (of),  unfc^ulbig  {gen.). 
insect,  ^tife'ft,  n.,  -eg,  -en. 
insist    (on),    beftel^en,    st.    (auf, 

ace). 
instead  of,  anftatt  {gen.). 
intelligent,  flug,  -«^er. 
intend,  mollen,  irr.-,  beabfid^tigcn; 

gebenfen,  irr. 
intention,  5lbfid^t,/.,  -en. 
interesting,  intereffa'nt. 
into,  in  {ace). 
invent,  erfinben,  st. 
invite,  (ein)Iaben,  st. 
iron,  (Sifen,  n.,  -g. 
island,  3nfel,/.,  -n. 
it,  eg,  er,  \\)Xi,  fie;  ber  (tixt,  bag);  ber 

{W,  bag)felbe. 
Italian,  adj.,  italienifd^. 
Italy,  3talien,  n.,  -g. 
its,  poss.  adj.,  fein;  \\)X. 
its,  poss.  pron.,  feiner;  il^rer;  ber 

(bie,  bag)  fein(ig)e,  t]^r(ig)c. 
itself,  refl.,  fic^  (felbft) ;  (emphatic), 

felbft,  felber. 


James,  ^afoh,  m.,  -g. 
January,  ^cit^uar,  m. 
John,  3o]^a'nn,  m.,  -g. 
journey,  9?eife,/.,  -n. 
July,  3u'Ii,  m. 
jump,  fpringen,  st.,  f.,  % 
Jime,  3u'ni,  m. 
just,  dd^T'.,  nur  (with  impve.);  • 
now,  eben,  focben. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


323 


keep,  bcl^altcn,  sL;  —  on,  fortfal^* 
rcn,  sL;  —  silent,  f^iDcigen,  st. 

kettle,  ^cffcl,  w.,  -«,  — . 

km,  mtn. 

kind,  3lrt,/.,  -en;  of  that  — ,  bcr* 
gkic^cn;  what  —  of?  n)a«  filr 
(ein)?;  many  — s  of,  t)lclcrlei; 
two  — s  of,  gtDcterlei. 

kind,  adj.,  giltig. 

kindliness,  §cr^cn6giltc, /. 

king,  ^iinig,  m.,  -c^,  -c. 

kingdom,  ^iinigreld^,  «.,  -cd,  -c. 

kitchen,  ^iid^c,/.,  -n. 

knife,  iD^cffer,  w.,  -«,  — . 

knit,  ftricfcn. 

knock  (rap),  flopfcn;  there  is  a  — 
(at  the  door),  C0  flopft;  (hU) 
Jlo^cit,  5/.,  tr.,  1^»;  m/r.,  !♦ 

know  {be  acquainted  with),  fcnticn, 
irr.;  {have  knowledge  of) ,  tDiffetl, 
irr.;  —  (a  language,  etc.),  t'^w 
ntn,  irr. 

known  {familiar),  bcfannt. 


laborer,     Hrbeitcr,    m.,    -^,    — ; 

^ncc^t,  m.,  -t%,  -c. 
lady,  !DaTnc,/.,  -n;  grau,/.,  -en. 
lake,  (gee,  m.,  -t^,  -(e)n. 
land,  ?anb,  «.,  -c«,  *cr. 
landscape,  !2anbfd^aft, /.,  -en. 
language,  <Sprac^e,/.,  -n. 
large,  grofe,  -"^er,  grfifet. 
last,  le^t;  {previous),  \t%t,  tiorig; 

at  —  {finally),  cnblid);  —  of  all, 

gulci^t;   for   the   —   week,    feit 

a(^t  jtagen. 


late,  fpst;  of  — ,  biefer  Xagc. 

lately  {recently),  neuUd^. 

latter  (the),  biefer,  letjterer. 

laugh,  (a^ett. 

lawyer,  9?ec!^t«antDaIt,  m.,  — e«, 
-e  or  -"-e;  2lbdofa't,  w.,  -en,  -en. 

lead,  fiil^ren. 

leap-year,  'B6)oXi\Qi^x,  n.,  -t^,  -c. 

learn  {study),  lemen;  {he  in- 
formed), erfal^ren,  st. 

learned,  gete^rt. 

least,  menigft;  at  — ,  menigften^. 

leave  (-taking),  Hbfd^ieb,  m.,  -eg. 

leave,  tr.,  (affen,  Dcrlaffen,  st.-,  intr., 

—  {on  a  journey),  abreifen,  f.; 

—  {of  or  hy  a  vehicle),  abfa()ren, 
St.,  f.;  —  {a  situation),  au^^ 
treten,  st.,  f. 

left  (on,  to  the),  linfg,  gur  Unfen* 

leg,  53 ein,  n.,  -eg,  -e. 

lend,  lei^en,  st. 
I^esson,  Slufgabe,/.,  -n;  Seftio'n,/* 
-en. 

let  {allow),  laffen,  st. 

letter,  33rief,  m.,  -eg,  -e;  —  of 
recommendation,  (Smpfel^Iungg* 
brief. 

lie  {he  recumhent),  liegen,  st. 

lieutenant,  ^eutnant,  m.,  -g,  -g. 

life,  ^thtn,  n.,  -g;  human  — , 
SD^enfc^enleben,  n.,  -g,  — . 

like,  gem(e)  l^abcn  20.;  miJgen, 
irr.',  —  to  (do,  etc.),  gem  (tun 
2C.);  I  —  this  picture,  biefeg 
SBUb  geffiltt  mir;  I  —  fish  (wine),^ 
id^  effe  (trinfe)  gem  gifd^  (SBein). 

like;  the  —  of  whom  (which), 
beggleid^en,  bergleic^en. 

like,  adv.,  itie.  ' 

linden,  ginbe,  /.,  -n. 

line  {of  print,  etc.),  S>^\t,f.,  -n. 


324 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


lion,  2'6\t)t,  m.,  -n,  -n. 

listen,  gul^iiren  (dat.). 

little  {of  size),  thin;  {of  quantity) y 

live,  leben;  {reside,  dwell),  tDOl^nen. 

loaf,  iBrot,  «.,  -e^,  -c. 

lock,  fc^Uefeen,  st. 

long,  lang(e),  *(e)r;  a  —  time, 
langc;  no  — er,  nic^t  me^r;  as  — 
as,  fo  (ange;  —  hand  {of  time- 
piece), ber  gro^e  ^d^tx,  TOnu* 
ten^elger,  m.,  -g,  — ;  how  — ? 
feit  njann? 

look,  blicfen,  fd^auen;  —  at,  an* 
\t1)tx[,  St.;  —  for  {search),  fuci^en. 

loosen,  lodfern, 

lose,  tjerlleren,  st.-,  {he  deprived  of), 
fomtnen  urn,  st.,  f,  {ace);  — 
one's  life,  umfomtnen,  utn^ 
!2eben  fommen, 

loud,  laut, 

love,  Iteben;  Iteb  {)aben,  irr. 

luck,  mU,  n.y  -e«. 


M 

M.    (monsieur,    Fr.),    §crr,    m., 

-n. 
ma'am,  madam,  gnftbige  grau. 
machine,  5D^afc^ine,  /.,  -n. 
maid    {servant),    9JJagb,  /.,    -^c; 

Wo!ii&itn,   n.,   -0,   — ;   ^im\U 

tniibc^eTi, 
main  street,  ^auptftrafec,  /.,  -n. 
Majesty,  SD^aieftftt,  /.,  -en;  His  — , 

@elne  {abbr.  (Se.)  SD^ajeftftt. 
make,  madden;  {appoint),  erncn- 

ntn  (al^  or  ju) ;  —  application, 

fl(f)  melben;  —  up  one's  mind, 

fic^  cntf(f)Ue6cn;  st. 


man  {adult  male),  SD^ann,  m.,  -cS, 

■^cr;  {human  being),Tltn\(i),  m., 

-en,  -en;  the  —  who,  ber(ienlge) 

+rel. 
mankind,  ^tn\6),  m.,  -en,  -en. 
manner  {way),  SSeife;  in  this  — , 

auf  biefe  SBeife. 
man-servant  {hired-man),  ^ned^t, 

m.,  -t^,  -e. 
many,  biele,  mand^e;  —  a,  man* 

d^(er);  —  things,  t)iele^;  a  great 

— ,  \t))x  Dtele. 
map,  i^anbfarte,  /.,  -n. 
March,  Waxi,  m. 
mark  {=  about  24  cents),  Maxt, 

/.,  -» 
market,  Tlaxtt,  m.,  -e^,  -"^e, 
marry,  tr.,  f)eiraten;  ftd^  Derl^elraten 

mit. 
Mary,  Tlaxk,  f.,  -n§. 
master,  §err,  m.,  -n,  -en;  —  of, 

mftd^tig  {gen.). 
material,  3^W9/  w>  ~^^J  ®toff,  m., 

-e^,  -e. 
matter,   (Ba(i)t,  /.,  -n;  what   is 

the    —    with    you?    n)a^   fel)lt 

3§nen? 
may,  biirfen,  irr.;  miigcn,  irr. 
May,  $D^ai,  m. 
me,  mtd^  (ace);  ntlr  {dat.). 
mean   {intend),   tootten,  irr.;   ge* 

benfen,  frr.;  {signify),  melnen, 

bebeuten. 
means,  SD^ittel,  n.,  -^,  — . 
meanwhile,  inbeffen,  unterbeffen. 
meat,  gleifc^,  m.,  -e§. 
medicine   (science  of),  TlthxiVn, 

/.;  {physic),  Sltgenei,  /.,   -en, 

mtUiin,  /. 
meet  {of  people  going  in  opposite 

directions),  begegnen,  f.  {dat.)\ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


325 


—  {chance  upon),  trcffen,  an- 

trcffen,  st.  (ace). 
melt,    tr.,    fd^melgen,    st.;    intr., 

fd)meljen,  st.,  f. 
memory  {Jaculty  of),  ©ebttd^tni^, 

«.,  -ed;   {memorial),  5lnbenfen, 

n.,  -«;  in  —  of,  jum  ^nbenfen 

an  {ace). 
merchant,    ^aufmann,    m.,    -t^, 

-leute. 
metre,  WltXtx,  m.  or  «.,  -^,  — ♦ 
middle,  mHit,  /• 
midnight,  9)2ittcmac^t, /.,  -^c. 
milk,  mxX^J. 
milk,  melfen,  w^.  or  st. 
mind  (to  have  a),  l^uft  l^abcn,  ^>r.; 

come   to   — ,    einfatlen,   st.,    f. 

{dat.)\   make  up  one's  — ,  fld^ 

cntfc^Uefeen,    5/.;    state    of    — , 

(©timmung, /.,  -en. 
mindful,  eingebenf   (of,  gen.)\  be 

— ,  gebenfen,  irr.  (of,  gen.). 
mine,  meiner,  ber  (bie,  ba^)  met- 

n(ig)e;    a    friend    of    — ,    ein 

grcunb  Don  mir,  einer  toon  met* 

nen  greunben. 
minister    {polit.),    SD^ini'ftcr,    m., 

-g,  — ;  prime  — ,  erfter  3Jiini^ 

ftcr. 
minute,  ayjinute,/,  -n. 
minute-hand,   aJJlnutenjcigcr,  m., 

-«,  -. 
misfortime,  Unglilrf,  «.,  -c«. 
Miss,  gr(tulcin,  n.,  -^,  —  {ahhr. 

gri.). 
missing  (be),  fcl^Icn. 
mistake,  getter,  m.,  -«,  — . 
mistaken  (to  be),  fic^  irrcn. 
mixed  train,  ^crfoncnjug,  m.,  -eg, 

molasses,  Sirop,  w.,  -«. 


Monday,  9}2ontag,  w.,  -8,  -c, 
money,  ®elb,  n.,  -e«,  -cr;  piece  of 

— ,  (J^elbftiicf,  n.,  -e6,  -e;  sum 

of  — ,  ®elbfumme, /.,  -n. 
month,  Mo'n^xt,  m.,  -t^,  -e;  what 

day  of  the  —  is  it?  ber  tt)iet)ielte 

ift  ^eute? 
monmnent,  Denfmal,  n.,  -e8,  -c 

and  -^er. 
more,  me^r;  —  of  the  same  kind, 

bergleic^en  mel^r;  once  — ,  noc^ 

ei'nmal;  —  and  — ,  nod^  tmmer; 

one  — ,  noc^  ein  (-cr,  -e,  -e§); 

not  any  — ,  nirf)t  me^r. 
moreover,  and^;  augerbem* 
morning,  SJiorgen,  m.,  -g;  in  the 

— ,  beg  SJiorgeng,  morgeng;  this 

— ,  t)eute  morgen. 
most,  adj.,  meift. 
most,   adv.,   aufeerft,  tj'6^\i,  fel^r; 

— ly,    meift  (eng);   at  — ,  l^iic^* 

fteng. 
mother,  SJiutter,  /.,  ^;  —  dear, 

9}ilitterd^en,  n.,  -g, 
moimt,  tr.,  befteigen,  st. 
mourn,  tr.,  betrauern;  intr.,  trau* 

em. 
move,  tr.,  bemegen;  intr.,  fid^  be* 

megen;  jiefien,  st.,  f.;  —  (from 

one    house    to    another),    um* 

gie^en,  st.,  f. 
Mr.,  ^err,  m.,  -n,  -en. 
Mrs.,  grau, /.,  -en. 
much,  t)iel;  very —  {adv.),  fel)r. 
multitude,  9)?enge,  /.,  -n. 
musemn,    9}?ufeum,  ».,  -g,  SJJu* 

feen. 
must,  milffen,  irr. 
my,  mein. 
mjrself,  refl.,  m\6),  mir  (felbft);  (I) 

— ,  (\6))  [elbft,  felber. 


326 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


name,  5^ame,  w.,  -n^,  -n;  what 

is  this  man's  — ?  iDie  f)ei6t  btc= 

fer  TlcLun?;  his  —  is  Schafer,  er 

i)ei6t  ©deafer;  by  — ,  tiamen^. 
name,  tiennen,  irr.;  — d,  namen^. 
natural,  natUrlid^. 
near,   adj.y  na]^(e),  •^(e)r,  n'a^\t 

(dat.). 
near,  prep.,  bel  {dai.),  nebcn  {dat. 

or  ace). 
nearly,  beinal^e,  faft. 
necessary,  notig. 
need,  braud^en. 

neglect,  bernad^I&ffigcn,  berffiumen. 
neighbor,    5^a^bar,    m.,  -3,  -n; 

9^ad)barin, /.;  -nen. 
neither,  iDeber;  —  ...  nor,  h)cber 

«  ♦  ♦  nod);  —  am  (have,  do)  I, 

i6)  aud^  m(j^t» 
never,  ntc,  mental^;  —  yet,  nod^ 

nic(malg). 
nevertheless,  bod^,  bennod^,  nid^t^* 

bcftotDenlger, 
new,  neu. 

news,  9^ad^rid^t,/.,  -en. 
newspaper,  3^ttung,  /.,  -en. 
next,  ncid^ft,  folgenb;*  in  the   — 

place,  sunftd^[t,  bann. 
Niagara  Falls,  ble  9'^iagara=gatte. 
nice,  nett. 

Nicholas,  9^lfoIaug,  m.,  — . 
night,  9^ad^t,/.,  -^e;  by  — ,  bet  (in 

ber)  maii)i,  beg  9^a(^t6,  nad^tg. 
No.  (number),  9^0.  (9^umero). 
no,  adj.,  feln;  — body,  — one,  nie- 

manb,  feiner;  —  longer,  nid)t 

tnel^r;  —  doubt,  tt)o% 
no,  adv.,  nein;  — ,  thank  you,  id^ 

banfc. 


noble,  ebel. 

noise,  learnt,  m.,  -e^. 

none,  feiner. 

north,  5^orben,  m.,  -§  and  — ;  the 

—  Sea,  bie  3^orbfee,  bag  ^eutfc^c 
ai^eer. 

northern,  nfirblld^. 

not,  nid^t;  —  a,  —  any,  fetn(er); 

—  yet,  nod^  nidE)t;  —  at  all,  gar 
nid^t;  is  it,  etc.,  — ?  nid^t  tioa^x? 

nothing,  nic^tg; —  at  all,  gar  nld^tg, 

novel,  D^oma'n,  m.,  -eg,  -c. 

November,  9^ot)ember,  m. 

now,  je^t. 

nowadays,  l^eutptage. 

number  (figure),  3^ff^^/  /•>  -"^t 
3a^l,  /.,  -en;  —  {in  a  street), 
Summer,  9^umero  {abbr.  5^o.); 
(quantity),  ^niai)l,f.;  SO^enge,/. 

nutmeg,  9JJug!atnu6, /.,  -^e. 


O !  oh !  0 !  ad^ !;  —  yes,  iatool^!,  bod^. 

oats,  §afer,  m.,  -g. 

obey,  ge^orc^en  (dat.). 

oblige  (put  under  obligation),  Der* 
binben,  5^;  (force),  gtDlngen,  5^; 
to  be  — d  (compelled),  Uliiffcn, 
irr. ;  to  be  — d  (under  an  obliga- 
tion), t)erbnnben  fetn. 

observe  (mark  closely),  beo'bad^* 
ten;  (remark),  bemerfen. 

occasion,  ®elegen()eit, /.,  -en. 

occasion  (cause),  t)eru'rfac^en. 

occurrence,  33egeben]^ett, /.,  -en. 

o'clock,  Uf)r;  ten  — ,  je^n  Uf)r. 

October,  Oftober,  m. 

of,  prep.  (A pp.  B,  4),  t)on  (dai.); 
—  course,  natUrlid^. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


327 


ofif,  ab. 

offer,  bictcn,  anbictcn,  st. 

office,  2lmt,  «.,  -e«,  -^er. 

officer  (mil.),  Offijie'r,  w.,  -e§,  -c. 

official,  53eamt(cr),  adj.  subst. 

often,  oft,  -^cr. 

old,  alt,  ^cr. 

omnibus,  Omnibus,  w.,  — ,  -ffc, 

on,  prep.  {A pp.  5,  4),  auf  ((ia^ 
or  ace);  an  {dat.  or  ace). 

on,  a(fi;.,  h)citer. 

once,  ei'nmal;  (all)  at  —  (sud- 
denly), auf  ei'nmal;  {immediate- 
ly), fofort;  —  more,  nod^  einmal. 

one,  num.,  eln;  {in counting),  einS; 
/)ron.  ciner;  —  another,  eln* 
anbcr;  the  —  who,  bcr(icnige) 
n3elcf)er;  some  — ,  jemanb;  not 
— ,  feincr. 

one,  indef.  pron.,  man. 

only,  nur;  {of  time),  crft;  not  — 
...  but  also,  nid^t  nur  . . .  fon* 
bem  auc^. 

open,  aufmad^cn;  dffncn. 

opinion,  Wdnun^,/.,  -en. 

opportunity,  ©elcQen^elt, /.,  -en. 

opposed  (to  be),  Qegcnilbcrfte^en, 
St.  {dat.). 

opposite,  gcgenilbcr  {dat.). 

or,  ober;  —  else,  fonft;  three  — 
four,  brci  bis  Dier. 

order  {a  command),  iSefcl^l,  m., 
~cS,  -c;  in  —  to,  um  .  .  .  gu. 

order  {to  command),  befef)tcn, 
St.  {dat.)',  {to  direct),  bebcutcn 
{dat.);  —  {from  a  tradesman), 
beftettcn. 

other,  anbcr;  — wise,  fonft;  each 
— ,  einanber. 

ought,  foUtc. 

our,  unfcr. 


ours,  unfrer;  bcr  (bie,  boS)  \xn^* 

r(i9)e. 
ourselves,  refl.,  unS  (felbft);  (we) 

— ,  (mlr)  felbft,  felber. 
out,  auS,  ^erauS,  ^inauS. 
outcome,  SluSgang,  m.,  -eS,  -^e, 
out  of,  auS  {dat.). 
over,  iiber  {dat.  or  ace);  —  there, 

briiben. 
overcoat,  Ubergiel^er,  m.,  -«,  — . 
own,  adj.,  eigen. 
ox,  £)c^S(e),  w.,  -(e)n,  -(e)n. 
oyster,  3lufter,/.,  -n. 


pack,  pacfen,  einpacfcn. 
painter,  SJ^aler,  m.,  -8,  — . 
pair,  ^aar,  n.,  -eS,  -c. 
padace,    ©c^lofe,    «.,    -cS,    ••^er; 

^ala'ft,  m.,  -eS,  ^e. 
pardon,  3Serjei^ung,  /.;  @ntf(^ul* 

bigung,/.;  to  ask  (beg)  — ,  um 

^Sergei^ung  ic.  bitten,  st.-,  fid^  ent* 

fc^ulbigen. 
pardon,    Dergeiben,    st.    {dat.    of 

pers.),  entfd^ulbigen  {ace). 
parents,  ©Item,  pi. 
park,  ^arf,  m.,  -eS,  -S  and  -e. 
part   {portion),  %i\\,  m.   and  «., 

-eS,-e;  {dram,  part,  role),  D^iolte, 

/,  -n. 
part,  intr.,  \\6)  trennen. 
party  {social),  ©efeltfcfiaft,/.,  -en. 
pass  {time),  tierbringen,  jubringen, 

irr.',  —  {an  examination),  be* 

ftel^en,  st.;   —  away,   t)ergef)en, 

St..  I 
past  {of  time),  bergangen;  for  the 

—  week,  feit  ad^t  2:agen. 


328 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


past,  prep,  {of  time),  nac^  (dat.); 

a  quarter  —  ten,  (ein)  ^iertel 

auf  elf;  half ten,  l^alb  df. 

past,  adv.,  \)oxhd,  t)oruber. 

pasture,  3Beibe,  /.,  -n, 

pat,  flopfen. 

patient,    *ipatie'nt,   m.,   -en,   -en; 

^atientin,  /.,  -neti;  ^ranf(er), 

adj.  sub  St. 
pattern,  9}iu[ter,  «.,  -^,  — . 
pay,  ^a^Ien  {dat.  of  per s.),  bega^len 

(ace.  of  pers.,  or  dat.  of  pers. 

and  ace.   of  thing);   —  visits, 

53efud^e  mac^en. 
pea,  (Srbfe,  /.,  -n. 
pear,  ^irne, /.,  -n, 
pear- tree,  53imbaum,  m.,  -e^,  -^e. 
peasant,  ^auer,  m.,  -n  or  -g,  -n» 
pedestrian,  gu^Q anger,  m.,  -g,  — , 
pen,  geber,  /.,  -n, 
pencil  (lead-),  iBIeiftlft,  m.,  -e^,  -e, 
people,  Seute,  pi.;  (nation),  ^o\t, 

«.,  -e^,  ^er, 
people,  indef.  pron.,  man, 
perhaps,  t)tellel'd^t, 
perish,  umfommen,  st.,  f, 
Persian,  adj.,  perfif(^. 
'pfennig/  "ipfennig,  m.,  -^,  -e. 
physician,  Slr^t,  m.,  -e^,  ^e, 
physics,  '^i)^\Vt,f. 
piano,  ^lat)te'r,  n.,  -e^,  -e;  play 

the  — ,  ^Iat)ier  fpielen. 
pick,  pfliidfen;  —  out,  au^fud^en; 

—  up,  auf^eben,  st. 
picture,  33i{b,  n.,  -e^,  -er» 
picture-gallery,    ^tlbergalerie,  /., 

-n;  ©emalbegalerie, 
piece,  (BiM,  n.,  -t^,  -e;  —  of 

money,  ©elbftilcf;  to  — s,  ent- 

pilot,  Sotfe,  w.,  -n,  -n. 


pin,  (Stedfnabel, /.,  -n. 

pinch,  fneifen,  st. 

pity  (it  is  a),  e^  ift  fc^abe. 

pity,  bebauern. 

place,  "ipia^,  m.,  -t^,  ^t;  (situa- 
tion), @ telle,/.,  -n;  (Stellung,/., 
-en;  take  — ,  ftattfinben,  st.;  in 
the  first  (second,  etc.)  — , 
er[ten^  (jtr>eiten^  2C.). 

plant,  pflanjen. 

play,  fpielen, 

pleasant,  angene^nt. 

please,  vb.,  gef alien,  st.  (dat.). 

please!  (if  you),  (tc^)  bitte;  gc« 
fatligft  (adv.). 

pleasure,  ^Sergniigen,  n. 

pleasure-trip,  53ergnngung^reife,/., 
-n. 

plough,  pflilgen. 

p.m.,  ^m,  (^^ac^mlttagg) ;  abenb«. 

pocket,  Jaf(f)e, /.,  -n. 

pocket,  in  bte  Za\^t  ftecfen. 

poem,  ®ebi(^t,  n.,  -e^,  -c, 

poet,  ^ic^ter,  m.,  -g,  — , 

point ;  on  the  —  of,  im  ^cgriffe. 

polite,  ^ijflid^, 

pond,  Xd^,  m.,  -e^,  -e, 

poor,  arm,  -^er, 

position,  ©tellung,  /.,  -en;  be  in 
a  —  (to),  imftanbe  fein,  irr.,  f» 
(Su). 

possession,  (Sigentum,  «.,  -e^,  -^er; 
— s,  ^(iht,f. 

possibility,  3)?ogltc^feit, /.,  -en, 

possible,  moglic^. 

postman,  ^oftbote,  m.,  -n,  -n; 
^rleftrager,  w.,  -^,  — . 

potato,  ^artoffet, /.,  -n, 

pound,  *ipfunb,  «.,  -e6,  -e. 

pour,  giefeen,  st. 

power,  2)?a(^t,/.,  -^e. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


329 


praise,  lobcn, 

pray   {say  a  prayer),  bcten;   {re- 
quest), bitten. 
prefer,   t)oqie^cn,  st.-,  Ucbcr   (am 

Ucb[ten)  l^aben  :c. 
prepare,      bereiten,      Dorbcrcitcn, 

—  (a  field,  etc.),  beftcUett. 
present  {gift),  ©efc^enf,   w.,  -e«, 

-e. 
present,  adj.,  gegentt)Srtig  {of  time 

and  place);   gugegen   {adv.,   of 

place  only);  jeljig  {adj.,  of  time 

only). 
present  {make  a  present  of),  fd^en* 

fen. 
president,  ^rafibc'nt,  m.,  -en,  -en. 
press  forward,  fi(^  Dorbrangen. 
pretend  {assert),  iDOllen. 
pretty,  f)iibfc^. 
prevail,  l^errfd^en. 
prevent,  t)erbinbem. 
prime  minister,   erfter  SDlini'fter, 

m.,  -^,  — . 
prince  {ruler  or  title),  R^l^ft/  w-, 

-en,    -en;    {title    of    courtesy), 

^tini,  m.,  -en,  -en. 
prisoner,  @efangen(er),  adj.  subst. 
prize,  *»Prei«,  m.,  -e^,  -e. 
profession    {calling),    !53eruf,    m., 

-e«,  -e. 
professor,  "iprofeffor,  m.,  -«,  "ipro* 

feffo'ren. 
promise,  vh.,  berfprcd^en,  st.  {dat. 

of  pers.). 
promontory,   SBorgebirge,  «.,  -«, 

prove,  bemeifcn,  st. 
proverb,  ®pricf)n3ort,  «.,  -c6,  -^er. 
Prussia,  *ipreu6en,  «.,  -«. 
pudding,  "Rubbing,  w.,  -«,  -«;  In- 
dian meal  — ,  9)2ai«pubbing. 


pulse,  ^Vi\^,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
pulse-beat,  ^ul^fc^Iag,  w.,  -eg,  -^e. 
pimctual,  piinftUcb. 
pimish,  ftrafen,  beftrafen. 
pupil,  (Sd)lller,  w.,  -g,  — ;  ©d^tt* 

lerln, /.,  -nen. 
purchase,  (ginfauf,  m.,  -eg,  -^e. 
purchase,  faufen. 
purse,  ^ortemonnaie,  n.,  -g,  -g. 
put   (56/  upright),   ftellen,  feljen; 

(/ay),  leg  en;  {insert),  ftecfen;  — 

on  (a  coat,  etc.),  an^ie^en,  st.; 

—  on  (a  hat,  etc.),  auffefeen. 


quarter,  3SterteI,  n.,  -g,  — ;  a  — 
past  10,  (eln)  33iertel  (auf)  11; 
a  —  to  10,  brei  35iertel  (auf)  10; 
—  of  a  teaspoon,  S3ierteltee* 
loffel,  m.,  -g,  — ;  3  — s  of  an 
hour,  3  SSiertelftunben* 

queen,  ^onigln,/.,  -nen» 

quick,  f^nell. 

quite,  ganj. 


rage,  mllten. 

rain,  9^egen,  m.,  -g. 

rain,  regnen. 

raise,  er^eben,  5/. 

raisin,  9vofine, /.,  -n. 

rather  {preference),  Ucber;  {on 
the  contrary),  t)ie(mel)r;  {toler- 
ably), jiemlicb;  a  —  long  jour- 
ney, eine  I  dug  ere  9?eife. 

read,  lefen,  st.;  —  aloud,  borlefcn. 

reading  {the  act  of),  Sefen,  «.,  -g, 

ready,  fertig,  berelt. 


330 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


real,  eigentUrf),  tnirHid^, 

reason,  ®runb,  w.,  -eg,  -^e;  Ur* 

fac^e,  /.,  -n, 
receive  {of  things)^  befommen,  5^.; 

erf)alten,  st.)  {of  pers.  or  things)^ 

empfangen,  st. 
recite,  tjortragen,  st. 
recognize  {know),  erfennen,  irr. 
recommend,    empfef)len,  st.    {dat. 

of  pers.). 
recommendation,  (Smpfel^Iung,  /., 

-en;  letter  of  — ,  (SmpfeI)Iun9g* 

brief,  w.,  -eg,  -e, 
recover  {health) ,  genefen,  st.,  f, 
red,  rot,  -^er, 
reflect  {think  over),  \x6)  be[innen, 

St. 

refreshment,  (grfrtfc^ung,/.,  -en* 
refuse,    abf(^lagen,    st.    {dat.    of 

pers.). 
regard,  betrad^ten;  anfel^en,  st. 
regards       {in       correspondence), 

(Smpfe^Iung,  /.,  -en;  ©rug,  m., 

-e8,  -"-e. 
regret,  bebauem. 
reign,  9^egterung, /.,  -en. 
rejoice,  freuen;  be  — d,  \x6)  freuen, 

erfreut  fein,  irr.,  \ry  —  at,  fid^ 

freuen  iiber  {ace). 
relate,  erjaf)len. 
relative  {relation),  5Sern)anbt(er), 

adj.  sub  St. 
relieve   {release  from),  entbinben, 

St.  {gen.). 
'       remain,  bleiben,  st.,  f. 

require,  brauc^en;  bebilrfen,  irr. 
resemble,     {i()nUd^    feln,    irr.,    f. 

{dat.). 
resolve,  befc^Uefeen,  fic^  entfd^Ue^en, 

St. 

respect,  Sld^tung,/. 


rest  {repose),  ^n^t,f. 

rest,  ruf)en;  augrut)en;  take  a  — , 

fid^  augru^en. 
restaurant,  SfJeftauration,  /.,  -en. 
retain,  bef)atten,  st. 
retire,  fic^  guriicfgiel^en,  st.;  —  to 

rest,  fic^  5ur  dln\)t  begeben,  st, 
return,  gurilcffe^ren,  \, 
revolver,  D^etjolder,  m.,  -g,  — . 
reward,  So{)n,  m.,  -eg» 
Rhine,  $H^ein,  m.,  -eg. 
rich,  relet). 
ride,  rei ten,  st.,  \,,^, 
rid  of,  log  {ace). 
right,  adj.,  red^t,  rid^tig;  be  —  {of 

a  time-piece),  rid^tig  gel^en,  st., 

f.;  be  (in  the)  — ,  redf)t  f)aben. 
right  (on,  to  the),  red)tg,  jur  red^* 

ten. 
ring,  9?ing,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
ring  {of  a  large  bell),  lauten. 
rise   {mount),    fteigen,    auffteigen, 

St.,  f.;  {get  up),  aufftef)en,  st., 

f.;  {of  the  sun,  etc.),  aufgel^en, 

St..  I 
river,  glu^,  nt.,  -eg,  -^e. 
roast,  SBraten,  m.,  -g,  — ;  —  of 

beef,  ^inberbraten. 
rock,  gelg(en),  m.,  -(en)g,  -(en)» 
Rome,  dlom,  n.,  -g. 
roof,  ^ad),  n.,  -eg,  -^er. 
room,  3iitimer,  n.,  -g,  — ;  (Stube, 

/.,  -n. 
rose,  9lofe,/.,  -n. 
roimd  {mil.),  9^unbe,  /.,  -n. 
round,  adj.,  runb. 
row  {series),  $Reif)e, /.,  -n. 
rowboat,  ^af)n,  m.,  -eg,  -"^e. 
royal,  ffinlglid^. 
rum,  $Ruine,/.,  -n;  — s,  ^rilmnter, 

pi.;  in  — s,  jerfatten. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY 


331 


run,  laufen,  st.j\,,l}, 
Russia,  9fiu6lanb,  «.,  -«. 
Russian  {native  of  Russia) ^  diu\\t, 

m.,  -n,  -n. 

S 
sad,  trourig. 
sail,  @egel,  «.,  -8,  — . 
sail,  fegeln,  f. ;  fasten,  st.,  f.,  ^. 
sailor,  9}iatrofc,  w.,  -n,  -n. 
Saint  (see  St.). 
salt,  ®al3,  w.,  -c8,  -e. 
salute,  griigeti. 
same,  jelb(ig). 
Sarah,  @ara,  /.,  -«♦ 
satisfied,  ^ufrieben, 
Saturday,  ©onnabcnb,  w.,  -9,  -t ; 

©am^tag,  m.,  -8,  -c. 
sausage,  SSurft,/.,  -"^c. 
save  {rescue),  retten. 
Saxony,  ©ac^fen,  «.,  -«. 
say,  fagen;  he  is  said  to  be  rich, 

cr  foil  reid^  fcin* 
scatter,  au^ftrcuen. 
school,   (Sc^ulc,  /.,  -n;  high — , 

©tjmnafium,   ».,   -8,  -en;  ele- 
mentary — ,  (Slcmentarfd)ule. 
school-bell,  (©cJ^ulglocfe,  /.,  -n. 
school-fellow,     — mate,    (B(i)uU 

famerab,  w,,  -en,  -en. 
school-house    (Sd)ul^au«,  n.,  -e«, 

■"•cr. 
scold,  fd^elten,  5^ 
Scotland,  ©c^ottlanb,  h.,  -3. 
scream,  fc^reien,  st. 
sea,  (See,/.,  -(e)n;  Tim,  w.,  -e«, 

-e. 
search     (through),     burd^fu'd^en, 

insep. 
seat,  <k)ii^,  w.,  -e«,  -e;  ^laij,  w., 

-ed,  -"^e. 
second  {of  time),  (Scfunbe, /.,  -n; 


hand  {of  a  time- piece),  ®e« 

funbenjeigcr,  w.,  -«,  — . 

secondly,  gn)eiten^. 

see  {behold),  fe^en,  st.;  {inter' 
view),  fprec^en,  st.  {ace). 

seed,  ©ante,  m.,  -n«,  -n. 

seek,  fu^en. 

seem,  fc^einen,  st. 

seize,  ergreifen,  st. 

seldom,  felten. 

sell,  berfaufcn. 

send,  fd^icfen;  fenben,  wk.  and  irr.; 
—  in,  herein  (!)inetn)fd^idfen;  — 
out,  {)inau^  ({)eraug)fd^icfen. 

September,  September,  m. 

serious,  emft^aft. 

servant,  !Diener,  m.,  -«,  — ;  8c=» 
bient(er),  adj.  subst.;  — girl, 
2)?agb,  /.,  *e;  SD^abd^en,  «.,  -3, 
— ;  2)ienftmfibd^en. 

set,  fefeen,  ftellen;  —  on  end,  auf=* 
red^t  ftellen;  —  down  {from  a 
vehicle),  abfe^en;  —  out  {on  a 
journey),  abreifen,  f.;  —  out 
{on  a  walk,  etc.),  fid^  auf  ben 
SSeg  madden. 

several,  mcl)rere,  einige,  ctUd^e;  — 
times,  mel^rmal^. 

severe,  fd^tDer;  tUd^tig. 

sewing-machine,  9^tt^mafd^ine,  /., 
-n. 

shake,  fd^Utteln;  —  hands,  bic 
§anb  geben,  st. 

shall  {aux.  of  tense),  iDerben,  st.', 
{mod.  aux.),  follcn,  irr. 

sharp,  fc^arf,  -^cr. 

she,  fie;  e6  {of  dimins.) 

sheep,  Sd^af,  n.,  -e«,  -c. 

sheik,  ©c^eif,  m.,  -«,  -«. 

shine,  fd^etnen,  st.\  leuc^ten, 

ship,  Sd)iff,  n.,  -t^,  -e. 


332 


ENGLISH-GERMAN  VOCABULARY. 


shoot,  fd)ie6cn,  sL 

shop     (go     shopping),     (Slnfftufc 

TTiac^en,  einfaufen. 
shore,  Ufer,  n.,  -^,  — ♦ 
short,  tuxi,  -^er. 
shoulder,  (gc^ultcr,/.,  -n. 
show,  jeigen. 
shut,  gumad^en. 
Sicily,  <SijiUen,  «.,  -«. 
silence,  (Sd^meigeti,  n.,  -^. 
silent,  ftill;  keep  — ,  fc^tDeigen,  st. 
silk,  @eibe, /.;  adj.,  feiben. 
silver,  (Stlber,  «.,  -^;  adj.,  filbcm, 
sink,  finfen,  t)erfinfen,  st.,  f» 
Sir,  ^err,  m.,  -n,  -en. 
sister,  (Bfi)\vi\ttx,  /.,  -n. 
sit,  ft^en,  St.;  —  down,  [ni)  fe^en. 
situated  (to  be),  Uegen,  st.,  f. 
skate,  ©c^Uttfc^u!)  laufen,  st.,  f,,  ^, 
skull,  (Sd^cibel,  w.,  -^,  — . 
sky,  .^irnmel,  m.,  -^,  — ;  in  the 

— ,  am  ^immel. 
sleep,  fc^Iafen,  st. 
sleeping-car,     (Sd^laftuagen,     m., 

-^f  — . 
sleigh-drive  (-ride),  (Sd^Uttenfaf)rt, 

/.,  -en;  take  a  — ,  eine  ©c^Iitten- 

fa^rt  madden. 
slight,  leirfit. 
slip,  gletten,  st.,  f. 
slow,  langfam.' 
small,  flein. 
smell,  rie(f)en,  5^ 
smile,  Icic^eln. 
sneak,  fc^Ieic^en,  st.,  f. 
snow,  (Sconce,  m.,  -g. 
snow,  fd^neien. 
so,  fo;  —  am,  do,  etc.,  I,  id^  andC); 

—  then,   dfo;  —  {equal  ^it'), 

e«. 
soft,  tod^. 


soil,  SBoben,  m.,  -g,  ^,  dxht,/. 

soldier,  ©olba't,  m.,  -en,  -en. 

some,  einlg(er,  -t,  -eg),  tDeld)(er, 
-e,  -eg);  — body,  —  one, 
jemanb,  einer;  — thing,  ettDag; 
(as  partitive  often  untrans- 
lated). 

somewhat  long,  Ittngcr. 

son,  (go^n,  m.,  -eg,  ^t, 

song,  !^teb,  n.,  -eg,  -er. 

soon,  balb,  ef)er,  am  e^eften;  as  — 
as,  fobalb,  foh)ie;  — er,  fruf)er. 

sore  (to  be),  Xoti)  tun  (dat.  oj 
pers.). 

sorry;  I  am  — ,  eg  tut  mir  leib. 

sort,  5lrt,/.,  -en;  that  —  of  thing, 
of  that  — ,  berglei(^en;  what  — 
of?  njag  fiir  (etn)? 

sound,  fling  en,  st. 

south,  ^ttben,  m.,  -g  and  — ;  on 
(in,  to)  the  — ,  im  8uben,  fiib* 

sow,  faen. 

sower,  (gaemann,  m.,  -eg,  -^er. 
spade,  (^paten,  m.,  -g,  — . 
speak,  fpred^en,  st.;  reben;  —  to 

{interview),  fpred^en  {ace). 
speaking-trumpet,  ^prad^rof)r,  w., 

-eg,  -e. 
special,  befonber. 
spend   {of  time),   derbringen,  gu- 

bringen,  irr.;    {of  money),  t)er= 

auggaben. 
splendid,  ^errlic^,  prcid^tlg,  pradjt^' 

Dotl. 
spoil,  tr.,    berberben,  wk.  or   st.; 

intr.,  toerberbcn,  st. 
spoon,  ^offet,  m.,  -g,  — . 
Spree,  <Spree, /. 
spring,  griif)Ung,  m.,  -eg,  -e, 
sprite,  9^i^e,/.,  -n. 


ENGLISH-GERxMAN   VOCABULARY. 


333 


St.  Petersburg,  ^ctcr^burg,  «.,  -«. 
stable,  (£ta((,  w.,  -e^,  -^e, 
stand,   fte^en,  st.;  —  still,  ftef)en 

bleibcn,  5^,  f. 
star,  (Stern,  w.,  -c§,  -c. 
start  (on  a  journey),  abrcifcn,  f.; 

(o/  a  vehicle),  abfa^ren,  st.,  f.; 

(on    a    walk),    aufbred^en,    5/., 

f.;  [16)  auf  ben  3[Beg  mad)en. 
state  (polit.),  ©taat,  w.,  -e6,  -en; 

the  United  — s,  bie  SBereinigten 

©taaten;  —  of   mind,   (Stim> 

mung, /.,  -en. 
statesman,  (StaatSmann,  m.,  -e«, 

^er 
station    (railway),    53a]^n{)of,    m., 

-e§,  •'^e;  (stopping-place),  (Sta= 

tion,/.,  -en. 
stay,  bleiben,  st.,  f.;  —  up,  auf= 

bleiben,    5^.,    f.;    —    in    (after 

school),  nad^filjen,  st. 
steal,  ftef)len,  st. 
steamer,  !Dampfer,  m.,  -^,  — . 
steer,  fteuem. 
steersman,  (gteuermann,  m.,  -eg, 

^er. 
step,  treten,  st.,  \.,  f). 
still    (to    stand),    fte^en    bleiben, 

St.,  I 
still,   adv.  (of  time,  number,  and 

degree),      nod^;     (adversative), 

hoi),  be'nnoc^. 
stocking,  <Strumpf,  m.,  -eg,  -^e. 
stone,  (Stein,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
stop    (draw    up),    an^alten,    st.; 

(cease),  auf^firen. 
store   (shop),  ?aben,  m.,   -g,  ■«•; 

departmental  — ,  S[Baarent)ang, 

n.,  -eg,  -^er. 
storm,  (Sturm,  m.,  -eg,  ^t, 
stormy,  [tiirmifc^. 


story    (tale),    ©efc^td^te,  /.,    -n 

(fairy-tale),  5[)2ard)en,  «.,-g,  — 

—  (of  a  building),  (Stage,/.,  -n 

(Stocf,  m.,  -eg,  -^c;  (Stocfmerf,  »., 

-eg,  -e. 
stove,  Of  en,  m.,  -g,  ■«■. 
stranger,  gremb(er),  adj.  subst. 
straw,  Stro^,  «.,  -eg. 
street,   Strajje,  /.,  -n;  main  — , 

^auptftrafee,/.,  -n. 
street-cars, railway,  Strafeen* 

ba^n,/.,  -en. 
strike  (hit),  fc^Iagen,  st.;  (knock, 

bump),  ftogen,  st.,  {).,  f. 
student,  (Stube'nt,  m.,  -en,  -en. 
study  (room),  (Stubiergimmer,  w., 

-g,   — ;    (branch  of  learning), 

(Stnbium,  n.,  -g,  Stubien. 
study,  ftubieren. 
subject  (of  a  ruler),  U'ntertan,  m., 

-g  or  -en,  -en. 
suburb,  33orftabt, /.,  -^e. 
succeed,  gelingen,  st.,  impers.,  f, 

(dat.);  I  — ,  eg  gelingt  mir. 
such,  \o{&)(tx);  fo. 
suffer,  leiben,  st. 
suffice,  geniigen,  genug  fetn,  irr.,  f.; 

augreid^en. 
sufficient,  genug. 
sugar,  3ucfer,  m.,  -g. 
sum ;  —  of  money,  ©elbfumntc,/., 

-n. 
siunmer,  (Sommer,  m.,  -g,  — . 
summon,  berufen,  st. 
sun,  (Sonne,/.,  -n. 
Sunday,  Sonntag,  m.,  -g,  -e. 
sunshine,  Sonnenfd)ein,  w.,  -eg. 
superior,  iiberle'gen. 
supper,  Slbenbeffen,  n.,  -g;  5lbenb* 

brot,  n.,  -eg. 
suppose,  t)ermuten;  I  — ,  h)of)I  :c. 


334 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


sure,  fid^er,  gch)i6;  to  be  — ,  atter* 

bi'ng^,  ^mar,  freilic^. 
surprise,  Uberraf(f)ung, /.,  -en. 
suspicious     {obj.    of    suspicion), 

berbdc^tig. 
swallow  (up),  tjer  feeling  en,  st. 
swear  (take  oath),  \6)tt)'6xm,  st. 
sweet,  fiife. 

swell,  intr.,  fd^mellen,  st.,  f. 
swim,  fd^mimmen,  st.,  \.,  ^, 
Switzerland,  ©c^njei^,  /. 


table,  Xi\^,  m.,  -e6,  -e. 

tablespoon,  (Sfetoffel,  m.,  -6,  — ♦ 

tailor,  <Sd^neiber,  m.,  -^,  — . 

take,  ne!)men,  st.;  —  (a  drive, 
walk,  etc.),  madden;  —  a  look 
at,  \i&}  (dat.)  anfe{)en,  st.;  — 
care,  \\6)  in  Ci6:^i  nef)men,  st.  (of, 
t)or,  dat.);  —  off,  abnef)men;  — 
place,  ftattfinben,  st.;  —  cold, 
fi(^  erfalten. 

talk,  reben;  fpred)en,  st. 

tall,  grofe,  ^er,  grofet. 

tea,  %ttf  m.,  -^. 

teach,  le^ren  {ace.  of  pers.  and 
thing). 

teacher,  Set)rer,  m.,  -«,  — ;  2ti)' 
rerin, /.,  -nen. 

tear,  tr.,  reifeen,  gerreifeen,  st.;  intr., 
reifeen,  gerreigen,  st.,  {).,  f. 

teaspoon,  XttV6\\t\,  m.,  -g,  — . 

teem,  mimnteln. 

telegraph,  ^elegra'p^,  m.,  -en,  -en. 

telephone,  gernfpred^er,  w.,  -g,  — ; 
Mep^o'n,  n.,  -e6,  -e. 

tell  {inform),  jagen  {dat.);  —  {re- 
late), er.jci^Ien. 

ten,  je^n. 


terrible,  furd^tbar,  fd^redUd^,  fllrd^* 

terlic^,  entfei§Uc^. 
than,  alg. 

thank,  banfen  {dat.). 
that,  rel.  pron.,  ber,  tDeld^cr. 
that,  demonstr.,  ber;  biefer;  {yon- 
der), jener. 
that,  conj.,  bafe. 
the,  art.,  bet,  bie,  ia^, 
the  .  .  .  the  {in  compar.),  j[e,  befto, 

umfo. 
theatre,  X^taitXf  n.,  -^,  — ♦ 
thee,  bld^  {ace);  blr  {dat.). 
their,  ii)x. 

them,  fie  {ace);  if)nen  {dat.). 
then   {at  that  time),  ha,  ba'mdg; 

{thereupon),  bann,  barauf, 
there  {in  that  place),  ha,  bafelbft, 

bort;  {to  that  place),  hai)in,  bort* 

l^tn;    {before    verbs),    e^;    — in, 

barin;  — upon,  barauf;  over  — , 

briiben. 
therefore,  baf)er,  alfo. 
these,  biefe, 
they,  fie;  demonstr.,  bie;  biefe;  bic* 

felben;  indef,  man. 
thick,  bidf. 

thief,  !3)ieb,  m.,  -eg,  -e. 
thin,  biinn. 
thing,  ®ad)e,/.,  -n;  ^ing,  n.,  -eg, 

-er;   any — ,   some — ,    (Irgenb) 

tt\da^. 
think,     benfen,    irr.;     {suppose), 

glauben. 
thirsty,  burftig;  be  — ,  !Durft  l^aben, 

burftlg  fein. 
this,  biefer;  ber;  —  time,  bie6ma(. 
those,  biefe;  jene. 
thou,  bu. 
thousand,  noun,  ^aufenb,  «.,  -eS, 

-e. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


335 


three,  brct. 

thresh,  brefc^en,  st. 

thrive,  gebeit)en,  st.,  f. 

throne,  !If)ron,  w.,  -c3,  -c. 

through,  burc^  (ace). 

throw,   tDerfen,  st.;  fd^mcifecn,  st.; 

—  away,  fortmerfen,  6/. 
Thursday,  JDonner^tag,  w.,  -6,  -e. 
thus,  fo,  alfo,  auf  btefe  SBeife, 
ticket  (travelling),  ga^rfarte,  /., 

-n. 
tidy,  forgffiUig,  reinlid^, 
tie,  binben,  st. 
till,  bi^;  not  — ,  crft. 
time,  Qdt,  /.,   -en;   (repetition), 

9J?d,  «.;  all  the  — ,  beftanbig, 

immcr;  a  long  — ,  (angc;  at  one 

— ,  .  .  .  at  another,  balb  .  .  . 

balb;    several    — s,    Tnef)rTnaI^; 

this  — ,  bie^md;  what  —  is  it? 

n)ie  t)iel  U^r  ift  eg?;  by  this  — , 

fd^on. 
tired,  miibe. 
title,  Jitel,  w.,  -«,  — . 
to  (App,  By  4,  5),  gU  (dat.)  ;  —  {with 

place  names),  nac^   (dat.);   an, 

auf,  in  (ace);  before  infin.,  gu; 

—  and  fro,  f)in  unb  l^er,  auf  unb 
ab. 

to-day,  l^cute. 
together,  gufamnten. 
tomato,  Xomatc,  /.,  -n. 
to-morrow,  morgen;  —  morning, 

morgen  friif). 
tongue,  ^Vino,t,f.,  -n. 
too     (also),     auc^;     (of    excess), 

gu. 
toothache,  ^a^ntDt^,  «.,-«;  S^^^- 

fd^merjen,  pi. 
towards,  gegen  (ace). 
town,  ^tabt,  /.,  -^e;  to  — ,  gur 


(in  bie)   ©tabt;  in  — ,  in  ber 

©tabt 
town-hall,  dlat^au^,  n.,  -c«,  -^er. 
train,  3ug,  m.,  -e^,  -^e;  express  — , 

(©c^nellgug;  mixed  — ,  "iperfonen* 

gug. 
tram(way),  ©trafecnbal^n, /.,  -en, 
transparent,  bu'rc^fic^tig. 
travel,  reifen,  f.,  1^. 
travel,    traveling   (the    act    of), 

^Relfen,  «.,  -«. 
traveler,  9^eifenb(er),  adj.  subst.; 

commercial ,       ©efd^aft^rei* 

fenb(er);     fellow — ,     9)^itrei* 

fenb(er)» 
tread,  treten,  st.,  f.,  ^, 
treasure,  <Sd^ai5,  m.,  -e8,  ""-c. 
tree,  58aunt,  m.,  -e^,  -^e. 
tremble,  gittem. 
trip,  $Reife,  /.,  -n;  take  a  — ,  cine 

D^eife  madden. 
troop,  2:ruppe,  /.,  -n. 
trouble,  bemiil^en. 
true,  tda^x;  it  is  —  (=of  course), 

freilic^,  ghjar. 
trust,  trauen  (dat.);  —  one's  self, 

fic^  ant)ertrauen, 
truth,  SSa^r^eit,  /.,  -en, 
try  (attempt),  berfud^en, 
Tuesday,  ^ienStag,  m.,  -8,  -c. 
turn,    tr.,    fe^ren;    tuenben,    irr.; 

brel^en;   intr.,   fid^   hjenben,  fid^ 

bref)en;  — out  (to  be  the  case), 

fid^  f)erau«ftetlen;  —  to,  merben 

3u;  —  round,  (fic§)  umtuenben, 

etc. 
turn;  it  is  my  — ,  id^  bin  an  ber 

dldi)t,  fommc  an  bie  ^Heil^e. 
twice,  groeimal;  —  as  large,  noc^ 

einmal  fo  grog. 
two,  gmei;  beibe  (after  a  deter m.). 


33^ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN    VOCABULARY. 


umbrella,  9?egenf(^irTn,  m.,  -c^,  -e» 
uncle,  Onfel,  m.,  -«,  — » 
under,  unter  (daL  or  ace). 
unfortunate,  u'ngliicfUc^, 
unhappy,  u'ngliicflic^, 
uninjured,  unoerle^t. 
United  States  (the),  bie  3Sereinig= 

ten  ©taaten. 
university,    Unitjerfitci't,  /.,    -en; 

study  at  the  — ,  auf  ber  Unit)er= 

fitcit  ftubieren;  go  to  the  —  (as 

a  student),   auf  hk  U.  Qel^en; 

go  to  the  —  building,  gur  U. 

gel^en. 
impack,  au^pacfen. 
unpleasant,  unangenel^m* 
imtil,  bi^. 

up,  auf;  ^inauf;  ^erauf, 
upright,  aufred^t. 
upstairs   {motion    upwards),   ]^er= 

auf,  ^inauf;  (rest),  oben. 
us,  un^. 
use,  braud^en,  gebrau(f)en;  — d  to, 

impf.  or  pflegen  ^u. 
useful,  nii^Urf). 
usual,  geiDO^nltc^, 


valley,  2^al,  «.,  -e^,  -^er. 
vanity,  (gitelfeit, /.,  -en. 
vegetables,  ©emlife,  n.,  -g. 
veranda,  33eranba,  /.,  -^  or  33e= 

ranben. 
very,  fe^r;  —  much,  fe^^r. 
vex,  t)erbrie6en,  st.;  I  am  — ed,  e6 

t)erbne6t  mi(^;  Ic^  (irgere  ntid^: 
Victoria,  SBlftoria, /.,  -S. 


Vienna,   SBien,   «.,   -S;   (of)   — , 

ilBiener. 
view  (prospect),  Hu^fid^t,  /.,  -en, 
village,  ^orf,  n.,  -e€,  -«-er. 
violet,  33ei(c^en,  n.,  -^,  — . 
violent,  ^eftig. 
visit,  iBefud^,  m.,  -e^,  -e;  pay  — s, 

i8efucf)e  mac^en. 
visit,  befud^en. 
visitors,  iBefud),  w.,  -e§. 
voice,  ©timme,/.,  -n. 
volume,  S8anb,  m.,  -c8,  -"-c. 


W 

wait,  tDarten  (for,  auf,  ace). 
walk,   ©pa^iergang,   m.,  -e^,  -^e; 

take  (go  for)  a  — ,  einen  (Sp. 

madden;  fpajleren  gel^en,  st.,  f. 
walk,  gef)en,  st.,  f. 
want  (need),  brauc^en;  —  to,  2u\t 

{)aben  ^u,  iDorien. 
war,  ^rieg,  m.,  -t^,  -e. 
warm,  marnt,  -^er. 
warn,  marnen. 
wash,  tDafc^en,  st. 
waste,  toerfc^menben. 
waste-basket,  ipapterforb,  m.,  -e§, 

^e. 
watch,  Vit)x,f.,  -en,  ^afd^enu()r. 
water,  Staffer,  n.,  -^,  —  and  ■«■. 
water,  begiefeen,  st. 
water-sprite,  ^iict,f.,  -n. 
wave,  SBelle, /.,  -n. 
way  (road),  3Beg,  m.,  -e8,  -c;  in 

this     —    {manner),     auf    biefc 

SSeife. 
we,  tDir. 
wealthy,  reid^. 
weapon,  iESaffe,/.,  -n. 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


337 


weather,  SSctter,  «.,  -«. 

weave,  ftec^ten,  st. 

week,  SSo(^e,  /.,  -n;  ad^t  Jage, 

pi.;    a    —    ago,    t)eute    t)or    8 

!j:agen;  this  day  — ,  ^eute  liber 

8  Jage. 
weep,  meinen. 
weigh,  ir.,  tDagen,  st.;  inir.^  iDie- 

gen,  st. 
welcome,  adj.,  n3i(tfo'mmen. 
well,  adj.  (of  health),  h)of)I  {pred. 

only),    gefunb;    to  get  — ,  ge= 

nefen,  st.,  U 
well,  adv.,  tDol^I;  gut,  beffer,  am 

beften;  —  known,  befannt. 
well !  nun !  na ! 
west,   32Seften,   m.,  -^   or  — ;  on 

(in,  to)  the  — ,  im  SSeften,  meft* 

western,  rtjeftUd^, 

what?  interrog.  pron.,  hja^?;  adj., 

n)el(^er?;  —  (kind  of)  ?  ma^  fiir 

(ein)?;  —  time?  mie  mel  U()r?; 

—    day    of    the    month?    ber 

h)iet)ielte? 
what,  rel.  (that  which),  h3a6;  — 

ever,  hjag  auc^  (immer). 
wheat,  SBeijen,  m.,  -3. 
when,  al^,  iDenn. 
when?  iDann? 
where  {in  what  or  which  place), 

too;  (to  what  or  which  place), 

tDO^in. 
whether,  ob. 

which?  n)eld)(er,  -t,  -e«)? 
which,  rel.  pron.,  ber,  bie,  bag; 

Vdd^{tx,    -c,    -e6);    that    — , 

iDag. 
while ;  worth  — ,  ber  SO^ii^e  mert. 
while,    conj.,    h)df)renb,    Inbeffen, 

untcrbeffen. 


whistle,  pfeifen,  st, 

white,  tDeife. 

who?  roer? 

who,    rel.    pron.,    ber,   bie,    bag; 

n3elc^(er,  -e,  -eg);  he  (the  one) 

— ,  hjer. 
whoever,  tDer  aud^  (immer), 
whole  {adj.),  901x5, 
whom  {acc.)7  toen?  {dat.)  hjem? 
whose?  meffen? 
why?  marum?  meg^alb? 
wide,  breit, 
wife,  grau, /.,  -en;  ©emal^Iin, /., 

-nen;  SKeib,  «.,  -eg,  -er, 
will  {aux.  of  tense),  hierben,  st.\ 

{mod.  aux.),  tDOlIen,  irr. 
WilUam,  SStl^etm,  w.,'-g, 
willing  (to  be),  bereit  fein;  njoffcn, 

irr. 
win,  geminnen,  st. 
wind,  SSlnb,  m.,  -eg,  -e, 
window,  genfter,  n.,  -g,  — ♦ 
wine,  iE3ein,  m.,  -eg,  -e, 
winter,  2Binter,  m.,  -g,  — , 
wipe,  abpu^en, 
wish,  miinfd^en;  h)olten,  irr. 
with,    mit    {dat.);    {at   the   house 

of),  bet  {dat.);  {about  the  per- 
son), bei, 
without,  o^ne  {ace). 
witness,  3^uge,  m.,  -n,  -n, 
woman,  grau, /.,  -en, 
wonder,    fic^   munbern;   I   —   at 

that,  bag  n)unbert  mic^. 
wonder  of  the  world,  SSetttDunber, 

n.,  -g,  — . 
wood    {material),    .^olj,    n.,    -eg, 

■^er;  {forest,  woods),  2BaIb,  m., 

-eg,  ^er. 
woodcutter,  ^olgl^auer,  m.,  -g,  — . 
word,    SSort,    «.,   -eg,  ^er    i^sep- 


33^ 


ENGLISH-GERMAN   VOCABULARY. 


araie     words)  ^     -C     {connected 

words). 
work    (labor),    Hrbeit,    /.,    -en; 

SSerf,  n.,  -e8,  -c. 
work,  arbetten. 

workman,  5lr belter,  m.,  -^,  — » 
world,  iSSelt,/.,  -en, 
worth,    h)ert    {ace.    or   gen.);    — 

while,  ber  Tlui)t  h)ert. 
worthy,  n)ilrbig;  iDert  {gen.). 
wrecked  (to  be),  fd^eitern,  f, 
wring,  ring  en,  st. 
write,  fc^reiben,  st.  (to,  an,  ace.). 
writing  (act  of),  ©d^relben,  «.,  -6. 
writing-desk  (-table),  ©c^reibtifc^, 

m.,  -e^,  -e* 
wrong    (to    be    in    the),    unred^t 

l^aben;  be  —  {of  a  time-piece)  y 

nld^t  ric^tlg  ge^en,  st,,  f» 


year,  ^al^r,  «.,  -e^,  -e. 

yes,  ja;  —  indeed.  Oh  — ,  jan^o^I; 

{in  contradicting),  bod^. 
yesterday,  ge'ftem. 
yet  {already),  fc^on;  not  — ,  nod^ 

nid^t. 
yonder,  adj.,  jener. 
yonder,  adv.,  bort. 
you,  @ie,  \^x,  bu;  indef.,  man, 
young,  jung,  -^er, 
your,  3]^r;  ?uer;  beln. 
yours,  3()rer;  eurer;  beiner;  ber  (bie, 

ba^)3]^r(ig)e,  eur(tg)e,  bein(ig)e. 
yourself,  refl.,  fid^  (felbft) ;  bir,  bic^; 

(you)  — ,  (Sie  (bu)  felbft,  felber, 
yoiurselves,  refl.,  fic^;  euc^;  (you) 

— ,  ©ie  (il^r)  felbft,  felber^ 


INDEX 


The  references  are  to  the  sections,  paragraphs,  and  notes,  unless 
otherwise  specified. 


ahcv,  40,  n.  i ;  256,  5. 
'  about,'  Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B,  4. 
Accusative:  form,  11,  2;  use,  18, 266- 
269;  advbl.,  29;  after  preps.,  76-83, 

123-133- 

Address,  prons.  of,  7,  141. 

Addresses,  186. 

Adjectives:  predicate,  1,2;  place,  9; 
comparison,  13, 164-170 ;  as  adv.,  16 ; 
declension,  56,  57,  66-68;  used 
substantively,  58 ;  as  nouns,  68 ;  of 
nationality,  183 ;  ordl.,  184 ;  possess., 
25;  interrog.,  201-203;  indef.  pro- 
no  m.,  229-237 ;  as  prefixes,  251,  3 ; 
appositive,  264. 

Adverbs:  comparison,  13,  164-170; 
adjs.  as,  16 ;  multiplicative,  42 ;  word 
order,  69;  ordl.,  184;  use,  238; 
idioms,  239-249;  as  impve.,  286,  2; 
as  preps.,  App.  B,  i,  n.  5, 

Agreement :  art.  and  noun,  i,  3 ;  pers. 
prons.,  140;  poss.  adj.,  4,  25,  2-4; 
poss.  prons.,  32,  162,  2;  rel.  and 
antecedent,  74,  i,  214;  verb  and 
subj.,  262. 

an,  230. 

•all,'  231,  I. 

Alphabet,  s^e  Introduction. 

aU,  13, 71,  3, 168, 1, 260, 5,  263, 2,  297, 

2.3- 

an,  prep.,  125. 

anbcrt^alb,  210. 

anftatt,  290,  i,  App.  B,  i. 

Apposition :  in  quantity,  112,  3 ;  of 
nouns,  263 ;  of  adjs.  and  parts.,  264. 

Article,  definite:  decl.,  17;  contrac- 
tion, 19,  84,  95,  n.,  124 ;  use,  107-110 ; 


with  prop,  names,  108,  187,  3,  188, 
189;   for  poss.   adj.,   no;   distrib., 

113. 

Article,  indefinite :  decl.,  25 ;  omission, 

III ;  Eng.  distrib.,  113. 
'  as,'  215,  260,  1,2. 
•as'  .  .  .  •as,'  in  compar.,  13,  168. 
'  at,'   Ger.  equivs  ,    App.  B,  4 ;   after 

vbs.,  etc.,  App.  B,  5. 
au(^,  after  rels.,  212,  n. ;  use,  239, 258, 1. 
auf,  prep.,  126,  170,  n.  i,  183,  2. 
au9,  prep.,  93. 
au^er,  prep.,  94. 
au^cr^alb,  App.  B,  i. 
Auxiliaries  of  mood,  see  Modal  Auxs. 
Auxiliaries  of  tense :  use,  37,  39, 46-48, 

60-62 ;  paradigms,  App.  C,  i. 
Auxiliary,   as    verb   in  comp.  tenses, 

40,  4- 

bet,  prep.,  95. 

hcihe,  114,  3. 

hei^en  model,  148,  i. 

bctjor,  260,  10,  II. 

^i^r  77 ;  —  ^uf/ 126,  n. 

bleibcn  model,  148,  2. 

33lumc  model,  53. 

•  by,'  Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B,  4. 

Capitals,  use,  see  Introduction. 

Cardinal  numerals,  41. 

Case  forms  of  nouns,  20. 

Cases,  use,  18. 

Comma,  use.  Introduction  and,  22,  2, 

70.5- 
Comparison,  13,  164-170. 
Compound  nouns,  35. 


339 


340 


INDEX 


Compound  verbs,  50-52,  250-254. 
Conditional    mood,    formation,    103- 

105;  use,  166. 
Conditional  sentences,  106. 
Conjugation,  see  under  Verbs ;  Auxs. 

of  Tense;      Compound;      Mixed; 

Modal  Auxs. ;  Passive ;  fcin;  Strong ; 

Weak. 
Conjunctions:  255-261:  coord.,  256; 

abvbl.,  257,  258 ;    subord.,  259,  260 ; 

correl.,  261. 
Connectives,  40,  n,  i,  256. 
Contraction  of  def.  art.,  19,  84,  95,  n., 

124. 
Coordinative  conjunctions,  255-258. 
Correlative  clauses,  261,  4. 
Correlative  conjunctions,  261. 
•  could,'  158,  6. 
Countries,  names  of,  gender,  108,  i,  n, 

ba,  conj.,  260,  2,  297,  2,  4. 

ba,  for  pronouns,  85,  102, 134 ;  for  de- 

monstr.,  200. 
ba^,  omission,  91, 5 ;  clauses  with,  288, 

I,  notes. 
Dates,  185. 
Dative :  use  of,  18, 3, 274-277 ;  form,  20 ; 

after  preps.,  92-101,  123-133;   App. 

B,  2;   possess,  dat.,  163;  with  adjs., 

275;   with  verbs,  276 ;     ethical  dat., 

277. 
Declension :  nouns,  33-35,  43,  53,  54, 

59;  adjs.,  56,  57,  66-68. 
Demonstratives,  190-200. 
benn,  conj.,  40,  n.  i,  256,  4,  258,  2. 
Dependent  sentences,  word  order  of, 

70 ;  dep.  questions,  see  Indirect, 
ber,  def.  art.,  see  Article. 
ber,  demonstr.  pron.,  192,  193,  199. 
ber,  rel.  pron.,  decl.,  72;  use,  74,  214. 
bercn,  193,  n. 

bergleic^en,  demonstr.,  198;  rel.,  213. 
bericnige,  194, 195. 
berfelO  (ig)c,  196,  199. 
be^gletd^en,  213. 
bcffcn,  199,  3. 


bcftc,  168,  3,  261,  3. 

biefer,  31, 191,  199. 

bie^feit,  App.  B,  i. 

Distance,  measure  of,  112,  4. 

Distributive  article,  113. 

bocf),  240. 

2)orf  model,  43;  App.  A,  4. 

bu,  use,  7,  141. 

bur c^,  prep.,  78;  prefix,  254. 

bitrfen,  use,  159,  i,  174. 

c,  of  gen.  and  dat.  sing.,  33,  2. 
ebcn,  241. 

ZlCjZ,  260,  10,  II. 

cin,  25,  41, 114. 

etnanber,  151. 

ctner,  decl.,  31 ;  use,  218,  3,  222. 

citttge,  234. 

cm  ^aar,  221. 

Emphatic  pron.,  152. 

cntgcgen,  App.  B,  2. 

entlang,  App.  B,  3. 

crft,  242. 

c^r  idiomatic  uses,  143. 

effcn  model,  148,  6. 

Essential  parts  of  nouns,  34. 

Ethical  dative,  277. 

ctltcfee,  234. 

etnja^,  220.  - 

'  ever,'  after  rel.  prons,,  212,  3,  n. 

fallen  model,  148,  14. 

Family  names,  187,  3,  n.  2. 

fe(^ten  model,  148,  5. 

Feminines,  decl.,  20,  2, 33,  2,  59;  App. 

A,  3. 
'for,'  prep.,  Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B,  4; 

after  vbs.,  etc.,  App.  B,  5. 
Foreign    nouns,    gender,    36;    decl., 

59- 
Fractions,  209,  210. 
i^rdulein,  agreement,  139,  n. 
frieren  model,  148,  3. 
'  from,'  after  vbs.,  etc.,  App.  B,  5. 
fixr,  79.     • 
Future  passive  participle,  296. 


INDEX 


341 


Future  perfect  tense,  formation,  48; 

use,  284. 
Future  tense,  formation,  47 ;  use,  283, 

286,  2. 

gans,  231. 

ge-,  prefix  of  past  part.,  37,  2 ;  omis- 
sion, 51,  120. 

gcgcn,  80. 

gcgeniiber,  loi. 

gcma§,  App.  B,  3. 

Gender,  rules  of,  i,  35,  36,  44,  5$;  of 
proper  names,  108,  n. 

Genitive:  use,  18,  270-273 ;  form,  20; 
of  time,  87 ;  position,  271 ;  with 
adjs.  and  vbs.,  272;  advbl.  gen., 
273 ;  preps,  with,  App.  B,  i. 

vjcrn,  use,  243. 

Gerund,  English,  290.. 

Qkid),  prep.,  App.  B,  2. 

@raf  model,  53 ;  App.  A,  6. 

f^aherifUse  as  aux.,  37-39;  omission, 
70,  7;  paradigm,  App.  C,  i. 

^dih,  decl.,  209;  in  mixed  numbers, 
210. 

^aihen,  f)a{hev,  App.  B,  i. 

•  half,'  209,  210. 

^anb  model,  33;  App.  A,  3. 

l;elfen  model,  148,  11. 

f)CX,  prefix,  253. 

l^icr,  for  demonstr.,  200. 

\)in,  prefix,  253. 

f)inUv,  prep.,  127;  prefix,  254,  4,  n.  2. 

House  numbers,  186. 

^unb  model,  33 ;  App.  A,  i,  2. 

'  if,'  in  dependent  questions,  91,  4. 
ii)V,  pers.  pron.,  use,  7,  141. 
tmmer,  after  rel.,  212,  n. 
Imperative  mood,  formation,  115,117, 

145 ;  use,  286. 
Imperfect    indie,    formation,    26-28, 

144 ;  use,  280. 
Imperfect  subj.,  formation,  88,  89, 147 ; 

use  in  indir.  statements,  91. 


Impersonal  verbs,  142, 272,  4. 

in,  prep.,  128. 

'  in,'  Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B.  4. 

Indefinite  art.,  see  Article. 

Indefinite  pronom.  adj.,  229-237. 

Indefinite  pronouns,  217-223. 

inbem,  260,  i,  297,  2,  4. 

mbeffcn,  260,  i  and  6. 

Indicative  mood,  in  indir.  statements, 

91,  2,  n. ;  use,  278;  tenses  of,  279- 

284. 
Indirect  statements  and  questions,  91. 
Infinitive:  after  vbs.,   22,288;  place, 

49,  70,  2,  3 ;   of  purpose,  65,  288,  2 ; 

formation,  118 ;   as  impve.,  286,2; 

without  5U,  157,  287;   with  ju,  288- 

292;  substantival,  289;   with  preps. 

290;   for  gerund,  290,   2-7;    inter- 

rog.  infin.,  291 ;  elliptical  infin.,  292. 
'-ing,'  Eng.  infinitive  in,  289,  i,  n., 

290. 
tnmittcn,  App.  B,  i. 
tnner^alS,  App.  B,  i. 
Inseparable  prefixes,  51,  250-254. 
Interrogatives,  201-208. 
irgenb,  223,  n. 

K244. 

U,  168,  3,  261,  3. 

jcbcr,  decl.,  31 ;  use,  232, 

jcbcrmann,  219. 

jcbttjcbcr,  232. 

iegttc^cr,  232. 

jemanb,  219. 

jcner,  decl.,  31 ;  use,  191. 

jcttfctt,  App.  B,  I. 

fctn,  25. 

fctner,  decl.,  31 ;  use,  222. 
^nabc  model,  53. 
fonncn,  use,  159,  2,  175. 
fraft,  prep.,  App.  B,  i. 

Language-names,  183. 
laffcn,  conjugation,  148,  14;   use,  159,. 
7,  180, 


342 


INDEX 


lant,  prep.,  App.  B,  i. 
Letters,  how  to  address,  i86. 

ayjaler  model,  43. 

tnan,  indef.  pron.,  75,  n.  2,  218. 

manc^er,  233. 

-maun,  compounds  with,  35,  n. 

Measure,  expression  of,  112. 

rmi)V,  in  comparison,  168,  3,  n.  i; 
pronom.  adj.,  235. 

tnc^rerc,  236. 

ntcin,  poss.  adj.,  decl.,  25. 

mi^-,  prefix,  254,  4,  n.  3. 

mit,  prep.,  96. 

Mixed  conjugation,  153-156. 

Mixed  declension :  of  nouns,  54;  of 
adjs.,  56,  57. 

Mixed  numbers,  210. 

Modal  auxiliaries:  conjugation,  153- 
156;  paradigms,  App.  C,  2;  use, 
157-160,  173-180;  comp.  tenses, 
171,  172. 

mcgcu,  use,  159,  3,  176. 

Mood,  auxiliaries  of,  see  Modal  Aux- 
iliaries ;  in  indir.  discourse,  91 ;  in 
condl.  sentences,  106. 

Moods  of  verb,  see  under  various 
moods. 

Motion,  verbs  of,  62. 

tniiffen,  use,  159,  4, 177. 

nac^,prep.,97. 

nacf)t>em,  260, 11,  297,  3. 

ndc^ft,  prep.,  App.  B,  2. 

9iamc  model,  54;  App.  A,  7. 

Names,  see  under  Person  names, 
Place  names. 

Nationality,  adjs.  and  nouns  of,  183. 

nebft,  App.  B,  2. 

nic^tg,  220. 

nic^l^  rtjetttgcr  al^,  260,  5. 

ntcmanb,  219. 

noc^,  245. 

Nominative,  form,  20 ;  use,  18,  265. 

Nouns :  case  forms,  20 ;  strong  decl., 
33-35.  43;  weak  dec).,  53;  mixed 
decl.,  54;  essential  parts,  34;    com- 


pound, 35;  summary  of  decl.,  59; 
gender,  1,35,  36,  44,  55;  reference 
lists,  App.  A,  1-9 ;  nouns  of  national- 
ity, 183;  5s  prefixes,  251. 

Numerals,  cardinal,  41 ;  remarks  on, 
114 ;  ordinal,  184-186,  189. 

nur,  246. 

ob,  conj.,  in  dep.  questions,  91,  260,  7, 

ob,  prep.,  App.  B,  3. 

obcr^alb,  App.  B,  i. 

obgieic^,  obfc^on,  etc.,  260,  8. 

Objects,  word  order,  69. 

obcr,  40,  n.  I,  256. 

'of,'   how  rendered,  99,   notes;    Ger. 

equivs.,  App.  B,  4 ;   after  vbs.,  App. 

B,5. 
ot;ne,  81,  290. 

£)^r  model,  54;  App.  A,  9. 
•on,'  Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B,  4. 
Ordinals,  184,  185,  189. 

Participles:  present,  294,  297;  past, 
formation,  37,  2, 119, 120 ;  as  impve., 
286,  2;  idioms,  295;  fut.  passive, 
296;  place,  40,  49,  70;  as  nouns, 
68;  use,  293-298;  adjectival,  294, 
298. 

Passive:  with  tDcrben,  simple  tenses, 
75 ;  with  fettt,  75.  n.  i,  227 ;  replaced 
by  matt  constr.,  75,  n.  2,  218,  5; 
passive  voice,  224-228;  paradigm, 
226,  App.  C,  6. 

Perfect  tense,  formation,  37 ;  use,  38, 
281. 

Personal  pronouns:  of  address,  7, 
141 ;  word  order  of,  69 ;  paradigms, 
139;  agreement,  140;  substitutes 
for,  85,  102,  134,  199;  after  h)te  as 
rel.,  215. 

Person  names,  187-189. 

Place  names:  with  art.,  108;  gender, 
108;  with  l^alb,  209,  2,  n.;  with 
gans,  231,  3. 

Pluperfect  tense,  formation,  39;  use, 
282. 

Possessive  adjectives,  25. 


INDEX 


343 


Possessive  case,  Eng.,  how  rendered, 
i8.  2. 

Possessive  dative,  163. 

Possessive  pronouns,  31,  32,  161,  162. 

Predicate  accusative,  267. 

Predicate  adjective,  i,  9. 

Predicate  nominative,  265,  2. 

Prefixes,  to  verbs,  50,  51,  250-254. 

Prepositions :  contractions,  19,  84,  95, 
n.;  with  ace,  76;  with  dat.,  92-101. 
App.  B,  2;  with  dat.  or  ace,  123- 
133;  with  infin.,  290;  with  gen., 
App.  B,  i;  with  varying  case, 
App.  B,  3 ;  Ger.  equivs.  of  Eng.  do., 
App.  B,  4 ;  after  vbs.,  etc.,  App.  B,  5. 

Present  indicative,  formation,  14; 
vowel  changes  of  strong  vbs.  in, 
145;  use,  279;  as  impve.,  286,  2. 

Present  participle,  see  Participles. 

Present  subjunctive,  formation,  88,  89 ; 
use,  in  indir.  discourse,  91. 

Price,  ace.  of,  29. 

Principal  parts,  of  verb,  136,  145,  3. 

Principal  sentences,  word  order  of,  40, 

Pronouns,  word  order,  69;  see  also 
under  Personal,  Possessive,  etc. 

Pronunciation,  see  Introduction. 

Proper  names,  see  Person  names, 
Place  names. 

Punctuation,  see  Introduction. 

Purpose,  infin.  of,  65, 288, 2 ;  subjunc- 
tive of,  285,  4. 

Quantity,  expressions  of,  112. 
Quantity,  of  vowels  and  consonants, 

see  Introduction. 
Quasi-prefixes,  251. 
Questions,  indirect,  91. 

Reciprocal  pronouns,  151. 
Reference    lists :     nouns,     App.    A ; 

preps.,  App.  B;    strong  and  irreg. 

vbs.,  App.  D. 
Reflexive  pronouns  and  verbs,  149- 

152. 

Relative  pronouns,  72-74,  211-216. 


Repetition  of  article,  possessives,  etc., 

12. 
Rivers,  names  of,  182,  n. 

famt,  App.  B,  2. 

fd)tc§en  model,  148,  4. 

fc^Iagcn  model,  148,  13. 

fd)oit,  247. 

Script,  German,  see  Introduction. 

fc^en  model,  148,  7. 

fcin,  'to  be,'  paradigm,  App.   C,  i ; 

verbs  conjugated  with,  61,  62,  App. 

C,  5 ;  omission  70,  7 ;  passive  with, 

75,  n.  I,  227. 
feit,  prep.,  98. 
fcit  (bcm),  260,  3,  4. 
fclbcr,  felbft,  152. 
Separable  prefixes,  50,  250-254. 
<©te, '  you,'  use,  7,  141. 
'  since,'  260. 
fingen  model,  148,  12. 
@ol)n  model,  33. 
fo,  in  comparison,  13,  168;  in  condl. 

sents.,  106,  4,  5 ;  in  correl.  clauses, 

261,  4. 
'so  .  .  .  as,'  in  comparison,  13,  168. 
fo  ctn,  215. 
folc^,  197,  215. 
foUcn,  use,  159,  5,  160,  178. 
'  some,'  how  rendered,  220,  223,  234, 

2,  n. 
fonbern,  256,  6. 
f^inncn  model,  148,  10. 
f^rec^en  model,  148,  8. 
ftatt,  see  anftatt. 
ftc^Ien  model,  148,  9. 
Stress,  see   Introduction;    in    comp. 

vbs.,  250,  254. 
Strong    conjugation,    144-148;  App. 

C.4. 
Strong  declension :  of  nouns,  33,  43, 

59;  of  adjs.,  56,  57. 
Subjunctive  mood :  formation,  88,  89 ; 

impf.,  147;    use,  90,  285;    in  indir. 

discourse,  91 ;  in  condl.  sentences. 

106;  as  impve.,  ii6,  285,  2. 


344 


INDEX 


Subordinative  conjunctions,  259,  260. 
Substantival  adjective,  58. 
Substantival  infinitive,  289. 
Superlative,  169,  170. 
Syllabication,  see  Introduction. 

Tense,  in  indir.  discourse,  91. 
Tenses:  of  indie,  279-284;    see  also 

under  Auxiliaries    and    under  the 

various  tenses. 
'than,'  after  comparatives,  13,  168. 
'that,'  dem.  pron.,  how  rendered,  191. 
'  there,'  before  vbs.,  143. 
Time,  ace.  of,  29 ;  word  order,  30, 69 ; 

time  of  day,  86;  gen.  of  time,  87; 

Eng.  pres.  part,  of,  297. 
Titles,  188,  262,  3. 
'to,'  prep.,  how  rendered,   lOO,  n. ; 

Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B,  4;  after  vbs., 

etc.,  App.  B,  5. 
tro^,  App.  B,  3. 

iiber,  prep.,  130;  prefix,  254. 

um,  prep.,  82;    with  infin.,  65,  290; 

prefix,  254. 
Umlaut:  in  comparison,  13,  165;  in 

declension,  33,  43,  59,  App.  A,  3-5; 

in  impf.  subj.,  88,  89,  147. 
umfo,  in  compar.,  168,  3. 
um  ♦  ♦  ♦  hjtflen,  App.  B,  i. 
Uttt  %yx,  after  adjs.,  288,  4,  n. 
unb,  40,  n.  I ;  256,  2,  3. 
unfcrn,  App.  B,  i. 
unter,  prep.,  131 ;  prefix,  254. 
unterbcffen,  260,  i,  6. 
unter^alb,  App.,  B,  i. 
untuett,  App.  B,  i. 
'  used  to,'  how  rendered,  280,  i. 

35ater  model,  43;  App.  A,  5. 

Verb,  place  of,  40,  70. 

Verbs:  with  fettt,  61,62;  stems,  135; 
prin.  parts,  136 ;  special  weak  forms, 
137 ;  irreg.  weak,  138 ;  strong-,  144- 
148;  classesof  strong,  148;  impers., 
142, 272,  4 ;  reflexive,  149, 150 ;  com- 


pound, 50-52,  250-254 ;  agreement, 
262;  paradigms,  App.  C;  preps, 
after,  App.  B,  5 ;  alphabetical  list  of 
strong  and  irreg.,  App.  D;  of  ac- 
cusing, etc.,  272,  3;  of  choosing, 
etc.,  267,  3 ;  of  naming,  etc.,  267,  i ; 
of  regarding,  etc.,  267,  2 ;  of  teach- 
ing, 266,  2. 

tcrmtttelft,  App.  B,  i. 

tjermoge,  App.  B,  i. 

better  model,  54;  App.  A,  8. 

t)tel,  use,  237. 

Vocative,  265,  i. 

t>olI,  adj.,  272,  I,  n. 

t)ofl,  prefix,  251,  3,  n. 

J30n,  with  passive,  75,  2 ;  use,  99 ;  re- 
places gen.,  99,  notes,  181,  2,  n. 

t)or,  prep.,  132,  260,  n. 

tt>alt)renb,  App.  B,  i. 

njann,  71. 

ttja^,  interrog.   pron.,  207,  208;    rel. 

pron.,  211,  212. 
tt>a^  fiir  ein,  202,  203. 
Weak  conjugation,  special  forms,  137 ; 

irreg.,  138;  paradigm,  App.  C,  3. 
Weak  declension :  of  nouns,  53 ;   of 

adjs.,  56,  57. 
hjcgen,  App.  B,  i. 
Weight,  expression  of,  112. 
-ttjcifc,  advs.  in,  273,  2. 
iDCId^cr  :  interrog.,  decl.,  31 ;  use,  206; 

rel.  pron.,  decl.,73;  use,  74;  indef. 

pron.,  223. 
hjcnig,  use,  237. 

njenn,  use,  71 ;  omission,  io6,  5. 
h)ennc;teic^,  etc.,  260,  8. 
hjcr,  interrog.,  207, 208 ;  rel.,  211, 212. 
kocrben  :  aux.  of  tense,  46-48 ;  aux.  of 

condl.,  103-105 ;  aux.  of  passive,  75, 

225,  226;  paradigm,  App.  C,  i. 
ttjcg,  208,  3. 

'  when,'  how  rendered,  71. 
'whether,'  in  dep.  questions,  91. 
'  while,'  260,  6. 
'whole',  231. 


INDEX 


345 


tDtber,  prep.,  83. 

tt)k,  use,  13,  2,  168,  2 ;  as  rel.,  215 ;  in 
appos.,  263,  2. 

tvicbcr,  as  prefix,  254,  4,  n. 

tDiffen,  conjugation,  153-156. 

*  with,'  Ger.  equivs.,  App.  B,  4. 

h)of)I,  248. 

IcoUcn,  use,  64,  159,  6,  160,  179. 

h)o(r),  before  preps.,  74,  4,  208,  2. 

Word  order,  rules  of:  place  of  pred. 
adj.,  9;  of  infin.,  22,  49;  of  expres- 
sions of  time,  30;  in  prin.  sentences 
(vb.  and  past  part;), 40 ;  disregarded 
in  verse,  40,  n.  2 ;  of  objects,  prons., 
and  advs.,  69;   in  dep.  sentences, 


70;  in  rel.  clauses,  74,  216;  in  mo- 
dals,  172. 
'would,'  of  customary  action,  280,  i,n. 

Year  number,  185. 

'  you,'  how  rendered,  7,  141. 

'  your,'  how  rendered,  7.  • 

gu,  prep.,  use,  100;  with  infin.,  22,  65. 

gucrft,  249. 

jufolgc,  App.  B,  3. 

^umd)%  App.  B,  2. 

5un)ibcr,  App.  B.  3, 

snjifc^en,  133. 


ADVERTISEMENTS 


l)eatb's  /^^o^ern  language  Series^ 

GERMAN  GRAMMARS  AND  READERS. 

Nix*s  Erstes  deutsches  Schulbuch.  For  primary  classes.  Illus.  202  pp.  35  cts. 
Joynes-Meissner  German  Grammar.     Half  leather.    ^1.15. 
Joynes's  Shorter  German  Grammar.    Part  I  of  the  above.    80  cts. 
Alternative  Exercises.    Two  sets.    Can  be  used,  for  the  sake  of  change,  in- 
stead of  those  in  the  Joyties-Meissner  itself.     54  pages.     15  ct3. 
Joynes  and  Wesselhoeft's  German  Grammar.    $1.15. 
Fraser  and  Van  der  Smissen's  German  Grammar.    51.10. 
Harris's  German  Lessons.     Elementary   Grammar  and  Exercises  for  a 

short  course,  or  as  introductory  to  advanced  grammar.     Cloth.     60  cts. 
Sheldon's  Short  German  Grammar.   For  those  who  want  to  begin  reading  as 

seon  as  possible,  and  have  had  training  in  some  other  languages.  Cloth.  6oc 
Ball's  German  Grammar.     90  cts. 

Ball's  German  Drill  Book.     Companion  to  any  grammar.     80  cts. 
Spanhoof d's  Lehrbuch  der  deutschen  Sprache.  Grammar,  conversation,  and 

exercises,  with  vocabularies.     $1.00. 
Foster's  Geschichten  und  Marchen.     For  young  children.    25  cts. 
Guerber's  Marchen  und  Erzahlungen,  I.     With  vocabulary  and  questions 

in  German  on  the  text.     Cloth.     162  pages.     60  cts. 
Guerber's  Marchen  und  Erzahlungen,  n.     With  Vocabulary.   Follows  the 

above  or  serves  as  independent  reader.    Cloth.    202  pages.    65  cts, 
Jojmes's  Shorter  German  Reader.    60  cts. 
Deutsch's  Colloquial  German  Reader.    90  cts. 
Spanhoofd's  Deutsches  Lesebuch.    75  cts. 
Boisen's  German  Prose  Reader.    90  cts. 
Huss's  German  Reader.     70  cts. 
Gore's  German  Science  Reader.     75  cts. 
Harris's  German  Composition.     50  cts. 

Wesselhoeft's  Exercises.     Conversation  and  composition.     50  cts; 
Wesselhoeft's  German  Composition.    40  cts. 
Hatfield's  Materials  for  German  Composition.  Based  on  Immenste  and  on 

Hbher  als  die  Kir  eke.     Paper.     33  pages.     Each,  12  cts. 
Homing's  Materials  for  German  Composition.     Based  on  Der  Schwie- 

gersohn.    32  pages.  12  cts.     Part  II  only.     16  pages.     5  cts. 
Stiiven's  Praktische  Anfangsgriinde.     Cloth.    203  pages.     70  cts. 
Kriiger  and  Smith's  Conversation  Book.    40  pages.    25  cts. 
Meissner's  German  Conversation.    65  cts. 
Deutsches  Liederbuch.     With  music.     164  pages.     75  cts. 
Heath's  German  Dictionary.     Retail  price,  ^1.50. 


Tbeatb'B  /Ro&ern  XanguaQe  Series/ 

ELEMENTARY  GERMAN  TEXTS. 

Grimm's  Marchen  and  Schiller's  Der  Taucher  (van  der  Smissen).    With 

vocabulary.     Mdrchen  in  Roman  Type.     45  cts. 
Andersen's  Marchen  (Super).    With  vocabulary.     50  cts. 
Andersen's  Bilderbuch  ohne  Bilder  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Campe's  Robinson  der  Jiingere  (Ibershoff).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Leander's  Traumereien  (van  der  Smissen).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Volkmann's  Kleine  Geschichten  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Easy  Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Deering).     15  cts. 
Storm's  Geschichten  aus  der  Tonne  (Vogel).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Storm's  In  St.  Jiirgen  (Wright).    Vocabulary.     30  cts. 
Storm's  Immensee  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.     30  cts. 
Storm's  Pole  Poppenspaler  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Heyse's  Niels  mit  der  offenen  Hand  (Joynes).  Vocab.  and  exercises.  30  cts. 
Heyse's  L'Arrabbiata  (Bernhardt).     With  vocabulary.     25  cts. 
Von  Hillern's  Hoher  als  die  Kirche  (Clary).    Vocab.  and  exercises.   30  cts. 
Banff's  Der  Zwerg  Nase.    No  notes.    15  cts. 

Hauff's  Das  kalte  Herz  (van  der  Smissen).    Vocab.    Roman  type.    40  cts. 
Ali  Baba  and  the  Forty  Thieves.     No  notes.    20  cts. 
Schiller's  Der  Taucher  (van  der  Smissen).    Vocabulary.     12  cts. 
Schiller's  Der  Neffe  als  Onkel  (Beresford-Webb).  Notes  and  vocab.   30  cts, 
Goethe's  Das  Marchen  (Eggert).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Baumbach's  Waldnovellen  (Bernhardt).    Six  stories.  Vocabulary.    35  cts^ 
Spjrri's  Rosenresli  (Boll).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Spyri's  Moni  der  Geissbub.     With  vocabulary  by  H.  A.  Guerber.    25  cts. 
Zschokke's  Der  zerbrochene  Krug  (Joynes).  Vocab.  and  exercises.  25  cts. 
Baumbach's  Nicotiana  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Elz's  Er  ist  nicht  eifersiichtig.   With  vocabulary  by  Prof.  B.  Wells.  20  cts. 
Carmen  Sylva's  Aus  meinemKonigreich  (Bernhardt).  Vocabulary.  35  cts. 
Gerstacker's  Germelshaasen  (Lewis).     Notes  and  vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Wichert's  Als  Verlobte  empfehlen  sich  (Flom).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
.  Benedix's  Nein  (Spanhoofd).     Vocabulary  and  exercises.     25  cts. 
Benedix's  Der  Prozess  (Wells).    Vocabulary.     20  cts. 
Lambert's  AUtagliches.     Vocabulary  and  exercises.     75  cts. 
Der  Weg  zum  Gliick  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.     40  cts. 
Mosher's  Willkommen  in  Deutschland.   Vocabulary  and  exercises.   75  cts. 
Bliithgen's  Das  Peterle  von  Niimberg  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.     35  cts. 
Miinchhausen:  ReisenundAbenteuer  (Schmidt).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 


fteatb'6  jflDo&ern  Xanguage  Series^ 

INTERMEDIATE  GERMAN  TEXTS.     (Partial  List.) 

Baumbach's  Das  Habichtsfraulein  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Heyse's  Hochzeit  auf  Capri  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.     30  cts. 

Hoffmann's  Gymnasium  zu  Stolpenburg  (Buehner).    Vocabulary.     35  cts 

Grillparzer's  Derarme  Spielmann  (Howard).     Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Seidell  Aus  Goldenen  Tagen  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Seidel's  Leberecht  Huhnchen  (Spanhoofd).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Auf  der  Sonnenseite  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Frommel's  Mit  Ranzel  und  Wanderstab  (Bernhardt).  Vocabulary.  35  cts* 

Frommel's  Eingeschneit  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Keller's  Kleider  machen  Leute  (Lambert).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Liliencron's  Anno  1870  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Baumbach's  Die  Nonna  (Bernhardt).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Riehl's  Der  Fluch  der  SchOnheit  (Thomas).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Riehl's  Das  Spielmannskind ;  Der  stumme  Ratsherr  (Eaton).    Vocabu- 
lary and  exercises.     35  cts. 

Ebner-Eschenbach's  Die  Freiherren  von  Gemperlein  (Hohlfeld).    30  cts. 

Preytag's  Die  Joumalisten  (Toy).    30  cts.    With  vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Wilbrandt's  Das  Urteil  des  Paris  (Wirt).    30  cts. 

Schiller's  Das  Lied  von  der  Glocke  (Chamberlin).    Vocabulary.     20  cts. 

Schiller's  Jungfrau  von  Orleans  (Wells).    Illus.    60  cts.    Vocab.,  70  cts. 

Schiller's  Maria  Stuart  (Rhoades).    Illustrated.    60  cts.    Vocab.,  70  cts. 

Schiller's  Wilhelm  Tell  (Deering).    Illustrated.     50  cts.    Vocab.,  70  cts. 

Schiller's  Ballads  (Johnson).    60  cts. 

Baumbach's  Der  Sckwiegersohn  (Bernhardt).    30  cts.    Vocabulary,  40  cts. 

Arnold's  Fritz  auf  Ferien  (Spanhoofd).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Heyse's  Das  Madchen  von  Treppi  (Joynes).    Vocab.  and  exercises.  30  cts. 

Stille  Wasser  (Bernhardt).     Three  tales.    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Sudermann's  Teja  (Ford).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Arnold's  Aprilwetter  (Fossler).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Gerstiacker's  Irrfahrten  (Sturm).    Vocabulary.    45  cts. 

Benedix's  Plautus  und  Terenz  ;  Der  Sonntagsjager  (Wells).    25  cts. 

Moser's  Kftpnickerstrasse  120  (Wells).    30  cts. 

Moser's  Der  Bibliothekar  (Wells).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Drei  kleine  Lustspiele.     Giinstige  Vorzeichen,  Der  Prozess,  Einer  mtis^ 
heiraten.     Edited  with  notes  by  Prof.  B.  W.  Wells.     30  cts. 

Helbig's  Kombdie  auf  der  Hochschole  (Wells).    30  cts. 
€tem*8  Die  Wiedertaufer  (Sturm).    Vocabulary.    00  cts. 


Ibeatb'6  /iDoOern  Xanouage  Seriea* 

INTERMEDIATE  GERMAN  TEXTS.     (Partial  List.) 

Schiller's  Geschichte  des  dreissigjahrigen  Krieges.  Book  III.  With 
notes  by  Professor  C.  W.  Prettyman,  Dickinson  College.     35  cts. 

Schiller's  Der  Geisterseher  (Joynes).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 

Arndt,  Deutsche  Patrioten  (Colwell).    Vocabulary.     30  cts. 

Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Mondan).    15  cts. 

Selections  for  Advanced  Sight  Translation  (Chamber lin).    15  cts. 

Aus  Herz  und  Welt.    Two  stories,  with  notes  by  Dr.  Wm.  Bernhardt.  25  cts. 

Novelletten-Bibliothek.  Vol.  I,  five  stories.  Vol.  II,  six  stories.  Selected 
and  edited  with  notes  by  Dr.  Wilhelm  Bernhardt.     Each,  35  cts. 

Unter  dem  Christbaum  (Bernhardt).     Notes.     35  cts. 

Hoffmann's  Historische  Erzahlungen  (Beresford-Webb).     Notes.    25  cts. 

Benedix's  Die  Hochzeitsreise  (Schiefferdecker).    25  cts. 

Stokl's  AUe  FUnf  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.     30  cts. 

Till  Eulenspiegel  (Betz).     Vocabulary.     30  cts. 

Wildenbruch's  Neid  (Prettyman).     Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Wildenbruch's  Das  Edle  Blut  (Schmidt).     Vocabulary.    25  cts. 

Wildenbruch's  Der  Letzte  (Schmidt).     Vocabulary.     30  cts. 

Wildenbruch's  Harold  (Eggert).     35  cts. 

Stifter's  Das  Haidedorf  ( Heller).    20  cts. 

Chamisso's  Peter  Schlemihl  (Primer).    25  cts. 

Eichendorff's  Aus  dem  Leben  eines  Taugenichts  (Osthaus).  Vocab.  45  cts. 

Heine's  Die  Harzreise  (Vos).     Vocabulary.    45  cts. 

Jensen's  Die  braune  Erica  (Joynes).     Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Lyrics  and  Ballads  (Hatfield).     75  cts. 

Meyer's  Gustav  Adolf s  Page  (Heller).    25  cts. 

Sudermann's  Johannes  (Schmidt).    35  cts. 

Sudermann's  Heimat  (Schmidt).    35  cts. 

Sudermann's  Der  Katzensteg  (Wells).    Abridged.    40  cts. 

Dahn's  Sigwalt  und  Sigridh  (Schmidt).    25  cts. 

Keller's  Romeo  und  Julia  auf  dem  Dorfe  (Adams).    30  cts. 

Hauff's  Lichtenstein  (Vogel).     Abridged.     75  cts. 

Bbhlau  Ratsmadelgeschichten  (Haevernick).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Keller's  Fahnlein  der  sieben  Aufrechten  (Howard).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 

Riehl's  Burg  Neideck  (Jonas).    Vocabulary  and  exercises.     35  cts. 

Lohmeyer's  Geissbub  von  Engelberg  (Bernhardt).     Vocabulary.     40  cts. 

Zschokke's  Das  Abenteuer  der  Neujahrsnacht  (Handschin).  Vocab.  35  cts. 

Zschokke's  Das  Wirtshaus  zu  Cransac  (Joynes).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 


t)eatb*5  /ll^o^etn  Xanguasc  Serlc0# 

ADVANCED  GERMAN  TEXTS. 

ScheffePs  Trompeter  von  Sakkingen  (Wenckebach).    Abridged.    50  cts. 

Scheffel's  Ekkehard  (Wenckebach).    Abridged.    55  cts. 

MSrike's  Mozart  auf  der  Reise  nach  Prag  (Howard).    35  cts. 

Freytag's  Soil  und  Haben  (Files).    Abridged.    55  cts. 

Fre3rtag's  Aus  dem  Staat  Friedrichs  des  Grossen  (Hagar).    25  cts. 

Freytag's  Aus  dem  Jahrhundert  des  grossen  Krieges  (Rhoades).    35  cts. 

Freytag's  Rittmeister  von  Alt-Rosen  (Hatfield).    50  cts. 

Fulda's  Der  Talisman  (Pretty man).    35  cts. 

KOmer's  Zriny  (Holzwarth).     35  cts. 

Lessing's  Minna  von  Bamhelm  (Primer).  60  cts.   With  vocabulary,  65  cts. 

Lessing's  Nathan  der  Weise  (Primer).    80  cts. 

Lessing's  Emilia  Galotti  (Winkler).    60  cts. 

Schiller's  Wallenstein's  Tod  (Eggert).    60  cts. 

Goethe's  Sesenheim  (Huss).     From  Dichtung  und  Wahrheit.    30  ctS. 

Goethe's  Meisterwerke  (Bernhardt).    $1.25. 

Goethe's  Dichtung  und  Wahrheit.     (I-IV).     Buchheim.    90  cts.. 

Goethe's  Hermann  und  Dorothea  (Hewett).     75  cts. 

Goethe's  Hermann  und  Dorothea  (Adams).     Vocabulary.    65  cts. 

Goethe's  Iphigenie  (Rhoades).    60  cts. 

Goethe's  Egmont  (Hatfield).    60  cts. 

Goethe's  Torquato  Tasso  (Thomas).    75  cts. 

Goethe's  Faust  (Thomas).    Part  I,  $1.15      Part  IT,  $1.50. 

Goethe's  Poems.  Selected  and  edited  by  Prof.  Harris,  Adelbert  College.  Qocts. 

Grillparzer's  Der  Traum,  ein  Leben  (Meyer).    40  cts. 

Ludwig's  Zwischen  Himmel  und  Erde  (Meyer).    55  cts. 

Heine's  Poems.    Selected  and  edited  by  Prof.  White.    75  cts, 

Tombo's  Deutsche  Reden.    90  cts. 

Walther's  Meereskunde.     (Scientific  German).     55  cts. 

Thomas's  German  Anthology;     $2.25. 

Hodges'  Scientific  German.     75  cts. 

Kayser's  Die  Elektronentheorie  (Wright).     20  cts. 

Lassar-Cohn's  Die  Chemie  im  taglichen  Leben  (Brooks).    45  ctS, 

Wagner's  Entwicklungslehre  (Wright).    30  cts. 

Helmholtz's  Populare  Vortrage  (Shumway).    55  cts. 

Wenckebach's  Deutsche  Literaturgeschichte.  Vol.  I  (to  iioo  a.d.)  5oct9» 

Wenckebach's  Meisterwerke  des  Mittelalters.    $1.26. 

Dahn's  Ein  Elampf  um  Rom  (Wenckebach).     Abridged.     55  cts. 


Ibeatb'5  /iDo&etn  Xanguage  Series* 

FRENCH  GRAMMARS  AND   READERS. 
Brace's  Grammaire  Frangaise.    ^1.15. 

Clarke's  Subjunctive  Mood.    An  inductive  treatise^  with  exercises.    50  cts. 
Edgren's  Compendious  French  Grammar.    $1.15.     Parti.    35  cts. 
Fontaine's  Livre  de  Lecture  et  de  Conversation.    90  cts. 
Fraser  and  Squair's  French  Grammar.    $1.15. 
Fraser  and  Squair's  Abridged  French  Grammar.    |i.io. 
Fraser  and  Squair's  Elementary  French  Grammar.    90  cts. 
Grandgent's  Essentials  of  French  Grammar,    ^i.oo. 
Grandgent's  Short  French  Grammar.     75  cts. 

Roux's  Lessons  in  Grammar  and  Composition,  based  on  Colomba.    18  cts. 
Hennequin's  French  Modal  Auxiliaries.    With  exercises.    50  cts. 
Houghton's  French  by  Reading.    ^1.15. 
Mansion's  First  Year  French.     For  young  beginners.    50  cts. 
Methode  Henin.    50  cts. 
Brace's  Lectures  Faciles.    60  cts. 
Brace's  Dictees  Frangaises.    30  cts. 
Fontaine's  Lectures  Courantes.    ^i.oo, 
Giese's  French  Anecdotes.    00  cts. 

Hotchkiss'  Le  Primer  Livre  de  Frangais.    Boards.    35  cts. 
Bowen's  First  Scientific  Reader.    90  cts. 
Davies'  Elementary  Scientific  French  Reader.    40  cts. 
Lyon  and  Larpent's  Primary  French  Translation  Book.    60  cts. 
Snow  and  Lebon's  Easy  French.    60  cts. 
Super's  Preparatory  French  Reader.    70  cts. 
Bouvet's  Exercises  in  Syntax  and  Composition.     75  cts. 
Storr's  Hints  on  French  Sjmtax.     With  exerdses.    30  cts. 
Brigham's  French  Composition.    12  cts. 
Comfort's  Exercises  in  French  Prose  Composition.    30  cts. 
Grandgent's  French  Composition.     50  cts. 
Grandgent's  Materials  for  French  Composition.    Each,  12  cts, 
Kimball's  Materials  for  French  Composition.    Each,  12  cts. 
Mansion's  Exercises  in  Composition.     160  pages.    60  cts. 
Marcou's  French  Review  Exercises.    25  cts. 

Prisoners  of  the  Temple  (Guerber).     For  French  Composition.    25  cts. 
Story  of  Cupid  and  Psyche  (Guerber).    For  French  Composition.     18  cts. 
Heath's  French  Dictionary.    Retail  price,  ^1.50. 


Ibeatb'5  /lDo5ern  Xanguage  Series* 

ELEMENTARY  FRENCH  TEXTS. 
Easy  Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Mansion).    15  cts. 
Segur's  Les  Malheurs  de  Sophie  (White).     Vocabulary.    45  cts. 
French  Fairy  Tales  (Joynes).     Vocabulary  and  exercises.    35  cts, 
Saintine's  Picciola.  With  notes  and  vocabulary  by  Prof.  O.  B.  Super.  45  cts. 
Mairet's  La  Tache  du  Petit  Pierre  (Super).     Vocabulary.    35  cts. 
Bruno^S  Les  Enfants  Patriotes  (Lyon).     Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Bruno's  Tour  de  la  France  par  deux  Enfants  (Fontaine).  Vocabulary.  45  cts, 
Verne's  L'Exp6dition  de  la  Jeune  Hardie  (Lyon).     Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Gorvais  Un  Cas  de  Conscience  (Horsley).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Genin's  Le  Petit  Tailleur  Bouton  (Lyon).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Assolant's  Aventure  du  Celebre  Pierrot  (Pain).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Assolant's  Recits  de  la  Vieille  France.     Notes  by  E.  B.  Wauton.    25  cts. 
MuUer's  Grandes  Decouvertes  Modemes.    25  cts. 
Recits  de  Guerre  et  de  Revolution  (Minssen).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Bedolliere's  La  Mere  Michel  et  son  Chat  (Lyon).    Vocabulary.     25  cts. 
Legouve  and  Labiche's  Cigale  chez  les  Fourmis  (Witherby).    20  cts. 
Labiche's  La  Grammaire  (Levi).    Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
Labiche's  Le  Voyage  de  M.  Perrichon  (Wells).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Labiche's  La  Poudre  aux  Yeux  (Wells).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Lemaitre,  Contes  (Rensch).    Vocabulary.     30  cts. 
Dumas's  Due  de  Beaufort  (Kitchen).    Vocabulary.    30  cts. 
Dumas's  Monte-Cristo  (Spiers).     Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Berthet's  Le  Facte  de  Famine.     With  notes  by  B.  B.  Dickinson.    25  cts. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  Le  Consent  de  1813  (Super).    Vocabulary.    45  cts. 
Erckmann-Chatrian's  L'Histoire  d'un  Paysan  (Lyon).    25  cts. 
France's  Abeille  (Lebon).    25  cts. 

Moinaux's  Les  deux  Sourds  (Spiers).     Vocabulary.    25  cts. 
La  Main  Malheureuse  (Guerber).    Vocabulary.     25  cts. 
Enault's  Le  Chien  du  Capitaine  (Fontaine).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 
Trois  Contes  Choisis  par  Daudet  (Sanderson).     Vocabulary.     20  cts. 
Desnoyer's  Jean-Paul  Choppart  (Fontaine).     Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Selections  for  Sight  Translation  (Bruce).    15  cts. 
Laboulaye's  Contes  Bleus  (Fontaine).     Vocabulary.     35  cts. 
Malot's  Sans  Famille  (Spiers).    Vocabulary.    40  cts. 
Meilhac  and  Halevy's  L'Ete  de  la  St.-Martin  (Franjois).  Vocab.    35  cts. 


t>catb's  jfflDobern  Xanguage  Series* 

INTERMEDIATE  FRENCH  TEXTS.     (Partial  List.) 

Beaumarchais*s  Le  Barbier  de  Seville  (Spiers).    25  cts. 

Erckmann-Chatriaii*s  Waterloo  (Super).    35  cts. 

About's  Le  Roi  des  Montagnes  (Logie).    40  cts.     Vocabulary,  50  cts. 

Pailleron's  Le  Monde  ou  Ton  s'ennuie  (Pendleton).    30  cts. 

Historiettes  Modemes  (Fontaine).    Vol.  I.    60  cts. 

Historiettes  Modemes.    Vol.  II.    35  cts. 

Pleura  de  France  (Fontaine).    35  cts. 

French  Lyrics  (Bowen).    60  cts. 

Loti's  Pecheur  d'Islande  (Super).    40  cts.  V^ 

Loti's  Ramuntcho  (Fontaine).    30  cts. 

Sandeau*s  Mile,  de  la  Seigliere  (Warren).    30  cts. 

Souvestre's  Le  Mari  de  Mme.  Solange  (Super).    20  cts. 

Souvestre*s  Les  Confessions  d'un  Ouvrier  (Super).    25  cts. 

Souvestre*s  Un  Philosophe  sous  les  Toits  (Fraser).  50  cts.  Vocab.,  55  cts, 

Augier's  Le  Gendre  de  M.  Poirier  (Wells).    25  cts. 

Scribe's  Bataille  de  Dames  (Wells).    25  cts. 

Scribe's  Le  Verre  d'eau  (Eggert).    30  cts. 

Merimee's  Colomba  (Fontaine).    35  cts.     With  vocabulary.    45  cts. 

Merimee's  Chronique  du  Regne  de  Charles  IX  (Desages).    25  cts. 

Musset's  Pierre  et  Camille  (Super).    20  cts. 

Verne's  Tour  du  Monde  en  quatre  vingts  jours  (Edgren).    35  cts. 

Verne's  Vingt  mille  lieues  sous  la  mer  (Fontaine).    Vocabulary.    45  cts. 

Sand's  La  Mare  au  Diable  (Sumichrast).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Sand's  La  Petite  Fadette  (Super).    Vocabulary.    35  cts. 

Sept  Grands  Auteurs  du  XIX®  Si^cle  (Fortier).    Lectures,  60  cts. 

Vigny's  Cinq-Mars  (Sankey).     Abridged.    60  cts. 

Vigny's  Le  Cachet  Rouge  (Fortier).    20  cts. 

Vigny's  Le  Canne  de  Jonc  (Spiers).    40  cts. 

Halevy's  L'Abbe  Constantin  (Logie).    30  cts.    Vocab.    40  '^ts. 

Halevy's  Un  Mariage  d' Amour    (Hawkins).    25  cts. 

Renan's  Souvenirs  d'Enfance  et  de  Jeunesse  (Babbitt).    7$  cts. 

Thier's  Expedition  de  Bonaparte  en  Egypte  (Fabregou).    30  cts, 

Gautier's  Jettatura  (Schinz).    30  cts. 

Guerber's  Marie-Louise.    25  cts. 

Zola's  La  Debacle  (Wells).    Abridged.    60  cts. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STA3VIPED  BELOW 


AN  INITIAL  FINE  OP  25  CENTS 

•  WHLL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


DEC    7   1837 


i  iOct^ooB  n 


REC'D  LD 


-w^ 


OCT  9    1956 


MAR  22  1939 


210ct'6QDf 


J^egJJ^^ 


vm^ 


il 


JAM 


jt3 


JUl^^  -• 


^'*- 20ct'6^MH 


jCT  U1M5 


REC^D  LD 


JAN     101947 


JUN2  3'64-3PM 


JAN  11  1333      5 


19Jun'52Flt 


imr 


REC'D  LD 


^'66-lQPM 


LD  21-95m-7,'37 


X" 


926697 


■to 


©43 

ra43 

THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


